Manual de Usuario CE-QUAL-W2

CE-QUAL-W2: A Two-Dimensional,
Laterally Averaged, Hydrodynamic

and Water Quality Model, Version 3.71
User Manual
by
Thomas M. Cole
Environmental Laboratory
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Waterways Experiment Station
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
and
Scott A. Wells
Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
Portland State University
Portland, OR 97207-0751
Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Portland State Univeristy
Portland, OR 97207-0751
Supersedes Instruction Report E-95-1
March 2013
Revision June 2014
Prepared for U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Washington, DC 20314-1000
Contents
Contents ......................................................................................................................................... ii
Preface ......................................................................................................................................... xiii
List of Figures ............................................................................................................................. xiv
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................ xx
Model Release Package .......................................................................................................... xxii
Typical Input Files ............................................................................................................. xxii
Compiler Options and Questions ....................................................................................... xxiii
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1
Model Overview ......................................................................................................................... 1
Terminology used in the CE-QUAL-W2 model ..................................................................... 1
Model Background .................................................................................................................... 2
Manual ........................................................................................................................................ 9
2 Capabilities and Limitations.................................................................................................... 10
Capabilities ............................................................................................................................... 10
Potential Limitations ................................................................................................................ 12
Theoretical ............................................................................................................................ 12
Numerical.............................................................................................................................. 13
Input Data ............................................................................................................................. 14
3 Model Application ..................................................................................................................... 15
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 15
Data Preparation ................................................................................................................. 15
Geometric Data ................................................................................................................ 15
Initial Conditions .............................................................................................................. 19
Boundary Conditions ....................................................................................................... 20
Hydraulic Parameters (required) ................................................................................... 22
Kinetic Parameters (optional) ........................................................................................ 22
Calibration Data (required) ............................................................................................. 22
Simulations ............................................................................................................................... 27
Model Preparation ............................................................................................................... 27
Calibration............................................................................................................................. 27
Lake/Reservoir ................................................................................................................. 31
Water budget ................................................................................................................ 31
Hydrodynamics and Temperature............................................................................. 33
Water Quality................................................................................................................ 45
Estuary .............................................................................................................................. 68
Boundary conditions .................................................................................................... 68
Water surface elevations and flows .......................................................................... 68
Time of Travel .............................................................................................................. 71
Temperature and Salinity ........................................................................................... 71
CONTENTS
Water Quality................................................................................................................ 74
River .................................................................................................................................. 76
Channel Slope.............................................................................................................. 76
Channel bottom................................................................................................................ 77
Hydrodynamics and Temperature............................................................................. 83
Water Quality................................................................................................................ 88
Summary........................................................................................................................... 97
References ................................................................................................................................... 98
CE-QUAL-W2 Publications ...................................................................................................... 122
Peer Reviewed Publications and Proceedings ................................................................. 122
Presentations at Scientific Meetings .................................................................................. 126
Reports and Miscellaneous Articles ................................................................................... 133
Appendix A Hydrodynamics and Transport ......................................................................... A-1
Coordinate System................................................................................................................ A-1
Turbulent Time-Averaged Equations ................................................................................. A-2
Continuity ............................................................................................................................ A-3
x-Momentum Equation ..................................................................................................... A-3
y-Momentum Equation ..................................................................................................... A-4
z-Momentum Equation ..................................................................................................... A-5
Coriolis Effect ..................................................................................................................... A-6
Adjusting the Coordinate System ....................................................................................... A-6
Governing Equations for General Coordinate System .................................................... A-9
Continuity ............................................................................................................................ A-9
x-Momentum Equation ..................................................................................................... A-9
y-Momentum Equation ..................................................................................................... A-9
z-Momentum Equation ..................................................................................................... A-9
Simplification of z-Momentum Equation ............................................................................ A-9
Lateral Averaging ................................................................................................................ A-10
Continuity Equation ......................................................................................................... A-11
x-Momentum Equation ................................................................................................... A-13
Shear stresses ................................................................................................................. A-15
Summary of Laterally Averaged Equations ..................................................................... A-15
Continuity Equation ......................................................................................................... A-15
x-Momentum Equation ................................................................................................... A-15
z-Momentum Equation ................................................................................................... A-15
Simplification of Pressure Term ........................................................................................ A-16
Free Water Surface ............................................................................................................. A-17
Equation of State ................................................................................................................. A-20
Summary of Governing Equations .................................................................................... A-20
Branch Linkage with Internal Head Boundary Conditions ............................................ A-21
Linkage of Mainstem Branches ..................................................................................... A-21
Linkage of Tributary Branches .......................................................................................... A-23
Longitudinal Momentum ................................................................................................. A-24
Cross-shear of Tributary Inflow ..................................................................................... A-25
River Basin Theory.............................................................................................................. A-25
Free-Water Surface Numerical Solution ...................................................................... A-26
Horizontal Momentum Numerical Solution .................................................................. A-31
Explicit Solution............................................................................................................ A-31
iii
CONTENTS
Implicit Solution ............................................................................................................ A-33
Computation of Initial Water Surface Slope and Velocity Field for River ................... A-34
Turbulent Advection-Diffusion Equation .......................................................................... A-36
Water Quality Transport ..................................................................................................... A-38
Determination of Dz and Dx ........................................................................................... A-41
Numerical Solution .......................................................................................................... A-41
Non-Uniform Grid QUICKEST Formulation ............................................................. A-44
ULTIMATE/QUICKEST Numerical Transport Solution Scheme .......................... A-46
Vertical Implicit Transport ........................................................................................... A-54
Auxiliary Functions .............................................................................................................. A-55
Surface Shear Stress ...................................................................................................... A-55
Bottom Shear Stress ....................................................................................................... A-61
Vertical Shear Stress ...................................................................................................... A-61
Formulation................................................................................................................... A-65
RNG Turbulent Eddy Viscosity Formulation ............................................................ A-67
Nikuradse Formulation................................................................................................ A-69
Parabolic Formulation ................................................................................................. A-70
W2N Formulation ......................................................................................................... A-71
TKE Formulation .......................................................................................................... A-71
Algorithm ................................................................................................................... A-72
Explicit Vertical Convection .................................................................................... A-74
Implicit Vertical Convection .................................................................................... A-78
Boundary and initial conditions for k- model ...................................................... A-80
Effect of Vertical Layer Numbers on Vertical Turbulence ..................................... A-85
Longitudinal Shear Stress .............................................................................................. A-89
Hydraulic Structures ........................................................................................................ A-89
Internal Weirs ............................................................................................................... A-93
Water Level Control .................................................................................................... A-93
Outlet Structures .......................................................................................................... A-93
Spillways/Weirs ............................................................................................................ A-96
Gates ........................................................................................................................... A-103
Branch Momentum Exchange ..................................................................................... A-106
Lateral Inflows ................................................................................................................ A-107
Heat Exchange .............................................................................................................. A-108
Surface Heat Exchange............................................................................................ A-108
Evaporation............................................................................................................. A-110
Equilibrium Temperature ...................................................................................... A-112
Sediment Heat Exchange ........................................................................................ A-113
Dynamic Shading .......................................................................................................... A-113
Solar Altitude and Azimuth ....................................................................................... A-113
Topographic Shading ................................................................................................ A-116
Vegetative Shading ................................................................................................... A-116
Data Requirements ................................................................................................... A-119
Ice Cover......................................................................................................................... A-120
Initial Ice Formation ................................................................................................... A-121
Air-Ice Flux Boundary Condition and Ice Surface Temperature
Approximation.......................................................................................................... A-122
iv
CONTENTS
Absorbed Solar Radiation by Water Under Ice ..................................................... A-122
Ice Melt at Air-Ice Interface ...................................................................................... A-123
Ice-Water Flux Boundary Condition Formulation ................................................. A-123
Freezing Temperature of Ice ................................................................................... A-124
Density ............................................................................................................................ A-124
Selective Withdrawal..................................................................................................... A-125
Sediment Resuspension .................................................................................................. 127
Appendix B Water Quality ....................................................................................................... B-1
Overview of Kinetic Source/Sink Term .............................................................................. B-1
Generic Constituent .............................................................................................................. B-3
Conservative Tracer .......................................................................................................... B-4
Coliform Bacteria ............................................................................................................... B-4
Water Age or Residence time ......................................................................................... B-5
Inorganic Suspended Solids ................................................................................................ B-6
Total Dissolved Solids or Salinity ........................................................................................ B-7
Labile DOM ............................................................................................................................ B-7
Refractory DOM ..................................................................................................................... B-8
Labile Particulate Organic Matter ....................................................................................... B-9
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter .............................................................................. B-10
Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand (CBOD) ................................................. B-11
Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand - Phosphorus (CBODP) ..................... B-13
Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand - Nitrogen (CBODN) ........................... B-14
Algae ..................................................................................................................................... B-15
Epiphyton .............................................................................................................................. B-20
Macrophytes ......................................................................................................................... B-24
Modeling Frictional Force ....................................................................................... B-27
Modeling Porosity .................................................................................................... B-28
Changes to Governing Equations ......................................................................... B-28
Zooplankton.......................................................................................................................... B-30
Phosphorus .......................................................................................................................... B-32
Ammonium ........................................................................................................................... B-35
Nitrate-Nitrite ........................................................................................................................ B-37
Dissolved Silica.................................................................................................................... B-39
Organic Matter Variable Stoichiometry ............................................................................ B-40
Labile Dissolved Organic Matter Phosphorus (LDOM-P) ...................................... B-41
Refractory Dissolved Organic Matter Phosphorus (RDOM-P) .............................. B-41
Labile Particulate Organic Matter Phosphorus (LPOM-P) ..................................... B-42
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter Phosphorus (RPOM-P) ............................ B-43
Labile Dissolved Organic Matter Nitrogen (LDOM-N) ............................................ B-43
Refractory Dissolved Organic Matter Nitrogen (RDOM-N) .................................... B-44
Labile Particulate Organic Matter Nitrogen (LPOM-N) ........................................... B-44
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter Nitrogen (RPOM-N) .................................. B-45
Particulate Biogenic Silica.................................................................................................. B-46
Total Iron................................................................................................................................... 47
Dissolved Oxygen ............................................................................................................... B-48
River Reaeration Equations ........................................................................................... B-50
Lake Reaeration Equations ........................................................................................... B-53
Estuarine Equations ........................................................................................................ B-57
CONTENTS
Reaeration Temperature Dependence ........................................................................ B-58
Dam Reaeration............................................................................................................... B-59
Small Dams or Weirs .................................................................................................. B-59
Large Dam Spillways/Gates....................................................................................... B-60
DO Impacts of Spillways............................................................................................. B-61
Dissolved Oxygen Saturation Computations........................................................... B-62
Sediments ............................................................................................................................. B-62
Sediment Variable Stoichiometry and Kinetics ............................................................... B-65
Sediment Phosphorus .................................................................................................... B-65
Sediment Nitrogen........................................................................................................... B-66
Sediment Carbon............................................................................................................. B-66
Total Inorganic Carbon ....................................................................................................... B-67
Alkalinity ................................................................................................................................ B-70
pH and Carbonate Species ................................................................................................ B-70
Temperature Rate Multipliers ............................................................................................ B-74
Appendix C Input/Output Data Description .......................................................................... C-1
Input Files ............................................................................................................................... C-1
Control File ......................................................................................................................... C-1
Title (TITLE C)................................................................................................................ C-2
Grid Dimensions (GRID)............................................................................................... C-3
Inflow/Outflow Dimensions (IN/OUTFLOW) .............................................................. C-4
Constituent Dimensions (CONSTITUENTS) ............................................................. C-5
Miscellaneous (MISCELL) ............................................................................................ C-6
Time Control (TIME CON) ............................................................................................ C-8
Timestep Control (DLT CON) ...................................................................................... C-9
Timestep Date (DLT DATE) ....................................................................................... C-10
Maximum Timestep (DLT MAX) ................................................................................ C-11
Timestep Fraction (DLT FRN) ................................................................................... C-12
Timestep Limitations (DLT LIMIT)............................................................................. C-13
Branch Geometry (BRANCH G) ................................................................................ C-14
Waterbody Definition (LOCATION)........................................................................... C-16
Initial Conditions (INIT CND) ..................................................................................... C-18
Calculations (CALCULAT) ......................................................................................... C-21
Dead Sea (DEAD SEA) .............................................................................................. C-23
Interpolation (INTERPOL) .......................................................................................... C-24
Heat Exchange (HEAT EXCH) .................................................................................. C-26
Ice Cover (ICE COVER) ............................................................................................. C-28
Transport Scheme (TRANSPORT)........................................................................... C-30
Hydraulic Coefficients (HYD COEF) ......................................................................... C-31
Vertical Eddy Viscosity (EDDY VISC) ...................................................................... C-33
Number of Structures (N STRUC) ............................................................................ C-36
Structure Interpolation (STR INT) ............................................................................. C-37
Structure Top Selective Withdrawal Limit (STR TOP) ........................................... C-38
Structure Bottom Selective Withdrawal Limit (STR BOT) ..................................... C-39
Sink Type (SINK TYPE) ............................................................................................. C-40
Structure Elevation (E STRUC) ................................................................................. C-41
Structure Width (W STRUC) ...................................................................................... C-42
vi
CONTENTS
Pipes (PIPES) .............................................................................................................. C-43
Upstream Pipe (PIPE UP) .......................................................................................... C-46
Downstream Pipe (PIPE DOWN).............................................................................. C-47
Spillways (SPILLWAYS) ............................................................................................. C-48
Upstream Spillways (SPILL UP) ............................................................................... C-51
Downstream Spillways (SPILL DOWN) ................................................................... C-52
Spillway Dissolved Gas (SPILL GAS) ...................................................................... C-53
Gates (GATES) ............................................................................................................ C-56
Gate Weir (GATE WEIR)............................................................................................ C-60
Upstream Gate (GATE UP) ....................................................................................... C-62
Downstream Gate (GATE DOWN) ........................................................................... C-63
Gate Dissolved Gas (GATE GAS) ............................................................................ C-64
Pumps 1 (PUMPS 1) ................................................................................................... C-67
Pumps 2 (PUMPS 2) ................................................................................................... C-70
Internal Weir Segment Location (WEIR SEG) ........................................................ C-71
Internal Weir Top Layer (WEIR TOP)....................................................................... C-73
Internal Weir Bottom Layer (WEIR BOT) ................................................................. C-74
Withdrawal Interpolation (WD INT) ........................................................................... C-75
Withdrawal Segment (WD SEG) ............................................................................... C-76
Withdrawal Elevation (WD ELEV) ............................................................................. C-77
Withdrawal Top Layer (WD TOP) ............................................................................. C-78
Withdrawal Bottom Layer (WD BOT) ....................................................................... C-79
Tributary Inflow Placement (TRIB PLACE) ............................................................. C-80
Tributary Interpolation (TRIB INT)............................................................................. C-81
Tributary Segment (TRIB SEG) ................................................................................ C-82
Tributary Inflow Top Elevation (TRIB TOP) ............................................................. C-83
Tributary Inflow Bottom Elevation (ELEV BOT) ...................................................... C-84
Distributed Tributaries (DST TRIB) ........................................................................... C-85
Hydrodynamic Output Control (HYD PRINT) .......................................................... C-86
Snapshot Print (SNP PRINT) .................................................................................... C-88
Snapshot Dates (SNP DATE).................................................................................... C-89
Snapshot Frequency (SNP FREQ) ........................................................................... C-90
Snapshot Segments (SNP SEG) .............................................................................. C-91
Screen Print (SCR PRNT).......................................................................................... C-92
Screen Dates (SCR DATE)........................................................................................ C-93
Screen Frequency (SCR FREQ) ............................................................................... C-94
Profile Plot (PRF PLOT) ............................................................................................. C-95
Profile Date (PRF DATE) ........................................................................................... C-96
Profile Frequency (PRF FREQ)................................................................................. C-97
Profile Segment (PRF SEG) ...................................................................................... C-98
Spreadsheet Profile Plot (SPR PLOT) ..................................................................... C-99
Spreadsheet Profile Date (SPR DATE) ................................................................. C-100
Spreadsheet Profile Frequency (SPR FREQ)....................................................... C-101
Spreadsheet Profile Segment (SPR SEG) ............................................................ C-102
Vector Plot (VPL PLOT) ........................................................................................... C-103
Vector Plot Date (VPL DATE).................................................................................. C-104
Vector Plot Frequency (VPL FREQ) ....................................................................... C-105
Contour Plot (CPL PLOT) ........................................................................................ C-106
vii
CONTENTS
Contour Plot Dates (CPL DATE) ............................................................................. C-108
Contour Plot Frequency (CPL FREQ) .................................................................... C-109
Kinetic Flux Output (FLUXES) ................................................................................. C-110
Kinetic Flux Date (KFL DATE) ................................................................................. C-111
Kinetic Flux Frequency (FLX FREQ) ...................................................................... C-112
Time Series Plot (TSR PLOT) ................................................................................. C-113
Time Series Date (TSR DATE) ............................................................................... C-114
Time Series Frequency (TSR FREQ)..................................................................... C-115
Time Series Segment (TSR SEG) .......................................................................... C-116
Time Series Elevation (TSR ELEV) ........................................................................ C-117
Withdrawal Output (WITH OUT) ............................................................................. C-118
Withdrawal Output Date (WDO DATE) .................................................................. C-120
Withdrawal Output Frequency (WDO FREQ) ....................................................... C-121
Withdrawal Output Segment (WITH SEG) ............................................................ C-122
Restart (RESTART) .................................................................................................. C-123
Restart Date (RSO DATE) ....................................................................................... C-124
Restart Frequency (RSO FREQ) ............................................................................ C-125
Constituent Computations (CST COMP) ............................................................... C-126
Active Constituents (CST ACTIVE) ........................................................................ C-128
Derived Constituents (CST DERIVE) ..................................................................... C-130
Constituent Fluxes (CST FLUX) .............................................................................. C-132
Constituent Initial Concentration (CST ICON) ...................................................... C-134
Constituent Output (CST PRINT) ............................................................................ C-136
Inflow Active Constituent Control (CIN CON) ....................................................... C-138
Tributary Active Constituent Control (CTR CON) ................................................. C-140
Distributed Trib Active Constituent (CDT CON).................................................... C-142
Precipitation Active Constituent Control (CPR CON) .......................................... C-144
Extinction Coefficient (EX COEF) ........................................................................... C-146
Algal Extinction (ALG EX) ........................................................................................ C-149
Zooplankton Extinction (ZOO EX)........................................................................... C-150
Macrophyte Extinction (MAC EX) ........................................................................... C-151
Generic Constituent (GENERIC)............................................................................. C-152
Suspended Solids (S SOLIDS) ............................................................................... C-154
Algal Rates (ALGAL RATE) ..................................................................................... C-155
Algal Temperature Rate Coefficients (ALG TEMP) ............................................. C-169
Algal Stoichiometry (ALG STOICH) ........................................................................ C-171
Epiphyte/Periphyton Control (EPIPHYTE)............................................................. C-174
Epiphyte/Periphyton Print (EPI PRINT) ................................................................. C-175
Epiphyte/Periphyton Initial Density (EPI INI) ......................................................... C-176
Epiphyte/Periphyton Rate (EPI RATE)................................................................... C-177
Epiphyte/Periphyton Half-Saturation (EPI HALF) ................................................. C-178
Epiphyte/Periphyton Temperature Rate Coefficients (EPI TEMP) .................... C-180
Epiphyte/Periphyton Stoichiometry (EPI STOICH) .............................................. C-182
Zooplankton Rate (ZOOP RATE) ........................................................................... C-183
Zooplankton Algal Preference (ZOOP ALGP) ...................................................... C-184
Zooplankton Zooplankton Preference (ZOOP ZOOP)......................................... C-185
Zooplankton Temperature Rate Coefficients (ZOOP TEMP) ............................. C-186
viii
CONTENTS
Zooplankton Stoichiometry (ZOOP STOICH) ....................................................... C-188
Macrophyte Control (MACROPHYT) ...................................................................... C-189
Macrophyte Print (MAC PRINT) .............................................................................. C-190
Macrophyte Initial Concentration (MAC INI) .......................................................... C-191
Macrophyte Rate (MAC RATE) ............................................................................... C-192
Macrophyte Sediments (MAC SED) ....................................................................... C-194
Macrophyte Distribution (MAC DIST) ..................................................................... C-195
Macrophyte Drag (MAC DRAG) .............................................................................. C-196
Macrophyte Temperature Rate Coefficients (MAC TEMP) ................................. C-197
Macrophyte Stoichiometry (MAC STOICH) ........................................................... C-199
Dissolved Organic Matter (DOM) ............................................................................ C-200
Particulate Organic Matter (POM)........................................................................... C-201
Organic Matter Stoichiometry (OM STOICH) ........................................................ C-203
Organic Matter Temperature Rate Multipliers (OM RATE) ................................. C-204
Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand (CBOD) ....................................... C-205
CBOD Stoichiometry (CBOD STOICH) ................................................................. C-206
Inorganic Phosphorus (PHOSPHOR) .................................................................... C-207
Ammonium (AMMONIUM) ....................................................................................... C-208
Ammonium Temperature Rate Multipliers (NH4 RATE)...................................... C-210
Nitrate (NITRATE) ..................................................................................................... C-211
Nitrate Temperature Rate Multipliers (NO3 RATE) .............................................. C-212
Silica (SILICA) ............................................................................................................ C-213
Iron (IRON) ................................................................................................................. C-214
Sediment Carbon Dioxide Release (SED CO2) ................................................... C-215
Oxygen Stoichiometry 1 (STOICH 1) ..................................................................... C-216
Oxygen Limit (O2 LIMIT) .......................................................................................... C-221
Sediment Compartment (SEDIMENT) ................................................................... C-222
SOD Temperature Rate Multipliers (SOD RATE) ................................................ C-224
Zero-Order Sediment Oxygen Demand (S DEMAND) ........................................ C-225
Reaeration (REAERAT)............................................................................................ C-226
Restart Input Filename (RSI FILE) ......................................................................... C-230
Withdrawal Filename (QWD FILE) ......................................................................... C-231
Gate Outflow Filename (QGT FILE) ....................................................................... C-232
Wind Sheltering Filename (WSC FILE) ................................................................. C-233
Dynamic Shading Filename (SHD FILE) ............................................................... C-234
Bathymetry Filename (BTH FILE) ........................................................................... C-235
Meteorology Filename (MET FILE)......................................................................... C-236
Light Extinction Filename (EXT FILE) .................................................................... C-237
Vertical Profile Filename (VPR FILE) ..................................................................... C-238
Longitudinal Profile Filename (LPR FILE) ............................................................. C-239
Branch Inflow Filename (QIN FILE)........................................................................ C-240
Branch Inflow Temperature Filename (TIN FILE) ................................................ C-241
Branch Inflow Constituent Filename (CIN FILE)................................................... C-242
Branch Outflow Filename (QOT FILE) ................................................................... C-243
ix
CONTENTS
Tributary Inflow Filename (QTR FILE) ................................................................... C-244
Tributary Inflow Temperature Filename (TTR FILE) ............................................ C-245
Tributary Inflow Concentration Filename (CTR FILE).......................................... C-246
Distributed Tributary Inflow Filename (QDT FILE) ............................................... C-247
Distributed Tributary Inflow Temperature Filename (TDT FILE) ........................ C-248
Distributed Tributary Inflow Concentration Filename (CDT FILE) ..................... C-249
Precipitation Filename (PRE FILE) ......................................................................... C-250
Precipitation Temperature Filename (TPR FILE) ................................................. C-251
Precipitation Concentration Filename (CPR FILE)............................................... C-252
External Upstream Head Filename (EUH FILE) ................................................... C-253
External Upstream Head Temperature Filename (TUH FILE) ........................... C-254
External Upstream Head Concentration Filename (CUH FILE) ......................... C-255
External Downstream Head Filename (EDH FILE) .............................................. C-256
External Downstream Head Temperature Filename (TDH FILE) ...................... C-257
External Downstream Head Concentration Filename (CDH FILE).................... C-258
Snapshot Filename (SNP FILE) .............................................................................. C-259
Profile Plot Filename (PRF FILE)............................................................................ C-260
W2 Linkage Output Filename (VPL FILE) ............................................................. C-261
Contour Plot Filename (CPL FILE) ......................................................................... C-262
Spreadsheet Profile Plot Filename (SPR FILE) .................................................... C-263
Flux Filename (FLX FILE) ........................................................................................ C-264
Time Series Plot Filename (TSR FILE) .................................................................. C-265
Withdrawal Output Filename (WDO FILE) ............................................................ C-266
Sample Control Input File ......................................................................................... C-267
Bathymetry File .............................................................................................................. C-295
Comma Delimeted Bathymetry File Format .............................................................. C-301
Fish Habitat Volumes and Volume-Weighted Averages of Eutrophication State
Variables ...................................................................................................................... C-303
Fish habitat volumes ................................................................................................. C-304
Volume weighted segment and surface averages ............................................... C-308
Output of overall organic matter accumulation at the bottom of each layer
and summed for each segment ........................................................................... C-310
Automatic Port Selection and Reservoir Volumes at Specified Temperatures.... C-311
Temperature of outlet releases ............................................................................... C-311
Automatic selection of outlet port to control temperature .................................... C-312
Volume of Reservoir at a Temperature Threshold ............................................... C-318
Environmental Performance Criteria .......................................................................... C-318
Hypolimnetic Aeration ................................................................................................... C-323
Meteorology File ............................................................................................................ C-327
Dynamic Elevation for Structure Outflows ................................................................. C-329
Dynamic Pump Input File ............................................................................................. C-330
Dynamic Pipe Input File................................................................................................ C-331
Gate File ......................................................................................................................... C-332
Light Extinction File ....................................................................................................... C-335
Wind Sheltering Coefficient File .................................................................................. C-336
Shade Input File............................................................................................................. C-338
Branch Inflow File .......................................................................................................... C-344
x
CONTENTS
Branch Inflow Temperature File .................................................................................. C-345
Branch Inflow Constituent Concentration File ........................................................... C-346
Branch Outflow File ....................................................................................................... C-349
Withdrawal File .............................................................................................................. C-351
Tributary Inflow File ....................................................................................................... C-352
Tributary Inflow Temperature File ............................................................................... C-353
Tributary Inflow Concentration File ............................................................................. C-354
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow File ..................................................................... C-355
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow Temperature File ............................................. C-356
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow Concentration File ........................................... C-357
Branch Precipitation File .............................................................................................. C-358
Branch Precipitation Temperature File ...................................................................... C-359
Branch Precipitation Concentration File .................................................................... C-360
Branch External Upstream Head Elevation File ....................................................... C-361
Branch External Upstream Head Temperature File ................................................. C-362
Branch External Upstream Head Constituent Concentration File ......................... C-363
Branch External Downstream Head Elevation File .................................................. C-365
Branch External Downstream Head Temperature File ............................................ C-366
Branch External Downstream Head Concentration File .......................................... C-367
Vertical Profile File ........................................................................................................ C-368
Longitudinal Profile File ................................................................................................ C-370
Graph Input File ............................................................................................................. C-375
Output FilesSnapshot ....................................................................................................... C-377
Title Cards .................................................................................................................. C-377
Time Parameters ....................................................................................................... C-377
Meteorological Parameters ...................................................................................... C-378
Inflow/Outflow Parameters ....................................................................................... C-378
Balances ..................................................................................................................... C-380
Geometry .................................................................................................................... C-382
Water Surface ............................................................................................................ C-383
Temperature/Water Quality...................................................................................... C-383
Time Series .................................................................................................................... C-385
Preprocessor .................................................................................................................. C-388
Command-line working directory specification ..................................................... C-388
Output (pre.opt).......................................................................................................... C-388
Warning Messages (pre.wrn) .................................................................................. C-404
Error Messages (pre.err) .......................................................................................... C-405
Spreadsheet Profile Plot............................................................................................... C-406
Profile Plot ...................................................................................................................... C-407
Vector Plot ...................................................................................................................... C-411
Contour Plot ................................................................................................................... C-411
Kinetic Fluxes ................................................................................................................. C-414
Withdrawal Outflow ....................................................................................................... C-416
Flow Balance Output File ............................................................................................. C-417
Water Level Output File ................................................................................................ C-418
Run-time Warnings ....................................................................................................... C-419
Run-time Errors ............................................................................................................. C-421
Command-line working directory specification for w2 windows executable ......... C-424
xi
CONTENTS
xii
PREFACE
Preface
This manual documents the two-dimensional, laterally averaged, hydrodynamic and water quality
model CE-QUAL-W2. An earlier version of this manual was prepared in the Environmental Laboratory (EL), US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station (WES), Vicksburg, MS. Bonita
Niel and Dr. William Roper, CERD-C provided funding for the Version 3.1 manual under the Numerical Model Maintenance Program.
The principal investigator for the CE-QUAL-W2 and the User Manual was Mr. Thomas M. Cole
of the Water Quality and Contaminant Modeling Branch (WQCMB), Environmental Processes and
Effects Division (EPED), Environmental Laboratory. This report supercedes the earlier model version 3.6. Revisions to this manual since the V3.2 manual were made under the direction of Dr.
Scott Wells at Portland State University (PSU). Dr. Chris Berger at PSU contributed significantly
to V3.5. Dr. Bergers macrophyte algorithm was one of the many new features starting with V3.5.
The assistance of Dr. Robert Annear is also gratefully acknowledged. Samuel Gould, a Masters
student at PSU, contributed to the write-up and development of the k- turbulence model.
This report should be cited as follows:
Cole, T.M., and Wells, S. A. (2013) "CE-QUAL-W2: A two-dimensional, laterally averaged,
hydrodynamic and water quality model, version 3.71," Department of Civil and Environmental
Engineering, Portland State University, Portland, OR.
xiii
LIST OF FIGURES
List of Figures
Figure 1. Sample computational grid in the x-z plane showing active and inactive cells.
............................................................................................................................................... 17
Figure 2. Sample computational grid in the x-y plane showing cell numbering and
branch and water body connections. ............................................................................... 19
Figure 3. Allatoona Reservoir computed (lines) vs. observed (symbols) water surface
elevations for 1992, 1993, 1996, and 1997. .................................................................... 33
Figure 4. 1989 Pineflat Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. ................. 37
Figure 5. 1993 Pineflat Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. ................. 38
Figure 6. 1981 Bluestone Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. ............. 39
Figure 7. 1983 Bluestone Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. ............. 39
Figure 8. 1988 Richard B. Russell computed versus observed temperatures. ................ 40
Figure 9. 1994 Richard B. Russell computed versus observed temperatures. ................ 40
Figure 10. 1996 Richard B. Russell computed versus observed temperatures. .............. 41
Figure 11. Paintsville Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. .................... 42
Figure 12. 1992 Brownlee Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. ............ 43
Figure 13. 1995 Brownlee Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. ............ 43
Figure 14. C.J. Strike Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures. .................... 44
Figure 15. Allatoona Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. .............................................. 47
Figure 16. Brownlee Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. .............................................. 47
Figure 17. C.J. Strike Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ............................................ 48
Figure 18. DeGray Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ................................................. 48
Figure 19. Richard B. Russell Reservoir computed vs. observed DO, March through
June, 1988............................................................................................................................ 49
Figure 20. Richard B. Russell Reservoir computed vs. observed DO, June through
October, 1988. ..................................................................................................................... 49
Figure 21. 1996 Richard B. Russell computed vs. observed DO. ...................................... 50
Figure 22. Neely Henry Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ......................................... 50
Figure 23. J. Strom Thurmond Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ............................ 51
Figure 24. Monroe Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ................................................. 51
Figure 25. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ................................................... 52
Figure 26. Shepaug Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ............................................... 52
Figure 27. Shepaug Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ............................................... 53
Figure 28. Weiss Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. .................................................... 53
Figure 29. West Point Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ........................................... 54
Figure 30. Walter F. George Reservoir computed vs. observed DO. ................................ 54
Figure 31. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton biomass.................. 56
xiv
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 37. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton with wind rotated
90. ........................................................................................................................................ 60
Figure 38. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton with wind rotated 90
............................................................................................................................................... 61
90. ........................................................................................................................................ 61
90. ........................................................................................................................................ 62
90. ........................................................................................................................................ 62
90. ........................................................................................................................................ 63
Figure 43. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton with no inflowing
phytoplankton....................................................................................................................... 64
phytoplankton....................................................................................................................... 65
phytoplankton....................................................................................................................... 65
phytoplankton....................................................................................................................... 66
phytoplankton....................................................................................................................... 67
phytoplankton....................................................................................................................... 67
Figure 49. Water level data versus model predictions for Longview, WA during a 20-day
period in 1993. ..................................................................................................................... 70
Figure 50. Model flow predictions versus data for a 20-day period during 1998 at Beaver
Army Terminal near Quincy, OR....................................................................................... 70
Figure 51. Patuxent River computed versus observed vertical salinity distributions. ...... 72
Figure 52. Patuxent River computed versus observed vertical temperature distributions.
............................................................................................................................................... 73
Figure 53. Patuxent River computed versus observed nutrient, dissolved oxygen, and
chl a time series................................................................................................................... 75
Figure 54. Snake River water level comparison between CE-QUAL-W2 V3 and USGS
field data. .............................................................................................................................. 77
Figure 55. Channel vertical grid where every slope change is a new branch. .................. 77
Figure 56. Snake River channel slope determination............................................................ 78
Figure 57. Channel slope for the Bull Run system. ............................................................... 80
Figure 58. Vertical grid for W2 model of Bull Run Lower River. .......................................... 81
Figure 59. Bull Run River computed versus observed tracer at three stations
progressing downstream. ................................................................................................... 83
Figure 60. Spokane River computed versus observed water surface elevations at
Spokane................................................................................................................................ 84
Figure 61. Spokane River computed versus observed flows at the city of Spokane. ..... 84
Figure 62. Snake River computed versus observed temperature at six stations............. 86
xv
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 63. Computed versus observed temperatures for the Spokane River at Stateline
Bridge (upstream boundary), City of Spokane, Fort Wright Bridge, and Riverside
State Park. ............................................................................................................................ 87
Figure 64. Spokane River computed versus observed conductivity below Nine Mile
Dam. ...................................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 65. Snake River computed versus observed dissolved oxygen at six stations.... 89
Figure 66. Snake River computed versus observed orthophosphorus at six stations. ... 91
Figure 67. Snake River computed versus observed nitrate-nitrite at six stations. ........... 92
Figure 68. Snake River computed versus observed chlorophyll a at six stations. ........... 93
Figure 69. Snake River computed versus total organic carbon. ......................................... 94
Figure 70. Spokane River computed versus observed dissolved oxygen at Riverside
State Park. ............................................................................................................................ 94
Figure 71. Spokane River computed versus observed dissolved oxygen below Nine Mile
Dam. ...................................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 72. Spokane River computed versus observed pH upstream of Nine Mile Dam. 95
Figure 73. Spokane River computed versus observed nitrate-nitrite at Riverside State
Park. ...................................................................................................................................... 96
Figure 74. Spokane River computed versus observed soluble reactive phosphorus
below Nine Mile Dam. ......................................................................................................... 96
Figure 75. Spokane River computed versus observed total nitrogen below Nine Mile
Dam. ...................................................................................................................................... 97
Figure A-1. Definition sketch of coordinate system for governing equations where x is
oriented east, y is oriented north, and z is oriented upward. ...................................... A-1
Figure A-2. Definition sketch of turburlent time averaging for velocity. ........................... A-2
Figure A-3. Definition sketch of turbulent shear stresses in x-direction. ......................... A-4
Figure A-4. Sketch of turbulent shear stresses in y-direction. .......................................... A-5
Figure A-5. Sketch of turbulent shear stresses in z-direction. .......................................... A-6
Figure A-6. General coordinate system with z-axis compatible with original derivation of
W2 model. .......................................................................................................................... A-7
Figure A-7. Sketch of channel slope and coordinate system for W2 where the x-axis is
oriented along the channel slope. ................................................................................... A-8
Figure A-8. Lateral average and deviation from lateral average components of
longitudinal velocity. ........................................................................................................ A-11
Figure A-9. Schematization for simplification of pressure term. ...................................... A-16
Figure A-10. Coordinate system without channel slope. ................................................. A-18
Figure A-11. Coordinate system with channel slope. ....................................................... A-18
Figure A-12. Definition sketch for channel slope. ............................................................. A-21
Figure A-13. Computational grid variable definitions for arbitrary channel slope. ....... A-22
Figure A-14. Transfer of mass and momentum between branches with unequal vertical
grid spacing. ..................................................................................................................... A-23
Figure A-15. Linkage of tributary branch coming in at an angle to main branch. .......... A-23
Figure A-16. Schematic of x and y velocity components. ................................................. A-24
Figure A-17. Velocity variability with time. .......................................................................... A-36
Figure A-18. Concentration variability with time. ............................................................... A-36
Figure A-19. Lateral average of the velocity field.............................................................. A-38
Figure A-20. Lateral average of the concentration field. ................................................. A-39
Figure A-21. Variable locations in computational grid. ..................................................... A-42
xvi
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure A-22. ULTIMATE schematization for positive flow. .............................................. A-47
Figure A-23. ULTIMATE schematization for negative flow. ............................................. A-48
Figure A-24. Definition sketch for monotonic solution domain........................................ A-50
Figure A-25. Comparison of UPWIND, QUICKEST, and ULTIMATE/QUICKEST
schemes for conservative tracer transport. ................................................................. A-51
Figure A-26. Definition sketch for variable velocity.......................................................... A-53
Figure A-27. Shear stress at the air-water surface. .......................................................... A-56
Figure A-28. Segment orientation. ...................................................................................... A-58
Figure A-29. Wind orientation. ............................................................................................. A-58
Figure 30. Comparison of current W2 model computation of CD and that recommended
as a lower limit by Wuest and Lorke (2003). ............................................................... A-60
Figure 31. Surface shear stress for V3.6 and later compared to V3.5 and earlier. ...... A-60
Figure A-32. Variation of turbulent vertical eddy viscosity for flow of 2574 m3 s-1 flow
down a channel of length 30 km and width of 100 m at x=15 km............................ A-64
Figure A-33. Variation of turbulent vertical eddy viscosity for flow of 2574 m3 s-1 flow
down a channel of length 30 km and width of 100 m measured at x=15 km. ........ A-64
Figure A-34. Comparison of vertical velocity predictions of W2 model with various eddy
viscosity models compared to theory. .......................................................................... A-65
Figure A-35. Conceptual diagram of wind induced motion.............................................. A-65
Figure A-36. Mixing length as a function of depth for the Nikuradse formulation. ........ A-70
Figure A-37. Variation of Az with depth for the parabolic model of Englund (1976). .... A-71
Figure 38. CE-QUAL-W2 computational grid. Width, density, pressure and water quality
state variables are defined at cell centers. Horizontal velocity, longitudinal eddy
viscosity and diffusivity, and longitudinal shear stress are defined at the right hand
side of the cell. Vertical velocity and vertical diffusivity is defiend at the bottom of the
cell, and the vertical eddy viscosity is defined at the lower right corner of the cell. . A74
Figure A-39. Variation of Manning's friction factor using formulae from Limerinos (1970)
and Jarrett (1984) for a channel slope, S, of 0.0005 and 84th pecentile diameter of
the bed material, d84, of 50. ........................................................................................... A-86
Figure A-40. Comparison of vertical velocity predictions with one, three, and seven
vertical layers ................................................................................................................... A-87
Figure A-41. Comparison of elevation drop of W2 model with one, three, and seven
vertical layers with same Manning's friction factor. .................................................... A-88
Figure A-42. Schematic of linkage of model segments with a culvert. .......................... A-89
Figure A-43. Linkage schematic of model segments with a culvert. .............................. A-92
Figure A-44. Computed versus observed flow using dynamic culvert model. .............. A-92
Figure A-45. Schematic representation of internal weirs. ................................................ A-93
Figure A-46. Radial gates and spillway flow. ...................................................................... A-94
Figure A-47. Flow rate over a spillway or weir for submerged and free flowing
conditions. ...................................................................................................................... A-101
Figure A-48. Flow at a submerged weir. .......................................................................... A-102
Figure A-49. Flow rate variation with gate opening. ....................................................... A-104
Figure A-50. Selective withdrawal with outflow connected to a valve with a gate. .... A-105
Figure A-51. Schematic of branch connection. ............................................................... A-106
Figure A-52. Comparison of the wind speed formualtion for Ryan-Harleman and W2
default (for Tair=15C, Tdew=-5C, Tsurface=25C). ....................................................... A-111
Figure A-53. Schematic of solar altitude, Ao, and azimuth, AZ ..................................... A-115
xvii
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure A-54. Schematic of topographic and vegetative shading, solar altitude (0), and
vegetation height (T) and their affect on shadow length. ........................................ A-116
Figure A-55. Azimuth angle, AZ, and stream orientation, 0. ...................................... A-118
Figure A-56. Relationship between azimuth, stream orientation, and shadow length. .. A118
Figure B-1. Internal flux for generic constituent compartment. .......................................... B-3
Figure B-2. Internal flux for coliform bacteria. ...................................................................... B-4
Figure 3. Water age in Chester Morse Lake, WA. ............................................................... B-5
Figure B-4. Internal flux for inorganic suspended solids. ................................................... B-6
Figure B-5. Internal flux between labile DOM and other compartments ........................... B-7
Figure B-6. Internal flux between refractory DOM and other compartments. .................. B-8
Figure B-7. Internal flux between Labile POM and other compartments. ....................... B-9
Figure B-8. Internal flux between refractory POM and other compartments. ............... B-11
Figure B-9. Internal flux between CBOD and other compartments in Version 3.6 and
earlier. ............................................................................................................................... B-12
later.................................................................................................................................... B-12
Figure 11. Internal flux between CBODP and other compartments. ............................... B-14
Figure 12. Internal flux between CBODN and other compartments. ............................... B-15
Figure B-13. Internal flux between algae and other compartments. .............................. B-16
Figure B-14. Internal flux between epiphyton and other compartments. ....................... B-20
Figure 15. Nutrient fluxes for the macrophyte compartment in CE-QUAL-W2............. B-25
Figure 16. Zooplankton source/sinks. ................................................................................. B-31
Figure B-17. Internal flux between phosphorus and other compartments. ................... B-33
Figure B-18. Internal flux between ammonium and other compartments. .................... B-36
Figure B-19. Internal flux between nitrate + nitrite and other compartments. ............... B-38
Figure B-20. Internal flux between dissolved silica and other compartments................ B-39
Figure B-21. Internal flux between particulate biogenic silica and other compartments . B46
Figure B-22. Internal flux between total iron and other compartments............................. 47
Figure B-23. Internal flux between dissolved oxygen and other compartments. ......... B-48
Figure B-24. Reaeration coefficent as a function of flow rate. ........................................ B-53
Figure B-25. Variation of wind speed and KL for lake/reservoir equations. .................. B-55
Figure B-26. Wind speed of 5 m s-1 and a fetch of 5 km corrected to 10 m as a function
of measuring height on land. ......................................................................................... B-56
Figure B-27. Wind speed of 5 m s-1 corrected to 10 m as a function of fetch. ............... B-56
Figure B-28. Wind corrected to 10 m based on wind measured on land. ..................... B-57
Figure B-29. Variation of KLT/KL20 as a function of temperature...................................... B-59
Figure B-30. Internal flux between 0-order sediment compartment and other
compartments. ................................................................................................................. B-63
Figure B-31. Internal flux between 1st-order sediment compartment and other
compartments. ................................................................................................................. B-63
Figure B-32. Internal flux between inorganic carbon and other compartments. ......... B-67
Figure B-33. Temperature rate multiplier function. .......................................................... B-75
Figure C-34. Layer numbers and segments for a sloping waterbody where segment 9 is
the last active segment of the waterbody. EBOT is 268.82 m, which is the lowest
xviii
LIST OF FIGURES
elevation in the waterbody and is the bottom elevation of layer 13 or KMX-1 (where
KMX=14)........................................................................................................................... C-17
Figure C-35. Layer numbers and segments for a branch with a zero slope where
segment 37 is the last active segment of the branch. EBOT for this waterbody is
261.21 m and is the bottom elevation of layer 13 or KMX-1 (where KMX=14). .... C-17
Figure 36. Cross-section of current rectangular grid system ........................................... C-19
Figure 37. Various solutions to fitting a cross-section trapezoidal layers compared to
multiple rectangular layers. ............................................................................................ C-19
Figure 38. Description of internal weir in CE-QUAL-W2 at downstream side of segment.
........................................................................................................................................... C-72
Figure 39. Growth rate as a function of temperature. ...................................................... C-169
Figure 41. Growth rate as a function of temperature....................................................... C-186
Figure 43. Organic matter decay as a fucntion of temperature. .................................... C-204
Figure 44. Ammonia decay as a function of temperature. .............................................. C-210
Figure 45. Denitrification as a function of temperature. .................................................. C-212
Figure 46. Illustration of sediment focusing rate. ............................................................. C-223
Figure 47. SOD rate as a function of temperature. .......................................................... C-224
Figure 48. New bathymetry file format in csv format within Excel. ................................ C-302
Figure 49. Small mouth bass habitat in DeGray reservoir for 1980. ............................. C-308
Figure 50. Outlet temperature as a function of time illustrating selective withdrawal
meeting temperature target of 15oC between Julian day 1 and 45. ...................... C-317
Figure 51. Environmental performance for 3 different scenario runs comparing dissolved
oxygen in a eutrophic system Eucha Reservoir in OK. ........................................... C-323
Figure 52. Side view of DeGray Lake grid used for hypolimnetic aeration. ................. C-325
Figure 53. Dissolved oxygen at probe location and cumulative oxygen added in kg over
period of aeration (Julian day 1-125). Target dissolved oxygen at probe location was
between 11 and 12.5 mg/l. .......................................................................................... C-326
Figure C-1. Tree top elevation and vegetation offset from a river. ............................... C-340
Figure C-2. The influence of topographic shading along a river. .................................. C-342
Figure C-3. Topographic slices at three segments along a river. ................................. C-342
Figure C-4. Diagram illustrating unstable water surface elevation solution. ............... C-419
xix
LIST OF TABLES
List of Tables
Table 1. General guidelines for in-pool water quality sampling. ......................................... 24
Table 2. Constituent levels and names. ................................................................................ 26
Table 3. Coefficients affecting thermal calibration ................................................................ 34
Table 4. Reservoir thermal simulations with error statistics for station closest to dam. .. 36
Table A-5. Governing equations with and without channel slope................................... A-20
Table A-6. Vertical eddy viscosity formulations. ................................................................ A-62
Table A-7. HEC-RAS flow rates through weirs and sluice gates. ................................... A-95
Table A-8. List of weir types (French, 1985; USBR, 1999).............................................. A-97
Table A-9. Typical Evaporation Formulae for Lakes and Reservoirs .......................... A-112
Table A-10. Criteria for determining sunward bank ........................................................ A-119
Table B-11. CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality State Variables ................................................ B-2
Table B-15. River reaeration equations. ............................................................................. B-51
Table B-16. Lake reaeration equations as a function of wind speed at 20oC. .............. B-53
Table B-17. Reaeration equations for estuarine waterbody at 20oC.............................. B-57
Table B-18. Formulae for small dam or weir reaeration effects. ..................................... B-59
Table B-19. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production. .................................. B-60
Table B-20. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production. .................................. B-61
Table B-21. Spillways and weirs reaeration ....................................................................... B-61
Table C-23. Vertical Eddy Viscosity Formulations ............................................................ C-33
Table C-24. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production ................................... C-53
Table C-25. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production at Columbia basin
dams .................................................................................................................................. C-54
Table C-26. Reaeration Effects of Spillways, Weirs, and Gates .................................... C-54
Table C-27. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production ................................... C-64
dams .................................................................................................................................. C-64
Table C-29. Reaeration effects of gates ............................................................................ C-65
Table C-30. Hydraulic Print Parameters ............................................................................. C-86
Table C-31. Extinction Coefficient Literature Values ...................................................... C-147
Table C-32. Values of BETA (TVA, 1972)........................................................................ C-148
Table 33. Literature values for light extinction due to macrophyte plant tissue
concentration. ................................................................................................................ C-151
Table C-34. In Situ Coliform Decay Rates ....................................................................... C-152
Table C-35. Gross Production Rates of Phytoplankton. ................................................ C-155
Table C-57. Maximum Algal Excretion Rate Literature Values ..................................... C-165
Table C-58. Algal Dark Respiration Rate Literature Values .......................................... C-165
Table C-59. Algal settling Velocity Literature Values ..................................................... C-165
xx
LIST OF TABLES
Table C-60. Phosphorus Half-Saturation Constant Literature Values ......................... C-166
Table C-61. Nitrogen Half-Saturation Constant Literature Values ............................... C-166
Table C-62. Literature values for saturating light intensity ............................................ C-167
Table C-63. Freshwater algae minimum and optimum elemental contents in
percentages of dry-weight (Reynolds, 1984). ........................................................... C-172
Table 64. Coefficients used in CE-QUAL-R1 to simulate macrophytes (from Collins and
Wlosinski, 1989). ........................................................................................................... C-192
Table 65. Values for the ratio between dry weight to wet volume ratio. ...................... C-196
Table 66. Literature values for the ration of dry weight to surface area. ..................... C-196
Table C-67. Labile DOM Decay Rate Literature Values. ............................................... C-200
Table C-68. Detritus Decay Rate Literature Values ....................................................... C-201
Table C-69. Detritus Settling Velocity Literature Values ................................................ C-201
Table C-70. Ammonium Decay Rate Literature Values ................................................. C-208
Table 71. Nitrification rates measured by McCutcheon (1987)..................................... C-208
Table C-72. Sediment Oxygen Demand Literature Values ........................................... C-225
Table C-73. River Reaeration Equations.......................................................................... C-226
Table C-74. Lake Reaeration Equations .......................................................................... C-227
Table C-75. Estuarine Reaeration Equations .................................................................. C-228
Table 76. Fish temperature and dissolved oxygen criteria from Cooke and Welch (2008).
......................................................................................................................................... C-306
Table 77. General fish temperature criteria from Hondzo and Stefan (1996). ............ C-306
Table 78. Rules for selective withdrawal when there are 2 outlets where flow is being
split. ................................................................................................................................. C-316
Table C-79. Description of Dynamic Shading Input Variables ...................................... C-339
xxi
MODEL PACKAGE
Model Release Package

All files on the CE-QUAL-W2 web site (http://www.ce.pdx.edu/w2) are archived in compressed
zip files. To install CE-QUAL-W2, follow directions on the web site. All model files are provided
in zipped format and are provided in directories that contain the source code, executables, user
manual, and example applications. The example applications include DeGray Lake, the Spokane
River, and the Columbia Slough. DeGray Lake is a reservoir with a single branch and a complete
water quality application. The Spokane River is an example of a river system with multiple river
sections. The Columbia Slough is a fresh-water estuary example.
Typical Input Files

The following input files come with each application:
w2_con.npt bth.npt
met.npt
control file for each application

- bathymetry file
- meteorological file
A subset of the following input files comes with each application:

qin_br1.npt
tin_br1.npt
cin_br1.npt
qtr_tr1.npt
ttr_tr1.npt
ctr_tr1.npt
euh_br1.npt
tuh_br1.npt
cuh_br1.npt
edh_br1.npt
tdh_br1.npt
cdh_br1.npt
qot_br1.npt
ext_wb1.npt
qwd.npt
vpr.npt
lpr.npt
wsc.npt
shd.npt
qgt.npt
xxii
inflows
inflow temperatures
inflow constituent concentrations
tributary inflows
tributary inflow temperatures
tributary inflow constituent concentrations
upstream head elevations
upstream head boundary temperatures
upstream head boundary constituent concentrations
downstream head elevations
downstream head boundary temperatures
downstream head boundary constituent concentrations
outflows
light extinction
withdrawals
vertical profile at dam for specifying initial conditions
longitudinal and vertical profiles specifying initial conditions for each cell
wind sheltering
shading
gate flows/operation
MODEL PACKAGE
If more than one branch or tributary is modeled, then corresponding files using "br2", "br3", etc.
(or "TR2, "TR3", etc.) in the filename will also be included. These file names are merely examples
since the model user can change any of the file names except the main control file, w2_con.npt.
Compiler Options and Questions

Please see the model release documentation on compiler options. Note that a Users Forum has
been set up on the web where support from the developers and other users can be obtained. The
forum is located at http://w2forum.cee.pdx.edu
xxiii
1 Introduction
Model Overview
CE-QUAL-W2 is a two-dimensional, longitudinal/vertical, hydrodynamic and water quality model.
Because the model assumes lateral homogeneity, it is best suited for relatively long and narrow
waterbodies exhibiting longitudinal and vertical water quality gradients. The model has been applied to rivers, lakes, reservoirs, estuaries, and combinations thereof.
The application of CE-QUAL-W2 requires knowledge in the following areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Hydrodynamics
Aquatic biology
Aquatic chemistry
Numerical methods
Computers and FORTRAN coding
Statistics
Data assembly and reconstruction
Water quality modeling is in many ways an art requiring not only knowledge in these areas but also
experience in their integration. A word of caution to the first time user - model application is a
complicated and time-consuming task.
Terminology used in the CE-QUAL-W2 model

The CE-QUAL-W2 model discretization uses the following definitions:
Chapter 1 Introduction
Waterbodies: a collection of model branches that have similar turbulence

closure and water quality parameter values and the same meteorological
forcing. A typical example would be a reservoir and a river as separate
waterbodies. One can also have one reservoir with separate waterbodies
designated by different meteorological forcing.
Branches: a collection of model segments with variable model slope. In a
river waterbody, there can be multiple branches of variable slope; or in a
reservoir, the sidearms of the reservoir can be different model branches.
Segments: a longitudinal segment of length x.
Layers: a vertical layer of height z.
INTRODUCTION
Model Background
Version 1.0. CE-QUAL-W2 has been under continuous development since 1975. The original
model was known as LARM (Laterally Averaged Reservoir Model) developed by Edinger and
Buchak (1975). The first LARM application was on a reservoir with no branches. Subsequent
modifications to allow for multiple branches and estuarine boundary conditions resulted in the code
known as GLVHT (Generalized Longitudinal-Vertical Hydrodynamics and Transport Model). Addition of the water quality algorithms by the Water Quality Modeling Group at the US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station (WES) resulted in CE-QUAL-W2 Version 1.0 (Environmental and Hydraulic Laboratories, 1986).
Version 2.0. Version 2.0 was a result of major modifications to the code to improve the mathematical description of the prototype and increase computational accuracy and efficiency. Numerous new capabilities were included in Version 2.0, including:
1. an algorithm that calculated the maximum allowable timestep and adjusted the
timestep to ensure hydrodynamic stability requirements were not violated (autostepping)
2. a selective withdrawal algorithm that calculated a withdrawal zone based on outflow, outlet geometry, and upstream density gradients
3. a higher-order transport scheme (QUICKEST) that reduced numerical diffusion
(Leonard, 1979)
4. time-weighted vertical advection and fully implicit vertical diffusion
5. step function or linear interpolation of inputs
6. improved ice-cover algorithm
7. internal calculation of equilibrium temperatures and coefficients of surface heat exchange or a term-by-term accounting of surface heat exchange
8. variable layer heights and segment lengths
9. surface layer extending through multiple layers
10. generalized time-varying data input subroutine with input data accepted at any frequency
11. volume and mass balances to machine accuracy
12. sediment/water heat exchange
Version 3.0. Version 3.0 is a result of additional improvements to the numerical solution scheme
and water quality algorithms, as well as extending the utility of the model to provide state-of-theart capabilities for modeling entire waterbasins in two-dimensions. The new capabilities included
in Version 3 include:
1. an implicit solution for the effects of vertical eddy viscosity in the horizontal momentum
equation
2. addition of Leonards ULTIMATE algorithm that eliminates over/ undershoots in the numerical solution scheme
3. inclusion of momentum transfer between branches
2
tion
Chapter 1 Introduc-
INTRODUCTION
4. the ability to model multiple waterbodies in the same computational grid
including multiple reservoirs, steeply sloping riverine sections between
reservoirs, and estuaries
5. additional vertical turbulence algorithms more appropriate for rivers
6. additional reaeration algorithms more appropriate for rivers
7. variable vertical grid spacing between waterbodies
8. numerical algorithms for pipe, weir, and pump flow
9. internal weir algorithm for submerged or skimmer weirs
10. three algal groups
11. arbitrary constituents defined by a decay rate, settling rate, and temperature
rate multiplier
12. nine inorganic suspended solids groups
13. dissolved and particulate biogenic silica
14. age of water
15. derived constituents such as total DOC, organic nitrogen, organic phosphorus, etc. that are
not state variables
16. a graphical pre/postprocessor
17. converted to FORTRAN 90/95 with Dynamic Array Allocation eliminating the need to
recompile the code for each application
18. user defined evaporation models including the Ryan-Harleman model
Version 3.1. Version 3.1 is a result of additional improvements to the numerical solution scheme
and water quality algorithms, as well as extending the utility of the model to provide state-of-theart capabilities for modeling entire waterbasins in two-dimensions. The new capabilities include:
1. any number of user defined arbitrary constituents defined by a decay rate, settling
rate, and temperature rate multiplier that can include
a. conservative tracers
b. coliform bacteria
c. water age
d. contaminants
2. any number of user defined phytoplankton groups
3. any number of user defined epiphyton groups
4. any number of user defined CBOD groups
5. any number of user defined inorganic suspended solids groups
6. dissolved and particulate biogenic silica
7. derived constituents such as total DOC, organic nitrogen, organic phosphorus, etc.
that are not state variables
8. kinetic fluxes
9. graphical preprocessor
Version 3.2. Version 3.2 is a result of additional improvements to the model. These new capabilities include:
1. Internal code rewrite to reduce code size, simplify code maintenance, and improve
model execution speed
2. New screen display during model run-time. The new screen display allows for controlling the processor usage, examining output variables, and stopping, starting and
restarting a model run on the fly. This allows the model user to stop a code, then
INTRODUCTION
make changes in the control file or any input file, and then restart the model at the
point that it was stopped.
3. Addition of a new algorithm to estimate suspended solids resuspension as a result of
wind-wave action.
4. Reorganization of the graph.npt file to allow more output control formatting possibilities.
5. New turbulent kinetic energy-turbulent dissipation turbulence closure model was
added to the model.
Version 3.5. Version 3.5 is a result of significant enhancements to the model. These new capabilities include:
1. Addition of the macrophyte model of Berger and Wells (2008) with a user-defined
# of species
2. Addition of a zooplankton model with a user-defined # of species based on an updated version of the CE-QUAL-R1 model (Environmental Laboratory, 1995)
3. Addition of a new focusing or settling velocity for sediments that accumulate in the
first order sediment model. In earlier versions, sediment focusing occurred at the
velocity given for POM. In this version, a user can specify that focusing velocity.
This means that sediments can still migrate toward the bottom of the channel over
time even after they have hit the sidewalls of the channel.
4. User-defined time-variable input of P and N associated with organic matter inputs.
In earlier versions, the P or N associated with organic matter was based on a static
stoichiometric coefficient specified in the control file. Now, the user provides in the
input files the dynamic P and N associated with organic matter inputs from tributaries or inflows. This is essentially allowing for variable stoichiometry in the input
boundary conditions.
5. Based on the above refinement, the organic matter fractions within the model now
have variable stoichiometry for P and N. This preserves P and N mass balances. The
stoichiometry given in the input files is merely the initial value of the C-N-P stoichiometry of POM and DOM compartments. Hence, organic P and organic N are
tracked correctly in the code.
6. The first order sediment model also tracks C-N-P correctly and has a dynamic stoichiometry as it accumulates organic matter in the sediment. Prior versions of W2
had a user-defined value of fixed stoichiometry for the 1st order sediment model.
Also, instead of a fixed decay rate for the sediments, the decay rate is dynamic based
on the decay rates of the accumulated organic material. A mass weighted average is
used.
7. CBOD groups now have a user-defined settling velocity. Hence, the user can define
organic matter groups as particulate and dissolved based on specification of the settling velocity. As in prior versions, CBOD has associated stoichiometry and if there
is settling, it will accumulate in the 1st order sediment compartment.
8. A Monod forumulation was implemented for the initiation of anaerobic processes
and reduction of aerobic processes. In earlier model versions there was a specified
oxygen concentration that acted like a step function turing these processes on or off.
4
tion
Chapter 1 Introduc-
INTRODUCTION
Version 3.6. This version is file compatible with version 3.5. Hence no changes need to
be made to any input files. Even though there are some new features in the input
files, these are not required for users of V3.5 and can be kept blank. The primary
change is allowing the code to run on multiple processors. The following changes
have been made in the code from V3.5 to V3.6:
1. The code has been rewritten into smaller subroutines to allow better code compilation and
optimization.
2. The code has been revised with the goal of improving the computational speed. This new
compiled code using Intel Visual Fortran 11 should be faster on a single processor than the
V3.5 code compiled on a PC with CVF 6.6.
3. The code now has OPENMP commands embedded to allow for limited parallelization of
some of the routines. Current tests show that going from 1 processor to 2 can result in up
to 20-40% speed improvement. The user can specify the # of processors the code will use
in NPROC.
4. The TKE algorithm has been updated with new algorithms that match experimental tank
data for kinetic energy and dissipation. This is based on a Masters degree project by Sam
Gould at Portland State University. A new user option is the TKE1 algorithm, in addition
to the legacy algorithm TKE.
5. The roughness height of the water for correction of the vertical velocity wind profile is
now a user-defined input, z0. Prior to this the model had hardwired the value of z0=0.003
m for wind speed correction at 2m (for evaporation where wind height at 2 m is typical)
and z0=0.01 m for wind at 10 m (for shear stress calculations where wind height of 10 m is
typical). For consistency, both conversions now use the same value of roughness height. If
the user does not specify the value of z0 (for example if he/she leaves the spaces blank for
z0 using a V3.5 control file), the code uses 0.001 m.
6. The Windows user interface no longer uses Array Viewer. The dialog box and PC executable no longer require installation of Array Viewer (which is now obsolete) nor do they
need the Array Viewer DLL. The Dialog box has some minor improvements: model run
directory displayed and a progress bar.
7. Fixed error with Algae/chlorophyll a ratio in user manual and fixed pre-processor. The
earlier language in the user manual discussed an Algae/Chlorophyll a ratio but presented
information that was the ratio of chlorophyll a/algae this has been revised and fixed in
User Manual and in preprocessor.
8. Spreadsheet output: in earlier versions put in an alphanumeric character as a space for the
spreadsheet to preserve the formatting. This was changed to a default value of -99 to facilitate numeric data processing. Also, the Depth output value was changed to just
Depth since modern plotting programs can reverse an axis.
9. Preprocessor improvements. Added variable checks for new parameters, fixed bugs, new
check for wsc.npt file (not checked in earlier versions).
10. For the generic constituent, added temperature dependence on 0th order decay and fixed
errors in User Manual for units of zero order decay coefficient.
INTRODUCTION
11. Added the kinetic flux rates to the TSR file output for easier analysis using a spreadsheet
of the flux terms for specific locations in the modeled system.
12. Revised the computation of the drag coefficient for low wind speeds so that the model
now agrees better with theory in this wind speed range.
13. The light extinction coefficient (in m-1) is now included as an output variable in the TSR
opt file. Because the model internally computes the light extinction coefficient based on
water, SS, POM, algae, zooplankton, and macrophytes, this is an important parameter understanding the internal light transmission predicted by the model. This variable replaces
the equilibrium temperature as an output variable.
14. A new option for output is in the format required for TECPLOT. For TECPLOT animation there is only a flag in the CPL output line. This allows for easy model animation of
the variables U, W, T, RHO, and all active constituents at the frequency specified by the
CPL file as a function of distance and elevation.
15. A new variable for determining the fraction of NO3-N that is diffused into the sediments
that becomes organic matter, or SED-N was introduced.
16. In V3.5 the model computed an average decay coefficient of the sediments based on what
was deposited. The user now has the option to dynamically compute that decay rate or to
have it fixed and controlled by the model user. A new variable was introduced called
DYNSEDK which is either ON/OFF to allow or not allow dynamic computation of the
sediment decay rate.
17. Added Kinetic flux output that sums up fluxes for all cells of a waterbody at the output
frequency specified in the kinetic flux output. The output filenames are called
kflux_jw#.opt where # is the waterbody number. All active fluxes are summed for the
waterbody. This is an important overall diagnostic tool to evaluate the important fluxes in
the waterbody over time. Instantaneous fluxes are output in the TSR file for individual
cells and a series of fluxes at given segments are shown in the Flux output file which is
similar in format as the SNP file. This new file is easy to import into a spreadsheet for
analysis.
18. The selective withdrawal algorithm computation was adjused to more closely follow the
Corps model code SELECT (based on personnal communication with Gary Hauser,
2008). The variable DLRHOMAX is used to compute the relative velocity profile. In V3.5
and earlier, this variable was the maximum for the entire profile above and below the outlet, i.e., DLRHOMAX=MAX(DLRHOT, DLRHOB). In V3.6 and later, DLRHOT is used
above the outlet and DLRHOB is used below the outlet.
19. Command-line working directory specification is now active for the preprocessor, GUI,
and W2 windows versions. Also, the Windows box can now be closed after a run is finished by specifying CLOSEC=ON in the control file. This makes it easier to use the Windows executable in batch file processing.
Version 3.7. This version is not file compatible with version 3.6 because of the addition
of several more state variables. The release notes show where the control file differs
6
tion
Chapter 1 Introduc-
INTRODUCTION
from Version 3.6. Many of the new features to Version 3.7 are accessed through
additional control files separate from the main control file, w2_con.npt. The following changes have been made in the code from V3.6 to V3.7:
1. The model has been improved to handle river flow regimes. These model enhancements
for river systems include the following:
a. The initial water surface elevation of a river system based on the normal depth of
the river is computed within the model. This allows the model to run more
smoothly from the start and eliminates trying to guess an initial water surface elevation for a river system.
b. The model in earlier versions assumed that the initial velocity regime was zero.
By computing an initial velocity regime based on the initial conditions of the
flows, the river model then starts with a non-zero velocity. This allows the model
to run more smoothly from the very beginning of the model simulation.
c. The model user can choose Trapezoidal or Rectangular model segments. This
will allow for a smoother transition as water levels move up and down in a river
channel. This should also allow for a larger maximum time step for stability in
the river system.
d. The model user can now specify 2 slopes for a model branch. One slope is the
slope of the elevation grid for which all elevations are tied together. The other
slope is the hydraulic equivalent slope of a channel. In other words, if a model
branch includes riffles and pools, the actual grid slope may not be the equivalent
hydraulic slope.
2. There is a new bathymetry file input format in comma delimited format (csv) that is easily developed using Excel. This simplifies setting up the initial grid and debugging it.
3. Temperature and dissolved oxygen habitat volumes are now computed within the model
for user-specified fish species.
4. There is a new automatic selection of a withdrawal port algorithm that will select the elevation of the withdrawal necessary to meet temperature targets including splitting flows
between outlets to reach a target temperature.
5. Since each BOD group can have a different BOD-P, BOD-C and BOD-N stoichiometric
equivalent, it was necessary to add to the model new state variables, BOD-P, BOD-N,
and BOD-C that allowed for time variable inputs of BOD-P, BOD-C and BOD-N from a
point or non-point source.
6. Environmental performance criteria were developed to evaluate time and volume averages over the system of state variables chosen for analysis. This is an easy method for
looking at water quality differences between model runs.
7. The model now has a module for adding dissolved oxygen, such as hypolimnetic aeration, to specific locations based on a dynamic dissolved oxygen probe monitoring the dissolved oxygen levels.
8. The model has a dynamic pipe algorithm allowing a pipe to be turned ON or OFF over
time, as if a gate was closed.
INTRODUCTION
9. The model also has a dynamic pump algorithm that allows the model user to set dynamic
parameters for the water level control over time. This is very useful in setting rule curves
for operation of the reservoir water levels over time.
10. The maximum time step can now be set to interpolate its value over time rather than suddenly changing the maximum time step. This allows for a smoother change in the model
time step.
11. The computation of the temperature at which ice freezes has been adjusted to account for
salt water impacts. [Courtesy of Dr. Ray Walton]
12. New model output includes volume weighted averages of eutrophication water quality
variables as a function of segment and for only surface conditions as specified by the
model user. Other new output includes output of flows, concentrations, and temperatures
from a segment for all individual withdrawals.
Version 3.71. This version is file compatible with version 3.7 but does add one new variable to
the control file w2_con.npt.
1. New model input formats (free format) for many input files that were in fixed format.
The new files allow for much easier model file development in Excel. These new files include the following files:
a. All concentration input files for inflows, tributaries, distributed tributaries and
precipitation:
i. Cin files
ii. Ctrib files
iii. Cdtrib files
iv. Cpre files
b. Wind sheltering file
i. Wsc file
c. Meteorological input file
i. Met file
d. Vertical profile file for initial condition
i. Vpr file
e. Longitudinal-vertical profile initial condition
i. Lpr file
f. Withdrawal flow file
i. Qwd file
g. Structure outflow file
i. Qot file
h. Flow and temperature input files for
i. Qin and Tin
ii. Qtrib and Ttrib
iii. Qdtrib and Tdtrib
8
tion
Chapter 1 Introduc-
INTRODUCTION
2. New option for dynamic outlet structure elevation for each model structure. Hence, the
centerline elevation of the structure can be variable over time. In the control file, there is
an ON/OFF option after declaring the # of structures for each branch.
3. The release of a new post-processor from DSI, Inc. that uses the vector output in
w2_con.npt to specify frequency of output for this post-processor.
Manual
Organization. Chapter 1 consists of an introduction to the model and the user manual. Chapter 2
describes the model's capabilities and limitations. Chapter 3 provides an overview of the steps
involved in applying the model including data preparation and model application.
The appendices provide the user with the information necessary to understand the model details.
Appendix A describes the theoretical, numerical, and computational basis for the hydrodynamic
portion of the model. Appendix B describes the theoretical and computational basis for the water
quality algorithms. Appendix C describes input file preparation. References include a partial bibliography of CE-QUAL-W2 applications.
The following concepts have been used in the writing of the Users Manual:
1. Page headers are used to allow the user to easily find major areas in the manual.
2. Where applicable, paragraphs contain descriptive headings for easy reference.
3. Hyperlinks are used when related information is contained elsewhere.
Conventions. References to FORTRAN variables in the manual are made in English and are followed by their FORTRAN name enclosed by brackets (e.g., surface layer [KT]). The user need
not first memorize the variable names to comprehend the manual. Potential problem areas in applying the model are emphasized with bold italic type.
2 Capabilities and Limitations

Capabilities
Hydrodynamic. The model predicts water surface elevations, velocities (longitudinal and vertical), and temperatures. Temperature is included in the hydrodynamic calculations because of its
effect on water density and cannot be turned off. Water quality computations are done after a hydrodyanamic computation allowing for feedback between water quality and hydrodynamic variables.
Water quality. Any combination of constituents can be included/excluded from a simulation.
The effects of salinity or total dissolved solids/salinity on density and thus hydrodynamics are included only if they are simulated in the water quality module. The water quality algorithm is modular allowing constituents to be easily added as additional subroutines. The current version includes
the following water quality state variables in addition to temperature:
1. any number of generic constituents defined by a 0 and/or a 1st order decay rate and/or
a settling velocity and/or an Arrhenius temperature rate multiplier that can be used
to define any number of the following:
a. conservative tracer(s)
b. water age or hydraulic residence time
c. coliform bacteria(s)
d. contaminant(s)
2. any number of inorganic suspended solids groups
3. any number of phytoplankton groups
4. any number of periphyton/epiphyton groups
5. any number of CBOD groups, including CBOD-N and CBOD-P
6. ammonium
7. nitrate+nitrite
8. bioavailable phosphorus (commonly represented by orthophosphate or soluble reactive phosphorus)
9. labile dissolved organic matter
10. refractory dissolved organic matter
11. labile particulate organic matter
12. refractory particulate organic matter
13. total inorganic carbon
14. alkalinity
15. total iron
10
Chapter 2 Capabilities and Limitations
CAPABILITIES
16. dissolved oxygen
17. organic sediments
18. gas entrainment
19. any number of macrophyte groups
20. any number of zooplankton groups
21. labile dissolved organic matter-P
22. refractory dissolved organic matter-P
23. labile particulate organic matter-P
24. refractory particulate organic matter-P
25. labile dissolved organic matter-N
26. refractory dissolved organic matter-N
27. labile particulate organic matter-N
28. refractory particulate organic matter-N
Additionally, over 60 derived variables including pH, TOC, DOC, TON, TOP, DOP, etc. can be
computed internally from the state variables and output for comparison to measured data.
Long term simulations. The water surface elevation is solved implicitly, which eliminates the
surface gravity wave restriction on the timestep. This permits larger timesteps during a simulation
resulting in decreased computational time. As a result, the model can easily simulate long-term
water quality responses. The vertical diffusion criteria from stability requirements has also been
eliminated allowing for even larger timesteps.
Head boundary conditions. The model can be applied to estuaries, rivers, or portions of a waterbody by specifying upstream or downstream head boundary conditions.
Multiple branches. The branching algorithm allows application to geometrically complex waterbodies such as dendritic reservoirs or estuaries.
Multiple waterbodies. The model can be applied to any number of rivers, reservoirs, lakes, and
estuaries linked in series.
Multiple turbulence closure schemes. The model user can choose several different turbulence
closure schemes. The preferred scheme for both estuary, river and lake/reservoir systems is the k turbulence model.
Variable grid spacing. Variable segment lengths and layer thicknesses can be used allowing specification of higher resolution where needed. Vertical grid spacing can vary in thickness between
waterbodies.
Water quality independent of hydrodynamics. Water quality can be updated less frequently
than hydrodynamics thus reducing computational requirements. However, water quality is not decoupled from the hydrodynamics (i.e., separate, standalone code for hydrodynamics and water
quality where output from the hydrodynamic model is stored on disk and then used to specify advective fluxes for the water quality computations). Storage requirements for long-term hydrodynamic output to drive the water quality model are prohibitive for anything except very small grids.
Additionally, reduction in computer time is minimal when hydrodynamic data used to drive water
quality are input every timestep.
11
CAPABILITIES
Autostepping. The model includes a variable timestep algorithm that attempts to help ensure stability requirements for the hydrodynamics imposed by the numerical solution scheme are not violated.
Restart provision. The user can output results during a simulation that can subsequently be used
as input. Execution can then be resumed at that point.
Layer/segment addition and subtraction. The model will adjust surface layer and upstream segment locations for a rising or falling water surface during a simulation.
Multiple inflows and outflows. Provisions are made for inflows and inflow loadings from
point/nonpoint sources, branches, and precipitation. Outflows are specified either as releases at a
branch's downstream segment or as lateral withdrawals. Although evaporation is not considered
an outflow in the strictest sense, it can be included in the water budget.
Ice cover calculations. The model can calculate onset, growth, and breakup of ice cover.
Selective withdrawal calculations. The model can calculate the vertical extent of the withdrawal
zone based on outlet geometry, outflow, and density.
Multiple hydraulic structure algorithms. The model can be set up to allow multiple pumps,
spillways, pipes and gates between model segments.
Dynamic shading. The model computes topographic and vegetative shading for each model segment.
Automatic vertical port selection in a reservoir. The model can compute what vertical layer to
extract water fro ma reservoir to meet an imposed temperature standard.
Time-varying boundary conditions. The model accepts a given set of time-varying inputs at the
frequency they occur independent of other sets of time-varying inputs.
Outputs. The model allows the user considerable flexibility in the type and frequency of outputs.
Output is available for the screen, hard copy, plotting, and restarts. The user can specify what is
output, when during the simulation output is to begin, and the output frequency. Version 3.71 now
includes a graphical pre- and postprocessor for plotting/ visualization.
Details of these capabilities are discussed in Appendix C.
Potential Limitations
Theoretical
Hydrodynamics and transport. The governing equations are laterally and layer averaged. Lateral averaging assumes lateral variations in velocities, temperatures, and constituents are negligible.
This assumption may be inappropriate for large waterbodies exhibiting significant lateral variations
in water quality. Whether this assumption is met is often a judgment call on the user and depends
12
LIMITATIONS
in large part on the questions being addressed. Eddy coefficients are used to model turbulence.
Currently, the user must decide among several vertical turbulence schemes the one that is most
appropriate for the type of waterbody being simulated. The equations are written in the conservative form using the Boussinesq and hydrostatic approximations. Since vertical momentum is not
included, the model may give inaccurate results where there is significant vertical acceleration.
Water quality. Water quality interactions are, by necessity, simplified descriptions of an aquatic
ecosystem that is extremely complex. Improvements will be made in the future as better means of
describing the aquatic ecosystem in mathematical terms and time for incorporating the changes into
the model become available in this one area.
Sediment oxygen demand. The model includes a user-specified sediment oxygen
demand that is not coupled to the water column. SOD only varies according to temperature. The first order sediment model is tied to the water column settling of organic matter. But this models only labile, oxic, sediment decay. The model does not
have a sediment compartment that models kinetics in the sediment and at the sediment-water interface, i.e., a complete sediment diagenesis model. This places a limitation on long-term predictive capabilities of the water quality portion of the model.
Future releases will include the following additional capabilities:
1. sediment diagenesis algorithm that will compute SOD and sediment to water column
nutrient fluxes based on organic matter delivery to the sediments
2. sediment transport including both cohesive and non-cohesive sediments
3. toxics
4. simultaneous water surface elevation solution among all branches in a waterbody
5. downstream segment addition/subtraction between a river and a reservoir and/or estuary
Numerical
Solution scheme. The model provides three different numerical transport schemes for temperature
and constituents - upwind differencing, the higher-order QUICKEST (Leonard, 1979), and Leonards ULTIMATE algorithm. Upwind differencing introduces numerical diffusion often greater
than physical diffusion. The QUICKEST scheme reduces numerical diffusion, but in areas of high
gradients generates overshoots and undershoots which may produce small negative concentrations.
ULTIMATE, Leonards solution to the over/undershoots, has been incorporated into Version 3. In
addition, discretization errors are introduced as the finite difference cell dimensions or the timestep
increase. This is an important point to keep in mind when evaluating model predictions that are
spatially and temporally averaged versus observed data collected at discrete points in time and
space. A more thorough discussion of the numerical solution and its implementation is found in
Appendix A.
Computer limits. A considerable effort has been invested in increasing model efficiency including
a vertically implicit solution for vertical turbulence in the horizontal momentum equation. However, the model still places computational and storage burdens on a computer when making longterm simulations. Year long water quality simulations for a single reservoir can take from a few
minutes to days for multiple waterbodies in a large river basin. Applications to dynamic river
13
LIMITATIONS
systems can take considerably longer than reservoirs because of much smaller timesteps needed for
river numerical stability.
Since the model uses dynamic allocation memory, the memory required for a simulation is determined at run-time. In cases where the user is running on a Windows 32-bit operating system, the
virtual memory is limited to 2GB. If your system requires more memory, you will need to recompile
the code using a 64-bit operating system and compiler that can address more memory.
Input Data
The availability of input data is not a limitation of the model itself. However, it is most often the
limiting factor in the application or misapplication of the model. This cannot be stressed enough.
The user should always keep in mind the adage "garbage in equals garbage out".
14
tions
Chapter 2 Capabilities and Limita-
3 Model Application
This chapter is intended to present the user with a general overview of the steps involved in a model
application. The initial user should read the chapter once to gain a general understanding of these
steps setting aside questions that might arise upon initial reading. The user should then reread the
chapter and explore the hyperlinks to clarify any questions that arose during the first reading. Filenames are referred to generically (i.e., inflow file, outflow file, withdrawal file). Actual filenames
are specified by the user in the control file.
Overview
Data Preparation
The following data are needed for model application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
geometric data
initial conditions
boundary conditions
hydraulic parameters
kinetic parameters
calibration data
A detailed discussion of these data follows.

Geometric Data
The first input task involves assembling geometric data. These data will be used to define the finite
difference representation of the waterbody. The following data are needed for setting up input
geometry:
1. topographic map and/or sediment range surveys
2. project volume-area-elevation table
The topographic map or sediment range surveys are used to generate bathymetric cross-sections
that are input into the model. The project volume-area-elevation table is used for comparison with
the volume-area-elevation table generated by the model.
Computational grid. The computational grid is the term used for the finite difference representation of the waterbody. Grid geometry is determined by four parameters:
Chapter 3 Model Application
15
DATA PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
longitudinal spacing (segment length)

vertical spacing (layer height)
average cross-sectional width (cell width)
waterbody slope
[DLX]
[H]
[B]
[SLOPE]
The longitudinal and vertical spacing may vary from segment to segment and layer to layer, but
should vary gradually from one segment or layer to the next to minimize discretization errors.
Factors affecting computational grid. A number of factors must be evaluated and weighed
against each other when determining longitudinal and vertical spacing. These include:
1. Areas of strongest gradients. This factor applies particularly to the metalimnion
in freshwater and the pyncnocline in saltwater. If the model is not capturing water
quality gradients in these regions, then vertical resolution may have to be increased.
Similar reasoning applies to areas of longitudinal gradients.
2. Computational and memory requirements. The model penalizes the user in two
ways when increasing grid resolution. As the number of grid cells goes up, so do
computational and memory requirements. In addition, as the dimensions of a grid
cell decrease, the timestep must also decrease to maintain numerical stability. As a
rule of thumb, it is always desirable to err on the side of greater grid resolution, but
at some point the user must give way to the reality of the available computer resources and the money and time available for completing the project.
3. Bottom slope. For reservoirs and some estuaries, the waterbody bottom slope is
more accurately modeled as the ratio of cell thickness to cell length [H]/[DLX] approaches the overall bottom slope. For sloping streams/rivers, the ratio is accurately
represented by the slope and is typically not of concern.
4. Results. Results should not be a function of the computational grids resolution.
With the development of the bathymetry editor, finely discretized grids can be easily
coarsened. The coarser grid will have fewer computational cells and larger average
timesteps resulting in decreased runtimes. The computational grid should initially
be of high resolution and, if runtimes are excessive, reduced in resolution until the
results change substantially. Results should never be a function of the grid resolution.
Previous applications have used a horizontal grid spacing of 100 to 10,000 m and a vertical grid
spacing of 0.2 to 5 m. Regardless of the grid spacing used, the user should check to make certain
that model predictions are grid independent. This is usually performed by making model simulations with varying grid resolution and using the largest grid that reproduces essentially the same
results as those using the smallest grid.
Bathymetric data. The next step after determining horizontal and vertical cell dimensions is to
determine average cross-sectional widths for each cell. This is an iterative procedure whereby
initial bathymetry is input into the preprocessor and the volume-area-elevation table is then generated by the preprocessor. This table is compared to the project table and widths are adjusted to
better match the project table.
Several methods have been used for determining average widths. Transects along the waterbody
centerline can be drawn on a topographic map. A contour at the elevation corresponding to the
16
DATA PREPARATION
center of a grid cell is located and the area encompassed by the contour line and the upstream and
downstream transect is determined by planimeter. This area divided by the segment length is the
average width of the grid cell. The process is repeated for each grid cell.
When no topographic information is available, the user can determine average widths from sediment range surveys for existing waterbodies. However, this method is generally not as accurate as
data obtained from topographic maps since the number of available transects are usually insufficient to adequately describe the complex shape of most waterbodies. If available, sediment range
surveys should be used to refine the grid generated from topographic information - particularly
where significant sedimentation has occurred.
Other methods by individual investigators have been developed for generating grids using contour
plotting packages such as Surfer and AUTOCAD. Eventually, the preprocessor will incorporate
an algorithm that will automatically generate the bathymetry based on lateral transects or x-y-z
coordinate data.
Sample computational grid. A sample computational grid in the longitudinal/vertical plane with
four branches is shown in Figure 1. The FORTRAN variables associated with the grid are also
included. The grid consists of 25 longitudinal segments [IMX] and 22 vertical layers [KMX]. They
constitute the total number of cells in the computational grid. This is exactly how the model sees
the grid layout even though this is not the correct physical representation of the system. In reality,
branch two and branch three join branch one. Branch setup is described in more detail below.
segment i=
1 2 3
layer k= 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Figure 1. Sample computational grid in the x-z plane showing active and inactive cells.
17
tion
Chapter 3 Model Applica-
DATA PREPARATION
Grid cell types. Figure 1 contains two kinds of cells - ones with either a single or a double line
border. Cells with a single line border represent cells that may contain water during the simulation.
The active cells are defined in the bathymetry input as having non-zero widths. Cells with a double
border represent boundary cells located at or beyond the waterbody boundaries. The boundary
cells are defined in the bathymetry input as having zero widths.
Boundary cells. There are four types of boundary cells:
1.
2.
3.
4.
top
bottom
upstream
downstream
Each segment must have a zero width for the cell in layer 1 and a zero width for every cell located
below the bottom active cell. For example, cells 1 and 12-22 in segment five would have zero
widths. In addition, each branch must have zero widths for upstream boundary and downstream
boundary segments. Note this requirement results in two segments of boundary cells between each
branch (segments 10-11 & 16-17).
Branches. CE-QUAL-W2 can simulate a system with any number of waterbodies containing any
number of branches. Figure 2 shows a plan view of the same three branch grid of Figure 1 along
with the FORTRAN variables defining the geometry for each branch. For each branch, the upstream segment [US] and the downstream segment [DS] must be defined. The current upstream
segment [CUS] is calculated by the model and may vary over time to meet restrictions imposed by
the solution scheme. Typically segment numbers increase going from upstream to downstream in
the branch.
A branch may connect to other branches at its upstream [UHS] and/or downstream segment [DHS].
In Figure 2, the downstream segment of branch 2 ([DS]=15) connects to branch 1 at segment 7
([DHS]=7).
18
DATA PREPARATION
UHS=0 flow
US
Branch 1
DS
DHS=0 fl ow
UHS=-9 ups trea m da m i nfl ow
Branch 3
US
DS
DHS=-1 externa l hea d
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
17
18
19
20
Branch 2
DHS=7
DS
16
15
14
13
US
UHS=0 flow
12
11
Interna l hea d
Waterbody 1: Reservoir including Branches 1 and 2

Branch 4
DHS=18
DS
25
24
23
US
UHS=0 flow
22
21
Interna l hea d
Waterbody 2: Estuary below reservoir including Branches 3 and 4
Figure 2. Sample computational grid in the x-y plane showing cell numbering and branch
and water body connections.
Grid restrictions. The grid must satisfy the following restrictions:
1. Cell widths cannot increase with depth.
2. A branch may connect to other branches at its upstream or downstream segment,
but a branch may not enter or leave itself.
3. Two branches may not connect at the same segment of another branch.
The bathymetry input file contains the longitudinal grid spacing [DLX], initial water surface elevation [WSEL], segment orientations [PHI0], vertical grid spacing [H], bottom friction [FRICT], and
average cell widths [B].
After the bathymetry is generated, it should be checked to ensure the bottom elevation varies
smoothly and represents the average slope over appropriate portions of the waterbody for reservoirs
and estuaries. Oftentimes, minimum bottom widths are set at 5-15 m. This helps increase timesteps
with minimal impact on the volume-area-elevation curves. However, increasing widths in the bottom layers can affect water quality since sediment oxygen demand and nutrient fluxes are dependent on bottom surface areas. Refer to the bathymetry file and preprocessor output in the sample
applications for additional guidance in setting up the bathymetry.
Initial Conditions
Initial conditions are specified in the control, bathymetry, and vertical and/or longitudinal profile
input files. The control file specifies the following initial conditions:
1. Time (required). Starting [TMSTRT] and ending time [TMEND] of the simulation.
2. Temperatures (required) and concentrations (optional). The initial temperature
[IT2] and constituent concentrations [IC2]. If the grid is not initialized to a single
value, then a grid-wide vertical profile can be specified in the vertical profile input
file [VPRFN]. The option is also available to specify a longitudinally and vertically
19
tion
DATA PREPARATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
varying initial concentration for temperature and constituents via the longitudinal
profile file [LPRFN].
Inflows/outflows (optional). The number and location of inflows and outflows.
Restart (optional). If a previous run with the model was made specifying restart
conditions were to be written [RSOC] to an output file, then the user can specify the
model read the file [RSIC] and continue the simulation from that point.
Waterbody type (required). The waterbody can be specified as either saltwater or
freshwater [WTYPE].
Ice thickness (optional). The initial ice thickness [ICETHI].
Boundary Conditions
Inflows. The model recognizes the following inflows:
1. Upstream inflows (optional). Upstream inflows occur only at a branch's current
upstream segment [CUS], which may vary during a simulation. The model provides
the option to distribute inflows evenly throughout the inflow segment or place inflows according to density [PQC]. If the upstream inflow option is used, then a
separate file for inflow [QIN], a separate file for temperature [TIN], and, if constituents are modeled, a separate file containing constituent concentrations [CIN] for each
branch is required.
2. Tributary inflows (optional). Tributary inflows or point source loadings [QTR]
may enter any segment of the computational grid. If the current upstream segment
[CUS] number is greater than the segment the tributary enters, then the tributary
inflows are added into the current upstream segment to maintain the waterbody water balance. As in upstream inflows, the model provides the option to distribute
tributary inflows evenly throughout the inflow segment or place inflows according
to their density [PTRC]. An additional option to place inflows between two specified elevations is also included to better describe point source inflows such as
wastewater effluent discharged from a pipe. The number of tributaries [NTR] and
their segment location [ITR] are specified in the control file. If this option is used,
then file requirements for each tributary are the same as for upstream inflows.
3. Distributed tributary inflows (optional). Distributed tributary inflows or nonpoint
source loadings [DTRC] may be specified for any branch. The flow is distributed
throughout a branch weighted by segment surface areas. If this option is used, then
file requirements for each distributed tributary are the same as for upstream inflows.
4. Precipitation (optional). Precipitation [PRC] can be specified for each branch and
is distributed according to the segment surface areas. If this option is used, then file
requirements for each branch are the same as for upstream inflows.
5. Internal inflows (optional). Flows from gates, pipes, and pumps and over spillways
and weirs can now be routed internally in the computational grid from one segment
to another. This allows application of the model to highly engineered systems.
Outflows. The model recognizes the following outflows:
1. Downstream outflows (optional). Downstream outflows [QOUT] occur only at the
downstream segment [DS] of a branch. Selective withdrawal where the vertical extent of and flow distribution in the withdrawal zone is calculated by the model is
20
DATA PREPARATION
used for all outflows. Additionally, the bottom [KBSTR] and top layers [KTSTR]
below and above which outflow cannot occur can be specified by the user to include
the effects of upstream structures that restrict the selective withdrawal zone. Outflow will occur even if the outlet location is above the current water surface layer
[KT]. This is a necessity when calibrating water surface elevations. A separate file
for each branch is required.
2. Lateral withdrawals (optional). Lateral withdrawals [QWD] may be specified for
any active cell. The number of withdrawals [NWD], their segment location [IWD],
and their centerline elevation [EWD] must be specified in the control file. If this
option is used, a separate file for each withdrawal is required. Version 3 now uses
selective withdrawal for lateral withdrawals.
3. Evaporation (optional). Evaporation is calculated by the model from air [TAIR]
and dewpoint [TDEW] temperature and wind speed [WIND]. If a waterbody loses a
significant amount of water from evaporation that is not accounted for in the inflows,
then the user should include evaporation. Evaporative heat loss is always included
in the heat budget.
4. Internal outflows (optional). Flows from gates, pipes, and pumps and over spillways and weirs can now be routed internally in the computational grid from one
segment to another. This allows application of the model to highly engineered systems.
Head Boundary Conditions (optional). The model recognizes the following head boundary
1. External. The user may specify an external upstream [UHS] and/or downstream
head [DHS] boundary condition for each branch. This boundary specification is intended primarily for estuarine simulations although it has also been used for river
and reservoir applications. If this option is used, a separate file for time-varying
elevations, [EUH] and/or [EDH], a separate file for vertical temperature profiles,
[TUH] and/or [TDH], and, if constituents are modeled, a separate file containing vertical profiles for each constituent modeled, [CUH] and/or [CDH], must be specified
for each external head boundary condition.
2. Internal. Internal head boundary conditions are specified wherever one branch connects with another branch. The boundary surface elevation, temperatures, and constituent concentrations are calculated internally by the model.
Surface Boundary Conditions (required). The model requires the following surface boundary
conditions:
1. Surface heat exchange. Surface heat exchange is calculated by either of two methods using the input variable [SLHTC] in the control file. The first method uses equilibrium temperatures [ET] and coefficients of surface heat exchange [CSHE] to calculate surface heat exchange (Brady and Edinger, 1975). The second method uses a
term-by-term accounting for calculating surface heat exchange. For both methods,
latitude [LAT] and longitude [LONG] are specified in the control file and values for
air temperature [TAIR], dew point temperature [TDEW], wind speed [WIND] and direction [PHI], and cloud cover [CLOUD] must be included in the meteorological file.
If available, short wave solar radiation can be input directly into the model.
2. Solar radiation absorption. Distribution of solar radiation in the water column is
controlled by the fraction of solar radiation absorbed in the surface layer [BETA]
21
DATA PREPARATION
and the attenuation rate due to water [EXH2O], inorganic suspended solids
[EXINOR], and organic suspended solids [EXORG]. Values for [EXINOR] and
[EXORG] affect solar radiation only if constituents are modeled. These values are
specified in the control file.
3. Wind stress. Wind speed [WIND] and direction [PHI] must be supplied in the meteorological file [METFN]. Wind stress is an extremely important physical process
and should be included in all applications. The model allows the user to specify a
wind sheltering coefficient [WSC] which, when multiplied with the wind speed, reduces effects of the wind to take into account differences in terrain from the met
station and the prototype site. The sheltering coefficient is specified in the wind
sheltering file [WSCFN].
4. Gas exchange. The wind speed [WIND] supplied in the meteorological file is also
used for computing gas exchange at the water surface if dissolved oxygen and/or
total inorganic carbon are simulated. Gas exchange is also affected by the wind
sheltering coefficient [WSC].
Temperature transport cannot be turned off in the model. Temperature can be treated conservatively by turning off heat exchange computations [HEATC].
Hydraulic Parameters (required)
Dispersion/diffusion coefficients. The horizontal dispersion coefficients for momentum [AX] and
temperature/constituents [DX] are specified in the control file. They are presently time and space
invariant. Sensitivity analyses on numerous applications have shown the model is relatively insensitive to variations in the default values for reservoirs, but can be important in rivers and estuaries.
The vertical diffusion coefficients for momentum [AZ] and temperature/constituents [DZ] vary in
space and time and are computed by the model. The current version allows for a number of different vertical turbulence algorithms for sloping river sections and estuaries. Work is underway on a
k- vertical turbulence algorithm that will hopefully replace the various options now available.
Bottom friction. The latest version now allows the user the option of specifying longitudinally
varying values for the Chezy coefficient or Mannings N for bottom friction. The friction type is
specified in the control file [FRICC]. They are used in calculating boundary friction that varies
spatially as a function of exposed bottom area and temporally as a function of the flow field. The
values are specified in the bathymetry file.
Kinetic Parameters (optional)
There are more than 120 coefficients affecting constituent kinetics, although less than 10 are normally adjusted during water quality calibration. The values are specified in the control file. If
simulations include water quality, then the user should see Appendix C for a detailed discussion
of these coefficients.
Calibration Data (required)
Calibration data are used to provide initial and boundary conditions and assess model performance
during calibration. A great deal of thought should go into assessing the amount and type of data
22
DATA PREPARATION
necessary to adequately characterize and understand the limnology of a waterbody and to develop
the database required to support a water quality modeling effort. Gaugush (1986; 1987; 1993)
provides detailed information on sampling design and frequency. Determining the availability of
adequate calibration data should be done as early in the study as possible. If the user determines
calibration data are inadequate, then immediate steps should be taken to collect sufficient data.
Results will be suspect at best and will not withstand scrutiny at worst if the model is applied with
insufficient and/or inadequate calibration data. The following discussion provides an overview of
data required for the proper application of CE-QUAL-W2.
In-Pool. Proper application of mechanistic water quality models requires at least one set of in-pool
observed data. The preferred method is at least two sets of data encompassing different extremes
in the prototype (i.e., high and low flow years, warm and cold years, spring phytoplankton bloom
and no spring phytoplankton bloom, etc.). In-pool data is used to set initial conditions and assess
the model's ability to reproduce observed conditions. Given sufficient time and funding, all years
in which sufficient data are available should be included during model calibration.
Time-Varying Boundary Conditions. It cannot be overemphasized that data used to drive the
model needs to be as accurate as possible. For temperature calibration, this typically means using
continuous inflow temperatures or developing regression relationships for inflow temperatures
based on flow and air or equilibrium temperature to generate at least daily inflow temperatures (see
Ford & Stein, 1984). Equilibrium temperature is preferred since it includes more of the mechanisms affecting water temperature.
For meteorological data, use the most frequent data available. Previously, daily average values
were used to drive the model because earlier 1-D models used daily timesteps. Many modelers still
take hourly or three-hourly data and generate daily averages for model input. Any time data is
averaged, information is lost. For most reservoirs, thermocline depth and shape are a function of
two physical mechanisms - wind mixing and convective cooling. Using daily average air temperatures eliminates nighttime convective mixing that can be a very important physical process affecting epilimnetic depths and thermocline shapes for reservoirs. As another example, applying a daily
average wind speed and direction can generate an artificial water surface slope that incorrectly
drives hydrodynamics. Daily averaging of wind speeds can also result in much less energy input
into the model since the energy input by wind is a function of the wind speed cubed.
For water quality simulations, it is important the user provide accurate initial and time-varying
boundary conditions. If nutrient loadings are not adequately characterized, then it will be impossible for the model to accurately reproduce phytoplankton/nutrient/DO dynamics. It is a waste of
time and effort to collect in-pool data in support of water quality modeling when inflow concentrations/loadings have not been adequately characterized since they often drive the system. As in the
development of inflow temperatures, regressions relating concentration/loadings with flow and
possibly refined for season should be developed for tributary inflows. Ideally, several storm events
should be intensively sampled since this is when loadings are generally highest to a waterbody.
Also, point source loadings should be identified and loading estimates obtained. Some estimate of
non-point source loadings should also be made. In some cases, meteorological loading estimates
should be obtained. A software package, FLUX (Walker, 1986), is useful for generating loadings
over time from intermittent samples. Table 1 gives general guidelines for data collection.
23
tion
DATA PREPARATION
Kinetic Rates. Because water quality modeling is still very much an art with numerous rate coefficients available for adjustment during calibration, it is highly preferable to obtain actual measurements of these coefficients used in the water quality formulations. If all of the rate coefficients
have been determined for a waterbody, then any discrepancies between computed and observed
data highlight the model's shortcomings, help to identify the bounds of the model's predictive capabilities, and provide direction for efficient use of resources to provide a better understanding of
the system's water quality dynamics.
Ideally, a model should be used as a starting point for limnological investigations of a waterbody,
with the data and formulations continuously refined to reflect the increased understanding of the
system and processes gained over time. Unfortunately, this approach is rarely taken in practice due
in large part to the expense involved, but also, even more unfortunately, due to the inability of
aquatic biologists/limnologists and engineers to collaborate.
This cooperative approach between experimentalists and theoreticians is the main impetus behind
the tremendous advances in physics, chemistry, and, to some extent, biology (e.g., genetic research)
during the last century, but is seldom seen in the field of water quality modeling. A notable exception is the Chesapeake Bay Modeling Study (Cerco and Cole, 1994). Researchers in the Chesapeake Bay region, including both biologists and engineers, were actively involved in data acquisition and water quality formulations and provided invaluable knowledge and feedback during the
course of the study. This cooperative arrangement is continuing and should be a model for all future
water quality model development.
Table 1. General guidelines for in-pool water quality sampling.
Boundary Conditions
Minimum parameters
Additional parameters
Frequency
inflow/outflow
temperature
conductivity
dissolved oxygen
pH
total dissolved solids 1
daily or
continuous
total organic carbon
dissolved and/or particulate organic carbon

BOD 2
weekly w/
storm sampling
soluble reactive phosphorous

total phosphorous
total dissolved phosphorus

total inorganic phosphorus
dissolved inorganic phosphorus
weekly w/
storm sampling
nitrate+nitrite nitrogen
ammonium nitrogen
total Kjeldahl nitrogen

filtered total Kjeldahl nitrogen
weekly w/
storm sampling
total suspended solids 3

inorganic and/or volatile suspended solids
weekly w/
storm sampling
chlorophyll a
dissolved silica 4
alkalinity
weekly w/
storm sampling
In-Pool
Minimum parameters
Additional parameters
Frequency
24
DATA PREPARATION
Temperature5
Dissolved oxygen5
pH5
Conductivity5
total dissolved solids 1
monthly 6
phytoplankton biomass and type
monthly
dissolved and/or particulate organic carbon

BOD 2
monthly
Soluble reactive phosphorus

Total phosphorus7
total dissolved phosphorus

total inorganic phosphorus
dissolved inorganic phosphorus
monthly
nitrate + nitrite nitrogen

ammonium nitrogen7
total Kjeldahl nitrogen

filtered total Kjeldahl nitrogen
monthly
secchi depth/light transmission
monthly
total inorganic carbon

alkalinity
monthly
total suspended solids 3

inorganic and/or volatile suspended solids
monthly
dissolved/total iron 8
dissolved/total manganese 8
dissolved/total silica 8
total dissolved sulfide 8
sulfate 8
iron sulfide 8
monthly
Chlorophyll a7
Total organic carbon
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
enough samples to correlate to conductivity - important for density effects

used to characterize decay rates of organic matter
suspended solids affect phosphorus partitioning, light penetration, and density
can be limiting for diatom growth
preferably bi-weekly - samples should be taken at 1m intervals
1m intervals
minimum number of samples includes one each in epilimnion, metalimnion, and hypolimnion - preferred number of
samples (depending on depth) would be at 3m intervals with more frequent metalimnetic sampling
when concerned about sediment release during anoxic periods
Since water quality compartments are coupled, calibration of one compartment may affect other
compartments making calibration difficult. An understanding of the processes modeled as well
as knowledge of the system being simulated is an absolute must if the modeling effort is to succeed. A complete description of kinetic coefficients along with guidelines for appropriate default
and a range of literature values is given in Appendix C.
Constituents are grouped into four levels (Table 2). Level I includes constituents that have no
interaction with phytoplankton/nutrient/DO dynamics. Level II includes constituents affecting
phytoplankton/nutrient/DO dynamics. Level III includes constituents that interact with level II
constituentnts, but that are not transported. In level IV, alkalinity and total inorganic carbon are
transported by the model and are thus state variables. They are necessary for computing pH and
carbonate species.
25
tion
CALIBRATION
Table 2. Constituent levels and names.
Level
Constituent
Total dissolved solids (or salinity)

Generic constituents
Inorganic suspended solids
II
Dissolved inorganic phosphorus

Ammonium
Nitrate-nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate biogenic silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
CBOD
Dissolved oxygen
Zooplankton
Phytoplankton
III
Epiphyton
Organic sediments
Macrophytes
IV
Total inorganic carbon

Alkalinity
The user should spend time familiarizing himself with the water quality formulations in Appendix
B taking note of the assumptions used.
Data Analysis. An often overlooked step in model applications is plotting and analyzing observed
data for all stations and times for which data are available. Do not plot up just the data chosen for
calibration as the additional data may reveal important information about the prototype. Unfortunately, most mechanistic water quality modelers come from an engineering background with only
cursory exposure to limnology. If a limnologist is available, they should be consulted during this
stage to help in identifying the dominant processes occurring in the system. Once these have been
identified, then efforts should be made to ensure the dominant forcing functions are represented as
accurately as possible in the model, either as accurate boundary conditions or as additional water
quality formulations.
For example, phosphorus coprecipitation with calcite is not currently included in the model. If this
is known to be an important mechanism for phosphorus removal from the photic zone resulting
from pH changes due to phytoplankton primary production, then this mechanism should be included in the kinetic formulations. This is a common mechanism for many freshwater systems
located in limestone topography, such as Texas, Tennessee, and Florida. Another example would
be the presence of macrophytes that affect hydrodynamics, nutrient uptake rates, phytoplankton
26
CALIBRATION
primary production, and water column oxygen dynamics. Since macrophytes are not in the current
release, then they would have to be included in the hydrodynamic and kinetic formulations.
Another important task in data development and analysis is to analyze the data for reasonableness.
Checks for reasonableness should go beyond outlier checks to include checks to see if changes in
concentrations over space and time make limnological sense. For example, if reservoir hypolimnetic nitrate concentrations increase during anoxic conditions and inflow temperatures are warmer
than epilimnetic temperatures and/or inflow nitrate concentrations are less than the hypolimnetic
concentrations, then there is no way for nitrate concentrations to increase during this time in either
the prototype or in the model. So, there is no use wasting time during calibration trying to reproduce this behavior and the failure of the model to reproduce this behavior should not be viewed as
a shortcoming of the model. Another example would be observed reservoir hypolimnetic release
temperatures that were greater than the hypolimnetic temperatures. It would be impossible for the
model to match these temperatures during calibration
Simulations
Once the necessary data have been assembled into proper input format, then simulations can begin.
This section describes the recommended steps for obtaining meaningful model results.
Model Preparation
Input checks. A preprocessor program, pre.exe, performs checks of the control file for many errors
that can be detected by the preprocessor. Errors are written to the file PRE.ERR and warnings are
written to the file PRE.WRN. If no errors are detected, then input from the control file is written
to the file PRE.OPT. All errors should be corrected before proceeding any further. Warnings
should be investigated to ensure that what is being input into the model is what is intended. The
preprocessor should be run periodically during the calibration phase to ensure that errors have not
been introduced into the input files. However, do not assume that all is necessarily well if no
warnings or errors are reported.
Additionally, the user should check preprocessor output against inputs to ensure they are correct.
Further evaluation of control file input data must be performed by the user to ensure data the user
thinks he has input into the model is what the model is actually receiving. Additionally, all timevarying input data should be plotted and screened for errors. These plots will need to be included
in any final report and can eliminate a number of problems early on in the project.
Calibration
The next step is to begin calibration runs. Much of the literature refers to this step as calibration
and verification in which model coefficients are adjusted to match an observed data set (calibration)
and then the model is run on another independent data set without adjusting model coefficients
to see if the model reproduces observed data in the prototype (verification in most circles, but variously called confirmation, validation, substantiation, etc. as numerous water quality modelers object to the word verification).
27
tion
CALIBRATION
This separation is artificial and wrong. If a model does not reproduce observed data (and, more
importantly, trends in data) for the "verification" data, then any good modeler will adjust coefficients, review model assumptions, include new processes, or collect additional data to adequately
match both sets of data. Often, application to additional sets of data improves the fit to the first.
The artificiality of this concept has led to applications in which modelers have used May, June, and
July data for "calibration" and August, September, and October data of the same year for "verification" so they can state the model has been "calibrated/verified".
The following examples will further illustrate the artificiality of the current concept of calibration/verification. Consider the following summary of observed data.
Year
Flow
Stratification
Fall algal bloom
Minimum DO at dam
1989
high
weak
yes
0 ppm
1990
low
strong
no
3 ppm
1991
average
medium
yes
1 ppm
1992
average
medium
yes
1 ppm
1993
low
strong
yes
1 ppm
1994
high
weak
no
3 ppm
Based on the currently accepted definition of calibration/verification, which of the years should be
chosen for calibration and which should be chosen for verification? A case could be made for 1989
for calibration and 1994 for verification because of a fall phytoplankton bloom in 1989 and its
absence in 1994. Additionally, the minimum dissolved oxygen at the dam was different between
the years. If the model were to reproduce this behavior, then confidence could be placed in the
models ability to reproduce dissolved oxygen and phytoplankton blooms for the correct reasons.
However, both years were years of high flow and using them would not test the models ability to
reproduce prototype behavior under different flow regimes.
Cases could be made for other combinations of calibration/verification years and different modelers
would probably choose different calibration/verification years, so there doesnt appear to be one
correct answer. In actuality, there is a correct answer. Model all the years and model them
continuously. Modeling them continuously would eliminate separate calibration and verification
years or data sets so the model could not be considered calibrated and verified. However, if the
model reproduces the wide variation in prototype behavior between all the years, a lot more confidence can be placed in the models ability to reproduce prototype behavior for the right reasons
than if the model were calibrated for one year and verified for another year.
Another example of the problems with the currently accepted calibration/verification approach
to establishing model credibility is illustrated in the following table.
Year
Dominant algae
Flow
Minimum DO at dam
1979
1986
1994
diatoms
greens
bluegreens
average
average
average
5 ppm
3 ppm
0 ppm
Which year should be used for calibration and which year should be used for verification? Again,
the best approach would be to model all three years, but since data do not exist for all the intervening years from 1979 to 1994, the simulation could not be continuous. An analysis of the data
28
CALIBRATION
indicates a clear progression of eutrophication from 1979 to 1994 based on phytoplankton progression and increasing hypoxia. According to the current concept of calibration/verification, all
kinetic coefficients should be the same for all simulation years. However, the different dominant
phytoplankton groups will have different growth, mortality, respiration, excretion, and settling rates
and different light and nutrient growth rate half-saturation constants between the years. Keeping
these values constant between calibration years would fly in the face of reality.
Additionally, the sediment oxygen demand has clearly changed because of eutrophication, so the
values used in the zero-order sediment compartment should be different for the three years. As can
be seen from just these two examples, all years should be considered calibration years and rate
coefficients in some cases should change between different calibration data sets if the prototype is
to be represented accurately.
Another concept associated with calibration/verification of a model is a post audit. Post audits
are recommended whenever management changes are made as a result of modeling studies. A post
audit involves making the management changes and then collecting data to see if the hoped for
changes in prototype behavior based on model guidance have taken place. This appears to be a
very reasonable concept and straightforward test of a given models simulation capabilities and, if
the hoped for changes occur, then a great deal of confidence can be placed in the models simulative
capabilities.
But what if the changes in water quality such as an improvement in minimum dissolved oxygen or
extent of hypoxia does not occur? Can one then conclude that the model is not very good and little
confidence can be placed in model results? The answer is no and the reason why is that no model
can be used to predict the future. A model can only be used to determine what might have occurred
if a particular set of boundary forcing functions were to occur in the prototype.
For example, hypoxia in Chesapeake Bay is a result of not only nutrient and organic matter loading,
but also the degree of stratification that inhibits vertical mixing and reaeration. The degree of
stratification is in large part a function of freshwater inflow. The higher the inflow, the greater the
areal extent of density stratification in the Bay resulting in a greater areal extent of hypoxic waters.
Suppose a model of the Bay predicted that a 40% nitrogen loading reduction decreased the areal
extent of hypoxia by 20%. Based on this result, loadings were then reduced by 40% for five years
and hypoxia did not decrease but actually increased during this time period.
Since the exact opposite occurred from what the model predicted, can the modeling study be concluded to be a failure? The answer is no. Suppose that the model results assume average freshwater
river inflows and the five years after implementing loading reductions were high flow years, which
increased the extent of hypoxia compared to an average flow year due strictly to physical effects.
The only way to tell if the conclusions based on the model study were erroneous would be to model
the five years using observed boundary conditions for this period and see if the model reproduced
the observed increase rather than decrease in hypoxia. Thus, if a post audit yielded water quality
different from expected water quality based on model results, this has no reflection on a given
models ability to reproduce water quality in the prototype. Again, models cannot be used to predict
the future, only what might have been.
Ideally, calibration should involve multiple data sets encompassing as many variations and extremes as possible in the prototype. A model's ability to reproduce prototype behavior under a
29
tion
CALIBRATION
variety of conditions gives the modeler more confidence in the model's ability to accurately simulate the prototype under proposed conditions. To put it very simply, a model is a theory about
behavior in the real world. A theory is continuously tested against all observed data, and, if it does
not match the data, then the theory should either be modified or a new one developed that more
closely agrees with observed data.
Model data/comparison. The model produces the following output files for displaying results:
1. Profile file [PRFFN]. This file is used to plot observed versus predicted vertical
profiles for temperature and constituents at a given segment.
2. Time series file [TSRFN]. This file is used to plot time histories of water surface
elevations, flows, temperatures and constituent concentrations for user specified
computational cells. This file also contains information to plot out the time history
of the variable timestep and average timestep.
3. Contour plot file [CPLFN]. This file is used to plot contours of temperature and
constituents along the waterbody length.
4. Vector plot file [VPLFN]. This file is used to plot velocity vectors determined from
horizontal and vertical velocities. The output is useful in analyzing flow patterns in
the waterbody.
5. Spreadsheet file [SPRFN]. This file is similar to the profile except the output is
suitable for importing into a spreadsheet type database for subsequent plotting.
A description of the output from each file and how to use the information is given in Appendix C.
The current release version requires the user to develop plotting capabilities from these files. This
is most often done using the spreadsheet output file and time series output file and developing
macros to process the data.
Calibration is an iterative process whereby model coefficients are adjusted until an adequate fit of
observed versus predicted data is obtained. Unfortunately, there are no hard and fast guidelines for
determining when an adequate fit is obtained. The user must continually ask himself "is the model
giving useful results based on model formulations, assumptions and input data?". If it is not, then
the user must determine if the inability of the model to produce useful results is due to the use of
the model in an inappropriate manner (i.e., hydrostatic approximation is invalid, one phytoplankton
group is not sufficient to capture phytoplankton/nutrient/DO interactions, wind speed function for
evaporation is inappropriate for the waterbody, etc.), model formulations are insufficient to describe known prototype behavior, or if input data are insufficient to describe the system dynamics.
Another important point to keep in mind during calibration is that a model may give inadequate
results for a given spatial and/or temporal scale, but at another scale may reasonably represent the
dynamics of the prototype. For example, the model may fail to predict a short-term phytoplankton
bloom using monthly inflowing phytoplankton and nutrient concentrations, but may adequately
represent phytoplankton production over the summer stratification period. The model may thus be
useful in determining a waterbody's long-term response to nutrient loading reductions but be inadequate in addressing short-term responses to a nutrient reduction strategy. In summary, it is not
always necessary for model output to match all of the observed data for the model to provide meaningful results.
30
CALIBRATION
The usual sequence for calibration is to first calibrate the water budget (or water surface elevation),
then calibrate temperature (preferably salinity for estuarine applications), and finally water quality.
Keep in mind water quality calibration can affect temperature/salinity calibration. A description of
each follows. Calibration is separated into different sections for river, lake/reservoir, and estuarine
applications.
Lake/Reservoir
Water budget
The water budget is checked by comparing predicted elevations with observed elevations. Errors
in the water budget are generated by the following:
1. Incorrect bathymetry. The user should carefully check the volume-area-elevation
table produced by the model to ensure it closely matches the project volume-areaelevation table. If it does not, then the bathymetry should be checked carefully to
ensure there are no errors. In some cases, additional sediment range surveys may be
necessary to adequately define the bathymetry. It may also be necessary to include
branches that were not included in the initial bathymetry. Also, keep in mind that
development of the original volume-area-elevation table was subject to the same
errors used in developing the volume-area-elevation table for the application. In
some applications, the new volume-area-elevation table was deemed more accurate
than the original.
2. Storm events. Errors in the water budget due to storm events can be determined by
comparing predicted with observed elevations using output from the time series
plots. If the error is generated during storm events, then the user should check to
see if precipitation must be included and/or if more tributaries need to be included
than were originally specified. The user may need to use a hydrologic model to
determine inflows during storm events for ungaged tributaries. An alternative
method is to apportion inflows for ungaged tributaries based on their watershed areas.
3. Incomplete inflow data. A substantial amount of inflow is often unaccounted for
when using gauged inflows. The unaccounted inflows can include minor tributary,
precipitation, stormwater, and wastewater treatment plant contributions. The distributed tributary option provides the user with a means to account for these contributions. This option distributes inflows into every branch segment weighted by the
segment surface area.
4. Evaporation. If evaporation in the region is significant and is not accounted for in
inflows, then it should be included using the evaporation option [EVC].
5. Seepage. Seepage gains or losses can be significant for some waterbodies. The
model does not explicitly handle seepage at present, but the coding is such that seepage can be readily included in the calculations as an additional rate term in the flow
source/sink array [QSS]. Several applications required specifying seepage losses
through the dam in order to properly calibrate temperature.
6. Inaccurate Inflow/Outflow Measurements. Gauged inflows and reservoir outflows are notoriously inaccurate with typical measurement errors of 5-10%. The
model is very sensitive to inflow/outflow error measurements that can result in significant errors in water level predictions.
31
tion
CALIBRATION
Typically, the user will first plot observed versus predicted water surface elevations for the simulation period after all the inflow/outflow data have been collected and the model is running to completion. The latest version contains a program for computing reservoir water balances that will
initially compute the additional flows necessary for reproducing observed water surface elevations,
but it will not normally generate a perfect water balance. The computed flows can then be manually
adjusted to more closely match observed water surface elevations. Normally, the computed flows
are initially incorporated using the distributed tributary option in the model with interpolation
turned off so that the model sees the flows as a step function since this is how the flow is computed
by the utility. Using this option, the flows necessary to compute the water balance are distributed
into the surface layer weighted according to segment surface area.
Keep in mind that this method only provides the necessary flows to complete the water balance.
The user must decide how to incorporate them into the model in a realistic fashion as the method
of incorporation can have a large impact on temperature and water quality calibration another
fork in the road in the art of water quality modeling. The recommended procedure is to first plot
up and analyze the computed flows to see if they provide any information as to the source of the
error.
For example, if the majority of the computed flows are negative and the inflows are deemed accurate, then this would indicate that the outflow has been underestimated. It could be due to seepage
into groundwater or seepage through the dam. If the hypolimnetic temperatures were also being
underpredicted, which would indicate that the hypolimnetic residence time was being overpredicted, then incorporating the computed flows into an additional outflow could solve both problems
at once. The point to be made is that various methods of incorporating the computed flows during
temperature and water quality calibration should be tried to determine if they have an affect on
temperature or water quality. Whichever method improves the calibration is the method to use.
The following plot illustrates the accuracy normally expected for a reservoir water surface elevation
calibration. The computed elevations overlay the observed elevations.
32
CALIBRATION
Allatoona Reservoir
Computed vs. Observed Water Surface Elevation
260
259
258
1996
1997
Water Surface Elevation, m
1992
257
256
255
254
1993
253
252
251
250
0
100
200
300
Julian Day
Figure 3. Allatoona Reservoir computed (lines) vs. observed (symbols) water surface elevations for 1992, 1993, 1996, and 1997.
Hydrodynamics and Temperature
The earliest one-dimensional mechanistic reservoir models included only temperature. As a result,
temperature was the only model prediction that could be used for hydrodynamic calibration. Since
temperature is affected by surface and bottom heat exchange and is therefore nonconservative, it is
not the best parameter for calibrating hydrodynamics. Salinity, which is conservative, has historically been considered the ideal constituent for hydrodynamic calibration. However, this is generally feasible only for estuarine applications where salinity is routinely monitored. Dissolved solids
are not conservative and are generally not a good substitute for salinity during calibration except
in waterbodies where the conservative assumption is appropriate. The previous three sentences
echo the prevailing sentiment of hydrodynamic modelers. In reality, there is no ideal constituent
that should be used for hydrodynamic calibration. Each constituent can contribute knowledge
about the system and can have an impact on the hydrodynamic calibration.
Experience has shown that dissolved oxygen and phytoplankton are often much better indicators
of proper hydrodynamic calibration than either temperature or salinity. There are several reasons
for this. First, gradients in dissolved oxygen and phytoplankton are often present at different locations in the water column than either temperature or salinity gradients. Consequently, they can
provide additional information as to the correctness of the hydrodynamic calibration beyond either
temperature and/or salinity alone. Second, dissolved oxygen is much more dynamic than either
temperature or salinity and readily responds to wind events including seiching, with the anoxic
zone often moving several kilometers over a day in response to the hydrodynamics. Phytoplankton
33
tion
CALIBRATION
distributions are also affected by the hydrodynamics. Further discussion and examples will be
presented in the section on water quality calibration. Nevertheless, temperature and/or salinity
should always be the first step during hydrodynamic calibration, with the hydrodynamic calibration
further refined during water quality calibration.
Computed velocities can be compared with velocity and flow measurements obtained from an
acoustic Doppler current profiler (ADCP) to additionally evaluate the models hydrodynamic performance. However, care must be taken when comparing model velocities with observed velocities
to ensure ADCP measurements are comparable to the laterally averaged velocities generated by the
model.
Coefficients affecting temperature and their default values are given in Table 3. The eddy viscosities, Chezy coefficient, and wind sheltering coefficient directly affect hydrodynamics that affect
heat and constituent transport. The remaining coefficients directly affect temperature that affects
hydrodynamics. Of these, the last two coefficients affect temperature only if constituents are modeled. See Appendix C for a more detailed description of these coefficients and their effects.
Table 3. Coefficients affecting thermal calibration
Coefficient
FORTRAN Name
Default
Longitudinal eddy viscosity
[AX]
1 m2 sec-1
Longitudinal eddy diffusivity
[DX]
1 m2 sec-1
Chezy coefficient or Mannings N
[FRICT]
70 m2 sec-1
Wind sheltering coefficient
[WSC]
Calibration parameter
Solar radiation absorbed in surface layer
[BETA]
0.45
Extinction coefficient for pure water
[EXH20]
0.45 m-1
Extinction coefficient for inorganic solids
[EXINOR]
0.01 m-1
Extinction coefficient for organic solids
[EXORG]
0.2 m-1
In addition to the above coefficients, temperature predictions are also affected by the surface heat
exchange algorithm specified, mainstem and tributary inflows, inflow temperatures and their placement, outlet and withdrawal specifications, the numerical solution scheme, and bathymetric and
meteorological data. Again, always represent the prototype as accurately as possible.
Applications on over 400 waterbodies under a wide variety of conditions have shown the model
generates remarkably accurate temperature predictions using default values when provided accurate geometry and boundary conditions. The wind-sheltering coefficient [WSC] has the most effect
on temperature during calibration and should be adjusted first. Previous applications varied the
wind sheltering coefficient from 0.5-0.9 for mountainous and/or dense vegetative canopy and 1.0
for open terrain. In a very few cases, the wind-sheltering coefficient [WSC] has been increased
above 1.0 to account for funneling effects on systems with steep banks. The user should also run
sensitivity analyses on the other coefficients to gain a "feel" for how they affect temperature predictions.
34
CALIBRATION
Calibration problems. Difficulties during temperature calibration can often be traced to the following:
1. Inflows and Inflow temperatures. Accurate inflows and inflow temperatures are
desirable for all applications, but they are critical for waterbodies with short residence times or during high inflow periods. Temperature calibration will be difficult
using monthly inflow temperatures for a waterbody with a one week residence time.
Methods exist for generating more frequent inflow temperatures based on flow and
meteorological data (Ford and Stein, 1986), but there is no substitute for actual measurements.
2. Meteorological data. Many difficulties are associated with extrapolating weather
station meteorological data to a waterbody site. Weather stations are typically located in different terrain and at large distances from the prototype. Frontal movements can occur at different times over the waterbody and meteorological station
resulting in model predictions that are in closer agreement either earlier or later than
the actual comparison date. Methods for addressing these problems include adjustment of the wind sheltering coefficient [WSC], use of an alternative meteorological
station, averaging data from several meteorological stations, separating a waterbody
into regions applying data from different meteorological stations, and comparison
of observed data using model output either before or after the observed date. If the
user has the luxury of obtaining calibration data before applying the model, portable
weather stations exist which can be deployed on the waterbody. Obviously, this is
the preferred method.
3. Outflow data. The addition of the selective withdrawal algorithm in Version 2.0
has reduced many of the previous problems of accurately representing outflows.
However, problems still arise. In the application of CE-QUAL-W2 to Bluestone
Reservoir, Tillman and Cole (1994) were unable to reproduce observed temperature
stratification without limiting the lower withdrawal layer. Subsequent investigation
showed that withdrawal was limited by trash accumulation that effectively acted as
a submerged weir. This was a problem generated by inadequate knowledge of the
prototype and not a problem with the model. Indeed, this is an example of a model
giving insight into the behavior of the prototype.
4. Bathymetry. Several previous applications of the model encountered difficulties
during temperature calibration until the bathymetry was revisited. Check the assumptions made during the development of the bathymetry to ensure they are not
the source of the problem. Starting points include grid resolution that affects the
models ability to define sharp thermal gradients and bottom slope, volume-area-elevation accuracy that can have a marked effect on hypolimnetic temperatures since
the volumes are generally small near the bottom, and water surface areas that affect
the area available for surface heat exchange. Branch definition has also been found
to have an effect on temperature predictions.
In order to illustrate how accurate reservoir temperature modeling has become with CE-QUALW2, Table 4 lists calibration results for 70 reservoir thermal simulations. The statistic presented
is the absolute mean error (AME) computed as follows:
AME =
35
tion
| Predicted - Observed |
number of observations
CALIBRATION
Although a number of other statistics have been used when evaluating model results, the AME
provides the best indication of model performance since it is directly interpretable. For example,
an AME of 0.5 C means that the model results are, on the average, within 0.5 C of the observed
data. As can be seen, model predictions for all the reservoirs are within 1 C and most of them are
much less.
Table 4. Reservoir thermal simulations with error statistics for station closest to
dam.
Reservoir
# years AME, C
Reservoir
# years AME, C
Allatoona
4
0.6
36
Monroe
4
0.7
Alum3Creek
1
0.5
37
Neely Henry
2
0.6
Alum
Creek
Barklay
1
0.5
38
Neversink
3
0.4
1
Bluestone
2
0.5
39
Norman
3
0.7
Barklay
Brownlee
2
0.6
40
Oxbow
1
0.3
Bull 1Run 1
2
0.5
41
Oahe
2
0.9
Bluestone
Bull
Run 2
2
0.7
42
Occoquan
1
0.9
2
Burnsville
1
0.9
43
Paint Creek
1
0.4
Brownlee
Caesar Creek
1
0.6
44
Paintsville
1
0.4
2
Cannonsville
5
0.7
45
Patoka
3
0.7
Bull Run
Cave2 Run
4
0.8
46
Pepacton
3
0.6
C.J.
Strike
2
0.7
47
Pineflat
5
0.6
Burnsville
Croton
1
0.7
48
Powell
1
0.7
1
Cumberland
1
0.5
49
J. Percy Priest
3
0.8
Caesar
Creek
Deer Creek,
OH
1
0.4
50
Quabbin
1
0.7
1
Deer
Creek, ID
5
0.8
51
Richard B. Russell
3
0.5
Cannonsville
DeGray
8
0.9
52
Rhodiss
2
0.6
5
Cave
Fishtrap
Run
1
0.8
53
Riffe
1
0.7
Fort4Peck
2
0.7
54
Rimov
1
0.5
C.J. Strike
Francis
Case
2
0.7
55
Rondout
3
0.5
2
Herrington
1
0.7
56
Sakakawea
2
0.7
Croton
Hickory
1
0.5
57
Schoharie
2
0.8
1
J.W. Flanagan
1
0.5
58
Shasta
1
0.6
Cumberland
Jordanelle
3
0.7
59
Shepaug
1
0.6
1
J. Strom Thurmond
5
0.9
60
Stonewall Jackson
2
0.5
Deer James
Creek, OH
1
0.6
61
Toledo Bend
1
0.7
1
Houston
6
0.5
62
Taylorsville
2
0.9
Deer Creek, ID
Lanier
2
0.9
63
Tolt
1
0.5
5
Loch Raven
1
0.9
64
Travis
1
0.3
DeGray
Long8Lake
1
0.5
65
Wabush
1
0.6
Lost
Creek
1
0.6
66
Wachusett
4
0.7
Fishtrap
Maumelle
2
0.7
67
Weiss
2
0.6
1
Mayfield
1
0.6
68
West Point
3
0.8
Fort
Peck
Moehnetalsperre
1
0.4
69
Walter F. George
2
0.6
2
Mountain
Island
1
0.7
70
Youghiogheny
2
0.8
Francis Case
2
Herrington
The following examples
illustrate CE-QUAL-W2s ability to reproduce observed temperatures on
1
a variety of systemsHickory
with widely varying temperature regimes. On all plots, xs represent observed
1are scaled to represent 0.5C. The dotted lines represent computed model
data and their widths
J.W. Flanagan
values. The absolute1mean error (AME) and root mean square error (RMS) are also included for
each date in orderJordanelle
to help in interpreting the predictive capability of the model. These statistics
1
should always be
included
in plots of computed versus observed data since plots can often be misStrom Thurmond
leading depending upon
the
scale of the x and y axes and the size of the marker used to represent
5
Houston
the observed data (a common technique used to make model results appear better than they actually
6
are).
Lanier
2
Loch Raven
1
Chapter 3 Model Lost
ApplicaCreek
tion
36
1
Maumelle
2
Mayfield
1
Moehnetalsperre
1
Mountain Island
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
CALIBRATION
Pineflat Reservoir. Pineflat Reservoir is located in California near the base of the Sierra Madre
mountain range. One of its primary uses is for providing irrigation water during the summer growing season. Consequently, the reservoir is drawn down as much as 70 m over the summer during
drought years. The model was used to provide operational guidance for a temperature control
device that will be installed in the reservoir to optimize the storage of cold water for downstream
releases at the end of summer.
Figure 4 shows the results of temperature predictions for 1989. The thermal regime exhibits two
thermoclines starting in early spring. As can be seen, the reservoir was drawn down over 40 m
during the summer. During 1993, the development of the two thermoclines was delayed until the
end of summer (Figure 5). CE-QUAL-W2 correctly captured the thermal regimes for both years
and the differences in the thermal regimes between the two years.
Sensitivity analyses showed that temperature predictions were very sensitive to inflow temperatures. Calibration consisted of adjusting inflow temperatures to more closely match in-pool temperature profiles. Because calibration showed the importance of accurate inflow temperatures in
order to properly calibrate the model, additional fieldwork was done to obtain accurate inflow temperatures. During this effort, it was discovered that the location where inflow temperatures were
taken showed a lateral variation in the river of over 5C due to hypolimnetic discharges from an
upstream reservoir that did not completely mix laterally. Additionally, during extreme drawdown,
it was shown that inflow temperatures increased by nearly 2C from measured temperatures as the
upstream boundary of the model moved downstream approximately 10 km due to the large drawdowns that the reservoir was periodically subjected to.
Figure 4. 1989 Pineflat Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.
37
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 5. 1993 Pineflat Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.

Bluestone. Bluestone Reservoir is located in the mountains of West Virginia. The reservoir has
an average hydraulic retention time of less than a week during the summer. When first calibrating
for temperature, the model predicted essentially no thermal stratification during the summer
whereas the observed data showed strong stratification beginning at a depth of about eight meters.
Based on the short residence time during the summer, model predictions seemed quite reasonable.
However, stratification was present in both 1981 and 1983 indicating that stratification was not a
rare occurrence.
A number of mechanisms were proposed to explain the observed stratification including groundwater seepage and extreme wind sheltering. Including these in the model did not result in any
improvements in model predictions. Finally, the lower limit of selective withdrawal was set at the
depth corresponding to the outlet elevation. Results of the simulation are shown in Figure 6 and
Figure 7. Subsequent investigations at the reservoir revealed that accumulated debris at the level
of the trash racks was acting like a submerged weir that limited the bottom of the withdrawal zone
to the elevation of the trash racks. This is an example of a model providing insight into previously
unknown behavior of the prototype.
38
CALIBRATION
Figure 6. 1981 Bluestone Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.
Figure 7. 1983 Bluestone Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.

Richard B. Russell. Richard B. Russell (RBR) is located immediately upstream of J. Strom Thurmond Reservoir ( JST) on the Savannah River bordering Georgia and South Carolina. The model
was used to investigate the effects of proposed pump-storage operations in which water would be
pumped into RBR from JST and reused for hydropower operations during peak energy demands.
An important concern was what effect pump-storage operations would have on the thermal regime
in RBR. The model was subsequently applied to 1996, a year in which extensive pump-storage
operations occurred. In order to simulate the effects of pump-storage, the model code was altered
to allow dynamic linkage of RBR and JST reservoirs.
This is a stringent test of the model's simulation capabilities because the dynamic linkage required
accurate temperature simulations in RBR in order to provide accurate inflow temperatures to JST.
Likewise, accurate temperature predictions were required in JST in order to provide accurate temperatures entering RBR during pumpback.
Figure 8-Figure 10 show the results of the simulations. The model correctly predicted the approximately 4C increase in hypolimnetic temperatures compared to previous years that did not have
pump-storage operations. No calibration was involved for this simulation. Results are from the
first run of the model for 1996 using default hydrodynamic/temperature calibration parameters and
39
tion
CALIBRATION
a wind-sheltering coefficient determined from calibration to two previous years that did not include
pump-storage operations.
Figure 8. 1988 Richard B. Russell computed versus observed temperatures.

40
CALIBRATION

Paintsville Reservoir. Paintsville Reservoir is a US Army Corps of Engineers reservoir located in
Kentucky. The reservoirs thermal regime is typical of deep-storage reservoirs with hydraulic retention times greater than four months. Figure 11 illustrates the model's ability to reproduce the
springtime development of the thermocline, the strong thermocline present in late summer, and fall
overturn.
During initial calibration, the model consistently overpredicted hypolimnetic temperatures. No
parameter adjustment (wind-sheltering or light absorption/extinction) resulted in an acceptable calibration. Realizing that hypolimnetic temperatures are influenced by residence time, a sensitivity
analysis was performed in which the widths were increased uniformly (thus increasing hypolimnetic residence time) until the predicted hypolimnetic temperatures matched the observed temperatures. Subsequently, it was determined that the original development of the bathymetry did not
include two branches that accounted for approximately 15% of the storage in the reservoir. In this
case, calibration consisted of ensuring that the volume-elevation relationship was accurately described.
41
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 11. Paintsville Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.

Brownlee Reservoir. Brownlee Reservoir is located on the Snake River in Idaho and is operated
by Idaho Power. Brownlees thermal regime is very distinctive with the thermocline starting at
approximately 30 m below the water surface. Figure 12 and Figure 13 illustrate the models ability
to simulate the thermal regime in Brownlee.
During initial temperature calibration, the model predicted hypolimnetic temperatures greater than
15C, whereas the observed temperatures were always near 5C. No parameter adjustment allowed
for adequate temperature calibration. An analysis of the system showed that the theoretical residence time during the summer was less than two months indicating that model predictions of
warmer hypolimnetic temperatures were more reasonable than the observed data.
Additionally, the thermal structure in Brownlee exhibits a well-mixed epilimnion approximately
30 m in depth. Wind mixing could not supply sufficient energy to account for the depth of the
epilimnion. Therefore, it was concluded that outflow dynamics had to be responsible for the observed thermal regime. As in the Bluestone application, the bottom layer for selective withdrawal
was set at approximately the same depth as the thermocline. Subsequent investigations revealed
the presence of a ledge below the outlet that was limiting the outflow to the level of the observed
thermocline.
42
CALIBRATION
Figure 12. 1992 Brownlee Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.
Figure 13. 1995 Brownlee Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.

C.J. Strike Reservoir. C.J. Strike Reservoir is located on the Snake River in Idaho upstream of
Brownlee Reservoir and is also operated by Idaho Power. Stratification is not nearly as pronounced
as in Brownlee Reservoir due to the smaller volume of C.J. Strike and subsequent shorter residence
time.
43
tion
CALIBRATION
As noted in the discussion for Brownlee Reservoir, the relatively short residence time during the
summer should result in considerable hypolimnetic heating as cold water is withdrawn and replaced
by warmer waters from above. Temperature calibration consisted of adjusting the wind-sheltering
coefficient until adequate agreement was obtained between computed and observed temperatures.
Figure 14. C.J. Strike Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.

These examples illustrate the models ability to reproduce complex thermal regimes that differ
widely depending upon a particular reservoirs morphometry, location, surrounding terrain, and
operations with a minimum of parameter adjustment. The only parameter adjusted was the windsheltering coefficient that was used to adjust wind speeds taken at a given meteorological station
to the reservoir surface. Values ranged from 0.6 for small reservoirs located in mountainous terrains to 1.0 for large reservoirs located in open terrain.
44
CALIBRATION
The preceding discussion is not meant to imply that the model is plug and play and requires no
calibration with regards to temperature. Greater discrepancies between computed and observed
temperature profiles were always present at the beginning of thermal calibration for all the presented examples.
Aside from adjustment of wind sheltering, calibration consisted of determining whether known
inaccuracies in a given forcing function could be responsible for the discrepancies in the computed
temperature profiles and then describing the forcing function more accurately. This procedure included the following:
1. Adjustment of volume-elevation relationship to ensure that residence time was accurately represented
2. Adjustment of bottom elevation to ensure that computed and observed bottom elevations for the deepest station were at least as deep as the observed data
3. Adjustment of inflow temperatures to more closely match temperatures at the most
upstream station
4. Generation of more frequent inflow temperatures based on equilibrium temperature
5. Using more frequent outflow data than daily average values, particularly for peaking
hydropower systems
6. Ensuring that the outflow distribution for multi-level outlets was accurately described
7. Ensuring sufficient longitudinal/vertical grid resolution
8. Obtaining more frequent meteorological data than daily average values
9. Limiting the bottom zone for selective withdrawal (all instances were eventually
physically justified in the prototype)
10. Including additional sources of outflow due to dam leakage or seepage to groundwater
11. Ensuring multiple branch descriptions were accurately represented
12. Using the most accurate numerical scheme (ULTIMATE with [THETA] set to 0) and
including the effects of vertical turbulence [VISC] and internal gravity waves
[CELC] in the autostepping stability requirements
As a result of the numerous thermal applications of the model, an important concept that has
emerged is that the more accurately the behavior of the prototype is described, the more accurately
the model responds. Always keep this in mind during model calibration.
Water Quality
The following discussion can serve as a starting point for reservoir water quality calibration. However, each application is different and requires knowledge about prototype behavior and the dominant water quality processes that are occurring in the prototype before ever attempting to model
water quality. Black box application of any model is a recipe for failure.
Dissolved Oxygen. Once the user has a good understanding of the dominant water quality processes occurring in the prototype and ensures they are accurately represented in the model, then the
user should begin dissolved oxygen calibration. The zero-order SOD should be used initially as it
is essentially a pure calibration parameter that allows for back calculating the oxygen uptake rate
in the water column. If dissolved oxygen profiles in the water column are exactly matched, then
the values for SOD used in calibration are very close to the actual uptake rates of dissolved oxygen
45
tion
CALIBRATION
in the water column. The problem with using only the zero-order SOD for water column DO calibration is that the model will not be sensitive to load increases/decreases that directly affect water
column DO uptake and sediment nutrient recycling that affect phytoplankton primary production.
However, this is seldom the case, particularly where loadings to the system in the form of allochthonous organic matter (or CBOD), autochthonous organic matter due to phytoplankton production, and/or ammonium are important forcing functions for water column dissolved oxygen that are
subject to change over time. Unfortunately, for systems where allochthonous loadings of organic
matter are important, rarely are there sufficient boundary condition data to adequately represent the
loadings to the system.
Particular care should be paid to the timing and duration of events involving phytoplankton, epiphyton, and dissolved oxygen. If the model does not represent the onset, extent, and duration of
anoxic conditions, then nutrient dynamics will not be represented either. They in turn affect phytoplankton production that affects dissolved oxygen. Timing of the onset of dissolved oxygen depletion is greatly influenced by the temperature rate multipliers used for organic matter and the
sediments. A change in the lower temperature [OMT1] of 1C in the temperature rate formulation
can shift the initial uptake of water column dissolved oxygen by as much as two weeks. The same
effect can be obtained by adjusting the value of the multiplier [OMK1]. Much of the art in water
quality modeling is involved in calibrating phytoplankton/nutrient/DO dynamics.
The following plots illustrate the models ability to reproduce widely varying reservoir dissolved
oxygen regimes. With the exception of the zero-order SOD rates, all kinetic coefficients were set
to their default values thus ensuring that the model was applied with a minimum of curve fitting.
In all likelihood, using the same values for kinetic parameters such as phytoplankton growth and
settling rates is not correct. However, the point to be made is that the model is capable of reproducing very different water quality regimes without having to resort to extensive, site-specific parameter manipulations.
46
CALIBRATION
Figure 15. Allatoona Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 16. Brownlee Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
47
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 17. C.J. Strike Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 18. DeGray Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
48
CALIBRATION
Figure 19. Richard B. Russell Reservoir computed vs. observed DO, March through June,
1988.
Figure 20. Richard B. Russell Reservoir computed vs. observed DO, June through October,
1988.
49
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 21. 1996 Richard B. Russell computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 22. Neely Henry Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
50
CALIBRATION
Figure 23. J. Strom Thurmond Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 24. Monroe Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.

51
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 25. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 26. Shepaug Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
52
CALIBRATION
Figure 27. Shepaug Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 28. Weiss Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.

53
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 29. West Point Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.
Figure 30. Walter F. George Reservoir computed vs. observed DO.

As can be seen from the previous figures for computed versus observed DO comparisons, the model
has reproduced a wide range of DO regimes with a high degree of accuracy using mostly default
kinetic parameters. The largest discrepancies between computed and observed DO occur in the
epilimnion during middle to late summer where the model consistently underpredicts supersaturated DO. The problem is that if the model is correctly predicting very low nutrient levels during
these times (typically at detection levels), then there are insufficient nutrients in the water column
to support the observed levels of primary production indicated by supersaturated conditions. This
is a shortcoming of all currently used water quality models and indicates insufficient understanding
54
CALIBRATION
of phytoplankton/nutrient dynamics in the photic zone. A great deal of research needs to be done
in this area in order to improve our ability to model phytoplankton primary productivity.
Another possible problem during dissolved oxygen calibration is during fall overturn when anoxic
hypolimnetic water mixes with epilimnetic water. For the most part, the model reproduces dissolved oxygen fairly well during overturn (Figure 29), but in some applications the model has
consistently underpredicted dissolved oxygen and in other applications the model has consistently
overpredicted hypolimnetic concentrations.
There are three possible causes for this behavior. The first is the reaeration formula is not appropriate for the waterbody. For reservoirs, the model has accurately reproduced epilimnetic dissolved
oxygen concentrations on so many systems that this is probably not the case. The second possibility
is that the volumes of epilimnetic and hypolimnetic volumes are sufficiently off to affect the final
mixed dissolved oxygen concentration. Depending upon the direction of the volume error, this can
result in either over or underprediction. The third possibility in the case of overprediction is that
reduced substances including ammonium, iron, manganese, and sulfides have been released from
the sediments in sufficient quantities to exert an appreciable oxygen demand. The model includes
only the affect of ammonium on dissolved oxygen. In this case, the code would need to be altered
to include their effects on dissolved oxygen. All of these scenarios should be investigated if accurate reproduction of dissolved oxygen during fall overturn is important to simulate.
Nutrients. Given accurate boundary conditions for phosphorus, ammonium, and iron and accurate
simulations of metalimnetic/hypolimnetic dissolved oxygen, hypolimnetic concentrations of these
nutrients are relatively easy to reproduce. Again, this is basically a back calculation of the sediment
fluxes to match observed hypolimnetic concentrations.
Epilimnetic concentrations of phosphorus during the growing season are typically at or below detection levels in both the model and the prototype, so they are also relatively easy to reproduce.
Fall concentrations can be more complicated, particularly if iron and manganese have built up during the summer in an anoxic hypolimnion. In this case, the iron compartment should be turned on
so that iron is released in the hypolimnion. The model includes phosphorus sorption onto iron
hydroxides that form during fall overturn and settle into the sediments, thus removing phosphorus
from the water column.
Epilimnetic ammonium and nitrate levels are more difficult to reproduce as some phytoplankton
show a preference for ammonium over nitrate and the degree to which they exhibit this preference
is different between groups. In addition, water column nitrate undergoes denitrification when the
water column goes anoxic and also diffuses into the sediments where it undergoes denitrification
in the anaerobic layer under both oxic and anoxic conditions. The ammonium preference factor
[ANPR], the water column denitrification rate [NO3DK], and the sediment nitrate uptake rate
[NO3S] are calibration parameters that can be adjusted to better match observed concentrations of
these nutrients.
Phytoplankton. The following plots illustrate the models ability to reproduce a spring phytoplankton bloom in Rimov Reservoir, Czech Republic. Tremendous amounts of data were collected
to analyze the spring bloom. Chlorophyll a samples were taken at 1 m depth intervals over upper
10 m of the water column at six stations approximately every three days for over a month. The
plots include six stations along the length of the reservoir starting upstream and progressing towards
the dam.
55
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 31. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton biomass.
56
CALIBRATION

57
tion
CALIBRATION
58
CALIBRATION

59
tion
CALIBRATION
The following plots illustrate how important it is to describe the system accurately. The plots show
results of the Rimov phytoplankton simulation in which the wind direction was inadvertently
changed by 90. The importance of wind direction and its influence on the spring phytoplankton
bloom was noted by limnologists who originally collected the 1991 data. Note the difference at
the most downstream station on April 8 compared to the previous plot of April 8 using the correct
wind direction. This also illustrates that the model can be a powerful limnological investigative
tool when trying to determine how important different forcing functions are to the limnology of a
reservoir.
Figure 37. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton with wind rotated 90.
60
CALIBRATION
Figure 38. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton with wind rotated 90
61
tion
CALIBRATION
62
CALIBRATION
The following plots illustrate the importance of accurate inflow boundary conditions for phytoplankton in Rimov Reservoir. Inflow phytoplankton concentrations were inadvertently set to 0.05
g m-3 rather than the observed concentrations when converting from V2 to V3. Again, the researchers who collected the original data concluded that the spring phytoplankton bloom was first initiated
in Rimov because of inflowing phytoplankton. The model concurs with this conclusion and again
illustrates how powerful a limnological investigative tool the model can be.
63
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 43. Rimov Reservoir computed vs. observed phytoplankton with no inflowing phytoplankton.
64
CALIBRATION
65
tion
CALIBRATION
66
CALIBRATION
67
tion
CALIBRATION
Estuary
Estuarine modeling is similar to reservoir and lake modeling for both bathymetry development and
water quality modeling, but there are a few important differences in the hydrodynamic calibration.
Salinity is commonly used to assess model hydrodynamic performance. However, as with reservoirs, water quality variables such as dissolved oxygen and phytoplankton can be used to also assess the accuracy of the hydrodynamics. When calibrating salinity, it is common practice to plot
predicted versus observed time-series of surface and bottom salinity. While plots such as these are
useful, vertical plots of computed versus observed salinity, if available, should always be included
as part of the calibration process.
Boundary conditions
Ocean boundary conditions play a critical role in estuarine modeling and the data should be frequent
and of high quality. At a minimum, downstream head boundary elevations should be available on
an hourly basis. The model can be used to linearly interpolate [HDIC] between observed elevations.
Alternatively, formulas can be used to compute elevations at any frequency based on various components of the tidal cycle.
Equally important are salinity concentrations specified at the downstream boundary. It is always
preferable to set the boundary sufficiently downstream so that there is no vertical variation in salinity and hopefully only small temporal changes. However, the boundary needs to be set where
the head elevations are measured, and oftentimes there are significant vertical and temporal variations in salinity at the site. Weekly vertical profiles are usually of insufficient frequency to reproduce the hydrodynamics of the estuary with any accuracy in this case. The same will hold true for
temperature and constituents if they exhibit vertical and temporal variations.
Upstream freshwater inflows need to be accurately gaged and evaporation and precipitation should
be included in the simulation if possible. Because of the inaccuracies associated with gaged inflows, sensitivity analyses should be run by increasing and decreasing upstream inflows to determine their impacts on hydrodynamics and water quality rather than initially turning to a model
knob to adjust model results, particularly for vertical salinity distributions in a stratified estuary.
Many times the model has provided information as to where forcing functions need to be more
accurately measured for a successful model application.
Water surface elevations and flows
In an estuarine system, the first step is to make certain the model correctly replicates tidal elevations
and flows at various stations along the length of the system. Usually these stations have continuous
data for comparison. Problems in water level and flow calibration can be caused by the following:
1. Incorrect or inadequate bathymetry. The user should ensure that the model correctly reproduces cross-sections where these are measured. The model is very sensitive to small changes in the cross-section and more frequent cross-sectional data
may be necessary for accurate water level and flow simulations.
2. Incomplete inflow/outflow data. A substantial amount of flow can often be unaccounted for as a result of not including tributaries, point sources, precipitation,
68
CALIBRATION
stormwater, irrigation users, and groundwater. Although precipitation and evaporation will normally be minor sources and sinks, they should be included by turning
on the precipitation [PRC] and evaporation options [EVC]. In an estuary, flow is
very dependent on the cross-sectional area at a given location, so grid evaluation
should also be part of the calibration process.
3. Bottom friction. Bottom friction values [FRICT] for an estuary significantly affect
the water level. Bottom friction can be used to calibrate the model to observed water
levels at gages along the length of the estuary.
In most cases, the initial water level [WSEL] in the estuary is specified as flat with a velocity field
of zero. The model should be run for several days with steady-state inflows [QIN], inflow temperature [TIN], inflow salinity [CIN], meteorology, and downstream head boundary conditions for
temperature [TDH] and salinity [CDH]. Once the temperature and salinity distributions are no
longer changing, the simulation can continue with observed boundary conditions.
The initial water surface elevation should be the same elevation as the external downstream elevation [EDH] at the start of the simulation. If there is a large elevation difference between the initial
condition water level and the first head boundary condition, the model can be quickly become
unstable because of large flows generated as a result of the water level differences at the head
boundary.
Typically, the user will first plot observed versus computed water surface elevations for the simulation period after all the inflow/outflow data have been collected and the model is running to completion. Distributed tributary flows [DTRC] may need to be added or subtracted if the mean flows
over a tidal period are not correct. The model user should also check not only instantaneous flow
rates, but tidal average rates to make sure the total flow coming into the system at the upstream
boundary condition agrees with the net residual flow at different locations downstream. This could
point to unaccounted inflows or outflows.
The model user should always take the model segment next to the downstream boundary and compare it to the actual water level data used and the flow rate at the gage, if measured. This checks
that the water level in the model is correct and the flow rate predicted by the model agrees with the
field data at that location. If the water level matches and the flow does not, this could point to
channel bathymetry errors or too high or too low a channel friction near the head boundary condition.
A typical comparison of field data to model predictions of water level are shown in Figure 49 for
the Columbia River at Longview, Washington approximately 110 km from the Pacific Ocean. The
absolute and root mean square errors were 0.12 m and 0.18 m, respectively, over the period of
record with a maximum tidal range of 1.5 m.
69
tion
CALIBRATION
8/8/93
Water Level (m - NGVD)
8/13/93
8/18/93
8/23/93
Segment 324
RM 66.6
8/28/93
Data
Model
Columbia River Water Level at Longview

0
220
225
230
235
240
Julian Day
Figure 49. Water level data versus model predictions for Longview, WA during a 20-day
period in 1993.
Similarly, a typical comparison of model predictions and field data of flow rate is shown in Figure
50 for the Columbia River approximately 90 km from the Pacific Ocean.
Flow Rate (m3/s)
8/8/98
14000
12000
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
-2000
-4000
-6000
-8000
-10000
8/13/98
8/18/98
8/23/98
8/28/98
Data
Model
Segment 356
RM 53.8
Columbia River Flow Rate at Beaver Army Terminal

220
225
230
Julian Day
235
240
Figure 50. Model flow predictions versus data for a 20-day period during 1998 at Beaver
Army Terminal near Quincy, OR.
70
CALIBRATION
Time of Travel
If at all possible, the model should be calibrated to a time-of-travel or dye study. This is important
to ensure the model represents transport and mixing characteristics of the estuary accurately. Usually, the adjustment of bottom friction is the primary calibration parameter, but in some cases the
bathymetry may need revision. The longitudinal eddy viscosity [AX] and diffusivity [DX] can also
be adjusted during calibration. Since CE-QUAL-W2 uses a constant value for these coefficients
for each waterbody, the user may need to include a longitudinal dispersion algorithm based on
theoretical formulae if the constant value is not appropriate.
In many cases a dye release will also vary vertically as a result of stratification. The model internally computes the vertical diffusion coefficient based on the eddy diffusivity using the Reynolds
analogy. The model user should ensure that they are using the implicit solution technique for the
transport of vertical momentum, [AZSLC]=IMP, and that the maximum value of the vertical eddy
viscosity [AZMAX] is at least 1 m2 s-1 for estuarine systems.
Temperature and Salinity
Calibrating the model for estuarine temperature and salinity includes the same caveats as for reservoirs with, as previously mentioned, the additional need for accurate boundary conditions at the
ocean boundary. If the user has developed a good hydrodynamic calibration for water surface
elevations and flows, then temperature and salinity calibrations should require a minimal effort.
However, keep in mind that water surface elevation, flow, and time of travel calibrations are all
affected by the adequacy of the temperature and salinity calibration.
Figure 51 and Figure 52 are from an application of CE-QUAL-W2 to the estuarine portion of the
Patuxent River that feeds into Chesapeake Bay (Lung and Bai, 2002). They illustrate the models
ability to reproduce vertical profiles of salinity and temperature over time.
71
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 51. Patuxent River computed versus observed vertical salinity distributions.
72
CALIBRATION
Figure 52. Patuxent River computed versus observed vertical temperature distributions.
73
tion
CALIBRATION
Water Quality
Water quality calibration for estuaries is again subject to the same caveats as for reservoirs with the
additional importance of accurate downstream boundary conditions. Again, if at all possible, the
downstream boundary should be located sufficiently downstream where vertical variations in water
quality are negligible.
Figure 53 presents results for nutrients, dissolved oxygen, and chl a concentrations for Lung and
Bais Patuxent River application of the model.
74
CALIBRATION
Figure 53. Patuxent River computed versus observed nutrient, dissolved oxygen, and chl a
time series.
Calibration Problems Modeling an estuarine system requires a tremendous amount of data, expertise, and patience for proper calibration. In previous estuarine applications, calibration consisted
mainly of determining whether known inaccuracies in a given forcing function could be responsible
for the discrepancies in the model predictions and then describing the forcing function more accurately. This procedure included the following:
1. Ensuring the model reproduces flow and water level at various control points in the
model domain and involved detailed evaluation of inflows and outflows, head
boundary conditions, channel bathymetry, and channel friction.
75
CALIBRATION
3. Adjusting channel friction or longitudinal dispersivity to match time-of-travel data
or dye study field data
4. Ensuring accurate vertical profiles for the downstream boundary
5. Ensuring grid refinement does not affect the model results
6. Ensuring accurate meteorological data for the estuary especially if the model domain
extends over a large geographical area. Wind variability is extremely important and
can be reflected in the wind sheltering coefficient that varies by segment and time.
7. Using an implicit eddy viscosity solution scheme, [AZSLC]=IMP, and a maximum
vertical eddy viscosity [AZMAX] of 1 m2 s-1.
Since the model can be susceptible to accuracy issues using an implicit water surface solution
scheme with a large time step, the user should ensure results are not impacted by using a smaller
maximum time step [DLTMAX]. Again, keep in mind that the more accurately the behavior of the
prototype is described, the more accurately the model responds.
River
Dynamic river modeling can be a challenging endeavor because:
1. Velocities are generally high resulting in a lower time step for numerical stability
2. Shear and bottom friction effects are significant requiring a considerable calibration
effort
3. Channel slopes accelerate the fluid
4. Changes in river bathymetry can dramatically affect the velocity field
5. Dynamic flow rates at low flows can dry up segments causing the model to stop
running
One of the original motivations for development of the capability of modeling sloping rivers was
to eliminate vertical accelerations in the fluid since the model does not solve the full vertical momentum equation. Keeping this in mind, the grid slope should be chosen to minimize the vertical
fluid acceleration.
Channel Slope
The channel slope is used to compute the gravity force of the channel. This slope should be the
slope of the water surface as that is the slope used to accelerate fluid parcels, or the energy grade
line, rather than the bottom slope from segment to segment. As an example, consider the slope of
a section of the Snake River shown in Figure 54.
76
CALIBRATION
620
640
660
2320
700
720
740
Distance, km
700
c h a n n e l b o tto m
d a t a - u s g s 5 6 0 0 c fs
m o d e l p r e d ic t e d w a t e r s u r fa c e
690
Elevation, m
2280
E leva tio n, ft M S L
680
2240
2200
680
670
660
2160
650
2120
380
390
400
410
420
430
R i v e r M ile , S n a k e R i v e r
440
450
460
Figure 54. Snake River water level comparison between CE-QUAL-W2 V3 and USGS field
data.
The slope of the vertical grid as well as the different branch slopes is shown in Figure 55.
2340
2320
2300
2280
Elevation, ft MSL
2260
2240
2220
2200
2180
2160
2140
Channel bottom
2120
2100
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
RM, Lower Snake River
Figure 55. Channel vertical grid where every slope change is a new branch.
77
tion
CALIBRATION
Rather than going from segment to segment with varying slopes, a general channel slope is used
for a collection of segments with similar water slope. As the variability in water slope changes, so
does the grid slope. How can one obtain this slope? Figure 56 illustrates the use of a regression
line to fit the channel slope for the section between RM 390 and 445 for the Snake River.
C h an n el D eep est Po in ts as a fu n ctio n o f R M Lo w er Sn ak e R iver
2300
2275
E le v a t io n , ft M S L
2250
2225
2200
Fit R esu lts
Lin ear, Y = B *X + A
Eq u atio n :
Y = 1 .2 9 4 2 9 * X + 1 6 6 6 .6 6
N u m b e r o f d ata p o in ts u sed = 2 7 1
R eg re ssio n su m o f sq u ares = 1 5 3 7 2 7
R esid u al su m o f sq u ares = 1 2 7 7 5 .9
C o ef o f d ete rm in atio n , R -sq u ared = 0 .9 2 3 2 6 9
2175
2150
2125
375
400
425
R ive r M ile , S n a k e R ive r
450
Figure 56. Snake River channel slope determination.

Why does W2 not use a segment-by-segment slope? Consider the noise in the cross-sections in
Figure 56. Even though the geometry could be set up with a variable channel slope for each segment (in the current application this means creating multiple waterbodies or branches for each
slope), setting a general channel grade is often simpler and one still has the noise of the bathymetry
represented as shown in Figure 56. Computing the slope from one segment to a deep hole would
not be correct since the water is flowing along its energy grade line and not the channel slope.
Bottom elevations for many of the channel segments rise or have a negative channel slope following
a depression. In using a segment-by-segment slope, these variations become unrealistic when represented using a slope for each segment. Therefore, the proper channel slope should be that of the
water surface.
In estuarine flow, one usually uses a channel slope of zero and considers fluid accelerations as a
result of water surface elevation changes rather than gravity flow down a slope, at least in the
78
CALIBRATION
estuary section below the head of tide. This is similar in a reservoir, which may have a sloping
channel, but a relatively flat water surface.
In some cases, the average channel slope changes and the user must separate the different sections
into separate branches or waterbodies. The model can be set up to have almost continuous changes
in channel slope by making branches with two segments and changing the slope where it is required.
If the choice is to create separate branches, then the surface layer and grid will be the same for all
branches. If the choice is to create separate waterbodies, then each waterbody computes a surface
layer independently of the other and there can be different vertical grids between water bodies.
When there are problems keeping water in upstream segments, which is a very common problem,
the model takes the lowest water level in a waterbody and subtracts layers such that the lowest
water level resides in the surface layer. If the surface layer is below the bottom layer in a segment,
the model will subtract that segment and all segments above it from the active computational grid.
If this occurs in a shallow location in the middle of a branch, the model will not run since it dries
up a segment in the middle of a branch.
How can this be corrected? One way is to decouple one branch from another by splitting them into
waterbodies. By splitting the system into more than one waterbody, water can be maintained at
various levels throughout the domain since each waterbody has its own separate surface layer.
This is another reason why the model does not use segment-by-segment slopes since the surface
layer defines the upper layer for a waterbody and in many cases these need to be broken apart into
waterbodies to keep water in all segments. In addition, the translation from one waterbody to another introduces some small error into the solution since concentrations, temperatures, and velocities are interpolated from one 2D grid onto another. If the model were run in 1D mode with only
one vertical layer, then this problem would not exist.
Consider another case study, the Bull Run system shown in Figure 57.
79
tion
CALIBRATION
0
10
12
14
600
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
Distance, km
560
520
MainStem Bull
Run River
2.2 % slope
480
Bull Run System Longitudinal Profile

440
Reservoir #3
Elevation, m
400
360
Reservoir #1
320
Reservoir #2
280
Lower Bull
Run River
1.4% slope
240
200
160
120
80
40
0
10
12
River Mile
14
16
18
20
22
24
Figure 57. Channel slope for the Bull Run system.

The reservoirs were modeled with a channel slope of zero. Instead of a constant slope of 1.4%, the
river is really divided into a large number of small-scale changes including pools and riffles. A
section of the river is shown in Figure 58 with the assumed model grid divided into branches and
waterbodies. In most cases, different waterbodies were used between branches of different slope.
This allowed the water surface layer determination to be based on the water level in the branch with
the given slope. However, the steeply sloping section may not have a slope equal to the grid slope
shown. This may occur because if the steeply sloping section were modeled in more detail, it would
really be a serious of flat pools with small water drops (or falls) between the pools. If all the fine
scale variability is ignored and the system is modeled on a larger scale, the problem becomes one
of trying to estimate the equivalent channel slope that represents the channel.
This is similar to modeling a network of pipes and ignoring all the details but inserting pipes of
equivalent slope and diameter. In this case, the channel slope is used as a calibration tool to
match water level or dye study data. If channel friction were used to hold the water back, the values
would have to be enormous to reproduce the complicated pool-waterfall system.
In addition, if the grid is broken into different waterbodies, discontinuities in the water surface such
as waterfalls can be simulated.
80
CALIBRATION
Elevation, m NGVD
175
Hydraulic control
Slope=0
Steep slope
section
150
Gr id bottom
125
5000
6000
7000
Distance, m, from Sandy River

Figure 58. Vertical grid for W2 model of Bull Run Lower River.
Modeling of shallow streams with large slopes is difficult and takes patience. The model drying
out at intermediate sections is often the cause of problems and can be remedied by breaking the
system into smaller pieces or waterbodies and/or by adding additional computational cells below
the bottom layer at a given segment. Matching river data is accomplished by adjusting friction
factors, refining the geometry, and in some cases refining the equivalent channel slope if detail
has been sacrificed in setting up the model. The quality of the model geometry is essential for good
model-data reproducibility in a river system, especially one that is highly irregular in slope and
channel width.
Developing a river model is also difficult at low flows since the model may become either unstable
during the initial time steps or become dry in a segment. The reason for this is that, in the beginning,
an initial water surface elevation is set and the river is frozen at that elevation until the model is
started, at which point the water starts moving downstream. If a conservative high water is set
initially in all segments, a wall of water will be sent downstream. If inflows are so small that at the
upstream edge of this wave there is too little water, segments can dry out. The model includes a
warning [w2.wrn] and error file [w2.err] that contains information for debugging a river model
problem.
81
tion
CALIBRATION
The following are suggestions for setting up a river model:
1. For the first 0.1 JDAY or so of the simulation, choose a maximum timestep
[DLTMAX] that is small (10 s or less). This should be done only if the code seems to
go unstable soon after starting the model. Alternatively, one can lower the fraction
of the timestep [DLTF] used as this can provide numerical stability and allow for
higher timesteps. The maximum timestep should be lowered if the number of time
step violations is greater than 10% for an extended period of time.
2. Start with high flow rates gradually approaching the lower flow regime if model
stability is a problem at low flows.
3. In order to keep water in the model, friction factors and geometry are very important
considerations. The goal is to have sufficient model friction so that water does not
quickly drain out of the system.
4. Add active computational cells at the bottom of the grid using small widths to prevent the section of the river from drying up or subtracting segments unnecessarily
because the water surface layer [KT] is below the bottom [KB].
4. For a river that has sloping sections followed by flat sections (slope=0), you may
want to set the slope to a non-zero value of 0.000001. This activates in the code the
ability of the model for KT to be below KB when the segment is still hydrated.
5. If the water surface elevation becomes unstable as evidenced by a negative surface
layer thickness, try reducing the maximum timestep [DLTMAX] to 5-10 seconds or
less during the unstable time period. Alternatively, the fraction of the timestep
[DLTF] can be set to 0.5 or less during this period.
6. For the end of the river, often a weir/spillway condition is used. This allows the
specification of the stage-discharge relationship for the river. See the Spillways/Weirs description for an example of how to do this.
7. Set AZSLC=IMP and AZMAX=1.0. Do not use ASC=W2; use one of the other formulations.
The following discussion illustrates the models ability to accurately simulate river hydrodynamics,
temperature, and water quality and includes a synopsis of the models application to the Bull Run
River, Snake River, and Spokane River
Bull Run River. The Bull Run River is located in Oregon and the two existing reservoirs located
on the river provide water for the city of Portland (Figure 57). A third reservoir upstream of the
existing reservoirs is in the planning stage. The two portions of the free flowing river that were
modeled had slopes of 1.4% and 2.2%. The model was used to address temperature and suspended
solids questions about the system.
Snake River. The Lower Snake River from C.J. Strike to Brownlee Reservoir suffers from eutrophication problems below the city of Boise. Chlorophyll a concentrations in the river often
exceed 100 g l-1 and ultimately can cause severe dissolved oxygen depletion in the upper reaches
of Brownlee Reservoir leading to fish kills. The model was used to determine how inflowing algae
and nutrients affect chl a and dissolved oxygen concentrations in Brownlee Reservoir.
Spokane River. The Spokane River from the Idaho border to Long Lake was modeled as part of
a Total Maximum Daily Load allocation study and was conducted by Portland State University,
the Washington State Department of Ecology, and the U.S Army Corps of Engineers. Epiphyton
82
CALIBRATION
were added to the model because of their importance on nutrient and dissolved oxygen dynamics
in the River.
The system is complex hydraulically with three run-of-the-river impoundments used for power
generation, significant groundwater inflows during low flow periods, a water fall, and Long Lake,
a deep storage impoundment. Although Long Lake is a long and fairly deep reservoir, residence
times during the summer are relatively short (< 1 month). Therefore, accurate inflow temperatures
and constituent concentrations were crucial for accurate simulations of temperature and water quality in Long Lake, which required accurate simulations of over 40 miles of the Spokane River upstream of Long Lake.
The system is also complex with respect to water quality as epiphyton dominate nutrient and dissolved oxygen dynamics in the river and phytoplankton dominate their dynamics in Long Lake.
Additionally, there are four point source discharges including the City of Spokanes wastewater
effluent.
Hydrodynamics and Temperature
Figure 59 shows results of a dye study conducted as part of the hydrodynamic calibration for the
Bull Run River. Results show that the QUICKEST/ULTIMATE transport algorithm does not suffer from excessive numerical dispersion nor does it generate over/undershoots and that the model
is capable of accurate river hydrodynamic simulations.
Figure 59. Bull Run River computed versus observed tracer at three stations progressing
downstream.
Figure 60 illustrates the accuracy of the water balance at the City of Spokane and Figure 61 shows
the accuracy of the computed flows at the same location.
83
tion
CALIBRATION
12/31/99
2/29/00
4/29/00
6/28/00
8/27/00
10/26/00
608
Segment 24, Br 2, JR1
RM 90.34
Water Level (m - NGVD)
607
606
605
604
603
602
Model
Data
601
Spokane River at Barker Road Bridge
600
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
Julian Day
210
240
270
300
330
Figure 60. Spokane River computed versus observed water surface elevations at Spokane.
12/31/99
2/29/00
4/29/00
6/28/00
8/27/00
10/26/00
900
Segment 97, Br 9, JR 4
RM 72.8
800
Spokane River at Spokane

Data
Model
700
Flow, m3/s
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
30
60
150 180 210 240 270 300

Julian Day
Figure 61. Spokane River computed versus observed flows at the city of Spokane.
90
120
330
84
CALIBRATION
Computed versus observed temperatures are shown in Figure 62 and Figure 63 for the Snake and
Spokane rivers. As for reservoirs, temperature predictions are in close agreement with observed
data.
85
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 62. Snake River computed versus observed temperature at six stations.
86
Te
10
Data
Model
CALIBRATION
0
12/31/90
3/1/91
4/30/91
6/29/91
8/28/91
10/27/91
12/26/91
24
20
Seg 97
Temp, C
16
12
8
4
0
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
360
390
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
360
390
24
20
Seg 106
Temp, C
16
12
8
4
0
0
30
24
20
Seg 119
Temp, C
16
12
8
4
0
12/31/90
3/1/91
4/30/91
6/29/91
8/28/91
10/27/91
12/26/91
Figure 63. Computed versus observed temperatures for the Spokane River at Stateline
Bridge (upstream boundary), City of Spokane, Fort Wright Bridge, and Riverside State
Park.
For the Spokane study, conductivity was an important indicator of not only the hydrodynamics but
also of the groundwater portion of the water balance. The model is accurately reproducing the
temporal variation in conductivity (Figure 64) and is probably more accurate than any other
method for determining groundwater inflows.
87
tion
CALIBRATION
12/31/90
3/21/91
6/9/91
8/28/91
11/16/91
conductivity (umhos/cm)
300
Segment 153
RM 58.10
Model
Data
200
100
Spokane River d/s of Nine Mile Dam
0
0
40
80
120
160 200
Julian Day
240
280
320
360
Figure 64. Spokane River computed versus observed conductivity below Nine Mile Dam.
Water Quality
Results for nutrients, dissolved oxygen, and chlorophyll a are given in Figure 65-Figure 69 for the
Snake River. The model is capturing much of the spatial and temporal changes in water quality for
the river section where, unlike the Spokane River, phytoplankton rather than epiphyton dominate
dissolved oxygen and nutrient dynamics.
88
CALIBRATION
Figure 65. Snake River computed versus observed dissolved oxygen at six stations.
89
tion
CALIBRATION
90
CALIBRATION
Figure 66. Snake River computed versus observed orthophosphorus at six stations.
91
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 67. Snake River computed versus observed nitrate-nitrite at six stations.
92
CALIBRATION
Figure 68. Snake River computed versus observed chlorophyll a at six stations.
93
CALIBRATION
Figure 69. Snake River computed versus total organic carbon.

Figure 70 and Figure 71 illustrate the models ability to reproduce changes in dissolved oxygen
over a year and also on a diel basis on the Spokane River. Note how the model has captured not
only the diel swings in dissolved oxygen, but also the decrease in the magnitude of the diel variation, which indicates that the model is accurately reproducing epiphyton primary production. This
is reinforced in Figure 72 where the model is reproducing diel variations in pH due to epiphyton
growth and respiration and the decrease in diel variation over time
12/31/99
3/20/00
6/8/00
8/27/00
11/15/00
Dissolved Oxygen (mg/l)
16
Segment 119
RM 66.0
12
Model
Data
4
Spokane River at Riverside State Park
0
0
40
80
120
160
200
Julian Day
240
280
320
360
Figure 70. Spokane River computed versus observed dissolved oxygen at Riverside State
Park.
94
CALIBRATION
7/28/00
8/7/00
8/17/00
8/27/00
9/6/00
12
Data
Model
Segment 155
RM 57.1
Spokane River below Nine Mile Dam
210
215
220
225
230
235
Julian Day
240
245
250
Figure 71. Spokane River computed versus observed dissolved oxygen below Nine Mile
Dam.
7/28/00
8/7/00
8/17/00
8/27/00
9/6/00
pH
8
Segment 150
RM 58.3
7
Data
Model
Spokane River above Nine Mile Dam

210
215
220
225
230
235
Julian Day
240
245
250
Figure 72. Spokane River computed versus observed pH upstream of Nine Mile Dam.
95
tion
CALIBRATION
Figure 73-Figure 75 illustrate the models ability to reproduce nutrient dynamics that are impacted
by upstream inflows, groundwater inflows, point source loadings, and epiphyton interactions.
12/31/90
3/21/91
6/9/91
8/28/91
11/16/91
2.5
NO3-N (mg/l)
Segment 119
RM 66.0
Model
Data
1.5
1
0.5
0
0
40
160 200 240 280 320 360

Julian Day
Figure 73. Spokane River computed versus observed nitrate-nitrite at Riverside State Park.
12/31/99
80
120
3/20/00
6/8/00
8/27/00
11/15/00
0.1
Model
Data
PO4-P (mg/l)
0.08
Segment 119
RM 66.0
0.06
0.04
0.02
0
0
40
160 200 240 280 320 360

Julian Day
Figure 74. Spokane River computed versus observed soluble reactive phosphorus below
Nine Mile Dam.
80
120
96
CALIBRATION
12/31/99
3/20/00
6/8/00
8/27/00
11/15/00
Total Nitrogen (mg/l)
3
Segment 154
RM 58.10
Model
Data
Spokane River d/s of Nine Mile Dam
0
0
40
80
120
160 200
Julian Day
240
280
320
360
Figure 75. Spokane River computed versus observed total nitrogen below Nine Mile Dam.
Summary
As the preceding figures illustrate, CE-QUAL-W2 is capable of reproducing a wide range of complex hydrodynamics, temperature, dissolved oxygen, nutrient, and phytoplankton and epiphyton
regimes in rivers, lakes, reservoirs, and estuaries. If the model is not adequately reproducing prototype behavior, the reason is most likely that the bathymetry or important boundary conditions are
not being described with sufficient accuracy. The saying You cannot make a silk purse out of a
sows ear applies equally well to water quality modeling.
A few final words about model calibration. For some applications, no amount of model adjustment
or data reconstruction will provide acceptable calibration if data are insufficient to describe the
dominant forcing functions in the prototype. For these cases, the model can still be used to provide
information about the prototype by pointing out data inadequacies, important mechanisms not included in the model but important in the prototype, or inappropriate assumptions used in the model.
In these cases, further fieldwork will be necessary to successfully apply the model.
97
tion
References
Alexander, M. 1965. Microbial Ecology, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
Allen, W.E. 1932. "Marine Plankton Diatom of Lower California in 1931", Botanical Gazette,
Vol 95, pp 485-492.
Ambrose, R. B.; Wool, T.; Connolly, J. P.; and Schanz, R. W. 1988. WASP4, A Hydrodynamic
and Water Quality Model: Model Theory, Users Manual, and Programmers Guide, Environmnetal Reserach Laboratory, Environmental Protection Agency, EPA 600/3-87/039, Athens,
Ga.
Annear, R., Berger, C. and Wells, S. 2001. CE-QUAL-W2 Version 3.1 Shading Algorithm,
Technical Report EWR-3-01, Dept. of Civil and Environmental Engineering, Portland State University, 39 pp.
Annear, R., Wells, S. and Berger, C. 2005. Upper Spokane River Model in Idaho: Boundary
Conditions and Model Setup and Calibration for 2001 and 2004, Technical Report EWR-2-05,
Dept. of Civil and Environmental Engineering, Portland State University, 187 pp.
APHA 1985. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, APHA, Washington, DC.
Apstein, C. 1910. "Hat ein Organisms in der Tiefe Gelebt, in der er gefischt ist?", Internat. Rev.
Ges. Hydrobiol. Hydrograph, Vol 3, pp 17-33.
Armengol, J., Caputo, L., Comerma1, M., Feijo, C., Garca, J., Marc, R., Navarro, E. and
Ordoez, J. 2003. Sau reservoirs light climate: relationships between Secchi depth and light
extinction coefficient, Limnetica 22(1-2): 195-210.
Ashton, G.D. 1979. "Suppression of River Ice by Thermal Effluents", CRREL Rpt. 79-30, US
Army Engineer Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH.
ASCE 1988. Turbulence Modeling of Surface Water Flow and Transport, Journal of Hydraulic
Engineering, ASCE Committee on Turbulence Models in Hydraulic Computations, 114(9),9701073.
Auer, M. T., M.T.; Johnson, N. A., Penn, M. R. and Effler, S. 1993. Measurement and verification
of rates of sediment phosphorus release for a hypereutrophic urban lake. Hydrobiologia, Volume
253, Numbers 1-3 / March, 1993 DOI:10.1007/BF00050750.
98
REFERENCES
Baca, R.G. and R.C. Arnett. 1976. A Limnological Model for Eutrophic Lakes and Impoundments,
Batelle Inc., Pacific Northwest Laboratories, Richland, Washington.
Banks, R.B. 1975. Some Features of Wind Action on Shallow Lakes, ASCE, J. Env. Engr. Div.,
101(EE3), pp. 489-504.
Banks, R. B. and Herrera, F. F. 1977. Effect of Wind and Rain on Surface Reaeration. J. Envir.
Engr. Div. ASCE, 101(EE5):813-827.
Bannister, T.T. 1979. "Quantitative Description of Steady State, Nutrient-Saturated Algal Growth,
Including Adaptation", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 24, pp 76-96.
Bansal, M.K. 1976. "Nitrification in Natural Streams", Water Pollution Control Federation Journal, Vol 48, pp 2380-2393.
Barkau, R. 1997. "UNET One-Dimensional Unsteady Flow Through a Full Network of Open
Channels, User's Manual, US Army Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center, Davis,
Ca.
Barrett, M.J.; Gameson, A.L.; and Ogden, C.G. 1960. Aeration Studies of Four Weir Systems,
Water and Water Engineering, London.
Batchelor, G. K. 1967. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press, NY.
Belay, A. 1981. "An Experimental Investigation of Inhibitation of Phytoplankton Photosynthesis
at Lake Surfaces", New Phytologist, Vol 89, pp 61-74.
Bella, D. 1970. "Dissolved Oxygen Variations in Stratified Lakes", ASCE J. of the Sanitary Engineering Division, Vol 96, No. SA5, pp 1129-1146.
Berger, C. (2000). Modeling Macrophytes of the Columbia Slough. Phd. dissertation, Portland
State University, Portland, Oregon.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. A. 1995. "Effects of Management Strategies to Improve Water Quality in
the Tualatin River, Oregon," in Water Resources Engineering, Vol. 2, ed. by W, Espey Jr. and
P. Combs, ASCE, 1360-1364.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. A. (in-review) A Macrophyte Water Quality and Hydrodynamic Model,
ASCE, Journal of Environmental Engineering.
Bernard, F. 1963. "Vitesses de chute chez Cyclococcolithus fragilis Lohm", Consequences Pour
le Cycle Vital Des Mers Chaudes.
Beutel, M. 2006. Inhibition of ammonia release from anoxic profundal sediments in lakes using
hypolimnetic oxygenation. doi:10.1016/j.ecoleng.2006.05.009.
Bloss, S., and Harleman, D.R.F. 1979. "Effect of Wind Mixing on the Thermocline Formation in
Lakes and Reservoirs", R.M. Parsons Laboratory Rpt. 249, Department of Civil Engineering,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, MA.
99
tion
REFERENCES
Blum, J.J. 1966. "Phosphate Uptake by Phosphate-Starved Euglena", J. of General Physiology,
Vol 49, pp 1125-1137.
Bohan, J.P., and Grace, J.L., Jr. 1973. "Selective Withdrawal from Man-Made Lakes: Hydraulic
Laboratory Investigation", Technical Rpt. H-73-4, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment
Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Borchardt, J.A. 1966. "Nitrification in the Activated Sludge Process", The Activated Sludge Process, Division of Sanitary and Water Resources Engineering, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI.
Bott, T.L. 1975. "Bacterial Growth Rates and Temperature Optima in a Stream with a Fluctuating
Thermal Regime", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 20, pp 191-197.
Boylen, C.W., and Brock, T.D. 1973. "Bacterial Decomposition Processes in Lake Wingra Sediments During Winter", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 18, pp 628-634.
Brady, D.K., Graves, W.L., and Geyer, J.C. 1969. "Surface Heat Exchange at Power Plant Cooling
Lakes", Cooling Water 2, Discharge Project No. 5, Publication No. 69-901, Edison Electric
Institute, New York, NY.
Bramlette, M.N. 1961. In. Oceanography, No. 67, M. Sears, ed., American Association of Science, Washington, DC., pp 345-366
Broecker, H. C., Petermann, J., and Siems, W. 1978. The Influence of Wind on CO2 Exchange in
a Wind-Wave Tunnel, J. Marine Res., 36(4):595-610.
Brown, L. C. and Barnwell, T. O. 1987. The Enhanced Stream water Quality Models QUAL2E
and QUAL2E-UNCAS: Documentation and User Manual, Environmental Research Laboratory, EPA/600/3-87/007, Athens, Ga.
Butler, D.; Rock, S. P.; and West, J. R. 1978)Friction Coefficient Variation with Flow in an Urban
Stream, J. of the Institution of Water Engineers and Scientists, Vol 32, No 3, pp. 227-232.
Butts, T.A. and Evans, R.L. 1983. "Small Stream Channel Dam Aeration Characteristics," ASCE
J. Env. Engr., Vol 109, No 3, pp. 555-573, June 1983.
Buchak, E.M., and Edinger, J.E. 1982a. "Hydrothermal Simulation of Quabbin Reservoir Using
Longitudinal-Vertical Hydrodynamics, Interim Report", prepared for Wallace, Floyd Associates, Inc., Cambridge, MA.
1982b. "User's Guide for LARM2: A Longitudinal-Vertical,Time-Varying Hydrodynamic Reservoir Model", Instruction Rpt. E-82-3, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
. 1984. "Generalized Longitudinal-Vertical Hydrodynamics and Transport: Development,
Programming and Applications", Contract No. DACW39-84-M-1636, prepared for US Army
Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
100
REFERENCES
Burns, N.M. 1976. "Nutrient Budgets for Lake Erie", J. of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol 33, pp 520-536.
Burns, N.M., and Rosa, F. 1980. "In situ Measurement of Settling Velocity of Organic Carbon
Particles and 10 Species of Phytoplankton", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 25, pp 855-864.
Caffrey, A., Hoyer, M., and Canfield, D. 2006. Factors Affecting the Maximum Depth of Colonization by Submersed Macrophytes in Florida Lakes, Southwest Florida Water Management District, 46 pp.
Caperon, J., and Meyer, J. 1972. "Nitrogen-Limited Growth of Marine Phytoplankton; I. Changes
in Population Characteristics with Steady-State Growth Rate", Deepsea Research with Oceanography, Vol 9, pp 601-618.
Carney, J.F., and Colwell, R.R. 1976. "Heterotrophic Utilization of Glucose and Glutamate in an
Estuary: Effect of Season and Nutrient Load", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol.
31, pp 227-233.
Carpenter, E.J., and Guillard, R.R.L. 1971. "Intraspecific Differences in Nitrate Half-Saturation
Constants for Three Species of Marine Phytoplankton", Ecology, Vol 52, pp 183-185.
Castenholz, R.W. 1964. "The Effect of Daylength and Light Intensity on the Growth of Littoral
Marine Diatoms in Culture", Physiological Plant, Vol 17, pp 951-963.
Castenholz, R.W. 1969. "The Thermophilic Cyanophytes of Iceland and the Upper Temperature
Limit", J. of Phycology, Vol 5, pp 360-368.
Celik I., Rodi W. 1984. Simulation of Free-Surface Effects in Turbulent Channel Flow, PhysicoChemical Hydrodynamics, Vol. 5, No 3 / 4, 1984, pp 217-227.
Celik I., Rodi W. 1988. Modeling Suspended Sediment Transport in Nonequilibrium Situations, Journal of Hydraulic Engineering, Vol. 114, No. 10, October, 1988, pp 11571191.
Cerco, C. F.; and Cole, T. M. (1994) Three-dimensional eutrophication model of Chesapeake
Bay. Volume 1. U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Mississippi. 1994-05.
Chapman, R.S. 1988. "Analysis and Improvement of the Numerical and Physical Mixing Characteristics of the WASP Box Model", Contract Report Submitted to the US Army Waterway Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Chapman, R. 1989. Review and Recommendation of Estuarine Mixing Parameterizations, with
Specific Reference to Vertical Mixing in Multi-Dimensional Boxes, Report prepared for
USACE, Waterways Experiments Station, Vicksburg, MS.
101
tion
REFERENCES
Chapman, R.S. and T.M. Cole. 1992. "Improved Thermal Predictions in CE-QUAL-W2", in Hydraulic Engineering Saving a Threatened Resource - In Search of Solutions Proceedings of the
Hydraulic Engineering sessions at Water Forum '92, M. Jennings and N. G. Bhowmik, eds.),
August 2-6, 1992, Baltimore, MD. American Society of Civil Engineers. New York, NY.
Chapra, S. 1997. Surface Water Quality Modeling, McGraw-Hill, NY
Chapra, S.C., and Reckhow, K.W. 1983. Engineering Approaches for Lake Management, Vol 12:
Mechanistic Modeling, Butterworth Publishers, Boston, MA.
Chen, R.L., Brannon, J.M., and Gunnison, D. 1984. "Anaerobic and Aerobic Rate Coefficients
for Use in CE-QUAL-RI", Miscellaneous Paper E-84-5, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Chen, Yongoin. 1996. "Hydrologic and Water Quality Modeling for Aquatic Ecosystem Protection
and Restoration in Forest Watersheds: A Case Study of Stream Temperature in the Upper
Grande Ronde River, Oregon," Dissertation submitted to The University of Georgia, Doctor of
Philosophy, 268 pp.
Chiaro, P.S., and Burke, D.A. 1980. "Sediment Oxygen Demand and Nutrient Release", ASCE J.
Env. Engr., Vol 106, No. EEl, pp 177-195.
Chow, V. T. 1959. Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill, NY.
Churchill, M.A., Elmore, H. L., and Buckingham, R.A. 1962. "Prediction of Stream Reaeration
Rates," J. San. Engr. Div., ASCE, SA4:1, Proc. Paper 3199.
Clark, Darren R. and Kevin J. Flynn. 2000. The relationship between the dissolved inorganic
carbon concentration and growth rate in marine phytoplankton. Proceedings of the Royal
Society of London, Series B: Biological Sciences, Vol. 267, No. 1447, pp. 953-959.
Clay, C.H. 1995. Design of Fishway and Other Fish Facilities, Lewis Publishers, Ann Arbor.
Clendenning, K.A., Brown, T.E., and Eyster, H.C. 1956. Canadian J. of Botany, Vol 34, pp
943-966.
Cloern, J.E. 1977. "Effects of Light Intensity and Temperature on Cryptomonas Cryptophyceae.
Growth and Nutrient Uptake Rates", J. of Phycology, Vol 13, pp 389-395.
Cole, T. and Buchak, E. 1995. CE-QUAL-W2: A Two-Dimensional, Laterally Averaged, Hydrodynamic and Water Quality Model, Version 2.0, Technical Report El-95-1, U.S. Army Engineer
Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Collins, C.D., and Boylen, C.W. 1982a. "Physiological Responses of Anabaena variabilis Cyanophyceae. to Instantaneous Exposure to Various Combinations of Light Intensity and Temperature", J. of Phycology, Vol 18, pp 206-211.
102
REFERENCES
. 1982b. "Ecological Consequences of Long-Term Exposure of Anabaena variabilis to Shifts
in Environmental Conditions", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol 44, pp 141-148.
Columbia Basin Research
1998. University of Washington, http://www.cqs.washington.edu/d_gas/papers/tdg_manual.html
Cotton, M., Reedha, D., Stansby, P. 2005. Low-Reynolds Number two-equation turbulence modeling for open channel flow: development and evaluation of free surface boundary conditions
on the dissipation rate equation, Journal of Hydraulic Research, Vol 43, No 6, pp. 632-643.
Courchaine, R.J. 1968. "Significance of Nitrification in Stream Analysis--Effects on the Oxygen
Balance", J. of the Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 40, p 835.
Covar, A. P. 1976. "Selecting the Proper Reaeration Coefficient for Use in Water Quality Models,"
presented at the US EPA Conference on Environmental Simulation and Modeling, April 19-22,
Cincinnati, OH.
Cushman-Roisin, B. 1994. Introduction to Geophysical Fluid Dynamics, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Davis, J. E., et al. 1987. "SELECT: A Numerical, One-dimensional Model for Selective Withdrawal", Instruction Rpt. E-87-2, US Army engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg,
MS.
Downing, A.L., and G.A. Truesdale 1955. Some factors affecting the rates of solution of oxygen
in water. J. Applied Chemistry, Vol. 5, pp.570-581.
Edinger, J.E., Brady, D.K., and Geyer, J.C. 1974. "Heat Exchange and Transport in the Environment", Rpt. No. 14, EPRI Publication No. 74-049-00-34, prepared for Electric Power Research
Institute, Cooling Water Discharge Research Project RP-49), Palo Alto, CA.
Edinger, J.E., and Buchak, E.M. 1975. "A Hydrodynamic, Two-Dimensional Reservoir Model:
The Computational Basis", prepared for US Army Engineer Division, Ohio River, Cincinnati,
Ohio.
. 1978. "Reservoir Longitudinal and Vertical Implicit Hydrodynamics", Environmental Effects of Hydraulic Engineering Works, Proceedings of an International Symposium, Knoxville,
TN.
. 1980. "Numerical Hydrodynamics of Estuaries", Estuarine and Wetland Processes with Emphasis on Modeling, P. Hamilton and K.B. Macdonald, eds., Plenum Press, New York, pp.
115-146.
. 1983. "Developments in LARM2: A Longitudinal-Vertical, Time-Varying Hydrodynamic
Reservoir Model", Technical Rpt. E-83-1, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
103
tion
REFERENCES
Edinger, J. E., D. K. Brady and J. C. Geyer. 1974. "Heat Exchange and Transport in the Environment", Research Project RP-49, Rpt. 14, EPRI Publication Number 74-049-00-3, Cooling Water
Studies for the Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA.
Edinger, J.E., Buchak, E.M., and Merritt, D.H. 1983. "Longitudinal-Vertical Hydrodynamics and
Transport with Chemical Equilibria for Lake Powell and Lake Mead", Salinity in Watercourses
and Reservoirs, R.H. French, ed., Butterworth Publishers, Stoneham, MA, pp 213-222.
Edinger, J.E., and Geyer, J.C. 1965. "Heat Exchange in the Environment", Publication No. 65-902,
Edison Electric Institute, New York, NY.
Engelund, F. 1978. Effect of Lateral Wind on Uniform Channel Flow. Progress Report 45, Inst.
of Hydrodynamic and Hydraulic Engr., Tech. Univ. of Denmark.
Environmental Laboratory. 1985. "CE-QUAL-R1: A Numerical One-Dimensional Model of Reservoir Water Quality; User's Manual", Instruction Rpt. E-82-1, US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Environmental Laboratory 1995. CE-QUAL-RIV1: A Dynamic, One-Dimensional Longitudinal.
Water Quality Model for Streams: Users Manual, Instruction Report EL-95-2, USACE Waterways Experiments Station, Vicksburg, MS.
EPA 1985. Rates, Constants and Kinetics in Surface Water Quality Modeling, Environmental Research Laboratory, EPA/600/3-85/040, Athens, Ga.
Eppley, R.W., Holmes, R.W., and Strickland, J.D.H. 1967b. "Sinking Rates of Marine Phytoplankton Measured with a Fluorometer", J. of Experimental Marine Biology and Ecology, Vol
1, pp 191-208.
Eppley, R.W., Rogers, J.N., and McCarthy, J.J. 1969. "Half-Saturation Constants for Uptake of
Nitrate and Ammonia by Marine Phytoplankton", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 14, pp.
912-920.
Eppley, R.W., and Sloan, P.R. 1966. "Growth Rates of Marine Phytoplankton: Correlation with
Light Adsorption by Cell Chlorophyll-a", Physiological Plant, Vol 19, pp 47-59.
Eppley, R.W., and Thomas, W.H. 1969. "Comparison of Half-Saturation Constants for Growth
and Nitrate Uptake of Marine Phytoplankton", J. of Phycology, Vol 5, pp 375-379.
Evans, F.C., Goldreich, E.C., Weibel, S.R., and Robeck, G.G. 1968. "Treatment of Urban Storm
Runoff", J. of the Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 40, pp 162-170.
Fang, X. and Stefan, H. G. 1994. Modeling Dissolved Oxygen Stratification Dynamics in Minnesota Lakes under Different Climate Scenarios, Project Report 339, St. Anthony Falls Hydraulic Laboratory, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis.
Fenchel, T. 1970. "Studies of the Decomposition of Organic Detritus Derived from Turtle Grass
Thalassia testudinum", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 15, pp 14-20.
104
REFERENCES
Ferziger J., Peric, M. 2002. Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics, Springer Verlag.
Finenko, Z.Z., and Krupatkina-Aki-Nina, D.K. 1974. "Effect of Inorganic Phosphorus on the
Growth Rate of Diatoms", Marine Biology, Vol 26, pp. 193-201.
Fischer, H. B.; E. List; R. Koh; J. Imberger; N. Brooks 1979. Mixing in Inland and Coastal Waters,
Academic Press, NY.
Fitzgerald, G.P. 1964. "The Effect of Algae on BOD Measurements", National Pollution Control
Federation J., Vol 36, pp 1524-1542.
Fogg, G.E. 1969. "The Physiology of an Algal Nuisance", Proc. R. Soc.B., Vol 173, pp 175-189.
. 1973. "Phosphorus in Primary Aquatic Plants", Water Research, Vol 7, pp 77-91.
Ford, B. and A. B. Stein. 1984. "The Hydrometeorology of DeGray Lake, Arkansas", Miscellaneous Paper E-84-3, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Ford, D.E., and Johnson, M.C. 1983. "An Assessment of Reservoir Density Currents and Inflow
Processes", Technical Rpt. E-83-7, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Fowler, S.W., and Small, L.F. 1972. Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 17, pp 293-296.
French, R. H. 1985. Open-Channel Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Frost, W.H., and Streeter, H.W. 1924. "Bacteriological Studies", Public Health Bulletin 143, US
Public Health Service, Washington, DC.
Fuhs, G.W., Demmerle, S.D., Canelli, E., and Chen, M. 1972. "Characterization of Phosphorus-Limited Plankton Algae", Limnol. Oceanogr. Special Symposia, Vol 1, pp 113-133.
Gaudy, A. F. and Gaudy, E. T. (1980) Microbiology for Environmental Engineers and Scientists,
Mc-Graw-Hill, N.Y.
Gaugush, R. F., tech. ed. 1986. "Statistical Methods for reservoir water quality investigations",
Instruction Rpt. E-86-2, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
. 1987. "Sampling Design for Reservoir Water Quality Investigations", Instruction Report
E-87-1, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
. 1993. "Sampling Design Software User's Manual", Instruction Report W-93-1, U.S. Army
Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Gebhart, B.; Jaluria, Y.; Mahajan, R.; and Sammakia, B. 1988. Buoyancy-Induced Flows and
Transport, Hemisphere Publishing Co., NY.
Gelda, R. K., Auer, M. T., Effler, S. W., Chapra, S. C., and Storey, M. L. 1996. Determination of
Reaeration Coefficients: A Whole Lake Approach. ASCE J. Envir. Engr.
105
tion
REFERENCES
Geldreich, E.E., Best, L.C., Kenner, B.A., and Van Donsel, D.J. 1968. "The Bacteriological Aspects of Stormwater Pollution", J. of the Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 40, p 1861.
Giese, A.C. 1968. Cell Physiology, 3d ed., W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, PA.
Gill, A.E. 1982. "Appendix 3, Properties of Seawater", Atmosphere-Ocean Dynamics, Academic
Press, New York, NY, pp 599-600.
Goldman, J.C., and Graham, S.J. 1981. "Inorganic Carbon Limitation and Chemical Composition
of Two Freshwater Green Microalgae", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol 41, pp
60-70.
Goldman, J.C., Porcella, D.B., Middlebrooks, E.J., and Toerien, D.F. 1972. "The Effects of Carbon
on Algal Growth--Its Relationship to Eutrophication", Water Research, Vol 6, pp 637.679.
Golterman, H.L. 1975. Physiological Limnology, Elsevier, Amsterdam.
Gordon, J.A. 1980. "An Evaluation of the LARM Two-Dimensional Model for Water Quality
Management Purposes", Proceedings of the Symposium on Surface-Water Impoundments, Minneapolis, MN, June 2-5, 1980, Vol 1, Paper 4-34, pp 518-527, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY.
. 1981. "LARM Two-Dimensional Model: An Evaluation", ASCE J. of the Environmental
Engineering Division, 107(EE5), pp 877-886.
. 1983. "Short-Term Hydrodynamics in a Stratified Reservoir", Environmental Engineering,
Proceedings of the ASCE Specialty Conference, Hilton Harvest House, Boulder, Colo., July 6-8,
1983, pp 524-531, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY.
Gould, S. 2006. k- turbulence model in CE-QUAL-W2, Masters research report in partial fulfillments for the degree Master of Science, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering,
Portland State Univeristy, Portland, OR.
Green, D.B., Logan, J., and Smeck, N.E. 1978. "Phosphorus Adsorption-Desorption Characteristics of Suspended Sediments in the Maumee River of Ohio", J. of Environmental Quality, Vol
7, pp 208-212.
Guillard, R.R.L., and Ryther, J.H. 1962. "Studies on the Marine Planktonic Diatoms; I. Cyclotella
nana Hustedt and Detonula confervacea Cleve)", Canadian J. of Microbiology, Vol 8, pp
229-239.
Gunnison, D., and Alexander, M. 1975. "Resistance and Susceptibility of Algae to Decomposition
by Natural Microbial Communities", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 20, pp 64-70.
Gunnison, D., Chen, R.L., and Brannon, J.M. 1983. "Relationship of Materials in Flooded Soils
and Sediments to the Water Quality of Reservoir; I. Oxygen Consumption Rates", Water Research, Vol 17, No. 11, pp 1609-1617.
106
REFERENCES
Hall, G.H. 1982. "Apparent and Measured Rates of Nitrification in the Hypolimnion of a Mesotrophic Lake", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol 43, pp 542-547.
Halmann, M., and Stiller, M. 1974. "Turnover and Uptake of Dissolved Phosphate in Freshwater;
A Study in Lake Kinneret", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 19, pp 774-783.
Hanlon, R.D.G. 1982. "The Breakdown and Decomposition of Allochthonous and Autochthonous
Plant Litter in an Oligotrophic Lake Llyn Frongoch)", Hydrobiologia, Vol 88, pp 281-288.
Harbeck, G.E., Koberg, G.E., and Hughes, G.H. 1959. "The Effect of Addition of Heat...on Lake
Colorado City, Texas", USGS Professional Paper 272-B, US Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC.
Hargrave, B.T. 1972a. "Aerobic Decomposition of Sediment and Detritus as a Function of Particle
Surface Area and Organic Content", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 17, pp 582-597.
Hargrave, B.T. 1972b. "Oxidation-Reduction Potentials, Oxygen Concentration and Oxygen Uptake of Profundal Sediments in a Eutrophic Lake", Oikos, Vol 23, pp 167-177.
Hattori, A. 1962. "Light-Induced Reduction of Nitrate, Nitrite and Hydroxylamine in a Blue-green
Alga, Anabaena cylindrica", Plant Cell Physiology, Vol 3, pp 355-369.
HEC 1997a. "UNET One-Dimensional Unsteady-Flow Through a Full Network of Open Channels, User's Manual," US Army Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center, Davis, CA.
HEC 1997b. "HEC-RAS River Analysis System Hydraulic Reference Manual Version 2.0," US
Army Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center, Davis, CA.
HEC 1977. "HEC-6 Scour and Deposition in Rivers and Reservoirs," US Army Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center, Davis, CA.
Hecky, R.E., and Kilham, P. 1974. "Environmental Control of Phytoplankton Cell Size", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 19, No. 2, pp 361-365.
Henderson, H. 1966. Open Channel Flow, The MacMillan Company, NY.
Hendry, G.R., and Welch, E. 1973. "The Effects of Nutrient Availability and Light Intensity on
the Growth Kinetics of Natural Phytoplankton Communities", presented at American Society of
Limnology and Oceanography, 36th Annual Meeting, Salt Lake City, UT.
Henrici, P. 1964. Elements of Numerical Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
Holley, E. R. and Jirka, G. 1986. Mixing in Rivers, Technical Report E-86-11, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Holm, N.P., and Armstrong, D.E. 1981. "Role of Nutrient Limitation and Competition in Controlling the Populations of and Asterionella formosa and Microcystis aeruginosa in Semicontinuous
Culture", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 26, pp 622-634.
107
tion
REFERENCES
Hoogenhout, H., and Amesz, J. 1965. "Growth Rates of Photosynthetic Microorganisms in Laboratory Studies", Archives of Microbiology, Vol 50, pp 10-24.
Hoskins, J.K., Ruchhoft, C.C., and Williams, L.G. 1927. "A Study of the Pollution and Natural
Purification of the Illinois River; I. Surveys and Laboratory Studies", Public Health Bulletin No.
171, Washington, DC.
Hutchinson, G.E. 1957. A Treatise on Limnology; I. Geography, Physics and Chemistry, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, NY.
Hwang, C.P., Lackie, T.H., and Huang, P.M. 1976. "Adsorption of Inorganic Phosphorus by Lake
Sediments", J. of the Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 48, pp 2754-2760.
Hydrologic Engineering Center. 1981. "Geometric Elements from Cross Section coordinates",
Computer program description.
Ignatiades, L., and Smayda, T.J. 1970. "Autecological Studies on the Marine Diatom Rhizosolenia
fragilissima Bergon; I. The Influence of Light, Temperature, and Salinity", J. of Phycology, Vol
6, pp 332-229.
Jacoby, G.C., Jr., et al. 1977. "Evaporation, Bank Storage and Water Budget at Lake Powell",
Lake Powell Research Project Bulletin No. 48, Institute of Geophysics and Planetary Physics,
University of California, Los Angeles, CA.
James, William F. ; Berko, John W. ; Eakin, Harry L. 1995. Phosphorus Loading in Lake Pepin
(Minnesota-Wisconsin). Final report ADA304855. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg MS.
Janik, J.J., Taylor, W.D., and Lambou, V.W. 1981. "Estimating Phytoplankton Biomass and Productivity", Miscellaneous Paper E-81-2, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
Jeanjean, R. 1969. "Influence de al Carence en Phosphoric sur les Vitesses d'Absorption du Phosphate Par les Chlorelles", Bull. Soc. Fr. Physiol. Veg., Vol 15, pp 159-171.
Jewell, W.J., and McCarty, P.L. 1971. "Aerobic Decomposition of Algae", Environment Science
and Technology, Vol 5, pp 1023-1031.
Jitts, H.R., McAllister, C.D., Stephens, K., and Strickland, J.D.H. 1964. "The Cell Division Rates
of Some Marine Phytoplankton as a Function of Light and Temperature", J. of the Fisheries
Research Board of Canada, Vol 21, pp 139-157.
Johnson, M.C., et al. 1981 Oct. "Analyzing Storm Event Data from DeGray Lake, Arkansas Using
LARM", presented at the American Society of Civil Engineers 1981 Convention and Exposition,
St. Louis, MO.
Jorgensen, E.G. 1968. "The Adaptation of Plankton Algae; II. Aspects of the Temperature and the
Temperature Adaptation of Skeletonema costatum, Physiological Plant, Vol 21, pp 423-427.
108
REFERENCES
Kamp-Nielson, L. 1974. "Mud-Water Exchange of Phosphate and Other Ions in Undisturbed Sediment Cores and Factors Affecting Exchange Rates", Archives of Hydrobiologia, Vol 73, pp
218-237.
Kanwisher, J. 1963. "On the Exchange of Gases Between the Atmosphere and the Sea", Deepsea
Research with Oceanography, Vol 10, pp 195-207.
Ketchum, B.H. 1939. "The Absorption of Phosphate and Nitrate by Illuminated Cultures of
Nitzschia closterium", American J. of Botany, Vol 26, pp 399-407.
Kim, Lee-Hyung; Choi, Euiso; Gil, Kyung-Ik; and Stenstrom, M. K.. 2003.
Phosphorus release rates from sediments and pollutant characteristics in Han River, Seoul, Korea. doi:10.1016/j.scitotenv.2003.08.018.
Kinsman, B. 1979. Wind Waves: Their Generation and Propagation, Prentice-Hall, Englewood
Cliffs, N.J.
Kirk, J.T.O. 1975. "A Theoretical Analysis of the Contribution of Algal Cells to the Attenuation
of Light Within Natural Waters; I. General Treatment of Suspensions of Pigmented Cells", New
Phytology, Vol 75, pp 11-20.
Kittrell, F.W., and Furfari, S.A. 1963. "Observations of Coliform Bacteria in Streams", J. of the
Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 35, p 1361.
Kittrell, F.W., and Koschtitzky, O.W., Jr. 1947. "Natural Purification Characteristics of a Shallow
Turbulent Stream", Sewage Works J., Vol 19, p 1031.
Klock, J.W. 1971. "Survival of Coliform Bacteria in Wastewater Treatment Lagoons", J. of the
Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 43, p 2071.
Knowles, G., Downing, A.L., and Barrett, M.J. 1965. "Determination of Kinetic Constants for
Nitrifying Bacteria in Mixed Culture, with the Aid of an Electronic Computer", J. of General
Microbiology, Vol 38, pp 263-278.
Knudsen, G. 1965. "Induction of Nitrate Reductase in Synchronized Cultures of Chlorella pipenodosa", Biochem. Biophys. Actu., Vol 103, pp 495-502.
Konopka, A. 1983. "The Effect of Nutrient Limitation and Its Interaction with Light upon the
Products of Photosynthesis in Merismopedia tenuissima Cyanophyceae)", J. Phycology, Vol
19, pp 403-409.
Koutitas, C. G. 1978. Numerical Solution of the Complete Equations for Nearly Horizontal Flows.
Advances in Water Resources, 1(4), 213.
Krishnappan, B., Lau, Y. 1986. Turbulence Modeling of Flood Plain Flow, Journal of Hydraulic
Engineering, Vol. 112, No. 4, April, pp 251-266.
Ku, W.C., Di Giano, F.A., and Feng, T.H. 1978. "Factors Affecting Phosphate Adsorption Equilibria in Lake Sediments", Water Research, Vol 12, pp 1069-1074.
109
tion
REFERENCES
Lane, E.W. 1938. "Notes on Formation of Sand", Transactions of the American Geophysical Union, Vol 18, pp 505-508.
Langbien, W. B. and Durum, W. H. 1967. "The Aeration Capacity of Streams," USGS, Washington, D.C. Circ. 542.
Laws, E.A., and Wong, D.C. 1978. "Studies of Carbon and Nitrogen Metabolism by Three Marine
Phytoplankton Species in Nitrate-Limited Continuous Culture", J. of Phycology, Vol 14, pp
406-416.
Leendertse, J.J., and Liu, S-K. 1977."Turbulent Energy for Computation; Volume IV, A Three-Dimensional Model for Estuaries and Coastal Seas", Rpt. No. 2-2187-OWRT, The Rand Corporation, Santa Monica, CA.
Leonard, B. P. 1979. "A Stable and Accurate Convective Modelling Procedure Based on Upstream
Interpolation", Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering, Vol 19, pp. 59-98.
Leonard, B. P. 1991. The ULTIMATE conservative difference scheme applied to unsteady onedimensional advection, Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engr, 88 1991), 17-74.
Li, W.K.W., and Morris, I. 1982. "Temperature Adaptation in Phaeodactylum tricornutum Bohlin:
Photosynthetic Rate Compensation and Capacity", J. of Experimental Marine Biology and Ecology, Vol 58, pp 135-150.
Libby, P. A. 1996. Introduction to Turbulence, Taylor and Francis, Washington D.C.
Lighthill, J. 1978. Waves in Fluids, Cambridge University Press, NY.
Liggett, J. A. 1970. Cell Method for Computing Lake Circulation, J. of the Hydraulics Div.,
ASCE, 96(HY3), 725.
Lin, B., and Falconer, R. A. 1997. Tidal Flow and Transport Modeling Using ULTIMATE
QUICKEST Scheme, J. of Hydraulic Engineering, ASCE, 123(4), 303-314.
Lindijer, G. H. 1979. Three-Dimensional Circulation Models for Shallow Lakes and Seas; SemiAnalytical Steady-State Analysis of Wind-Driven Current Including the effect of Depth-Dependent Turbulent Exchange Coefficient, Report R 900-11, Delft Hydraulics Laboratory, Netherlands.
Liss, P.S. 1973. Processes of gas exchange across an air-water interface, Deep Sea Research,
Vol. 20, pp 221-238.
Litchman, Elena. 2000. Growth rates of phytoplankton under fluctuating light. Freshwater Biology, Volume 44, pp. 223-235.
MacIsaac, J.H., and Dugdale, R.C. 1969. "The Kinetics of Nitrate and Ammonia Uptake by Natural Populations of Marine Phytoplankton", Deepsea Research with Oceanography, Vol 16, pp
16-27.
110
REFERENCES
Mackay, D. 1980. "Solubility, Partition Coefficients, Volatility, and Evaporation Rates", Reactions
and Processes Handbook, Vol 2, Part A, Springer-Verlag, New York, NY.
Madsen, O. S. 1977. A Realistic Model of the Wind-Induced Ekman Boundary Layer. J. Physical
Oceanography, 7(2), 248.
Mahloch, J.L. 1974. "Comparative Analysis of Modeling Techniques for Coliform Organisms in
Streams", Applied Microbiology, Vol 27, p 340.
Mann, K.H. 1972. "Ecology Energetics of the Seaweed Zone in a Marine Bay on the Atlantic Coast
of Canada; I. Zonation and Biomass of Seaweeds", Marine Biology Berlin), Vol 12, pp 1-10.
Marais, G.V.R. 1974. "Faecal Bacteria1 Kinetics in Stabilization Ponds", ASCE J. of the Sanitation
Engineering Division, Vol 100, No. EEl, p 119.
Margalef, R. 1961. "Velocidad de Sedimentatlon de Organismos Pasivos del Fitoplancton", Investigacion Pesq., Vol 18, pp 3-8.
Martin, J.L. 1987. "Application of a Two-Dimensional Model of Hydrodynamics and Water Quality CE-QUAL-W2. to DeGray Lake, Arkansas", Technical Rpt. E-87-1, US Army Engineer
Martin, J. L., McCutcheon, S.C. 1999. Hydrodynamics and Transport for Water Quality Modeling, Lewis Publishers, NY.
Mastropietro, M. A. 1968. "Effects of Dam Reaeration on Waste Assimilation Capacities of the
Mohawk River," Proceedings of the 23rd Industrial Waste Conference, Purdue University.
Maykut, G. N. and N. Untersteiner. 1971. "Some results from a time dependent, thermodynamic
model of sea ice", J. Geophys. Res., 83: 1550-1575.
McCutcheon, Steve. 1987. Laboratory and instream nitrification rates for selected streams.
Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 113, No. 3, pp. 628-646.
Megard, R. 0., Comles, W.S., Smith, P.D., and Knoll, A.S. 1980. "Attenuation of Light and Daily
Integral Rates of Photosynthesis Attained by Planktonic Algae", Limnology and Oceanography,
Vol 24, pp 1038-1050.
Melching, C. and Flores, H. 1999. Reaeration Equations Derived from USGS Database, J. Envir.
Engr., ASCE, 125(5), 407-414.
Meyer, A.F. 1928. The Elements of Hydrology, John Wiley and Sons, New York, NY.
Mills, W.B.; Porcella, D.; Ungs, M; Gherini, S.; Summers, K.; Lingfung, M.; Rupp, G.; Bowie, G.
Haith, D. 1985. "A Screening Procedure for Toxic and Conventional Pollutants in Surface and
Ground Water," EPA/600/6-85/002a, Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.
111
tion
REFERENCES
Mitchell, R., and Chamberlain, C. 1978. "Survival of Indicator Organisms", Indicators of Enteric
Contamination in Natural Waters, G. Berg, ed.), Ann Arbor Science Publ., Inc., Ann Arbor,
MI, pp 15-38.
Moog, D.B. and Jirka, G.H. 1998. "Analysis of reaeration equations using multiplicative error," J.
Envin Engr, ASCE, 124(2), 104-110.
Mortimer, C.H. 1981. "The Oxygen Content of Air Saturated Fresh Waters over Ranges of Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure of Limnological Interest", International Vereinigung Theoretische and Angewandte Limnologie, Vol 22, pp 2-23.
Morton, F.I. 1965. "Potential Evaporation and River Basin Evaporation", ASCE J. of the Hydraulics Division, Vol 91, No. HY6, pp 67-97.
Munk, W. H. and Anderson, E. R. 1948. Notes on the Theory of the Thermocline, Journal of
Marine Research, Vol 1, p.276.
Myers, J., and Graham, J. 1961. "On the Mass Culture of Algae; III. Light Diffusers: High vs.
Low Temperature Chlorellas", Plant Physiology, Vol 36, pp 342-346.
Nakagawa H., Nezu I., Ueda H. 1975. Turbulence of Open Channel Flow Over Smooth and Rough
Beds, Proceedings of the Japan Society of Civil Engineers, No 241 September, pp. 155-168.
Nalewajko, C. 1966. "Photosynthesis and Excretion in Various Planktonic Algae", Limnology and
Oceanography, Vol 11, pp 1-10.
Neumann, G. and Pierson, W. J. 1966. Principles of Physical Oceanography. Prentice-Hall Inc.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J.
Newbold, J.D., and Liggett, D.S. 1974. "Oxygen Depletion Model for Cayuga Lake", ASCE J. of
the Environmental Engineering Division, Vol 100, No. EEl, pp 41-59.
O'Connor, D. J. and Dobbins, W.E. 1958. "Mechanism of Reaeration in Natural Streams," ASCE
Trans., 86(SA3):35-55.
OConnor, D.J. 1983. Wind Effects on Gas-Liquid Transfer Coefficients J. Envir Engr ASCE,
Vol. 109, pp. 731-752.
Odum, E.P., and de la Cruz, A.A. 1967. "Particulate Organic Detritus in a Georgia Salt Marsh-Estuarine Ecosystem", Estuaries, G.H. Lauff, ed., American Association for the Advancement
of Sciences, Washington, DC, pp 383-388.
Okubo, 1971. Oceanic Diffusion Diagrams, Deep-Sea Research, 18:789.
Olson, R. M. and Wright, S. J. 1990. Essentials of Engineering Fluid Mechanics, 5th edition,
Harper and Row, NY.
Osterberg, C., Casey, A.G., and Curl, H. 1963. In. Nature, Vol 200, pp 1276-1277.
112
REFERENCES
Otsuki, A., and Hanya, T. 1972. "Production of Dissolved Organic Matter from Dead Green Algal
Cells; I. Aerobic Microbial Decomposition", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 17, pp 248-257.
Owens, M., Edwards, R., and Gibbs, J. 1964. "Some Reaeration Studies in Streams," Int. J. Air
Water Poll., 8:469-486.
Paasche, E. 1968. "Marine Plankton Algae Grown with Light-Dark Cycles; II. Ditylum
brightwellii and Nitzschia turgidula", Physiological Plant, Vol 21, pp 66-77.
Parson, T.R., and Strickland, J.D.H. 1963. "On the Production of Particulate Organic Carbon by
Heterotrophic Processes in Sea Water", Deepsea Research with Oceanography, Vol 8, pp
211-222.
Patterson, J.C. and Hamblin, P.F., "Thermal Simulation of a Lake with Winter Ice Cover", Limnology and Oceanography, 33(3), 1988, P. 323-338.
Pauer, James J. and Martin T. Auer. 2000. Nitrification in the water column and sediment of a
hypereutrophic lake and adjoining river system. Water Resources, Volume 34, No. 4, pp. 12471254.
Pickett, J.M. 1975. "Growth of Chlorella in a Nitrate-Limited Chemostat", Plant Physiology, Vol
55, pp 223-225.
Piecznska. 1972. Wiadomosci Ekologiczne, Vol 18, pp 131-140.
Press W., Teukolsky S., Vetterling W., Flannery B. 1996. Numerical Recipes in Fortran: The Art
of Scientific Computing, Cambridge University Press.
Quasim, S.Z., Bhattathiri, P.M.A., and Dovassoy, V.P. 1973. Marine Biology, Vol 21, pp 299-304.
Reay, David S., Nedwell, David B., Priddle, Julian, and Ellis-Evans, J. Cynan. 1999. Temperature
dependence of inorganic nitrogen uptake: reduced affinity for nitrate at suboptimal temperatures
in both algae and bacteria. Applied and Environmental Microbiology, June, p. 2577-2584.
Reynolds, C. S. (1984) The ecology of freshwater phytoplankton. Cambridge University Press.
Rhee, G-Yull. 1973. "A Continuous Culture Study of Phosphate Uptake, Growth Rate and Polyphosphate in Scenedesmus sp.", J. of Phycology, Vol 9, pp 495-506.
Rhee, G-Yull, and Gotham, I.J. 1981a. "The Effects of Environmental Factors on Phytoplankton
Growth: Temperature and the Interaction of Temperature with Nutrient Limitation", Limnology
and Oceanography, Vol 26, pp 635-648.
. 1981b. "The Effects of Environmental Factors on Phytoplankton Growth: Light and the
Interaction of Light with Nitrate Limitation", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 26, pp
649-659.
113
tion
REFERENCES
Riley, G.A. 1943. Bulletin of the Bingham Oceanography College, Vol 8, Art. 4, p 53.
Riley, G.A., H. Stommel, and D.F. Bumpus. 1949. "Quantitative Ecology of the Plankton of the
Western North Atlantic", Bulletin of the Bingham Oceanography College, Vol 12, pp 1-169.
Riley, G.A., and von Aux, R. 1949. In. J. of Marine Research, Vol 8, No. 11, pp 60-72.
Roache, P.J. 1982. Computational Fluid Dynamics, Hermosa Publishers, Albuquerque, NM.
Rodi, W. 1993. Turbulence Models and Their Application in Hydraulics, 3rd edition, IAHR, A.A.
Balkema, Rotterdam.
Rogers, K.H., and C.M. Breen. 1982. "Decomposition of Potamogeton crispus; I. Effects of
Drying on the Pattern of Mass and Nutrient Loss", Aquatic Botany, Vol 12, pp 1-12.
Ryan, P.J. and D.R.F. Harleman. 1974. "Surface Heat Losses from Cooling Ponds," Water Resources Research, Vol 10, No 5, Oct 1974, pp. 930-938.
Ryan, Patrick J. and Keith D. Stolzenbach. 1972. Chapter 1: "Environmental Heat Transfer" in
Engineering Aspects of Heat Disposal from Power Generation, D. R. F. Harleman, ed.. R. M.
Parson Laboratory for Water Resources and Hydrodynamics, Department of Civil Engineering,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, MA.
Ryding, S.0., and C. Forsberg. 1977. "Sediments as a Nutrient Source in Shallow Polluted Lakes",
Interactions Between Sediments and Freshwater, H.L. Golterman, ed.), Junk, The Hague.
Ryther, J.H. 1954. "Inhibitory Effects of Phytoplankton upon the Feeding of Daphnia magna with
Reference to Growth, Reproduction, and Survival", Ecology, Vol 35, pp 522-533.
Sabersky, R.; A. Acosta, E. Haupmann 1989. Fluid Flow A First Course in Fluid Mechanics,
Macmillan Publishing Co., NY.
Saunders, G.W. 1972. "The Transformation of Artificial Detritus in Lake Water", Mem. Ist. Ital.
Idrobiol. Dott Marco de Marchi, Pallanza, Italy 29 Suppl), pp 261-288.
Sawyer, C.N., and McCarty, P.L. 1967. Chemistry for Sanitary Engineers, 2d ed., McGraw-Hill,
St. Louis, MO.
Schindler, D.W. 1971. "Food Quality and Zooplankton Nutrition", J. of Animal Ecology, Vol 40,
pp 598-595.
Schindler, D.W., et al. 1973. "Eutrophication of Lake 227 by Addition of Phosphate and Nitrate:
The Second, Third and Fourth Years of Enrichment, 1970, 1971, 1972", J. of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol 30, pp 1415-1428.
Schlichting, H. 1962. Boundary Layer Theory, McGraw-Hill, NY.
114
REFERENCES
Schnoor, J.L., and Fruh, E.G. 1979. "Dissolved Oxygen Model of a Short Detention Time Reservoir with Anaerobic Hypolimnion", Water Resources Bulletin, Vol 15, No. 2, pp 506-518.
Sedell, J.R., Triska, F.J., and Triska, N.S. 1975. "The Processing of Conifer and Hardwood Leaves
in Two Coniferous Forest Streams; I. Weight Loss and Associated Invertebrates", Verh. Internat. Verein. Limnol., Vol 19, pp 1617-1627.
Sen, S., Haggard, B.E., Chaubey, I., Brye, K.R., Matlock, M.D., Costello, T.A. 2004. Preliminary
estimation of sediment phosphorus flux in Beaver Lake, Northwest Arkansas. In: Proceedings
of American Society of Agricultural Engineers, August 1-4, 2004, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada.
2004 CDROM.
Shanahan, P. and Harleman, D. 1982. Linked Hydrodynamic and Biogeochemical Models of
Water Quality in Shallow Lakes, Technical Report 268, R. M. Parson Laboratory, MIT, Cambridge, MA.
Shelef, G. 1968. "Kinetics of Algal Systems in Waste Treatment; Light Intensity and Nitrogen
Concentration as Growth-Limiting Factors", Ph.D. Thesis, University of California, Berkeley,
CA.
Sher-Kaul, S., Oertli, B., Castella, E. and J. Lachavanne (1995), Relationship between biomass
and surface area of six submerged aquatic plant species. Aquatic Botany, 51, 147-154.
Simoes, F. 1998. "An Eddy Viscosity Model for Shallow-Water Flows," Water Resources Engineering 98, ASCE, NY, 1858-1863.
Smayda, T.J. 1969. "Experimental Observations on the Influence of Temperature, Light, and Salinity on Cell Division of the Marine Diatom Detonula cofervacea Cleve. Gran", J. of Phycology, Vol 5, pp 150-157.
. 1971. "Normal and Accelerated Sinking of Phytoplankton in the Sea", Marine Geology,
Vol 11, pp 105-122.
. 1974. "Some Experiments on the Sinking Characteristics of Two Freshwater Diatoms",
Limnoloy and Oceanography, Vol 19, No. 4, pp 628-635.
Smayda, T.J., and Boleyn, B.J. 1965. "Experimental Observations on the Flotation of Marine
Diatoms; I. Thalassiosira cf. nana, Thalassiosira rotula and Nitzschia seriata", Limnology and
Oceanography, Vol 10, pp 499-509.
. 1966. "Experimental Observations on the Flotation of Marine Diatoms; III. Bacteriastrum
hyalinum and Chaetoceros lauderi", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 11, pp 35-43.
Smith, D.J. 1978. WQRRS, Generalized computer program for River-Reservoir systems,
USACE Hydrologic Engineering Center HEC, Davis, California.User's Manual 401-100, 100A,
210 pp.
Smith, W.O. 1979. "A Budget for the Autotrophic Ciliate Mesodinium rubrum", J. of Phycology,
Vol 15, pp 27-33.
115
tion
REFERENCES
Smith, R.C., and Baker, K.S. 1978. "The Bio-optical State of Ocean Waters and Remote Sensing",
Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 23, pp 247-259.
Snow, P.D., and Di Giano, F.A. 1976. "Mathematical Modeling of Phosphorus Exchange Between
Sediments and Overlaying Water in Shallow Eutrophic Lakes", Rpt. 54-76-3, Department of
Civil Engineering, University of Massachusetts, Amherst, MA.
Sorokin, C., and Krauss, R.W. 1962. "Effects of Temperature and Illumination on Chorella Growth
Uncoupled from Cell Division", Plant Physiology, Vol 37, pp 37-42.
Sorokin, C., and Meyers, J. 1953. "A High Temperature Strain of Chlorella", Science, Washington,
D.C., Vol 117, pp 330-331.
Soong, T. W., DePue, M.; D. Anderson 1995. The Changes of Mannings Roughness Coefficient
with River Stages, Water Resources Engineering, ed. by W. H. Epsey and P. Combs, ASCE,
pp.1759-1763.
Spears, Bryan M.; Carvalho, Laurence; Perkins, Rupert; Kirika, Alex; Paterson, David M.. 2007.
Sediment phosphorus cycling in a large shallow lake: spatio-temporal variation in phosphorus
pools and release. Hydrobiologia, 584. 37-48. doi:10.1007/s10750-007-0610-0
Spence, D.H.N. 1981. "Light Quality and Plant Responses Underwater", Plants and the Daylight
Spectrum, H. Smith, ed., Academic Press, New York, NY, pp 245-276.
Spencer, D.F., and Lembi, C.A. 1981. "Factors Regulating the Spatial Distribution of the Filamentous Alga Pithophora oedoga Chlorophyceae. in an Indiana Lake", J. of Phycology, Vol 17, pp
168-173.
Steele, J.H. 1962. "Environmental Control of Photosynthesis in the Sea", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 7, pp 137-150.
Steemann-Nielsen, E. 1952. "On Detrimental Effects of High Light Intensities on the Photosynthetic Mechanism", Physiological Plant, Vol 5, pp 334-344.
Steemann-Nielsen, E., and Jorgensen, E.G. 1968. "The Adaptation of Plankton Algae; I. General
Part", Physiological Plant, Vol 21, pp 401-413.
St. John, J. P,, T. W, Gallagher, and P. R. Paquin, 1984. "The Sensitivity of the Dissolved oxygen
Bahnce to Predictive Reaeration Equations", in Gas Transfer at Water Surfaces, W, Brutsaert
and G. H. Jirka (Eds)., D. Reidel Publishing Co., Boston, 577-589.
Stumm, W., and Morgan, J.J. 1981. Aquatic Chemistry, Wiley Interscience, New York, NY.
Swean, T., Leighton, R., Handler, R., Swearingen J. 1991. Turbulence Modeling Near the Free
Surface in an Open Channel Flow, AIAA 91-0613, 29th Aerospace Sciences Meeting,
Reno, Nevada, January 7-10.
116
REFERENCES
Tailing, J.F. 1955. "The Relative Growth Rates of Three Plankton Diatoms in Relation to Underwater Radiation and Temperature", Ann. Bot. N. S., Vol 19, pp 329-341.
Tamiya, H.T., Sasa, T., Nikei, T., and Ishibashi, S. 1965. "Effects of Variation of Daylength, Day
and Night Temperatures, and Intensity of Daylight on the Growth of Chlorella", J. of General
and Applied Microbiology, Vol 4, pp 298-307.
Tanaka, N., Nakanishi, M., and Kadota, H. 1974. "Nutritional Interrelation Between Bacteria and
Phytoplankton in a Pelagic Ecosystem", Effects of the Ocean Environment on Microbial Activities, R.R. Colwell and R.V. Mouta, eds., University Park Press, Baltimore, MD, pp 495-509.
Thackston, E. L. and Krenkel, P. A. 1966. "Reaeration Predictions in Natural Streams," J. San.
Engr. Div., ASCE, 89(SA5):1-30.
Thackston, E., L. and Dawson, J. W. 2001. Recalibration of a Reaeration Equation, J. Envir.
Engr., ASCE, 127(4), 317-321.
Thibodeaux, L. 1996. Environmental Chemodynamics, Wiley-Interscience, NY.
Thomann, R.V. 1971. "The Effect of Nitrification on the Dissolved Oxygen of Streams and Estuaries", Environmental Engineering and Scientific Program, Manhattan College, Bronx, New
York, NY.
Thomann, R. V. and Fitzpartrick, J. F. 1982. Calibration and Verification of a Mathematical
Model of the Eutrophication of the Potomac Estuary, report by HydroQual, Inc. Mahwah, NJ,
to DES, District of Columbia.
Thomann, R. V. and Mueller, J. A. 1987. Principles of Surface Water Quality Modeling and Control, Harper and Row, NY.
Thomas, J. H. 1975. A Theory of Steady Wind-Driven Current in Shallow Water with Variable
Eddy Viscosity, J. Physical Oceanography, 5(1), 136.
Thomas, W.H., and Dodson, A.N. 1968. "Effects of Phosphate Concentration on Cell Division
Rates and Yield of a Tropical Oceanic Diatom", Biological Bulletin, Vol 134, pp 199-208.
Thompson, J.R., and Bernard, R.S. 1985. "WESSEL: Code for Numerical Simulation of Two-Dimensional Time-Dependent, Width-Averaged Flows with Arbitrary Boundaries", Technical Rpt.
E-85-8, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Thornton, K.W., and Lessem, A.S. 1978. "A Temperature Algorithm for Modifying Biological
Rates", Transactions of the American Fisheries Society, Vol 107, No. 2, pp 284-287.
Thornton, K.W., Nix, J.F., and Bragg, J.D. 1980. "Coliforms and Water Quality: Use of Data in
Project Design and Operation", Water Resources Bulletin, No. 16, pp 86-92.
Tison, D.L., and Pope, D.H. 1980. "Effect of Temperature on Mineralization by Heterotrophic
Bacteria", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol 39, pp 584-587.
117
tion
REFERENCES
Tison, D.L., Pope, D.P., and Boylen, C.W. 1980. "Influence of Seasonal Temperature on the
Temperature Optima of Bacteria in Sediments of Lake George, New York", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol 39, pp 675-677.
Titman, D., and Kilham, P. 1976. "Sinking in Freshwater Phytoplankton: Some Ecological Implications of Cell Nutrient Status and Physical Mixing Processes", Limnology and Oceanography,
Vol 21, No. 3, pp 109-117.
Toerien, D.F., and Cavari, B. 1982. "Effect of Temperature on Heterotrophic Glucose Uptake,
Mineralization, and Turnover Rates in Lake Sediment", Applied and Environmental Microbiology, Vol 43, pp 1-5.
Toetz, D., Varga, L., and Loughran, D. 1973. "Half-Saturation Constants for Uptake of Nitrate
and Ammonia by Reservoir Plankton", Ecology, Vol 54, pp 903-908.
Trussell, R.P. 1972. "The Percent Un-ionized Ammonia in Aqueous Ammonia Solutions at Different pH Levels and Temperature", J. of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol 29, pp
1505-1507.
Tsivoglou, E. C. and Wallace, S. R. 1972. "Characterization of Stream Reaeration Capacity,"
USEPA, Report No. EPA-R3-72-012.
Turner, J. S. 1979. Buoyancy Effects in Fluids, Cambridge University Press, NY.
Turner, J.T. 1977. "Sinking Rates of Fecal Pellets from the Marine Copepod Pontella meadii",
Marine Biology, Vol 40, No. 3, pp 249-259.
Tenessee Valley Authority (TVA) 1972. Heat and Mass Transfer between a water surface and the
atmosphere, Water Resources Report 0-6803, Lab Report #14, Norris, TN.
Underhill, P.A. 1977. "Nitrate Uptake Kinetics and Clonal Variability in the Neritic Diatom Biddulphia aurita", J. of Phycology, Vol 13, pp 170-176.
Ugarte, A. and M. Madrid 1994. Roughness Coefficient in Mountain Rivers, Proceedings National Conference on Hydraulic Engineering, ASCE, pp. 652-656.
USBR 1999. Water Measurement Manual, http://ogee.do.usbr.gov/fmt/wmm.
US Army Engineer District, Baltimore. 1977. "Thermal Simulation of Lakes; User's Manual for
Program Numbers 722-F5-E1O1O and 722-F5-E1011", Baltimore, MD.
Vaccaro, R.F. 1969. "The Response of Natural Microbial Populations in Seawater to Organic Enrichment", Limnology and Oceanography, Vol 14, pp 726-735.
van Lierre, L., Zevenboom, W., and Mur, L.R. 1977. "Nitrogen as a Limiting Factor for the Growth
of the Blue Green Alga Oscillatoria", Progressive Water Technology, Vol 8, pp 301-312.
118
REFERENCES
Verduin, J. 1952. "Photosynthesis and Growth Rates of Live Diatom Communities in Western
Lake Erie", Ecology, Vol 33, pp 163-169.
. 1982. "Components Contributing to Light Extinction in Natural Waters: Methods of Isolation", Archives of Hydrobiology, Vol 93, pp 303-312.
Verity, P.G. 1981. "Effects of Temperature, Irradiance and Daylength on the Marine Diatom Leptocylindrus danicus Cleve; I. Photosynthesis and Cellular Composition", J. of Experimental Marine Biology and Ecology, Vol 55, pp 79-91.
Vollenweider, R.A. 1968. "Scientific Fundamentals of the Eutrophication of Lakes and Flowing
Waters, with Particular Reference to Nitrogen and Phosphorus as Factors in Eutrophication",
Tech. Rept. OECD, DAS/CSI/68.27, Paris, France.
. 1976. "Advances in Defining Critical Loading Levels for Phosphorus in Lake Eutrophication", Mem. Inst. Ital. Idrobiol., Vol 33, pp 53-83.
Von Muller, H. 1972. "Washstum and Phosphatbedarf von Nitzschia octinastroides Lemm.. V.
Goor in Statischer and Homokontinuierlicher Kulter unter Phosphaltlimitierung", Arch. Hydrobiol. Suppl., Vol 38, pp 399-484.
Wallen, D.G., and Cartier, L.D. 1975. "Molybdenum Dependence, Nitrate Uptake and Photosynthesis of Freshwater Plankton Algae", J. of Phycology, Vol 11, pp 345-349.
Wake, A. 1977. "Development of a Thermodynamic Simulation Model for the Ice Regime of Lake
Erie", Ph.D. thesis, SUNY at Buffalo, Buffalo, NY.
Wang, L.K., Poon, C.P., Wang, M.H., and Bergenthal, J. 1978. "Chemistry of Nitrification-Denitrification Process", J. of Environmental Sciences, Vol 21, pp 23-28.
Wannikof, R., Ledwell, J. R., and Crusius, J. 1991. Gas Transfer Velocities on Lakes measured
with Sulfur Hexafluoride, In Symposium Volume of the Second International Conference on
Gas Transfer at Water Surfaces, S. C. Wilhelms and J. S. Gulliver, eds., Minneapolis, MN.
Watts, F. J. 1993. n Values for Shallow Flow in Rough Channels, Proceedings National Conference on Hydraulic Engineering, Part 1, ASCE, pp. 995-1000.
Weiler, R.R. 1974. Carbon dioxide exchange between water and atmosphere, Journal of Fisheries Research, Board Committee, Vol. 31, pp. 329-332.
Wells, S. A. and Berger, C. J. 1995. "Hydraulic and Water Quality Modeling of Wahiawa Reservoir, prepared for R. M. Towill Corporation, Honolulu, HA.
Wells, S. A. 1997. Theoretical Basis for the CE-QUAL-W2 River Basin Model, Department of
Civil Engineering, Technical Report EWR-6-97, Portland State University, Portland, OR.
Wells , S. A. and Berger, C. 1997. "Modeling the Lower Snake River," report prepared for HDR
Engineering, Inc., Boise, ID.
119
tion
REFERENCES
Wells, S. A. and Berger, C. 1998. "The Lower Snake River Model," report prepared for HDR
Engineering, Inc., Boise, ID.
WES. 1996. Evaluation and Analysis of Historical Dissolved Gas Data from the Snake and Columbia Rivers, Waterways Experiments Station, ACOE Dissolved Gas Abatement Study Phase
1 Technical Report, Vicksburg, MS.
WES. 1997. "Total Dissolved Gas Production at Spillways on the Snake and Columbia Rivers,
Memorandum for Record," Waterways Experiments Station, ACOE Dissolved Gas Abatement
Study Phase 1 Technical Report, Vicksburg, MS.
Wetzel, R.G. 1975. Limnology, W.B. Saunders, Philadelphia, PA.
Wetzel, R.G., Rich, P.H., Miller, M.C., and Allen, H.L. 1972. "Metabolism of Dissolved Particulate Detrital Carbon in a Temperate Hardwater Lake", Mem. Ist Ital. Idrobiol. Suppl., Vol 29, pp
185-243.
Whittaker, R.H. 1975. Communities and Ecosystems, MacMillan, New York, NY.
Wiegel, R.L. 1964. Oceanographical Engineering, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Wild, H.E., Sawyer, C.N., and McMahon, T.C. 1971. "Factors Affecting Nitrification Kinetics",
J. of the Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol 43, pp 1845-1854.
Williams, D.T.; Drummond, G.R.; Ford, D.E.; and Robey, D.L. 1980. "Determination of Light
Extinction Coefficients in Lakes and Reservoirs", Surface Water Impoundments, Proceedings
of the Symposium on Surface Water Impoundments, American Society of Civil Engineers, H.G.
Stefan, ed..
Williams, P.J., Yentsch, L.B., and Yentsch, C.S. 1976. "An Examination of Photosynthetic Production, Excretion of Photosynthetic Products and Heterotrophic Utilization of Dissolved Organic Compounds with Reference to Results from a Coastal Subtropical Sea", Marine Biology,
Vol 35, pp 31-40.
Witten, A. J. and J. H. Thomas 1976. Steady Wind-Driven Currents in a Large Lake with Depth
Dependent Eddy Viscosity, J. Physical Oceanography, 6(1), 85.
Wright, R.T. 1975. "Studies on Glycolic Acid Metabolism by Freshwater Bacteria", Limnology
and Oceanography, Vol 20, pp 626-633.
Wuest, A. and Lorke, A. 2003. Small-Scale Hydrodynamics In Lakes. Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech.
2003. 35:373412, doi: 10.1146/annurev.fluid.35.101101.161220.
Wuhrmann, K. 1972. "Stream Purification", Water Pollution Microbiology, R. Mitchell, ed.), Interscience, New York, NY.
120
REFERENCES
Wunderlich, W. 1972. "Heat and Mass Transfer between a Water Surface and the Atmosphere",
Rpt. No. 14, Rpt. Publication No. 0-6803, Water Resources Research Laboratory, Tennessee
Valley Authority, Division of Water Control Planning, Engineering Laboratory, Norris, TN.
Zimmerman, U. 1969. "Okologische and Physiologische Untersuchungen an der Planktonischen
Blauagle Oscillatoria Rubescens, D.C., unter Besonderer Beruchlschtlgung von Licht and Temperatur", Schweiz. Z. Hydrol., Vol 31, pp 1-58.
Yakhot, V. and Orszag, S. 1986. "Renormalization Group Analysis of Turbulence 1: Basic Theory," J. Sci. Comput. 1(1), 3-51.
Yen, B. C. 1992. Hydraulic Resistance of Open Channels in Channel Flow: Centennial of Manning's Formula, ed. B.C. Yen, Water Resources Publications, Littleton, CO.
Yu, S.L., T.J. Tuffy, and D.S. Lee. 1977. Atmosphere Reaeration in a lake, Office of Water
Resources and Technology, U.S. Department of the Interior.
Zison, S.W., Mills, W.B., Deimer, B., and Chen, C.W. 1978. "Rates, Constants, and Kinetics
Formulations in Surface Water Quality Modeling", EPA-600/3-68-105, US Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
121
tion
CE-QUAL-W2 Publications
Peer Reviewed Publications and Proceedings
Annear, R. L., and Wells, S. A. 2007. A comparison of five models for estimating clear-sky solar
radiation, Water Resources Research, 43, W10415, doi:10.1029/2006WR005055.
Bartholow, J., R.B. Hanna, L. Saito, D. Lieberman, and M. Horn. 2001. Simulated Limnological
Effects of the Shasta Lake Temperature Control Device. Environmental Management, Vol. 27,
No. 4, pp. 609-626. http://smig.usgs.gov/SMIG/uo/features_0999/shasta_tcd.html.
Bath, A.J., and T.D. Timm. 1994. "Hydrodynamic Simulation of Water Quality in Reservoirs of
South Africa", Commission Internationale Des Grands Barrages, Q.69 R. 39, 625-633.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. A. 2007. Modeling Effects of Channel Complexity and Hyporheic Flow
on Stream Temperatures, Proceedings, National TMDL 2007 Conference, Water Environment
Federation, Bellevue, WA, June 24-27.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. A. 2007. Development and Calibration Of Lake Whatcom Water Quality
Model, Proceedings, National TMDL 2007 Conference, Water Environment Federation, Bellevue, WA, June 24-27.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. 2008. A Macrophyte Water Quality and Hydrodynamic Model, ASCE,
Journal of Environmental Engineering, 134:778-788.
Berger, C.; McKillip, M.; Annear, R.; Wells, V., and Wells, S. 2009. Modeling the Spokane RiverLake Roosevelt System, Proceedings IAHR 33rd Congress, Vancouver, BC, August 9-14, pp.
6223-6230.
Berger, C., Wells, S. A., and Wells, V. I. 2012. Modeling of Water Quality and Greenhouse Emissions of Proposed South American Reservoirs, Proceedings World Environmental and Water
Resources Congress, EWRI, ASCE, Albuquerque, NM, pp. 911-923.
Boatman, C.D., and E.M. Buchak. 1987. " Application of an Ecosystem/Water Quality Model as
a Tool for Managing Estuarine Water Quality". In Proceedings Fifth Symposium on Coastal
Ocean Management, ASCE, Vol. 3, Seattle, Washington, 3932-3945.
122
CE-QUAL-W2 BIBLIOGRAPHY
Boegman, L., M.R. Loewen, D.A. Culver, P.F. Hamblin and M.N. Charlton. 2002. A two-dimensional model coupling pelagic dynamics to benthic grazing by zebra mussles in western Lake
Erie: Relative impacts of nutrient load abatement and mussel invasion, 1960s to 1994. (Under
consideration for submission to Can. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci.).
Boegman, L., M.R. Loewen, P.F. Hamblin and D.A. Culver. 2002. A Two-Dimensional Model
Coupling Pelagic Dynamics to Benthic Grazing by Zebra Mussles in Western Lake Erie: SpatialDynamic Responses. (Under consideration for submission to Canadian Journal of Fisheries
and Aquatic Sciences).
Boegman, L., M.R. Loewen, P.F. Hamblin and D.A. Culver. 2001. Application of a Two-Dimensional Hydrodynamic Reservoir Model to Lake Erie. Canadian Journal of Fisheries and
Aquatic Sciences, 58: 858-869.
Crain, A. S., G. L. Jarrett, and P. A. Bukaveckas. 1997. Development And Calibration Of A
Water Quality Model For Herrington Lake. Waterworks 3(1):1-3.
Deliman, P.N. and J.A. Gerald. 2002. Application of the Two-Dimensional Hydrothermal and
Water Quality Model, CE-QUAL-W2, to the Chesapeake Bay Conowingo Reservoir. Journal of Lake and Reservoir Management, Vol. 18, No. 1, pp. 1-9.
Dortch, M. S., and W. L. Boyt. 1983. "Simulating Advective Transport in Reservoirs". In Proceedings of the Conference on Frontiers in Hydraulic Engineering, H. T. Shen, ed., August 912, 1983. Hydraulics Division of the American Society of Civil Engineers in conjunction with
Massachusets Institute of Technology and the Boston Society of Civil Engineers. Cambridge,
MA.
Edinger, J. E., and E. M. Buchak. 1980. "Numerical Hydrodynamics of Estuaries" in Estuarine
and Wetland Processes with Emphasis on Modeling, P. Hamilton and K. B. MacDonald eds.,
Plenum Press, New York, NY, 115-146.
Edinger, J. E., E. M. Buchak, and D. H. Merritt. 1983. "Longitudinal-Vertical Hydrodynamics
and Transport with Chemical Equilibria for Lake Powell and Lake Mead", in Salinity in Watercourses and Reservoirs, R. H. French, ed.. Butterworth Publishers, Stoneham, MA, pp.
213-222.
Edinger, J. E., E. M. Buchak, and S. Rives. 1987. "GLVHT Model Verification Using Field Data",
in Proc. 1987 National Conference on Hydraulic Engineering, R. M. Ragan, ed., August 3-7,
1987. Hydraulics Division of the American Society of Civil Engineers. Williamsburg, VA.
Garvey, E., J.E. Tobiason, M. Hayes, E. Wolfram, D.A. Reckhow, and J.W. Male. 1998. Coliform
Transport in a Pristine Reservoir: Modeling and Field Studies. Water Science and Technology,
Vol. 37, No. 2, pp. 137144.
Gelda, R. K. and S. W. Effler. 2000. A River Water Quality Model for Chlorophyll and Dissolved
Oxygen that Accommodates Zebra Mussel Metabolism. Water Quality and Ecosystem Modeling 1:271-309.
123
tion
Gelda, R. K., S. W. Effler and E. M. Owens. 2001. River Dissolved Oxygen Model with Zebra
Mussel Oxygen Demand (ZOD). Journal of Environmental Engineering Division, ASCE
127:790-801.
Gelda, R. K. and S. W. Effler. 2007. Testing and application of a two-dimensional hydrothermal
model for a water supply reservoir: Implications of sedimentation. J. Environ. Eng. Sci. 6:7384.
Gelda, R. K. and S. W. Effler. 2007. Modeling turbidity in a water supply reservoir: Advancements
and issues. J. Environ. Eng. 133:139-148.
Gelda, R. K., S. W. Effler, F. Peng, E. M. Owens and D. C. Pierson. 2009. Turbidity model for
Ashokan Reservoir, New York: Case Study. J. Environ. Eng. 135:885-895.
Gelda, R. K., E. M. Owens and S. W. Effler. 1998. Calibration, Verification, and an Application
of a Two-DImensional Hydrothermal Model [CE-QUAL-W2] for Cannonsville Reservoir.
Journal of Lake and Reservoir Management, 14:186-196.
Gordon, J. A. 1980. "An Evaluation of the LARM Two-Dimensional Model for Water Quality
Management Purposes", in Proceedings of the Symposium on Surface-Water Impoundments, H.
G. Stefan, ed., Minneapolis, Minnesota, June 2-5, 1980, Vol. 1, Paper 4-34, pp. 518-527. American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY.
Gordon, J. A. 1981. "LARM Two-Dimensional Model: An Evaluation". Journal of Environmental Engineering, 107(5), 77-886.
Gordon, J. A., and J. S. Lane. 1983. "Short-Term Hydrodynamics in a Stratified Reservoir", in
Proceedings of the 1983 National Conference on Environmental Engineering, A. Medine and
M. Anderson, eds.), Boulder, Colorado, July 6-8, 1983, pp. 524-531. American Society of Civil
Engineers, New York, NY.
Gndz, O., S. Soyupak, and C. Yurteri. 1998. Development of Water Quality Management Strategies for the Proposed Isikli Reservoir. Water Science and Technology, Vol. 37, No. 2, pp.
369376
Hanna, R.B., L. Saito, J.M. Bartholow, and J. Sandelin. 1999. Results of Simulated Temperature
Control Device Operations on In-Reservoir and Discharge Water Temperatures Using CEQUAL-W2.
Journal of Lake and Reservoir Management 15(2):87-102.
http://www.fort.usgs.gov/.
Johnson, B. H., M. B. Boyd and R. R. Copeland. 1987. "Lower Mississippi River Salt Intrusion
Modeling", in Proceedings 1987 National Conference on Hydraulic Engineering, R. M. Ragan,
ed.), 3-7 August 1987. Hydraulics Division of the American Society of Civil Engineers. Williamsburg, VA.
Kim, B. R., J. M. Higgins and D. J. Bruggink. 1983. "Reservoir Circulation Patterns and Water
Quality". Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, 109(6), 1284-1294.
124
Kurup, R.G., D.P. Hamilton, and R.L. Phillips. 2000. Comparison of Two 2-Dimensional, Laterally Averaged Hydrodynamic Model Applications to the Swan River Estuary. Mathematics
and Computers in Simulation, 51(6): 627-639. http://www.cwr.uwa.edu.au/cwr/publications/papers1500/1536.html
Martin, J. L. 1988. "Application of Two-Dimensional Water Quality Model". Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, 114(2), 317-336.
McKillip, M. and Wells, S. 2006. Hydrodynamic, water quality and fish bioenergetics modeling
in Lake Roosevelt Washington USA using CE-QUAL-W2, Proceedings, 5th International
Conference on Reservoir Limnology and Water Quality, Brno, Czech Republic, August 27-September 2, 2006, pp. 145-148.
Mooij WM, Trolle D, Jeppesen E, Arhonditsis G, Belolipetsky PV, Chitamwebwa DBR, Degermendzhy AG, DeAngelis DL, De Senerpont Domis LN, Downing AS, Elliott JA, Fragoso Jr
CR, Gaedke U, Genova SN, Gulati RD, Hkanson L, Hamilton DP, Hipsey MR, t Hoen J,
Hlsmann S, Los FJ, Makler-Pick V, Petzoldt T, Prokopkin IG, Rinke K, Schep SA, Tominaga
K, Van Dam AA, Van Nes EH, Wells SA and Janse JH. 2010. Challenges and opportunities
for integrating lake ecosystem modelling approaches, Aquatic Ecology: DOI:10.1007/s10452010-9339-3, 44(3): 633-667.
O'Donnell, S. M., R. K. Gelda and S. W. Effler. 2011. Modeling the fate of runoff events density
currents in a reservoir with a two-dimensional framework. Lake and Reserv. Manage. (in press).
P.Yu. Pushistov, V.N. Danchev. 2012. Experience in development and results of informationalcomputational complexes application in modeling of hydrodynamic variables and thermal regime in water bodies of the Ob River basin. Part 1 ICC Severnaya Sosva. Part 2 ICC Lake
Teletskoye, Russian Academy Of Sciences, Siberean Branch, Institute For Water And Environmental Problems, Federal Service for Hydrometeorology and Environmental Monitoring, Siberian Regional Hydrometeorological Research Institute.
Saito, L. B.M. Johnson, J. Bartholow, R. B. Hanna. 2001. Assessing Ecosystem Effects of Reservoir Operations Using Food Web-Energy Transfer and Water Quality Models. Ecosystems
4(2):105-125.
http://link.springer-ny.com/link/service/journals/10021/bibs/1004002/10040105.html
Saito, Laurel, Brett M. Johnson, John M. Bartholow, and Darrell G. Fontane. 2001. Interdisciplinary modeling to assess ecosystem effects of reservoir operations. Pp. 373-377 in Marino, Miguel A., and Slobodan P. Simonovic, editors. Integrated Water Resources Management. IAHS
Publication no. 272. Oxfordshire (UK): International Association of Hydrologic Sciences Press.
Wells, S. A., J. R. Manson, and J. L. Martin 2007. Numerical Hydrodynamic and Transport Models for Reservoirs, Chapter 4 in Energy Production and Reservoir Water Quality, ASCE.
Wells, S. 2009. Hydrodynamic Compressible and Incompressible Modeling of the Density Structure and Hydrodynamics of Hypersaline Systems, Proceedings IAHR 33rd Congress, Vancouver, BC, August 9-14, pp. 4345-4352.
125
tion
Wells, S. A., Wells, V. I., and Berger, C. 2012. Impact of Phosphorus Loading from the Watershed
on Water Quality Dynamics in Lake Tenkiller, Oklahoma, USA, Proceedings World Environmental and Water Resources Congress, EWRI, ASCE, Albuquerque, NM, pp. 888-899.
Wells, V. I. and Wells, S. A. 2012. CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality and Fish-bioenergetics Model
of Chester Morse Lake and the Cedar River, Proceedings World Environmental and Water
Presentations at Scientific Meetings

Annear, R. and S. Wells. 2002. "The Bull Run Reservoir River System Model". Proceedings
Research and Extension Regional Water Quality Conference 2002 [on CD], Vancouver, Washington.
Annear, R. and S. Wells. 2002. The Bull Run River Reservoir System Model. Proceedings
2nd Federal InterAgency Hydrologic Modeling Conference, Las Vegas, July 28-Aug 1, 2002.
Atkins, D., T. Martin, and M. Bennett. 1998. Pitlake Limnology. In Proceedings of the 1998
Conference on Hazardous Waste Research: Bridging Gaps in Technology and Culture, Snowbird, Utah, May 18-21, 1998.
Atkins, D., J.H. Kempton, T. Martin, and P. Maley. 1997. Limnologic Conditions in Three Existing Nevada Pit Lakes: Observations and Modeling Using CE-QUAL-W2. in Proceedings Fourth International Conference on Acid Rock Drainage, Vancouver, B.C., Canada, May 31 June 6, 1997.
Bales, J.D. 2001. Data Quality and Uncertainty in Reservoir Water-Quality Modeling Carolina.
In Warwick, J.J., ed., Water Quality Monitoring and ModelingProceedings of the AWRA Annual Spring Specialty Conference, p. 113.
Bales, J.D. 2001. Dynamic Water-Quality Models of Catawba River Basin Reservoirs, North
Carolina. In NALMS 10th Annual Southeastern Lakes Conference, Knoxville, TN, p. 28.
Bales, J.D. 1998. Dynamic Water-Quality Modeling of Catawba River Reservoirs. In Water
resources protection: understanding and managemen, Institute Proceedings Series No. 11, Raleigh, NC, University of North Carolina Water Resources Research Institute, p. 23 [abs].
Bales, J.D. 1997. Modeling estuarine effects of nitrogen loading reduction. In Tanner, J., ed.,
Nutrients in the Neuse River--Working Toward Solutions. New Bern, NC, Confere, North Carolina State University, p. 11 [abs].
Bales, J.D., and M.L. Jaynes. 1995. Dynamic Modeling of Circulation and Water Quality in a
Narrow Piedmont Reservoir. 4th Annual Southeastern Lakes Management Conference, North
American Lake Management Society, Charlotte, North Carolina.
126
Bales, J.D. 1993. U.S. Geological Survey Reservoir Studies in North Carolina. 2nd Annual Southeastern Lakes Management Conference, North American Lake Management Society Chattanooga, Tennessee.
Bales, J.D., 1993, The role of models in evaluating water quality in Proceedings of the Conference
on Water Issues in the 1990s: Hickory, NC, Environmental Policy Studies Center, Catawba
Valley Community College, p. 1-2.
Bales, J.D. and M.J. Diorgino. 1998. Dynamic Modeling of Water Supply Reservoir Physical
and Chemical Processes. In Proceedings of the First Federal Interagency Hydrologic Modeling Conference, April 19-23, 1998, Las Vegas, NV: Subcommittee on Hydrology of the Interagency
Advisory
Committee
on
Water
Data,
p.
2-61
to
2-67.
http://smig.usgs.gov/SMIG/features_0998/rhodhiss.html.
Bartholow, J., L. Saito, B. Hanna, B. Johnson, D. Lieberman, and M. Horn. 2000. Predicting the
Effects of Shasta's Temperature Control Device on In-Reservoir Limnology and Fish. Bay
Delta Modeling Forum/Interagency Ecological Program, Pacific Grove, California, February
29-March 3, 2000.
Bartholow, J.M., B. Hanna, L. Saito, D. Lieberman, and M. Horn. 1999. Simulated effects of a
temperature control device on Shasta Lake. North American Lake Management Society Symposium '99. Reno, Nevada, December 1-4, 1999.
Bartholow, J., D. Lieberman, M. Horn, B. Hanna, and L. Saito. 1998. Effects of Dam Reoperation
on Reservoir Limnology and Fishery Energetics. North American Lake Management Society
Conference, Banff, Alberta, Canada.
Berger, C. and S. Wells. 1995. "Effects of Management Strategies to Improve Water Quality in
the Tualatin River, Oregon," in Water Resources Engineering, Vol. 2, ed. by W, Espey Jr. and
P. Combs, ASCE, 1360-1364.
Berger, C. and S. Wells. 1999. "Macrophyte Modeling in the Columbia Slough," Proceedings
International Water Resources Engineering Conference, ASCE, Seattle, Wa, Aug.8-11.
Berger, C., R. Annear, and S. Wells. 2002. Willamette River and Columbia River Waster Load
Allocation Model. In Proceedings 2nd Federal InterAgency Hydrologic Modeling Conference,
Las Vegas, July 28-Aug 1, 2002.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. A. 2007. Modeling Effects of Channel Complexity and Hyporheic Flow
on Stream Temperatures, Proceedings, National TMDL 2007 Conference, Water Environment
Federation, Bellevue, WA, June 24-27.
Berger, C. and Wells, S. A. 2007. Development And Calibration Of Lake Whatcom Water Quality
Model, Proceedings, National TMDL 2007 Conference, Water Environment Federation, Bellevue, WA, June 24-27.
Berger, C., Wells, S. A., and Wells, V. I. 2012. Modeling of Water Quality and Greenhouse Emissions of Proposed South American Reservoirs, Proceedings World Environmental and Water
127
tion
Berger, C. J., Bigham, G., and Wells, S. A. 2014. Prediction of GHG Emissions from a New
Reservoir, Proceedings World Environmental and Water Resources Congress, EWRI, ASCE,
Portland, OR.
Bowen, J.D. 1998. Using Eutrophication Modeling to Predict the Effectiveness of River Restoration Efforts. In Proceedings Wetlands Engineering and River Restoration Conference,
ASCE.
Buchak, E. M., and J. E. Edinger. 1989. "Comparison of Computed and Observed Velocities at
Three Estuarine Sites". Presented at the Estuarine and Coastal Circulation and Pollutant
Transport Modeling: Model-Data Comparison. Waterway, Port, Coastal and Ocean Division,
American Society of Civil Engineers, November 17, Newport, RI.
Buchak, E.M., J.E. Edinger, J.J. Loos and E.S. Perry. 1989. "Larval Transport and Entrainment
Modeling for the Patuxent Estuary". Presented at the Tenth Biennial International Estuarine
Research Conference, Estuarine Research Federation, October 11, Baltimore, MD.
Buchak, E. M., C. B. James and A. C. Mitchell. 1991. "Nechako Reservoir Mathematical Modelling Studies". Presented at the 1991 Annual Conference of the Canadian Society for Civil Engineering, 10th Canadian Hydrotechnical Conference and Engineering Mechanics Symposium,
May 29, Vancouver, BC.
Boegman, L., P.F. Hamblin and M.R. Loewen. Two-Dimensional Modelling of Zebra Mussel Effects in Lake Erie, Stage One: Validation of Temperature, Currents and Water Levels. In Proceedings of the 42nd Conference of the International Association of Great Lakes Research, May
24-28, 1999, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, Ohio USA.
Boegman, L., M.R. Loewen, P.F. Hamblin and D.A. Culver. Application of a Two-Dimensional
Hydrodynamic and Water Quality Model to Lake Erie. Abstract in proceedings 2000 Ocean
Sciences Meeting, Jan. 24-28, 2000, San Antonio, Texas USA.
Chapman, R.S. and T.M. Cole. 1992. Improved Thermal Predictions in CE-QUAL-W2. In
Hydraulic Engineering: Saving a Threatened ResourceIn Search of Solutions, Water Forum
92, Baltimore, Maryland.
Cheslak, E; Berger, C; Annear, R., and Wells, S. 2009. Protecting Spring-Run Chinook Salmon:
The Use of a Two-dimensional Water Temperature Model to Evaluate Alternative Hydroelectric
Operations, WaterPower XVI Proceedings, Spokane, WA, July 27-30, 2009
Chow, I.B. 2002 A Two-Dimensional Model Application for Manatee Protection. Charlotte
Harbor Watershed Summit, IMPAC University in Punta Gorda, Florida, February 7-9, 2002.
Cole, T. M., and Hannan, H. H. 1979. "Computer Simulations of Canyon Reservoir". Presented
at the Texas Academy of Sciences Annual Meeting. Austin, TX.
Cole, T.M. 1995. The Future Role of Sophisticated Models in Reservoir Management. Lake
and Reservoir Management V9 No. 2, NALMS 14th Annual International Symposium, Orlando,
FL.
128
Cole, T. M. 2000. Temperature Modeling Using CE-QUAL-W2. In Proceedings HydroInformatics 2000, IAHR, CDROM EW4.
Cole, T.M. 2002. CE-QUAL-W2 A 2D Hydrodynamic and Water Quality Model for Rivers,
Lakes, Reservoirs, and Estuaries. In 4th International Conference on Reservoir Limnology and
Water Quality, Ceshe Budejovice, Czech Republic, August 12-16, 2002.
Devine, G., M. French, And G. L. Jarrett. 1997. Neural Networks As A Tool To Calibrate Reservoir Water Quality Models. In Proceedings Of The Kentucky Water Resources Research Institute.
Easley, W.S., L.E. Barness-Walz, P.L. Neichter, and J.A. Bohannon. 1995. Evaluation of Water
Quality in Taylorsville Lake, Kentuchyy: Using CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality Model. Lake
and Reservoir Management V9 No. 2, NALMS 14th Annual International Symposium, Orlando,
FL.
Edinger, J. E., and E. M. Buchak. 1978. "Reservoir Longitudinal and Vertical Implicit Hydrodynamics". Presented at the international conference Environmental Effects of Hydraulic Engineering Works, ASCE, September, Knoxville, TN.
Goodwin, R.A., J.M. Nestler, and D. Degan. 2000. Simulating Movement of Cool Water Fish in
a Stratified Southern Impoundment. American Fisheries Society Annual Meeting: Reflections,
St. Louis, Missouri, August 20-24, 2000.
Hanna, B., L. Saito, J. Bartholow, and J. Sandelin. 1997. Results of Mock 1995 Shasta TCD
Operations on In-Reservoir and Discharge Water Quality Parameters using CE-QUAL-W2.
17th International Symposium of the North American Lake Management Society, Houston, TX.
page 54. http://www.fort.usgs.gov/.
Johnson, M. C., D. E. Ford, J. E. Edinger and E. M. Buchak. 1981. "Analyzing Storm Event Data
from DeGray Lake, Arkansas Using LARM". Presented at the American Society of Civil Engineers Convention and Exposition, October, St. Louis, MO.
Hejzlar J., M. Rika, and P. A. Diogo. 1999. The Use of water quality modelling for optimising
operation of a drinking water reservoir Proceedings International Conference on Fluid Mechanics and Hydrology, June 23-26, 1999, Prague, Czech Republic, Institute of Hydrodynamics
AS CR, Prague, 475-482.
Jain, R., G. L. Jarrett, and E. M. Buchak. 2002. Watershed and Reservoir Modeling in the Crum
Creek Watershed. AWRA Annual 2002 Conference. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. November
3-7.
Jarrett, G. L, L. Curry, and J. Overing. 2001. Herrington Lake - Dix River Watershed (HSPF
CEQUAL-W2 linkage). Kentucky Water Resources Symposium, Lexington, KY, Feb. 23.
Kennedy, R.H., T. Cole, W. Boyd, K. Barko. 2002. Operational Influences on the Limnological
Characteristics of Reservoirs: A Model Study. 2002. In 4th International Conference on Reservoir Limnology and Water Quality, Ceshe Budejovice, Czech Republic, August 12-16, 2002.
129
tion
Lieberman, D., J. Bartholow, M. Horn, B. Hanna, and L. Saito. 1999. Effects of Dam Reoperation
on Reservoir Limnology and Fishery Energetics. North American Lake Management Society
Conference, Banff, Alberta, Canada.
Little, J.C. and McGinnis, D. F. "Hypolimnetic Oxygenation: Predicting Performance Using a Discrete-Bubble Model". In Proceedings of 1st World Water Congress, International Water Association (IWA), Paris, France, July 3-7, 2000.
Makinia, J., Wells, S. A., Crawford, D., and Kulbik, M. 1998. "Application of Mathematical
Modeling and Computer Simulation for Solving Water Quality Problems," Proceedings of the
Fourth International Symposium and Exhibition on Environmental Contamination in Central
and Eastern Europe Warsaw '98, Warsaw, Poland, September 15-17, #233 CD-ROM.
Martinez, V. I., Wells, S. A. and R. C. Addley. 2014. Meeting Temperature Requirements for
Fisheries Downstream of Folsom Reservoir, California, Proceedings World Environmental and
Water Resources Congress, EWRI, ASCE, Portland, OR
McGinnis, D.F., Little, J.C. and West, A. "Hypolimnetic oxygenation: Coupling bubble-plume
and reservoir models" submitted to Asian Waterqual 2001, First IWA Asia-Pacific Regional
Conference,
Fukuoka,
Japan.
http://www.eawag.ch/research_e/apec/Scripts/IWA%20Japan%20v6.pdf
McGinnis, D., J. Little, A. Wuest. 2002. Coupling Bubble-Plume and Reservoir Models for Optimization of Hypolimnetic Oxygenation. In 4th International Conference on Reservoir Limnology and Water Quality, Ceshe Budejovice, Czech Republic, August 12-16, 2002.
McKillip, M. and Wells, S. 2006. Hydrodynamic, water quality and fish bioenergetics modeling
in Lake Roosevelt Washington USA using CE-QUAL-W2, Proceedings, 5th International
Conference on Reservoir Limnology and Water Quality, Brno, Czech Republic, August 27
September 2, 2006, pp. 145-148.
Meller M., F. Werner , and L. Luckner. 2002. A Tool for Conjunctive Groundwater and Surface
Water Quality Modeling in Post Mining Areas. In Proceedings of Third International Conference on Water Resources and Environment Research, Dresden, Germany. Vol. I. pp.136-141.
Rika, M., J. Hejzlar, and T.M. Cole. 2002. Impacts of Climate Change on the Water Quality
in a Dimictic Reservoir. In 4th International Conference on Reservoir Limnology and Water
Quality, Ceshe Budejovice, Czech Republic, August 12-16, 2002.
Rika M., J. Hejzlar, P. Mikeov, and T. M. Cole. 2000. 2-D Water Quality Modelling of
a Drinking Water Reservoir: mov Reservoir, Czech Republic. In Proceedings 5th International Symposium on Systems Analysis and Computing in Water Quality Management
WATERMATEX 2000, Gent, Belgium, 18-20 September 2000. Gent University, Gent, pp. 1.591.66.
130
Ruzicka, M., J. Hejzlar, M. Dubrovsky, J. Buchtele, T.M. Cole. 2001. A Scenario Study of Water
Quality in a Drinking Water Supply Reservoir in Response to Climate Change. In Detecting
Environmental
Change,
London,
17-20
July
2001,
London,
UK.
http://www.ufa.cas.cz/dub/dub.htm
Rounds, S.A. 2001. Modeling water quality in the Tualatin River: Achievements and limitations. In AWRA Annual Spring Specialty Conference Proceedings, "Water Quality Monitoring
and Modeling". Warwick, John J., ed., American Water Resources Association, Middleburg,
Virginia, TPS-01-1, p. 115-120.
Saito, L., B. Johnson, J. Bartholow, and Blair Hanna. 2001. Assessing Effects of Reservoir Operations on the Reservoir Ecosystem Using Food Web-Energy Transfer and Water Quality Models. 21st Annual American Geophysical Union Hydrology Days, April 2-5, 2001, Colorado
State University, Fort Collins, Colorado, USA.
Saito, L., B. Johnson, J. Bartholow, and D. Fontane. 2000. Interdisciplinary modeling to assess
ecosystem effects of reservoir operations. International Symposium on Integrated Water Resources Management. Davis, CA. April 2000.
Shoajei, N. and Wells, S. A. 2014. Automatic Calibration of Water Quality Models for Reservoirs
and Lakes, Proceedings World Environmental and Water Resources Congress, EWRI, ASCE,
Portland, OR.
Smemoe, C.M., E.J. Nelson, and T.M. Cole. 2000. A Conceptual Modeling Approach to
CEQUAL-W2 Using the Watershed Modeling System. In Proceedings of the Hydroinformatics Conference, Iowa City, Iowa, July 2000.
Wells, S.A. 1995. "Management of the Water Quality of the North Slough Adjacent to the St.
John's Landfill. In Proceedings First Annual Pacific Northwest Water Issues and 1995 Pacific
Northwest/Oceania Conference, Portland, Oregon.
Wells, S.A. and C. Berger. 1995. "Management Strategies to Improve Water Quality in the Tualatin River, Oregon. In Proceedings NCASI Conference, September 27-28, 1995, Portland, OR.
Wells, S.A. and C. Berger. 1995. "Management of the Water Quality of the Upper and Lower
Columbia Slough System. In Proceedings First Annual Pacific Northwest Water Issues and
1995 Pacific Northwest/Oceania Conference, Portland, OR.
Wells, S. A., C. Berger, and M. Abrams. 1996. Winter Storm Event Impacts on Dissolved Oxygen Levels in the Columbia Slough System. In The Pacific Northwest Floods of February 611, 1996, Proceedings of the Pacific Northwest Water Issues Conference, ed. by A. Laenen,
American Institute of Hydrology, pp.107-126.
Wells, S.A. and C. Berger. 1998. "Water Quality Impacts of Urban Stormwater Runoff from the
Portland International Airport on the Columbia Slough. In Proceedings Gdanska Fundacja
Wody, Podczysczanie Wod Opadowych Wymagania Formalnoprawne I Mozliwosci Technicne,
[in Polish], Gdansk, Poland.
131
tion
Wells, S.A. 1999. "River Basin Modeling Using CE-QUAL-W2. In Proceedings International
Water Resources Engineering Conference, ASCE, Seattle, WA, Aug.8-11.
Wells, S.A. 2000. "Hydrodynamic and Water Quality River Basin Modeling Using CE-QUALW2 Version 3. In Development and Application of Computer Techniques to Environmental
Studies VIII, ed. G. Ibarra-Berastegi, C. Brebbia, P. Zannetti, WIT Press, Boston, 195-204.
Wells, S. A. 2000. "CE-QUAL-W2 Version 3: Hydrodynamic and Water Quality River Basin
Modeling. In Proceedings HydroInformatics 2000, IAHR, CDROM EW4.
Wells, S.A. 2002. Validation of the CE-QUAL-W2 Version 3 River Basin Hydrodynamic and
Water Quality Model. Proceedings HydroInformatics 2002, IAHR, Cardiff, England.
Wells, S.A. 2002. Basis of the CE-QUAL-W2 Version 3 River Basin Hydrodynamic and Water
Quality Model.. In Proceedings 2nd Federal InterAgency Hydrologic Modeling Conference,
Las Vegas, July 28-Aug 1, 2002.
Wells, S. A. and Annear, R. A. 2002. River Basin Modeling Using CE-QUAL-W2 Version 3: The
Bull Run River-Reservoir System Model. In Proceedings 4th International Conference on
Reservoir Limnology and Water Quality, Ceske Budejovice, Czech Republic, August 12-16,
2002.
Wells, S.A. and T.M. Cole. 2002. TMDLS: Statistical Correlations or Mechanistic Modeling?.
In Proceedings National TMDL Science and Policy Conference, Phoenix, AR, November 1316, 2002.
Wells, S.A. and R. Annear. 2002. River Basin Modeling Using CE-QUAL-W2 V3: The Bull
Run River-Reservoir System Model. In 4th International Conference on Reservoir Limnology
and Water Quality, Ceshe Budejovice, Czech Republic, August 12-16, 2002.
Wells, S. A., Berger, C. J., Annear, R. L., McKillip, M. and Jamal, S. 2003. Willamette River
Basin Temperature TMDL Modeling Study, Proceedings National TMDL Science and Policy
Conference, Chicago, IL, November 16-19, 2003.
Wells, S. A., Berger, C. J., Annear, R. L., McKillip, M. and Jamal, S. 2004. Willamette River
Basin Temperature Modeling Study, Proceedings Watershed 2004, Dearborn, MI, July 1114,2004.
Wells, S. A., Wells, V. I., and Berger, C. 2012. Impact of Phosphorus Loading from the Watershed
on Water Quality Dynamics in Lake Tenkiller, Oklahoma, USA, Proceedings World Environmental and Water Resources Congress, EWRI, ASCE, Albuquerque, NM, pp. 888-899.
Wells, V. I. and Wells, S. A. 2012. CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality and Fish-bioenergetics Model
of Chester Morse Lake and the Cedar River, Proceedings World Environmental and Water
132
Wood, T.M. and Rounds, S.A. 1998. Using CE-QUAL-W2 to Assess the Effect of Reduced
Phosphorus Loads on Chlorophyll-a and Dissolved Oxygen in the Tualatin River, Oregon. In
Proceedings of the First Federal Interagency Hydrologic Modeling Conference, Las Vegas, Nevada, April 19-23, 1998: U.S. Geological Survey, p. 2-149 - 2-156.
http://smig.usgs.gov/SMIG/features_0398/phos_tual.html
Rounds, S.A. and Wood, T.M. 1998. Using CE-QUAL-W2 to Assess the Ammonia Assimilative
Capacity of the Tualatin River, Oregon. In Proceedings of the First Federal Interagency Hydrologic Modeling Conference, Las Vegas, Nevada, April 19-23, 1998: U.S. Geological Survey,
p. 2-133 - 2-140. http://smig.usgs.gov/SMIG/features_0398/ammonia_tual.html
Yager, R.E. B.R. Hayes, and M.J. Sale. 1995. Modeling of Reservoir Release Temperature for
Protecting Downstream Fish Habitat. In Lake and Reservoir Management V9 No. 2, NALMS
14th Annual International Symposium, Orlando, FL.
Young, W.S., B.R. Schachte, and J.D. Bales. 1996. Customized Software for Model Calibration
and Visualization of Reservoir Water-Quality Model Results. In Babcock, C.A., ed., Proceedings 1996 USGS National Computer Technology Meeting.
Reports and Miscellaneous Articles

Adams, R. W., Thackston, E. L., Speece, R. E., Wilson, D. J., and Cardozo, R. 1993. "Effect of
Nashville's Combined Sewer Overflows on the Water Quality of the Cumberland River", Technical Rpt. No. 42, Environmental and Water Resources Engineering, Vanderbilt University,
Nashville, TN.
Bales, J.D., K.M. Sarver, and M.J. Giorgino. 2001. Mountain Island Lake, North Carolina: Analysis of Ambient Conditions and Simulation of Hydrodynamics, Constituent Transport, and Water-Quality Characteristics, 1996-97. U.S. Geological Survey Water-Resources Investigations
Report 01-4138.
Bales, J.D., and J.C. Robbins. 1999. A Water-Quality Modeling Framework for the Neuse River
Estuary, North Carolina. U.S. Geological Survey Water-Resources Investigations Report 994017, 35 p.
Bales, J.D., and M.J. Giorgino. 1998. Lake Hickory, North Carolina: Analysis of Ambient Conditions and Simulation of Hydrodynamics, Constituent Transport, and Water-Quality Characteristics, 1993-94. U.S. Geological Survey Water-Resources Investigations Report 98-4189,
62 p.
Barnese, Lisa E., Neichter, Patrick L., and Bohanon, Joseph A. 1993. "Evaluation of Water Quality
in Caesar Creek Lake, Ohio using the CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality Model", U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers, Louisville, KY.
Bartholow, J.
1998.
Animation of Age of Water in Shasta Lake for 1995.
http://www.fort.usgs.gov/.
133
tion
Buchak, E. M. and J. E. Edinger. 1982. "Hydrothermal Simulation of Quabbin Reservoir Using
Longitudinal-Vertical Hydrodynamics", Final Report, prepared for Wallace, Floyd Associates,
Inc., Cambridge, MA.
. 1982. "Hydrothermal Simulations of Pool 3, Monongahela River Using Longitudinal-Vertical Numerical Hydrodynamics", prepared for Energy & Environmental Management, Inc.,
Murrysville, PA 15668-1809. Prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, Pennsylvania
19087-3226.
. 1982. "User Guide for CE-QUAL-ELV2: A Longitudinal-Vertical, Time-Varying Estuarine Water Quality Model", Instruction Rpt. EL-82-1, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
. 1982. "User Guide for LARM2: A longitudinal-Vertical, Time-Varying Hydrodynamic
Reservoir Model", Instruction Rpt. E-82-3, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
. 1985. "Simulation of Cooling Operations at Oak Knoll Reservoir, Phase II of Cooling Reservoir Modeling Program", Document No. 85-41-R, prepared for Environmental Department,
Texas Utilities Generating Company, Dallas, Texas 75201 by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc.,
Wayne, PA.
. 1988. "Hydrothermal Analysis of Jersey Central Power and Light Sayreville and Werner
Generating Stations", Document No. 88-103-R/L, prepared for EA Engineering, Science, and
Technology, Inc., Hunt Valley/Loveton Center, Sparks, Maryland by J. E. Edinger Associates,
Inc., Wayne, PA.
Buchak, E. M., J. E. Edinger, and N. C. Huang. 1989. "Hydrothermal Analysis of Public Service
Electric and Gas Linden and Sewaren Generating Stations", Document No. 89-79-R, prepared
for EA Engineering, Science, and Technology, Inc., Hunt Valley/Loveton Center, Sparks, Maryland by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
. 1990. "Stationary State Dilution Studies of Lake Sinclair and Plant Harlee Branch", Document No. 90-068-R, prepared for Georgia Power Company Environmental Affairs, Atlanta,
Georgia 30302. Prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
Chu, C. and Jirka, G. (2003) Wind and Stream Flow Induced Reaeration, Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol 129, No 12, 1129-1136.
Cole, T. M. 1982. "Application of the LARM Two-Dimensional Computer Model to Canyon
Reservoir", M.S. Thesis, Southwest Texas State University, San Marcos, TX.
Cole, T.M. and D.H. Tillman. 2001. Water Quality Modeling of Allatoona and West Point Reservoirs Using CE-QUAL-W2. ERDC/EL SR-01-3, U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center, Vicksburg, MS.
134
Crain, A. S., A. A. Shipp, T. Mesko, and G. L. Jarrett. 1999. Modeling Hydrodynamics and Water
Quality in Herrington Lake, Kentucky. U.S. Geological Survey, Water-Resources Investigations
Report, 99-4281. pp. 84.
EA Engineering, Science, and Technology, Inc. 1987. "Perryman Site Cooling Water Alternatives
Study", Rpt. No. BSC43D, prepared for Baltimore Gas and Electric Company, Baltimore, MD.
EA Engineering, Science, and Technology, Inc. 1993. "Lake Intrusion Modeling Study of the
Black River", prepared for USS/KOBE, Loraine, OH.
EA Engineering, Science, and Technology, Inc. 1994. "Shellfish Harvesting Exclusion Zone for
the proposed Tolchester Outfall", prepared for McCrone, Inc., Annapolis, MD.
. 1993. "Comparison of the Lake Sinclair GLVHT Model Predictions with Current Meter
Measurements", EA Project No. 11987.01, prepared for Georgia Power Company.
Edinger, J. E. and E. M. Buchak. 1978. "Hydrodynamics and Transport of Chlorine in Panther
Branch Arm, Squaw Creek Reservoir for Comanche Peak S. E. S., Development Document",
prepared for Texas Utilities Services, Inc., Dallas, TX.
. 1981. "Estuarine Laterally Averaged Numerical Dynamics: The Development and Testing
of Estuarine Boundary conditions in the LARM Code", Miscellaneous Paper EL-81-9, U.S.
Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, CE, Vicksburg, MS.
. 1982. "Analysis and Development of Carbonate-Bicarbonate Chemical Subroutine", Phase
II, Development, Verification, and Use of Methods to Model Chemical and Thermal Processes
for Lakes Mead and Powell. Contract No. 2-07-DV-00131, United States Department of the
Interior, Bureau of Reclamation, Denver, CO.
. 1983. "Developments in LARM2: A Longitudinal-Vertical, Time-Varying Hydrodynamic
Reservoir Model", Technical Rpt. E-83-1, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
. 1987. "Summary of Plant Hammond Coosa River - Weiss Reservoir Hydrothermal Analysis
and Compliance Temperatures Reporting Procedures", Document No. 87-119-R, prepared for
Georgia Power Company by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
. 1989. "Probabilistic Hydrothermal Modeling Study of Clinton Lake, Exhibit D", Document
No. 89-15-R, prepared for Illinois Power Company, Decatur, IL 62525. Prepared by J. E.
Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
. 1993. "Harlee Branch Impact on Dissolved Oxygen of Lake Sinclair", Document No. January 18, prepared for Georgia Power Company Environmental Affairs, Atlanta, Georgia. Prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
Edinger, J. E., E. M. Buchak, J. Loos, and E. Krueger. 1986. "Effects of the Chalk Point Steam
Electric Station on BOD and DO in the Patuxent Estuary", Document No. 86-56-R, Potomac
Electric Power Company, Environmental Affairs Group, Water and Land Use Department,
Washington, DC 20068, prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
135
tion
Edinger, J.E., E.M. Buchak, and N.C. Huang. 1988. "Chalk Point Steam Electric Station Patuxent
Estuary Hydrodynamic and Transport Model Verification and Real Time Intake Entrainment
Rates for 1985 Larval Sampling", Document No. 88-77-R, prepared for Potomac Electric Power
Company, Environmental Affairs Group, Water and Land Use Department, Washington, D.C.
20068. Prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
. 1989. "Verification of Nechako Reservoir Hydrothermal Model", Document No. 89-130-R,
prepared for Triton Environmental Consultants, Ltd., Burnaby, British Columbia V5M 3Z3.
Prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne, PA.
Edward K. Noda and Associates, Inc. 1992. "Ala Wai Canal Improvement, Feasability Report",
prepared for Hawaii Department of Land and Natural Resources, Division of Water and Land
Development.
Energy & Environmental Management, Inc. 1990. "Gorge Power Station Load Management Project", prepared for Ohio Edison Company, Ohio.
Envirocon Pacific Limited and J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc. 1989. "Nechako Reservoir Mathematical Modeling Program Preliminary Results and Conclusions", prepared for Alcan Smelters
& Chemicals Ltd., Vancouver, British Columbia.
Environmental Consulting & Technology, Inc. 1999. Thermal Modeling Report: Fort Myers
Power Plant Repowering Project. ECT No. 98615-0100. Prepared for Florida Power & Light
Company, Juno Beach, FL.
Environmental Consulting & Technology, Inc. 1999. Thermal Impact Study for S-79 Lock Operation: Fort Myers Power Plant Repowering Project. ECT No. 98615-0100. Prepared for
Florida Power & Light Company, Juno Beach, FL.
Environmental Consulting & Technology, Inc. 1999. Manatee Protection Modeling Report: Fort
Myers Power Plant Repowering Project. ECT No. 98615-0100. Prepared for Florida Power
& Light Company, Juno Beach, FL.
Environmental and Hydraulics Laboratory. 1986. "CE-QUAL-W2: A Numerical Two-Dimensional, Laterally Averaged Model of Hydrodynamics and Water Quality; User's Manual", Instruction Rpt. E-86-5. U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
EPA. 1994. "Alaska Juneau Gold Mine Project", Technical Assistance Report for the U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers Alaska District, EPA 910/B-94-007.
FERC. 1992. "Proposed Modifications to the Lower Mokelumne River Project, California", Draft
Environmental Impact Statement, Federal Energy Regulatory Commission Office of Hydropower Licensing, FERC Project No. 2916-004.
Flowers, J.D., L.M. Hauch, and R.L. Kiesling. 2001. Water Quality Modeling of Lake Waco
Using CE-QUAL-W2 for Assessment of Phosphorus Control Strategies. TR0114, Texas Institute for Applied Environmental Research, Tarleton State University, Stephesnville, Texas.
136
FTN Associates. 2001. Center Hill Lake CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality Model. Prepared for
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Nashville District, Contract DACW 62-98-D-0002, Delivery
Order No. 0011.
FTN Associates. 1998. Taylorsville Lake Water Quality Model Study. Prepared for U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers, Louisville District, Louisville, KY.
Georgia Power Company. 1992. "Hydrological and Limnological Study of Lake Sinclair in Support of Application for Renewal and Modification of a Thermal Variance for Plant Branch
NPDES Permit No. GA00026051)", prepared for Georgia Power Company, Atlanta, Georgia by
EA Engineering Science and Technology, Atlanta, Georgia and J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc.,
Wayne, PA.
Giorgino, M.J., J.D. and Bales. 1997. Rhodhiss Lake, North Carolina: Analysis of Ambient Conditions and Simulation of Hydrodynamics, Constituent Transport, and Water-Quality Characteristics, 1993-94. U.S. Geological Survey Water-Resources Investigations Report 97-4131,
62 p.
Gorgens, A.H.M, A.J. Bath, A. Venter, K. De Smidt, G.v.R. Marais. 1993. "The Applicability of
Hydrodynamic Reservoir Models for Water Quality Management of Stratified Water Bodies in
South Africa", Report to the Water Research Commission, WRC Report No. 304/1/93.
Green, W.R. 2001. Analysis of Ambient Conditions and Simulation of Hydrodynamics, Constituent Transport, and Water-Quality Characteristics in Lake Maumelle, Arkansas, 1991-92.
USGS Water-Resources Investigations Report 01-4045.
Hall, R. W. 1987. "Application of CE-QUAL-W2 to the Savannah River Estuary", Technical Rpt.
EL-87-4, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Jain, R., G. A. Krallis and E. M. Buchak. 2000. Sammamish River Temperature Study: 1998 and
1999 CE-QUAL-W2 Calibration and Management Scenarios. Prepared for Seattle District,
Corps of Engineers, Seattle, Washington. Prepared by J. E. Edinger Associates, Inc., Wayne,
Pennsylvania. 15 September.
Johnson, B. H. 1981. "A Review of Numerical Reservoir Hydrodynamic Modeling", Technical
Rpt. E-81-2, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Johnson, B. H., M. J. Trawle and P. G. Kee. 1989. "A Numerical Model Study of the Effect of
Channel Deepening on Shoaling and Salinity Intrusion in the Savannah Estuary", Technical Rpt.
HL-89-26, Hydraulics Laboratory, Department of the Army, Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
Kinhill Cameron McNamara Pty Ltd. 1991. Proposed Third Runway Sydney Kingsford-Smith.
Airport, Botany Bay Borrow Pit, Water Quality", Milton Queensland, Australia.
Martin, J. L. 1988. "Application of a Two-Dimensional Model of Hydrodynamics and Water
Quality CE-QUAL-W2. to DeGray Lake, Arkansas", Technical Rpt. E-87-1, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
137
tion
McKee, C. P., Thackston, E. L., Speece, R. E., Wilson, D. J., Cardozo, R. J. 1992. "Modeling of
Water Quality in Cheatham Lake", Technical Rpt. No. 42, Environmental and Water Resources
Engineering, Vanderbilt University, Nashville, TN.
Mobley, M.H., D. McGinnis, and R.J. Ruane. 1999. Conceptual Design Report for the Shepaug
Oxygen Diffuser System. Tennessee Valley Authority report WR99-1-760-128.
Ormsbee, L., L. Jarrett, and B. Perkins. 1998. Kentucky River Basin Water Quality Assessment
Study. Kentucky Water Resources Institute (KWRRI) Technical Report. pp. 110.
Owoputi, L. 1998. Water Quality Model Development for Stonewall Jackson Lake and the West
Fork River. Prepared for USACE Pittsburg District, Contract No. DACW59-96-D-0005, Delivery Order No. 6.
Risley, J.C. 2000. Effects of Hypothetical Management Scenarios on Water Temperatures in the
Tualatin River, Oregon, U.S. Geological Survey Water-Resources Investigations Report 004071 (supplement to Water-Resources Investigations Report 97-4071), 110 p. http://oregon.usgs.gov/pubs_dir/Online/Pdf/00-4071.pdf
Risley, J.C. 1997. Relations of Tualatin River Water Temperatures to Natural and Human-Caused
Factors: U.S. Geological Survey Water-Resources Investigations Report 97-4071, 143 p.
http://oregon.usgs.gov/pubs_dir/Online/Pdf/97-4071.pdf
Rounds, S.A. and T.M. Wood. 2001. Modeling Water Quality in the Tualatin River, Oregon,
1991-1997. USGS Water Resources Investigations Report 01-4041.
Rounds. S.A., T.M. Wood, and D.D. Lynch. 1998. Modeling Discharge, Temperature, and Water
Quality in the Tualatin River, Oregon. USGS Open-File Report 98-186.
Tetra Tech. 2002. Pineview Reservoir TMDL. Prepared for Utah Department of Environmental
Quality.
Tillman, D. H., and Cole, T. M. 1993. "Bluestone Phase 2 Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen
Modeling Study", Technical Rpt. EL-93- , U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, MS.
Tillman, D.H., T.M. Cole, and B.W. Bunch. 1999. Detailed Reservoir Water Quality Modeling
(CE-QUAL-W2), Alabama-Coosa-Tallapoosa/Apalachicola-Chattahoochee-Flint (ACT-ACF)
Comprehensive Water Resource Study. Technical Report EL-99-XXX, U.S. Army Engineer
URS Corporation. 1986. "Southern Puget Sound Water Quality Assessment Study, Final Report,
Comprehensive Circulation and Water Quality Study of Budd Inlet", prepared for Washington
State Department of Ecology. By URS Corporation, Seattle, WA.
Waide, J. B., Dortch, M. S., and Cole, T. M., 1984. "Two-Dimensional Reservoir Model", EWQOS
Information Exchange Bulletin, Vol. E-84-3, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
138
Wells, S. A. 1992. "Assessment of Management Alternatives for Water Quality Improvement in
the Columbia Slough System, Volume 1: Technical Report", Technical Rpt. EWR-001-92, Department of Civil Engineering, Portland State University, Portland, OR.
. 1992. "User Manual for the Columbia Slough Model using CE-QUAL-W2", Technical Rpt.
EWR-003-92, Department of Civil Engineering, Portland State University, Portland, OR.
Wells, S. A., Berger, C., and Knutson, M. 1992. "Modeling the Tualatin River System Including
Scoggins Creek and Hagg Lake: Model Description, Geometry, and Forcing Data", Technical
Rpt. EWR-010-92, Department of Civil Engineering, Portland State University, Portland, OR.
Wells, S.A. and T.M. Cole. 2000. Theoretical Basis for the CE-QUAL-W2 River Basin Model.
ERDC/EL TR-00-7, U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center, Vicksburg, MS.
Yager, R.E. 1996. Application of CE-QUAL-W2 to Lake Cumberland. Report prepared by
Environmental Consulting Engineers for U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Nashville District,
Nashville, Tennessee.
139
tion
Appendix A Hydrodynamics and

Transport
CE-QUAL-W2 uses the laterally averaged equations of fluid motion derived from the three dimensional equations, which consist of six equations and six unknowns. Their development is described
below.
Coordinate System
The general coordinate system used in the development of the laterally averaged equations of fluid
motion is shown in Figure A-1.
earths rotation
z
y
x
earths center
equator
meridian
Figure A-1. Definition sketch of coordinate system for governing equations where x is oriented east, y is oriented north, and z is oriented upward.
Note that is a vector that represents the angular velocity of the earth spinning on its axis. The
rotation of the coordinate system can result in significant horizontal accelerations of fluids. This
Appendix A Hydrodynamics and Transport
A-1
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
is usually restricted to large water bodies such as large lakes and ocean systems. The force that
causes horizontal accelerations because of the spinning coordinate system is termed the Coriolis
force.
Turbulent Time-Averaged Equations

The governing equations are obtained by performing a mass and a momentum balance of the fluid
phase about a control volume. The resulting equations are the continuity (or conservation of fluid
mass) and the conservation of momentum equations for a rotating coordinate system (Batchelor,
1967; Sabersky et al., 1989; Cushman-Roisin, 1994). After using the coordinate system in Figure
A-1, applying the following assumptions:
1. incompressible fluid
2. centripetal acceleration is a minor correction to gravity
3. Boussinesq approximation
1
1
1
where ; o is a base value

4.
and has all variation s in

and substituting the turbulent time averages of velocity and pressure as defined below:
all velocities and pressure are considered the sum of turbulent time averages and deviations from
that average, i.e., u u u , where u
1
T
t T
udt as shown in Figure A-2. The other terms are

t
v v v ; w w w and p p p where the overbar represents time averaged and the

prime represents deviation from the temporal average;
u
u
u
time
t
t+T
Figure A-2. Definition sketch of turburlent time averaging for velocity.
A-2
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
The governing equations become after simplification:
Continuity
u v w

0
x y z
(A-1)
where:
u = x-direction velocity
v = y-direction velocity
w = z-direction velocity
x-Momentum Equation
u
u
u
u
1 p 2 u 2 u 2 u
u v w 2 z v 2 y w
2 2 2
x
x
y
z
Coriolis acceleration

unsteady
accelerati on
convective accelerati on
pressure
gradient
viscous stresses
xy xz
1
xx
x
y
z
(A-2)
turbulent stresses
where:
xx
xy
xz
z
y
= turbulent shear stress acting in x direction on the x-face of control volume

= turbulent shear stress acting in x direction on the y-face of control volume
= turbulent shear stress acting in x direction on the z-face of control volume
= dynamic viscosity
= component of Coriolis acceleration where:
= E sin
= E cos
= latitude
= earths rotation rate
A-3
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
xz
yy
xy
z
x
y
Figure A-3. Definition sketch of turbulent shear stresses in x-direction.
y-Momentum Equation
v
v
v
v
u v w 2 z u 2 x w
t
x
y
z
1 p 2 v 2v 2 v 1 yx yy yz

y x 2 y 2 z 2 x
y
z
(A-3)
where:
yx = turbulent shear stress acting in y direction on the x-face of control volume

yy = turbulent shear stress acting in y direction on the y-face of control volume
yz = turbulent shear stress acting in y direction on the z-face of control volume
x = 0
A-4
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
yz
y
x
x
y
Figure A-4. Sketch of turbulent shear stresses in y-direction.
z-Momentum Equation
w
w
w
w
u
v
w
2 y u 2 x v g
t
x
y
z
1 p
2 w 2 w 2 w 1 zx zy zz
2 2 2
y
z x
y
z
x
(A-4)
where:
zx
zy
zz
x
= turbulent shear stress acting in z direction on the x-face of control volume

= turbulent shear stress acting in z direction on the y-face of control volume
= turbulent shear stress acting in z direction on the z-face of control volume
=0
A-5
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
zz
zx
zy
z
x
y
Figure A-5. Sketch of turbulent shear stresses in z-direction.

Note that the turbulent shear stresses are defined as follows:
xx u u
xy u v is the same as yx v u
xz u w is the same as zx w u
yy v v
yz v w is the same as zy wv
zz ww
Coriolis Effect
As noted above, all the x terms are zero and can be eliminated from the y and z-momentum
equations. If one integrates over the y-direction (therefore assuming the net velocity in y is zero)
and assumes that the horizontal length scale is much greater than vertical length scale, it can be
shown by using scaling arguments that the Coriolis acceleration forces are negligible (CushmanRoisin, 1994). Hence, prior to lateral averaging, the Coriolis acceleration terms will be neglected.
Adjusting the Coordinate System

The coordinate system is transformed into a form compatible with the original W2 development
where the vertical axis is in the direction of gravity. In addition, as shown in Figure A-6, the coordinate system is oriented along an arbitrary slope.
A-6
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Coordinate System
gravity
v
u
w
Figure A-6. General coordinate system with z-axis compatible with original derivation of
W2 model.
The gravity acceleration is a body force that is then represented by a vector:
g gh
(A-5)
where:
h = surface normal from the earths surface
g = gravitational acceleration, 9.8 m s-2.
This term can be written as three vector components:
g x g
h
x
(A-6)
g y g
h
y
(A-7)
A-7
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
g z g
h
z
(A-8)
These gravity components can be applied to an arbitrary channel slope as shown in Figure A-7.
h
g
Figure A-7. Sketch of channel slope and coordinate system for W2 where the x-axis is oriented along the channel slope.
The channel slope can also be incorporated into the definition of the gravity vector if the x-axis is
chosen parallel to the channel slope as:
The channel slope is defined as:
S o tan
(A-9)
and also:
g x g
h
g sin
x
(A-10)
g z g
h
g cos
z
(A-11)
The gravity acceleration in y is assumed negligible since
h
0 in the lateral direction of the
y
channel.
A-8
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Governing Equations for General Coordinate

System
After redefining the coordinate system, eliminating Coriolis effects, and neglecting viscous shear
stresses the governing equations become:
Continuity
u v w

0
x y z
(A-12)
x-Momentum Equation
u
u
u
u
1 p
u
v
w
g sin
x
t
x
y
z gravity
unsteady
accelerati on
pressure
gradient
1 xx xy xz
x
y
z
(A-13)
turbulent shear stresses
y-Momentum Equation
v
v
v
v
1 p 1 yx yy yz
u
v
w
unsteady
accelerati on
pressure
gradient
(A-14)
z-Momentum Equation
w
w
w
w
1 p 1 zx zy zz
u
v
w
g cos
z x y z
t
gravity
unsteady
accelerati on
pressure
gradient
(A-15)
Simplification of z-Momentum Equation

If the longitudinal length scale is much greater than the vertical length scale, then this makes all
vertical velocities << horizontal velocities. A result of this assumption is that vertical velocities
are very small such that the z-momentum equation becomes the hydrostatic equation:
A-9
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
1 p
g cos
z
(A-16)
This assumption prevents the model from accurately modeling vertical accelerations of the fluid
because of convective cooling at night and other such vertical accelerations.
Lateral Averaging
The governing equations above will be laterally averaged after decomposing all velocities and pressure into a lateral average and a deviation from the lateral average. The lateral, longitudinal, and
vertical velocities and pressure are defined as follows:
v v v
(A-17)
u u u"
(A-18)
w w w"
(A-19)
p p p
(A-20)
where:
1
B
y2
y1
u dy
B = control volume width, m

y1 = left bank coordinate
y2 = right bank coordinate
The double overbars represent the spatial average of the temporal average quantity. The double
prime represents the deviation from the lateral average and is a function of y. This is shown in
Figure A-8.
A-10
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
y=y2
u
u
y=y1
Figure A-8. Lateral average and deviation from lateral average components of longitudinal
velocity.
These definitions are substituted into the turbulent time-average governing equations and then laterally averaged. The y-momentum equation is neglected since the average lateral velocities are zero
( v 0 ) and cross shear stresses that contribute to vertical mixing will be computed from the analysis of wind stress. The equations that remain are the continuity, x-momentum, and z-momentum
equations.
Continuity Equation
The continuity equation becomes after substituting the above velocity components and laterally
averaging
( u u ) ( v v ) ( w w )
0
x
y
z
(A-21)
The lateral average of a double primed variable is by definition zero:

y2
1
u u dy 0
B y1
(A-22)
A-11
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
Also, note that:
( v v ) 1 ( v v )

dy
y
B y1
y
y2
y2
v v
(A-23)
y1
v
B y1
y2
q
where q is defined as the net lateral inflow per unit volume of cell [T-1], and:
( u u ) 1 ( u u )

dy
x
B y1
x
y2
u
1 u
y1 x dy B y1 x dy
y2
y2
1
u dy
B x y1
1 B u
B x
(A-24)
y2
and:
( w w ) 1 ( w w )

dy
z
B y1
z
y2
1 w
1 w

dy
dy
B y 1 z
B y 1 z
y2
y2
1
w dy
B z y1
1 Bw
B z
(A-25)
y2
Combining terms, the continuity equation becomes:
Bu Bw
qB
x
z
A-12
(A-26)
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
x-Momentum Equation
The laterally-averaged x-momentum equation is more easily simplified by writing it in conservative
form (this can be verified by using the continuity equation with the x-momentum equation),
( u u ) ( u u )( u u ) ( v v )( u u ) ( w w )( u u )
t
x
y
z
1 ( p p ) 1 xx xy xz
g sin

x
x
y
z
(A-27)
Each term in this equation can be simplified as follows (note that the spatial average of any double
primed variable goes to zero by definition).
The unsteady acceleration term:
( u u ) 1 ( u u )

dy
t
B y1
t
y2
u
1 u
y1 t dy B y1 t dy
y2
1
B t
y2
y2
(A-28)
y2
u dy B t udy
y1
y1
1 B u
B t
The convective acceleration terms:
( u u )( u u ) 1 ( u u )( u u )

dy
x
B y1
x
y2
u u
1
y1 x dy B
y2
2u u
1
y1 x dy B
y2
1
B
1
1
u u dy
u u dy
B x y 1
B x y1
1 B u u 1
u u dy
B x
B x y1
y2
y2
u u
dy
x
y1
y2
(A-29)
y2
dispersion term
A-13
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
Similarly for the other two terms:
( u u )( w w ) 1 Bu w 1
u wdy
z
B z
B z y1
y2
(A-30)
dispersion term
( u u )( v v )
u v y 2 u v y 1 0
y
(A-31)
The gravity term:
g sin
1
B
y2
g sin dy
y1
y2
1
( g sin ) dy g sin
B
y1
(A-32)
The pressure gradient term:
( p p ) 1 ( p p )

dy
x
B y1
x
y2
1 p
1 p
dy
dy
B y 1 x
B y 1 x
1
B x
y2
y2
y2
(A-33)
y2
pdy B x pdy
y1
y1
1 Bp
B x
or the above equation can be written, assuming that the derivative of the lateral average pressure
gradient in the x-direction is not a function of y:
( p p ) 1 ( p p )

dy
x
B y1
x
y2
1 p
1 p
dy
dy
B x y 1
B y 1 x
1 p
1
B
B x
B x
y2
A-14
y2
(A-34)
y2
p dy
y1
p
x
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Shear stresses
xx xy xz
y
z
x
1

B
1 xy
1
y1 xxx dy B y1 y dy B y1 zxz dy
y2
y2
y2
1
1
1
xx dy
xy dy
xz dy
B x y 1
B x y 1
B z y1
1 B xx B xy B xz
B x
y
z
y2
y2
y2
(A-35)
1 B
B xz
xx

B x
z
Collecting all terms and neglecting all dispersion terms, the final x-momentum equation is:
B u B u u B u w
B p 1 B xx B xz
Bg sin
t
x
z
x x
z
(A-36)
Summary of Laterally Averaged Equations

In the development of CE-QUAL-W2 in Cole and Buchak (1995), the lateral average terms were
represented by uppercase characters, such that u U , w W , and p P . The shear stress
terms will be assumed lateral averages and the double overbars will be dropped for convenience.
Making these simplifications, the governing equations become:
Continuity Equation
UB WB
+
= qB
x
z
(A-37)
UB UUB WUB
B P 1 B xx 1 B x z
+
+
= gB sin +
+
t
x
z
x x
z
(A-38)
x-Momentum Equation
z-Momentum Equation
1 P
g cos
z
(A-39)
There are now three equations and three unknowns - U, W, and P.
A-15
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
Simplification of Pressure Term

The z-momentum equation reduces to:
z
P Pa g cos dz
(A-40)
after integration from a depth z to the water surface defined as z=. Pa is the atmospheric pressure
at the water surface (Figure A-9).
g
Pa
z=zsurface=
x
z=h=zbottom
Figure A-9. Schematization for simplification of pressure term.

This equation for pressure is now substituted into the x-momentum equation and simplified using
Leibnitz rule. The pressure gradient term in the x-momentum equation then becomes:
g cos
1 P
1 Pa
g cos
x
x
x
x dz
(A-41)
The first term on the RHS is the atmospheric pressure term (accelerations due to atmospheric pressure changes over the water surface), the second is the barotropic pressure term (accelerations due
to water surface variations), and the third is the baroclinic pressure term (accelerations due to density driven currents).
A-16
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
In CE-QUAL-W2, the atmospheric pressure term is assumed zero and is neglected. This implies
that for long systems during severe storms the model will not be able to account for accelerations
because of atmospheric changes. For a large physical domain, variations in meteorological forcing
may be significant. This is discussed in the section on Variability in Meteorological Forcing. The
pressure term then becomes:
g cos
1 P
g cos
x
x
x dz
(A-42)
The revised form of the x-momentum equation is then:
UB UUB WUB
g cos B
+
+
= gB sin g cos B
x dz
t
x
z
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
+
x
z
(A-43)
Effectively, pressure has been removed from the unknowns by combining the z-momentum and xmomentum equations, but has been added as an unknown.
Free Water Surface

This equation is a simplification of the continuity equation. The continuity equation integrated over
the depth from the water surface to the bottom is called the free water surface equation. Figure
A-10 and Figure A-11 are definition sketches for the computational grid without and with a channel
slope, respectively.
A-17
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
CE-QUAL-W2 coordinate system, = 0
z=0
z=zsurface=
h-
z
x
z=h
Figure A-10. Coordinate system without channel slope.
CE-QUAL-W2 coordinate system, > 0

z=0
g
z=zsurface=
h-
z
x
z=h
z
Figure A-11. Coordinate system with channel slope.
A-18
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
The continuity equation is integrated over the depth as follows:
UB
WB
x dz + z dz = qBdz
h
(A-44)
The first term can be expanded as follows using Leibnitzs rule:
UB
x dz x UBdz x UB h x UB
h
(A-45)
The integral of the vertical flow rate over z relates to changes in water surface elevation as shown
below:
h
WB
dz = WB h WB
z
(A-46)
where:
h
h
Uh
t
x
W
U
t
x
Wh
Combining these terms together, the free surface equation becomes:
h
h
h
h
qBdz x UBdz x UB h x UB U h Bh t U h Bh x
h
B
BU
t
x
(A-47)
Canceling out terms and applying the no-slip boundary condition that Uh is zero:
h
h
UBdz
B
qBdz
x
t
(A-48)
h
h
UBdz
qBdz
t x
(A-49)
or
A-19
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
where B is the width at the surface.
Equation of State
The density must be known for solution of the momentum equations. The equation of state is an
equation that relates density to temperature and concentration of dissolved substances. This equation is given by:
(A-50)
= f( T w ,TDS , ISS )
where f(Tw,TDS, ISS) is a density function dependent upon temperature, total dissolved solids or
salinity, and inorganic suspended solids.
Summary of Governing Equations

Table A-5 shows the governing equations after lateral averaging for a channel slope of zero (original model formulation) and for an arbitrary channel slope. Parameters used in Table A-5 are illustrated in Figure A-12.
Table A-5. Governing equations with and without channel slope.
Equation
x- momentum
Governing equation assuming no channel slope and no momentum conservation at branch intersections
UB UUB WUB
+
+
=
t
x
z
gB z
gB
dz +
x
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
x
z
z-momentum
continuity
state
free surface
UB UUB WUB
+
+
= gB sin
t
x
z
z
g cos B
g cos B
x dz +
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
qBU x
x
z
1 P
z
UB WB
+
= qB
x
z
= f( T w ,TDS ,ss )
UB WB
+
= qB
x
z
= f( T w ,TDS ,ss )
h
h
B
UBdz qBdz
t x
UBdz qBdz
t x
0g
U = horizontal velocity, m s-1

W = vertical velocity, m s
B = channel width
P = pressure
A-20
Governing equation assuming an arbitrary

channel slope and conservation of momentum at branch intersections
-1
x
y
0 g cos
1 P
z
= x-direction lateral average shear stress

= y-direction lateral average shear stress
= density
= water surface
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
gravity
h
z
channel slope = So = tan
datum
Figure A-12. Definition sketch for channel slope.
Branch Linkage with Internal Head Boundary

Conditions
Linkage of Mainstem Branches
One issue in the development of the river basin model is the linkage of branches with different
vertical grids. Figure A-13 shows variable definitions for a sloping channel.
A-21
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
CE-QUAL-W2 coordinate system, > 0
i-1
z=0
P,B
U, Ax, Dx, BR,xx
segment
W, BB, Dz
i
i+1
kt
Az
z=zsurface=
k-1
kt+1
k
Hk=zk
h-
k+1
kb
x
z
z=h
Figure A-13. Computational grid variable definitions for arbitrary channel slope.
However, the vertical velocity of a cell is not determined at the side edge of a segment, but at the
bottom of the segment. In order for all the volume to be passed from one cell to another, all the
flow from the downstream segment [ID] should be transferred to the upstream segment [IU] Since
the model does not assume strong vertical accelerations, we may be forced to neglect the vertical
component of velocity at this transition and assume that the longitudinal velocity entering the upstream segment is UID.
The model ensures that flow and mass are conserved between branches when the vertical spacing
is different between the upstream and downstream grid. Spatial averaging to conserve flow, heat,
and mass is illustrated in Figure A-14.
A-22
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Branch 1
Branch 2
Figure A-14. Transfer of mass and momentum between branches with unequal vertical
grid spacing.
Linkage of Tributary Branches

Version 2 assumed all tributary branches came in at right angles to the main channel resulting in
no longitudinal momentum exchange between the branches. In many cases, this was appropriate,
but in certain cases prevented a realistic depiction of the physics of the prototype. Version 3 now
includes momentum transfer between branches that do not enter perpendicular to each other
(Figure A-15).
i-1
i
x
I+
1
Uy
Ux
trib
Figure A-15. Linkage of tributary branch coming in at an angle to main branch.

A-23
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
The tributary inflow can create shear stress along both the longitudinal axis of the main stem branch
and along the y-axis of the segment. For the new formulation, the cross-shear mixing has been
added to the cross-shear wind stress for the computation involving the vertical eddy viscosity and
vertical diffusivity. This involves determining the y and x velocity components of the entering
branch (Figure A-16).
Longitudinal Momentum
The vector component of velocity in the x-direction of the main channel, Ux, can be computed by
analysis of the channel orientations. This component in the x-direction would be:
Ux=Ucos
(A-51)
where:
U = longitudinal velocity of the tributary at segment ID for the tributary branch
= difference in the angle between the main stem and tributary segments (Figure A-16).
main-trib
trib
main
Uy
Ux
Figure A-16. Schematic of x and y velocity components.
The conservation of momentum about a control volume, the main stem segment, would result in an
additional source of momentum. Lai (1986) shows that the correction to the x-momentum equation
would be:
qBU x
A-24
(A-52)
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
where:
q = lateral inflow per unit length.

This arises from re-deriving the momentum equations and assuming that all the fluid (q) entering
the segment is moving at the velocity Ux. This correction to the x-momentum equation would be
UB UUB WUB
g cos B
+
+
= gB sin g cos B
x dz
t
x
z
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
qBU x
x
z
momentum from
(A-53)
side tributaries
Cross-shear of Tributary Inflow

The y-velocity coming into a reservoir may also contribute to vertical mixing. The y component of
a tributary inflow is Uy = Usin (Figure A-16). Since there is no y-momentum equation, the only
mechanism for mixing energy with the present formulation of the vertical shear stress is the crossshear stress from the wind given as wy C D a Wh sin( 1 2 ) . The cross-shear stress accounts for the shear stress and mixing that results from wind blowing across the y-axis of the segment. The lateral branch inflow at a velocity, Uy, could be thought of as an additional component
of the stress under the current context of the turbulence closure approximations.
2
If the water in the y-direction has zero velocity, the additional shear stress can be parameterized as
an interfacial shear:
ytrib
f 2
Uy
8
(A-54)
where:
f = interfacial friction factor
For two-layer flow systems, f has been found to be of order 0.01. The value of f for this non-ideal
approach could be determined by numerical computation. Therefore, the value of the cross-shear
term would be increased by a lateral tributary inflow. This can be evaluated by numerical experiments computing the magnitude of the cross-shear term from wind and from lateral inflow. A more
robust theoretical approach may be needed to account for this increase in lateral shear, but that may
be necessary only if the model includes the y-momentum equation.
River Basin Theory

The corrections to the governing equations incorporating the sloping channel and the transfer of
momentum from a side tributary are incorporated in the new solution technique as described below.
A-25
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
Free-Water Surface Numerical Solution

The free surface equation:
h
h
UBdz
qBdz
t x
(A-55)
is solved by substituting the momentum equation:
UB UUB WUB
g cos B
+
+
= gB sin g cos B
x dz
t
x
z
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
qBU x
x
z
(A-56)
in finite difference form and then simplifying. The finite difference form of the momentum equation is:
UUB WUB
UBin 1 UBin t
gB sin g cos B
x
z
x
g cos B
1 B xx 1 B x z
dz +
+
qBU x
x
z
i
x
z
(A-57)
Defining for simplicity the term F as:
UUB WUB 1 B xx
x
z
x
(A-58)
and substituting in for xx, F becomes:
BAx
UUB WUB
x
x
z
x
A-26
(A-59)
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Substituting in the term UBin 1 in the free surface equation for UB, the free surface equation becomes:
UBin dz t F n dz t gB sin dz
t x
x
x
h
g cos B
t g cos B
dz t
x dzdz
x
x
x
1 B x z
dz t qBU xn dz
x z
x
n
+ t
(A-60)
q n Bdz
Some of these terms can be simplified as follows:
h
h
gB sin dz g sin Bdz
x
x
h

g cos B
dz g cos
x
x
x x
(A-61)
Bdz
h
z
g cos
h g cos B z
dzdz
B
dzdz
x x
x
h 1 B x z
1
dz
B x z h B x z
x z
x
(A-62)
(A-63)
(A-64)
Then substituting these into the above equation:
h
h
h
UBin dz t F n dz tg sin Bdz
t x
x
x

tg cos
x x
n h
n
h
z
g cos
Bdz t
B
dzdz
x x
1
+ t
B x z h B x z
x
(A-65)
h
h
n
t qBU x dz q n Bdz
x
A-27
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
All terms with are grouped on the LHS such that:
h
h n
n
tg cos
Bdz
UB
dz
t
i
F dz
x
t
x x
h
Bdz
x
tg sin
g cos
t
B
dzdz
x x
h
+ t
1
B x z h B x z
x
(A-66)
h
t qBU xn dz
x
h
q n Bdz
The first term on the LHS can be put into a backward finite difference form as:
in in 1
B
B
t
t
(A-67)
h
The second term, tg cos
Bdz , can be simplified using the chain rule for partial
x x
differential equations to:

h
h
2
tg cos
Bdz
tg
cos
Bdz
x 2
x x
(A-68)
Then using a second-order central difference for the second derivative and a first order backward
difference for the first derivative such that:
h
h
2
tg cos
Bdz
tg
cos
Bdz
x 2
x x
tg cos
in in1 h
Bdz
x x
h
tg cos Bdz
A-28
(A-69)
in 1 2in in1
x 2
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Also using a backward difference:

n
h
h
h
1
.
Bdz
Bdz
Bdz
x
x
i
i 1
(A-70)
Grouping and collecting terms and multiplying through by tx, the LHS becomes after simplification:
g cos t 2
in1
Bdz
g cos t 2
in B x
i 1
g cos t
in1
x
h
h
Bdz
Bdz
i
i 1
RHS in xt Bin 1 x
Bdz
(A-71)
2 h
where the RHS is defined as:
RHS
h
h
h
n
UB
dz
t
F
dz
tg
sin
Bdz
i
x
x
x
g cos
1
B
dzdz + t
B x z h B x z
x x
x
h
(A-72)
t qBU x dz qBdz
x
and is evaluated at time level n.

The integral of the cell widths can be put into a summation over the vertical layers as:
h
kt
kb
Bdz BH ri
i
kt
BH ri 1
Bdz
(A-73)
i 1
(A-74)
kb
where BHr is the value of the width times the layer depth for the right-hand side of a cell. In the
code, this is the variable BR(I,K) times H(K), or the derived variable BHR(I,K).
Some of the right hand side terms can be put into a format compatible with the model schematization such as:
A-29
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
h
kb
n
UB
dz
UBH r
i
x
x kt
kb
1 kb
UBH r UBH r
x kt
kt
i
1 kb
UBH r i UBH r
x kt
i 1
(A-75)
i 1
h n
kb
F
dz
t
FH r
x
x kt
kb
t kb
FH r FH r
x kt
kt
i
t kb
FH r i FH r
x kt
i 1
(A-76)
i 1
kb
tg sin
Bdz
tg
sin
BH r
x
x kt
h
tg sin
x
kb
kb
BH r BH r
kt
kt
i
tg sin
x
( BH
kb
BH r
i 1
(A-77)
kt
g cos
t
x
r i
i 1
kb
g cos
g cos
B
dzdz
t
B
H dz
x x
x kt x r
h
kb
H r BH r i BH r i 1
kt x
kt
(A-78)
kb
1
t
B x z h B x z
B x z h B x z B x z h B x z
i
x
x

i 1
(A-79)
The lateral inflow of momentum term represents the gradient over x of the inflow momentum:
h
kb
t qBU x dz t qU x BH r
x
x kt
h
(A-80)
kb
qBdz qBH
(A-81)
kt
A-30
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
Combining these terms into one equation:
A in1 X in C in1 D
(A-82)
where:
g cos t 2 kb
A
BH r
x
kt
i 1
kb
g cos t 2 kb
X B x
BH
BH r
r
x
kt
i
kt
g cos t 2 kb
C
BH r
x
kt
i
kb
D t UBH r i UBH r
i 1
n 1
i
i 1
kb
kt
kb
i 1
g cos
kt
kb
xt qBH r xt 2
kt
i 1
kt
t 2 g sin BH r i BH r
x t 2 FH r i FH r
xz h
kb
qU x BH r
x kt
B xz B xz h B xz
i
BH
kb
r i
BH r

H
x
kb
i 1
kt
kt

i 1
This equation is solved for the water surface elevation at the n+1 time level using the Thomas
algorithm. The boundary condition implementation is the same as described in Cole and Buchak
(1995).
Horizontal Momentum Numerical Solution

The x-momentum equation:
UB UUB WUB
g cos B
+
+
= gB sin g cos B
x dz
t
x
z
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
qBU x
x
z
(A-83)
is solved using either a fully explicit or an explicit/implicit finite difference solution technique
specified by the user.
Explicit Solution
This scheme is based on solving the partial differential terms using an explicit finite difference
technique where:
A-31
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
UUB WUB
gB sin g cos B
x
z
x
z
g cos B
1 B xx 1 B x z
dz
+
qBU x }in
x x
z
U in 1 Bin 1 U in Bin t{
(A-84)
The various terms are put into finite difference form as follows. The longitudinal advection of
momentum is an upwind difference scheme where the order of differencing is dependent on the
sign of U, e.g., for U > 0
UUB
1
Bin,kU in1 / 2,kU in,k Bin1,kU in1 / 2,kU in1,k

x i ,k xi
(A-85)
The vertical advection of momentum is also an upwind scheme based on the velocity of W. For W
> 0 or downward flow
WUB
1
Wi ,nkU in,k Bin,k Wi ,nk 1U in,k 1Bin,k 1

z i ,k zk
(A-86)
The gravity force is:
gB sin g sin Bin
(A-87)
The pressure gradient is:
g cos B
z
g cos Bin
g cos B
i 1 i n
dz
x
x
g cos Bin
i1,k i ,k n zk
(A-88)
The horizontal advection of turbulent momentum is:
1 B xx
U
n
x Bi 1 / 2 Ax U n U n
i ,k
x x
i 1,k
x
i i 1 / 2
BAx
(A-89)
B
Ax n
U i ,k U in1,k

x
i i 1 / 2
n
i 1 / 2
The contribution to longitudinal momentum by lateral branch inflows is:
qBU x qBU x i , k
n
(A-90)
Using the definition of the shear stress:
A-32
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
x z w b Az
U
z
(A-91)
the vertical transport of momentum is:

n
1 B x z
B
U Bi ,k 1 / 2
w
b
z
z
z
z z k z k 1 / 2
n
i ,k 1 / 2
n
i ,k 1 / 2
Bin,k 1 / 2
w

k k 1 / 2
Az i ,k 1 / 2
z k 1 / 2
n
i ,k 1 / 2
U in,k
Az
i ,k 1 / 2 U in,k U in,k 1
z k 1 / 2
n
i ,k 1
n
i ,k 1 / 2
(A-92)
Implicit Solution
The implicit technique was utilized to reduce the time step limitation for numerical stability when
values of Az were large, as for an estuary or a river system. This occurs because the time step
limitation is a function of Az. Only the vertical transport of momentum term was solved implicitly.
All other terms for the solution of the horizontal momentum equation were the same as the explicit
scheme.
The horizontal momentum equation can be separated into the following two equations:
UB UUB WUB
g cos B
+
+
= gB sin g cos B
x dz
t
x
z
x
1 B xx 1 B( b w )
+
qBU x
x
UB 1
U
BAz
t
z
z
(A-93)
(A-94)
Equation A-93 is written as:
UUB WUB
gB sin g cos B
x
z
x
z
g cos B
1 B xx 1 B b w
dz
+
qBU x }in
U i* Bin 1 U in Bin t{
(A-95)
where U* is the velocity at the new time level before the application of equation A-94. Equation
A-92 is solved similarly to the solution of the fully explicit technique outlined above.
A-33
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
Equation A-94 is then solved using a fully implicit technique as:
UB U in 1 Bin 1 U i* Bin 1
t
t
1 n 1 U n 1
B Az
z
z
(A-96)
This can be rewritten as:
n 1
i
n 1
i
n 1
i
U B
*
i
tBin,k11 / 2 Az i ,k 1 / 2 n 1

U i ,k 1 U in,k1
z k z k 1 / 2
tBin,k11 / 2 Az i ,k 1 / 2 n 1

U i ,k U in,k11
z k z k 1 / 2
(A-97)
Regrouping terms at n+1 time level on the LHS, the equation can be written as
AU in, k11 VU in, k1 CU in, k11 DU i*, k
(A-98)
where:
tB n 1 A
A n 1 i , k 1 / 2 z i , k 1 / 2
Bi , k zk zk 1 / 2
tB n 1 A
tB n 1 A
V 1 n 1i , k 1 / 2 z i , k 1 / 2 n 1i , k 1 / 2 z i , k 1 / 2
Bi , k zk zk 1 / 2 Bi , k zk zk 1 / 2
tBin, k11 / 2 Az i , k 1 / 2
C n 1
i , k k zk 1 / 2
D 1
The resulting simultaneous equations are solved for Un+1 using the Thomas algorithm.
Computation of Initial Water Surface Slope

and Velocity Field for River
Within the CE-QUAL-W2 model, initial water levels and horizontal velocities are computed using Mannings normal depth equation for sloping branches. The program reads model bathymetry and flow files to determine the normal depth and horizontal velocities at the beginning of a
simulation. The model user can turn this feature on for river systems. This feature should allow
for much smoother running of the river model initially and avoids somewhat difficult setting of
the initial water surface elevation before a model simulation.
A-34
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
The initial water level/horizontal velocity first determines the flow through each model segment.
All tributaries, withdrawals, distributed tributaries, upstream branch inflows, internal head boundaries, and dam outflows are considered. Once the flow through each segment has been estimated,
the normal depth for each segment is calculated using Mannings equation:
1
2
1
= 3 2
where
: Flow through segment i
: Mannings friction coefficient for segment i
: Cross-sectional area of segment i
: Hydraulic Radius of segment i
: Branch slope
The cross-sectional area and hydraulic radius are a function of depth. The hydraulic radius
is calculated using
is the wetted perimeter. To calculate the normal depth, the root to the following function is
found:
1
2
1
3 2 = 0
The method of bisection (Press et al., 1992) is used to find the root, or normal depth, because the
function is discontinuous (has corners).
Once the normal depth for every segment has been calculated, the water surface of each sloping
branch is smoothed. If the predicted water level of a segment is less than the water level of a
downstream segment, the downstream segment is considered controlling and the water level is
increased to match that of the downstream segment. The effect of spillways and gates is considered by calculating the head necessary to convey the flow of the segment on the upstream side of
the gate or spillway. If the normal depth predicted water levels of segments upstream of the
gate/spillway are less than the necessary water level at the gate/spillway, water levels of upstream
segments are set to that of the segment immediately upstream of the gate/spillway.
Once water levels have been smoothed and spillway/gates accounted for, the average horizontal
velocity in each segment will be estimated with
If a branch is a loop branch, or a branch with upstream and downstream ends that are internal
head boundaries attached to segments of another, single branch, the initial velocity water level
tool will set initial velocities of this branch equal to zero and estimate water levels by interpolating between the water levels in upstream and downstream boundary condition segments.
A-35
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
Turbulent Advection-Diffusion Equation

As in the momentum equation, time-averaged variables for velocity are introduced (Figure A-17)
and concentration (Figure A-18).
u
u
u
time
t
t+T
Figure A-17. Velocity variability with time.
c
c
t+T
time
Figure A-18. Concentration variability with time.

The instantaneous velocity and concentration are decomposed into a mean and an unsteady component:
u(t) = u + u (t) where u =
1 t +T
u(t)dt
T t
(A-99)
Similarly for w, v, and c:
A-36
HYDRODYNAMICS
THEORY
v = v + v
w = w + w
(A-100)
c = c + c
Substituting these into the 3D governing equation and time averaging:
2 c 2 c 2 c
c
c
c
c
+u
+v
+w = D 2 + 2 + 2
t
x
y
z
z
y
x

transport by mean advection
molecular diffusive transport
(A-101)
uc vc wc + S
turbulent mass tranport
The new terms in the governing equation represent mass transport by turbulent eddies. As the
intensity of turbulence increases, turbulent mass transport increases. Notice also that all velocities
and concentrations are time averaged. The following turbulent mass fluxes are defined as:
J t = uc, vc, wc
(A-102)
where:
uc = - E
c
x
c
vc = - E y
y
x
wc = - E
c
z
Substituting into the above equation:
c
c
c
c
c

c
+u
+v
+w =
Ex + D
+
Ey + D
t
x
y
z x
x y
y

c
+
Ez + D
+S
z
z
(A-103)
In turbulent fluids, Ex, Ey, and Ez >> D, and D can be neglected except at interfaces where turbulence
goes to zero. The turbulent diffusion coefficients can be thought of as the product of the velocity
scale of turbulence and the length scale of that turbulence. These coefficients are related to the
turbulent eddy viscosity. One is turbulent mass transport, the other is turbulent momentum
A-37
THEORY
HYDRODYNAMICS
transport between adjacent control volumes. In general, these turbulent diffusion coefficients are
non-isotropic and non-homogeneous.
Water Quality Transport

Spatial averages across the lateral dimension of the channel of the turbulent time-averaged quantities can now be introduced:
c = c + c"
(A-104)
u = u + u"
w = w + w"
where the double overbar is a spatial average over y and the double prime is the deviation from the
spatial mean as illustrated in Figure A-19 for velocity and Figure A-20 for constituent concentrations.
y=y2
u
u
y
x
y=y1
u
Figure A-19. Lateral average of the velocity field.
A-38
TRANSPORT
THEORY
y=y2
c
c
y=y1
c
Figure A-20. Lateral average of the concentration field.

These are substituted into the governing equation and then the governing equation is integrated
over the width such that:
mass transfer at side boundaries
Bc Bu c Bw c
B v c y 2 v c y 1 c' v' y 2 c' v' y 1

t
x
z

c
c
( D E x )B ( D E z )B
x
x z
z
(A-105)
Bu" c" B wc
rB
z
x
Note how the following terms are simplified:
1
B
c c
1
y1 t dy B
y2
c
1
y1 t dy B
y2
B t
c
dy
t
y1
y2
1
y1 c dy B t
y2
y2
cdy
(A-106)
y1
1 Bc
B t
A-39
THEORY
TRANSPORT
1
B
u u c c
1
dy
y1
x
B
y2
c u
1
y1 t dy B
y2
B x
c u
dy
t
y1
y2
1
y1 c u dy B x
y2
y2
cudy
(A-107)
y1
1 Bu c 1 Bu c
B t
B x
The spatial average of any double primed variable goes to zero by definition.
The turbulent dispersion coefficients are defined as:
u" c" D x
w" c" D z
c
x
(A-108)
c
z
The dispersion terms are a result of lateral averaging of the velocity field. In general, except at an
interface, Dx >> Ex >> D and similarly for Dz >> Ez >> D. Substituting in for the dispersion coefficients and using q to be the net mass transport from lateral boundaries, this equation becomes:
Bc Bu c Bw c

c
c
qB D x B D z B rB
t
x
z
x
x z
z
(A-109)
If the overbars are dropped and replaced with capitals, c is replacee with , then the following
equation is obtained:
BD x
BD z
B UB WB
x
z
+
+
= q B + S B
t
x
z
x
z
(A-110)
where:
= laterally averaged constituent concentration, g m-3

Dx = longitudinal temperature and constituent dispersion coefficient, m2 sec-1
Dz = vertical temperature and constituent dispersion coefficient, m2 sec-1
q = lateral inflow or outflow mass flow rate of constituent per unit volume, g m-3 sec-1
S = laterally averaged source/sink term, g m-3 sec-1
Note that this can be concentration or temperature since the concentration of heat can be determined
to be cpT where is the fluid density, cp is the specific heat of water, and T is the temperature.
A-40
TRANSPORT
THEORY
The following must be determined in order to solve the equation:

1. laterally-averaged velocity field the from momentum equations
2. appropriate boundary and initial conditions
3. Dx and Dz
4. laterally-averaged source/sink terms
Determination of Dz and Dx
The specification of Dx, the longitudinal dispersion coefficient, is a user-defined input. The
preprocessor though does a check on the magnitude of this value by computing Dx based on
an approach by Okubo (1971):
= 5.84104 1.1
where Dx is in m2/s and the longitudinal grid spacing x is in m. Dx is currently space and time
invariant.
Dz is internally computed within the CE-QUAL-W2 model using the Reynolds analogy,
where Dz is computed from Az, the vertical eddy viscosity, from
= 0.14
Numerical Solution
The first step in the numerical solution is to define the computational grid (Figure A-21). The grid
is space-staggered since some variables are defined at one location and the remainder are displaced
by x/2 or z/2. The grid discretizes a waterbody into computational cells whose locations are
defined by their segment [I] and layer number [K], i.e., cell (K,I). Variables are located at either
the center or boundary of a cell. Variables defined at the boundary include the horizontal and
vertical velocities, U and W, longitudinal eddy viscosity and diffusivity, Ax and Dx, vertical eddy
viscosity and diffusivity, Az and Dz, and internal shear stress x. The density, , temperature, T,
constituent concentration, , pressure, P, and average cell width, B are defined at the cell center.
A-41
THEORY
TRANSPORT
segment I-1
segment I
segment I+1
layer KT
layer K-1
layer K
layer K+1
x
Legend
U, A x , D x , x
P, B, ,
W, D z
Az
Figure A-21. Variable locations in computational grid.
There is a rational basis for choosing variable locations. Since the constituent concentration is
defined at the center and velocities are defined at the boundaries, spatial averaging of velocities is
not required to determine changes in concentration over time. In addition, the horizontal velocity
is surrounded by a cell with water surface elevations and densities defined on either side. Thus,
the horizontal velocity is computed from horizontal gradients of the surface slope and densities
without requiring spatial averaging of these variables.
The geometry is specified by a cell width, B, thickness, H, and length, x. Several additional geometric variables are used in the calculations. These include the average cross-sectional area between two cells (k,i) and (k,i+1)
BH rk,i =
A-42
B k,i H k,i + B k,i H k,i+1

2
(A-111)
TRANSPORT
THEORY
the average widths between two cells (k,i) and (k+1,i)
B k,i + B k+1,i
2
B bk,i =
(A-112)
and the average layer thickness between layers k and k+1
H k,i =
H k + H k+1
2
(A-113)
The numerical procedure for solving the six unknowns at each timestep is to first compute water
surface elevations. With the new surface elevations, new horizontal velocities can be computed.
With new horizontal velocities, the vertical velocities can be found from continuity. New constituent concentrations are computed from the constituent balance. Using new horizontal and vertical
velocities, the water surface elevation equation can be solved for simultaneously. The solution
for is thus spatially implicit at the same time level and eliminates the surface gravity wave speed
criterion:
t<
x
g H max
(A-114)
that can seriously limit timesteps in deep waterbodies.

Version 1.0 used upwind differencing in the constituent transport advective terms in which the cell
concentration immediately upstream of the velocity is used to calculate fluxes. A major problem
with upwind differencing is the introduction of numerical diffusion given by (for longitudinal advection):
e=
u x
(1 - c)
2
(A-115)
where:
e = numerical diffusion
U t
c=
Courant number
x
A similar condition holds for vertical advection. In many cases, numerical diffusion can overwhelm physical diffusion producing inaccurate results when strong gradients are present. The
problem is particularly pronounced for stratified reservoirs and estuaries.
Numerical diffusion has been reduced by implementing an explicit, third-order accurate
QUICKEST horizontal/vertical transport scheme (Leonard, 1979), and time-weighted, implicit vertical advection. Tests of this scheme are reported in Chapman and Cole (1992).
QUICKEST uses an additional spatial term to estimate concentrations used in computing horizontal
and vertical fluxes. A nonuniform grid QUICKEST scheme was developed using a three-point
A-43
THEORY
TRANSPORT
Lagrangian interpolation function to estimate constituent values at grid cell interfaces. Specifically,
advective multipliers for each of three upstream weighted grid cells are derived in terms of cell
lengths and the local cell interface velocity. Time invariant parts of the interpolation functions are
calculated once thus minimizing computations for additional constituents.
Implicit vertical transport including variable layer heights has also been implemented. Vertical
diffusion is fully implicit and advection employs a time-weighted, central difference, implicit
scheme. A unique feature of vertical advection, in the explicit part of the time-weighted scheme,
is QUICKEST which increases overall accuracy.
As implemented in the code, the new transport scheme is a two-part solution for constituent concentrations at the new timestep. First, horizontal advection is computed using QUICKEST and
diffusion is computed using central differencing. This part also includes the explicit vertical advection contribution (which utilizes QUICKEST) and all sources and sinks.
Next, the implicit part of vertical advection and diffusion are included. Diffusion is always fully
implicit. The user can time-weight advection by specifying a value for [THETA] which varies from
0 to 1. For [THETA] equal to 0, the solution is explicit in time and vertical advection is accounted
for in the first part of the algorithm. For [THETA] equal to 1, the solution is fully implicit in time
and vertical advection is accounted for in this part of the algorithm. A Crank-Nicholson scheme
where vertical advection is time-weighted between the explicit (using QUICKEST) and implicit
parts results if [THETA] is set to 0.5 or greater. The following is a description of QUICKEST, the
preferred transport scheme.
Non-Uniform Grid QUICKEST Formulation
In one dimension, the conservative control volume advective transport of a constituent integrated
over a timestep is:
n+1
n
i = i -
t
( U r nr - U l ln )
x
(A-116)
where:
i
r,l
Ur,l
t
= constituent concentration at a grid point, g m-3

= right and left cell face constituent concentrations, g m-3
= right and left cell face velocity, m s-1
= time, s
The QUICKEST algorithm was originally derived using an upstream weighted quadratic interpolation function defined over three uniformly spaced grid points. This interpolation function estimates cell face concentrations required by the conservative control volume transport scheme. For
example, the right cell face concentration estimate for a flow positive to the right is:
r = T i-1 i-1 + T i i + T i+1 i+1
(A-117)
where T are advective multipliers which weight the contribution of three adjacent grid point concentrations.
A-44
TRANSPORT
THEORY
The advective multipliers are obtained by collecting terms associated with each constituent defined
by the QUICKEST advection operator. For a non-uniform grid, a combination of two and three
point Lagrangian interpolation functions (Henrici, 1964) are used to compute the QUICKEST estimate for the right cell face concentration centered about cells i and i+1:
r = P 1 (x) -
U t
1
2
x 2 - U t P 2 (x)
P 2 (x) + D x t 2
6
(A-118)
where:
x = the local right cell face position

Dx = diffusion coefficient
Defining a local coordinate system of three non-uniformly spaced grid cells denoted by xi-1, xi, and
xi+1 with corresponding constituent values, the interpolation functions required in equation A-118
are:
P1 (x) =
P 2 (x) =
(x- x i )
( x i+1 - x)
i+1 +
i
( x i+1 - x i )
( x i+1 - x i )
(A-119)
(x- xi )(x- xi-1 )

(x- xi+1 )(x- xi-1 )
i+1 +
i
( xi+1 - xi )( xi+1 - xi-1 )
( xi - xi+1 )( xi - xi-1 )
(A-120)
(x- xi+1 )(x- xi )

i-1
( xi-1 - xi+1 )( x x-1 - xi )
Taking the first derivative of P1(x) and the second derivative of P2(x) and substituting into equation
A-118, it is then possible to group terms and obtain the advective multipliers. For example, the
Ti+1 multiplier is:
T i+1 =
(x - xi ) U t (x - xi ) + (x - xi-1 )
( xi+1 - xi )
2 ( xi+1 - xi ) ( xi+1 - xi-1 )
(A-121)
2 Dx t xi2 - ( U t )2
6
+
( xi+1 - xi ) ( xi+1 - xi-1 )
Similar functions are obtained for Ti and Ti-1 multipliers that complete the formulation for the
QUICKEST algorithm.
From a computational standpoint, most geometric components of the multipliers are time-invariant
and are computed once and stored in arrays. The time-varying part of the multipliers (U, t, Dx)
are updated each timestep during computation of the T arrays. However, when the QUICKEST
A-45
THEORY
TRANSPORT
scheme is applied vertically, the spatial part of the multipliers for layers [KT] and [KT]+1 are updated each timestep to accommodate the surface elevation fluctuation.
ULTIMATE/QUICKEST Numerical Transport Solution Scheme
In Version 2, the QUICKEST numerical scheme replaced the upwind numerical scheme used in
Version 1 for solving the advective terms in the advection-diffusion equation. Compared to the
upwind scheme, QUICKEST resulted in improved numerical accuracy in simulating sharp fronts
since the upwind transport scheme adds excessive numerical diffusion.
A problem with the QUICKEST scheme is that it can give rise to spurious oscillations at the leading
and trailing edge of a sharp front or gradient. This can occur where there are fresh/salt water interfaces, point source discharges, or cases of strong temperature stratification. Even though the upwind scheme always gives physically realistic solutions, it introduces numerical diffusion that artificially reduces sharp gradients.
An improvement was introduced by Leonard (1991) that eliminated spurious oscillations but preserved the higher-order solution scheme of QUICKEST. This technique is a universal (in the sense
that it can be applied to numerical schemes other than QUICKEST) limiter for maintaining monotonic profiles near a gradient and is called the ULTIMATE solution scheme.
In order to illustrate the scheme, consider the solution of the unsteady advective equation:
B BU
0
t
x
(A-122)
where:
= concentration, g m-3
B = width, m
U = velocity, m s-1
x = longitudinal coordinate, m
t = time, s
The finite difference scheme for this based on a positive flow (U > 0) is:
in 1
1 n n UBt
UBt
B i
R
L
n 1 i
Bi
x L
x R
(A-123)
The value i refers to the center grid point, R is the right-hand face value, and L is the left hand face
value (Figure A-22).
A-46
TRANSPORT
THEORY
Figure A-22. ULTIMATE schematization for positive flow.

where:
i-1
i
i+1
L
R
Ur
= upstream concentration, g m-3

= center concentration, g m-3
= downstream concentration, g m-3
= left face concentration, g m-3
= right face concentration, g m-3
= right face horizontal velocity, m s-1
Figure A-23 shows a sketch of variables used for a negative flow. The term Ut / x is called the
Courant number. The problem to resolve is how to choose the concentrations at the face values
since concentrations are defined at the center of a cell. An upwinding scheme would say that the
concentration at the left face is i-1 and the concentration at the right face is i for positive flow.
In order to improve numerical accuracy, there are other higher-order numerical techniques, such as
QUICKEST (Leonard, 1979), to estimate these face values. In CE-QUAL-W2, R and L are
initially computed based on the QUICKEST method. However, if the criteria for a monotonic
solution are violated, the values for R and L are revised to assure a monotonic solution. This is
the essence of the ULTIMATE algorithm that eliminates over/undershoots in the numerical
transport scheme.
A-47
THEORY
TRANSPORT
Figure A-23. ULTIMATE schematization for negative flow.

where:
i-1
i
i+1
L
R
UL
= downstream concentration, g m-3

= center concentration, g m-3
= upstream concentration, g m-3
= left face concentration, g m-3
= right face concentration, g m-3
= left face horizontal velocity, m s-1
To outline the procedure for simple conditions, the velocity, segment spacing and segment widths
are assumed constant, so that Equation A-123 can be written as:
Ut

U t
in 1 in

R
L
(A-124)
Defining normalized variables based on:
in1
~
n
,
i 1 in1
(A-125)
for location i (the center location) and the right face value for positive flow as in Figure A-22, we
have the following:
n
n
~ n i i 1
i n
i 1 in1
A-48
(A-126)
TRANSPORT
THEORY
R in1
~
R n
i 1 in1
~
If R
~
in
Ut
x
~
~
in R 1
(A-127)
for 0 in 1
(A-128)
for
~
0 in 1
~
~
~
~
in R for in 0 or in 1
(A-129)
(A-130)
The face value is unadjusted from that computed by the numerical scheme and the QUICKEST
value of R is used without alteration. These conditions are shown as the shaded region in Figure
A-24.
If these conditions are not met, then R is adjusted to force a monotonic solution. The value of the
~
face is replaced with the nearest allowable value of R based on the above criteria that will ensure
these criteria are met. The face value is determined by using:
~
R in1 R in1 in1
(A-131)
This procedure is applied to all the faces and then Equation A-124 is solved to update the concentration at the next time level. This means that the right face concentration will be the left face
concentration for the next segment thus ensuring mass conservation.
A-49
THEORY
TRANSPORT
~
R
~ ~
in R 1
~
R
~
in
Ut
x R
~
~
in R
~
in
0
0
Figure A-24. Definition sketch for monotonic solution domain.
According to tests preformed by Lin and Falconer (1997), the QUICKEST-ULTIMATE scheme
with splitting of the diffusion and source/sink terms conserved mass and eliminated numerical oscillations. Leonard (1991) also indicated that the QUICKEST scheme coupled with the
ULTIMATE scheme was numerically accurate and cost-effective in terms of computational time.
Figure A-25 shows the results of a square pulse of 100 g m-3 moving downstream using the
UPWIND, QUICKEST, and ULTIMATE/QUICKEST numerical transport schemes. The
UPWIND scheme has a large amount of numerical diffusion whereas the QUICKEST scheme has
non-physical oscillations about the leading and trailing edge of the solution. The
ULTIMATE/QUICKEST numerical solution greatly reduces numerical diffusion and eliminates
the over and undershoots.
For any case of unequal grid spacing, the order of accuracy diminishes. Leonard (1991) recommends that if used with non-uniform grid spacing, the formal accuracy of the method is only preserved if the grid does not expand or contract more than about 125%.
Even though the ULTIMATE scheme can be used with any suitable numerical technique, Leonard
(1991) indicates that when coupled with the 3rd order QUICKEST scheme and a 2nd order central
difference diffusion operator, the results are virtually indistinguishable from other higher-order advection solvers.
A-50
TRANSPORT
THEORY
Square wave pulse moving downstream
DLX=1750 m, U=0.091 m/s, DT(approx)=100 s
110
100
90
ULTIMATE-QUICKEST
QUICKEST
UPWIND
Analytical solution
80
Concentration, mg/l
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
0
10
20
Model segment number
30
40
Figure A-25. Comparison of UPWIND, QUICKEST, and ULTIMATE/QUICKEST

schemes for conservative tracer transport.
The following shows a straightforward procedure by Leonard to compute the right and left face
values if they do not meet the monotonic criteria, as well as a procedure for variable velocities.
Based on the sign of the velocity for each face, compute DEL:
DEL in1 in1

5
(A-132)
If DEL 10
set face i and proceed to the next face (the face value is the L
or R face as shown in ). Otherwise, compute:
n
A-51
THEORY
TRANSPORT
~ n in in1 in in1
i n
i 1 in
DEL
~
(A-133)
n
If in 0 or in 1 , set face i and proceed to the next face. If not, compute:
face in1 face in1

~
face n
i 1 in1
DEL
(A-134)
where face is computed based on the users chosen numerical scheme (such as
QUICKEST or another scheme).
1. If face in , face in
~
~
in
in
~
~
2. if face
, face
Ut
Ut
x
x
~
~
3. if face 1 , face 1
n
Then recompute the face value according to face face DEL i .
Once all the face values are determined, use the finite difference form of the solution
to determine the solution (Equation A-123)
Leonard (1991) also showed a numerical technique that minimized the computational
burden when using ULTIMATE with the QUICKEST scheme. This technique is described as follows.
Based on the sign of the velocity for each face, define C, D, and U nodes (center,
downstream, and upstream) corresponding for positive flow to i, i+1, and i-1, respectively.
Compute
CURV
DEL
n
i 1
and
2
n
i
CURV,
where DEL in1 in
and
n
i 1
1. If CURV 0.6 DEL , then use the QUICKEST computed value for the face
value, face (the face value is the R or L face as shown in ).
2. If not, and if CURV DEL , then set face in
3. If not, and DEL>0, limit face by in below, or the smaller of
A-52
TRANSPORT
THEORY
reference
4. If
not,
n
i 1
and
reference
n
i 1
in1
n
and i
1
Ut
x
n
i
DEL<0,
limit
face
in1
n
and i
1
Ut
by
in ,
or
the
larger
of
n
i
5. Once all the face values are determined, use Equation A-123 to obtain the solution
.
The procedure outlined above is based on unidirectional and uniform magnitude velocity and segment widths. If the velocity regime and widths are variable, then the following procedure is followed in order to maintain a monotonic solution. Consider the following limitations based on
definitions shown in Figure A-26.
Figure A-26. Definition sketch for variable velocity.

where:
i-1
i
i+1
L
R
RR
= upstream concentration
= center concentration
= center concentration
= left face concentration at i
= right face concentration at i
= right face concentration at I+1
Assuming that UR is positive and the concentration times width ( B ) increases monotonically,
n
n
n
n
i.e., B i 1 B i B i 1 B i 2 , between segment i-1 and i+2, then the goal of the
A-53
THEORY
TRANSPORT
technique is to estimate R , or really BR R , and to update the concentration using Equation A123. Equation A-123 can be written as a condition for R as:
UBt
UBt
n
n
n 1 n 1
x R Bi i i Bi x L
R
L
(A-135)
If it is assumed that Bin in BR R Bin1 in1 , then this is equivalent to saying that
BinU in in BRnU Rn R Bin1U in1 in1 or that the net flux into a segment is increasing.
Using the monotonic limitation that Bin 1 in 1 Bin1 in1 then Equation A-135 becomes:
UBt
UBt
n
n
n
n
x R Bi i i 1 Bi 1 x L
R
L
(A-136)
Then making a conservative assumption that BL L Bin1 in1 , Equation A-136 becomes:
UBt
UBt
n
n
n
n
n
x R Bi i i 1 Bi 1 x i 1
R
i 1
n
(A-137)
Another condition is also imposed on BR R by looking at the control volume segment centered
at i+1. Using similar reasoning as above and assuming that URR > 0, the other criterion for BR R
is
UBt
UBt
n
n
n
n
n
x R Bi 2 i 2 i 1 Bi 1 x i 1
R
RR
(A-138)
These criteria would be altered appropriately if the function were monotonically decreasing rather
than increasing.
Vertical Implicit Transport
Focusing on vertical advective and diffusive transport, constituent transport can be written as:
B WB

+
BD z
= RHS
t
z
z
z
(A-139)
where RHS represents horizontal transport and all sources/sinks. Integrating the transport equation
vertically and over time gives:
n+1
BH n+1 + H t z WB n+1 - H t z BD z = BH *
z
140)
A-54
(A-
THEORY
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
where:
* = all n-time level horizontal and explicit vertical transport and sources/sinks
= time-weighting for vertical advection; 0 for fully explicit, 0.55 for Crank-Nicholson, and
1 for fully implicit
Expanding the differential operators in terms of central differences and collecting terms, the above
equation can be recast as:
n+1
n+1
n+1
At i i-1 +V t i i + C t i i+1 = Dt i
(A-141)
where:
Vt i=1 +
t
BH k,i
W k,i Bbk,i - W k-1,i Bbk-1,i

B D
B D
+ bk,i z k,i + bk-1 z k-1,i

2
Hk
H k-1

At i =
Ct i = -
t Bbk,i W k,i D zk,i
2
BH k,i
Hk
t Bbk-1,i W k-1,i D zk-1,i
+
2
BH k,i
H k-1
The coefficients are computed once, stored in arrays, and used to update each constituent. This is
accomplished by loading the explicit part of the solution, *, with each successive constituent and
inverting the resulting matrix via a Thomas tridiagonal solver.
Auxiliary Functions
Auxiliary functions are relationships that describe processes independent of basic hydrodynamic
and transport computational schemes in the model. Auxiliary functions include turbulent dispersion and wind shear processes, heat exchange (including ice cover), evaporation, hydraulic structures, density, and selective withdrawal.
Surface Shear Stress

Referring to Figure A-27, the shear stress at the water surface is defined as
s C D a Wh u s 2 C D a Wh 2
(A-142)
A-55
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
where:
s
us
Wh
CD
a
= surface shear stress at water surface, kg/m/s2

= surface velocity in water, m/s
= wind velocity measured at a distance h above water surface in direction of shear, m/s
= drag coefficient, [-]
= air density, kg/m3
W(z)
Wh
h
us
Figure A-27. Shear stress at the air-water surface.

Note that this relationship leads to the 3% rule for surface currents:
s C D a Wh u s 2 C D W u s2
air
water
(A-143)
if C D
air
~ CD
water
, then u s ~ 0.03Wh
3% rule
Usually the drag coefficient is a function of the measurement height, h, above the water surface.
Most drag coefficient formulae have been determined based on a 10 m wind speed measurement
height. If wind speeds are taken at other measurement heights for the shear stress calculation, these
are corrected in the model to a 10 m height.
The wind speed is a function of measurement height. To correct the measurement height to an
elevation z, use the following approach.
Assuming a logarithmic boundary layer:
A-56
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
ln(
)
Wz
z
0
=
W z 1 ln( z 1 )
z0
(A-144)
where:
Wz = desired wind speed at elevation z
Wz1 = known wind speed at height z1
z0 = wind roughness height (some assume 0.003 ft for wind < 5 mph and 0.015 for wind > 5
mph, range 0.0005 to 0.03 ft, this is a user-defined coefficient in the CE-QUAL-W2
model)
This term can then be used to compute the surface stress in the direction of the x-axis and the crossshear (the cross-shear term will be used in the turbulent shear stress algorithm) as follows:
wx C D a Wh 2 cos( 1 2 )
(A-145)
wy C D a Wh 2 sin( 1 2 )
(A-146)
where:
wx = surface shear stress along x-axis due to wind

wy = surface shear stress along lateral direction due to wind
1 = wind orientation relative to North, radians
Segment and wind orientation are illustrated in Figure A-28 and Figure A-29. The angles are
measured in radians clockwise from north. A wind from the east would have an angle of /2 radians, radians from the south, 3/2 radians from the west, and 0 or 2 radians from the north.
A-57
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Figure A-28. Segment orientation.
North
Wh
N to S,
E to W,
= 0
= 2
Figure A-29. Wind orientation.

The CE-QUAL-W2 model V3.5 and earlier included a drag coefficient, CD, that was based on
the following formulae:
A-58
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
= 0.0 10 < 1 /
0.5
= 0.00510
1 / 10 < 15 /
= 0.0026 10 15 /
where W10 is the wind speed in m/s at 10 m.

This formulation shows that CD decreases as wind speed decreases. It has been observed
though that for wind speeds below 5 m/s, CD increases with lowering wind speed. According
to Wuest and Lorke (2003), the drag coefficient for a smooth surface (below 5 m/s) follows
the following equation:
1.15
= 0.004410
Above a wind speed of 5 m/s, CD can be calculated from the following implicit equation:
2
10
1
= { [
2 ] + 11.3}
10
where k is von Karman constant (=0.41), and the 10 in the above equation has units of m.
The above equation for winds greater than 5 m/s are thought to be a lower limit to the drag coefficient since the wind-wave effects at higher wind speeds probably increase the value of CD
higher than that predicted by the above implicit equation. The difference between these 2
equations is shown below in Figure 30.
Since the W2 approximation for wind speeds above 4 m/s is reasonable, for V3.6 and later versions the following drag coefficient formulation is being used:
= 0.01 10 < 0.5 /
1.15
= 0.004410
10 < 4 /
0.5
= 0.00510 4 / 10 < 15 /
= 0.0026 10 15 /
This is shown as the dotted line in Figure 30.
This will have the effect of increasing the drag coefficient at low wind speeds. The impact of
2
this on the wind shear stress at the surface, = 10
, is shown in Figure 31.
A-59
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Drag coefficient, CD [-]
V3.5 and earlier W2 model

Wuest and Lorke (2003)
Revised W2 drag coefficient
0.01
0.001
12
16
20
Wind speed at 10 m, m/s
Figure 30. Comparison of current W2 model computation of CD and that recommended

as a lower limit by Wuest and Lorke (2003).
10
V3.5 and earlier W2 model
Revised W2 drag coefficient
Surface shear stress, kg/m/s2
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0
12
16
20
Wind speed at 10 m, m/s
Figure 31. Surface shear stress for V3.6 and later compared to V3.5 and earlier.
A-60
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
In addition, a fetch correction to the wind velocity can be used as determined by Fang and Stefan
(1994). This correction is described in Appendix B under Dissolved Oxygen, but is not applicable
to rivers.
Bottom Shear Stress

The shear stress is defined along the bottom of each cell (or for each cell in contact with side walls
or channel bottom) as
wg
UU
C2
(A-147)
where:
C = Chezy friction coefficient
U = longitudinal velocity
w = density of water
Also, the model user can specify a Mannings friction factor where the Chezy coefficient is related
to the Mannings friction factor (SI units) as
C = (1/n)R1/6
(A-148)
where:
n = Mannings friction factor

R = hydraulic radius
In Version 2, the bottom shear stress was applied only to the bottom of each layer. In Version 3
and later, the sidewall friction is accounted for because of its greater importance in river systems.
The user can input either the Chezy or Mannings coefficient for each model segment.
Vertical Shear Stress

The algorithm for the vertical shear stress is
xz
U
U
t
Az
z
z
(A-149)
In Version 3, the user must specify which formulation to use for Az or t. The formulations are
shown in Table A-6.
A-61
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Table A-6. Vertical eddy viscosity formulations.

Formulation
Formula
t 2m
Nickuradse (NICK)
Parabolic (PARAB)
Reference
u CRi
e
z
2
4
z
z
m H 0.14 0.081 0.061

H
H
t u* z1 e CRi
H
Rodi (1993)
Engelund (1976)
W2 (used in Version
2)
l 2 U 2 wy e - 2 kz y tributary (- CR )
e i
t m
+
Cole and Buchak

(1995)
m zmax
2
W2 with mixing length

of Nickuradse (W2N)
lm 2 U 2 wy e - 2 kz y tributary (-CR )
e i
t
+
t
Cole and Buchak

(1995) and Rodi (1993)

2
4
z
z
m H 0.14 0.081 0.061

H
H
RNG (re-normalization group)

TKE (Turbulent kinetic
energy)
zu 3
t 1 3
1 C1
t C
k2
1/ 3
e CRi
Simoes (1998)
Wells (2003)
where k and are defined from
kB kBU kBW t k
B
t
x
z
z k z
k
BP G Pk
B t
x k x
B BU BW t
B
t
x
z
z z
B
C
P
x x
k
k
A-62
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Formulation
where:
Formula
Reference
m = mixing length
C = constant (assumed 0.15)
k = wave number (in W2 models)
z = vertical coordiante
u* = shear velocity
= liquid density
H = depth
= von Karman constant
(x) = max(0,x)
u = horizontal velocity
wy = cross-shear from wind
= molecular viscosity
Ri = Richardson number zmax = maximum vertical grid spacing C1 = empirical constant, 100
B = width
t = turbulent viscosity
k = turbulent kinetic energy (in TKE model)
= turbulent energy dissipation rate P = turbulent energy production from boundary friction
U = longitudinal velocity (laterally averaged) W = vertical velocity (laterally averaged) = turbulent Prandlt number
U 2
P t

Production term:
C, C= constants in the TKE model
G
Buoyancy term:
t 2
N
t
BruntVaisala frequency =
ytrib = cross-shear from lateral tributaries
The model user can also specify the maximum value of the vertical eddy viscosity [AZMAX], but
this value is only used with the W2N and W2 formulations. This value is specified because the time
step for numerical stability is greatly reduced when solving the momentum equations using an explicit numerical technique. In addition, the model user can choose whether to compute the vertical
momentum transfer with the longitudinal momentum equation using an implicit or an explicit numerical technique. The explicit formulation was used in Version 2 with a fixed [AZMAX] of 1.0 x
10-5 m2 s-1. The implicit solution code was originally developed by Chapman and Cole and revised/updated for Version 3.
Note that only the W2 and W2N include the effects of cross-shear from wind and from tributary or
branch inflows. Hence, it is recommended to use either W2 or W2N for waterbodies with deep
sections that could be stratified. The other formulations should be used for estuary or river systems
where the maximum computed [AZMAX] could be as high as 1 to 5 m2 s-1. For the river model, the
model user should use the implicit solution technique. To reproduce results from Version 2 in a
stratified reservoir, set [AZMAX] to 1.0 x 10-5 m2 s-1 and use the explicit solution.
How does one know which turbulent closure scheme to use for xz since, according to Hamblin and
Salmon (1975), "the vertical diffusion of momentum is probably the most important internal parameter" for predicting internal circulation patterns? Because of the disarray in the literature over
which formulation is best, Shanahan (1980) suggested that we "use theory and literature as a guide
to develop alternative viscosity functions and then test those functions in calibration runs against
field data." In the absence of expensive-to-obtain current velocity data, the use of temperature
profiles is often used to test the adequacy of the hydrodynamic regime against different formulations.
Typical variations of these formulations as predicted by the model are shown in Figure A-32 for
Manning's fiction factor and in Figure A-33 for a Chezy friction factor. Comparison of the various
turbulence closure theories to classical open channel flow theory for seven vertical layers is shown
in Figure A-34.
A-63
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Manning's n=0.03 and S=0.0001
86
84
Elevation, m
82
PARAB
80
RNG
78
W2
W2N
76
NICK
74
72
70
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
Turbulent eddy viscosity, m2 s-1
Figure A-32. Variation of turbulent vertical eddy viscosity for flow of 2574 m3 s-1 flow down
a channel of length 30 km and width of 100 m at x=15 km.
Chezy=50 and S=0.0001
86
84
Elevation, m
82
PARAB
80
RNG
78
W2
W2N
76
NICK
74
72
70
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
Turbulent eddy viscosity, m2s-1
Figure A-33. Variation of turbulent vertical eddy viscosity for flow of 2574 m3 s-1 flow down
a channel of length 30 km and width of 100 m measured at x=15 km.
A-64
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
7 vertical layers, Manning's n=0.03 and S=0.0001
90
88
86
PARAB
Elevation, m
84
RNG
82
W2
80
W2N
78
NICK
76
Theory
74
72
70
0
0.5
1.5
2.5
Velocity, m s-1
Figure A-34. Comparison of vertical velocity predictions of W2 model with various eddy
viscosity models compared to theory.
Formulation
In CE-QUAL-W2, the shear stress term includes the contribution to the shear stress from surface
waves induced by the wind. The wind can produce waves that produce decaying motions with
depth (Figure A-35).
wind stress
Figure A-35. Conceptual diagram of wind induced motion.

The total longitudinal shear stress for a layer is defined as having contributions from interfacial
velocity shear, wind wave generated shear, and friction shear along boundaries:
xz
U wx 2 kz b
Az
(A-150)
A-65
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
where:
wx = longitudinal wind shear at the surface

4 2
k = wave number =
gTw2
0.233
W
Tw = wind wave period = 6.95 E 2 F
F = fetch length, m
0.534
The turbulent eddy viscosity was conceptualized by Prandtl as:
turbulent 2
dU
dz
(A-151)
where is defined as the mixing length and can be interpreted as being proportional to the average
size of large eddies or the length scale of a turbulent eddy. This length is a function of distance
from a boundary or wall since the eddy sizes vary as a function of distance from a boundary. The
goal in most turbulence models is the determination of the mixing length as a function of position
in the fluid. Because this concept is not firmly grounded in theory, there have been many published
formulations for determination of Az in the literature (Shanahan and Harleman, 1982).
The mechanism for transporting the wind stress on the surface in the model is based on:
2
Az
2
U 2 V 2

z z
1/ 2
e CRi
(A-152)
where:
z
Ri = Richardson number =
2
U
z
= von Karman constant, 0.4
C = constant, 1.5
g
= vertical length scale chosen as cell thickness, z

The formulation is a typical mixing length formulation that is decreased or increased based on the
Richardson number. The Richardson number accounts for the impact of density stratification on
transfer of momentum between fluid parcels. In regions where there is no stratification, the Richardson number is zero and the exponential term is one. For regions where there is strong stratification, the Richardson number becomes large and the exponential term approaches zero.
In the longitudinal-vertical model, the lateral velocity, V, and its gradient, V/z, are due to the
lateral component of wind wave motion and are assumed to be zero when averaged laterally, but
A-66
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
not necessarily the square (V/z)2. It is assumed that cross wind shear, wy, generates lateral wave
components and decays exponentially with depth such that
yz wy e 2 kz
(A-153)
where:
wy = lateral wind shear at the surface

Then using:
yz
V
Az
(A-154)
The lateral velocity gradient squared becomes:

2
( 2kz )
V wy e
z A
(A-155)
The final equation for the vertical eddy viscosity is then:

2
- 2 kz
l 2 U wy e (- CR i )
e
+
Az =
2 z Az
2
(A-156)
The above equation is implicit. In the model, this equation is explicit since the value of Az in the
lateral wind shear term is used from the previous time step. Az is never less than the molecular
kinematic viscosity for water.
The above formulation of wind shear in horizontal momentum and evaluation of Az leads to wind
driven surface currents that are three to ten percent of the surface wind velocity with higher values
appearing at higher wind speeds. This is in accordance with the few attempts to relate wind speed
and surface current velocity from field data appearing in the literature. With this formulation, the
surface current does not reach abnormal values as it does for the case of wind shear applied only to
the surface and as the surface layer thickness decreases. The depth of the wind driven surface layer
increases with wind speed, and mass transport due to wind appears to be insensitive to the finite
difference layer thickness.
RNG Turbulent Eddy Viscosity Formulation
The RNG model was derived from the RNG model of Yakhot and Orszag (1986) by Simoes (1998).
The turbulent eddy viscosity is derived from Yakhot and Orzag (1986) as
1/ 3
t 1 a 3m C1

(A-157)
A-67
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
where:
(x) = max(0,x)
t = turbulent eddy viscosity
m = mixing length
= turbulent energy dissipation rate

a 1
C1 100
Two additional equations are necessary in determining the mixing length and the turbulent energy
dissipation. For the mixing length:
m
z
H
H
z
H
(A-158)
and for the turbulent eddy dissipation:
H 3 z
z
1
3
u*
H
H
3/ 2
(A-159)
where:
u*
H
Z
= shear velocity, m s-1

= depth of the channel, m
= vertical coordinate measured from the bottom of the channel, m
= von Karmans constant, 0.41
Substituting these into equation A-157:
zu
t 1 3 *

3
3

z
1 C1
1/ 3
(A-160)
Simoes (1998) states that this model better represents experimental data than the more traditional
parabolic eddy viscosity model of
t zu* 1
z
H
(A-161)
A value of was derived as a function of temperature based on values from Batchelor (1966) using
a polynomial curve fit between 0 and 30C.
A-68
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
This model was adjusted to account for stratified flow conditions by using the same Richardson
number criteria as used in the original W2 model (the approach of Mamayev as quoted in French,
1985),
t max , tRNG e CRi
(A-162)
where:
z
Ri = Richardson number =
2
U
z
g
C = empirical constant, 1.5 (French [1985] shows a value of 0.4)

The Richardson number accounts for the impact of density stratification on transfer of momentum
between fluid parcels. In regions where there is no stratification, Ri=0, and the exponential term is
1. For regions where there is strong stratification (or as
d
), the Richardson number bedz
comes large and the exponential term approaches 0.

Nikuradse Formulation
This model, as noted in Rodi (1993), is a mixing length model where the mixing length, m, and
eddy viscosity, t, are determined from
t 2m
u
z
2
4
z
z
m H 0.14 0.08 1 0.06 1

H
H
(A-163)
(A-164)
This results in a vertical distribution for the mixing length as shown in Figure A-36.
A-69
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Fraction of depth
Mixing Length Distribution
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
Mixing length, m
Figure A-36. Mixing length as a function of depth for the Nikuradse formulation.
The stability of the water column affects the mixing length. A Richardson number criteria has been
applied to correct the mixing length for stability effects such as
m mo 1 7 Ri if Ri 0
m mo 1 14 Ri
0.25
if Ri 0
(A-165)
(A-166)
This is different from the approach of Munk and Anderson (1948) where the Richardson number
correction was applied to the value of Az and not the mixing length directly.
In order to be compatible with the original formulation, the computed value of Az is corrected using
the Mamayev formulation:
t max , tNICK e CRi
(A-167)
Parabolic Formulation
Another formulation is a parabolic distribution for Az (Engelund, 1978):
t u* z 1
(A-168)
Figure A-37 shows the spatial distribution of Az for the parabolic model.
A-70
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Fraction of depth
Vertical Eddy Viscosity Distribution
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.00
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
Eddy viscosity, m2 s-1
Figure A-37. Variation of Az with depth for the parabolic model of Englund (1976).
In order to be compatible with the original formulation in the model, the computed value of Az is
corrected using the Mamayev formulation:
t max , t
PARAB
eCRi
(A-169)
W2N Formulation
The W2N formulation is the same as the W2 model except that the mixing length is no longer the
layer thickness, but is computed using Nickaradse's mixing length model . The equations for the
W2N formulation are:
2
m
A z =
2
U 2 wy e- 2 kz (- )

CR i
+
z A z e
2
4
z
z
m H 0.14 0.081 0.061

H
H
(A-170)
(A-171)
TKE Formulation
The TKE formulation is a typical application of the k- turbulence model. This model includes both
vertical transport of kinetic energy and dissipation by advection and diffusion but also horizontal
transport by advection. The model solves 2 partial differential equations for k and in order to
compute the turbulent eddy viscosity:
A-71
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
t C
k2
(A-172)
B BU BW t t
2
B
B C 1 P C 2
B
P (A-173)
t
x
z
z z x x
k
k
kB kBU kBW t k t k
B
BP G Pk
B
t
x
z
z k z x k x
(A-174)
where C is an empirical constant
U 2
P t

z
G t N2
t
Pk
P
CfU 3
0.5B
Production term from boundary friction
10C 1f .25U 4
0.5B 2
Production term from boundary friction
B is the width, U and W are the advective velocities in x and z respectively, and other terms are
empirical constants.
.
Typical values of the above model constants that have been used in other studies are:
k=1.0
=1.3
C=0.09
C1=1.44
C2=1.92
Turbulent Prandtl/Schmidt number,t, =1.0.
The solution of the above equations for k and used a split solution technique: explicit horizontal
and source-sink term solution followed by an implicit vertical solution. A description of the solution algorithm below is from a Masters research project by Gould (2006).
Algorithm
The current algorithm is based on the laterally averaged k- turbulence model equations
shown below:
t C
A-72
k2
[eq 1]
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
kB kUB kWB t k
BP G Pk
t
x
z
z k z

source/sink
unsteady
convection
diffusion
B UB WB t
2
B C 1 P C 2
B
Pe
t
x
z
z z
k
k
unsteady
[eq 2]
convection
[eq 3]
source/sink
diffusion
Where t, k, and are the eddy viscosity, turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation. P is
the production term and is calculated using equation 4
U
P t
[eq 4]
and G is the buoyancy term and is represented using equation 5.
t 2
N
t
[eq 5]
The production of turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation from boundary friction are
represented by the terms Pk and P. These terms are calculated using equations 6 and 7.
Pk
Cf U3
[eq 6]
(0.5B)
10C 1f .25U 4
[eq 7]
(0.5B) 2
The friction coefficient Cf is defined in equation 8.
Cf
g
gn2
C 2 R 13
h
[eq 8]
Where g is gravitational acceleration, C is a Chezy friction factor, n is a Mannings friction factor, and Rh is the hydraulic radius. The remaining terms C, C, C, k, and are empirical constants and the values used in the current model are shown in Table 1 below (Rodi, 1993).
Table 1 Constants in k- model (Rodi, 1993)
C 1
C 2
0.09
1.44
1.92
1.0
1.3
The equations above are solved using a split solution technique in a similar fashion to the
horizontal momentum equation in CE-QUAL-W2. Two different methods for solving the equations were implemented. In the first method the vertical transport term was solved using an explicit finite difference along with the horizontal transport term. The second method involved integrating the vertical transport term into a fully implicit finite difference. Both methods are based
on the solutions developed by Wells (2001). The computational grid used in these calculations is
shown below.
A-73
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
P,B
CE-QUAL-W2 coordinate system
U,Ax,Dx, xx
Segment
i-1
i
Layer
Az
W,D z
i+1
z=0
kt
k-1
x
z
kt+1
kb
k+1
Hkzk
xi
z=h at bottom
Figure 38. CE-QUAL-W2 computational grid. Width, density, pressure and water quality
state variables are defined at cell centers. Horizontal velocity, longitudinal eddy viscosity
and diffusivity, and longitudinal shear stress are defined at the right hand side of the cell.
Vertical velocity and vertical diffusivity is defiend at the bottom of the cell, and the vertical
eddy viscosity is defined at the lower right corner of the cell.
Explicit Vertical Convection
The first method developed for implementing the convective terms involved using an explicit finite difference for the vertical convection term. The first step in this method is to split the
turbulent kinetic energy transport equation, equation 2, into the two equations shown below as
equations 9a and 9b.
kB kUB kWB
BP G Pk
t
x
z
kB t k
B
t
z k z
[eq 9a]
[eq 9b]
Next each equation is averaged over a layer.
1
kBz 1 kUBz 1 kWBz 1 Bz P G Pk [eq 10a]
z
t
z
x
z
z
z

unsteady
A-74
convection
convection
source/sink
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
z z
z
t k
1
1 t k
kBz B
B
k
k
unsteady
[eq 10b]
diffusion
The partial derivatives in equation 10a can be replaced by the finite difference schemes
below. The unsteady term is represented as an explicit finite difference, where k* is the kinetic
turbulent energy at the next time step before the application of equation 10b.
k i*,k Bin,k1 z in,k1 k in,k Bin,k z in,k
kBz
t
t
i ,k
[eq 11]
The horizontal convective term is represented by an upwind difference scheme. The order of differencing depends on the direction of the horizontal component of the velocity. The difference
shown below is for U>0.
k in,k U in,k Bin,k z in,k k in1,k U in1,k Bin1,k z in1,k
kUBz
x
xin,k
i ,k
[eq 12]
The vertical convective term is also represented by an upwind difference scheme. The order of
differencing depends on the direction of the vertical component of the velocity.
The difference shown below is for W>0.
k n W n B n z n k n W n B n z n
kWBz i ,k i ,k i ,k i ,k i n1,k i 1,k i 1,k i 1,k

z
z i ,k
i ,k
[eq 13]
These differences can be inserted into equation 9a and rearranged to give the following explicit
solution for k*.
k*
k in,k Bin,k z in,k

n 1
i ,k
n 1
i ,k
t
k in,k U in,k Bin,k z in,k k in1,k U in1,k Bin1,k z in1,k
n 1
n 1
xi ,k Bi ,k z i ,k
t
k in,k Wi ,nk Bin,k z in,k k in1,k Wi n1,k Bin1,k z in1,k
n 1
n 1
xi ,k Bi ,k z i ,k
tBin,k z in,k
n 1
i ,k
n 1
i ,k
n
i ,k
Gin,k in,k Pk i ,k
n
[eq 14]
Where the terms P and G are calculated using the explicit differences shown below.
0.5 U kn,i U kn,i 1 0.5 U kn1,i U kn1,i 1

P t
z kn1 / 2,i
kn1,i kn,i
Gin,k t g
z n
k
,
i
w
n
i ,k
[eq 15]
[eq 16]
Equation 14 is calculated for all of the layers in a segment except for the top and bottom layer.
A-75
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Next the partial derivatives in equation 10b are replaced with the following differences.
k in,k1 Bin,k1 z in,k1 k i*,k Bin,k1 z in,k1
kBz
t
t
i ,k
k
B t
k z
Bin,k 1 / 2
z z
z
t k
B
k z
[eq 17]
i ,k
n
t i , k 1 / 2
k
k
n 1
n 1
i , k 1
i ,k
n 1
i , k 1 / 2
[eq 18]
Bin,k 1 / 2
n
t i , k 1 / 2
k k
z n 1
i , k 1 / 2
n 1
i ,k
n 1
i , k 1
The resulting equation can then be simplified to a tridiagonal matrix solution format,
AT kkn11 VT kkn 1 CT kkn11 DT
[eq 19]
where
Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
AT n 1 n 1
n 1
Bi ,k z i ,k z i ,k 1 / 2 k
Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
VT n 1 n 1 1
Bi ,k z i ,k
z in,k11 / 2
z in,k11 / 2
Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
CT n 1 n 1
Bi ,k z i ,k z in,k11 / 2 k
DT ki*, k
Bin, k zin, k
Bin, k1zin, k1
Bin, k zin, k
and n 1 n 1 1 except at the top layer. The boundary conditions at the top and bottom layers
Bi , k zi , k
are implemented using the method shown in Appendix A. Then kn+1 can be found by solving the
equations using the Thomas algorithm.
The turbulent dissipation is found using the same procedure. Equation 3 is split as shown
in equations 20a and 20b below.
B UB WB
( ) 2
B C 1 P C 2
Pe
t
x
z
k
k
B t
B
t
z z
[eq 20a]
[eq 20b]
These equations are then averaged over a layer.
A-76
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
1
Bz 1 UBz 1 WBz
z
t
z
x
z

unsteady
convection
convection
[eq 21a]
( ) 2
Bz C 1 P C 2
Pe
z
k
k

source/sink
z z
z
t
1
1 t
Bz B
B
k
k
unsteady
[eq 21b]
diffusion
The partial derivatives in equation 21a are replaced with finite differences using similar
schemes to those used in the turbulent kinetic energy solution. This results in the explicit solution
for * shown below.
in,k Bin,k z in,k

n 1
i ,k
n 1
i ,k
t
in,k U in,k Bin,k z in,k in1,k U in1,k Bin1,k z in1,k
n 1
n 1
xi ,k Bi ,k z i ,k
t
in,k Wi ,nk Bin,k z in,k in1,k Wi n1,k Bin1,k z in1,k
n 1
n 1
xi ,k Bi ,k z i ,k
[eq 22]
tBin,k z in,k
in,k n
( in,k ) 2
n
n 1 n 1 C 1 n Pi ,k C 2
P
e i ,k
Bi ,k z i ,k
k i ,k
k in,k
Where * is the turbulent dissipation at the next time step before the application of equation 21b.
Next the partial derivatives in equation 21b are replaced with finite differences
using similar schemes to those used in the turbulent kinetic energy solution. This again results in
a set of equations in a tridiagonal format.
AT kn11 VT kn 1 CT kn11 DT
[eq 23]
where
Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
AT n 1 n 1
Bi ,k z i ,k z in,k11 / 2 k
Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
VT n 1 n 1 1
Bi ,k z i ,k
z in,k11 / 2
z in,k11 / 2
Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
CT n 1 n 1
n 1
Bi ,k z i ,k z i ,k 1 / 2 k
DT
*
i ,k
Bin,k zin,k
Bin,k1zin,k1
A-77
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Bin, k zin, k
and n 1 n 1 1 except at the top layer. These equations are solved for n+1 using the Thomas
Bi , k zi , k
algorithm.
Implicit Vertical Convection
The second method is very similar to the technique developed above. The only difference is that the vertical convection term is integrated into the implicit part of the solution. First
equation 3 is split into horizontal and vertical components as shown in equations 24a to 24b.
kB kUB
BP G Pk
t
x
[eq 24a]
kB kWB t k
B
t
z
z k z
[eq 24b]
Next each equation is averaged over a layer.
1
kBz 1 kUBz 1 Bz P G Pk
z
t
z
x
z

unsteady
[eq 25a]
source/sink
convection
z z
1
kBz 1 kWBz 1 B t k
z
t
z
z z k z z
unsteady
convection
[eq 25b]
diffusion
Then the differences developed in the previous section, equations 11 and 12, are substituted into equation 25a. The resulting equation can then be rearranged and simplified in order to
explicitly solve for k* as shown in the equation below.
k*
k in,k Bin,k z in,k

n 1
i ,k
tBin,k z in,k
Bin,k1 z in,k1
n 1
i ,k
n
i ,k
t
k in,kU in,k Bin,k zin,k k in1,kU in1,k Bin1,k zin1,k
xi ,k Bin,k1 z in,k1
n
i ,k
n
i ,k
n
k i ,k
[eq 26]
Where k* is the kinetic turbulent energy at the next time step before the application of equation
25b. Equation 26 is calculated for all of the layers in a segment except for the top and bottom
layer.
Next the finite differences developed in the previous section, equations 17 and 18, along
with the finite difference for the vertical convective term, equation 27, are substituted into equation 25b.
k n 1 W n B n z n 1 k n 1 W n B n z n 1
kWBz i ,k 1 / 2 i ,k i ,k i ,k n1i ,k 1 / 2 i ,k i ,k i ,k
z
z k
A-78
[eq 27]
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
n 1
i , k 1 / 2
k in,k11 / 2
k in,k11 k in,k1
[eq 28]
2
n 1
k i ,k k in,k11
[eq 29]
The resulting equation can then be simplified to a tridiagonal matrix solution format,
AT kkn11 VT kkn 1 CT kkn11 DT
[eq 30]
where
Wi ,nk 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2

t
AT n 1 n 1
n 1
2
Bi ,k z i ,k
z i ,k 1 / 2 k
Bin,k1 z in,k1 Wi ,nk 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 Wi ,nk 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
VT n 1 n 1 1
t
2
2
Bi ,k z i ,k
z in,k11 / 2
z in,k11 / 2
Wi ,nk 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 z in,k1 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
CT n 1 n 1
Bi ,k z i ,k
2z in,k1
z in,k11 / 2 k
DT ki*,k
and
Bin,k zin,k
Bin,k1zin,k1
Bin, k zin, k
1 except at the top layer. The boundary conditions at the top and bottom layers
Bin, k1zin, k1
are implemented using the method shown in Appendix A. Then kn+1 is found by solving the equations using the Thomas algorithm.
The turbulent dissipation is found using the same procedure. Equation 3 is split as shown
in equations 31a and 31b below.
B UB
( ) 2
B C 1 P C 2
Pe
t
x
k
k
B WB t
B
t
z
z z
[eq 31a]
[eq 31b]
These equations are then averaged over a layer.

2
1
Bz 1 UBz 1 Bz C 1 P C 2 ( ) Pe
z
t
z
x
z
k
k

unsteady
convection
[eq 32a]
source/sink
A-79
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
z z
1
Bz 1 WBz 1 B t
z
t
z
z z z z
unsteady
unsteady
[eq 32b]
diffusion
The partial derivatives in equation 21a are replaced with finite differences using similar
schemes to those used in the turbulent kinetic energy solution. This results in the explicit solution
for * shown below.
in,k Bin,k z in,k

n 1
i ,k
n 1
i ,k
t
in,k U in,k Bin,k z in,k in1,k U in1,k Bin1,k z in1,k
n 1
xB z i ,k
n 1
i ,k
tBin,k z in,k
in,k n
( in,k ) 2
n
n 1 n 1 C 1 n Pk ,i C 2
P
e i ,k
Bi ,k z i ,k
k i ,k
k in,k
[eq 33]
Where * is the turbulent dissipation at the next time step before the application of equation 32a.
Next the partial derivatives in equation 32b are replaced with finite differences using similar schemes to those used in the turbulent kinetic energy solution. This again results in a set of
equations in a tridiagonal format.
[eq 34]
AT kn11 VT kn 1 CT kn11 DT
where

t
AT n 1 n 1
n 1
2
Bi ,k z i ,k
z i ,k 1 / 2 k
Bin,k1 z in,k1 Wi ,nk 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 Wi ,nk 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2 Bin,k 1 / 2 t in,k 1 / 2
t
VT n 1 n 1 1
t
2
2
Bi ,k z i ,k
z in,k11 / 2
z in,k11 / 2
t
CT n 1 n 1
2
Bi ,k z i ,k
z in,k11 / 2 k
DT i*,k
and
Bin,k zin,k
Bin,k1zin,k1
Bin, k zin, k
1 except at the top layer. These equations are then solved for n+1 using the
Bin, k1zin, k1
Thomas algorithm.
Boundary and initial conditions for k- model

In order to be able to apply the algorithm developed above to the typical hydraulic problems investigated using CE-QUAL-W2 the appropriate boundary conditions for the bed, free surface, inlet and outlet as well as initial conditions must be specified. This section outlines the
A-80
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
boundary conditions and initial conditions implemented in the current version of the k- algorithm.
At the bed steep gradients of turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation are present in the viscous sublayer. To accurately calculate these steep gradients a large number of grid
points are needed in the viscous sublayer and a low Reynolds number version of the k- turbulence model must be used. To avoid this problem an empirical law can be used to construct a
simple wall function.
To construct a wall function several assumptions must be made about flow in the inner
region near the wall. The largest assumption is that the flow parallel to the wall obeys the law of
the wall shown below.
U
1 yU *
ln E
U*
[eq 35]
Where U* is the bed friction velocity, is the von Karman constant, y is the distance of the grid
point from the bed, E is the roughness coefficient and is the kinematic viscosity. In addition to
the assumption that the flow has a logarithmic velocity profile it is necessary to assume that the
total shear stress remains constant in the inner region and is equal to the bed stress. These assumptions can normally be made if the first grid point is in the range of 30 y 100 from the
wall (Rodi, 1993).
yU *
[eq 36]
In the range of y+ specified above the Reynolds stresses are relatively constant. In this region local equilibrium prevails, so if buoyancy effects are negligible then the production equals
dissipation which implies that P = . It is also assumed that the total shear stress remains constant and is approximately equal to the wall shear stress in this region. Using these assumptions
and equation 1 it is possible to derive the equation for turbulent kinetic energy at the first grid
point shown below (Rodi, 1993).
U *2
k
c
2
The boundary condition for turbulent dissipation can be determined using P U *
where
U
is determined from equation 35 and is given below.
y
U3
*
y
[eq 37]
U
y
[eq 38]
Since y, U, E, , and E are known, a very simple wall function can be implemented by
solving equation 35 for U* [5]. In the current version of the k- model U* was found using a root
solver based on the bisection method from Press et al. (1996). Then equations 37 and 38 are used
to determine the turbulent kinetic energy and the turbulent dissipation at the first grid point. This
A-81
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
simple approach has some limitations, such as not being able to handle separated flow, but
seemed a reasonable starting point for this project [5].
The wall function outlined above is valid for both smooth and rough boundaries. For hydraulically smooth beds the roughness coefficient E is set to 9.535 (Ferziger, 2002). For rough
boundaries a smaller value of E is used. Two options are available in the current algorithm for
specifying the roughness coefficient. A uniform constant roughness coefficient value can be applied to all segments or the roughness coefficient can be calculated based on the Mannings coefficients specified in the bathymetry file.
In the first option the user specifies the roughness coefficient and this value is used to calculate the bed friction velocity using equation 35. After the bed friction velocity has been determined a new Mannings coefficient is calculated using equation 39 below. This method was used
primarily for experimental channel test cases where the bed was hydraulically smooth and had a
roughness coefficient equal to 9.535.
Rh1 / 6
g
[eq 39]
U*
Um
In the second option the roughness coefficient is calculated using a Strickler relationship and an
approximation of the Nikuradses data shown in equations 40 below 42 (Krishnappan and Lau,
1986).
Bs
E exp
U k
* s

2
U * k s
U * k s
Bs 5.50 2.5 ln
exp 0.217ln

U * k s
8.5 1 exp 0.217ln

6
(ks in m)
k s n 24.04
[eq 40]
[eq 41]
[eq 42]
The appropriate boundary condition for the free surface is harder to determine. Unfortunately there is very little experimental data available for turbulent statistics at the free surface
(Rodi, 1993). It is difficult to make such measurements because hot wire anemometers tend to
disturb the surface and laser Doppler anemometry systems, LDA, have issues with reflections and
refraction caused by the free surface (Swean et al., 1991). In many cases researchers have turned
to Direct Navier Stokes simulations for more information on the relationship between turbulent
kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation and the free surface (Swean et al., 1991, Cotton et al.,
2005).
A-82
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
A first approximation for the boundary conditions at the free surface in absence of a wind
induced shear is to use a symmetry plane where both turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation are found using a zero gradient condition (Rodi, 1993). However it is generally thought
that the presence of the free surface should reduce the length scale of turbulence and reduce the
turbulent dissipation. An attempt to take this into account was made in the empirically determined boundary conditions shown in equations 43 and 44 (Celik and Rodi, 1984).
k
0
y
[eq 43]
k 3/ 2
aH
[eq 44]
Where a is an empirical constant and H is the depth of the shear layer, in this case the depth of the
channel. The coefficient a was originally set to a value of 0.18 by Celik and Rodi (1984) and
then later changed to a value of 0.43 by Celik and Rodi (1988).
For a free surface with wind induced surface shear, the boundary conditions similar to
those used for wall boundaries are appropriate, equations 35, 37, and 38. The free surface can be
seen as a moving wall. So the bed friction velocity in equations 37 and 38 can be replaced with
the wind induced surface friction velocity (Rodi, 1993).
Rodi presented a set of boundary conditions that could be used for free surfaces with or
without wind induced surface shear in reference 4. When the wind induced surface shear is large
then the following boundary condition is used for turbulent kinetic energy.
U *2S
[eq 45]
When the surface shear is small, ks c U *2S , then the symmetry condition for turbulent kinetic
energy shown in equation 43 is used. Where U*S is the wind induced surface friction velocity. In
a similar fashion the turbulent dissipation boundary condition for a free surface with and without
wind induced surface shear was developed and is given in equation 46.
3/ 2
U *2s
y aH 1
k C
[eq 46]
The coefficient a was set to a value of 0.07 by Rodi in 1983. When surface shear is present equation 45 reduces to
U *3s
. When surface shear is not present equation 46 becomes
y
k 3/ 2
which is similar to equation 44 above.
y aH
The original CE-QUALW2 free surface boundary conditions are shown below
A-83
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
U
k
2
*s
3
*s
U *2boundary
C
U *3boundary
[eq 47]
[eq 48]
These are similar to the boundary conditions presented in equations 45 and 46 when wind induced shear is present. The only difference is that both the turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent
dissipation boundary conditions include an additional term for the friction velocity of the lateral
boundaries.
The initial conditions and inlet boundary conditions are specified by setting the eddy viscosity, turbulent kinetic energy, and turbulent dissipation terms to the following values.
t = 1.410-6
k = 1.2510-7
= 1.010-9
The outlet values of turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation are determined using a zero
gradient approach shown in equations 49 and 50.
k
0
x
0
x
[eq 49]
[eq 50]
This is done by setting the value of turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent dissipation at the outlet
cell equal to the value of the cell in the upstream segment.
Computations of k and compared to experimental data are shown in Gould (2006). The experimental data were taken from a uniform open channel experiment conducted by Nakagawa,
Neuzu, and Ueda (1975). The figures below show CE-QUAL-W2 model comparisons to the experimental data varying Mannings friction factor. As shown in Gould (2006), the number of vertical layers used in the model application was very important in being able to match experimental
laboratory data.
A-84
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Turbulent Dissipation
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
y/h
0.6
n = 0.009
n = 0.010
n = 0.012
Exp
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
0.0E+00
1.0E-04
2.0E-04
3.0E-04
4.0E-04
5.0E-04
6.0E-04
[m /s ]
2
Turbulent Kinetic Energy

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
n = 0.009
n = 0.010
n = 0.012
Exp
y/h
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
0.0E+00
1.0E-04
2.0E-04
2
3.0E-04
4.0E-04
k [m /s ]
Effect of Vertical Layer Numbers on Vertical Turbulence

In contrast to other riverine models that assume vertically well-mixed systems, CE-QUAL-W2
accounts for the vertical variation of velocity in a riverine reach. Even though there is an added
computational burden of computing the 2D velocity profile, the advantage of making this computation is that the friction factor (Manning's or Chezy) for a segment can be flow or stage invariant
depending on the number of vertical layers schematized.
A-85
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
Many 1D hydraulic flow models, such as CE-QUAL-RIV1 and UNET (Barkau, 1997), allow the
model user to specify how Mannings friction factor changes with depth. The Mannnings friction
factor, n, has been thought to vary as a function of depth, Reynolds number, and roughness factor
or scale of bed grain size (Ugarte and Madrid, 1994; Soong, et. el., 1995). Some of these formulations for variation of Manning's friction factor with hydraulic radius, R, are shown in Figure A-39:
Hydraulic radius, ft
8
7
Jarrett (1984) :
n 0.39S 0.38 R 0.16
Limerinos (1970 ) :
0.0926 R1/ 6
R
1.16 2 log
d 84
2
1
0
0.02
0.025
0.03
0.035
0.04
0.045
Manning's friction factor
0.05
0.055
0.06
0.065
Limerinos (1970)
Jarrett (1984)
Figure A-39. Variation of Manning's friction factor using formulae from Limerinos (1970)
and Jarrett (1984) for a channel slope, S, of 0.0005 and 84th pecentile diameter of the bed
material, d84, of 50.
Researchers understand that the friction factor, when representing a hydraulic element with uniform
roughness, should be flow invariant with depth (Henderson 1966). However, many assert that the
friction factor changes with depth because the friction coefficient is variable with the wetted perimeter. Some investigators reason that it is to be expected that at shallow depths the larger size of
the bed material produces a higher overall friction factor than a deeper flow where the sidewalls
may have a smaller friction.
Since most researchers used 1D, cross-sectionally averaged flow equations such as Mannings
Equation or 1D dynamic hydraulic models, this parameterization itself has been responsible for the
seeming variation of Mannings friction factor with depth. For example, all 1D hydraulic models
implicitly assume that the rate of transfer of momentum from the bottom of the channel to the top
is infinite. For these hydraulic models, even as the depth of the channel increases, they still assume
an infinite momentum transfer rate over the depth of the channel. Therefore, as the water depth
increases, the apparent friction factor must be reduced because of the assumption of infinite momentum transfer between the bottom and the surface.
However, in a longitudinal-vertical river model, Manning's friction factor does not have to vary
with stage in order to produce the effect that as the river stage increases, the apparent friction decreases. The water surface set-up changes significantly as the layer numbers increase. In general,
the water surface slope increases as the number of computational layers decreases. This is because
the average eddy viscosity in the water column increases as the number of layers decrease until at
A-86
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
the limit of a one-layer system, the average vertical eddy viscosity is infinite. The fact that the
Mannings friction factor seems to decrease with depth in 1D models is accounted for in modeling
the river channel as a 2D, longitudinal-vertical system.
Version 3 allows choosing between five different vertical eddy viscosity formulations. These formulations are shown in Table A-6. Typical variation of these formulations is shown in Figure
A-34 for Manning's friction factor for an open-channel, non-stratified flow regime as compared to
theory of steady, uniform channel flow.
The number of vertical layers significantly affects model predictions. For example, Figure A-40
shows a comparison of vertical velocity profiles from a model with one, three, and seven vertical
layers using the parabolic eddy viscosity model.
S=0.001, Q=2574 m3 s-1, n=0.03, PARAB
86
84
Elevation, m
82
80
3-layer
78
7-layer
1-layer
76
74
72
70
0
0.5
1.5
2.5
Velocity, m/s
Figure A-40. Comparison of vertical velocity predictions with one, three, and seven vertical
layers
Figure A-41 shows how the change in the number of vertical layers affects the water surface slope
over the domain length for a steady-state flow. In order to model the water surface slope of the 1layer model with the 7-layer model, the apparent value of Manning's friction factor would have to
be reduced. Hence, the apparent friction decreases as the number of layers increase.
A-87
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHEAR STRESS
CE-QUAL-W2 V3 has also been compared to the 1D models DYNHYD (Ambrose et al., 1988)
and CE-QUAL-RIV1 (Environmental Laboratory, 1995) by running W2 with only a single vertical
layer.
Q=2574 m3 s-1, S=0.0001, n=0.03
Elevation drop over 30 km distance, m
2.94
2.93
2.92
2.91
2.9
2.89
2.88
0
# of vertical layers
Figure A-41. Comparison of elevation drop of W2 model with one, three, and seven vertical
layers with same Manning's friction factor.
The average velocities between the three models agreed well with theory but the water surface
slopes are different. W2 predicts an elevation difference of 2.93 m, compared to 2.07 m for
DYNHYD and 2.05 m for RIV1 over 30 km for a flow of 2574 m3 s-1, a Mannings n of 0.03, a
slope of 0.001, and a channel width of 100 m. Based on steady-state theory, the actual difference
should be 2.9 m. Both the DYNHYD and RIV1 models require friction factors greater than expected to correspond to classical theory. This may be a result of these models not incorporating
sidewall friction that was important during these test runs where the depth was 15 m and the width
was 100 m.
A-88
SHEAR STRESS
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Longitudinal Shear Stress

The longitudinal turbulent shear stress is defined as
xx
U
U
t
Ax
x
x
(A-175)
where:
Ax = t = longitudinal eddy viscosity
Ax is a user-defined constant in the model. This turbulence closure approximation is termed a zeroorder closure model since no further equations are necessary to solve for the transmission of shear
stress within the fluid.
This term is usually of very low magnitude except in areas near boundaries such as at a dam face
where the longitudinal velocity goes to zero.
Hydraulic Structures
The model user can specify a pipe or culvert between model segments (Berger and Wells, 1999)
and uses a 1D, unsteady hydraulic submodel that computes the flow between the two linked segments. The model computes the selective withdrawal outflow from the upstream segment with the
model user specifying whether the inflow to the downstream segment is treated as mixed over the
depth, inflow depth is determined from inflow density, or inflow depth is specified between an
upper and lower elevation. The flow between an upstream segment and a downstream segment is
shown in Figure A-42.
downstream
branch
upstream
branch
computational
cells
Figure A-42. Schematic of linkage of model segments with a culvert.
This model is only appropriate for simple piping systems that are not suddenly under a large hydraulic head. The governing equations for computing the flow and the numerical solution technique
are shown below.
The governing equations used to predict flow through culverts are the 1D, time-dependent conservation of momentum and continuity equations (Yen, 1973).
A-89
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
u
u
h
u
g cos
g S o S f S m 0
t
x
x
(A-176)
h
h A u
u
0
t
x T x
(A-177)
where:
u
t
h
g
x
A
T
So
Sf
Sm
= velocity, m s-1
= time, s
= piezometric head, m
= gravitational acceleration, m2 s-1
= distance along axis of culvert, m
= cross-sectional area of culvert filled with water, m2
= width of water level surface, m
= angle between culvert axis and horizontal
= culvert slope
= friction slope.
= minor loss slope
The friction slope Sf is estimated using the Manning formula:
Sf
n2
R
uu
(A-178)
where:
n = Mannings roughness factor

R = hydraulic radius.
Minor losses due to entrance configuration, gates, valves, and corners are accounted for in the
minor loss term Sm:
Sm k
uu 1
2g L
(A-179)
where:
k = sum of minor loss coefficients

L = length
Pressurized or full culvert flow is modeled assuming a fictitious water surface width called a Preissmann slot (Yen, 1986). If the culvert is full, the surface width T is zero and the governing equations become singular. Using a Preissmann slot avoids having to switch between the open channel
and pressurized flow equations. The slot must be narrow enough to minimize error in the mass and
A-90
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
momentum balance but large enough to maintain numerical stability when solving the open channel
St. Venant equations. A top width of 0.5% of the diameter is assumed for culverts flowing full.
The advantages of using a Preissmann slot are (Yen, 1986):
1. uses only Saint-Venant equations and avoids switching between the surcharge equation and open-channel flow equations and avoids the associated separate treatment
of the boundary conditions
2. no need to define surcharge criteria
3. not necessary to keep inventory of the pipes that are surcharged at different times
4. permits the flow transition to progress computationally reach by reach in a sewer, as
in the open-channel case, and hence it can account for the situation when only part
of the length of the pipe is full
5. requires few additional assumptions than the standard approach to achieve numerical
stability
6. simpler to program
The disadvantages are:
1. introduces a potential accuracy problem in the mass and momentum balance of the
flow if the slot is too wide, and stability problems if it is too narrow
2. requires computation of two equations (continuity and momentum) for each of the
reaches of the sewer when the sewer is full surcharged, whereas in the standard surcharge computation only one equation is applied to the entire length of the sewer
3. hypothetical rather than real
The Preissmann slot concept has been applied to other models for surcharged flow including the
model described by Abbot (1982) and SWMM EXTRAN (Roesner et al. 1988).
The boundary condition used for solving the governing equations is the head or water level at each
end of the culvert. However, if the water level at the downstream end of the culvert is less than the
critical depth, the critical depth is used. Momentum is not transferred between model segments
and the culverts. Initial conditions are the calculated velocities and heads at the previous time step.
The governing equations cannot be solved analytically and an implicit finite difference scheme is
used to approximate the solution. The solution method employs the leap-frog scheme which
calculates the head and velocity at alternating computational nodes (Anderson, et. al., 1984). The
finite difference forms of the continuity and momentum equations are:
hin 1 hin
h n 1 h n 1
hn hn
A n u n 1 u n 1
uin i 2 i 2 ( 1 )uin i 2 i 2 in i 1 i 1
t
2x
2x
x
Ti
An u n u n
( 1 ) in i 1 i 1
x
Ti
(A-180)
A-91
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
uin 1 uin
u n 1 uin11
u n uin1
h n 1 hin 1
uin1 i 1
( 1 )uin1 i 1
g i2
t
x
x
x
n
n
2
2
h hi
n
n
( 1 )g i 2
g 4 uin11 uin1 ( 1 )g 4 uin1 uin1
x
R 3
R 3
(A-181)
k n 1 n
k
ui 1 ui 1 ( 1 ) uin1 uin1
L
L
where n refers to the time level and i references the spatial node (Figure A-43).
ui-1
ui
hi-2
ui+1
hi
hi+2
Figure A-43. Linkage schematic of model segments with a culvert.

Figure A-44 compares flow predictions using the dynamic culvert model with flow data taken
within a culvert at NE 47th bridge in the Upper Columbia Slough, Portland, Oregon. Data was
recorded using a flow meter placed directly in a culvert. The cyclical flows are the result of turning
pumps on and off at a downstream pump station. The culvert was calibrated by adjusting the minor
loss parameter.
data
dynamic flow algorithm
Flow Rate at NE 47th

29-Sep
1-Oct
3-Oct
5-Oct
7-Oct
9-Oct
11-Oct
13-Oct
15-Oct
30
0.8
25
0.7
0.5
15
0.4
0.3
10
Flow rate, m3 s-1
Flow rate, ft3 s-1
0.6
20
0.2
5
0.1
0
0.0
272
274
276
278
280
282
Julian Day
284
286
288
Figure A-44. Computed versus observed flow using dynamic culvert model.
A-92
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Internal Weirs
The model can be used to set internal weirs at specified cell locations. The user specifies the location of the internal weir by providing a segment and layer number. The weir effectively acts as a
barrier to flow and diffusion of mass/heat across the width of the waterbody as shown in Figure
A-45. This can be used to simulate submerged and curtain weirs within a waterbody.
Layer #
Segment #
Dam
Skimmer weir
Outflow
Submerged weir
Figure A-45. Schematic representation of internal weirs.

Water Level Control
Many times, outflows in reservoirs are controlled by water levels. In order to facilitate management
of the water body, a water level control algorithm was added to the code. Essentially, this is a pump
based on a float controller.
The algorithm allows the user to specify the upstream and downstream segment for water to be
transferred at a given flow rate based on the water level at the upstream segment. Reverse flow is
not allowed. The withdrawal is treated as a lateral selective withdrawal and the segment that receives the inflow is treated as a tributary.
Outlet Structures
Outflows through hydraulic structures (Figure A-46) can either be specified or computed by the
model based on user-supplied rating curves.
A-93
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Tainter gate
Spillway/weir
Figure A-46. Radial gates and spillway flow.

The UNET model (HEC, 1997a), a one-dimensional unsteady hydraulic model, formally accounts
for spillway flow from weirs and spillways. For free or submerged flow from a spillway with a
radial gate, UNET uses a general equation of the form:
Qsp CWA B H
(A-
182)
where:
= empirical coefficient
Qsp = flow rate, m3 s-1
A = trunnion height, m
B = gate opening, m
C = empirical coefficient
W = gate width, m
and
H Z u KZ d ( 1 K )Z sp
(A-183)
where:
Zu = headwater elevation
A-94
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Zd = tailwater elevation
K = 1 for submerged flow and 0 for free flow
Zsp = spillway elevation
This equation was developed based on rating curves for hydraulic control structures in Arizona.
Submergence is defined as:
Z d Z sp
Z u Z sp
(A-184)
2
3
Note that weir flow is assumed to occur whenever B = 0.8H and is computed as:
Qweir Cw FW (1 K ) Z u KZ d Z sp H 1 / 2
(A-185)
where:
Cw = weir coefficient
Z Z sp
F 31 d
Z u Z sp
when K = 1
F = 1 when K = 0
For a concrete spillway, HEC (1997a) suggests using a weir coefficient value of 4. Note that the
above two equations are considered equivalent whenever B = 0.8H.
HEC-RAS, a one-dimensional, steady-state hydraulic model, (HEC, 1997b), includes the ability to
model flow over spillways including tainter and sluice gates, broad-crested weirs, and an ogee crest.
Ineffective flow area, that area below the weir or gate opening, is used to block a part of the channel
until it reaches the level of a spillway or weir.
A summary of the equations used by HEC-RAS (HEC, 1997b) as well as explanations are shown
in Table A-7.
Table A-7. HEC-RAS flow rates through weirs and sluice gates.
Condition
Equation
Description
When the upstream water surface is 1.25 times the gate
opening height (above the spillway crest),
Q
C
W
T
Radial flow
gate, flowing
freely
Q C 2 g WT TE B BE H H E
B =
H =
Zu
Zd
Zsp
TE
BE
HE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
flow, cfs
discharge coefficient (between 0.6 and 0.8)
gated spillway width, ft
trunnion height (from spillway crest to trunnion
pivot point), ft
gate opening height, ft
upstream energy head above spillway crest, ZuZsp, ft
upstream energy grade line elevation, ft
downstream water surface elevation, ft
spillway crest elevation, ft
empirical trunnion height exponent, 0.16
gate opening coefficient, 0.72
head exponent, 0.62
A-95
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Condition
Equation
radial gate
flowing under
submerged
conditions
Q 3C 2 g WT TE B BE H H E
freely flowing
sluice gate
submerged
sluice gate
Description
opening height (above the spillway crest), whenever the
tailwater depth divided by the energy depth above the spillway is greater than 0.67
H = Zu-Zd
opening height above the spillway crest
Q C 2 gH WB
Q 3C 2 gH WB
H = upstream energy head above the spillway, Zu-Zsp

C = discharge coefficient, 0.5 to 0.7
opening height above the spillway crest, whenever the
tailwater depth divided by the energy depth above the spillway is greater than 0.67
H = Zu-Zd
When upstream water level is equal to or less than the top
of the gate opening, weir flow equation is used
Low flow
through gated
structure
Q CLH
3
2
C = weir coefficient, 2.6-4.0 depending on broad

crested or Ogee spillway and length of spillway
crest
H = upstream energy head above spillway crest, for an
Ogee spillway the value of C is adjusted according
to a 1977 Bureau of Reclamation study on variability of C for Ogee spillways, suggested values of
C are 2.6 for bridge decks and 3.0 for flow over elevated roadways
Spillways/Weirs
Analysis of flow over weirs has been studied extensively. Martin and McCutcheon (1999) show
that a typical relationship between the pool depth and flow over a weir is:
Q CeWc hw
(A-186)
where Ce and are empirical coefficients, Wc is the length of the weir crest, and hw is the height of
the pool above the weir crest. Theoretical calculations of steady-state flow over a weir can be
complex depending on whether the weirs are sharp-crested, broad-crested, V-notched, rectangular,
Cipolletti, parabolic, or some other type. Table A-8 shows some examples from French (1985)
and USBR (1999) on typical equations used for the different weir types. For many regular weir
types, formulae exist for accurate estimation of the flow. However, in most cases a rating curve
for a given installation is necessary because of the uncertainty of end effects, flow alignments,
shallowness in the upstream pool, and other unique features of the installation (Martin and
McCutcheon, 1999).
A-96
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Table A-8. List of weir types (French, 1985; USBR, 1999)
A-97
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Weir type
Weir Equation
Description
Valid when 0.08 <H/L<0.5
Q = flow rate
CD = disharge coefficient (0.84 to 1.06)
Cv = velocity coefficient accounting for neglecting
the velocity head in the approach channel (between 1.0 and
1.2)
W
=
gated spillway width, ft
W = width at surface
H = upstream head above spillway
crest
Zu
=
upstream energy grade line elevation, ft
g = gravity acceleration
HE
=
head exponent,
0.62
Rectangular
broad crested
weir
2
Q C D Cv
3
2
gWH 3 / 2
3
H1
=
total head upstream of the weir (energy + static
head)
L
=
weir block
length
W
=
weir width from edge to
edg
Cv
=
coefficient, 11.2
CD
=
A-98
coefficient, 0.85-1.06\
Weir type
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Weir Equation
Rectangular,
sharp crested
weir
Q Ce
Description
Where B = width at bottom of weir crest
Olson and Wright (1990) show that Ce depends on the
approach velocity head, V2/2g, and the contraction of
streamlines just beyond the weir crest and show that
Ce = 0.611+0.075*(H/Z)
H = weir head, ft
Z = weir crest head measured from the channel bottom, ft
2
2 g BH 3 / 2
3
Clay (1995) suggests a simple equation of Q=3.33BH3/2

of this form when approach velocities are less than 1
fps or Q=3.33B[(H+h)3/2-hv3/2]
hv = V2/2g
V = approach velocity, ft s-1
Parabolic,
broad-crested
Q C D Cv
Parabolic,
sharp-crested
Triangular,
broad-crested
Q Ce
Q C D Cv
3
fg H 2
4
f = distance from the bottom point of the weir to the

weir focal point, ft
fg H 2
Ce = effective discharge coefficient
16 2
g tan(0.5) H 5 / 2
25 5
= half angle of the triangular

notch
Triangular,
sharp-crested
8
Q Ce
2 g tan(0.5) H 5 / 2
25
angle of half of the triangular weir
Ce = function of notch angle and varies from 0.59 to

0.57 for angles between 20 and 100 degrees
W = top width of trapezoidal
weir
T
=
m = slope of trapezoidal weir
yc = depth of water at the weir
Trapezoidal,
broad-crested
Q C D (Wy c myc2 )2 g ( H yc )
1/ 2
top width
m
=
slope
yc
=
water surface elevation at the weir
H1
Trapezoidal,
sharp-crested
Truncated triangular, broadcrested
Q Ce
2
4
2 g ( B H tan 0.5) H
3
5
Q C D Cv
=
energy head upstream of the spillway
B= bottom width of trapezoidal
weir
1/ 2
2 2
gW ( H 0.5H b ) 3 / 2
3 3
= angle of the trapezoid at a convergence point of the 2

sides
Use when H > 1.25Hb, otherwise use equation for
broad crested triangular weir
Hb = depth from the bottom of the truncated triangular
weir to the top of the triangle and the beginning
of the rectangular section
A-99
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Weir type
Truncated triangular, sharpcrested
Cipoletti
Weir Equation
4
W
Q Ce
2g
( H 2.5 ( H H b ) 2.5 )
15
Hb
Q C D Cv
2
2 gWH 3 / 2
3
Description
Use when H > Hb, otherwise use equation for sharp
crested triangular weir
A modification of the contracted, rectangular, sharpcrested weir with a trapezoidal control section and
sides sloping outward with slopes of 4:1
W = top width of weir
CD0.63
Cv varies from 1 to 1.2 and is a function of CD and the
ratio of area upstream of the control section and at
the control section
a
Proportional or
sutro weir
Q C D B 2 ga H a
3
= height of the rectangular portion of the weir above the

base
B = bottom width of weir
a = distance from weir bottom to top of the rectangular
weir section
b
=
bottom width of sutro weir
CD
= coefficient, 0.597-0.619 for symmetrical Sutro weir,
0.625- 0.603 for unsymmetrical Sutro weir
Since all weirs in practice are calibrated and a head discharge relationship is usually determined,
the flow versus head relationship is used rather than an equation from Table A-8. The user must
then analyze the weir or spillway and input a relationship based on the weir or spillway geometry.
The model accepts equations in the form of a power function for freely flowing conditions:
Q 1h 1
(A-187)
Q 2 h 2
(A-188)
where:
1 = empirical parameter
h = Zu-Zsp
Zu = upstream head
Zsp = spillway crest elevation
and for submerged conditions
where:
A-100
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
h = Zu-Zd
Zu = upstream head
Zd = downstream head
Submerged conditions are defined when the tailwater depth over the upstream energy head (static
head and velocity head) is greater than 0.67 (HEC, 1997b). Even though negative flow rates are
possible using the second equation whenever Zd > Zu, these results should be used with caution
since rarely are rating curves done for reverse flow over a spillway. The user needs to ensure there
is a smooth transition between submerged flow conditions and free flowing conditions by proper
choice of model coefficients. The following discussion shows how to generate a smooth flow
transition from free flowing to submerged flow conditions (Figure A-47).
Head difference from upstream to tailwater, m
Free flow condition
Submerged flow condition
Reverse flow when tailwater elevation

greater than upstream elevation
-2
-3
-2
-1
Flow rate, m3 s-1

.
Figure A-47. Flow rate over a spillway or weir for submerged and free flowing conditions.
Consider the following weir flow condition in Figure A-48.
H1
H2
Hweir
A-101
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Figure A-48. Flow at a submerged weir.

In order to have a smooth transition, the two flows must be equal at the transition point. Using
H 2 H weir 0.67(h1
u2
) 0.67( H 1 H weir )
2g
(A-189)
and substituting the rating curves for free flow and submerged conditions and solving for 2 results
in:
1 H1 H weir
2
0.33
1
(A-190)
In many cases a weir can be set as the downstream boundary condition of a river. In CE-QUALW2, the user can specify the weir crest as the channel bottom elevation, such that the weir equation
is of the form:
Q 1 H 1
(A-191)
where H is the depth of the water at the weir. Setting this in the form of a stage-discharge relationship:
Q
H aQb
1
1
1
(A-192)
where a and b are empirical coefficients. Writting this equation in a form compatible with the stage
discharge relationship using the a and b coefficients,
1
1
1
H Q 1
1
1
(A-193)
Then the a and b coefficients become
A-102
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
1
a
1
b
1
1
(A-194)
(A-195)
or vice versa:
1 a
1
b
(A-196)
(A-197)
allows the user to set a weir-rating curve that reproduces the stage discharge relationship at a downstream boundary.
A dynamic weir or spillway crest elevation can also be used to simulate dynamic raising of flashboards. These are designated in the model as gates.
Gates
For a gated structure or sluice gate, a more complex rating curve is required based on the opening
and the head difference between the upstream and downstream condition (the spillway crest if free
flow and the tailwater elevation if submerged flow).
The following equation is used for freely flowing conditions:
Q 1h 1 B 1
(A-198)
where:
1 = empirical coefficient
h = Zu - Zsp
Zu = upstream head
Zsp = spillway crest elevation
A-103
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
and the following equation is used for submerged flow:
Q 2 h 2 B 2
(A-199)
where:
h = Zu - Zd
Zd = downstream head
B = gate opening, m
In defining these parameters, the user also has to generate a time series file with the gate opening
in m where a gate opening of 0 m is closed. Whenever the gate opening is equal to or greater than
0.8h, a weir equation is used with no functional dependency on the gate opening. In this case, a
rating curve must be supplied when the gate acts like a weir. Figure A-49 shows the flow rate
dependence on the gate opening.
4
Gate:Q=2B0.72h0.62
Weir:Q=1.75h1.5
Gate opening, BGATE, m
Free flow condition

weir flow
Gate flow equation
0
0
0.5
1.5
Flow rate, m3 s-1

Figure A-49. Flow rate variation with gate opening.
A-104
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
In some reservoir systems, an outlet valve is connected to the reservoir and a head-discharge relationship is used based on the gate opening or number of gate turns. In this case, the outlet level is
usually at a different elevation than the withdrawal elevation. The above gate formulation can still
be used if no reverse flow occurs through the needle valve. This situation is illustrated in Figure
A-50. In this case, the elevation of the outflow is required in addition to the elevation at which the
outflow is taken if a rating curve is used in the model. This use is described in the section on
changes to the control file.
Figure A-50. Selective withdrawal with outflow connected to a valve with a gate.
The user can insert weirs and/or spillways, specify connectivity to other model segments, and insert
the ratings curve parameters for each weir/spillway. The model treats each spillway, weir, or gate
as a selective withdrawal outflow and uses the selective withdrawal algorithm for determining water flow from each vertical layer adjacent to the structure. Inflows from hydraulic control structures
are treated as tributary inflows where the user must specify whether the inflow is placed according
to density, equally distributed between all vertical layers, or distributed between a given elevation
range.
Weir equations are used when gates are open and the open gate does not interfere with the flow
(when B 0.8h).
Gates can also be used to move flows around to different parts of the model domain different
branches. In that case the specification of gate openings are interpreted as specification of flow
rates.
A-105
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
LATERAL INFLOWS
Branch Momentum Exchange

Version 3 conserves longitudinal momentum at branch intersections (Figure A-51). The vector
component of velocity in the x-direction of the main channel, Ux, can be computed from the channel
orientations. The x-direction component is Ux=Ucos where U is the longitudinal velocity of the
tributary at the downstream segment that intersects the main branch and is the difference in the
angle between the main stem and tributary segments.
main
Uy
Ux
trib
N
Figure A-51. Schematic of branch connection.

The conservation of momentum about a control volume, the main stem segment, would result in an
additional source of momentum. Lai (1986) shows that the correction to the x-momentum equation
would be:
qBU x
(A-
200)
A-106
BRANCH MOMENTUM EXCHANGE
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
where:
q = lateral inflow per unit length
This arises from re-deriving the momentum equations and assuming that all the fluid entering the
segment is moving at the velocity Ux. The correction to the x-momentum equation is:
UB UUB WUB
g cos B
+
+
= gB sin g cos B
x dz
t
x
z
x
1 B xx 1 B x z
+
qBU x
x
z
side tributary
(A-201)
momentum
Lateral Inflows
Wells (1997) proposed accounting for the cross-shear as a result of the y component of the velocity
of a side branch in the computation of the vertical eddy viscosity. This was implemented by increasing the cross-shear velocity gradient. In Version 2, wind shear across the lateral axis of a
segment also increased the vertical mixing by affecting the computation of Az. Analogous to wind
shear, an additional side shear is included in the calculation of the vertical eddy viscosity:
2
l 2 U wy e-2 kz trib (-CRi )

e
=

+
Az
Az
2 z
(A-202)
where:
trib
fi 2
Uy
8
fi = is an interfacial friction factor, 0.01

Qin y
Uy
zx
in y
U br zB
Q
trib
Ubr = Ubrsin(main-branch)
z = inflow cell layer height
B = inflow cell width
x = inflow cell segment length
Qtrib = tributary flow rate assumed to be at right angles to the main channel
This side shear effect is only computed when the vertical mixing algorithm chosen by the user is
W2 or W2N.
A-107
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
HEAT EXCHANGE
Heat Exchange
Surface Heat Exchange
Surface heat exchange can be formulated as a term by-term process using the explicit adjacent cell
transport computation as long as the integration timestep is shorter than or equal to the frequency
of the meteorological data. Surface heat exchange processes depending on water surface temperatures are computed using previous timestep data and are therefore lagged from transport processes
by the integration timestep.
Term-by-term surface heat exchange is computed as:
H n = H s + H a + H e + H c - ( H sr + H ar + H br )
(A-203)
where:
Hn
Hs
Ha
Hsr
Har
Hbr
He
Hc
= the net rate of heat exchange across the water surface, W m-2
= incident short wave solar radiation, W m-2
= incident long wave radiation, W m-2
= reflected short wave solar radiation, W m-2
= reflected long wave radiation, W m-2
= back radiation from the water surface, W m-2
= evaporative heat loss, W m-2
= heat conduction, W m-2
The short wave solar radiation is either measured directly or computed from sun angle relationships
and cloud cover. The long wave atmospheric radiation is computed from air temperature and cloud
cover or air vapor pressure using Brunts formula. The right-hand terms are all water surface temperature dependent.
Water surface back radiation is computed as:
4
*
H br = ( T s + 273.15 )
(A-204)
where:
E = emissivity of water, 0.97
* = Stephan-Boltzman constant, 5.67 x 10-8 W m-2 K-4

Ts = water surface temperature, C
Like the remaining terms, it is computed for each surface layer cell on each iteration timestep.
A-108
HEAT EXCHANGE
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Evaporative heat loss is computed as:
H e = f(W) ( es - ea )
(A-
205)
where:
f(W) = evaporative wind speed function, W m-2 mm Hg-1

es = saturation vapor pressure at the water surface, mm Hg
ea = atmospheric vapor pressure, mm Hg
Evaporative heat loss depends on air temperature and dew point temperature or relative humidity.
Surface vapor pressure is computed from the surface temperature for each surface cell on each
iteration.
Surface heat conduction is computed as:
H c = C c f (W) ( T s T a )
(A-206)
where:
Cc = Bowen's coefficient, 0.47 mm Hg C-1

Ta = air temperature, C
Short wave solar radiation penetrates the surface and decays exponentially with depth according to
Bears Law:
H s (z) = (1 ) H s e
- z
(A-207)
where:
Hs(z) = short wave radiation at depth z, W m-2
= fraction absorbed at the water surface

= extinction coefficient, m-1
Hs = short wave radiation reaching the surface, W m-2

Aside from the problems of measuring meteorological data relative to a large waterbody and translating data from oftentimes distant weather stations, the most uncertain parameter in the surface
heat exchange computations is the evaporative wind speed function, f(W). Various formulations of
f(W) have been catalogued and examined in Edinger, et al. (1974). The different formulations result
from the empirical determination of f(W) for waterbodies of different size and shape with data from
different locations and averaged over different periods of time.
A-109
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
HEAT EXCHANGE
Evaporation
The model allows the user the freedom to include different evaporation formulations via a user
defined evaporation wind speed formula of the form
f ( W) = a + b W c
(A-208)
where:
f(W)
a
b
c
W
= wind speed function, W m-2 mm Hg-1

= empirical coefficient, 9.2 default
= empirical coefficient, 0.46 default
= empirical coefficient, 2 default
= wind speed measure at 2 m above the ground, m s-1
The function is used in computing both evaporative water and heat loss. The default values for a,
b, and c are the ones suggested in Edinger, et. al. (1974). The model assumes that the wind is
measured at a 2m height. The following equation converts b from any measurement height to 2 m:
b2 m c bz
(A-209)
where bz is b measured at z m and is the conversion factor between the wind at z and the wind at
2m using
2
ln
z0 1
W 2m
=
z
Wz
ln
z0
(A-210)
where:
W2m = wind speed at elevation 2 m, m s-1

Wz = wind speed at height z, m s-1
z0 = wind roughness height (this is a model input parameter from Version 3.6, typical values
include assuming 0.003 ft (0.001 m) for wind < 5 mph (2.3 m/s) and 0.015 for wind > 5
mph (2.3 m/s), range 0.0005 to 0.03 ft (0.00015-0.01 m), note that zo is in m as input to
the model)
The Ryan-Harleman (1974) formulation has also been included :
f( W z ) = a + bW z
A-110
(A-211)
HEAT EXCHANGE
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
where:
b = 4.1 W m-2 mm Hg-1 m-1 s-1

1/ 3
a = ( T sv - T av )
= 3.59 W m2 mm Hg C-1/3
1
e
T v = T 1 - 0.378 , K
p
p = 760 mm Hg
*
For the Lake Hefner model, a = 0 and b = 4.99 W m-2 mm Hg-1 m-1 s-1.
If the virtual temperature difference, Tv, is negative or less than that computed using the Lake Hefner model, f(W) reverts to the Lake Hefner evaporation model. Figure A-52 shows a comparison
of the Ryan-Harleman model with the models default formulation.
Adams et al. (1981) recommended that the Lake Hefner model be used for natural lakes (Table
A-9).
200
Ryan-Harleman formulation
Default W2 formulation afw=9.2, bfw=0.46, cfw=2
Lake Hefner Model
f(W), W/m2/mm Hg
160
120
80
40
0
0
12
16
20
Wind speed, m/s
Figure A-52. Comparison of the wind speed formualtion for Ryan-Harleman and W2
default (for Tair=15C, Tdew=-5C, Tsurface=25C).
Summaries of several evaporation formulations are shown below in Table A-9 as adapted from
Adams, et al. (1981).
A-111
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
HEAT EXCHANGE
Table A-9. Typical Evaporation Formulae for Lakes and Reservoirs

Time
Waterbody
f(W)
Lake
Hefner
3 hrs
and day
Lake Hefner, OK,

2587 acres
17.2W2(es-e2)
5.06W2
Kohler
day
17.5W2(es-e2)
5.14W2
Zaykov
(1.3+14W2) (es-e2)
0.1708+ 4.11W2
Name
Lake Hefner OK,

2587 acres
ponds and small
reservoirs
Meyer
month
small lakes and

reservoirs
Morton
month
Class A pan
Rohwer
day
pans, 85 ft dia
tank, 1300 acre
reservoir
e
W
e
W m-2
10 mb
=
=
=
=
=
(80+10W2) (es-e2)
10.512+2.94W2
(73.5+14.7W2) (es-e2)
9.658+4.32W2
(67+10W2) (es-e2)
8.8+2.94W2
Remarks
good agreement with
lake data from several
lakes in US and Russia
essentially the same as
Lake Hefner formula
based on Russian work
ea obtained daily from
mean morning and
evening measurements
of air temperature and
relative humidity
data from meteorological
stations, measurement
heights assumed
extensive pan measurements using different
pans, correlated with
tank and reservoir data
evaporation at sea-level with wind corrected to 2 m, BTU ft-2 day-1

wind, mph
vapor pressure, mm Hg
0.1314*BTU ft-2 day-1
7.5006151 mm Hg
Equilibrium Temperature
Since some of the terms in the term-by-term heat balance equation are surface temperature dependent and others are measurable or computable input variables, the most direct route is to define an
equilibrium temperature, Te, as the temperature at which the net rate of surface heat exchange is
zero.
Linearization of the term-by-term heat balance along with the definition of equilibrium temperature
allows expressing the net rate of surface heat exchange, Hn, as:
H aw = K a w ( T w T e )
(A-212)
where:
Haw
Kaw
Tw
Te
= rate of surface heat exchange, W m-2

= coefficient of surface heat exchange, W m-2 C-1
= water surface temperature, C
= equilibrium temperature, C
Seven separate heat exchange processes are summarized in the coefficient of surface heat exchange
and equilibrium temperature. The linearization is examined in detail by Brady, et al. (1968), and
Edinger et al. (1974).
The definition of the coefficient of surface heat exchange can be shown to be the first term of a
Taylor series expansion by considering the above equation as:
H aw =
A-112
dH a n
(T s T e)
dT s
(A-213)
HEAT EXCHANGE
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
where the derivative of Haw with respect to surface temperature is evaluated from equation A-191
to give Kaw, the coefficient of surface heat exchange. All approximations of the individual surface
heat exchange terms enter into the evaluation of the coefficient of surface heat exchange and the
equilibrium temperature.
The mass evaporation rate is computed by dividing evaporative heat loss by the latent heat of evaporation of water. Surface heat exchange always includes evaporative heat loss in the heat budget,
but the user may choose to exclude it in the water budget. For many reservoirs, inflow rates are
determined from storage estimates that implicitly include evaporation.
Sediment Heat Exchange
Sediment heat exchange with water is generally small compared to surface heat exchange and many
previous modelers have neglected it. Investigations on several reservoirs have shown the process
must be included to accurately reproduce hypolimnetic temperatures primarily because of the reduction in numerical diffusion that previously swamped the numerical solution. The formulation
is similar to surface heat exchange:
H sw = K sw ( T w T s )
(A-214)
where:
Hsw
Ksw
Tw
Ts
= rate of sediment/water heat exchange, W m-2

= coefficient of sediment/water heat exchange, W m-2 C-1
= water temperature, C
= sediment temperature, C
Previous applications used a value of 0.3 W m-2 C-1 for Ksw that is approximately two orders of
magnitude smaller than the surface heat exchange coefficient. Average yearly air temperature is a
good estimate of Ts.
Dynamic Shading
Solar Altitude and Azimuth
The declination angle, , is computed from Spencer (1971):
0.006918 0.399912 cos d 0.070257 sin d 0.006758 cos 2 d

(A-215)
0.000907 sin2 d 0.0022697 cos 3 d 0.001480 sin3 d
where:
2 JDi 1
365
JDi = Julian date integer value
A-113
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHADING
The local hour is calculated as:
HOUR 24 JDr JDi
(A-216)
where:

JDr = Julian date floating-point value
An equation of time, EQT, correction is needed to calculate the local hour angle. The equation of
time represents the difference between true and mean solar time due to seasonal variations in the
earths orbital velocity (DiLaura, D.L 1984) and is given as:
EQT 0.17 sin
4 JDi 80
2 JDi 8
0.129 sin
373
355
(A-217)
where:

The local hour angle, H, is calculated as:
2
24
24
HOUR Long 360 EQT 12
(A-218)
The solar altitude, Ao, is the angle of inclination of the sun relative to the horizon from an observer's
perspective as shown in Figure A-53.
A-114
SHADING
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Ao
Az
Figure A-53. Schematic of solar altitude, Ao, and azimuth, AZ

Ao is calculated from Wunderlich (1972):
Ao A sin sin lat *

sin cos lat *
cos cos H
180
180
(A-219)
The solar azimuth is the direction of the sun with respect to a North-South axis measured clockwise
from the North as shown in Figure A-54. The solar azimuth is computed as (Annual Nautical
Almanac, 2001):
Lat *
Lat *
sin cos
cos cos H sin
180
180
X
cos Ao
(A-220)
If X 1, X 1
If X 1, X 1
(A-221)
A A cos X
(A-222)
AZ 2 A
If H 0, AZ A
(A-223)
A-115
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHADING
After computing the solar altitude and azimuth, the impact of shading (Figure A-54) on short-wave
solar radiation is computed as follows.
ST
Sw
B/2
E
Cl
Figure A-54. Schematic of topographic and vegetative shading, solar altitude (0), and vegetation height (T) and their affect on shadow length.
Topographic Shading
The algorithm uses the position of the sun to determine which topographic inclination angle coincides with the direction of incoming solar radiation. The algorithm determines the closest two
inclination angles in the direction of the incoming solar radiation and uses them to linearly interpolate an inclination angle for the specific direction of the incoming solar radiation. The calculated
inclination angle is then used to determine if vegetative or topographic shading dominates at that
time. If the solar altitude is below the calculated topographic inclination angle, then topographic
shading dominates and the short wave solar radiation is reduced by 90% for complete shade. This
allows for 10% of the incoming solar radiation as a result of diffuse radiation even when in the
shade. If the solar altitude is above the calculated inclination angle, then vegetative shading dominates.
Vegetative Shading
If the topographic angle is less than the solar altitude, vegetative shade dominates and the algorithm
calculates the shading influence by determining how far the shadow extends over the water. Figure
A-55 and Figure A-56 show schematics of the azimuth angle, segment orientation and computed
shadow lengths. The tree shadow length, ST, is calculated using the tree height, T, and solar altitude,
A0, using Equation A-206. Then the length of the shadow cast over the water is calculated using
Equation A-207 where E is the distance between the tree and the edge of water and
segment orientation. The shadow length, SN, perpendicular to the edge of the water is then calculated using Equation A-208. Refer to Figure A-55 and Figure A-56 for diagrams showing the
distance calculated in Equations A-206 to A-208.
ST
A-116
T
tan A0
(A-224)
SHADING
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
S w ST
sin 0 A
S N SW sin 0 A
(A-225)
(A-226)
Simplifying Equations A-206 to A-208:
SN
T * sin( 0 A )
E
tan A0
(A-227)
A shading reduction factor is applied in cases where a model segment has potential shading along
only part of its segment length or the vegetation density is low. For example, if shade-producing
vegetation exists along only half the length of a segment and is 100% opaque, a shade reduction
factor of 0.5 is used. If shading is due to vegetation along only half of a segment with 80% opaqueness, a value of 0.4 is used.
The shade factor, sfact , is the shadow length perpendicular to the edge of the water, SN, multiplied
by the shade reduction factor, SRF, and divided by the segment width:
sfact SRF
SN
B
(A-228)
The amount of shade that should be applied to the incoming short wave solar radiation is calculated
as:
Shade 1 sfact
(A-229)
The short wave solar radiation [SRO] computed by the model is reduced by the shade variable:
SROnet SRO * Shade
(A-230)
A-117
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SHADING
N
o
Left Bank
ST
Sw
SN
Increasing
Segment #s
Right Bank
Figure A-55. Azimuth angle, AZ, and stream orientation, 0.

N
A
o -90
A-180
ST
(A-o 90)
Sw
SN
Increasing
Segment #s
E/cos(A-o-90)=E/sin(o-A)
Tree
N
A
Figure A-56. Relationship between azimuth, stream orientation, and shadow length.
A-118
SHADING
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Data Requirements
Topography and vegetation data are stored in a user-defined input file. An example input file is
shown in Appendix C. The file includes tree top elevations for both stream banks. The file also
includes the distance from the centerline of the river to the controlling vegetation and the shade
reduction factor (explained below) for both stream banks. The shade file has vegetation characteristics recorded by the left and right banks of the stream. The convention used for defining left or
right bank is dependent on looking downstream in the system, the Left Bank is on the left and the
Right Bank is to the right.
The shade algorithm reads in 18 topographic inclination angles surrounding each segment centerpoint. The inclination angles can be determined using topographical maps, Digital Elevation Models (DEM), or contour plots. The steepest inclination angle for each of the 18 locations surrounding
a segment should be selected since this angle will control the topographic shading. The first inclination angle is taken from directly North of a segment (orientation angle 0.0) and moves clockwise
to the East with increasing orientation angles around the segment in 20 increments.
How far away from the centerline of the river the topography should be analyzed will depend on
the system. Wide flat river systems will utilize longer distances for identifying influencing topography than a narrow river canyon. In addition, rather than restricting the code to orientation angles
only toward the south appropriate for the Northern hemisphere, using orientation angles that surround a segment allows the algorithm to be used in both the northern and southern hemispheres.
In addition, the user can specify dynamic shading reduction factors as a function of time. Usually,
these would correspond to the times for leaf growth and fall for deciduous trees.
The topography and vegetation information is first read in from the input file. Then, using the
segment orientation angle, 0, and the solar azimuth, A, the bank that has the sun behind it is
computed. The criteria used for determining the bank with the sun behind it was modified from
Chen (1996) because the segment orientation angle is determined differently in CE-QUAL-W2.
Table A-10 shows the criteria used in the model.
Table A-10. Criteria for determining sunward bank
Sunward
Bank
Left
Right
0 0 180
180 0 360
A 0 or A 0 180
0 A 0 180
0 180 A 0
A 0 or A 0 180
A-119
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SELECTIVE WITHDRAWAL
Ice Cover
Ice thickness, onset, and loss of ice cover play an important role in the heat budget of northern
waterbodies. At high latitudes, ice cover may remain until late spring or early summer and prevent
warming due to absorption of short wave solar radiation.
The ice model is based on an ice cover with ice-to-air heat exchange, conduction through the ice,
conduction between underlying water, and a "melt temperature" layer on the ice bottom (Ashton,
1979). The overall heat balance for the water-to-ice-to-air system is:
i L f
h
= h ai ( T i - T e ) - h wi ( T w - T m )
t
(A-231)
where:
i = density of ice, kg m-3

Lf = latent heat of fusion of ice, J kg-1
h/t = change in ice thickness (h) with time (t), m sec-1
hai = coefficient of ice-to-air heat exchange, W m-2 C-1
hwi = coefficient of water-to-ice heat exchange through the melt layer, W m-2 CTi = ice temperature, C
Tei = equilibrium temperature of ice-to-air heat exchange, C
Tw = water temperature below ice, C
Tm = melt temperature, 0C
The ice-to-air coefficient of surface heat exchange, hai, and its equilibrium temperature, Tei, are
computed the same as for surface heat exchange in Edinger, et al. (1974) because heat balance of
the thin, ice surface water layer is the same as the net rate of surface heat exchange presented
previously. The coefficient of water-to-ice exchange, hwi, depends on turbulence and water movement under ice and their effect on melt layer thickness. It is a function of water velocity for rivers
but must be empirically adjusted for reservoirs.
Ice temperature in the ice-heat balance is computed by equating the rate of surface heat transfer
between ice and air to the rate of heat conduction through ice:
h ai ( T i - T ei ) =
- ki( T i - T m )
h
(A-232)
where:
ki = molecular heat conductivity of ice, W m-1 C-1

When solved for ice temperature, Ti, and inserted in the overall ice-heat balance, the ice thickness
relationship becomes:
A-120
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
i L f h ( T M - T ei )
=
- h wi ( T w - T m )
h
1
t
+
ki
h ia
(A-233)
from which ice thickness can be computed for each longitudinal segment. Heat from water to ice
transferred by the last term is removed in the water temperature transport computations.
Variations in the onset of ice cover and seasonal growth and melt over the waterbody depend on
locations and temperatures of inflows and outflows, evaporative wind variations over the ice surface, and effects of water movement on the ice-to-water exchange coefficient. Ice will often form
in reservoir branches before forming in the main pool and remain longer due to these effects.
A second, more detailed algorithm for computing ice growth and decay has been developed for the
model. The algorithm consists of a series of one-dimensional, quasi steady-state, thermodynamic
calculations for each timestep. It is similar to those of Maykut and Untersteiner (1971), Wake
(1977) and Patterson and Hamblin (1988). The detailed algorithm provides a more accurate representation of the upper part of the ice temperature profile resulting in a more accurate calculation of
ice surface temperature and rate of ice freezing and melting.
The ice surface temperature, Ts, is iteratively computed at each timestep using the upper boundary
condition as follows. Assuming linear thermal gradients and using finite difference approximations, heat fluxes through the ice, qi, and at the ice-water interface, qiw, are computed. Ice thickness
at time t, (t), is determined by ice melt at the air-ice interface, ai, and ice growth and melt at the
ice-water interface, iw. The computational sequence of ice cover is presented below.
Initial Ice Formation
Formation of ice requires lowering the surface water temperature to the freezing point by normal
surface heat exchange processes. With further heat removal, ice begins to form on the water surface. This is indicated by a negative water surface temperature. The negative water surface temperature is then converted to equivalent ice thickness and equivalent heat is added to the heat source
and sink term for water. The computation is done once for each segment beginning with the icefree period:
0=
- T wn w C P w h
i L f
(A-234)
where:
0 = thickness of initial ice formation during a timestep, m
Twn = local temporary negative water temperature, C

h = layer thickness, m
w = density of water, kg m-3
Cpw = specific heat of water, J kg-1 C-1
i = density of ice, kg m-3
Lf = latent heat of fusion, J kg-1
A-121
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
SEDIMENT RESUSPENSION
Air-Ice Flux Boundary Condition and Ice Surface Temperature Approximation

The ice surface temperature, Ts, must be known to calculate the heat components, Hbr, He, Hc, and
the thermal gradient in the ice since the components and gradient all are either explicitly or implicitly a function of Ts. Except during the active thawing season when ice surface temperature is
constant at 0C, Ts must be computed at each timestep using the upper boundary condition. The
approximate value for Ts is obtained by linearizing the ice thickness across the timestep and solving
for Ts.
T
Ki
n-1
n
s
n
sn
n
+ Han
- Hbr (Tsn ) - He (Tsn ) - Hc (Tsn )
(A-
235)
H sn + H an - H br - H e - H c + qi = i L f
qi = K i
d ai
, for T s = 0 o C
dt
T f - T s (t)
(t)
(A-236)
(A-237)
where:
Ki = thermal conductivity of ice, W m-1 C -1

Tf = freezing point temperature, C
n = time level
= thickness of ice, m
qi = heat flux through ice, W m-2

Absorbed Solar Radiation by Water Under Ice
Although the amount of penetrated solar radiation is relatively small, it is an important component
of the heat budget since it is the only heat source to the water column when ice is present and may
contribute significantly to ice melting at the ice-water interface. The amount of solar radiation
absorbed by water under the ice cover may be expressed as:
- (t)
H ps = H s (1 - ALBi ) (1 - i ) e i
(A-238)
where:
Hps = solar radiation absorbed by water under ice cover, W m-2
Hs = incident solar radiation, W m-2
ALBi = ice albedo
i = fraction of the incoming solar radiation absorbed in the ice surface
i = ice extinction coefficient, m-1
A-122
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Ice Melt at Air-Ice Interface

The solution for Ts holds as long as net surface heat exchange, Hn(Ts), remains negative corresponding to surface cooling, and surface melting cannot occur. If Hn(Ts) becomes positive corresponding
to a net gain of heat at the surface, qi must become negative and an equilibrium solution can only
exist if Ts > Tf. This situation is not possible as melting will occur at the surface before equilibrium
is reached (Patterson and Hamblin, 1988). Because of a quasi-steady approximation, heat, which
in reality is used to melt ice at the surface, is stored internally producing an unrealistic temperature
profile. Stored energy is used for melting at each timestep and since total energy input is the same,
net error is small. Stored energy used for melting ice is expressed as:
i C p
T s (t)
(t) = i L f ai
2
(A-239)
where:
Cpi = specific heat of ice, J kg-1 C-1
ai = ice melt at the air-ice interface, m-1
Ice-Water Flux Boundary Condition Formulation

Both ice growth and melt may occur at the ice-water interface. The interface temperature, Tf, is
fixed by the water properties. Flux of heat in the ice at the interface therefore depends on Tf and
the surface temperature Ts through the heat flux qi. Independently, heat flux from the water to ice,
qiw, depends only on conditions beneath the ice. An imbalance between these fluxes provides a
mechanism for freezing or melting. Thus,
qi - qiw = i L f
d iw
dt
(A-240)
where:
iw = ice growth/melt at the ice-water interface

The coefficient of water-to-ice exchange, Kwi, depends on turbulence and water movement under
the ice and their effect on melt layer thickness. It is known to be a function of water velocity for
rivers and streams but must be empirically adjusted for reservoirs. The heat flux at the ice-water
interface is:
qiw = h wi T w (t) - T f
(A-241)
where:
Tw = water temperature in the uppermost layer under the ice, C

Finally, ice growth or melt at the ice-water interface is:
A-123
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
n
iw
T f - T ns
=
- h wi ( T nw - T f
K i
n-1
i L f
(A-242)
Freezing Temperature of Ice

In general, the temperature at which water freezes, Tf, is set to 0oC for fresh water. If the model is
set to SALT [See WTYPEC input], the freezing temperature is affected by the salinity. In the
model, when WTYPEC=SALT, the TDS state variable is in units of ppt and the equations used
for computing the freezing temperature are computed from the following equations:
For TDS < 35 ppt,
= 0.0545
For TDS > 35 ppt:
= 0.3146 0.0417 0.000166 2
Density
Accurate hydrodynamic calculations require accurate water densities. Water densities are affected
by variations in temperature and solids concentrations given by :
= T + S
(A-243)
where:
= density, kg m-3
T = water density as a function of temperature, kg m-3
S = density increment due to solids, kg m-3
A variety of formulations has been proposed to describe water density variations due to temperatures. The following relationship is used in the model (Gill, 1982):
T = 999.8452594 + 6.793952 x 10 -2 Tw
w
9.095290 x 10 - 3 T 2w + 1.001685 x 10 - 4 T 3w
1.120083 x 10 T + 6.536332 x 10 x T
-6
4
w
-9
(A-244)
5
w
Suspended and dissolved solids also affect density. For most applications, dissolved solids will be
in the form of total dissolved solids. For estuarine applications, salinity should be specified. The
effect of dissolved solids on density is calculated using either of these variables with the choice
specified by the variable [WTYPE]. Density effects due to total dissolved solids are given by Ford
and Johnson (1983):
TDS = (8.221 x 10 -4 - 3.87 x 10 -6 T w + 4.99 x 10 -8 T 2w ) TDS
(A-
245)
A-124
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
where:
TDS = TDS concentration, g m-3
and for salinity (Gill, 1982):
sal = (0.824493 - 4.0899 x 10-3 T w + 7.6438 x 10-5 T 2w

- 8.2467 x 10-7 T 3w + 5.3875 x 10- 9 T 4w ) sal
+ (-5.72466 x 10-3 + 1.0227 x 10-4 T w
(A-246)
-4
2
- 1.6546 x 10-6 T 2w ) 1.5
sal + 4.8314 x 10 sal
where:
sal = salinity, kg m-3

The suspended solids effects are given by Ford and Johnson (1983):
ss = ss 1 x 10 -3
SG
(A-
247)
where:
ss = suspended solids concentration, g m-3
SG = specific gravity of suspended solids
Assuming a specific gravity of 2.65, the above relationship is simplified to:
ss = 0.00062 ss
(A-248)
s = ( sal or tds ) + ss
(A-249)
The total effect of solids is then:
Selective Withdrawal
The latest verson includes selective withdrawal for all outflows where layer locations and outflows
at each layer are calculated based on the total outflow [QOUT], structure type [SINKC], elevation
[ESTR], and computed upstream density gradients. The selective withdrawal computation uses
these values to compute vertical withdrawal zone limits and outflows. It also sums the outflows
for multiple structures.
A-125
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Outflow distribution is calculated in the subroutine SELECTIVE_WITHDRAWAL. This routine

first calculates limits of withdrawal based on either a user specified point or line sink approximation
for outlet geometry [SINKC]. The empirical expression for point sink withdrawal limits is:
d = ( c bi Q/N )0.3333
(A-250)
d = ( c bi 2 q/N )0.5
(A-251)
and for a line sink:
where:
d
Q
N
q
cbi
= withdrawal zone half height, m

= total outflow, m3 s-1
= internal buoyancy frequency, Hz
= outflow per unit width, m2 s-1
= boundary interference coefficient
The width is the outlet width. The point sink approximation assumes approach flow is radial both
longitudinally and vertically while the line sink approximation assumes flow approaches the outlet
radially in the vertical. The boundary interference coefficient is two near a physical boundary and
one elsewhere.
Velocities are determined using a quadratic shape function:
( k - o )
Vk=1 -
( l - o )
(A-252)
where:
Vk = normalized velocity in layer k
k = density in layer k, kg m-3
o = density in the outlet layer, kg m-3

l = density of the withdrawal limit layer, kg m-3
The shape function generates a maximum velocity at the outlet level with velocities approaching
zero at withdrawal limits. During non-stratified periods, outflow from top to bottom is uniform.
Uniform flows also result from large outflows during periods of mild stratification. As stratification develops, withdrawal limits decrease and outflow is weighted towards the outlet elevation.
Withdrawal limits can be varied by specifying a line sink and changing the effective width. Small
outlet widths result in nearly uniform outflows, while large widths limit outflows to the outlet layer.
A-126
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Sediment Resuspension
This algorithm is based on work from Kang et al. (1982) where the bottom shear stress is computed based on wind speed, wind fetch and depth. The wind blowing across a water surface creates wind waves that have orbital motion that decays with depth. The model user inputs a critical
shear stress for detachment of the particles. If the critical shear stress is exceeded, then particles
are resuspended. The approach of Kang et al. (1982) consists of the following steps:
1. Computation of the wave height, Hs in m,
0.42
gF
0.0125 2
0.75
W2
W
gH
Hs
0.283 tanh 0.53 2 tanh
0.75
g
tanh 0.53 gH
2
(A-253)
where W is the wind velocity (m/s), F is the fetch (m), H is the mean depth (m)
2. Computation of wave period, Ts in s,
0.25
gF
0.077 2
0.375
2W
W
gH
Ts
1.2 tanh 0.833 2 tanh
0.375
g
tanh 0.833 gH
2
(A-254)
3. Computation of the wavelength, L in m, iteratively from the following equation:
gTs2
2H
tanh
2
L
(A-255)
4. Computation of the orbital velocity, U in cm/s,
H s
100
Ts sinh(2H / L)
(A-256)
5. Computation of bottom shear stress, in dynes/cm2,
0.003U 2
(A-257)
6. Computation of actual bottom scour rate of suspended solids, in mass of sediments

scoured per area or g/m2,
Appendix B Water Quality
GENERIC
KINETICS
0 c
o
t
2
d
c 3 c
(A-258)
(A-259)
where o is an empirical constant=0.008, td=7, and c is the user-defined critical shear stress in
dynes/cm2. Resuspension supposedly only occurs during the first hour of the wind shear greater
than the critical shear stress. Hence, the rate of resuspension per time, E in g/m2/hour, would be
1hr
for the first hour and nothing after that. The resulting concentration of suspended solids
in the entire water column, c in mg/l, if distributed evenly over the entire volume would then be
10000Abottom 10000
.
V
H
where Abottom is the surface area of the bottom and V is the volume of the water column above the
bottom (=HAbottom). Chapra (1997) also uses this approach and provides an example calculation.
B128

The constituent transport relationships described in Appendix A compute the transport of constituents with their kinetic reaction rates expressed in source and sink terms. All sources/sinks (both
internal and external) for water temperature are contained in the array [TSS]. The sources/sinks
for constituents are separated into two arrays, [CSSB] and [CSSK]. [CSSB] contains boundary
sources/sinks. [CSSK] contains internal sources/sinks due to kinetic interactions. The division of
terms allows kinetic sources/sinks to be updated at different frequencies than boundary
sources/sinks - consistent with coarser time scales associated with biological and chemical processes as opposed to hydrodynamics. Computational time is also reduced. The frequency at which
kinetic sources/sinks [CSSK] are updated is specified by the parameter [CUF].
The source/sink term [CSSK] represents a mass rate of change (grams sec-1) of a constituent due to
kinetic reactions where concentrations are expressed as grams meter-3. The kinetic reactions can
be depicted graphically by considering each constituent as a compartment. Arrows represent mass
transfer rates between compartments, with a source represented by a blue arrow leading to the
compartment and a sink by a red arrow leading away. All of the rate terms in the following discussion are in units of sec-1 and these are the units used in the code. However, all rate units input into
the model from the control file are in units of day-1 and are then converted to sec-1 before being
used in the code. Both graphical and mathematical descriptions of the rate equation for each constituent are provided.
Overview of Kinetic Source/Sink Term

In order to solve the 2D advection-diffusion equation, the source/sink term, S, must be specified.
The model solves for temperature and a user specified number of water quality variables. Water
quality state variables along with their kinetic source/sink terms are shown in Table B-11. The user
can specify any number of generic constituents [NGC], suspended solids groups [NSS], CBOD
groups [NBOD], algal groups [NAL], macrophyte groups [NMC], zooplankton groups [NZP], and
epiphyton groups [NEP].
B-1
OVERVIEW
KINETICS
Table B-11. CE-QUAL-W2 Water Quality State Variables
Constituent
Total dissolved solids
generic constituent, no interactions with other state variables
bacteria
tracer
water age
contaminants
Inorganic suspended solids
bioavailable P measured as one
of the following
ortho-P
dissolved P
SRP
ammonium
Internal Source
Internal Sink
0 order decay
settling
0 and 1st order decay
sedimentation
algal/epiphyton respiration
labile/refractory particulate/dissolved organic matter
sediment release
CBOD decay
sediment release
algal/epiphyton/macrophyte excretion
labile/refractory dissolved/ particulate organic matter decay
CBOD decay
nitrate-nitrite
nitrification
dissolved silica
anoxic sediment release

particulate biogenic silica decay
particulate biogenic silica
algal/epiphyton mortality
Iron
anoxic sediment release

algal/epiphyton/macrophyte
mortality
excretion
labile dissolved organic matter decay
algal/epiphyton/macrophyte mortality
labile particulate organic matter decay
mortality
excretion
mortality
excretion
labile dissolved organic matter

refractory dissolved organic
matter
labile particulate organic matter
refractory particulate organic
matter
Total P in labile dissolved organic matter
Total P in refractory dissolved
organic matter
Total P in labile particulate organic matter
Total P in refractory particulate
organic matter
Total N in labile dissolved organic matter
Total N in refractory dissolved
organic matter
Total N in labile particulate organic matter
Total N in refractory particulate
organic matter
CBOD
CBOD-P (Total P in organic
matter represented by CBOD)
CBOD-N (Total N in organic
matter represented by CBOD)
algae
algal/epiphyton growth
adsorption onto inorganic suspended solids
algal/epiphyton/macrophyte growth
nitrification
denitrification
algal/epiphyton/macrophyte growth
adsorption onto suspended solids
settling
decay
oxic water column settling
Decay
Decay
settling
decay
settling
decay
Decay
Decay
settling
decay
settling
decay
Decay
Decay
settling
decay
settling
decay
decay, settling
decay, settling
decay, settling
algal growth
respiration
excretion
mortality
settling
B-2
KINETICS
GENERIC
Constituent
Internal Source
Epiphyton
epiphyton growth
zooplankton
zooplankton growth
macrophytes
macrophyte growth
dissolved oxygen
surface exchange
total inorganic carbon
labile/refractory dissolved/ particulate organic matter decay

sediment release
surface exchange
algal respiration
surface exchange
CBOD decay
settling of algae, LPOM, RPOM, epiphyton burial
decay, focusing of sediments
alkalinity
Sediment (1st order sediment
model)
Internal Sink
respiration
excretion
mortality
settling
transport
settling
excretion
mortality
respiration
mortality
excretion
surface exchange
algal/epiphyton/macrophyte/zooplankton respiration
nitrification
CBOD decay
0 and 1st order SOD
labile/refractory dissolved/ particulate organic
matter decay
In addition to these water quality state variables, the model also solves for pH and the carbonate
cycle (CO2, HCO3, H2CO3) as part of the set of derived water quality variables.
Generic Constituent
Any number of generic constituents [NGC] can be defined that can settle and decay. The user supplies a zero and/or 1st order decay coefficient with or without an Arrhenius temperature dependence
function, and/or a settling velocity. Generic constituents do not interact with the hydrodynamics
nor any other water quality state variables.
Generic Constituent
decay
settling
system loss
Figure B-1. Internal flux for generic constituent compartment.
Referring to Figure B-1, the source/sink term for a generic constituent is:
B-3
COLIFORM BACTERIA
KINETICS
g
( T - 20)
( T - 20)
S g K0 g
K 1 g
g g

0-order decay
1st -order decay
(B-1)
settling
where:
g = temperature rate multiplier

T = water temperature, C
g = settling velocity, m s-1
K0 = zero order decay coefficient, g m-3 s-1 at 20oC

K1 = first order decay coefficient, s-1 at 20oC
g = generic constituent concentration, g m-3
A conservative tracer, coliform bacteria, and water age are some of the state variables that can be
modeled using the generic constituent and are described further below.
Conservative Tracer
A conservative constituent is included to allow dye study simulations, movements of conservative
materials through the waterbody, and as an aid in calibrating and testing flow regimes. As a conservative material, this constituent has no internal sources or sinks and the rate term [CSSK] is set
to zero.
S tracer 0
(B-2)
Coliform Bacteria
Coliform bacteria is commonly used as an indicator of pathogen contamination. Safety standards
and criteria for drinking and recreational purposes are based upon coliform concentrations. Predictions of coliform bacteria are important because of their impact on recreation and water supply.
Coliform Bacteria
decay
settling
system loss
Figure B-2. Internal flux for coliform bacteria.

Total coliform, fecal coliform, fecal streptococci, and/or any other type of bacteria that do not interact with other state variables can be simulated with this generic constituent formulation. Referring to Figure B-2, the rate equation for coliform bacteria is:
B-4
KINETICS
GENERIC
col
( T - 20 )
Scol =
K col
col col
1st - order decay
(B-3)
settling
where:
= temperature factor (Q10)
Kcol = coliform mortality rate, sec-1 at 20oC

col = coliform concentration, g m-3
The Q10 formulation arises from a doubling of the reaction rate with each 10C increase in temperature. This doubling rate has not been found at lower temperatures (Hargrave 1972b) and is quite
variable for various reactions (Giese 1968). Modeling coliform bacteria is discussed in detail in
Zison, et al. (1978).
Water Age or Residence time

Setting the zero-order decay rate to 1 day-1 and zeroing out all other generic constituent kinetic
parameters results in a state variable that increases by 1 day-1, which is an exact representation of
water age or hydraulic residence time. This is a very useful state variable when looking at hydrodynamics.
S age 1 day-1
(B-4)
An example of water age for a reservoir in Washington, USA is shown below.
Figure 3. Water age in Chester Morse Lake, WA.
B-5
LABILE DOM
KINETICS
Inorganic Suspended Solids

Inorganic suspended solids [ISS] are important in water quality simulations because of their influence on density, light penetration, and nutrient availability. Increased solids concentrations reduce
light penetration in the water column thus affecting temperature that in turn affects biological and
chemical reaction rates. Dissolved phosphorus and silica concentrations can also be affected by
solids through sorption and settling. Light and nutrient availability largely control algal production.
The settling velocity of each inorganic suspended solids compartment is a user-defined parameter.
Usually this is determined from Stokes settling velocity for a particular sediment diameter and
specific gravity. Any number of inorganic suspended solids groups can now be modeled.
Silica
Phosphorus
sorption
Inorganic Suspended Solids

settling
system loss
Figure B-4. Internal flux for inorganic suspended solids.
Referring to Figure B-4, the rate equation for inorganic suspended solids is:
S ISS ISS
ISS
z
(B-5)
where:
ISS
ISS
= layer thickness, m
= settling velocity, m sec-1
= inorganic suspended solids concentration, g m-3
In the finite difference representation of suspended solids concentrations, solids settling from layer
[K]-1 serve as a source for the layer below it [K]. No provision is made to accumulate inorganic
solids or allow resuspension in the sediments. A later version of the model will include these
processes in a sediment transport compartment. Lateral averaging results in homogeneous solids
concentrations laterally. In reality, concentrations generally decrease with distance away from the
dominant flow path. This effect is not included. The rate term for inorganic suspended solids is
evaluated in the subroutine SUSPENDED_SOLIDS.
B-6
KINETICS
REFRACTORY POM
Total Dissolved Solids or Salinity

Total dissolved solids (TDS) affect water density and ionic strength, thereby affecting water movements, pH, and the distribution of carbonate species. Dissolved solids are normally expressed as
TDS in freshwater applications. Estuarine applications normally use salinity. Either TDS or salinity can be used with the choice indicated by the parameter [WTYPEC] specified in the control file.
The choice is then reflected in the computation of density and ionic strength. If TDS is used, the
units are g m-3, while salinity is kg m-3. It is important to keep in mind TDS and salinity are not
equivalent - salinity is conservative while TDS is not. In the model, however, both are treated
conservatively with the rate term set to zero.
Labile DOM
Because of the importance of dissolved oxygen in aquatic systems, all constituents exerting an
oxygen demand must be included in kinetic formulations. This demand is often measured in rivers
as the biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), which includes microbial respiration and metabolism
of various organic and inorganic compounds. However, production of these materials occurs as
well as decomposition, requiring the major components of BOD be modeled individually. One of
these constituents is dissolved organic matter (DOM), which is composed of labile and refractory
components. DOM is modeled as two separate compartments because of the different decomposition rates of the two groups.
Macrophytes
Epiphyton
Inorganic C
excretion mortality
Algae
mortality
excretion
Phosphate
Labile DOM
decay
Ammonium
decay
RDOM
Dissolved Oxygen
Figure B-5. Internal flux between labile DOM and other compartments
Referring to
B-7
LABILE POM
KINETICS
Figure B-5, the rate equation for labile DOM is:
S LDOM K ae a (1 Pam ) K am a K ee e

algal excretion
algal mortality
epiphyton excretion
(1 Pem ) K em e OM K LDOM LDOM K L R LDOM (1 Pmm ) K mm macro

labiole DOM decay
epiphyton mortality
labile to refractory
DOM decay
macrophyte mortality/excretion
(B-6)
where:
Pam = pattern coefficient for algal mortality

Pem = pattern coefficient for epiphyton mortality
Pmm = partitioning coefficient for macrophyte mortality
OM
= temperature rate multiplier for organic matter decay

Kae = algal excretion rate, sec-1
Kam = algal mortality rate, sec-1
Kee = epiphyton excretion rate, sec-1
Kem = epiphyton mortality rate, sec-1
Kmm = macrophyte mortality rate, sec-1
KLDOM = labile DOM decay rate, sec-1
KLR = labile to refractory DOM transfer rate, sec-1
a = algal concentration, g m-3
e = epiphyton concentration, g m-3
LDOM = labile DOM concentration, g m-3
macro = marophyte concentration, g m-3
Refractory DOM
Refractory DOM is composed of compounds in the aquatic environment that slowly decompose
exerting oxygen demand over long periods. Internally, refractory DOM is produced from the decomposition of labile DOM.
Labile DOM
decay
Inorganic C
Phosphate
Refractory DOM
Dissolved Oxygen
decay
Ammonium
decay
Figure B-6. Internal flux between refractory DOM and other compartments.
B-8
KINETICS
REFRACTORY POM
Referring to Figure B-6, the rate equation for refractory DOM is:
S RDOM =
K L
R LDOM OM K RDOM RDOM
DOM decay
(B-7)
decay
where:
OM = temperature rate multiplier

KRDOM
KLR
LDOM
RDOM
= refractory DOM decay rate, sec-1

= transfer rate from labile DOM, sec-1
= labile DOM concentration, g m-3
= refractory DOM concentration, g m-3
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine REFRACTORY_DOM.
Labile Particulate Organic Matter

Labile particulate organic matter (LPOM) represents particulate organic material in the water column. When decaying, particulate organic matter is a source of refractory particulate organic matter,
nitrogen, phosphorus, and inorganic carbon. A stoichiometric relationship is used for mineralization of ammonium, phosphorus, and inorganic carbon, and an oxygen demand is exerted as LPOM
decomposes. When LPOM settles to the bottom, it accumulates and decays in the sediment compartment if the 1st order sediment compartment is included in the simulation.
Refractory POM
Macrophytes
decay
Algae
Inorganic C
mortality
Phosphate
Labile POM
Epiphyton
decay
mortality
Dissolved Oxygen
decay
Ammonium
settling
Sediment
Figure B-7. Internal flux between Labile POM and other compartments.
B-9
CBOD
KINETICS
Referring to Figure B-7, the rate equation for LPOM is:
S LPOM = Pam K am a Pem K em e K LPOM OM LPOM

algal mortality
epiphyton mortality
decay
K LR LPOM POM LPOM Pmm K mm macro
z
macrophyte
mortality
POM decay
(B-8)
settling
where:
Pam = partition coefficient for algal mortality

Pem = partition coefficient for epiphyton mortality
Pmm = partition coefficient for macrophyte mortality
OM = temperature rate multiplier for organic matter

POM = POM settling rate, m sec-1
KLPOM
KLR
a
e
macro
LPOM
= labile POM decay rate, sec-1

= transfer rate from labile POM to refractory POM, sec-1
= algal concentration, g m-3
= epiphyton concentration, g m-3
= marophyte concentration, g m-3
= detritus concentration, g m-3
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine POM. POM settling and accumulation in the sediment compartment is handled identically to the algal compartment.
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter

Refractory POM is slowly decaying non-living, organic matter that settles. The source/sink terms
are first order decay, the conversion of LPOM to RPOM, and sedimentation:
B-10
KINETICS
REFRACTORY POM
Labile POM
decay
Inorganic C
decay
Dissolved Oxygen
Refractory POM
Phosphate
decay
Ammonium
settling
Sediment
Figure B-8. Internal flux between refractory POM and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-8, the rate equation for labile POM is:
RPOM
S RPOM =
K L
R
LPOM
RPOM
RPOM
RPOM
OM
decay
POM decay
(B-9)
settling
where:

KLR = transfer rate from labile POM to refractory POM, sec-1
KRPOM = refractory POM decay rate, sec-1
POM = POM settling velocity, m/sec-1
LPOM = labile POM concentration, g m-3

RPOM = refractory POM concentration, g m-3
Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand

(CBOD)
Any number of CBOD groups with varying decay rates can be modeled allowing the user to more
accurately characterize various CBOD sources to the prototype. Additionally, different CBOD
sources can be tracked separately in the model to determine what affect they have at different locations in the system.
Care must be taken when including CBOD in the simulation to ensure that CBOD, DOM, POM,
and algal biomass are properly accounted for. CBOD is typically specified as allochthonous inputs
and the forms of autochthonous organic matter are kept track of in the various organic matter compartments. This ensures that no double dipping occurs. This group can also model dissolved or
B-11
CBOD
KINETICS
particulate CBOD by specifying a zero or a finite settling velocity, respectively, for the group. The
settled CBOD goes into the 1st order sediment compartment.
In Version 3.6 and earlier, Figure B-9 described the CBOD cycle with fixed stocihiometry of the
CBOD in terms of C:N:P. Starting with Version 3.7, code changes were made such that for each
CBOD group, the nitrogen and phosphorus corresponding to the CBOD group were modeled as
separate constituents. One can still though use the V3.6 and earlier fixed N and P stoichiometry for
the BOD groups if one wishes. CBOD-C though is still based on a fixed C stoichiometry.
Inorganic C
Phosphate
CBOD
decay
Ammonium
decay
Dissolved
Oxygen
Settling
Figure B-9. Internal flux between CBOD and other compartments in Version 3.6 and earlier.
The following figure illustrates the CBOD cycle for Version 3.7 and later.
Inorganic C
CBOD
decay
decay
Dissolved
Oxygen
Settling
later.
The rate equation for CBOD is:
B-12
KINETICS
CBOD
R
S CBOD = T 20 K BOD RBOD CBOD CBOD BOD CBOD
decay
(B-10)
settling
where:
= BOD temperature rate multiplier

T = temperature, C
CBOD = CBOD settling velocity, m/sec-1

KBOD = CBOD decay rate, sec-1
RBOD = CBOD conversion from input CBOD to CBOD-ultimate (CBODu)

BOD = CBOD concentration, g m-3
Note that the user can enter CBOD5 or CBOD10 or whatever into the CE-QUAL-W2 model. The
RBOD term converts to CBODu internally in the model. The model though will output CBOD5 if
you entered CBOD5 as input - not CBODu. If you use CBODu as the input CBOD, then RBOD=1
and the output would be CBODu.
Typical determination of RBOD is based on the following standard CBOD equation:
RBOD
CBODu
1
where t is the time (5 days, for example) and CBODt is

CBODt 1 exp K BODt
the CBOD at that time.

- Phosphorus (CBODP)
The phosphorus associated with a specific CBOD group is modeled as a separate constituent.
Sources and sinks for carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand - phosphorus (CBODP) are
shown in Figure 11.
B-13
CBOD
KINETICS
CBODP
Phosphate
decay
Settling
Figure 11. Internal flux between CBODP and other compartments.
The rate equation for CBODP is:
CBODP
T 20
SCBODP =
K
BOD CBODP CBOD
decay
settling
where:

T = temperature, C
CBOD = CBOD settling velocity, m/sec-1

CBODP= CBODP concentration, g m-3

- Nitrogen (CBODN)
The nitrogen associated with a specific CBOD group is modeled as a separate constituent.
Figure 12 shows the CBODN sources and sinks.
B-14
KINETICS
CBOD
CBODN
Ammonium
decay
Settling
Figure 12. Internal flux between CBODN and other compartments.
The rate equation for CBODN is:
CBODN
T 20
SCBODN =
K
BOD CBODN CBOD
decay
settling
where:

T = temperature, C
CBOD = CBOD settling velocity, m s-1

CBODN=CBODN concentration, g m-3
Algae
Typically, the algal community is represented as a single assemblage or is broken down into diatoms, greens, and cyanobacteria (blue-greens). However, the current formulation now gives the
user complete freedom in how many and what kinds of algal groups can be included in the simulation through careful specification of the kinetic rate parameters that define the characteristics of
each algal group.
B-15
ALGAE
KINETICS
Zooplankton
photosynthesis
mortality
excretion
Labile DOM
mortality
Labile POM
grazing
Dissolved Oxygen
Algae
photosynthesis
settling
Inorganic C
respiration
Ammonium
Sediment
Phosphate
Silica
Figure B-13. Internal flux between algae and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-13, the rate equation for each algal group is:
a
S a = K ag a
K
ar a K ae a K am a a

respiration
excretion
mortality
growth
settling
a lg a
Z zoo
a
lpom zoo
zoo
a lg
pom
(B-11)
net loss to grazing
where:
z = cell height
Z = net growth rate of a zooplankton species
= zooplankton grazing preference factors
= algal growth rate, sec-1

= algal dark respiration rate, sec-1
= algal excretion rate, sec-1
= algal mortality rate, sec-1
a = algal settling rate, m sec-1
Kag
Kar
Kae
Kam
Chlorophyll a (chl a) is most commonly available as an estimate of algal biomass. To convert chl
a to algal biomass, chl a is typically multiplied by the given algae (as g m-3 or mg/l dry weight
OM)/chl a (as g chlorophyll a/l) ratio. This value can vary widely depending on the makeup of
B-16
KINETICS
ALGAE
the algal population. Some previous studies determined the conversion factor by regressing particulate organic matter with chl a.
Algal growth rate is computed by modifying a maximum growth rate affected by temperature, light,
and nutrient availability:
K ag = ar af min K ag max
(B-12)
where:
ar = temperature rate multiplier for rising limb of curve

af = temperature rate multiplier for falling limb of curve
min = multiplier for limiting growth factor (minimum of light, phosphorus, silica, and nitrogen)
Kag = algal growth rate, sec-1
Kagmax = maximum algal growth rate, sec-1
Rate multipliers for algal growth are computed based upon available light, phosphorus, nitrogen ,
and silica. The rate multiplier for light is based upon the Steele (1962) function:
l =
I
IS
- + 1
IS
(B-13)
where:
I = available light, W m-2

Is = saturating light intensity at maximum photosynthetic rate, W m-2
l = light limiting factor
The above expression allows for simulation of photoinhibition at light intensities greater than the
saturation value. However, light penetration decreases with depth:
I = (1 - ) I 0 e- z
(B-14)
where:
I0 = solar radiation at the water surface, W m-2
= attenuation coefficient, m-2
z = depth, m
= fraction of solar radiation absorbed at the water surface
The average effect of light on algal growth in a particular model cell can be obtained by combining
the above two expressions and integrating over the cell depth to obtain (Chapra and Reckhow,
1983):
B-17
ALGAE
KINETICS
l =
e
z
e
-
- e - 1
(B-15)
where:
(1 - ) I O
1=
Is
2=
d
(1 - ) I O
Is
- d
(d + z)
= depth at top of model cell, m
The fraction of solar radiation, I0, is added directly to the surface layer. The attenuation coefficient, , consists of a baseline value [EXH2O] to which the effects of inorganic [EXINOR] and
organic [EXORG] suspended solids, and algae [EXA] are added.
Rate multipliers limiting maximum algal growth due to nutrient limitations are computed using the
Monod relationship:
i =
i
Pi + i
(B-16)
where:
i = phosphorus or nitrate + ammonium concentration, g m-3

Pi = half-saturation coefficient for phosphorus or nitrate + ammonium, g m-3
The algal nitrogen preference for ammonium is based upon the following (Thomann and Fitzpatrick, 1982).
PNH 4 NH 4
K NH 4
NH 4
NOx
NH 4 K NH 4 NOx
NH 4
K NH 4
NOx K NH 4 NOx
(B-17)
where:
PNH4
KNH4
NH4
NOx
= ammonium preference factor

= ammonia preference half-saturation coefficient, g m-3
= ammonium concentration, g m-3
= nitrate-nitrite concentration, g m-3
B-18
KINETICS
ALGAE
This allows algae to use primarily ammonium and gradually switch to nitrate as ammonium concentrations decrease.
Algal dark respiration is computed using the rising limb of the temperature function:
K ar = ar af K armax
(B-18)
where:

Karmax = maximum dark respiration rate, sec-1
Algal photorespiration (excretion) is evaluated using an inverse relation to the light rate multiplier:
K ae = (1 l ) ar af K aemax
(B-19)
where:

Kaemax = maximum excretion rate constant, sec-1
Excretion rates increase at both low and high light intensities, with excretion products contributing
to labile DOM.
Algal mortality is defined as:
K am = ar af K ammax
(B-20)
where:

Kammax = maximum mortality rate, sec-1
This mortality rate represents both natural and predator mortality. Algal growth does not occur in
the absence of light. Algal growth is not allowed to exceed the limit imposed by nutrient supply
over a given timestep. Algal excretion is not allowed to exceed algal growth rates.
Similar to inorganic solids, settling algae serve as a source for the layer below. Unlike inorganic
solids, algae passing to the sediments accumulate within the sediment compartment. POM is also
accumulated in this sediment compartment.
B-19
EPIPHYTON
KINETICS
Epiphyton
Any number of user defined epiphyton groups can be modeled. Similar to the 1 st order sediment
compartment, epiphyton are not transported in the water column and are thus not state variables.
mortality
excretion
Labile DOM
mortality
Labile POM
photosynthesis
photosynthesis
Dissolved Oxygen
Epiphyton
burial
Inorganic C
respiration
Ammonium
Sediment
Phosphate
Silica
Figure B-14. Internal flux between epiphyton and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-14, the rate equation for each epiphyton group is:
Se = K eg e
e r e K e e e K e m e K eb e

K
growth
respiration
excretion
mortality
(B-21)
burial
where:
Keg
Ker
Kee
Kem
Keb
e
= epiphyton growth rate, sec-1

= epiphyton dark respiration rate, sec-1
= epiphyton excretion rate, sec-1
= epiphyton mortality rate, sec-1
= epiphyton burial rate, m sec-1
Epiphyton growth rate is computed by modifying a maximum growth rate affected by epiphyton
biomass, temperature, and nutrient availability:
K eg = er ef min K eg max
(B-22)
B-20
KINETICS
EPIPHYTON
where:
er = temperature rate multiplier for rising limb of curve
ef = temperature rate multiplier for falling limb of curve

min = multiplier for limiting growth factor (minimum of phosphorus, silica, nitrogen, and epiphyton biomass)
Keg = epiphyton growth rate, sec-1

Kegmax = maximum epiphyton growth rate, sec-1
Rate multipliers for epiphyton growth are computed based upon available light, phosphorus, nitrogen, silica, and epiphyton biomass. Epiphyton biomass is included as a surrogate for light limited
epiphyton self-shading and will be discussed in greater detail below.
The rate multiplier for light is based upon the Steele (1962) function:
l =
I
IS
+ 1
IS
(B-23)
where:
I = available light, W m-2

Is = saturating light intensity at maximum photosynthetic rate, W m-2
The above expression allows for simulation of photoinhibition at light intensities greater than the
saturation value. However, light penetration decreases with depth:
I = (1 - ) I 0 e- z
(B-
24)
where:
I0 = solar radiation at the water surface, W m-2
= attenuation coefficient, m-2

z = depth, m
= fraction of solar radiation absorbed at the water surface

The average effect of light on epiphyton growth in a particular model cell can be obtained by combining the above two expressions and integrating over the cell depth to obtain (Chapra and Reckhow, 1983):
l =
B-21
e
z
e
-
- e - 1
(B-25)
EPIPHYTON
KINETICS
where:
1=
2=
(1 - ) I O
Is
(1 - ) I O
Is
- d
(d + z)
d = depth at the top of computational cell, m

The attenuation coefficient, , is computed from a baseline value [EXH2O] to which the effects of
inorganic [EXINOR] and organic [EXORG] suspended solids, as well as the extinction of each algal
group, are added. Epiphyton self-shading are accounted for in the biomass limitation formulation.
Rate multipliers limiting epiphyton growth due to nutrient limitations are computed using the
Monod relationship:
i =
i
Pi + i
(B-
26)
where:
i = phosphorus or nitrate + ammonium concentration, g m-3

Pi = half-saturation coefficient for phosphorus or nitrate + ammonium, g m-3
The epiphyton preference for ammonium is modeled using the following (Thomann and Fitzpatrick, 1982).
PNH 4 NH 4
PNH4
KNH4
NH4
NOx
K NH 4
NOx
K NH 4
NH 4
NH 4 NOx K NH 4 NOx
NH 4 K NH 4 NOx
(B-27)
= ammonium preference factor

= ammonia preference half-saturation coefficient, g m-3
= ammonium concentration, g m-3
= nitrate-nitrite concentration, g m-3
Epiphyton dark respiration is computed using the rising limb of the temperature function:
K er = er ef K e rmax
(B-28)
B-22
KINETICS
EPIPHYTON
where:
er = temperature rate multiplier for rising limb of the curve

er = temperature rate multiplier for falling limb of the curve
Karmax = maximum dark respiration rate, sec-1
Epiphyton excretion is evaluated using an inverse relation to the light rate multiplier:
K ee = (1 - l ) er ef K ee max
(B-29)
where:

Keemax = maximum excretion rate constant, sec-1
Excretion rates increase at both low and high light intensities, with excretion products contributing
to labile DOM.
Epiphyton mortality is defined as:
K em = er ef K em max
(B-30)
where:

Kemmax = maximum mortality rate, sec-1
This mortality rate represents both natural and predator mortality. Epiphyton growth does not occur
in the absence of light. Epiphyton growth is not allowed to exceed the limit imposed by nutrient
supply over a given timestep. Epiphyton excretion is not allowed to exceed epiphyton growth rates.
The epiphyton burial rate represents the burial of dead epiphyton to the organic sediment compartment. The epiphyton become part of the 1st-order sediment compartment. Epiphyton though that
die (mortality) become a part of the labile particulate organic matter and the labile dissolved organic matter pool. The user defines the fraction of the dead epiphyton (EPOM) that goes to the
LPOM pool. This POM is then transported in the water column. Currently, there is no sloughing
of epiphyton into the water column as a function of velocity shear. This is a function of the biomass
limitation term.
The epiphyton biomass is controlled by a biomass limitation equation based on Monod kinetics.
The biomass limitation function, f, varies from 0 to 1 and is multiplied with the growth rate. This
function is defined as
B-23
EPIPHYTON
KINETICS
B
f 1
B KB
(B-31)
where:
B = epiphyton areal biomass, g/m2

Kb = epiphyton areal biomass half-saturation coefficient, g/m2
The areal biomass is calculated as follows:
B e
V
A
(B-32)
where:
A = computational cell surface area, m2

V = computational cell volume, m3
The biomass limitation is a surrogate calibration parameter for light limitation due to self-shading.
Macrophytes
The macrophyte model consists of two parts: a section describing the water quality compartment
and a section describing the hydrodynamic compartment.
The macrophyte model was designed to simulate multiple submerged macrophyte species. It does
not differentiate between plant parts. The nutrient fluxes for the water quality component of the
macrophyte compartment are shown in Figure 15. Light, temperature, carbon dioxide, ammonianitrogen (only ammonia is used as a N source for macrophytes), and ortho-phosphorus may limit
growth. Depending on the macrophyte species, nitrogen and phosphorus may be obtained from the
sediments or the water column. If they are obtained from the sediments, the sediments are assumed
to be an infinite pool that cannot limit growth. Plants grow upwards from the sediment through
model layers. Growth upward is accomplished by moving the growth of a layer to the layer above
if the concentration in the layer is greater than a threshold concentration and the concentration in
the upper layer is less than the same threshold concentration. Macrophyte shading is modeled by
making light attenuation a function of macrophyte concentration.
B-24
KINETICS
drawdown
Labile Dissolved
Organic Matter
Inorganic
Carbon
PO4-P
mortality
NH4-N
photosynthesis
Macrophytes
respiration
Sediment P
respiration
Oxygen
Sediment N
photosynthesis
mortality
Labile Particulate
Organic Matter
Refractory Particulate
Organic Matter
Figure 15. Nutrient fluxes for the macrophyte compartment in CE-QUAL-W2.

The macrophyte growth rate is modeled as follows:
S macro m max f ( I , N , P, C ) 1 2 macro K mr 1 macro K mm macro

growth
respiration
mortality
where
S macro : macrophyte growth rate density (g/m3/s)

I : solar radiation (W/m2)
f ( I , N , P ,C ) : Growth limiting function between 0 and 1

mmax : maximum macrophyte growth rate (day-1)
K mr : maximum respiration rate (day-1)
K mm : mortality/excretion rate (day-1)
1 : ascending temperature rate multiplier
2 : descending temperature rate multiplier
3 : growth limiting factor due to photosynthesis
macro: macrophyte concentration (g/m3)

Growth rate, respiration rate, and mortality/excretion rate are temperature dependent. Temperature
effects are modeled using the equations developed by Thornton and Lessem (1978) which are currently used in the phytoplankton compartment of CE-QUAL-W2. The growth limiting function
f ( I , N , P ,C ) is the minimum of the light f ( I ) , nitrogen f ( N ) , phosphorus f ( P ) , and carbon f ( C ) limiting functions such that f ( I , N , P ,C ) minimum f(I), f(N), f(P), f(C) .
B-25
KINETICS
All the limiting functions are unit-less and have a value between 0 and 1. The limiting functions
for the nutrients have the following Michaelis-Menten form
f(S )
S
KS S
where S (mg/l) is the nutrient concentration and K s (mg/l) is the half-saturation concentration.
Light limitation was modeled with a hyperbolic equation which as the same form as the Michaelis-Menten function:
f(I )
I
I Ih
where
I h : half-saturation coefficient for solar radiation (W/m2)
This function is frequently used in the absence of photo-inhibition (Carr et al., 1997).
The net light extinction coefficient (m-1) was modeled as a function of macrophyte plant tissue
concentration giving
H O iss iss oss oss

2
mac
# of
macrophyte
groups
mac
a lg ae
a lg ae
# of
algae
groups
where:
H 2O = light extinction exclusive of suspended solids, m-1
iss = light extinction due to inorganic suspended solids, m3 m-1 g-1

oss = light extinction due to non-living organic suspended solids, m3 m-1 g-1
mac = light extinction due to macrophytes, m3 m-1 g-1
a lg ae = light extinction due to algae, m3 m-1 g-1
iss = inorganic suspended solids concentration, g m-3

oss = organic suspended solids concentration, g m-3
mac = macrophyte plant tissue concentration, g m-3
a lg ae = algae concentration, g m-3
Modeling of flow through macrophytes incorporated the following concepts:
Porosity of the macrophytes was calculated through determination of the blockage area of the
vegetation normal to the direction of flow
The drag of individual stems and leaves were totaled to determine the total drag force in a
model cell
The effective Mannings n was calculated by combining the effect of bed shear and the drag
force on the plants
B-26
KINETICS
Modeling Frictional Force
The total frictional force f was partitioned into a bottom friction component f b and a vegetation
drag component fv giving
f f b fv
Bottom shear b was simulated using Mannings friction factor

b
w gn 2
1
3
UU
R
where
w : density of water
g : gravitational constant
U : water velocity
R : hydraulic radius
n: Mannings friction factor
The Columbia Slough model has already been calibrated for the no macrophytes condition. Mannings friction factor for the model segments was typically around 0.03.
Vegetative drag caused by macrophytes was modeled in a manner similar to that used by Petryk
and Bosmajian (1975) where the drag force Di on the ith plant is
U2
Di C d Ai w
2
with
Ai : area of plant projected normal to the direction of flow
C d : drag coefficient
The total drag force in a model cell due to vegetation is

w U 2
Di C d
Ai
The total plant area normal to the direction of flow Ai was estimated using biomass to surface
area ratios from Sher-Kaul et al. (1995) and surface area to volume ratios from Sand-Jensen and
Borum (1991).
The projected area normal to flow would then be Ai and the total drag was then
U2
Di C d w Ai
2
The drag coefficient C d was a calibration parameter but has been shown to be of the order of 1.0
for vegetation (Hsi and Nath, 1968; Hoerner, 1965; Petryk, 1969).
The effective Mannings n of each model cell was calculated in the manner used by Petryk and
Bosmajian (1975) with
n nb 1
C d Ai 1 4 3
R
2 gAL nb2
where
B-27
KINETICS
n b : Mannings friction factor due to bed shear only.
This derivation is shown in more detail in Berger and Wells (in-print).
Modeling Porosity
The volume Vm of macrophytes can be estimated by dividing the macrophyte mass in a model
cell m by density m
Vm
The porosity was estimated by dividing volume within a cell free of macrophytes by the cell
total volume V giving
V Vm
The cross-sectional area of each model cell was multiplied by the porosity to calculate the effective cross-sectional area. The porosity affected both the continuity and momentum equations.
Changes to Governing Equations
Several of the governing equations have been altered to account for porosity and the frictional effects of macrophytes. Equations affected include the x-momentum equation, the continuity equation, the free water surface equation, and the constituent transport equation. The new x-momentum equations is
UB
UUB
WUB
B P
1 B xx
1 B xz
t
x
z
x
z
where
U x-direction velocity, m/sec
W - z direction velocity, m/sec
B channel width, meters
- density, mg/l
P - Pressure, Newtons/m2
xz - vertical shear stress, Newtons/m2
xx - longitudinal shear stress, Newtons/m2
Vertical shear stress xz is a function of interfacial shear stress, shear stress due to wind, and bottom and plant shear stress. It was determined from
xz
U wx dkz bm
Az
where
bm -bottom and plant shear stress
Az - turbulent eddy viscosity
wx -wind shear stress
k-wave number
Bottom and plant shear stress is calculated using the effective Mannings n determined above
B-28
KINETICS
bm
gn 2
R
1
3
UU
The continuity equation was changed to
UB WB
qB
x
z
where
q - lateral inflow/outflow per unit volume (T-1)
The new free water surface equation is
h
h
B
Bdz
qBdz
t
x
with
B time and spatially varying surface width, meters
- free water surface elevation, meters
The constituent transport equation could also be affected by the reduction of cross-sectional area
due to macrophytes giving
BC UBC WBC
BDx
BDz
q B SK B
t
x
z
x
x z
z
with
C - constituent concentration, mg/l
Dx - longitudinal temperature and constituent dispersion coefficient, m2/sec
D z - vertical temperature and constituent dispersion coefficient, m2/sec
q - lateral inflow or outflow mass flow rate of constituent per unit volume, mg/l/sec
SK - kinetics source/sink term for constituent concentration, mg/l/sec
The parameter coefficients used in the first application of this model to the Columbia Slough are
shown below in Table 12. Descriptions of the input data fields are included in Appendix C.
Table 12. Parameters and values used for macrophytes in the Columbia Slough model.
Variable
name in input
data file
PRNMC
MACROC
EXM
MBMP
CE-QUAL-W2
Model value
MMAX
MG
MR
MM
SATM
500.0
0.30
0.05
0.05
20.0
MT1
B-29
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
0.01
40.0
Coefficient definition (units)
Macrophyte snapshot output on or off

Macrophyte compartment on or off
Light extinction coefficient for organic particles (m/mg/l)
Threshold macrophyte concentration for which growth is moved to the above
layer (mg/l)
Maximum macrophyte concentration (mg/l)
Maximum macrophyte growth rate (day-1)
Macrophyte respiration rate (day-1)
Macrophyte mortality rate (day-1)
Macrophyte half-saturation light intensity at the maximum photosynthetic rate
(Watts/m2)
Lower temperature bound for macrophyte growth (Celsius)
KINETICS
Variable
name in input
data file
MT2
CE-QUAL-W2
Model value
MT3
24
MT4
MK1
MK2
MK3
MK4
MPOM
34
0.1
0.99
0.99
0.01
0.9
LRPMAC
PSED
NSED
MHSP
MHSN
MHSC
MACP
MACN
MACC
02MR
02MG
0.2
0.5
0.5
0
0
10
0.005
0.08
0.45
1.1
2.0
CD
3.0
15
Coefficient definition (units)
Lowest temperature at which macrophyte growth processes are near the maximum rate (Celsius)
Upper temperature at which macrophyte growth processes are near the maximum rate (Celsius)
Upper lethal temperature for macrophytes(Celsius)
Temperature rate multiplier for MT1
Fraction of dead macrophytes which becomes POM, the fraction (1-MPOM)
becomes labile DOM
Fraction of POM which originates as dead macrophytes becoming labile POM
Fraction of phosphorus uptake by macrophytes obtained from sediments
Fraction of nitrogen uptake by macrophytes obtained from sediments
Half-saturation constant for P uptake by macrophytes (mg/l)
Half-saturation constant for N uptake by macrophytes (mg/l)
Half-saturation constant for carbon uptake by macrophytes (mg/l)
Stoichiometric equivalent between macrophyte biomass and orthophosphate
Stoichiometric equivalent between macrophyte biomass and nitrogen
Stoichiometric equivalent between macrophyte biomass and carbon
Dissolved oxygen requirement for macrophyte respiration
Stoichiometric equivalent for dissolved oxygen production during macrophyte
photosynthesis
Macrophyte drag coefficient
Zooplankton
A multiple zooplankton compartment was adapted from the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers reservoir model CE-QUAL-R1 (Environmental Laboratory, 1995) for the CE-QUAL-W2 model. Zooplankton are assumed to be non-motile and are transported only by advection and dispersion.
Zooplankton can graze algae, detritus (POM), and other zooplankton. Losses occur through mortality and respiration. The source/sink term for zooplankton is shown below:
alg a pom lpom zoo zoo Z L

1 2 K zm zoo 1K zr zoo
S zoo 1 2 Z e K zmax
Z zoo

alg
a
pom
lpom
zoo
zoo
1
2
mortality
respiration
growth
lpom = Labile particulate organic matter concentration (mg/l)
rpom =
Refractory particulate organic matter concentration(mg/l)
a = Algae concentration (mg/l)

zoo = Zooplankton concentration (mg/l)
B-30
KINETICS
K zm = Zooplankton mortality rate (d-1)
K z max = Maximum ingestion rate for zooplankton (d-1)
K zr
Z1 2
Ze
ZL
1
2
a lg
zoo
pom
=Zooplankton respiration rate (d-1)

=Half-saturation coefficient for zooplankton ingestion (mg/l)
=Zooplankton ingestion efficiency
=Low threshold concentration for zooplankton feeding (mg/l)
=Temperature coefficient for rising limb of curve for zooplankton
=Temperature coefficient for falling limb of curve for zooplankton
=Zooplankton preference fraction for algae
=Zooplankton preference fraction for zooplankton
=Zooplankton preference fraction for particulate organic matter
The zooplankton source/sinks are also illustrated in Figure 16. The growth rate is a function of
temperature, the maximum growth rate, and a modified Michaelis-Menten equation which includes a low threshold concentration below which zooplankton do not feed. At dissolved oxygen
concentrations below 2 mg/l feeding stops and the mortality rate is doubled. The zooplankton
model coefficients described in Table 13.
Dissolved
Oxygen
NH4-N
Respiration
Algae
Grazing
Zooplankton
Grazing
POM
Respiration
Grazing loss to
other zooplankton
PO4-P
Inorganic
Carbon
Zooplankton
Figure 16. Zooplankton source/sinks.
Table 13. Parameters used in the zooplankton model.
Name
ZMAX
ZMORT
ZEFFIC
B-31
Description
Maximum ingestion rate for zooplankton (1/day)
Maximum nonpredatory mortality rate for zooplankton (1/day).
Zooplankton assimilation efficiency or the proportion of food assimilated to food consumed (dimensionless).
KINETICS
Name
PREFA
PREFP
ZRESP
ZOOMIN
ZS2P
ZOOT1
ZOOT2
ZOOT3
ZOOT4
ZOOK1
ZOOK2
ZOOK3
ZOOK4
EXZ
O2ZR
ZP
ZN
ZC
Description
Preference factor of zooplankton for algae (dimensionless).
Preference factor of zooplankton for detritus (dimensionless).
Maximum zooplankton respiration rate (1/day).
Threshold food concentration at which zooplankton feeding begins (mg/l).
Zooplankton half-saturation constant for food concentration (mg/l)
Lower temperature for zooplankton growth (Celsius)
Lower temperature for maximum zooplankton growth (Celsius)
Upper temperature for maximum zooplankton growth (Celsius)
Upper temperature for zooplankton growth (Celsius)
Fraction of zooplankton growth rate at ZOOT1 (dimensionless)
Zooplankton light extinction (m-1)
Oxygen stoichiometry for zooplankton respiration
Stoichiometric equivalent between zooplankton biomass and phosphorus
Stoichiometric equivalent between zooplankton biomass and nitrogen
Stoichiometric equivalent between zooplankton biomass and carbon
Phosphorus
Phosphorus is an important element in aquatic ecosystems since it serves as one of the primary
nutrients for phytoplankton growth. In many fresh waters, phosphorus is considered to be the nutrient limiting maximum production of phytoplankton biomass (Schindler, 1971; Schindler et al.,
1973; Vollenweider, 1968, 1976).
Phosphorus is assumed to be completely available as ortho-phosphate (PO4) for uptake by phytoplankton. Measurements of soluble reactive phosphorus are closest to the form used in the model.
Macrophytes are specified as either taking P from the sediments or from the water column.
B-32
KINETICS
Macrophytes
Algae
Epiphyton
Sediment
LDOM
respiration
photosynthesis
respiration
RDOM
decay
Phosphate
Zooplankton
Sediments
LPOM
adsorption/
settling
anaerobic
release
RPOM
System Loss
CBOD
Figure B-17. Internal flux between phosphorus and other compartments.

Referring to Figure B-17, the rate equation for phosphorus is:
S p = ( Kar - Kag ) P a a ( Ker - Keg ) P e e + K LDOM POM OM LDOM

algal net growth
epiphyton net growth
labile DOM decay
+ K RDOM P OM OM RDOM + K LPOM P OM OM LPOM + K RPOM P OM OM RPOM
refractory DOM decay
labile POM decay
refractory POM decay
A
+ KCBOD RCBOD P CBOD T 20 CBOD + Ks P OM OM s + SOD OM sed

V
CBOD decay
1st -order sediment release
(B-
0-order sediment release
ISS F e F e PP
P ( Kmr - (1 f psed ) Kmg) Pm macro K zr P z zoo

macrophyte net growth
zooplankton respiration
ISS
inorganic solids adsorption
33)
where:
z
Ased
V
PP
fpsed
Pe
Pa
Pm
Pz
B-33
= model cell thickness, m

= sediment surface area, m2
= cell volume, m3
= adsorption coefficient, m3 g-1
= fraction of macrophyte phosphorus uptake from sediments
= epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
= algal stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
= macrophyte stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
= zooplankton stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
KINETICS
POM = organic matter stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
P-CBOD = phosphorus/CBOD stoichiometric ratio

OM = temperature rate multiplier for organic matter decay
= temperature rate multiplier for CBOD decay
RBOD = conversion ratio for 5-day CBOD to CBOD ultimate
ISS = inorganic suspended solids settling velocity, m sec-1

Fe = particulate organic matter settling velocity, m sec-1
Kag
Kar
Keg
Ker
Kmg
Kmr
Kzr
KLDOM
KRDOM
KLPOM
KRPOM
KCBOD
Ksed
SOD
P
Fe
ISS
a
e
LDOM
LPOM
RDOM
RPOM
CBOD
sed
macro
zoo
= algal growth rate, sec-1

= algal dark respiration rate, sec-1
= epiphyton growth rate, sec-1
= epiphyton dark respiration rate, sec-1
= macrophyte growth rate, sec-1
= macrophyte respiration rate, sec-1
= macrophyte respiration rate, sec-1
= labile DOM decay rate, sec-1
= refractory DOM decay rate, sec-1
= labile POM decay rate, sec-1
= refractory POM decay rate, sec-1
= CBOD decay rate, sec-1
= sediment decay rate, sec-1
= anaerobic sediment release rate, g m-2s-1
= phosphorus concentration, g m-3
= total iron concentration, g m-3
= inorganic suspended solids concentration, g m-3
= labile DOM concentration, g m-3
= labile POM concentration, g m-3
= refractory DOM concentration, g m-3
= refractory POM concentration, g m-3
= CBOD concentration, g m-3
= organic sediment concentration, g m-3
= macrophyte concentration, g m-3
= zooplankton concentration, g m-3
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine PHOSPHORUS. In the model, the PO4 concentration
is in units of PO4 as P.
The contribution of algae, POM, and DOM to phosphorus is given in the rate equations and Figure
B-7. However, effects due to settling and contribution from sediments require some additional
explanation.
B-34
KINETICS
Dissolved inorganic phosphorus adsorbs onto inorganic particulates under oxic conditions and is
lost when these materials settle. Loss may be rapid in the upper end of reservoirs in the riverine
and transition zones due to greater concentrations of allochthonous particulates. A Langmuir isotherm describes this process. Since phosphorus concentrations are generally small, only the isotherm's linear region is utilized and is represented by the product PPP. The adsorbed solids settle
at a rate equal to the solids' settling velocity. Adsorption is not allowed to occur if dissolved oxygen
concentrations are less than a minimum value [O2LIM].
Phosphorus adsorption onto inorganic suspended solids should be used cautiously. In most systems, available phosphorus sites for adsorption onto inflowing inorganic suspended solids are generally already in use, so little adsorption takes place when inorganic suspended solids enter into a
reservoir or estuary. The phosphorus formulation needs to be recast with inorganic phosphorus as
the state variable that is then partitioned between dissolved and particulate forms. This will be
done in a future version. However, phosphorus sorption onto iron hydroxides that form when anoxic waters come into contact with oxygen can be an important mechanism of phosphorus removal
from the water column for certain waterbodies and should be included.
Sediment contribution of phosphorus to overlying waters can be simulated in three ways. In the
first, the sediment compartment accumulates particulate organic matter and algae, which then decay. This is modeled as a 1st-order process. However, sediment phosphorus release depends upon
sediment age, chemistry, overlying phosphorus concentrations, and other factors not included in
the sediment compartment. In the second, sediments can be assigned a release rate for phosphorus
that is independent of sediment concentrations. Sediments are modeled as a "black box" using a
zero-order rate. Phosphorus release is only allowed to occur if the overlying water dissolved oxygen concentration is less than a minimum value [O2LIM]. The third method is a combination of the
first two where organic materials accumulate and decay in the sediments along with a background
decay rate independent of organic matter accumulation in the sediments.
Ammonium
Algae use ammonium during photosynthesis to form proteins. In many estuarine applications, nitrogen is the limiting nutrient for algal growth. Macrophytes can prefer taking N from the sediments
versus the water column.
B-35
AMMONIUM
KINETICS
photosynthesis
Sediment
Nitrate-Nitrite
RDOM
nitrification
Algae
Macrophytes
respiration
Ammonium
decay
LDOM
LPOM
Epiphyton
anaerobic
respiration
release
RPOM
photosynthesis
Sediment
Zooplankton
CBOD
Figure B-18. Internal flux between ammonium and other compartments.

Referring to Figure B-18, the rate equation for ammonium is:
S NH 4 = K ar N a s K ag N a a PNH 4 K er N e e K eg N e e PNH 4

algal respiration
epiphyton respiration
algal growth
epiphyton growth
+ K LDOM NOM OM LDOM + K RDOM NOM OM RDOM + K LPOM NOM OM LPOM
labile DOM decay
labile POM decay
A
K RPOM N OM OM RPOM + K s N OM OM s + S OD NH 4 OM sed

1st - order sediment release
(B-
0 - order sediment release
K CBODRCBOD N CBOD T 20 CBOD K NH 4 NH 4 NH 4

nitrification
CBOD decay
K mr 1 f nsed K mg N m macro K zr N z zoo

net macrophyte growth
34)
where:
Ased = sediment area, m2

V = volume of cell, m3
fnsed = fraction of macrophyte nitrogen uptake from sediments
Na
Ne
Nm
Nz
NOM
= algal stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen

= epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
= macrophyte stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
= zooplankton stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
= organic matter stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
B-36
KINETICS
AMMONIUM
N-CBOD= CBOD stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen

NH4 = temperature rate multiplier for nitrification
NOx = temperature rate multiplier for denitrification

= temperature rate multiplier for CBOD decay
RCBOD = ratio of 5-day CBOD to ultimate CBOD
PNH4 = ammonium preference factor
KNOx = nitrate-nitrogen decay rate, sec-1
KNH4 = ammonium decay rate, sec-1
Kar = algal dark respiration rate, sec-1
Kmg = macrophyte growth rate, sec-1
Kmr = macrophyte respiration rate, sec-1
Kzr = zooplankton respiration rate, sec-1
KRDOM = refractory DOM decay rate, sec-1
KLPOM = labile POM decay rate, sec-1
KCBOD = CBOD decay rate, sec-1
Ksed = sediment decay rate, sec-1
SODNH4 = sediment ammonium release rate, g m-2 sec-1
ISS = inorganic suspended solids concentration, g m-3
NH4 = ammonium concentration, g m-3
RDOM = refractory DOM concentration, g m-3
CBOD = CBOD concentration, g m-3
macro = macrophyte concentration, g m-3
zoo = zooplankton concentration, g m-3
sed = organic sediment concentration, g m-3
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine AMMONIUM. As with phosphorus, 0-order sediment release only occurs when dissolved oxygen is less than a minimum value [O2LIM]. Either a
0- or 1st-order process or a combination of both may be used for sediment ammonium release. In
the model, the ammonia concentration is in units of NH4 as N.
Nitrate-Nitrite
This compartment represents nitrate plus nitrite. Nitrite is an intermediate product in nitrification
between ammonium and nitrate. Nitrate is used as a source of nitrogen for algae and epiphyton
B-37
NITRITE-NITRATE
KINETICS
during photosynthesis. Preferential uptake of ammonium over nitrate by algae and periphyton is
now included.
Nitrogen may be the limiting nutrient for algae in systems with high phosphorus loadings or in
estuaries. Some species of blue-green algae are capable of fixing atmospheric nitrogen for use in
photosynthesis. This process can be included by setting the nitrogen half-saturation concentration
for algal growth to zero.
Ammonium
nitrification
Algae
photosynthesis
Nitrate-Nitrite
Epiphyton
denitrification
Sediment
Water Column
Figure B-19. Internal flux between nitrate + nitrite and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-19, the rate equation for nitrate-nitrite is:
NOx
S NOx = K NH 4 NH 4 NH 4 K NO x NO x NO x NOx

z
nitrification
water column denitrification
sediment denitrification
K ag N a a 1 - PNH 4 K e g N e e 1 - PNH 4
algal uptake
(B-35)
epiphyton uptake
where:
NH4
= temperature rate multiplier for nitrification

NOx = temperature rate multiplier for denitrification
Ne = epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
Na = algal stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
PNH4 = ammonium preference factor
KNH4 = nitrification rate, sec-1
KNOx = denitrification rate, sec-1
NOx = sediment transfer velocity, m sec-1
NH4 = ammonia-nitrogen concentration, g m-3
NOx = nitrate-nitrogen concentration, g m-3
B-38
KINETICS
AMMONIUM
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine NITRATE. Nitrification is only allowed to occur if
oxygen is present, and denitrification is allowed only if dissolved oxygen is less than a specified
minimum value [O2LIM]. In the model, the nitrate+nitrite concentration is in units of NO3 + NO2
as N.
Dissolved Silica
Dissolved silica is an important component of diatoms, providing the structural skeleton. In many
cases diatoms can be silica limited. Dissolved silica is taken up by algae based on stoichiometric
relationships and is produced by the decay of organic matter containing particulate biogenic silica.
Also, dissolved silica is adsorbed onto inorganic suspended solids based on a partitioning coefficient.
Algae
respiration
Epiphyton
photosynthesis
respiration
Particulate
dissolution biogenic
silica
Dissolved
Silica
anaerobic decay
release
Sediment
adsorption/
settling
System Loss
Figure B-20. Internal flux between dissolved silica and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-20, the rate equation for dissolved silica is:
S DSi = K ag K ar Sia a K eg K er Sie e
algal uptake
epiphyton uptake
+ K sed SiOM OM s ed + SOD Si OM

1st order sediment release
Ased
K PSi OM PSi
V
(B-36)
particulate biogenic
decay
P Si ss ss + POM POML + POM POMR F e F e

z
DSi
inorganic solids adsorption and settling
where:
= temperature rate factor for BOD decay
B-39
PARTICULATE BIOGENIC SILICA
KINETICS

Si = fraction of SOD for silica release
z = computational cell height, m
Sie = epiphyton stoichiometric ratio for silica

Sia = algal stoichiometric ratio for silica
SiOM = sediment organic matter stoichiometric ratio for silica

= sediment area, m2
= computational cell volume, m3
= silica adsorption coefficient, m3 g-1
= sediment oxygen demand, g m-2 sec-1
ISS = inorganic suspended solids settling velocity, m sec-1
sed = organic sediment mass, g
ISS = inorganic suspended solids concentration, g m-3
DSi = dissolved silica concentration, g m-3
Fe = total iron concentration, g m-3
Ased
V
PSi
SOD
Organic Matter Variable Stoichiometry

The CE-QUAL-W2 model includes a feature starting with V3.5 which allows for the variable stoichiometry of organic matter. Past versions of W2 models have used fixed stoichiometric constants
for the ratios of nitrogen and phosphorus to organic matter.
Eight new constituents were required to simulate the amount of nitrogen and phosphorus in labile
dissolved organic matter (LDOM), refractory organic matter (RDOM), labile particulate organic
matter (LPOM), and refractory particulate organic matter (RPOM). These constituents were summarized in Table 14. Hence, all inputs of organic matter accumulate N and P according to the
stoichiometry of the incoming organic matter.
Table 14. Constituents used for variable stoichiometry of organic matter.
Abbreviation
LDOM-P
RDOM-P
LPOM-P
RPOM-P
LDOM-N
RDOM-N
LPOM-N
Constituent
Labile Dissolved Organic Matter Phosphorus
Refractory Dissolved Organic Matter Phosphorus
Labile Particulate Organic Matter Phosphorus
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter Phosphorus
Labile Dissolved Organic Matter Nitrogen
Refractory Dissolved Organic Matter Nitrogen
Labile Particulate Organic Matter Nitrogen
B-40
KINETICS
TOTAL IRON
RPOM-N
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter Nitrogen
These state variables are used in the model when that constituent is active.
Labile Dissolved Organic Matter Phosphorus (LDOMP)

LDOM-P is the amount of phosphorus in labile dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LDOM-P is:
S LDOM-P K ae Pa a (1 Pam ) K am Pa a K ee Pe e

algal excretion
algal mortality
epiphyton excretion
(1 Pem ) K em Pe e (1 Pmm ) K mm Pm m K LDOM OM LDOM P K LR OM LDOM P

epiphyton mortality
macrophyte mortality
labile DOM-P decay
DOM-P decay
where:
OM

P-LDOM =LDOM stoichiometric ratio for phosphorus
Pe = epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus

Pa = algal stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
Pm = macrophyte stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
KLR= labile to refractory DOM transfer rate, sec-1
m = macrophyte concentration, g m-3
LDOM-P= labile DOM-P concentration, g m-3
Refractory Dissolved Organic Matter Phosphorus

(RDOM-P)
RDOM-P is the amount of phosphorus in refractory dissolved organic matter.
B-41
KINETICS
The rate equation of LDOM-P is:
S RDOM P = K
R LDOM P OM K RDOM RDOM P
L
DOM decay
decay
LDOM P = labile DOM-P concentration, g m
-3
Labile Particulate Organic Matter Phosphorus (LPOMP)

LPOM-P is the amount of phosphorus in refractory dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LPOM-P is:
S LPOM P = Pam K am Pa a Pem K em Pe e Pmm Pmpom K mm Pm m K zm Pz zoo

algal mortality
epiphyton mortality
zooplankton mortality
K LPOM OM LPOM P K LR LPOM P K zg (1 Z effic ) Pz zoo

decay
POM decay
zooplankton
pom LPOM
LPOM P
zoo POM LPOM P
LPOM alg a pom LPOM
z

settling
K zg
zooplankton ingestion
where:
Pam= partition coefficient for algal mortality
Pem= partition coefficient for epiphyton mortality
Pmm= partition coefficient for macrophyte mortality
Pmpom =partition coefficient for RPOM and LPOM from macrophyte mortality
a lg = Zooplankton preference fraction for algae
pom = Zooplankton preference fraction for particulate organic matter
POM= POM settling rate, m sec-1

Kam= algal mortality rate, sec-1
Kem= epiphyton mortality rate, sec-1
Kzm= zooplankton mortality rate, sec-1
Kmm= macrophyte mortality rate, sec-1
KLPOM= labile POM decay rate, sec-1
KLR= transfer rate from labile POM to refractory POM, sec-1
a= algal concentration, g m-3
zoo= algal concentration, g m-3
e= epiphyton concentration, g m-3
LPOM= LPOM concentration, g m-3
LPOM-P= LPOM-P concentration, g m-3
B-42
KINETICS
TOTAL IRON
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter Phosphorus

(RPOM-P)
RPOM-P is the amount of phosphorus in refractory dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LPOM-P is:
S RPOM = K
R LPOM P OM K RPOM RPOM P Pmm 1 Pmpom K mm Pm m
L
POM decay
decay
RPOM P
POM
z
settling
where:
Pmm= partition coefficient for macrophyte mortality
Pmpom
=partition coefficient for RPOM and LPOM from macrophyte mortality

= macrophyte stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
Pm
K L R = transfer rate from labile POM to refractory POM, sec-1

K RPOM = refractory POM decay rate, sec-1
Kmm= macrophyte mortality rate, sec-1
RPOM = POM settling velocity, m/ sec-1
LPOM P = labile POM concentration, g m

-3
RPOM P = refractory POM phosphorus concentration, g m
-3
Labile Dissolved Organic Matter Nitrogen (LDOM-N)

LDOM-N is the amount of nitrogen in labile dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LDOM-N is:
S LDOM-N K ae Na a (1 Pam ) K am Na a K ee Ne e

algal excretion
algal mortality
epiphyton excretion
(1 Pem ) K em Ne e (1 Pmm ) K mm Nm m K LDOM OM LDOM N K LR OM LDOM N

epiphyton mortality
labile DOM- N decay
DOM- N decay
where:
B-43
KINETICS

OM

P-LDOM =LDOM stoichiometric ratio for nitrogen

Na = algal stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
Nm = macrophyte stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
KLR= labile to refractory DOM transfer rate, sec-1
m = macrophyte concentration, g m-3
LDOM-N= labile DOM-N concentration, g m-3
Refractory Dissolved Organic Matter Nitrogen (RDOMN)

RDOM-N is the amount of nitrogen in refractory dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LDOM-N is:
S RDOM N = K
R LDOM N OM K RDOM RDOM N
L
DOM decay
decay
Where
LDOM N = labile DOM-N concentration, g m
-3
Labile Particulate Organic Matter Nitrogen (LPOM-N)

LPOM-N is the amount of nitrogen in refractory dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LPOM-N is:
B-44
KINETICS
TOTAL IRON
S LPOM N = Pam K am Na a Pem K em Ne e Pmm Pmpom K mm Nm m K zm Nz zoo

algal mortality
epiphyton mortality
zooplankton mortality
K LPOM OM LPOM N K LR LPOM N K zg (1 Z effic ) Nz zoo

decay
POM decay
zooplankton
pom LPOM
LPOM N
zoo POM LPOM N
LPOM alg a pom LPOM

z

settling
K zg
zooplankton ingestion
where:
Pam
= partition coefficient for algal mortality
Pem
= partition coefficient for epiphyton mortality
Pmm
= partition coefficient for macrophyte mortality
Pmpom =partition coefficient for RPOM and LPOM from macrophyte mortality
OM
a lg
= temperature rate multiplier for organic matter

= Zooplankton preference fraction for algae
pom
= Zooplankton preference fraction for particulate organic matter
POM
= POM settling rate, m sec-1

Kam
Kem
Kzm
= zooplankton mortality rate, sec-1
Kmm
= macrophyte mortality rate, sec-1
KLR = transfer rate from labile POM to refractory POM, sec-1
a
zoo
e
LPOM= LPOM concentration, g m-3
LPOM-N= LPOM-N concentration, g m-3
Refractory Particulate Organic Matter Nitrogen (RPOMN)

RPOM-N is the amount of nitrogen in refractory dissolved organic matter.
The rate equation of LPOM-N is:
B-45
KINETICS
S RPOM = K
R LPOM N OM K RPOM RPOM N Pmm 1 Pmpom K mm Nm m
L
POM decay
decay
RPOM N
POM
z
settling
where:
Pmm
= partition coefficient for macrophyte mortality
Pmpom = partition coefficient for RPOM and LPOM from macrophyte mortality
OM
Nm =
K L R
K RPOM
= temperature rate multiplier
macrophyte stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen

= transfer rate from labile POM to refractory POM, sec-1
= refractory POM decay rate, sec-1
Kmm
= macrophyte mortality rate, sec-1
RPOM = POM settling velocity, m/ sec-1
-3
LPOM N = labile POM-N concentration, g m
-3
RPOM N = refractory POM-N concentration, g m
Particulate Biogenic Silica

Particulate biogenic silica results from diatom mortality and settles and also dissolves to form dissolved silica.
Epiphyton
mortality
Algae
Particulate
Biogenic
Silica
Silica
settling
decay
Dissolved Silica
System Loss
Figure B-21. Internal flux between particulate biogenic silica and other compartments
Referring to Figure B-21, the rate equation for particulate biogenic silica is:
S PSi = P am Sia K am a P e m Sie K e m e K PSi OM PSi
algae mortality
epiphyton mortality
decay
PSi PSi
z
(B-37)
settling
B-46
KINETICS
TOTAL IRON
where:
Pam = partition coefficient for algal mortality
Sie = epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for silica

Sia = algal stoichiometric coefficient for silica
Pem
Kam
Kem
KPSi
= partition coefficient for epiphyton mortality

= particulate biogenic silica decay rate, sec-1
PSi = particulate biogenic silica settling rate, m sec-1
PSi = particulate biogenic silica concentration, g m-3
Total Iron
Total iron is included in the model primarily because of its effect on nutrient concentrations through
adsorption and settling. Iron is commonly released from anoxic sediments and may influence nutrient dynamics in many reservoirs. Iron may also contribute to dissolved oxygen depletions, but
the model does not presently include these effects. Iron sediment release is modeled as a zeroorder process.
Total Iron
anaerobic release
adsorption/settling
Sediment
Figure B-22. Internal flux between total iron and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-22, the rate equation for total iron is:
S Fe = SOD om As F e F e
z
0-order
sediment release
(B-38)
oxic water column

settling
where:
As = sediment area, m2
B-47
KINETICS

Fe = settling velocity, m sec-1
Fe = total iron concentration, g m-3

SOD = sediment oxygen demand, g m-2 sec-1.
Dissolved Oxygen
Oxygen is one of the most important elements in aquatic ecosystems. It is essential for higher
forms of life, controls many chemical reactions through oxidation, and is a surrogate variable indicating the general health of aquatic systems.
CE-QUAL-W2 includes both aerobic and anaerobic processes. The ability to model anaerobic
periods is important since it provides information on potential problems with water quality. Simulations can be used to identify possibilities for both metalimnetic and hypolimnetic oxygen depletion and its impact on various water control management alternatives. If a single variable were to
be measured in aquatic systems that would provide maximum information about the system state,
it would be dissolved oxygen.
Sediment
Atmosphere
Macrophytes
respiration
Algae
photosynthesis
Epiphyton
RDOM
aeration
Dissolved
Oxygen
respiration
Zooplankton
decay
LDOM
LPOM
nitrification
RPOM
Nitrate/Nitrite
CBOD
Figure B-23. Internal flux between dissolved oxygen and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-23, the rate equation for dissolved oxygen is:
48
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
S DO = K ag K ar OMa a K eg K er OMe e + Asur K L DO - DO

algal net production
aeration
epiphyton net production
K RPOM OM OM RPOM K LPOM OM OM LPOM K LDOM OM OM LDOM

labile POM decay
labile DOM decay
A
K RDOM OM OM RDOM Ks OM OM s ed SOD OM sed

V
1st -order sediment decay
0-order SOD
K CBOD RCBOD CBOD K NH 4 NH 4 NH 4 NH 4 K mg K mr OMmac macro

T 20
CBOD decay
nitrification
macrophyte net production
zoo K zr OMzoo zoo
(B-39)
where:
OMa = oxygen stoichiometric coefficient for algal organic matter

OMe = oxygen stoichiometric coefficient for epiphyton organic matter
OMmac = oxygen stoichiometric coefficient for macrophyte organic matter

OM = oxygen stoichiometric coefficient for organic matter
NH4 = oxygen stoichiometric coefficient for nitrification
OMzoo=oxygen stoichiometric coefficient for zooplankton
NH4 = temperature rate multiplier for nitrification
zoo = temperature rate multiplier for zooplankton
RBOD = conversion from CBOD in the model to CBOD ultimate
V = volume of computational cell, m3
T = temperature, C
Ased = sediment surface area, m2
Asur = water surface area, m2
Ker = epiphyton dark respiration rate, sec-1
Kmg = macrophyte growth rate, sec-1
Kmr = macrophyte dark respiration rate, sec-1
Kzr = zooplankton respiration rate, sec-1
KNH4 = ammonia decay (nitrification) rate, sec-1
B-49
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
KINETICS

SOD = sediment oxygen demand, g m-2 sec-1
KL = interfacial exchange rate for oxygen, m sec-1
NH4 = ammonia-nitrogen concentration, g m-3
zoo = zooplankton concentration, g m-3
macr = macrophyte concentration, g m-3
BOD = CBOD concentration, g m-3
sed = organic sediment concentration, g m-3
DO = dissolved oxygen concentration, g m-3
DO = saturation DO concentration, g m-3
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine DISSOLVED_OXYGEN. Decay is not allowed to
occur when dissolved oxygen concentrations are zero. A Monod formulation is used though to
move gradually from oxic to anoxic conditions. This is accomplished by reducing temperature rate
multipliers eventually to zero as dissolved oxygen concentrations are zero.
This reduction of oxic reactions as dissolved oxygen levels approach zero is based on specification
of a dissolved oxygen half-saturation constant in the following equation:
Rate Re duction
DO
where DO is the concentration of dissolved oxygen and KDO is
K DO DO
a half-saturation dissolved oxygen concentration when oxic reactions are half of their maximum
without limitation of oxygen conditions.
Since the river basin model will encompass waterbodies that are dependent on boundary shear in
river segments and wind stress for lake or reservoir segments for turbulence, the reaeration formulae for these systems must be different. In the following sections, formulae for reaeration as a
function of wind speed and boundary shear are presented. The user has the ability to select a different formulation for each waterbody type selected. The reason for selecting a waterbody type is
to force the user to select a system that best approximates the theory being used. The possible water
body types are RIVER, LAKE, or ESTUARY.
River Reaeration Equations

Reaeration equations for rivers are given in Table B-15. Most of these equations are based on field
studies of selected streams or laboratory channels. Equations 7 and 8 were developed from Melting
and Flores (1999) for a large data set of reaeration coefficients. These may be the best choice for
rivers even though other equations have been used extensively.
B-50
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Recently, Moog and Jirka (1998) suggested that formulations that do not account for channel slope
should not be used. Therefore, equations 7 and 8 may again be the best selection of equations for
river sections.
Thomann and Mueller (1987) suggested using Equation 1 except for small streams where Equation
3 for flow less than 10 cfs should be used. They also suggested a minimum value of K L of 0.6 m
day-1. This value was has been implemented as a lower limit in the code.
Mills et al. (1985) in a review of water quality reaeration coefficients used a different formulation
than equation 3 in Table B-15 based on a 1978 reference at 25C:
K a 7776 U S
for Q 10 cfs
K a 4665.6 U S for 10 Q 3000 cfs

K a 2592U S
(B-40)
for Q 3000 cfs
where S is the slope in ft/ft and U is velocity in ft/s

However, Mills et al. (1985) only recommend its use for shallow low-flow streams. Therefore,
equation 3 in Table B-15 is exactly the same as the above formulation in the low flow regime (note
that the slopes in Equation 3 are in ft/mile and in the above equation are unitless).
Covar (1976) used an approach where the equations of O'Connor-Dobbins, Churchill, and Owens
were used together based on the applicability of each equation. The applicability of each equation
was based on the velocity of the stream and its depth. This is equation 0 in the following table.
Table B-15. River reaeration equations.
#
Equation
Either Eq 1, 2 or 4
B-51
1/ 2
DO2U
K
Ka L
H
H 3/ 2
Ka
K L 11.6U
H
H 1.67
K a 0.88US for10 Q 300 cfs

K a 1.8 US for 1 Q 10 cfs
K
21.6U 0.67
Ka L
H
H 1.85
Ka
K L 25u
1 F 0.5
H
H
*
Comments
Ka evaluated based
on applicability criteria
of these equations
DO2 = H2O molecular
diffusion, m2 s-1
U = average velocity,
m s-1
H = average channel
depth, m
Applicability
Reference
Covar (1976)
depths between
1-30 ft and velocities between 0.51.6 fps
OConnor and
Dobbins (1958)
U, ft s-1
H, ft
Ka, day-1
depths between
2-11 ft and velocities between 1.8-5
fps
Churchill, Elmore
and Buckingham
(1962)
S, ft mile-1
U, ft s-1
Ka, day-1
suggested for use

when Q < 10cfs
Tsivoglou and
Wallace (1972)
U, ft s-1
H, ft
depths between
0.4-2.4 ft and velocities between
0.1-1.8 fps
Owens et al.
(1964)
u* = shear velocity,
(HSg)0.5
S = slope of energy
grade line
F = Froude number,
U/(gH)0.5
Thackston and
Krenkel (1966)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
#
Equation
Ka
KINETICS
Comments
K L 7.62U
1.33
H
H
U, ft s
H, ft
K a 517(US )0.524 Q 0.242 for Q 0.556

K a 596(US )0.528 Q 0.136 for Q 0.556
K a 88( US )0.313 D 0.353 for Q 0.556

8
K a 142( US )0.333 D 0.66W 0.243

for Q 0.556
w/ channel slope -
K a C1U
C2
w/o channel slope -
K a C1U
C2
1
0
Ka
C3
H S
C3
K L 5.0u *
1 9F 0.25
H
H
C4
Applicability
-1
U, m s-1
S, m m-1
Q, m3 s-1
Ka, day-1
U, m s-1
S, m m-1
W = stream top
width, m
D = average depth, m
Ka, day-1
U, m s-1
H, m
S, non-dimensional
Ka, day-1
C1, C2, C3, C4 = user
defined parameters
(HSg)0.5
S = slope of energy
grade line
F = Froude number,
U/(gH)0.5
Ka, day-1
Reference
Langbien and
Durum (1967)
for pool and riffle

streams
Melching and
Flores (1999)
for channel-control streams
Melching and
Flores (1999)
User defined relationship
Thackston and
Dawson (2001)
Figure B-24 shows the functional dependence of these formulae assuming the following relationship between flow (Q, ft3/s), velocity (V, ft/s) and depth (H, ft) (St. John et al., 1984):
V = 0.033 Q0.5
H = 0.475 Q0.4
S = 5.2 ft/mile
B-52
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Reaeration Coefficent, Ka, day-1
10
Eq 0
Eq 1
Eq 2
Eq 3
Eq 4
Eq 5
Eq 6
Eq 7
Eq 8
0.1
10
100
1000
Flow rate, ft3 sec-1
Figure B-24. Reaeration coefficent as a function of flow rate.
Lake Reaeration Equations

Wind effects rather than boundary shear more often control reaeration in lakes, reservoirs, and
estuarine systems. There have been many wind studies for lakes (e.g., OConnor, 1983) and open
ocean systems. A summary of wind speed formulae for predicting reaeration is shown in Table
B-16 based on a 10 m wind measuring height.
Table B-16. Lake reaeration equations as a function of wind speed at 20oC.
#
Equation
Ka
K L 0.728W 0.5 0.317W 0.0372W 2-1

W, m s at 10 m
H
H
KL, m day-1
Ka
K L 0.0986W 1.64
H
H
[at 20oC]
or
K L 0.0986W
H
H
1.64
Reference
Broecker et al (1978)
= 0.2, = 1 for W < 3.5 m s-1

a = 0.057, = 2 for W > 3.5 m s-1 where
W is a daily average wind speed
K L W
H
H
Ka
Ka
B-53
K L 0.864W
H
H
Ka
Comments
W, m s-1 at 10 m
H, m
KL, m day-1
600
Sc
0.5
Gelda et al (1996)
Banks and Herrera

(1977)
The latter equation was the original

equation used where W is measured at
10 m and Sc is the Schmidt number
Sc=(/D)=13750[0.10656exp(.0627T)+.00495]
T = temperature, oC
=kinematic viscosity
D=diffusivity
Wanninkhof et al.
(1991)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
#
5
KINETICS
Equation
Comments
Do2
DO2 = oxygen molecular diffusivity, m2 s-1
W, m s-1
K L ( 200 60W 0.5 )10 6
Ka
KL, m s-1
H
H
K
0.5 0.05W 2
Ka L
H
H
K L 0.362 W
Ka
W 5.5m / s
H
H
K
0.0277W 2
Ka L
W 5.5m / s
H
H
Ka
K L 0.64 0.128W 2
H
H
Recommended form for WQRSS reservoir model
K L 0.156W 0.63
W 4.1m / s
H
H
K
0.0269W 1.9
Ka L
W 4.1m / s
H
H
Reference
Chen, Kanwisher
(1963)
Cole and Buchak
(1995)
Banks (1975)
Smith (1978)
Ka
9
10
11
12
K L 0.0276W 2
Ka
H
H
K
0.0432W 2
Ka L
H
H
K
0.319W
Ka L
H
H
K L 0.398
W 1.6
H
H
K
0.155W 2
Ka L
W 1.6
H
H
Liss (1973)
Downing and Truesdale (1955)
Kanwisher (1963)
Yu et al (1977)
Ka
13
14
K L C1 C2W C3
Ka
H
H
W = wind speed, m s-1
Weiler (1974)
User defined relationship where:

W, m s-1 at 10 m
Ka, day-1
C1, C2, C3 are user defined
Figure B-25 shows how these formulations vary with wind speed.
The definition of wind speed was usually taken at an elevation of 10 m for these formulations. The
wind speed at 10 m elevation in the middle of a lake or reservoir, W10m, can be computed from that
measured at 10 m on land by using an approach from Fang and Stefan (1994).
W10 m Wz f ( fetch )
(B-41)
B-54
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
where:
Wz = wind speed measured at 10 m height on land, m/s
10
n
zo 2
zo1 5 ZB 4.6052
f ( fetch )
10
3ZB 9.2103
n
n
zo 1
zo 2
n
(B-42)
where:
zo1 = roughness of land (assume 0.01 m) (Kraus, 1972)

zo2 = roughness of water surface (assume 0.0001 m) (Ford and Stefan, 1980)
= thickness of wind boundary layer over smooth surface that is a function of the fetch
length (Elliot, 1958), m
ZB = 0.8 n
fetch
1.0718
2
The function f(fetch) varies from 1.056 for small lakes to 1.123 for large lakes. The fetch is the
length in m of the wind over the water surface from one bank to the other.
20
Eq 1
Eq 2
Eq 3
KL, m day-1
15
Eq 4
Eq 5
10
Eq 6
Eq 7
Eq 8
Eq 9
Eq 10
0
0
10
15
Eq 11
20
Eq 12
Wind speed, m s-1
Figure B-25. Variation of wind speed and KL for lake/reservoir equations.

Equations for correcting the wind speed to 10 m and accounting for fetch dependence are included
in the model. This dependence on measuring height, fetch, and wind speed is shown in Figure
B-26 and Figure B-27.
B-55
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
KINETICS
Wind corrected to 10 m, m s-1
8.5
8
7.5
7
6.5
6
5.5
5
0
10
15
20
Wind measuring height, m
Figure B-26. Wind speed of 5 m s-1 and a fetch of 5 km corrected to 10 m as a function of

measuring height on land.
6.2
6
5.8
5.6
5.4
5.2
5
0
5000
10000
15000
20000
25000
Fetch, m
Figure B-27. Wind speed of 5 m s-1 corrected to 10 m as a function of fetch.
B-56
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
10
15
20
25
Wind speed measured, m s-1
Figure B-28. Wind corrected to 10 m based on wind measured on land.
Estuarine Equations
For estuarine systems, Thomann and Mueller (1987) and Chapra (1997) suggest using any of the
wind formulations in Table B-17 or Equation 1 in Table B-15 using the mean tidal velocity over
a tidal cycle for the horizontal velocity. Table B-17 shows an additional formulation from Thomann
and Fitzpatrick (1982) for estuaries, as well as the approach of Covar (1976) for rivers. Since many
texts suggest using the mean tidal velocity, caution should be exercised in using these equations
since they are based on the instantaneous velocity in the model.
Table B-17. Reaeration equations for estuarine waterbody at 20oC.
#
Equation
Either Eq 1, 2 or 4 from Table B-15
K
0.728W 0.5 0.317W 0.0372W 2
U
Ka L
3.93 1.5
H
H
H
B-57
K a C1U C2 H C3
Comments
0.5 C 4W
H
Reference
Ka is determined based on
applicability criteria of each
of these 3 formulations
Covar (1976)
U, m s-1
this formula combines the
effect of wind from Banks
and Herrera (1977) and estuary tidal flow
Thomann and
Fitzpatrick (1982)
U, m s-1
H, m
W, m s-1 at 10 m
Ka, day-1
C1, C2, C3, and C4 - user defined parameters
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
KINETICS
Chu and Jirka (2003) reported on wind and stream flow induced reaeration and showed that for
cases where the time scale tidal flow is >> the time scale for reaeartion, then the reaeartion process
can be described as a steady process and the impacts of stream flow and wind can be additive using:
K L K Lb K Lw
Where KLb is the reaeration coefficient (or transfer velocity) due to bottom shear and KLw is the
reaeration coefficient due to wind in m/day.
K Lb
u*3b
2.150
h
0.25
Where h is the depth in cm, u*b
f
U , U is the mean water velocity, f is approximately 0.04.
8
K Lw u*a for smooth surfaces (u*a<20 cm/s)
4.38E 5 when ua* is in units of cm/s

2
for rough surfaces
K Lw u*a
1.83E 3 when ua* is in units of cm/s

u*a 0.01U10 (8 0.65U10 )1 / 2 from Wu (1980) and U10 is wind speed at 10 m in m/s and u*a is in m/s.
Reaeration Temperature Dependence

Reaeration temperature dependence is usually based upon an Arrhenius formulation:
K T K 20 T 20
(B-43)
where is 1.024. This dependency is based on the variation in molecular diffusivity as a function
of temperature. The molecular diffusivity of oxygen varies according to temperature based on the
following equation:
DO 2 4.58 E 11T 1.2 E 9
(B-44)
where:
DO2 = molecular diffusivity of oxygen, m2 sec-1

T = temperature, C
B-58
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Using Equation 1 in Table B-2, the variation of KL as a function of temperature using Equation B43 (assuming D is a constant) and B-44 yield similar results (Figure B-29).
No temperature correction was made to the calculated value of KL in earlier versions of the model.
The latest version includes the correction with theta set to 1.024.
Variation of KL with Temperature
Arrhenius theta=1.024
D as a f(T)
1.6
Ratio of KLT/KL20
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
Temperature, oC
Figure B-29. Variation of KLT/KL20 as a function of temperature.
Dam Reaeration
Many rivers and reservoirs have spillways or weirs over which water entrains oxygen into a pool
below the dam. This section outlines the approach for including oxygen entrainment at dams and
weirs.
Small Dams or Weirs
Many rivers have small spillways or weirs over which water flows that entrains oxygen. Table
B-18 lists formulae for predicting the entrainment of dissolved oxygen based on empirical data.
Table B-18. Formulae for small dam or weir reaeration effects.
Equation
1
D a Db 1
Da
1 0.11ab( 1 0.046T )H
or
Da
1 0.11ab( 1 0.046T )H
Db
Da Db 0.037 HDa
B-59
Da
Db
T
H
a
=
=
=
=
=
b
b
Da
Db
H
=
=
=
=
=
Comments
DO deficit above dam, g m3
DO deficit below dam, g m3
temperature, oC
height of water fall, ft
1.25 in clear to slightly polluted water
to 1.00 in polluted water
1.00 for weir with free flow
1.3 for step weirs or cascades
DO deficit above dam, g m-3
DO deficit below dam, g m-3
height of water fall, ft
Reference
Barrett et al.
(1960)
Mastropietro
(1968)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
KINETICS
Equation
Da
1 0.38 ab( 1 0.11H )( 1 0.046T )H
Db
Comments
only valid for dams less than 15 ft and T between 20 and 25oC
Da = DO deficit above dam, g m-3
Db = DO deficit below dam, g m-3
T = temperature, oC
H = height of water fall, m
a = 1.8 for clean water to 0.65 for gross
polluted water
b = 0.05 for sluice gates
b = 1.0 for sharp crested straight faced
weir
b = 0.45 for flat broad crested curved face
weir
b = 0.7 for flat broad crested weir with regular step
b = 0.8 for sharp crested vertical face weir
b = 0.6 for flat broad crested weir vertical
face
Reference
Butts and
Evans (1983)
Most of these equations have been used for dams or weirs with heights of fall between 3 and 10 m.
These equations do not generally predict supersaturation.
Large Dam Spillways/Gates
The USACE has been involved in gas abatement studies on the Columbia and Snake River system
for many years (WES, 1996, 1997). Some of their research efforts have been focused on development of models of gas generation from spillways. These empirical models have been called CriSP
1.6 (Columbia Basin Research, 1998). The gas production equations used in CriSP are empirical
correlations between total dissolved gas (TDG), usually measured a mile downstream of the dam
after turbulence from the spillway had subsided, and discharge, usually measured in kcfs. The form
of these equations is shown in Table B-19.
Table B-19. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production.
Equation type
Linear function of total spill
Bounded exponential of total spill
Bounded exponential of the spill

on a per spillway basis
Equation
Description of empirical coefficients
%TDG mQs b
Qs = total spill, kcfs

m = empirical coefficient
b = empirical coefficient
%TDG a be
cQs
Qs
a
b
c
=
=
=
=
total spill, kcfs

empirical coefficient
%TDG a be
cqs
qs
a
b
c
=
=
=
=
spill through an individual spillway, kcfs

Examples of some of these correlations are shown in Table B-20. In many cases, the %TDG in
these correlations was constrained to a maximum of 145% and when the flow reached only a few
kcfs, there was assumed to be no change in TDG from the forebay to the tailrace. Also, the correlations in Table B-20 sometimes changed from year to year based on changes in operating conditions or structural changes in the spillway or deflectors.
B-60
KINETICS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Table B-20. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production.

Dam
Equation
Bonneville
%TDG mQs b
m = 0.12, b = 105.61
Lower Granite
%TDG a be cqs
a = 138.0; b = -35.8; c = -0.10
Dworshak
%TDG a be cQs
a = 135.9; b = -71.1; c = -0.4787
Ice Harbor
%TDG a be
cQ s
a = 136.8; b = -42.0; c = -0.0340

a = 138.7; b = -79.0; c = -0.0591
a = 130.9; b = -26.5; c = -0.0220
a = 120.9; b = -20.5; c = -0.0230
%TDG a be cQs
a = 138; b = -36; c = -0.02

[Assumed relationship - no data]
Hell's Canyon
Coefficients
1995
1996
1997
1998
DO Impacts of Spillways
For each spillway, weir, or gate, the user now has the choice of equation to use for computing the
effects of hydraulic structures on downstream dissolved oxygen. The equations chosen are shown
in Table B-21. These equations are based on equations from Table B-18 and Table B-19.
Table B-21. Spillways and weirs reaeration
#
Equation type
Linear function of
spill on a per spillway
basis
Equation
%TDG aqs b
DO concentration, O2, is determined from
O2 %TDG s
%TDG a be qs
2
empirical coefficients
a and b
O2, is then determined from
O2 %TDG sat
Description of empirical coefficients

%TDG = % total dissolved gas saturation
qs = spill through an individual spillway, kcfs
a = empirical coefficient
S = dissolved oxygen saturation
qs = spill through an individual spillway,kcfs
a = empirical coefficient
b = empirical coefficient
c = empirical coefficient
sat = dissolved oxygen saturation
DO deficit below dam
temperature in oC
height of water fall, m
1.8 for clean water to 0.65 for gross
polluted water
b = 0.05 for sluice gates
1.0 for sharp crested, straight faced
weir
Da
Db
T
H
a
Reaeration effect for

a small height weir
or dam (<10 m)
empirical coefficients
a, b, and c
Da
1 0.38 ab( 1 0.11c )( 1 0.046T )c
Db
O2 below the dam is then computed from:
0.45 for flat, broad crested, curved

face weir
O 2 sat Db
sat
B-61
=
=
=
=
=
0.7 for flat, broad crested weir with

regular step
0.8 for sharp crested, vertical face
weir
0.6 for flat, broad crested weir with
vertical face
= dissolved oxygen saturation, g m-3
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
KINETICS
Note that for equations 1 and 2, the maximum TDG allowed is 145%. If TDG is computed to be
less than 100%, there is no effect of the spillway or gate on reaeration. For each spillway or gate
defined in the model, there is a section to define whether gas effects for dissolved oxygen are computed and, if so, by which formula.
For each spillway or weir, the user turns on the computations and then selects an equation number
from Table B-21. This algorithm only computes gas effects for flow from upstream to downstream.
There is no adjustment of dissolved oxygen for reverse flow.
Dissolved Oxygen Saturation Computations
The dissolved oxygen saturation is computed from Mortimers (1981) formulation:
O 2 sat Palte7.7117 1.31403lnT 45.93
(B-45)
where:
Palt
= altitude correction factor= 1
44.3
5.25
H = elevation of the waterbody, km above sea level

The saturation value is also a function of the chlorinity in saline environments. The following
equation is used to compute DO saturation for a saltwater waterbody type that includes salinity
effects (APHA, 1985; EPA 1985; Thomann and Mueller, 1987).
* O 2 sat e
1
3
ln O 2 sat S 1.7674 X 10 2 1.0754 X 10 2.1407 X 10
T
T2
(B-46)
where:
S = salinity, kg m-3
T = temperature, oK
Sediments
Organic sediment contributions to nutrients and dissolved oxygen demand are simulated using two
methods. The first method uses a constant, or zero-order, release and demand. This method has
been frequently used to model sediment demands and nutrient release rates. It does not depend on
sediment concentrations or require a separate sediment compartment. However, the formulation is
not predictive as the rates do not vary over time except as a result of temperature dependence of
the decay rate. As a consequence, results should be interpreted cautiously when evaluating effects
of different nutrient loadings on dissolved oxygen in a waterbody.
B-62
KINETICS
TOTAL INORGANIC CARBON
The second method uses a sediment compartment to accumulate organic sediments and allow their
decay. Nutrient releases and oxygen demand are thus dependent upon sediment accumulation a
1st-order process. However, there is no release of phosphorus or other diagenesis products when
overlying water is anoxic since this sediment compartment is labile, oxic decay of organics on the
sediment surface. A later version will include a fully predictive sediment diagenesis model. Either
of these methods, or a combination, may be used to simulate effects of organic sediments upon
water quality. However, caution must be exercised to avoid errors if both methods are used.
The 0-order process uses a specified sediment oxygen demand and anoxic release rates for phosphorus, ammonium, inorganic carbon, and iron that are temperature dependent. Nutrient releases
do not occur when dissolved oxygen concentrations are above a minimum value [O2LIM] nor do
they occur if the SOD is set to zero. The sediment contribution to inorganic carbon is computed as
a fraction of the sediment oxygen demand.
Inorganic C
Dissolved oxygen
uptake
Phosphate
Sediment
anoxic
release
Ammonium
Silica
Figure B-30. Internal flux between 0-order sediment compartment and other compartments.
CBOD
Dissolved oxygen
LPOM
settling
Sediment
Epiphyton
decay
Phosphate
Ammonium
mortality
RPOM
Inorganic C
decay
Algae
burial
settling
Silica
Figure B-31. Internal flux between 1st-order sediment compartment and other compartments.
The 1st-order sediment compartment requires specifying inclusion of this compartment in the simulation, a decay rate, and initial conditions. The sediment compartment is not transported, except
for focusing of sediments to the bottom by a user-defined settling velocity. Instead, a compartmental equation is written for the sediment compartment that is solved in the subroutine SEDIMENT.
Referring to Figure B-31, the equation for the 1st-order sediment compartment is:
B-63
SEDIMENT
KINETICS
A
A
A
S sed = POMR bottom POMR POML bottom POML + a bottom a - om K s s K epom K eb e

Volcell
Volcell
Volcell
sediment decay epiphyton burial

POMR sedimentation
POML sedimentation
algae sedimentation
SED Abottom
CBOD Abottom
s
CBOD - K
burial s
Volcell
Volcell
sediment burial
sediment sedimentation
CBOD sedimentation
(B-47)
where:
OM = rate multiplier for organic matter
z = model cell thickness, m

POM = POM settling velocity, m sec-1
a = algal settling velocity, m sec-1

SED = sediment settling velocity, m sec-1
LPOM = POM labile concentration, g m-3
RPOM = POM refractory concentration, g m-3
s = organic sediment concentration, g m-3
Volcell=
volume of computational cell, m3
Abottom=
Area of bottom, m2
e = ephiphyton concentration, g m-3
Kepom=fraction of ephiphyton that go to particulate fraction and settle into sediment at death
Kem =
ephiphyton mortality rate
Kburial= sediment burial rate, sec-1
Pauer and Auer (2000) claim that nitrification is generally a sediment based phenomena rather than
one existing in the water column. Their argument is based on the study of a samples obtained from
a hypereutrophic lake-river system which had extremely high ammonia concentrations (2-10 mg/l
NH3-N) and where cell counts indicated much higher nitrifier populations in the sediments rather
than in the water column. They question if nitrification is being modeled correctly in many water
quality models, where nitrification is treated as occurring in the water column rather than the sediments.
Nitrification rates of water column samples were measured in 2.5 L bottles kept in the dark at 20
Celsius. Rates of nitrification were to be determined by tracking concentrations of nitrogen species
in the bottles. Since no change in ammonia or nitrate-nitrite concentrations were noted, the authors
assumed that the lack of observable nitrification was due to low nitrifier populations occurring in
the water column of the lake and river. Sediment nitrification rates were measured using sediment
core samples under similar conditions. Changes in the concentrations of nitrogen species were
apparent and an average sediment nitrification rate of 0.34 g N/m2/day was determined. Table 22
summarizes the nitrification rates.
Table 22. Areal nitrification rates of sediment nitrifiers of Onondaga Lake and the Seneca
River, New York (Pauer and Auer, 2000).
B-64
KINETICS
Reaction
Source
Nitrification
Onondaga Lake, Seneca

River, New York
Growth Temperature
(Celsius)
20
Nitrification rate (g N/m 2/day)

0.21 to 0.67 (mean=0.34)
Sediment Variable Stoichiometry and Kinetics

Variable stoichiometry of sediments is done automatically within the W2 model. In addition to
sediment phosphorus and sediment nitrogen, there is also a sediment carbon compartment. The
sediment carbon stoichiometry is variable because organic matter, algae and epiphyton may have
differing carbon stoichiometry. The initial sediment stoichiometry for P, N, and C is based on the
given initial stoichiometry for organic matter. The decay rate of sediment in a model cell is the
mass averaged decay rate of the LPOM, RPOM, and the CBOD groups.
Sediment Phosphorus
A
A
A
S Psed = POMR bottom RPOM P POML bottom LPOM P + a bottom Pa a - om K s s P K epom K em Pe e

Vol
Vol
Volcell
cell
cell
sediment decay
epiphyton mortality
RPOM - P sedimentation
LPOM - P sedimentation
algae sedimentation
SED Abottom
sP
Volcell
where:
OM
= rate multiplier for organic matter
Pe = epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
Pa
= algal stoichiometric coefficient for phosphorus
z
a
= algal settling velocity, m sec-1
Ksed
a
LPOM-P = labile POM labile concentration, g m-3
RPOM-P = refractory POM concentration, g m-3
s-P
= sediment phosphorus concentration, g m-3
Volcell = volume of computational cell, m3
Abottom= Area of bottom, m2
Kepom= fraction of epiphyton that go to particulate fraction and settle into sediment at death
Kem = epiphyton mortality rate
B-65
KINETICS
Sediment Nitrogen
A
A
A
S Nsed = POMR bottom RPOM N POML bottom LPOM N + a bottom Na a - om K s s N K epom K em Ne e

Vol
Vol
Volcell
cell
cell
sediment decay
epiphyton mortality
RPOM - N sedimentation
LPOM - N sedimentation
algae sedimentation
SED Abottom
NO 3SED Abottom
sN
NO 3 N f NO 3 SED
Volcell
Volcell
diffusion of NO3 into sediments
where:
OM
Na
= algal stoichiometric coefficient for nitrogen
z
a
NO3 = NO3-N diffusion rate into sediments, m sec-1
Ksed
a
LPOM-N = labile POM concentration, g m-3
RPOM-N = refractory POM concentration, g m-3
NO3-N = NO3-N concentration, g m-3
s-N
= sediment nitrogen concentration, g m-3
fNO3-SED= fraction of NO3-N diffused into sediments that is incorporated into organic matter in the
sediments (the rest, 1- fNO3-SED, is denitrified into N2)
Sediment Carbon
A
A
A
SCsed = POMR bottom OM RPOM POML bottom OM LPOM + a bottom Ca a - om K s s C K epom K em Ce e

Vol
Vol
Volcell
cell
cell
sediment decay
epiphyton mortality
RPOM sedimentation
LPOM sedimentation
algae sedimentation
SED Abottom
s C
Volcell
where:
OM
B-66
KINETICS
Ce = epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for carbon

Ca
COM
= algal stoichiometric coefficient for carbon

=organic matter stoichiometric coefficient for carbon
z
a
Ksed
a
LPOM = labile POM carbon concentration, g m-3
RPOM = refractory POM carbon concentration, g m-3
s-C
= sediment carbon concentration, g m-3
Total Inorganic Carbon

Carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen are the most abundant elements in living matter and form the essential backbone of organic material. Inorganic carbon directly influences pH.
Macrophytes
Atmosphere
Sediment
photosynthesis
reaeration
RDOM
Algae
respiration
Epiphyton
Inorganic
Carbon
LDOM
decay
LPOM
respiration
RPOM
photosynthesis
Zooplankton
CBOD
Figure B-32. Internal flux between inorganic carbon and other compartments.
Referring to Figure B-32, the rate equation for total inorganic carbon is:
B-67
KINETICS
STIC = ( Kar - Kag ) C a a ( Ke r - Ke g ) C e e + K LPOM COM OM LPOM

net algal production
labile POM decay
net epiphyton production
+ K LDOM OM COM LCOM + K RDOM OM COM RDOM + K RPOM COM OM RPOM
labile DOM decay
A
+ Ks ed OM COM s ed + SOD OM COM sed + Asur K Lc (CO 2 - CO 2)

V
1st -order sediment release
reaeration
KCBODRCBOD C CBOD T 20 CBOD ( Km r - Km g ) C m macro

CBOD decay
net macrophyte production
K zr Czoo zoo zoo
(B-48)
where:
= temperature rate multiplier for BOD decay

OM = organic matter temperature rate multiplier
Ce = epiphyton stoichiometric coefficient for carbon

Ca = algal stoichiometric coefficient for carbon
COM = organic matter stoichiometric coefficient for carbon
C-CBOD= CBOD stoichiometric coefficient for carbon
RBOD = 5-day CBOD to ultimate CBOD ratio
Ased = sediment surface area, m2
Asur = surface area of surface computational cell, m2
SOD = sediment oxygen demand, g m-2 sec-1
KLc = inorganic carbon interfacial exchange rate, m sec-1
Ker = epiphyton dark respiration rate, sec-1
KCBOD = CBOD decay rate, sec-1
CBOD = CBOD concentration, g m-3
B-68
KINETICS
sed
TIC
CO2
CO2
= organic sediment concentration, g m-3

= inorganic carbon concentration, g m-3
= carbon dioxide concentration, g m-3
= carbon dioxide saturation concentration, g m-3
and the rate terms are evaluated in subroutine INORGANIC_CARBON.

The basic physics of gas transfer are the same for CO2 and O2. Using Higbie penetration theory,
the gas transfer coefficient for CO2 is related to that of oxygen by:
DCO 2
DO 2
KLCO 2 KLO 2
(B-49)
where:
KLCO2
KLO2
DCO2
DO2
= reaeration coefficient for CO2

= reaeration coefficient for oxygen
= molecular diffusion coefficient for CO2
= molecular diffusion coefficient for oxygen
Using the fact that the ratio of molecular diffusion coefficients of two gases A and B are related to
their molecular weights, MW (Thibedoux, 1996)
DA
DB
MWB
MWA
(B-50)
then
KLCO 2
MWO 2
KLO 2
MWCO 2
0.25
0.923KLO 2
(B-51)
Hence, the reaeration rate equations presented for oxygen transfer are applicable to CO2 transfer
using a factor of 0.923.
Carbon dioxide concentration for the interfacial exchange rate is determined from total inorganic
carbon and alkalinity in subroutine PH_CO2. The saturation concentration of carbon dioxide is
determined from:
(-0.0314 Ts ) Pa
CO 2 = 0.286 e
(B-52)
where:
CO2 = carbon dioxide saturation concentration, g m-3

Pa = altitude correction factor
Ts = surface cell water temperature, C
B-69
KINETICS
Altitude correction is from Mortimer, 1981:
Pa = 1 44.3
5.25
(B-53)
where:
H = reservoir elevation from sea level, km

TIC is in units of mg/l as C.
Alkalinity
Alkalinity provides an indication of the buffering capacity of aquatic systems and their resistance
to pH changes from acidic or alkaline loadings. Alkalinity is treated as conservative in the model
and its internal rate term is set to zero. Alkalinity, along with total inorganic carbon, is used to
determine pH and concentrations of carbonate species in subroutine PH_CO2.
In reality, alkalinity variations are common in most aquatic systems. Whitings, or large precipitations of carbonates, may occur. Sediment release of carbonates may increase alkalinity in the anoxic zones of many reservoirs. If these effects are important, a non-conservative model of alkalinity
should be added. Alkalinity is in units of mg/l as CaCO3.
pH and Carbonate Species

The pH and carbonate species are computed using water temperature, TDS or salinity, alkalinity,
and total inorganic carbon concentrations using basic carbonate relationships. Computed carbonate
species are carbon dioxide, bicarbonates, and carbonates. The pH and carbonate species are computed in subroutine PH_CO2. These materials are not subject to transport and are computed at
each water quality update interval.
Calculations performed by subroutine PH_CO2 are based on the carbonate-bicarbonate equilibrium
reaction (Stumm and Morgan 1981):
=
HCO3 CO3 + H
(B-54)
H 2 O H+ + OH-
(B-55)
These equilibria express the source of bicarbonate and carbonate ions, alkaline constituents, and
dissolution of atmospheric CO2 in water. Contribution of calcium and magnesium carbonate to
alkalinity is not included. The equilibrium state in terms of the equilibrium constants Ki is:
B-70
KINETICS
pH/CARBONATE SPECIES
[ H + ] [ HCO-3]
=
K1
[ H 2 CO3]
(B-56)
[ H + ] [CO3= ]
=
K2
[ HCO-3]
(B-57)
[ H + ] [OH -]
=
Kw
[ H 2 O]
(B-58)
where:
[X] = molar concentration, moles liter-1

[H2O] = unity (by definition)
Alkalinity is defined as:
ALK
= HCO-3 + 2 CO3= + OH- - H+
(B-59)
The following condition prevails for the dissolution of carbonic acid:
H2 CO3 + HCO-3 + CO3= = CONSTANT = CT
(B-60)
By combining equations B-53, B-54, and B-57, the quantities [HCO3-] and [CO3=] can be expressed in terms of [H+] and the constant CT. In addition, equation B-55 allows for [OH-] to be
expressed in terms of [H+]. When these expressions are included in equation B-56, the result is:
+
[ H + ] + 2 K2 K w
C
T [ H ] K1
ALK = +
+ + - [H+]
+
+ 2
[H ]
[H ]
[ H ] K1 + K1 K2 + [ H ]
(B-61)
The model interprets the constant CT as moles per liter of total inorganic carbon and assumes
[ALK] is known. Equation B-58 is iteratively solved in subroutine PH_CO2 until the value of [H+]
converges. The negative logarithm of [H+] is, by definition, pH.
Once equation B-58 has been solved for [H+], then [H2CO3] is given by:
[ H2 CO3] =
CT
(B-62)
1 + K+1 + K1 K22
[H ]
[ H+]
and is the same as [CO2]. Bicarbonate concentration is computed from:
B-71
KINETICS
[ HCO-3] =
1+
CT
[H+]
K1
(B-63)
+ K+2
[H ]
and carbonate from:
[CO3= ] =
C
[ ]
[ +]
1+ H
+ H
K1 K2
K2
T
+ 2
(B-64)
which are then converted to grams per cubic meter.

Equilibrium constants in the preceding equations are obtained by first expressing a thermodynamic
temperature dependence for a related constant, Ki*:
log K*i = a +
b
+ cT + d log T
T
(B-65)
The constants a, b, c, and d are:
Kw*
35.3944
-5242.39
-0.00835
K1*
14.8435
-3404.71
-0.03278
K2*
6.4980
-2902.39
-0.02379
11.8261
The relation between Ki and Ki* is obtained from the definition of the activity of a chemical species:
{X} = [ X ]
(B-66)
where:
{X} = activity of species X, moles liter-1
= dimensionless activity coefficient

[X] = concentration, moles liter-1
For the reaction:
A + BC + D
(B-67)
the equilibrium constant K* is:
B-72
KINETICS
{C} { D}
{ A } { B}
(B-68)
C [C] D [D] C D
=
K
A [A] B [B] A B
(B-69)
A B *
K
C D
(B-70)
*
K =
thus:
*
K =
K=
Activity coefficients are obtained from an extension of Debye-Huckel theory as:

2
- AZ I
Log =
+ k1 + k 2 I + k 3 I 2
1 + 0.33 a I
(B-71)
where:
I
Z
A
a
ki
= ionic strength
= ionic charge
= approximately 0.5 for water at 25C
= ionic size parameter
= empirical coefficients
Ionic strength is approximated as (Sawyer and McCarty 1967):
I = 2.5 x 10 -5 TDS
(B-72)
I = 0.00147 + 0.019885 sal + 0.000038 sal 2
(B-73)
or for salinity:
where:
TDS = total dissolved solids, g m-3

sal = salinity, kg m-3
Values of the other parameters are:
HCO-3
B-73
k1
0.0047
k2
0.042
k3
-0.0093
CO=3
KINETICS
4.5
0.0121
0.0972
-0.0207
Activity coefficients for [H+], [OH-], [H2CO3], and [H2O] are treated as special cases:
H + H 2 O 1
(B-74)
H 2 CO3 = OH - =0.0755I
(B-75)
Temperature Rate Multipliers

Most biological and chemical rates are temperature dependent. Subroutine RATE_MULTIPLIERS
calculates the temperature dependence for all rates. It is called after the temperature solution so
the temperature of the current computational interval is used.
A representative rate multiplier function is shown in Figure B-33 with its K and T parameters. The
curve represents how biological process rates exhibit an optimum range and diminish asymmetrically at higher and lower temperatures (Thornton and Lessem, 1978).
T = 0
(T-
whe re T T 1
( T -T)
T1
1
K
K4 e 2 4
1e
whe re T 1 < T < T 4
T =
1 + K 1 e 1 (T-T 1 ) - K 1 1 + K 4 e 2 ( T 4 -T) - K 4
ar
af
T = 0
(B-76)
whe re T T 4
where:
ar =
1
(1 - K 1 )
ln K 2
T 2 - T1
K 1 (1 - K 2 )
af =
1
(1 - K 4 )
ln K 3
T4 - T3
K 4 (1 - K 3 )
ar and af are the rising and falling limb temperature multipliers.
B-74
KINETICS
TEMPERATURE RATE MULTIPLIERS
The user supplies temperatures T1 to T4 and multiplier factors K1 to K4. Temperatures T1 and T4
represent mortality limits, and T2 and T3 are used to define the optimum range. Maximum reaction
rates supplied by the user are multiplied by T to determine rates corresponding to the water temperature of a model cell. For non-algae temperature rate multipliers, only the K1 and K2 corresponding to T1 and T2 are used.
1
35, 0.99
25, 0.99
Temperature multiplier
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
5, 0.1
40, 0.1
0.1
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Temperature, oC
Figure B-33. Temperature rate multiplier function.
B-75
Appendix C Input/Output Data

Description
Input file format has been developed for a full-screen text editor. Each input file begins with two
lines used for file identification that are ignored by the program. The rest of the input file consists
of groups of three lines - the first line is blank serving as a separator, the second line contains the
card identification and the FORTRAN variable names associated with the input card, and the third
line contains the input values. The identifier card is only checked by the pre-processor code. FORTRAN names are right justified according to the field widths associated with the input variable.
There are 10 input fields associated with each card although the first field is not used in several of
the input files. Each field has a length of eight characters.
Input Files
Control File
The control file [CONFN] contains the variables used to run the model. There are no optional
cards in the control file - each card is required although there may be either zero or no values
associated with the card. The following pages contain a description of each card. All character
inputs must be capitalized except the TITLE cards and input/output filenames or the variable will
take on the default value. An example of a portion of a control file is given with each card description and a complete control file is given at the end of the control file description. Hyperlinks to
related input cards are included at the bottom of each card description.
C-1
Appendix C Input/Output Data Description
TITLE CARDS
CONTROL FILE
Title (TITLE C)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TITLE
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Text for identification of simulation
There are 10 title cards for each a simulation that can be used to identify various types of output.
Each line may contain up to 72 characters of text. Title cards appear in every output file except for
the restart file. Uses for the title cards include identifying the simulation, the simulation time frame,
the date the simulation was run, and other information specific to the simulation. A few words of
wisdom - the user should be conscientious in updating the title cards for each simulation.
Example
TITLE C
Card 1
Card 2
Card 3
Card 4
Card 5
Card 6
Card 7
Card 8
Card 9
Card 10
..............................TITLE.....................................
Version 3 Example Model
PSU CE-QUAL-W2 Workshop Problem 7
River with 2 branches
Reservoir
Estuary
River Sloping Channels 2 Branches
Temperature Mitigation Problem
Temperature and residence time simulation
Scott Wells - PSU
Tom Cole - WES
C-2
CONTROL FILE
ARRAY DIMENSIONS
Grid Dimensions (GRID)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NAME
NWB
NBR
IMX
KMX
NPROC
CLOSEC
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Integer
Number of waterbodies in the computational grid
Integer
Number of branches in the computational grid
Integer
Number of segments in the computational grid
Integer
Number of layers in the computational grid
Integer
Number of processors to use for computation
ON or OFF Close the W2 Windows dialog box at the end of simulation (ON)
or keep it open (OFF)
This card defines the computational grid including the total number of waterbodies [NWB],
branches [NBR], segments [IMX], and layers [KMX]. These values are used to define the array
dimensions in the code since the code has been converted over to FORTRAN 90 and now takes
advantage of dynamic array allocation. This eliminates the need to recompile the code for each
application.
Since Version 3.6, the code uses some OPENMP commands for parallelization. In recent testing,
the code achives up to a 20% improvement in speed by choosing 2 processors over 1 processor.
Using more than 2 can often degrade system performance. You may want to test to see if your
model runs faster using any number of processors. [NPROC] sets the number of physical processors
the model uses. We recommend starting with [NPROC]=1.
[CLOSEC] is a control that allows the W2 windows dialog box to remain open at the end of a
simulation (OFF) or to close at the end of a run (ON). Setting [CLOSEC]=OFF, at the end of a
windows run, the windows dialog box waits for the user to press close to exit the window. This
allows the user to examine the final run parameters. Setting [CLOSEC]=ON allows the window
dialog box to close when the run has completed. This allows for efficient batch processing of the
model, especially in conjunction with command line processing.When [CLOSEC] is set to ON,
then the dialog box will disappear once the run finishes. If it is set to OFF, then the dialog box will
remain until the user clicks close.
Example
GRID
NWB
3
NBR
4
IMX
43
KMX
24
NPROC
2
CLOSEC
OFF
Related Cards and Files

Inflow/Outflow Dimensions
Constituent Dimensions
Miscellaneous Dimensions
C-3
ARRAY DIMENSIONS
CONTROL FILE
Inflow/Outflow Dimensions (IN/OUTFLOW)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NAME
VALUE
NTR
NST
NIW
NWD
NGT
NSP
NPI
NPU
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Number of tributaries
Number of structures
Number of internal weirs
Number of withdrawals
Number of gates
Number of spillways
Number of pipes
Number of pumps
This card defines the variables used to dimension the arrays for tributaries, internal weirs, and inflow/outflow hydraulic structures including lateral withdrawals, outlet gates, spillways, pipes, and
pumps. All variables should be set to zero if they are not used.
Example
IN/OUTFLOW
NTR
1
NST
3
NIW
1
NWD
0
NGT
1
NSP
2
NPI
1
NPU
0

Grid Dimensions
Tributaries
Structures
Weirs
Withdrawals
Gates
Spillways
Pipes
Pumps
C-4
CONTROL FILE
ARRAY DIMENSIONS
Constituent Dimensions (CONSTITUENTS)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NAME
VALUE
NGC
NSS
NAL
NEP
NBOD
NMC
NZP
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Number of generic constituents
Number of inorganic suspended solids
Number of algal groups
Number of epiphyton/periphyton groups
Number of CBOD groups
Number of macrophyte groups
Number of zooplankton groups
This card defines the array dimensions for the number of generic constituents, inorganic suspended
solids groups, algal groups, CBOD groups, macrophyte groups and zooplankton groups. The user
has complete freedom to include as many of these groups as data are available for and the application warrants.
The generic constituent allows the user the freedom to model any number of constituents that can
be defined using a 0-order decay rate and/or a 1st- order decay rate and/or a settling velocity and/or
an Arhennius temperature rate multiplier. Version 2 state variables that fall into the generic category include tracer and coliform. Thus, any number of tracers or coliform groups can be modeled.
Additionally, residence time can be modeled in this group by setting the 0-order decay rate to -1.0
and setting all other kinetic parameters to zero.
The ability to model any number of CBOD groups now allows the model to characterize and track
any number of point sources of CBOD. This should prove useful in determining which point
source(s) is/are contributing to depressed dissolved oxygen levels or violations in a system and
allow better understanding of what management strategies could be used to improve dissolved oxygen.
Care should be taken when including multiple algal, epiphyton, zooplankton, and macrophyte
groups to ensure that the data are sufficient to describe their variation in the system. As a general
rule, it is better to start with as simple a description of the kinetics in a system that still allows the
model to capture the important temporal and spatial changes in water quality.
Example
CONSTITU
NGC
3
NSS
1
NAL
3
NEP
1
NBOD
1
NMC
1
NZP
1

Grid Dimensions
C-5
ARRAY DIMENSIONS
CONTROL FILE
Miscellaneous (MISCELL)
FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
HABTATC Character
5
6
ENVIRPC Character
AERATEC Character
INITUWL
NDAY
Integer
SELECTC Character
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Maximum number of output dates or timestep related changes
Turn ON/OFF automatic port selection from a multiple outlet
structure where level is chosen by model to reach temperature
target
Turn ON/FF habitat analyses for fish and eutrophication variables
Turn ON/OFF environmental performance criteria
Turn ON/OFF aeration to waterbody with dissolved oxygenprobe control
Turn ON/OFF initial water surface slope and velocity calculation for a river system
This card defines several variables that turn ON or OFF features of the code first implemented in
Version 3.7. NDAY is the maximum number of output dates that will be used in the simulation.
This should be the maximum of timestep, snapshot, screen, profile, vector, contour, time series,
withdrawal, and restart number of dates that are used to define when output frequencies, or, in the
case of the timestep related cards, when the maximum timestep or the fraction of the timestep
change. This can easily be set to a value greater than any anticipated number of dates without any
impact as the memory used by these variables is trivial. The user should use 100 as a default. There
often is no reason to ever change this value.
SELECTC is a control that turns ON or OFF the use of the automatic port selection for a multiple
outlet withdrawal structure at a downstream end of a branch. If this is ON, the model then reads the
control file for this feature, w2_selective.npt. This allows the user to let the model decide what
outlet to use to meet temperature targets. Please see the section on the automatic port selection
control file in Appendix C for a description of its features.
HABTATC is a control that turns ON or OFF the fish habitat analysis and other useful analyses for
eutrophication studies. If this is ON, the model then reads the control file for this feature, w2_habitat.npt. Please see the section on the habitat control file in Appendix C for a description of its
features.
ENVIRPC is a control that turns ON or OFF the environmental performance analysis for userchosen model state variables. This feature allows for temporal and volume-weighted averages of
and histograms of specified state variables. If this is ON, the model then reads the control file for
this feature, w2_envirpc.npt. Please see the section on the environmental performance control
file in Appendix C for a description of its features.
AERATEC is a control that turns ON or OFF aeration at specifed segments and layers. If this is
ON, the model then reads the control file for this feature, w2_aerate.npt. Please see the section
on the aeration control file in Appendix C for a description of its features.
INITUWL is a control that turns ON or OFF a computation of the initial water level and the initial
velocity of the river. A computation of the normal depth and initial velocity is made for any branch
C-6
CONTROL FILE
ARRAY DIMENSIONS
with a non-zero slope. This normal depth profile is used instead of the water surface profile given
in the bathymetry file. The theory for this is described in Appendix A in the User Manual. A typical
CE-QUAL-W2 application starts with velocity set to zero in the domain at the initial time. If
INITUWL is ON, then the velocity at normal depth is computed and used as the initial velocity.
This allows smoother running of the river models. When INITUWL is turned ON, the CE-QUALW2 model also writes out a file that shows the initial water surface elevations, normal depths, and
velocities it computed for the first time step. These are found in an output file called,
init_wl_u_check.dat.
Example
MISCELL
NDAY SELECTC HABTATC ENVIRPC AERATEC INITUWL

100
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF

Grid Dimensions
Control File for selective withdrawal
Control File for habitat
Control File for environmental performance
Control File for aeration
C-7
TIME CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Time Control (TIME CON)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
TMSTRT
TMEND
YEAR
Real
Real
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Starting time, Julian day
Ending time, Julian day
Starting year
The simulation starting and ending times are specified with this card. When making a simulation
extending into another year, the ending time is calculated as 365 (or 366 for a leap year) + Julian
date of ending time. Midnight, January 1 starts at Julian day 1.0 in the model.
Example
TIME CON
TMSTRT
63.5
TMEND
64.5
YEAR
1980
C-8
CONTROL FILE
TIME CONTROL
Timestep Control (DLT CON)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
NDT
DLTMIN
DLTINTR
Integer
Real
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Number of timestep intervals
Minimum timestep, sec
Turn ON or OFF time step interpolation between DLTMIN time
steps
The number of timestep intervals, minimum timestep, and whether interpolation is used between
those time steps [NDT] are specified on this card.
The autostepping algorithm calculates a maximum timestep based on an estimate of hydrodynamic
numerical stability requirements and then uses a fraction of this value for the actual timestep. The
user can specify any number of intervals up to the value specified for [NDAY] on the Miscellaneous Dimensions card in which the maximum timestep and fraction of the timestep can vary. The
values are specified on the next three cards.
This option is useful during periods of very low flow where the timestep is very large. Under these
conditions, small changes in flow will result in large timestep changes that can lead to an excessive
number of timestep violations detected by the autostepping algorithm. The model automatically
adjusts the timestep to ensure that it is never greater than the next time varying update, so the
maximum timestep can be set to a value greater than the minimum time varying data update frequency.
The minimum timestep is useful during periods of extremely high flows. In these instances, the
timestep could become too small to economically run the model. Care should be taken when using
this variable as the model may become numerically unstable if the minimum value is set too high.
The default value of 1 sec should not be increased unless the user is absolutely certain that this will
not affect numerical stability. Minimum values as low as 0.1 s have been used for river systems.
In Version 3.7 and forward, the option of interpolating the maximum time steps [DLTMAX] and
DLTF by setting DLTINTR to ON is available. For V3.6 and before, only step changes were available in the specifying DLTMAX and DLTF. Turning interpolation on, DLTINTR= ON, allows
for a smoother transition between changes in DLTMAX and DLTF.
Example
DLT CON
NDT
2
MINDLT
1.0
DLTINTR
ON

Timestep Date
Maximum Timestep
Timestep Fraction
Timestep Limitation
C-9
TIME CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Timestep Date (DLT DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DLTD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Beginning of timestep interval, Julian day
The intervals for the maximum timestep are specified on this card. Any number of intervals up to
the value of [NDAY] on the Miscellaneous Dimensions card can be specified. If there are more
intervals than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another
DLT DATE card being specified.
Example
DLT DATE
DLTD
63.5
DLTD
63.52
DLTD
DLTD
DLTD
DLTD
DLTD
DLTD
DLTD

Timestep Control
Maximum Timestep
Timestep Fraction
Timestep Limitation
C-10
CONTROL FILE
TIME CONTROL
Maximum Timestep (DLT MAX)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DLTMAX
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Maximum timestep, sec
The maximum timestep for intervals provided on the timestep interval card are specified with this
card. If there are more intervals than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the
next line without another DLT MAX card being specified.
Example
DLT MAX
DLTMAX
30.0
DLTMAX
100.0
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLTMAX

Timestep Control
Timestep Date
Timestep Fraction
Timestep Limitation
C-11
TIME CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Timestep Fraction (DLT FRN)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DLTF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Fraction of calculated maximum timestep necessary for numerical stability
The fraction of the calculated maximum timestep for intervals given on the timestep interval card
is specified here. If there are more intervals than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another DLT FRN card being specified. If the number of timestep
violations exceeds 5%, either [DLTMAX] on the Maximum Timestep card or [DLTF] should be
decreased.
Decreasing [DLTF] usually decreases the number of timestep violations without affecting the maximum timestep that the model can use. Thus, during times of low velocities, the model can still use
the maximum timestep, but during periods of high velocities, the model will use a smaller timestep
than if [DLTF] were set to a higher value.
Example
DLT FRN
DLTF
0.9
DLTF
0.9
DLTF
DLTF
DLTF
DLTF
DLTF
DLTF
DLTF

Timestep Control
Timestep Date
Maximum Timestep
Timestep Limitation
C-12
CONTROL FILE
TIME CONTROL
Timestep Limitations (DLT LIMIT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
VISC
Character
CELC
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Turns ON/OFF vertical eddy viscosity limitation on timestep
calculated in autostepping algorithm
Turns ON/OFF internal gravity wave limitation on timestep calculated in autostepping algorithm
This card specifies whether the effects of the vertical eddy viscosity and/or the internal gravity
wave are included in the autostepping algorithm. Separate values are specified on a separate card
for each waterbody.
If the average timestep is very small, these can be turned OFF to decrease runtimes. However,
care should be taken when using this option as experience has shown that, in certain applications,
turning these OFF can affect the results. If either of these variables are turned OFF, the user should
also make a run with them turned ON to see if this option affects the results. Results should never
be a function of the timestep or grid spacing.
Example
DLT LIMIT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
VISC
ON
ON
ON
CELC
ON
ON
ON

Timestep Control
Timestep Date
Maximum Timestep
Timestep Fraction
C-13
GRID DEFINITION
FILE
CONTROL
Branch Geometry (BRANCH G)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
7
8
NAME
VALUE
US
DS
UHS
DHS
UQB
DQB
NLMIN
SLOPE
SLOPEC
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Branch upstream segment
Branch downstream segment
Upstream boundary condition
Downstream boundary condition
Upstream internal flow boundary condition - IGNORE
Downstream internal flow boundary condition - IGNORE
Minimum number of layers for a segment to be active
Branch bottom slope (actual)
Hydraulic equivalent branch slope
This card specifies the branch location in the grid and branch boundary conditions. No distinction
is made between waterbodies. The mainstem of the first waterbody is always branch 1 and the
mainstem of subsequent waterbodies is always the next branch after all branches have been numbered for the previous waterbody. Side branches for a given waterbody can be ordered in any
fashion, but it is good practice to order the remaining branches starting with the most upstream
branch and continuing downstream.
The branch upstream segment number [US] is the most upstream potentially active segment. For
branch 1, this would always be segment 2. The branch downstream segment number [DS] is the
most downstream active segment. The boundary segment is never included for either the upstream
or downstream segment.
Four upstream and downstream boundary conditions can be specified. Boundary conditions along
with the upstream head segment [UHS] and downstream head segment [DHS] values that specify
these conditions are:
Boundary type [UHS] and/or [DHS]
External head
-1
External/internal flow
0
Internal head
>0
Dam flow-only for [UHS] <-1 [only for receiving a structure flow from another branch]
For internal head boundary conditions between branches or dam flow boundary conditions between
waterbodies, [UHS] and/or [DHS] correspond to the branch segment the branch attaches to. In the
following example, branch 1 consists of segments 2 through 6 and attaches to branch 2 at segment
9. Branch 2 consists of segments 9 through 14 and attaches at segment 6 in branch 1 and segment
17 at branch 3. See Chapter 3 for additional information on the computational grid setup. The
current version does not use the [UQB] and [DQB] variables ignore these fields. A later version
may use these to define internal flow boundary conditions. Any internal flow such as a structure
flow will have a 0 value for [DHS]. For the receiving branch, a negative number corresponding to
the structure segment number is specified for [UHS]. This is only when there is a structure flow
specified as the downstream outflow of a corresponding branch, in other words you must specify
the DS value of a corresponding branch. This allows that specified structure flow to go into the
upstream segment of a downstream branch. If you use any hydraulic elements, such as spillways,
C-14
CONTROL FILE
GRID DEFINITION
pumps, pipes, gates, you would not use a negative value. You would use a flow boundary condition,
i.e., zero for UHS or DHS. The spillways, pumps, pipes, and gates have their own specification for
where the flow is directed.
The following example is taken from the example control file of the Spokane River/Long Lake in
Washington, USA. Branches one through four represent sloping river sections that are linked in
series since the downstream head segment number [DHS=13 for branch one] is the upstream segment number [US=13 for branch 2] of the next branch and the upstream head segment number
[UHS=10 for branch 2] is the downstream segment number [DS=10 for branch 1] of the preceeding
branch. Similar linkage occurs for branches two to three and three to four. Branch four, however,
has a downstream head [DHS] set to 0, indicating either an internal (spillway or gate) or external
(outlet structure) flow boundary condition. Branch 6 inflow is from the structure release from
Branch 5; this structure outflow is a given, known flow rate, not one computed in the model.
In this example, branch four is connected to branch 5 via an internal flow from a spillway and the
linkage is specified on the spillway card in the sample control file. Note though that branch 5 must
be a separate waterbody with its own value of EBOT (see next card) since there is no way to define
the elevations of the grid with another branch since it has no linkage specified.
SLOPEC is the hydraulic equivalent slope of the model branch. In many cases the actual slope of
the channel (SLOPE) is not the correct equivalent hydraulic slope, since this may be punctuated by
falls and riffles. SLOEPC is used in the momentum equation to determine the acceleration of a
parcel of fluid for that branch rather than SLOPE. SLOPE is though critical for linking the model
system together with correct elevations.
Example
BRANCH G
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
US
2
13
27
39
51
67
76
89
97
131
138
154
DS
10
24
36
48
64
73
86
94
128
135
151
188
UHS
0
10
24
36
0
-64
73
-86
94
0
135
-151
DHS
13
27
39
0
0
76
0
97
0
138
0
0
UQB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DQB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SLOPE
0.00181
0.00152
0.00328
0.00142
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00256
0.00208
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
SLOPEC
0.00181
0.00100
0.00200
0.00142
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00150
0.00100
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000

Bathymetry File
Branch Inflow File
Branch Inflow Temperature File
Branch Inflow Concentration File
Branch Outflow File
Branch External Upstream Head Elevation File
Branch External Upstream Head Temperature File
Branch External Upstream Head Concentration File
Branch External Downstream Head Elevation File
Branch External Downstream Head Temperature File
Branch External Downstream Head Concentration File
C-15
GRID DEFINITION
FILE
CONTROL
Waterbody Definition (LOCATION)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NAME
VALUE
LAT
LONG
EBOT
BS
BE
JBDN
Real
Real
Real
Integer
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Latitude, degrees
Longitude, degrees
Bottom elevation of waterbody, m
Starting branch of waterbody
Ending branch of waterbody
Downstream branch of waterbody
This card specifies the waterbody latitude and longitude, bottom reference elevation, starting and
ending branches of the waterbody, and the downstream most branch of the waterbody that connects
to the next waterbody. The bottom elevation is used to tie computed water surface elevations to an
external benchmark (e.g., m above sea level) and represents the elevation at the bottom of the bottommost active cell. This elevation is defined at the mid-point of a model cell.
The model was set up for LONG W and LAT N coordinates as being positive. Hence one would
start at Grenwich as 0 and go 360 deg toward the West, or go negative toward the east - either
approach is OK. Remember that this specification of LONG and LAT only affects internal short
wave solar calculation and shading calculations. Hence, if one reads in short wave solar radiation
and does not have dynamic shading calcualtions, LAT and LONG will not be used.
[JBDN] specifies the downstream branch from which [EBOT] is referenced. In the case of a complicated grid, this is the starting elevation for tying the rest of the elevation of the grid together.
[EBOT] is the elevation of the bottom of the bottommost active layer in the computational grid
[KMX]. Figure C-34 and Figure C-35 show [EBOT] for a sloping river and a reservoir, respectively.
For a sloping river , [EBOT] would generally be located at the most downstream segment in the
section. [EBOT] is defined as the elevation of KMX-1 of DS(JBDN). EBOT would be defined at
the segment center for a sloping domain.
Example
LOCATION
WB 1
WB 2
WB 3
LAT
45.44
45.44
45.44
LONG
122.18
122.18
122.18
EBOT
36.00
0.00
-8.00
BS
1
3
4
BE
2
3
4
JBDN
2
3
4
C-16
CONTROL FILE
GRID DEFINITION
Figure C-34. Layer numbers and segments for a sloping waterbody where segment 9 is the
last active segment of the waterbody. EBOT is 268.82 m, which is the lowest elevation in the
waterbody and is the bottom elevation of layer 13 or KMX-1 (where KMX=14).
Figure C-35. Layer numbers and segments for a branch with a zero slope where segment
37 is the last active segment of the branch. EBOT for this waterbody is 261.21 m and is the
bottom elevation of layer 13 or KMX-1 (where KMX=14).
C-17
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Initial Conditions (INIT CND)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
T2I
Real
ICETHI
Real
WTYPEC Character
GRIDC
Character
DEFAULT
FRESH
RECT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Initial temperature, C
Initial ice thickness, m
Waterbody type
Either RECT or TRAP specifying the
interpretation of the bathymetry as either
rectangular cells or trapezoidal cells
This card specifies the initial temperature and ice thickness, and waterbody type. Initial temperature can be specified as either a single value, a single vertical profile used to initialize every segment, or a vertical profile for each segment.
Initial condition
1. Isothermal
2. Single vertical profile
3. Vertical profile at each segment
[T2I]
> or =0
-1.0
-2.0
If option 2 or 3 is chosen, then the user must specify input files [VPRFN] or [LPRFN] containing
the profile(s).
Initial ice thickness [ICETHI] is ignored if ice computations are turned off.
The waterbody type [WTYPEC] is either FRESH or SALT. If [WTYPEC] is set to SALT, then
constituent computations [CCC] should be turned on and salinity should be included in the computations. This affects the equation of state used in the model and the units of TDS (if FRESH,
g/m3 or mg/l) or SALINITY (if SALT, kg/m3). The equation of state for both FRESH and SALT is
shown in Appendix A.
Starting with Version 3.7, the model user can specify that the grid can be interpreted as trapezoidal
rather than rectangular. Trapezoidal cells have the advantage of smoother water level change especially in a river leading to faster run times and stability.
The computational grid system used by CE-QUAL-W2 prior to Version 3.7 was a rectangular
grid system, a basic cross-section of which is show in Figure 36. This grid system is ideal for waterbodies characterized by gradual changes in surface area with depth, such as lakes, reservoirs,
and some larger rivers. In cases where small changes in water elevation result in large changes in
surface area, however, the rectangular grid system can lead to numerical instability issues that require low maximum time steps and can impact processes on the air-water interface.
C-18
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Figure 36. Cross-section of current rectangular grid system

Two possible solutions to make the layer change smooter is illustrated in Figure 37. The first
approach involves decreasing layer thickness to create a more gradually sloping shoreline. This
would entail increasing the number of layers which could considerably increase computational
time. The second approach involves converting the rectangular grid to a trapezoidal grid. This
solution not only results in increased stability and more realistic bank geometry, but it also allows
for smooth changes in surface area while maintaining the same volume-elevation relationship in
the channel as the original rectangular grid. (This approach makes it possible to retrofit older
models without the necessity of recreating all the bathymetry and grid files.)
Figure 37. Various solutions to fitting a cross-section trapezoidal layers compared to multiple rectangular layers.
Hence, the bathymetry will still be based on average widths at cell centers as shown above, but will
be interpreted as either rectangles or trapezoids.
Example
INIT CND
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
C-19
T2I
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
ICETHI
0.0
0.0
0.0
WTYPEC
FRESH
FRESH
FRESH
GRIDC
RECT
RECT
RECT
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE

Constituent Computations
Constituent Initial Concentration
Vertical Profile File
Longitudinal Profile File
Ice Cover
C-20
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Calculations (CALCULAT)
FIELD
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
VBC
EBC
MBC
PQC
EVC
PRC
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Volume balance calculation, ON or OFF
Thermal energy balance calculation, ON or OFF
Mass balance calculation, ON or OFF
Density placed inflows, ON or OFF
Evaporation included in water budget, ON or OFF
Precipitation included, ON or OFF
This card specifies whether the model performs certain optional calculations. Calculations are
turned on or off by right justifying ON or OFF in the input field.
Volume balance calculations are useful during initial runs as a check to ensure the model is preserving continuity and should always be used as a check if the user modifies the code. In order to
reduce roundoff errors, the volume balance algorithm accumulates spatial and temporal changes in
volume over time and uses these for comparison. Once the user is satisfied the model is running
correctly, volume balance calculations should be turned off to reduce computational time.
Thermal energy and mass balance calculations are similar in use to volume balance calculations.
They should be used initially to ensure the model is running properly and turned off for further
calculations. When this option is used, mass balances are performed for each constituent if constituent computations are turned on. Mass balances are not computed if only temperature is modeled. These balances are only written out to the Snapshot [SNP] file.
There are two options for distributing mainstem and branch inflows. The default is inflows distributed evenly into each layer from top to bottom. If [PQC] is turned ON, then inflows are matched
up with the layer(s) whose density most closely corresponds to inflow density.
If precipitation is specified, then the user must supply input files for precipitation and precipitation
temperature. If constituents are being modeled, then the user must supply an input file for constituent concentrations included in the simulation. The Precipitation Active Constituent Control
card specifies which concentrations are included. If all precipitation constituents are turned OFF,
then the precipitation constituent concentration input file is not required.
Evaporation rates are sometimes accounted for in estimating the inflow record, such as when net
inflows are computed from outflows and water surface elevations. If so, then [EVC] should be set
to OFF. Evaporation is always considered in the surface heat exchange calculations.
C-21
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Example
CALCULAT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
VBC
ON
ON
ON
EBC
ON
ON
ON
MBC
ON
ON
ON
PQC
OFF
OFF
OFF
EVC
OFF
OFF
OFF
PRC
OFF
OFF
OFF

Precipitation Active Constituent Control
Branch Inflow File
Tributary Inflow File
Precipitation File
C-22
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Dead Sea (DEAD SEA)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
WINDC
QINC
QOUTC
HEATC
Character
Character
Character
Character
ON
ON
ON
ON
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Turn ON/OFF wind
Turn ON/OFF all sources of water
Turn ON/OFF all sinks of water
Turn ON/OFF heat exchange
This card has been used primarily during model development debugging. It is in the release version
because it can be useful in evaluating relative effects of the hydrodynamic forcing functions and
also as a debugging tool if the user decides to modify the code. Occasionally in estuarine applications, temperature is treated conservatively with the initial and boundary conditions set at a constant
temperature with bottom and surface heat exchange turned off, although it is not recommended.
Example
DEAD SEA
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
C-23
WINDC
ON
ON
ON
QINC
ON
ON
ON
QOUTC
ON
ON
ON
HEATC
ON
ON
ON
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Interpolation (INTERPOL)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
QINIC
Character
ON
DTRIC
Character
ON
HDIC
Character
ON
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Interpolate inflows, inflow temperatures, and inflow constituent concentrations, ON or OFF
Interpolate distributed tributary inflows and inflow
temperatures and constituent concentrations, ON
or OFF
Interpolate head boundary elevations and boundary temperatures and constituent concentrations,
ON or OFF
These options control whether time-varying data are input as a step function or linearly interpolated
between data points. The latest version now gives the user control over inflow, distributed tributary
inflow, and external head boundary elevations for each branch. If interpolation is used, then the
user must ensure it is appropriate and the input data supply correct information. Many reservoirs
have periods of no releases. If outflow interpolation is turned on, then input data must be set up so
no outflow occurs during these periods. This is accomplished by including extra dates in the outflow file with zero outflows to ensure the interpolation routine yields zero outflows. For example,
given the following outflow time-series in the branch outflow file [QOTFN]:
JDAY
100.00
110.00
120.00
QOT
50.0
0.0
50.0
If interpolation is not used, then outflow from Julian day 100 to 110 is 50 m3 sec-1, from Julian day
110 to 120 is 0.0 m3 sec-1, and 50 m3 sec-1 thereafter. If interpolation is turned on, then outflow
linearly decreases from Julian day 100 to 110 and then increases from Julian day 110 to 120. To
ensure no outflow occurs between day 110 and 120 with interpolation on, the outflow file should
be setup as follows:
JDAY
100.0000
109.9999
110.0000
119.9999
120.0000
QOT
50.0
50.0
0.0
0.0
50.0
Example
INTERPOL
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
QINIC
ON
ON
ON
ON
DTRIC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HDIC
ON
ON
ON
ON
C-24
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS

Branch Inflow File
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow File
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow Temperature File
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow Concentration File
Branch External Upstream Head Concentration File
C-25
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Heat Exchange (HEAT EXCH)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SLHTC
Character
TERM
SROC
Character
OFF
RHEVC
Character
OFF
5
6
METIC
FETCHC
Character
Character
ON
OFF
AFW
Real
9.2
BFW
Real
0.46
9
10
CFW
WINDH
Real
Real
2.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specify either term-by-term (TERM) or equilibrium temperature computations (ET) for surface
heat exchange
Read in observed short wave solar radiation, ON
or OFF
Turns ON/OFF Ryan-Harleman evaporation formula only for TERM (ignored if ET is chosen)
Turns ON/OFF meteorological data interpolation
Turns ON/OFF Fang and Stefan (1994) fetch
calculation
a coefficient in the wind speed formulation, Wm-2
mm Hg-1
b coefficient in the wind speed formulation,
Wm-2 mm Hg-1 (ms-1)-cfw
c coefficient in the wind speed formulation, [-]
Wind speed measurement height, m
This card specifies various parameters affecting surface heat exchange. [SLHTC] allows the user
to specify whether a term-by-term accounting or the equilibrium temperature approach is used in
the computation of surface heat exchange. Although the term-by-term approach is more theoretically sound, equilibrium temperatures have consistently given better results for the systems presented in Chapter 3. Predictions for a number of reservoirs in the Northeast underpredicted epilimnetic temperatures during the fall overturn period using the term-by-term method. The reasons for
this are still being investigated.
The [METIC] variable turns ON/OFF linear interpolation of meteorological input data. The
[SROC] variable allows the user to specify whether or not short wave solar radiation data are
computed from cloud cover (the default), or whether the user specifies observed short wave solar
radiation in the meteorological input file [METFN]. In the meteorological data file, short wave
solar radiation data are in units of W/m2 and include only incident short-wave solar radiation on the
water surface.
The [FETCHC] variable turns ON/OFF a technique of Fang and Stefan (1994) to compute fetch
effects on wind. This should not be used for river sections and should be used with caution for
reservoir/lake systems. A description is outlined in Appendix B under Dissolved Oxygen and reaeration coefficients. Note that internal fetch calculations are always on, but that you can choose
the Fang and Stefan approach if desired.
The variables [AFW], [BFW], and [CFW] specify the coefficients to be used in the wind function
used in computing surface heat exchange (for both term-by-term and equilibrium approaches) and
evaporation (see Appendix A). The function has been generalized in the model to the following:
f( W z ) = afw + bfw Wzcfw
C-26
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
where afw is in units of Wm-2 mm Hg-1, bfw is in units of Wm-2 mm Hg-1 (ms-1)-cfw, and cfw has
no units. The default formulation is the recommended form of the function taken from Edinger, et.
al. (1974), although there are several other forms that can be used. For systems that are thermally
loaded such as cooling lakes, the Ryan-Harleman formulation that takes into account forced convection should be used with [RHEVC] set to ON. This only affects the term-by-term model and
not the equilibrium temperature model. All of the wind speed formulations are referenced to a
height at which wind speeds were measured. The variable [WINDH] allows the user to specify the
height at which wind speed measurements were taken, and the model converts them to the appropriate wind speed at the height the wind speed formulation is based on.
Example
HEAT EXCH
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SLHTC
TERM
TERM
TERM
SROC
OFF
OFF
OFF
RHEVC
OFF
OFF
OFF
METIC
ON
ON
ON
FETCHC
OFF
OFF
OFF
AFW
9.2
9.2
9.2
BFW
0.46
0.46
0.46
CFW
2.0
2.0
2.0
WINDH
2.0
2.0
2.0

Meteorology file
C-27
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Ice Cover (ICE COVER)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ICEC
SLICEC
Character
Character
OFF
DETAIL
ALBEDO
Real
0.25
HWI
Real
10.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Allow ice calculations
Specifies the method of ice cover calculations either SIMPLE or DETAIL
Ratio of reflection to incident radiation (albedo of
ice)
Coefficient of water-ice heat exchange, W m-2 oC1
BETAI
Real
0.6
7
8
GAMMAI
ICEMIN
Real
Real
0.07
0.05
ICET2
Real
3.0
Fraction of solar radiation absorbed in the ice surface

Solar radiation extinction coefficient, m-1
Minimum ice thickness before ice formation is allowed, m
Temperature above which ice formation is not allowed, C
Ice calculations are controlled with this card. The variable [ICEC] turns ON/OFF ice calculations.
Two different methods for computing ice cover are available. The first method ([SLICEC] =
SIMPLE) was included in version 1.0 and is available for backwards compatibility. The second
method, DETAIL, is the preferred method.
The coefficient of water-ice heat exchange [HWI], W m-2 C-, is a user specified calibration parameter that determines the rate of heat exchange between water and ice (see Appendix A). [BETAI]
is the fraction of solar radiation absorbed at the ice surface and is similar to [BETA] in the surface
heat exchange computations. [GAMMAI] is the solar radiation extinction coefficient through ice
and is also similar to [GAMMA] in the surface heat exchange computations.
Albedo is the ratio of reflection to incident radiation. It is normally expressed by the albedo of a
surface and varies widely depending on the solar altitude and the waterbody surface properties.
For free water surfaces, Anderson (1954), in his Lake Hefner studies, derived the following empirical formula for the water surface albedo, ALBw, as a function of average solar altitude:
-0.77
ALBw = 1.18 As
where As is average solar altitude in degrees. Anderson found the coefficient 1.18 and the exponent
-0.77 to vary only slightly with cloud height and coverage.
For ice surface, a functional representation of albedo has not been established. Reported values for
ice surface albedo vary greatly from about 10% for clear lake ice (Bolsenga, 1969) to almost 70%
for snow free Arctic sea ice (Krutskih, et al., 1970). Krutskih, et al. suggest ice albedo is more
dependent on air temperature than on solar altitude. Based on their extensive Arctic sea observations, ice surface albedo for solar radiation was determined as:
C-28
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
ALBi =
for Ta 0 C
ALBi = + e Ta
for Ta > 0 C
where , , , and are empirical constants, and Ta is air temperature, C. Equation (A-53) is an
empirical fit to the observed data given by Krutskih, et al. for Arctic ice.
The ice-water surface heat exchange coefficient for rivers was evaluated by Ashton (1979):
=
0.8
0.2
Where U is the river velocity in m/s, D is the river depth in m, and CWI is an empirical coefficient
ranging from 1622 to 2433 W s0.8 m-2.6 oC-1.
Note that the ice cover algorithm does not take into account snow accumulation on the ice surface.
Example
ICE COVER
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
ICEC
OFF
OFF
OFF
SLICEC
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
ALBEDO
0.25
0.25
0.25
HWI
10.0
10.0
10.0
BETAI
0.6
0.6
0.6
GAMMAI
0.07
0.07
0.07
ICEMIN
0.05
0.05
0.05
ICET2
3.0
3.0
3.0

Initial Conditions
C-29
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Transport Scheme (TRANSPORT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SLTRC
Character
ULTIMATE
THETA
Real
0.55
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Transport solution scheme, ULTIMATE, QUICKEST, or UPWIND
Time-weighting for vertical advection scheme
This card specifies the transport solution scheme used by the model. There are three options for
[SLTRC] UPWIND, QUICKEST, or ULTIMATE with the latter being the recommended option.
The older solution schemes are retained in this version of the model mainly as a means of comparing the different solution schemes. The QUICKEST option employs a higher-order solution
scheme to reduce numerical diffusion present in the original UPWIND differencing scheme. The
ULTIMATE option eliminates the physically unrealistic over/undershoots that QUICKEST generates near regions of sharp concentration gradients.
[THETA] specifies the amount of time weighting in the vertical advection scheme. A value of 0
specifies fully explicit vertical advection, 1 specifies fully implicit vertical advection, and 0.5 specifies a Crank-Nicholson scheme. The recommended value for [THETA] is 0.55. This ensures
unconditional numerical stability for vertical transport. Vertical diffusion is always fully implicit.
It should be pointed out that while the addition of the ULTIMATE algorithm eliminates physically
unrealistic over/undershoots due to longitudinal transport, the model could still generate over/undershoots when using implicit weighting for vertical transport. This is a result of phase errors
generated when trying to resolve sharp vertical gradients over a few computational cells and can
be eliminated completely by setting [THETA] to zero.
Example
TRANSPORT SLTRC
Wb 1
ULTIMATE
Wb 2
ULTIMATE
Wb 3
ULTIMATE
THETA
0.55
0.55
0.55
C-30
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Hydraulic Coefficients (HYD COEF)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
AX
DX
CBHE
TSED
FI
TSEDF
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
1.0
1.0
0.3
0.01
1.0
8
9
FRICC
Z0
Character
Real
CHEZY
0.001
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Longitudinal eddy viscosity, m2 sec-1
Longitudinal eddy diffusivity, m2 sec-1
Coefficient of bottom heat exchange, W m-2 oC-1
Sediment temperature, C
Interfacial friction factor
Heat lost to sediments that is added back to water
column
Bottom friction solution, MANN or CHEZY
Water surface roughness height, m
This card specifies hydraulic and bottom heat exchange coefficients that can be varied during model
calibration. The horizontal eddy viscosity [AX] specifies dispersion of momentum in the X-direction. Note that for estuaries the value of [AX] is often as high as 10-30 m2/s. The horizontal eddy
diffusivity [DX] specifies dispersion of heat and constituents in the X-direction. [DX] can vary
significantly from the default value of 1 m2/s in estuaries and rivers, with values as high as 10 to
100 m2/s. Dye studies are often used to calibrate the value of [DX]. One approach by Okubo (1971)
for estimating [DX] in units of m2/s when the longitudinal grid spacing x is in m is:
= 5.84104 1.1
Both values are presently time and space invariant. The Chezy coefficient is used in calculating
effects of bottom friction. The coefficient of bottom heat exchange [CBHE] and the sediment
temperature [TSED] are used to compute heat exchange at the ground-water interface. Sediment
temperature can be estimated from average annual temperature at the site. Recommended values
are given in the example.
[TSEDF] is a coefficient that varies from 0 to 1. This regulates how short-wave solar radiation that
penetrates to the bottom of the grid is handled in the code. A value of 1.0 specifies that 100% of
the incident short wave solar impinging on the channel bottom is re-radiated as heat to the water
column. A value of 0 means that 0% of the shortwave solar radiation is reradiated into the water
column resulting in a loss of the solar radiation from the system.
Previous experience has shown recommended values produce remarkably accurate temperature
predictions for a wide variety of systems. The horizontal eddy viscosities and diffusivities and
Chezy or Mannings n coefficient may need additional tuning especially in modeling rivers or estuaries. The Chezy or Mannings n coefficient is important in estuarine applications for calibrating
tidal range and phase.
Typical values for the Chezy coefficient and Mannings friction factors have been 70 and 0.035,
respectively. In estuaries and rivers, these values can vary widely, especially since often this friction
factor incorporates errors in the bathymetry of the model. For Mannings friction factors, a range
of values have been used in rivers and estuaries from 0.01 to 0.1 or higher. These are usually determined by calibrating the model to water surface elevation data.
C-31
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
Starting with Version 3.6, the user can specify the value of [Z0], the roughness height of the water.
Typical values are less than 10% of the actual roughness height elements (often roughness height
divided by 30 is used) and can range from 10-3 to 10-4 m.
Example
HYD COEF
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
AX
1.0
1.0
1.0
DX
1.0
1.0
1.0
CBHE
0.3
0.3
0.3
TSED
11.5
11.5
11.5
FI
0.01
0.01
0.01
TSEDF
1.00
1.00
1.00
FRICC
MANN
MANN
MANN
Z0
0.001
0.001
0.001
C-32
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Vertical Eddy Viscosity (EDDY VISC)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
AZC
Character
TKE
AZSLC
Character
IMP
4
5
AZMAX
FBC
Real
Interger
1.0
3
6
7
E
ARODI
Real
Real
9.535
0.431
STRCKLR Real
24.0
BOUNDFR Real
10.0
10
TKECAL
IMP
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Form of vertical turbulence closure algorithm,
NICK, PARAB, RNG, W2, W2N, TKE, or TKE1
Specifies either implicit, IMP, or explicit, EXP,
treatment of the vertical eddy viscosity in the
longitudinal momentum equation.
Maximum value for vertical eddy viscosity, m2 s-1
Only active if AZC=TKE1; Choice of boundary
condition: =1 Celik Rodi 1988, =2 Rodi 1983, =3
Original CE-QUAL-W2 boundary condition
Only active if AZC=TKE1; roughness coefficient
Only active if AZC=TKE1; choose typical Values
of 0.43 if FBC=1 and 0.07 if FBC=2. Not used if
FBC=3.
Only active if AZC=TKE1; If this is =0.0, then the
the Strickler Nickuradse relationships are NOT
used to calculate the roughness coefficient; if
>0.0, then the Strickler Nickuradse relationships
are used to calculate the roughness coefficient.
The value of the coefficient sets the relationship
between the surface roughness and the Mannings friction factor.
Only active if AZC=TKE1; if =0.0, then Boundary
production is OFF. If > 0.0, then boundary production is ON. The value of the boundary friction
production constant is set by this constant.
Only active if AZC=TKE1; select either the implicit or explicit vertical transport term formulation, options then are either IMP or EXP.
[AZC] specifies the vertical turbulence algorithm used in the horizontal momentum equation. The
following table lists the options available in Version 3. For more information see Appendix A.
Table C-23. Vertical Eddy Viscosity Formulations
Formulation
Formula
t 2m
Nickuradse [NICK]
Parabolic [PARAB]
C-33
Reference
u CRi
e
z
2
4
z
z
m H 0.14 0.081 0.061

H
H
t u* z1 e CRi
H
Rodi (1993)
Engelund (1976)
INITIAL CONDITIONS
CONTROL FILE
2
[W2] (used in V2)
lm 2 U 2 wy e - 2 kz y trib (-CR )
e i
t
+
Cole and Buchak (1995)
m zmax
2
W2 with mixing
length of Nickuradse
[W2N]
l 2 U 2 wy e - 2 kz y trib (-CR )
e i
t m
+
z
z
m H 0.14 0.081 0.061

H
H
Cole and Buchak (1995)

and Rodi (1993)
1/ 3
[RNG] (renormalization group)

TKE (Turbulent kinetic
energy) also TKE1
but with special conditons
zu 3
t 1 3 * 1 C1 e CRi
2
k
where k and are defined from
t C
Simoes (1998)
Wells (2003)
kB kBU kBW t k
B
t
x
z
z k z
k
BP G Pk
B t
x k x
B BU BW t
B
t
x
z
z z
2
B C 1 P C 2
B t
P
x x
k
k
where:
m
z
H
u
Ri
= mixing length
C = constant (assumed 0.15)
k = wave number (in W2 models)
= vertical coordiante
u* = shear velocity
= liquid density
= depth
= von Karman constant
(x) = max(0,x)
= horizontal velocity
wy = cross-shear from wind
= Richardson number zmax = maximum vertical grid spacing C1 = empirical constant, 100
ytrib = cross-shear from lateral tributaries
B = width
t=turbulent viscosity
k = turbulent kinetic energy (in TKE model)
= turbulent energy dissipation rate P = turbulent energy production from boundary friction
U = longitudinal velocity (laterally averaged) W = vertical velocity (laterally averaged) = turbulent Prandlt number
U 2
P t

z
Production term:
G
Buoyancy term:
t 2
N
t
C, C= constants in the TKE model
C-34
CONTROL FILE
INITIAL CONDITIONS
The formulations PARAB, NICK, and RNG are appropriate for riverine/estuarine sections in which
shear due to friction is dominant. The W2 is usually the choice for reservoirs and lakes where wind
shear is dominant. The k- turbulence formulation is though general to any waterbody and was
added to W2 in order to eliminate the choice of turbulence scheme for the model user. The k-
model though is computationally expensive and similar results can often be obtained at less computational cost using another formulation.
To be backwards compatible with Version 2, set [AZC] to W2, [AZSLC] to EXP, and [AZMAX]
to 1.0E-4 even though a value of 1.0E-3 is recommended as a minimum value of the maximum
vertical eddy viscosity [AZ]. Note that for river and estuary applications it is recommended to set
[AZSLC] to IMP and AZMAX to 1 m2 s-1. Setting [AZSLC] to EXP and [AZMAX] greater than
1.0E-2 will result in very low model time steps. In this case, setting [AZSLC] to IMP will remove
the time step limitation allowing for much larger timesteps.
Only by choosing [AZC]=TKE1 are the other variables [FBC], [E], [ARODI], [STRCKLR],
[BOUNDFR], and [TKECAL] active. These variables are described in detail in Gould (2006).
[FBC] sets the boundary condition for the model. The choices are [FBC]=1 Celik and Rodi (1988)
model, [FBC]=2 Celik and Rodi (1983) model, [FBC]=3 Original TKE formulation found in CEQUAL-W2. The user has the option of specifying the boundary roughness by setting the value of
[E], the boundary roughness coefficient. [ARODI] sets the value of the coefficient used in the
[FBC]=1 and [FBC]=2 models for computing boundary friction. [STRCKLR] gives a coefficient
(typical is 24.0) used when Strickler Nickuradse relationships are used to calculate the roughness
6
coefficient in the equation k s n 24.04 . [BOUNDFR] sets the boundary condition for production, a typical value is 10.0 and is used in the production term as shown below:
[ BOUNDFR ]C 1f .25U 4
(0.5B) 2
[TKECAL] sets the implicit or explicit solution of the vertical transport terms in the k- model.
Example
EDDY VISC
WB 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
AZC
W2
W2
NICK
AZSLC
AZMAX
IMP 1.00000
IMP 1.0E-3
IMP
1.0
FBC
3
3
3
E
9.535
9.535
9.535
ARODI STRCKLR BOUNDFR

0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
TKECAL
IMP
IMP
IMP

Timestep Limitations
C-35
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Number of Structures (N STRUC)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
NSTR
Integer
DYNELEV Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Number of branch outlet structures
ON or OFF. If this field is blank the model will assume this is
OFF.
This card specifies the number of outlet structures for each branch. Outflows are computed based
on a selective withdrawal algorithm. DYNELEV tells the model to use dynamic centerline elevation for the structure. Usually the centerline elevation is fixed and specified with ESTR. If this is
ON, the model will read a separate file for each branch called dynselevX.npt where X is the branch
number. The format of this file is shown in the input file descriptions. If this file is supplied, the
value of ESTR is ignored.
Example
N STRUC
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
NSTR DYNELEV
0
OFF
0
OFF
3
ON
0
OFF

Sink Type
Structure Elevation
Structure Width
Structure Interpolation
Structure Top Selective Withdrawal Limit
Structure Bottom Selective Withdrawal Limit
Outflow file
C-36
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Structure Interpolation (STR INT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
STRIC
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Turns ON/OFF interpolation of structure outflows
OFF
The outflows specified by the outflow file can either be assumed to be step functions with [STRIC]
set to OFF, or can be linearly interpolated between values with [STRIC] set to ON.
Example
STR INT
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
ON
ON
ON
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC

Number of Structures
Sink Type
Structure Elevation
Structure Width
Outflow file
C-37
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Structure Top Selective Withdrawal Limit (STR TOP)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KTSTR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Top layer above which selective withdrawal will not occur
The selective withdrawal algorithm calculates vertical withdrawal zone limits based on outlet geometry, outflows, and in-pool densities. The algorithm then assigns flows for each layer within the
withdrawal zone. This card specifies the top elevation for which outflows are calculated in the
selective withdrawal algorithm. This option can be used to mimic the effects of a curtain weir that
limits the upper extent of the withdrawal zone. In the absence of any structure or topographic feature that limits the top of the selective withdrawal zone, the elevation should be set to the top elevation of the computational grid. If the structure centerline elevation is above KTSTR, then the
value of KTSTR is raised to the centerline elevation.
As a default, the user should set this to layer 2 unless there is some reason to suspect that there is a
restriction of the structure limiting its withdrawal above the centerline of the outlet.
Example
STR TOP
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR

Sink Type
Structure Elevation
Structure Width
Outflow file
C-38
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Structure Bottom Selective Withdrawal Limit (STR BOT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KBSTR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Bottom layer below which selective withdrawal will not occur
The selective withdrawal algorithm calculates vertical withdrawal zone limits based on outlet geometry, outflows, and in-pool densities. The algorithm then assigns flows for each layer within the
withdrawal zone. This card specifies the bottom elevation for which outflows are calculated in the
selective withdrawal algorithm. This option can be used to simulate the effects of an upstream
submerged weir, accumulation of debris at the trash racks, an upstream cofferdam, etc. In the
absence of any structure or topographic feature limiting the bottom withdrawal layer, the value
should be set to the bottommost active layer at the downstream segment. If the structure centerline
elevation is below KBSTR, then the value of KBSTR is lowered to the centerline elevation.
As a default, the user should set this to layer KB (lowest active layer) at the location of the structure
unless there is some reason to suspect that there is a restriction of the structure limiting its withdrawal below the centerline of the outlet.
Example
STR BOT
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
22
22
22
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR

Sink Type
Structure Elevation
Structure Width
Outflow file
C-39
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Sink Type (SINK TYPE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SINKC
Character
POINT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Sink type used in the selective withdrawal algorithm, LINE or POINT
This card specifies the sink type for each withdrawal. The options are LINE or POINT each of
which has different selective withdrawal characteristics.
Line sinks are usually structures wide in relation to dam width (> 1/10). Point sinks are usually
structures narrow in relation to dam width (< 1/10).
Example
SINK TYPE
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
POINT
POINT
POINT
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC

Structure Elevation
Structure Width
Outflow file
C-40
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Structure Elevation (E STRUC)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ESTR
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Centerline elevation of structure, m
This card specifies the centerline elevation for each withdrawal structure by branch.
Example
E STRUC
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
45.0
25.00
15.00
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
WSTR

Sink Type
Structure Width
Outflow file
C-41
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Structure Width (W STRUC)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
WSTR
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Width of structure (line sink), m
This card specifies the width of the structures by branch if a line sink is specified as the sink type
[SINKC]. The values are ignored if a point sink is specified. If there are more outlet structures
than will fit on a line, then the widths are continued on the next line starting in field 2.
Example
W STRUC
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
10.0
10.0
10.0
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR

Sink Type
Structure Elevation
Outflow file
C-42
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Pipes (PIPES)
FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NAME
VALUE
IUPI
IDPI
EUPI
EDPI
WPI
DLXPI
FPI
FMINPI
LATPIC
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Character
11
DYNPIPE Character
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Pipe upstream segment number
Pipe downstream segment number
Upstream invert elevation, m
Downstream invert elevation, m
Pipe diameter, m
Pipe length, m
Bottom roughness (Mannings friction)
Minor friction losses
Downstream or lateral pipe
withdrawal, DOWN or LAT
Either ON or OFF. This turns OFF or ON the
dynamic pipe switch
This card specifies the characteristics for each pipe included in the simulation. [IUSPI] and [IDPI]
specify the upstream segment location and downstream segment location of the pipe, respectively.
The user must also set an upstream [EUPI] and downstream [EDPI] invert elevation, diameter
[WPI], and length [DLXPI] for each pipe. [FPI] sets the bottom roughness value (using a Mannings friction factor) and [FMINPI] specifies the minor friction losses.
Setting the pipe location [LATPIC] to DOWN specifies that the pipe is at the downstream end of
the segment. In this case the water surface elevations are computed based on the right hand side
water surface elevation of the segment. The elevation of the right hand side of the segment is estiamted using the water surface slope of segment IUPI and IUPI-1. Also, momentum from the outflow is preserved as in a downstream struture withdrawal. If the pipe location [LATPIC] is set to
LAT, it is assumed that the outflow is treated as a lateral withdrawal at the segment center elevation.
In both cases selective withdrawal is used in the computations.
Note that for a downstream segment that is at the upstream end of a branch, this inflow is treated
as an inflow. If it is input to a downstream segment that is not the upstream end, it is treated as a
tributary inflow.
The following figures show the layout of pipes set as a downstream [DOWN] and a lateral [LAT]
withdrawal from the upstream segment.
C-43
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Downstream Pipe (DOWN)

Segment #
:
IUPI
Downstream
segment
IDPI
Layer #: K
TUPI
KTDPI
KBUPI
Upstream
segment
KBDPI
EUPI
EDPI
C-44
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Lateral Pipe (LAT)

Segment #
:
IUPI
Downstream
segment
IDPI
Layer #: K
TUPI
KTDPI
KBUPI
Upstream
segment
KBDPI
EUPI
EDPI
When the DYNPIPE switch is ON, the CE-QUAL-W2 model reads a file called, dynpipe.npt. This
file is in the same format as all time series files (see section on input files) with a time seires of
Julian day and a number usually from 0 to 1. The number is then multipled by the flow rate computed for the pipe and has the effect of turning the pipe ON or OFF or reducing the flow for given
periods of time. This input is treated as a step function, i.e., no linear interpolation between successive valules. In many cases a gate valve is restricted to reduce the flow through the pipe over
a certain time of year and later opened.
Example
PIPE
Pi 1
IUPI
24
IDPI
28
EUPI
28.0
EDPI
27.0
WPI
0.5
DLXPI
230.0
FPI
0.065
FMINPI
0.10
LATPIC DYNPIPE
DOWN
ON

Upstream Pipe
Downstream Pipe
C-45
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Upstream Pipe (PIPE UP)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PUPIC
Character
DISTR
ETUPI
Real
EBUPI
Real
KTUPI
Integer
KBUPI
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies how inflows enter into the upstream
pipe segment, DISTR, DENSITY, or SPECIFY
Top elevation pipe inflows enter when using
SPECIFY option, m
Bottom elevation pipe inflows enter when using
SPECIFY option, m
Top layer above which selective withdrawal will
not occur
Bottom layer below which selective withdrawal
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the upstream pipe location are handled. Setting
[TRIBPL] to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active
layer, setting it to DENSITY places the inflows into a layer with similar density, and setting it to
SPECIFY allows the user to specify a top and bottom elevation into which inflows enter. If the
SPECIFY option is used, then [TRIBTOP] and [TRIBBOT] are used to specify the top and bottom
elevations that the inflows are distributed over.
[KWTOP] and [KWBOT] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow does not occur in the selective withdrawal algorith.
Example
PIPE UP
Pi 1
PUPIC
DISTR
ETUPI
EBUPI
KTUPI
2
KBUPI
19

Pipes
Downstream Pipe
C-46
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Downstream Pipe (PIPE DOWN)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PDPIC
Character
DISTR
ETDPI
Real
EBDPI
Real
KTDPI
Integer
KBDPI
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
How inflows enter into the downstream pipe
segment, DISTR, DENSITY, or SPECIFY
Top elevation pipe inflows enter using SPECIFY
option, m
Bottom elevation pipe inflows enter using
SPECIFY option, m
not occur
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the downstream pipe location are handled. Setting
[PDPIC] to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active layer,
setting it to DENSITY places the inflows into a layer with similar density, and setting it to
SPECIFY option is used, then [ETDPI] and [EBDPI] are used to specify the top and bottom elevations that the inflows are distributed over.
[KTDPI] and [KBDPI] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow
does not occur in the selective withdrawal algorithm.
Example
PIPE DOWN
Pi 1
PDPIC
DISTR
ETDPI
EBDPI
KTDPI
2
KBDPI
23

Pipes
Upstream Pipe
C-47
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Spillways (SPILLWAYS)
FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
IUSP
IDSP
ESP
A1SP
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
B1SP
Real
A2SP
Real
B2SP
Real
LATSPC
Character
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Spillway segment location
Downstream segment spillway outflow enters
Spillway elevation, m
1, empirical coefficient for free-flowing conditions
1, empirical coefficient for free-flowing conditions
2, empirical coefficient for submerged conditions
2, empirical coefficient for submerged conditions
Downstream or lateral withdrawal, DOWN or
LAT
This card specifies the spillway (or weir) characteristics. [IUSP] and [IDSP] specify the upstream
and downstream segments for the spillway. Setting [IDSP] to 0 allows the user to spill water and
have that water lost from the system. The model requires the user to specify a head (h) versus flow
(Q) relationship in the following form for freely flowing conditions:
Q 1h 1
where:
h = Zu-Zsp, m
Zu = upstream head, m
Zsp = the spillway crest elevation, m
And for submerged conditions:
Q 2 h 2
where:
h = Zu-Zd, m
Zd = downstream head, m
head and velocity head) is greater than 0.67. Even though negative flow rates are possible using
C-48
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
the second equation when the downstream head is greater than the upstream head, these results
should be used with caution since rarely are rating curves done for reverse flow. The user should
ensure a smooth transition between submerged and free flowing conditions by proper choice of
model coefficients. See Appendix A for further information.
Setting the spillway location [LATSPC] to DOWN specifies that the spillway is at the downstream
end of the segment. In this case the water surface elevations are computed based on the right hand
side of segment IUSP. This water surface elevation is estimated based on the slope of the water
surface at IUSP and IUSP-1. Also, momentum from the outflow is preserved as in a downstream
struture withdrawal. If the spillway location [LATPIC] is set to LAT, it is assumed that the outflow
is treated as a lateral withdrawal at the segment center elevation. In both cases selective withdrawal
is used in the computations.
The following figures show the layout of spillways set as a downstream [DOWN] and a lateral
[LAT] withdrawal from the upstream segment.
Downstream Spillway (DOWN)

Segment #
:
IUSP
Layer #: K
TUSP
IDSP
KTDSP
KBUSP
Upstream
segment
KBDSP
ESP
C-49
Downstream
segment
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Lateral Spillway (LAT)

Segment #
:
IUSP
Layer #: K
TUSP
IDSP
KTDSP
KBUSP
Upstream
segment
KBDSP
ESP
Downstream
segment
Example
SPILLWAYS
Sp 1
Sp 2
IUSP
30
28
IDSP
33
33
ESP
45.5
40.0
A1SP
45.33
10.00
B1SP
1.5
1.5
A2SP
34.45
20.00
B2SP
1.0
1.0
LATSPC
DOWN
LAT

Upstream Spillways
Downstream Spillways
Spillway Dissolved Gas
C-50
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Upstream Spillways (SPILL UP)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PUSPC
Character
DISTR
ETUSP
Real
EBUSP
Real
KTUSP
Integer
KBUSP
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
How inflows enter into the upstream spillway
Top elevation spillway inflows enter using
SPECIFY option, m
Bottom elevation spillway inflows enter using
SPECIFY option, m
not occur
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the upstream spillway location are handled. Setting
[PUSPC] to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active
SPECIFY option is used, then [KTUSP] and [KBUSP] are used to specify the top and bottom
[KTUSP] and [KBUSP] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow
does not occur in the selective withdrawal algorith.
Example
SPILL UP
Sp 1
Sp 2
PUSPC
DISTR
DISTR
ETUSP
EBUSP
KTUSP
2
2
KBUSP
23
23

Spillways
C-51
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Downstream Spillways (SPILL DOWN)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PDSPC
Character
DISTR
ETDSP
Real
EBDSP
Real
KTDSP
Integer
KBDSP
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
How inflows enter into the downstream spillway
Top elevation spillway inflows enter using
SPECIFY option, m
Bottom elevation spillway inflows enter using
SPECIFY option, m
not occur
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the downstream spillway location are handled. Setting [PDSPC] to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active
SPECIFY option is used, then [ETDSP] and [EBDSP] are used to specify the top and bottom
[KTDSP] and [KBDSP] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow
Example
SPILL DOWN PDSPC
Sp 1
DISTR
Sp 2
DISTR
ETDSP
EBUSP
KTDSP
2
2
KBDSP
23
23

Spillways
Upstream Spillways
C-52
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Spillway Dissolved Gas (SPILL GAS)

FIELD
1
2
3
3
5
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
GASSPC
EQSP
ASP
BSP
CSP
Character
Integer
Real
Real
Real
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Dissolved gas computations, ON or OFF
Equation number for computing dissolved gas
a coefficient in dissolved gas equation
b coefficient in dissolved gas equation
c coefficient in dissolved gas equation
This card turns ON/OFF spillway gas computations [GASSPC] and specifies the parameters that
define the dissolved gas relationship. If dissolved gas computations are turned ON, then an equation number must be supplied (1 to 3). Based on the equation number, two or three coefficients are
required. These coefficients are a, b, and c as shown in Table C-24. Note that if [IDSP] is 0, even
if [GASSPC] is ON, the model will not compute any effects of gas transfer since the water exiting
the spillway or weir is not accounted for in the system. This algorithm computes gas effects for
flow from upstream to downstream and there is no adjustment of dissolved oxygen for reverse flow.
The Corps of Engineers has been involved in gas abatement studies on the Columbia and Snake
River system for many years (WES, 1996, 1997). Some of their research efforts have been focused
on development of models of spillway gas generations. These empirical models have been called
CriSP 1.6 (Columbia Basin Research, 1998). The gas production equations used in CriSP are empirical correlations between total dissolved gas (TDG), usually measured a mile downstream of the
dam after turbulence from the spillway had subsided, and discharge, usually measured in kcfs. The
form of these equations is shown in Table C-24.
Table C-24. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production
Equation type
Equation
%TDG mQ s b
%TDG a b cQs

%TDG a b cqs
%TDG
Qs
m
b
Qs
a
b
c
qs
a
b
c
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Coefficient description
% total dissolved gas saturation
total spill, kcfs
total spill, kcfs
individual spillway spill, kcfs
Examples of some of these correlations are shown in Table C-25. In many cases the %TDG in
kcfs, there was assumed to be no change in TDG from the forebay to the tailrace. Also, the correlations in Table C-24 sometimes changed from year to year based on changes in operating conditions or structural changes in the spillway or deflectors.
C-53
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
dams
Dam
Equation
Bonneville
%TDG mQ s b
Lower Granite
%TDG a b cQs
Dworshak
%TDG a b cQs
Ice Harbor
%TDG a b cQs
Hells Canyon
%TDG a b cQs
Coefficients
m =0.12
b =105.61
a = 138.0
b = -35.8
c = -0.10
a = 135.9
b = -71.1
c = -0.4787
a = 136.8; b = -42.0; c = -0.0340 - 1995
a = 138.7; b = -79.0; c = -0.0591 - 1996
a = 130.9; b = -26.5; c = -0.0220 - 1997
a = 120.9; b = -20.5; c = -0.0230 - 1998
a = 138
b = -36
c = -0.02
For each spillway, the user now has a choice of equations to use for computing the effects of each
hydraulic structure on downstream dissolved oxygen. The equations chosen are shown in Table C26. These equations are based on equations from Table C-24 and Table C-25.
Table C-26. Reaeration Effects of Spillways, Weirs, and Gates
Equation #
Equation
%TDG aq s b
1. Linear function of spill on

a per spillway basis; 2
empirical coefficients a
and b
Once TDG is known

below the spillway, the
dissolved oxygen concentration, CO2, is determined from
%TDG =
qs =
a =
b =
CsO2 =
% total dissolved gas saturation

dissolved oxygen saturation, g m-3
CO2 %TDG * C sO2
%TDG a be cqs
2. Bounded exponential of
the spill on a per spillway
basis; 3 empirical coefficients a, b, and c
Once TDG is known

below the spillway, the
dissolved oxygen concentration, CO2, is determined from
qs
a
b
c
CsO2
=
=
=
=
=

CO2 %TDG * C sO2
C-54
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Equation #
Equation
Da
1 0.38ab(1 0.11c )
Db
3. Reaeration effect for a

small height weir or dam
(<10 m); 3 empirical coefficients a, b, and c
(1 0.046T )c
CO2 below the dam is

computed from:
CO 2 C sO 2 Db
Da
Db
T
a
b
b
b
b
b
b
c
CsO2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

temperature, oC
1.8 for clean water to 0.65 for gross polluted water
0.05 for sluice gates
1.0 for sharp crested straight faced weir
0.45 for flat broad crested curved face weir
0.7 for flat broad crested weir with regular step
0.8 for sharp crested vertical face weir
0.6 for flat broad crested weir vertical face
water fall height, m
Note that for equations 1 and 2, the maximum TDG allowed is 145%, and if TDG is computed to
be less than 100%, there is no effect of the spillway or gate on reaeration.
Example
SPILL GAS GASSPC
Sp 1
ON
Sp 2
ON
EQSP
2
1
ASP
110.0
10.0
BSP
-0.1
110.0
CSP
-0.1
10.0

Spillways
Upstream Spillways
C-55
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Gates (GATES)
FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
IUGT
IDGT
EGT
A1GT
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
B1GT
Real
G1GT
Real
A2GT
Real
B2GT
Real
10
G2GT
Real
11
LATGTC
Character
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Gate segment location
Downstream segment gate outflow enters
Gate elevation, m
1 coefficient in gate equation for free flowing
conditions
conditions
conditions
2 coefficient in gate equation for submerged
conditions
conditions
conditions
LAT
This card specifies the gate characteristics. [IUGT] and [IDGT] specify the upstream and downstream segments for the spillway. Setting the downstream spillway segment [IDSP] to 0 allows the
user to spill water that is lost from the system. The following equation is used for freely flowing
conditions:
Q 1h 1 B 1
where:
h
Zu
Zsp
B
= Zu - Zsp, m
= upstream head, m
= spillway crest elevation, m
= gate opening, m
and the following equation is used for submerged flow:
Q 2 h 2 B 2
C-56
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
where
h = Zu - Zd, m
B = gate opening, m
In defining these parameters, the model user also has to generate a time series file of the gate openings [GATEFN]. Whenever the gate opening, B, is equal to or greater than 0.8(Zu-Zsp), a weir
equation is used with no functional dependency on the gate width. In this case, the user must also
supply a rating curve when the gate acts like a weir.
If a valve-rating curve is used as a gate and the outlet elevation to compute the head difference
is not the same as the withdrawal elevation, the following changes need to be included in the input
variables:
1. [EGT] is interpreted as the outlet level for the water being withdrawn
2. [A2GT] must be set to zero (no reverse flow equation is used)
3. [G2GT] is interpreted as the elevation used to compute the head on the outlet valve
- whenever [A2GT] is set to zero and [G2GT] is non-zero, [G2GT] will be used to
compute the head difference between the water level and the outlet rather than
[EGT], but [EGT] will still determine the location of the withdrawal.
In some reservoirs, an outlet valve is connected to the reservoir and a head-discharge relationship
is used based on the gate opening or number of turns of the gate. In this case, the outlet level is
usually at a different elevation than the withdrawal elevation. The gate formulation can still be
used if there is no reverse flow through the needle valve.
Setting the gate location [LATGTC] to DOWN specifies that the gate is located at the downstream
end of the segment. In this case the water surface elevations are computed based on the right hand
side of segment IUGT. This water surface elevation is estimated based on the slope of the water
surface at IUGT and IUGT-1. Also, momentum from the outflow is preserved as in a downstream
struture withdrawal. If [LATGTC] is set to LAT, it is assumed that the outflow is treated as a lateral
withdrawal at the segment center elevation. In both cases selective withdrawal is used in the computations.
The following figures show the layout of gates set as a downstream [DOWN] and a lateral [LAT]
C-57
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Downstream Gate (DOWN)

Segment #:
IU
GT
Layer #: K
TUGT
IDGT
KBUGT
Upstream
segment
EGT
Downstream
segment
Lateral Gate (LAT)

Segment #
: IU
GT
Layer #: K
TUGT
IDGT
KBUGT
Upstream
segment
EGT
Downstream
segment
C-58
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Example
GATES
Gt 1
IUGT
27
IDGT
33
EGT
44.0
A1GT
10.00
B1GT
1.00
G1GT
1.00
A2GT
10.0
B2GT
2.50
G2GT
0.00
LATGTC
DOWN

Gate Weir
Upstream Gate
Downstream Gate
Gate Dissolved Gas
Gate Filename
C-59
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Gate Weir (GATE WEIR)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NAME
VALUE
GA1
GB1
GA2
GB2
DYNGTC
GTIC
Real
Real
Real
Real
Character
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
1 in gate equation for free flowing conditions
1 in gate equation for free flowing conditions
2 in gate equation for submerged conditions
2 in gate equation for submerged conditions
Either B, ZGT, or FLOW
Either ON or OFF
This card specifies the weir coefficients used when the gates are open and the open gate does not
interfere with the flow (the gate opening, B 0.8h). For [GA1] equal to zero, only the gated
equations on the preceding card are used. For [GA2] equal to zero, only the freely flowing equation
will be used even if submerged or reverse flow occurs.
The model requires the user to specify a head (h) versus flow (Q) relationship in the following form
for freely flowing conditions:
Q 1h 1
where:
1 = empirical parameter [GA1]

1 = empirical parameter [GB1]
h = Zu-Zsp, m
Zsp = the spillway crest elevation, m
And for submerged conditions:
Q 2 h 2
where:
2 = empirical parameter [GA2]

2 = empirical parameter [GB2]
h = Zu-Zd, m
head and velocity head) is greater than 0.67. Even though negative flow rates are possible using
the second equation when the downstream head is greater than the upstream head, these results
should be used with caution since rarely are rating curves done for reverse flow. The user should
C-60
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
ensure a smooth transition between submerged and free flowing conditions by proper choice of
model coefficients. See Appendix A for further information.
[DYNGC] is used to determine whether the gate inflow file represents dynamic gate opening heights
(in that case, [DYNGC] is set to B), dynamic weir crest elevations ([DYNGC] is set to ZGT), or
flow rates ([DYNGC] is set to FLOW). Using the dynamic gate opening results in use of the
rating curves for gates as already described. Using the dynamic weir crest setting uses the rating
curve for gates, but G1GT and G2GT are set equal to 0 effectively changing the rating curve to
the same one as for a spillway or weir. In this case though the inflow file is used to change the crest
elevation. Using the flow rate setting allows the user to ignore all the rating curves on this card and
the prior one. In this case dynamic flow rates are in the gate file and are used to move flow around
the domain. For a pumped-storage project for example, the user can include one gate for flow
out of Reservoir 1 to Reservoir 2 and another gate for flow from Reservoir 2 to Reservoir 1 (see
descriptions of the GATE file).
With DYNGC= ZGT, the model user can withdraw water using the dynamic weir crest (and
weir rating curve) at the elevation of the dynamic weir crest or the user can withdraw water using
the dynamic weir crest as before but specify a fixed elevation where that water is withdrawn. A
description of this feature is shown in the GATE file description.
[GTIC] determines if the [DYNGTC] variable is to be interpolated or treated as a step function
input. When [GTIC] is ON, then interpolation of the [DYNGTC] variable is ON and linear interpolation is used between data points in the input GATE file.
Example
GATE WEIR
Gt 1
GA1
10.0
GB1
1.5
GA2
10.0
GB2
1.5
DYNGC
B
GTIC
ON

Gates
Upstream Gate
Downstream Gate
Gate Dissolved Gas
Gate Filename
C-61
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Upstream Gate (GATE UP)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PUGTC
Character
DISTR
ETUGT
Real
EBUGT
Real
KTUGT
Integer
KBUGT
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies how inflows enter the upstream gate
Top elevation gate inflows enter using the
SPECIFY option, m
Bottom elevation gate inflows using the
SPECIFY option, m
not occur
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the upstream gate location are handled. Setting
[PUGTC] to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active
SPECIFY option is used, then [KTUGT] and [KBUGT] are used to specify the top and bottom
[KTUGT] and [KBUGT] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow
Example
GATE UP
Gt 1
PUGTC
DISTR
ETUGT
EBUGT
KTUGT
2
KBUGT
23

Gates
Gate Weir
Downstream Gate
Gate Dissolved Gas
Gate Filename
C-62
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Downstream Gate (GATE DOWN)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PDGTC
Character
DISTR
ETDGT
Real
EBDGT
Real
KTDGT
Integer
KBDGT
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies how inflows enter the downstream
gate segment, DISTR, DENSITY, or SPECIFY
Top elevation gate inflows enter using the
SPECIFY option, m
Bottom elevation gate inflows enter using the
SPECIFY option, m
not occur
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the downstream gate location are handled. Setting
[PDGTC] to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active
SPECIFY option is used, then [ETDGT] and [EBDGT] are used to specify the top and bottom
[KTDGT] and [KBDGT] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow
Example
GATE DOWN
Gt 1
PDGTC
DISTR
ETDGT
EBDGT
KTDGT
2
KBDGT
23

Gates
Gate Weir
Upstream Gate
Gate Dissolved Gas
Gate Filename
C-63
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Gate Dissolved Gas (GATE GAS)

FIELD
1
2
3
3
5
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
GASGTC
EQGT
AGASGT
BGASGT
CGASGT
Character
Integer
Real
Real
Real
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Dissolved gas computations, ON or OFF
Equation number for computing dissolved gas
a coefficient in dissolved gas equation
b coefficient in dissolved gas equation
c coefficient in dissolved gas equation
For each gate, the model user activates or deactivates the computation by selecting ON or OFF for
[GASGTC]. If the user activates this computation by choosing ON, then an equation number must
be supplied (1 to 3). Based on the equation number, two or three coefficients are required. These
coefficients are a, b, and c as shown in Table C-27. Note that if [IDGT] is 0, even if [GASGTC]
is ON, the model will not compute any effects of gas transfer since the water exiting the spillway
or weir is not accounted for in the system. This algorithm only computes gas effects for upstream
to downstream flow and there is no adjustment of dissolved oxygen for reverse flow.
The Corps of Engineers has been involved in Gas Abatement Studies on the Columbia and Snake
River system for many years (WES, 1996, 1997). Some of their research efforts have been focused
on development of models of gas generation from spillways. These empirical models have been
called CriSP 1.6 (Columbia Basin Research, 1998). The gas production equations used in CriSP
are empirical correlations between total dissolved gas (TDG), usually measured a mile downstream
of the dam after turbulence from the spillway had subsided, and discharge, usually measured in
kcfs. The form of these equations is shown in Table C-27.
Table C-27. Equations used in CRiSP model for gas production
Equation type

Equation
%TDG mQs b
%TDG a be cQs
%TDG a be cqs
Coefficient Description
%TDG = % total dissolved gas saturation
m, b = empirical coefficients
a, b, c = empirical coefficients
qs = spill through individual spillway, kcfs
a, b, c = empirical coefficients
Examples of some of these correlations are shown in Table C-28. In many cases the %TDG in
thousand cfs, no change in TDG was assumed from the forebay to the tailrace. Also, the correlations
in Table C-28 sometimes changed from year to year based on changes in operating conditions or
structural changes in the spillway or deflectors.
dams
Dam
Bonneville
Equation
%TDG mQs b
Coefficients
m = 0.12
b = 105.61
C-64
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Dam
Equation
Lower Granite
%TDG a be cQs
Dworshak
%TDG a be cQs
Ice Harbor
%TDG a be cQs
Hells Canyon
%TDG a be cQs
Coefficients
a = 138.0
b = -35.8
c = -0.10
a = 135.9
b = -71.1
c = -0.4787
a = 136.8; b = -42.0; c = -0.0340
a = 138.7; b = -79.0; c = -0.0591
a = 130.9; b = -26.5; c = -0.0220
a = 120.9; b = -20.5; c = -0.0230
a = 138; b = -36; c = -0.02
1995;
1996;
1997;
1998
For each gate, the user now has the choice of equation to use for computing the effects of each
hydraulic structure on downstream dissolved oxygen. The equations chosen are shown in Table C29. These equations are based on equations from Table C-27 and Table C-28.
Table C-29. Reaeration effects of gates
#
Equation
Empirical Coefficient Description
%TDG aq s b
1. Linear function of spill

on a per spillway basis; 2 empirical coefficients: a and b
Once %TDG is known below the spillway, the dissolved oxygen concentration, CO2, is determined
from
%TDG =
qs =
a =
b =
CsO2 =
total dissolved gas saturation, %

CO2 %TDG * C sO2

%TDG a be cqs
2. Bounded exponential
of the spill on a per
spillway basis; 3 empirical coefficients: a,
b, c
Once %TDG is known below the spillway, the dissolved oxygen concentration, CO2, is determined
from
qs
a
b
c
CsO2
=
=
=
=
=

dissolved oxygen saturation g m-3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

temperature, oC
height of water fall, m
1.8 for clean water to 0.65 for gross polluted water
0.05 for sluice gates
1.00 for sharp crested straight faced weir
0.45 for flat broad crested curved face weir
0.70 for flat broad crested weir with regular step
0.8 for sharp crested vertical face weir
0.60 for flat broad crested weir vertical face
CO2 %TDG * C sO2
3. Reaeration effect for a

small height weir or
dam (<10 m); 3 empirical coefficients: a, b,
c
Da
1 0.38ab(1 0.11c )
Db
(1 0.046T )c
CO2 below the dam is

computed from:
CO 2 CsO 2 Db
Da
Db
T
c
a
b
b
b
b
b
b
CsO2
Note that for equations 1 and 2, the maximum TDG allowed is 145%, and if TDG is computed to
be less than 100%, there is no effect of the gate on reaeration.
C-65
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Example
GATE GAS
Gt 1
GASGTC
ON
EQGT
1
AGASGT
10.O
BGASGT
120.0
CGASGT
1.0

Gates
Gate Weir
Upstream Gate
Downstream Gate
Gate Filename
C-66
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Pumps 1 (PUMPS 1)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
IUPU
Integer
IDPU
Integer
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EPU
STRTPU
ENDPU
EONPU
EOFFPU
QPU
LATPUC
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Character
11
DYNPUMP Character
DEFAULT
DOWN
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Upstream segment of pump where water is withdrawn
Downstream segment of pump where water enters
Elevation of pump, m
Starting day of pumping, Julian day
Ending day of pumping, Julian day
Pump starting elevation, m
Pump stopping elevations, m
Pump flow rate, m3 sec-1
LAT
Dynamic pump control ON or OFF. This allows
dynamic changes in pump characteristics over
time if ON. An external time series file is read in.
This card specifies the characteristics of the pumps in the system. [IUPU] and [IDPU] specify the
segments from which water is withdrawn and added back to the system, respectively. IF [IDPU] is
zero water is only withdrawn from the system. The elevation of the pump [EPU] is used to specify
the vertical location of the pump for the selective withdrawal algorithm. [STRTPU] and [ENDPU]
specify the starting and ending times during which pumping occurs, [EONPU] and [EOFPU] specify the elevations at which pumping is activated/deactivated, and [QPU] specifies the pumping rate.
Turn on pump if water level above EO

EONPU
EOFFPU
Turn off pump if water level below E
C-67
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Setting the pump location [LATPUC] to DOWN specifies that the pump is at the downstream end
of the segment. In this case the water surface elevations are computed based on the right hand side
of segment IUPU This water surface elevation is estimated based on the slope of the water surface
at IUPU and IUPU-1.. Also, momentum from the outflow is preserved as in a downstream struture
withdrawal. If [LATPUC] is set to LAT, it is assumed that the outflow is treated as a lateral withdrawal at the segment center elevation. In both cases selective withdrawal is used in the computations.
The following figures show the layout of pumps set as a downstream [DOWN] and a lateral [LAT]
Downstream Pump (DOWN)

Segment #:
IUPU
Layer #: KTPU
IDPU
KBPU
Upstream
segment
EPU
Downstream
segment
C-68
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Lateral Pump (LAT)

Segment #: IUPU
Layer #: KTPU
IDPU
KBPU
Upstream
segment
EPU
Downstream
segment
When the DYNPUMP control is ON, an input file is read that has the variables: JDAY, EPU,
EONPU, and EOFFPU as a time series. The name of the file will be dynpumpX.npt where X is
the Pump number. Hence, dynpump1.npt is expected if DYNPUMP is ON for Pump #1. An example file is shown in the section on INPUT files. When reading a DYNPUMP file, the values are
treated as step functions, i.e., there is no interpolation between values. This allows the user to dynamically change the location of the outflow, or the elevation targets or the flow rate dyanmically.
Example
PUMPS 1
Pu 1
IUPU
30
IDPU
33
EPU
2.4
STRTPU
1.0
ENDPU
900.0
EONPU
3.0
EOFFPU
2.4
QPU
3.0
LATPUC DYNPUMP
DOWN
OFF

Pumps 2
C-69
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Pumps 2 (PUMPS 2)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PPUC
Character
DISTR
ETPU
Real
EBPU
Real
KTPU
Integer
KBPU
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
How inflows enter into the downstream water
level control segment, DISTR, DENSITY, or
SPECIFY
Top elevation water level control inflows enter
using SPECIFY option, m
Bottom elevation water level control inflows enter using SPECIFY option, m
Top layer above which selective withdrawal
does not occur
will not occur
This card specifies how inflows/outflows for the water level controls are handled. Setting [PPUC]
to DISTR distributes the inflows evenly from the water surface to the bottom active layer, setting
it to DENSITY places the inflows into a layer with similar density, and setting it to SPECIFY
allows the user to specify a top and bottom elevation into which inflows enter. If the SPECIFY
option is used, then [ETPU] and [EBPU] are used to specify the top and bottom elevations that the
inflows are distributed over.
[KTPU] and [KBPU] are used to set the upper and lower layers above and below which outflow
does not occur in the selective withdrawal algorithm. For the pumps algorithm, in contrast to gates,
spillways (weirs), and pipes, flow is only in 1-direction, i.e., only outflow is allowed from the
upstream segment.
Example
PUMPS 2
Pu 1
PPUC
DISTR
ETPU
EBPU
KTPU
4
KBPU
23

Pumps 1
C-70
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Internal Weir Segment Location (WEIR SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
IWR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Weir segment location
This card specifies the segment location of the internal weir in the grid. If there are more internal
weirs than can be specified on one line, then the segment locations are continued on the next line
without another WEIR SEG card being specified.
The following figure illustrates the location of the internal weir. Note that the internal weir is always
on the downstream side of a segment. The internal weir can simulate a skimmer (from the top
down) or a curtain weir (from the bottom up).
C-71
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Internal Weir
IWR
KTWR
KBWR
Channel bottom
Figure 38. Description of internal weir in CE-QUAL-W2 at downstream side of segment.
Example
WEIR SEG
IWR
25
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR

Weir Top Layer
Weir Bottom Layer
C-72
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Internal Weir Top Layer (WEIR TOP)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KTWR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Weir top layer
This card specifies the top layer location of the internal weir. For a submerged weir, this should be
set to the layer above which flow is allowed to occur between segments. If there are more internal
weirs than can be specified on one line, then the top layer locations are continued on the next line
without another WEIR TOP card being specified.
Example
WEIR TOP
KTWR
25
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR

Weir Segment Location
Weir Bottom Layer
C-73
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Internal Weir Bottom Layer (WEIR BOT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KBWR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Weir bottom layer
This card specifies the bottom layer location of the internal weir. For a curtain weir, [KBWR]
should be set to the bottomost layer above which flow between segments will not occur. For a
submerged weir, [KBWR] should be set to the bottommost active layer for the segment specified
in the WEIR SEG card. If there are more internal weirs than can be specified on one line, then the
top layer locations are continued on the next line without another WEIR BOT card being specified.
Example
WEIR BOT
KBWR
25
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
Weir Segment Location
Weir Top Layer
C-74
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Withdrawal Interpolation (WD INT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
WDIC
DEFAULT
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Withdrawal outflow interpolation, ON or OFF
This card specifies whether interpolation is turned on for lateral withdrawal outflow. If there are
more withdrawal interpolations than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the
next line without another WD INT card being specified.
If [WDIC] is turned ON, then flows are linearly interpolated between updates. If interpolation is
used, then the user must ensure it is appropriate and the input data supply correct information.
Withdrawals can have periods of no releases. If withdrawal interpolation is turned on, then input
data must be set up so no outflow occurs during these periods. This is accomplished by including
extra dates in the withdrawal file with zero outflows to ensure the interpolation routine yields zero
outflows. For example, given the following withdrawal time-series in the withdrawal file
[QWDFN]:
JDAY
100.00
110.00
120.00
QWD
50.0
0.0
50.0
If interpolation is not used, then outflow from Julian day 100 to 110 is 50 m3 sec-1, from Julian day
110 to 120 is 0.0 m3 sec-1, and 50 m3 sec-1 thereafter. If interpolation is turned on, then outflow
linearly decreases from Julian day 100 to 110 and then increases from Julian day 110 to 120. To
ensure no outflow occurs between day 110 and 120 with interpolation on, the withdrawal file should
be setup as follows:
JDAY
109.9999
110.0000
119.9999
120.0000
QWD
50.0
0.0
0.0
50.0
Example
WD INT
WDIC
ON
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC

Withdrawal Segment
Withdrawal Elevation
Withdrawal Top Layer
Withdrawal Bottom Layer
Withdrawal File
Withdrawal Filename
C-75
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Segment (WD SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
IWD
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Withdrawal segment number
This card specifies the withdrawal segment location. If there are more withdrawal segments than
can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another WD SEG
card being specified.
Example
W SEGMNT
IWD
4
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD

Withdrawal Interpolation
Withdrawal File
Withdrawal Filename
C-76
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Withdrawal Elevation (WD ELEV)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
EWD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Withdrawal centerline elevation, m
This card specifies the centerline elevation of the withdrawal. If there are more withdrawal elevations than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another
WD ELEV card being specified.
Example
W EL
EWD
40.0
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD

Withdrawal Segment
Withdrawal File
Withdrawal Filename
C-77
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Top Layer (WD TOP)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KTWD
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Top layer above which selective withdrawal will not occur
This card specifies the layer above which no flows will be computed in the selective withdrawal
algorithm. For most situations, this should be set to layer 2, which ensures that water can be withdrawn all the way to the surface layer. It should be set to something greater than 2 if a structure is
somehow limiting the withdrawal of water, such as a curtain weir. If there are more withdrawal
elevations than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another
WD TOP card being specified. If the structure centerline elevation is above KTWD, then the value
of KTWD is raised to the centerline elevation.
Example
WD TOP
KTWD
2
KTWD
KTWD
KTWD
KTWD
KTWD
KTWD
KTWD
KTWD

Withdrawal Segment
Withdrawal File
Withdrawal Filename
C-78
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Withdrawal Bottom Layer (WD BOT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KBWD
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Bottom layer below which selective withdrawal will not occur
This card specifies the layer below which no flows will be computed in the selective withdrawal
algorithm. For most situations, this should be set to the bottommost active layer of the withdrawal
segment, which ensures that water can be withdrawn all the way to the bottom layer. It should be
set to something other than the bottommost active layer if a structure is somehow limiting the withdrawal of water, such as a submerged weir. If there are more bottom withdrawal layers than can
be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another WD BOT card
being specified. If the structure centerline elevation is below KBWD, then the value of KBWD is
lowered to the centerline elevation.
Example
WD BOT
KBWD
10
KBWD
KBWD
KBWD
KBWD
KBWD
KBWD
KBWD
KBWD

Withdrawal Segment
Withdrawal File
Withdrawal Filename
C-79
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Inflow Placement (TRIB PLACE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TRC
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Tributary inflow placement, DISTR, DENSITY, SPECIFY
This card specifies how tributary inflows are distributed into the model layers. There are three
options. Inflows can be distributed evenly from top to bottom ([PTRC] = DISTR), placed according to density ([PTRC] = DENSITY), or the user may specify a range of layer elevations in which
the tributary inflows are distributed evenly ([PTRC] = SPECIFY). This is similar to the branch
inflows, but with the additional option allowing the user to specify the range of layer elevations in
which to distribute the inflows. This option is particularly useful when trying to model discharges
from a pipe such as wastewater treatment effluent.
If there are more tributaries than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next
line without another TRIB PLACE card being specified.
Example
TRIB PLACE PTRC
DENSITY
PTRC
PTRC
PTRC
PTRC
PTRC
PTRC
PTRC
DISTR SPECIFY DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY
PTRC

Tributary Interpolation
Tributary Segment
Tributary Inflow Top Elevation
Tributary Inflow Bottom Elevation
Tributary Active Constituent Control
Tributary Temperature File
Tributary Concentration File
Tributary Inflow Filename
Tributary Inflow Temperature Filename
Tributary Inflow Concentration Filename
C-80
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Tributary Interpolation (TRIB INT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
TRIC
Character
ON
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Turns ON/OFF interpolation of tributary inflows
The tributary inflow specified by the tributary files for flow, temperature, and concentration can
either be assumed to be step functions, [TRIC] set to OFF, or can be linearly interpolated between
values, [TRIC] set to ON.
Example
TRIB INT
TRIC
ON
TRIC
ON
TRIC
ON
TRIC
TRIC
TRIC
TRIC
TRIC
TRIC

Tributary Inflow Placement
Tributary Segment
C-81
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Segment (TRIB SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ITR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Segment tributary enters
This card specifies the segment that the tributary enters. Tributary flows are either placed into a
layer whose density most closely corresponds to that of the tributary flows, are evenly distributed
from top to bottom, or are specified to enter over a range of elevations (see [TRC]). Flows that
enter segments upstream of the current upstream segment [CUS] for a branch are combined with
the branch inflow.
If there are more tributary segments than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on
the next line without another TRIB SEG card being specified.
Example
TRIB SEG
ITR
2
ITR
3
ITR
4
ITR
3
ITR
4
ITR
5
ITR
6
ITR
7
ITR

C-82
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Tributary Inflow Top Elevation (TRIB TOP)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ETRT
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Tributary inflow top elevation, m
This card specifies the upper elevation for each tributary inflow in which the user has specified that
inflows will be placed over a range of elevations. Only tributaries that are specified as SPECIFY
on the Tributary Inflow Placement card need top elevations specified on this card.
If there are more tributary top elevations than can be specified on one line, then they are continued
on the next line without another TRIB TOP card being specified.
Example
TRIB TOP
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
116.0
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT

Tributary Segment
C-83
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Inflow Bottom Elevation (ELEV BOT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ETRB
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Tributary inflow bottom elevation, m
This card specifies the bottom elevation for each tributary inflow in which the user has specified
that inflows will be placed over a range of elevations. Only tributaries that are specified as
SPECIFY on the Tributary Inflow Placement card need bottom elevations specified on this card.
If there are more tributary bottom elevations than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another TRIB BOT card being specified.
Example
TRIB BOT
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
114.0
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB

Tributary Segment
C-84
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Distributed Tributaries (DST TRIB)

FIELD NAME
1
2
DTRC
VALUE
DEFAULT
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Distributed tributary option, ON or OFF
This card specifies whether or not a branch contains a distributed tributary inflow and whether or
not the inflows, inflow temperatures, and inflow concentrations are linearly interpolated between
input dates. A distributed tributary is equivalent to a non-point source loading. This option may
be turned ON or OFF for each branch and is useful in accounting for ungaged flows for the water
budget. The flow is distributed among the segments in each branch proportional to their surface
areas. There is one value of [DTRC] for each branch. See the INTERPOL card for turning ON/OFF
interpolation for distributed tributaries.
For each distributed tributary specified, the user must supply an inflow file [ QDTFN], an inflow
temperature file [TDTFN], and, if constituents are modeled, an inflow constituent concentration file
[CDTFN].
If constituents are modeled, the user can select which constituents are included in the distributed
tributary concentrations input file (see Distributed Tributary Active Constituent Control card).
Example
DST TRIB
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
DTRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Distributed Tributary Active Constituent Control
Distributed Tributary Inflow File
Distributed Tributary Temperature File
Distributed Tributary Concentration File
Distributed Tributary Inflow Filename
Distributed Tributary Inflow Temperature Filename
Distributed Tributary Inflow Concentration Filename
C-85
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Hydrodynamic Output Control (HYD PRINT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
HPRWBC Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output hydrodynamic terms to the snapshot file,
ON or OFF
This card specifies whether or not certain hydrodynamic terms are included as output in the snapshot file. The hydrodynamic terms include timestep violations, horizontal and vertical velocities,
temperatures, and all the terms that comprise the horizontal momentum equation. The latest version
allows the user to turn ON/OFF hydrodynamic output for each waterbody as shown in the example.
Values for each waterbody continue across the line. If there are more than nine waterbodies, then
additional values continue on the next line starting in field two. Output formatting and animation
of these variables can be specified in the graph.npt file.
Table C-30. Hydraulic Print Parameters
Term
[NLIM]
[U]
[W]
[T]
[RHO]
[AZ]
[SHEAR]
[ST]
[SB]
Explanation
Location and number of limiting time steps in the model grid
Longitudinal velocity in m/s
Vertical velocity in m/s
Temperature in oC
Density in kg/m3
Vertical turbulent eddy viscosity in m2/s
Velocity shear stress squared [VSH] in 1/s2
Total shear stress at top of model layer (see Equation A-150) X width of cell in m3/s2, ST=bottom and
side-wall shear+velocity shear+wind induced shear
Shear stress at bottom of model layer (see Equation A-147) X width of cell in m3/s2
2
[ADMX]
Longitudinal advection of momentum in m3/s2 []~
[DM]
Longitudinal momentum transport by eddy viscosity in m3/s2 where approximately []~

Horizontal density gradient in m3/s2 []~
[HDG]
Vertical advection of momentum in m3/s2 []~
Horizontal pressure gradient in m3/s2 []~ *
[ADMZ]
[HPG]
[GRAV]
Gravity force term in m3/s2 []~

g is acceleration due to gravity, B is cell width, H is average cell layer thickness, U is longitudenal velocity, W is vertical velocity, x is segment spacing, P is pressure, is density.
* Note HDG pressure is taken from horizontal elevation of layer KT and is used only in the water surface computation. HPG pressure is computed from actual water surface and is used in the velocity
computation. The HDG pressure between the horizontal layer KT elevation and the water surface is
already accounted for in the surface water layer computation for .
Example
HYD PRINT HPRWBC
NLIM
ON
U
ON
W
ON
T
ON
RHO
ON
AZ
ON
SHEAR
ON
ST
ON
SB
ON
ADMX
ON
DM
ON
HDG
ON
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
C-86
CONTROL FILE
ADMZ
HPG
GRAV
C-87
ON
ON
ON
OUTPUT CONTROL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Snapshot Print (SNP PRINT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SNPC
Character
OFF
3
4
NSNP
NISNP
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to snapshot file,
ON or OFF
Number of snapshot dates
Number of segments output
This card specifies if information is output to the snapshot file [SNPFN], number of snapshot
intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies, and the number of segments that will be output to each snapshot file. Each water body has separate controls so that the user can include/suppress snapshot output for each waterbody.
Snapshot file output provides the user with a hard copy of computed values for hydrodynamic and
constituent variables for user assigned segments. Output from this file can take up a tremendous
amount of disk space and when printed can use up large quantities of computer paper in a short
time. This option is generally used during initial runs and then turned off before the user becomes
buried in computer output.
The number of snapshot dates [NSNP] refers to the option of writing information to the snapshot
file for different dates and frequencies. For example, the user may specify output is to begin on
Julian day 224.4 and output every 0.1 days until day 225.5. Information is then output every day
until the end of the simulation. In this case, [NSNP] would be set to 2. Values for each waterbody
start on a new line.
Example
SNP PRINT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SNPC
ON
ON
ON
NSNP
3
1
1
NISNP
11
14
10

Snapshot Dates
Snapshot Frequency
Snapshot Segments
Snapshot Filename
Constituent Output
C-88
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Snapshot Dates (SNP DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SNPD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output dates, Julian day
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the snapshot file [SNPFN]. The total
number of dates specified on this card must match [NSNP] on the Snapshot Print card.
If there are more dates than can be specified on one line, then the values for [SNPD] are continued
on the next line without another SNP DATE card being specified. Values for each waterbody
Example
SNP DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SNPD
63.50
63.50
63.50
SNPD
100.5
SNPD
200.5
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD

Snapshot Print
Snapshot Frequency
Snapshot Segments
Snapshot Filename
Constituent Output
C-89
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Snapshot Frequency (SNP FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SNPF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output frequency, days
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the snapshot file [SNPFN]. Frequency
can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying appropriate dates on the Snapshot
Date card and frequencies on the Snapshot Frequency card. If output is needed only for the
date specified on the Snapshot Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the number of
days before the next output date.
If there are more frequencies than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next
line without another SNP FREQ card being specified. Values for each waterbody start on a new
line.
Example
SNP FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SNPF
0.1
0.1
0.1
SNPF
500.0
SNPF
7.0
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF

Snapshot Print
Snapshot Dates
Snapshot Segments
Snapshot Filename
Constituent Output
C-90
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Snapshot Segments (SNP SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ISNP
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output segments
This card specifies the segments to be included in the snapshot file for each waterbody. The user
can include all segments in the computational grid. However, if the user wants to create a hardcopy
that can be printed out, he should not specify more than 21 values for each waterbody. The user
should also omit boundary segments that are not part of the computational grid.
If there are more dates than can be specified on one line, then the values for [ISNP] are continued
on the next line without another SNP SEG card being specified. Values for each waterbody start
on a new line.
Example
SNP SEG
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
ISNP
2
13
17
26
33
42
ISNP
3
14
18
27
34
ISNP
4
ISNP
5
ISNP
6
ISNP
9
ISNP
10
ISNP
11
ISN
12
19
28
35
20
29
36
21
30
37
22
23
24
25
38
39
40
41

Snapshot Print
Snapshot Dates
Snapshot Frequency
Snapshot Filename
Constituent Output
C-91
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Screen Print (SCR PRNT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SCRC
Character
OFF
NSCR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to the screen,
ON or OFF
Number of screen update intervals
This card specifies if information is output to the screen during the run and the number of intervals
during which the frequency of updating the screen can change. The frequency at which the screen
is updated should be large (at least 0.1 days). Experience has shown that updating the screen every
timestep can easily double the runtime. Values for each waterbody start on a new line.
Example
SCR PRINT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SCRC
ON
ON
ON
NSCR
1
1
1

Screen Dates
Screen Frequency
C-92
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Screen Dates (SCR DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SCRD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates information is output to the screen. The total number of dates specified
on this card must match [NSCR] on the Screen Print card.
If there are more dates than can be specified on one line, then the values for [SCRD] are continued
on the next line without another SCR DATE card being specified. Values for each waterbody
Example
SCR DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SCRD
63.5
63.5
63.5
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD

Screen Print
Screen Frequency
C-93
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Screen Frequency (SCR FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SCRF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the screen. Frequency can be changed at
any time during the simulation by specifying appropriate dates on the Screen Date card and frequencies on the Screen Frequency card. The frequency at which the screen is updated should
be large (at least 0.1 days and more often 1.0 days). Experience has shown that updating the screen
every timestep can easily double the runtime. If output is needed only for the date specified on the
Screen Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the number of days before the next
output date.
line without another Screen Frequency card being specified. Values for each waterbody start
on a new line.
Example
SCR FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SCRF
0.15
0.15
0.15
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF

Screen Print
Screen Dates
C-94
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Profile Plot (PRF PLOT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PRFC
Character
OFF
3
4
NPRF
NIPRF
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to the profile file,
ON or OFF
Number of profile dates
Number of segments output
This card specifies if information is output to the profile output file [PRFFN], the number of profile
intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies, and the number of segments included in the
output.
The profile output file [PRFFN] is used to plot vertical profiles of temperature and constituents at
a specified model segment. This option is normally turned off during initial runs while the user is
verifying the model is performing correctly. It is turned on to compare observed data with simulated data during calibration runs.
This file is in a form suitable for FORTRAN postprocessing. The spreadsheet profile output file
[SPRFN] can be used for processing profile output data in a spreadsheet.
The Constituent Output card controls which constituents are output to the profile file. Temperature is always output to the profile file. Values for each waterbody start on a new line.
Example
PRF PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
PRFC
ON
OFF
ON
NPRF
1
0
1
NIPRF
1
0
1

Profile Date
Profile Frequency
Profile Segment
Profile Filename
Constituent Output
C-95
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Profile Date (PRF DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
PRFD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the profile output file [PRFFN]. If there
are more dates than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without
another PRF DATE card being specified. Values for each waterbody start on a new line.
Example
PRF DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
PRFD
63.5
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
63.5

Profile Plot
Profile Frequency
Profile Segment
Profile Filename
Constituent Output
C-96
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Profile Frequency (PRF FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
PRFF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the profile output file [PRFFN]. Frequency can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying appropriate dates on the
Profile Date card and frequencies on the Profile Frequency card. If output is needed only for
the date specified on the Profile Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the number of
line without another PRF FREQ card being specified. Values for each waterbody start on a new
line.
Example
PRF FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
PRFF
1.0
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
1.0

Profile Plot
Profile Date
Profile Segment
Profile Filename
Constituent Output
C-97
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Profile Segment (PRF SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
IPRF
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output segments
This card specifies model segments for which information is output to the profile output file
PRFFN]. If there are more segments than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on
the next line without another PRF SEG card being specified. Values for each waterbody start on
a new line.
Example
PRF SEG
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
IPRF
14
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
42

Profile Plot
Profile Date
Profile Frequency
Profile Filename
Constituent Output
C-98
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Spreadsheet Profile Plot (SPR PLOT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SPRC
Character
OFF
3
4
NSPR
NISPR
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to the spreadsheet profile file
Number of spreadsheet dates
Number of segments in output
This card specifies if information is output to the spreadsheet profile output file [SPRFN], the
number of intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies, and the number of segments included in the output.
The spreadsheet profile output file [SPRFN] is used to plot vertical profiles of temperature and
constituents at a specified model segment and is suitable as ASCII input into a spreadsheet type
database. This option is normally turned off during initial runs while the user is verifying the model
is performing correctly. It is turned on to compare observed data with simulated data during calibration. For output to null layers, the default output is -99.
The Constituent Output card controls which constituents are output to the spreadsheet file. Temperature is always output to the spreadsheet file. Values for each waterbody start on a new line.
Example
SPR PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SPRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
NSPR
0
1
1
NISPR
0
1
1

Spreadsheet Date
Spreadsheet Frequency
Spreadsheet Segment
Spreadsheet Filename
Constituent Output
C-99
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Spreadsheet Profile Date (SPR DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SPRD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output dates, Julian Day
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the spreadsheet profile output file
[SPRFN]. If there are more dates than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the
next line without another SPR DATE card being specified. Values for each waterbody start on a
new line.
Example
SPR DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
63.5
63.5

Spreadsheet Plot
Spreadsheet Segment
Constituent Output
C-100
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Spreadsheet Profile Frequency (SPR FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SPRF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the spreadsheet profile output file
[SPRFN]. Frequency can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying appropriate
dates on the Spreadsheet Date card and frequencies on the Spreadsheet Frequency card. If
output is needed only for the date specified on the Spreadsheet Date card, then set the frequency
to be greater than the number of days before the next output date.
line without another SPR FREQ card being specified. Values for each waterbody start on a new
line.
Example
SPR FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
7.0
7.0

Spreadsheet Plot
Spreadsheet Date
Spreadsheet Segment
Constituent Output
C-101
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Spreadsheet Profile Segment (SPR SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ISPR
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output segments
This card specifies model segments for which information is output to the spreadsheet output file
[SPRFN]. If there are more segments than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on
the next line without another SPR SEG card being specified.
Example
SPR SEG
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
14
42

Spreadsheet Plot
Spreadsheet Date
Constituent Output
C-102
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Vector Plot (VPL PLOT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
VPLC
Character
OFF
NVPL
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to the vector file,
ON or OFF
Number of vector plot dates
This card specifies if information is output to the vector plot file [VPLFN] and the number of vector
plot intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies. Starting in Version 3.71, the VPL card
is no longer the vector plot card. This card will specify the frequency of output for the W2Tools
post-processor. Hence, when VPL is ON, an output file will be created for the for the times and
intervals specified in the vector plot frequency and the vector plot date. The vector plot filename
specigfies the binary file output. Be careful about high frequency output for a large system since
the post-processor may not be able to process file sizes greater than 2 GB. For information on the
W2Tools post-processor, please consult the user manual for the w2tools program. Also, note that
only 1 output file is used even for multiple waterbodies. Hence, the value of VPLC for the 1 st
waterbody must be ON for output. The values of VPLC for other waterbodies are ignored.
Example
VPL PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
VPLC
ON
ON
ON
NVPL
7
7
7

Vector Plot Date
Vector Plot Frequency
Vector Plot Filename
C-103
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Vector Plot Date (VPL DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
VPLD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the vector plot file [VPLFN]. If there are
more dates than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without
another VPL DATE card being specified. This is the frequency of data written to the post-processing tool, w2tools. Only the value for the 1st waterbody is used to write out information for all
waterbodies used by the W2tool post-processing program. The values for other waterbodies are
ignored.
Example
VPL DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
VPLD
224.5
224.5
224.5
VPLD
225.5
225.5
225.5
VPLD
226.5
226.5
226.5
VPLD
227.5
227.5
227.5
VPLD
228.5
228.5
228.5
VPLD
229.5
229.5
229.5
VPLD
230.5
230.5
230.5
VPLD
VPLD

Vector Plot
Vector Plot Frequency
C-104
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Vector Plot Frequency (VPL FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
VPLF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the vector plot file [VPLFN], the w2tools
output file. Frequency can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying the dates
on the Vector Plot Date card and the frequencies on the Vector Plot Frequency card. If output
is needed only for the date specified on the Vector Plot Date card, then set the frequency to be
greater than the number of days before the next output date.
line without another VPL FREQ card being specified.
Only the value for the 1st waterbody is used to write out information for all waterbodies used by
the W2tool post-processing program. The values for other waterbodies are ignored.
Example
VPL FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
100.0
100.0
100.0
VPLF
VPLF

Vector Plot
Vector Plot Date
C-105
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Contour Plot (CPL PLOT)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CPLC
Character
OFF
NCPL
TECPLOT
Integer
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is output to the contour
file, ON or OFF
Number of contour plot dates
Turns ON or OFF TECPLOT output format
This card specifies if information is output to the contour plot file [CPLFN] and the number of
contour plot intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies. The current version still requires
the user to develop their own means of postprocessing data for contour plots. This also requires
the user to get under the hood of the code in order to determine the data output and the format of
the output to generate their own contour plots.
Turning ON TECPLOT output allows the user to quickly develop contour and vector animation of
model output. TECPLOT output contains Elevation (m), Distance (m), U, W, T(C), RHO,
HABITAT# (based on fish habitat criteria see CPL file format) and all active constituents for the
entire model grid at a frequency specified in CPL FREQ.
Instructions for using TECPLOT360 and creating an animation are shown below:
1. In control file, turn on contour output (CPLC=ON) and tecplot option
(TECPLOT=ON). Also set output frequency CPLF to desired value.
2. Run model
3. Start Tecplot, select File|Load Data File. Select Teplot Data Loader and load contour
output file (probably cpl.opt). It will probably take time for tecplot to convert the ascii
file to binary. If the file is really big, this might take quite a while.
4. When the Select Initial Plot window comes up, set initial plot time to 2D Cartesian
and select Show First Zone Only. A 2-D graph should be visible with Elevation being
the y-axis and distance for the x-axis
5. In the Zone Surfaces Layers box at the upper left, select Contour and deselect anything else.
6. Double Click on the y-axis, and a Axis Details box should come up. Select the Range
tab and select Independent in the dependency box. Click on Reset Range and then
select reset to nice valuesto reset the Min/Max values for the y-axis.. The contour plot
for the first day should be visible now.
7. Select Plot|Contour to select the parameter for which you want to make an animation. It
will likely be set to T or temperature initially.
8. To set the contour plot intervals, select Plot|Contour and click on the >> button. Then
select New Levels. A typical setting for temperature would be Minimum Level =0,
Maxim um Level=30, and Number of Levels=25
9. To show a legend, click on the Legend tab and click Show Contour Legend
C-106
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
10. To blank out inactive cells, select Plot|Blanking|Value Blanking and click on Include
Value Blanking. Then click on the Active box, and select Blank when temperature
of T) is less than or equal to -0.1.
11. To create animation, select Animate|Zones and click animate. You have the option of animating on screen, to an AVI file, or to a rastermetafile (RM).
12. One can also add velocity vectors by turning on the vector map and adjusting the vector
properties on top of the temperature contour plot. Other contour movies of other state
variables can be performed by following these same steps.
13. Before exiting tecplot, save your work by selecting File|Save Layout.
Example
CPL PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
CPLC
ON
ON
ON
NCPL TECPLOT
7
OFF
7
OFF
7
OFF

Contour Plot Date
Contour Plot Frequency
Contour Plot Filename
Constituent Output
C-107
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Contour Plot Dates (CPL DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CPLD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the contour plot file [CPLFN]. If there
another CPL DATE card being specified.
Example
CPL DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
CPLD
224.5
224.5
224.5
CPLD
225.5
225.5
225.5
CPLD
226.5
226.5
226.5
CPLD
227.5
227.5
227.5
CPLD
228.5
228.5
228.5
CPLD
229.5
229.5
229.5
CPLD
230.5
230.5
230.5
CPLD
CPLD

Contour Plot
Contour Plot Frequency
Constituent Output
C-108
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Contour Plot Frequency (CPL FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CPLF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the contour plot file [CPLFN]. Frequency can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying appropriate dates on the Contour
Plot Date card and frequencies on the Contour Plot Frequency card. If output is needed only
for the date specified on the Contour Plot Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the
number of days before the next output date.
line without another CPL FREQ card being specified.
Example
CPL FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
10.0
10.0
10.0
CPLF
CPLF

Contour Plot
Contour Plot Date
Constituent Output
C-109
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Kinetic Flux Output (FLUXES)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
FLXC
Character
OFF
NFLX
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is sent to the kinetic flux
output file, ON or OFF
Number of kinetic flux dates
This card specifies if information is output to the kinetic flux file [KFLFN] and the number of
kinetic flux intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies. Output of kinetic fluxes to the
TSR file is dependent on the frequency of the TSR file. This file contains kinetic fluxes that allow
the user to determine the dominant forcing function responsible for a given constituents increase/decrease in concentrations and is particularly useful during water quality calibration as the
user can identify which kinetic processes are most responsible for the model behavior of a given
constituent and adjust the rate coefficients correspondingly. The fluxes represent the average flux
in kg/day over the time interval of flux output (FLX FREQ) and is in the same output format as the
Snapshot [SNP] file. A summation of all active fluxes for each waterbody over all segments and
layers is output to another file with a filename KFLUX_JW#.OPT where # is the waterbody
number. This file is also output at the frequency specified for flux output (FLX FREQ).
Example
FLUXES
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
FLXC
ON
OFF
OFF
NFLX
1
0
0

Kinetic Flux Date
Kinetic Flux Frequency
Kinetic Flux Filename
C-110
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Kinetic Flux Date (KFL DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
KFLD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the kinetic flux file [KFLFN]. If there
another KFL DATE card being specified.
Example
FLX DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
FLXD
1.0
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD

Kinetic Flux Output
Kinetic Flux Frequency
C-111
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Kinetic Flux Frequency (FLX FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
FLXF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the kinetic flux file [KFLFN]. If there
another KFL FREQ card being specified. If output is needed only for the date specified on the
Kinetic Flux Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the number of days before the
next output date.
Example
FLX FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
FLXF
7.0
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF

Kinetic Flux Output
Kinetic Flux Date
C-112
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Time Series Plot (TSR PLOT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
TSRC
Character
OFF
3
4
NTSR
NITSR
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to time series
file, ON or OFF
Number of time series dates
Number of time series computational cells
This card specifies if information is output to the times series file [TSRFN] the number of time
series intervals for specifying output dates and frequencies, and the number of time series computational cells for which information will be output.
Time series output consists of the Julian date, timestep, water surface elevation, temperature, flow
rate (vertically integrated segment flow rate at the specified model segment), shortwave solar radiation (net) incident on the surface (i.e., it does not include the reflected solar), light extinction
coefficient (m-1), depth to bottom of channel (m), surface width (m), shade fraction (1.0 is no shade,
0.0 is 100% reduction in solar radiation), active constituents, derived constituents, and kinetic
fluxes as specified in the CST flux card (fluxes are in units of kg/day). Note that the kinetic fluxes
in the TSR file are instantaneous flux rates, whereas those fluxes shown in the kinetic flux file are
averages over the time interval or frequency of output. The constituent concentrations output are
the constituents specified for output on the Constituent Output card. The derived constituent
concentrations output are the constituents specified on the Derived Constituent card.
Example
TSR PLOT
TSRC
OFF
NTSR
0
NITSR
O

Time Series Date
Time Series Frequency
Time Series Segment
Time Series Elevation
Constituent Output
C-113
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Time Series Date (TSR DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TSRD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates that information is output to the times series file [TSRFN]. If there
another TSR DATE card being specified.
Example
TSR DATE
TSRD
63.5
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD

Time Series Plot
Time Series Segment
Constituent Output
C-114
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Time Series Frequency (TSR FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TSRF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the times series file [TSRFN]. Frequency can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying the dates on the Time Series
Date card and the frequencies on the Time Series Frequency card. If output is needed only for
the date specified on the Time Series Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the
number of days before the next output date.
line without another TSR FREQ card being specified.
Example
TSR FREQ
TSRF
1.00
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF

Time Series Plot
Time Series Date
Time Series Segment
Constituent Output
C-115
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Time Series Segment (TSR SEG)

FIELD NAME
1
2-10
ITSR
VALUE
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output segments
This card, along with the Time Series Elevation card, defines which computational cells are output
to the times series file [TSRFN]. To specify multiple cells in a segment, the segment number
must be duplicated for each computational cell to be output.
Example
TSR SEG
ITSR
20
ITSR
23
ITSR
26
ITSR
30
ITSR
30
ITSR
ITSR
ITSR
ITSR

Time Series Plot
Time Series Date
Constituent Output
C-116
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Time Series Elevation (TSR ELEV)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
ETSR
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Depth below water surface in m (if positive) or layer number (if
negative) corresponding to time series segment
This card specifies the elevation from the water surface that corresponds to the segment [ ITSR]
specified on the Time Series Segment card. Specifying a negative number results in the layer
number being used for the vertical location. For example, setting [ETSR] to -5.0 results in output
from layer 5; setting [ESTR] to 0.0 is at the water surface; and setting [ESTR] to 1.5 is 1.5 m below
the water surface.
Example
TSR ELEV
ETSR
1.0
ETSR
5.0
ETSR
10.0
ETSR
-5.0
ETSR
-8.0
ETSR
ETSR
ETSR
ETSR

Time Series Plot
Time Series Date
Time Series Segment
Constituent Output
C-117
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Output (WITH OUT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
WDOC
Character
OFF
3
4
NWDO
NIWDO
Integer
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is written to withdrawal
output file, ON or OFF
Number of withdrawal output dates
Number of withdrawal output segments
This card specifies if information is output to a separate withdrawal outflow file [WDOFN] for
outflow, outflow temperature, outflow constituent concentrations, and outflow derived constituent
concentrations. This option is useful for comparing time series results of these variables and for
providing input files for downstream models that are not run together. The names of the outflow
files are appended with the segment number to differentiate each of the files.
The information can also be used to link output from one waterbody to a downstream waterbody.
Currently, the model uses the minimum timestep necessary to maintain numerical stability throughout the entire system. In many cases, the riverine sections linking reservoirs and/or estuaries together in the system determine this. This option is provided to allow the user to break up the
waterbasin so that each waterbody can be run separately. As a consequence, the separate waterbodies can now run at a timestep necessary to maintain numerical stability based on the limiting
timestep criteria for the individual waterbody rather than the limiting criteria for the entire system.
When using this option, the user should investigate how the frequency of output affects the results
by first running the model with a small output frequency and then increasing the frequency until
the results change substantially. Model results should not be a function of the input frequency of
boundary conditions. The user wants to make sure the instantaneous output frequency of this file
matches the integrated response correctly.
If there is one output located at the withdrawal output segment [IWDO], like a structure, the output
files will be called qwo_segXX.opt, two_segXX.opt, cwo_segXX.opt, and dwo_segXX.opt, where
XX is the segment number, q is for flow, t is for temperature,c is for concentration, and d is for
derived concentrations. If there is a structure, withdrawal and a 2 pumps at this segment, the combined flows and flow-averaged temperature and concentrations will be written to these files. In
addition, output files are written for each separate outlet. In this case there will also be written the
following files:
qwo_str1_segXX.opt, qwo_wd1_segXX.npt,
qwo_pmp1_segXX.opt,
qwo_pmp2_segXX.opt, two_str1_segXX.opt, two_wd1_segXX.npt, two_pmp1_segXX.opt,
two_pmp2_segXX.opt, cwo_str1_segXX.opt, cwo_wd1_segXX.npt, cwo_pmp1_segXX.opt,
cwo_pmp2_segXX.opt, and similarly for the derived concentrations for the structure, withdrawal
and two pump withdrawals. Similarly named output files are provided for gates, spillways and
pipes if they are located at the withdrawal output segment [IWDO].
In the flow and temperature withdrawal files, in addition to the sum of flows and weighted temperature of all withdrawals/structures, a breakdown of individual flows and temperatures are given.
Example
WITH OUT
WDOC
ON
NWDO
1
NIWDO
2
C-118
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL

Withdrawal Output Date
Withdrawal Output Frequency
Withdrawal Output Segment
C-119
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Output Date (WDO DATE)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
WDOD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the dates information is output to the withdrawal outflow file [WDOFN]. If
there are more dates than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line
without another WDO DATE card being specified.
Example
WDO DATE
WDOD
63.5
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD

Withdrawal Output
C-120
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Withdrawal Output Frequency (WDO FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
WDOF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the withdrawal outflow file [WDOFN].
Frequency can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying the dates on the Withdrawal Output Date card and the frequencies on the Withdrawal Output Frequency card. If
output is needed only for the date specified on the Withdrawal Output Date card, then set the
frequency to be greater than the number of days before the next output date.
line without another WDO FREQ card being specified.
Example
WDO FREQ
WDOF
0.2
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF

Withdrawal Output
C-121
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Output Segment (WITH SEG)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
IWDO
Integer
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Output segments
This card specifies model segments for which information is output to the withdrawal output file
[WDOFN]. If a downstream segment of a reservoir is specified, then information is output at the
frequency specified in the Withdrawal Output Frequency card that can be used as input files to a
waterbody downstream of the reservoir.
If there are more segments than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next
line without another WITH SEG card being specified.
Example
WITH SEG
IWDOUT
30
IWDOUT
32
IWDOUT
IWDOUT
IWDOUT
IWDOUT
IWDOUT
IWDOUT
IWDOUT

Withdrawal Output
C-122
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Restart (RESTART)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
RSOC
Character
OFF
3
4
NRSO
RSIC
Integer
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if information is output to the restart file,
ON or OFF
Number of restart dates
Specifies if information is input from the restart
file, ON or OFF
This card specifies if information is output to the restart output file [RSOFN] or read into the model
from a previously output restart file [RSIFN] and the number of restart dates.
Example
RESTART
RSOC
ON
NRSO
2
RSIC
OFF

Restart Date
Restart Frequency
C-123
OUTPUT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Restart Date (RSO DATE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
RSOD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies dates information is output to the restart file [RSOFN]. If there are more dates
than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line without another RSO
DATE card being specified.
Example
RSO DATE
RSOD
224.5
RSOD
230.5
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD

Restart
Restart Frequency
C-124
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT CONTROL
Restart Frequency (RSO FREQ)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
RSOF
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
This card specifies the frequency information is output to the restart plot file [ RSOFN]. Frequencies can be changed at any time during the simulation by specifying the appropriate dates on the
Restart Date card and frequencies on the Restart Frequency card. If output is needed only for the
date specified on the Restart Date card, then set the frequency to be greater than the number of
line without another RSO FREQ card being specified.
Example
RSO FREQ
RSOF
100.0
RSOF
100.0
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF

Restart
Restart Date
C-125
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Constituent Computations (CST COMP)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CCC
Character
OFF
3
4
LIMC
CUF
Character
Integer
OFF
1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if constituents are computed, ON or
OFF
Output algal growth limiting factor, ON or OFF
Frequency which constituent kinetics are updated
This card starts the specification of constituent computations. [CCC] determines if constituent
computations are performed. If this variable is turned off, then constituent computations are not
performed and all information specified on the remaining constituent control cards is ignored. Individual constituent computations are controlled on the Active Constituents card. During the
initial calibration runs for freshwater systems, constituent computations are usually turned off until
temperature, water surface elevations, and velocities are calibrated.
The [LIMC] variable specifies whether the factor limiting algal growth is output to the snapshot
file [SNPFN].
The model allows the user to update constituent kinetics at a different frequency than constituent
transport. The constituent update frequency [CUF] specifies how many transport iterations are
performed before constituent kinetics are updated. This option is included primarily to reduce
computation time. This variable should be set to one during initial calibration. If computation time
is of concern, [CUF] can be increased until water quality results begin to deviate. Model results
should not be a function of the timestep used during the simulation.
Active constituents must be in the following order in both the control file and the GRAPH.NPT file
listing of constituents even if the constituents are not active.
Required Con- Constituent
stituent order
1
TDS (g/m3 or mg/l) or salinity (kg/m3)
2
Generic constituents, such as bacteria, water age, tracer, etc. user defined
number of groups set by NGC
3
Inorganic suspended solids, mg/l user defined number of groups set by
NSS
4
PO4-P, mg/l as P
5
NH4-N, mg/l as N
6
NO3-N + NO2-N, mg/l as N
7
Dissolved silica, mg/l as Si
8
Particulate silica, mg/l as Si
9
Iron, mg/l as Fe or divalent metal
10
LDOM, mg/l as organic matter
11
RDOM, mg/l as organic matter
12
LPOM, mg/l as organic matter
13
RPOM, mg/l as organic matter
14
CBOD - user defined number of groups, mg/l as O2, set by NBOD
C-126
CONTROL FILE
Required Constituent order
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
Constituent
CBOD-P user defined number of groups, mg/l as P, set by NBOD
CBOD-N user defined number of groups, mg/l as N, set by NBOD
Algae - user defined number of groups, mg/l as dry weight organic matter,
set by NAL
Dissolved oxygen, mg/l
TIC, mg/l as C
Alkalinity, mg/l as CaCO3
Zooplankton - user defined number of groups, mg/l dry weight organic
matter, set by NZP
LDOM-P, mg/l as P
RDOM-P, mg/l as P
LPOM-P, mg/l as P
RPOM-P, mg/l as P
LDOM-N, mg/l as N
RDOM-N, mg/l as N
LPOM-N, mg/l as N
RPOM-N, mg/l as N
Example
CST COMP
CCC
ON
LIMC
OFF
CUF
10

Active Constituents
Constituent Output
Inflow Active Constituent Control
C-127
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Active Constituents (CST ACTIVE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CAC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if calculations are to be performed for
this constituent, ON or OFF
This card specifies which constituents are included in water quality calculations. The current version now allows the user the flexibility to include any number of generic, inorganic suspended
solids, algal and/or epiphyton groups, and CBOD groups. The number of these groups is specified
on the Constituent Dimension card. The generic constituent can be used to simulate any number
of constituents that can be defined with a zero-order decay rate and/or a first order decay rate,
and/or a settling velocity, and/or an Arhennius temperature rate multiplier. This includes a conservative tracer with all kinetic coefficients set to zero, residence time with the zero-order decay
rate set to -1.0 day-1, and coliform bacteria where a temperature rate multiplier, first-order decay
rate, and/or a settling velocity are defined.
The user has the flexibility of including/excluding any of the constituent state variables. The constituent kinetics are strongly coupled and failure to include one or more constituents can have far
reaching effects that are hard to determine beforehand, so use this option carefully. Some previous
applications have modeled only dissolved oxygen with the zero-order sediment oxygen demand
used for calibration. This was deemed acceptable as the applications were looking only at how
different reservoir operations and their impacts on hydrodynamics would affect temperature and
dissolved oxygen.
Note that if the user has CBOD groups and if BODP and BODN are OFF, the model uses the
stoichiometric coefficients in the CBOD STOICH card to compute the fixed N and P content of
each CBOD organic matter group.
The Constituents Computation card goes over the required order of the active constituents, which
is the same order required for the graph.npt file.
C-128
CONTROL FILE
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
Example
CST ACTIVE
TDS
Age
Tracer
Coliform
ISS1
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
BOD1
BOD1-P
BOD1-N
ALG1
ALG2
ALG3
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CAC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Total dissolved solids, mg/l

Water age
Conservative tracer
Coliform bacteria
inorganic suspended solids, mg/l
phosphate-P, mg/l as P
ammonia-N, mg/l as N
nitrate-N, mg/l as N
dissolved silica
particulate silica
iron, mg/l as Fe_total
labile dissolved organic matter, mg/l organic matter
refractory dissolved organic matter, mg/l organic matter
labile particulate organic matter, mg/l organic matter
refractory particulate organic matter, mg/l organic matter
CBOD group 1, mg/l O2
CBOD-P group 1, mg/l O2
CBOD-N group 1, mg/l O2
algal group 1, mg/l organic matter (dry weight)
dissolved oxygen, mg/l O2
total inorganic carbon mg/l as C
alkalinity mg/l as CaCO3
zooplankton group 1
Total P in refractory dissolved organic matter
Total P in refractory particulate organic matter
Total N in refractory dissolved organic matter
Total N in refractory particulate organic matter

Constituent Output
Inflow Active Constituent Control
C-129
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Derived Constituents (CST DERIVE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CDWBC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies if derived variables are output for each
waterbody, ON or OFF
This card allows the user to specify whether certain derived constituents are computed and output
in order to compare with observed data. Derived constituents are constituents that are not state
variables, but are useful for gaining a better understanding of how the water quality formulations
are simulating the prototype. They are also useful for comparing computed versus observed data
for water quality parameters that are not state variables, but that are routinely monitored, such as
total Kjeldahl nitrogen.
In Version 2, pH computations were incorrectly included as a state variable. The current version
now includes pH computations as a derived variable as pH is computed from the total inorganic
carbon and alkalinity state variables (as well as temperature).
An example of the computation of the derived variable Total Suspended Solids (TSS) is shown
below:
,
= +
+ +
+
Hence, the TSS output will include all the inorganic suspended solids fractions and all organic
matter which includes algae, zooplankton, refractory and labile particulate organic matter (POM),
and the particulate fractions of CBOD.
Example
CST DERIVE CDWBC
DOC
OFF
POC
OFF
TOC
OFF
DON
OFF
PON
OFF
TON
OFF
TKN
OFF
TN
OFF
DOP
OFF
POP
OFF
TOP
OFF
TP
OFF
APR
OFF
CHLA
OFF
ATOT
OFF
CDWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CDWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CDWBC
CDWBC
CDWBC
CDWBC
CDWBC
CDWBC
Dissolved organic carbon, mg/l as C
Particulate organic carbon, mg/l as C
Total organic carbon, mg/l as C
Dissolved organic nitrogen, mg/l as N
Particulate organic nitrogen, mg/l N
Total organic nitrogen, mg/l as N
Total Kjeldahl nitrogen, mg/l as N
Total nitrogen, mg/l as N
Dissolved organic phosphorus,mg/l P
Particulate organic phosphorus,mg/l P
Total organic phosphorus, mg/l as P
Total phosphorus, mg/l as P
Algal production
Chlorophyll a, ug/l chlorophyll a
Total algal biomass, mg/l organic matter
C-130
CONTROL FILE
%DO
TSS
TISS
CBODU
Ph
CO2
HCO3
CO3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Dissolved oxygen saturation, %

Total suspended solids, mg/l
Total inorganic suspended solids, mg/l
Total carbonaceous BOD (ultimate)
pH
Carbon dioxide, mg/l as C
Bicarbonate, mg/l as C
Carbonate, mg/l as C

Active Constituents
C-131
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Constituent Fluxes (CST FLUX)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CFWBC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies which kinetic fluxes are output for each
waterbody, ON or OFF
This card allows the user to specify whether constituent advective, diffusive, and kinetic fluxes are
computed and output in order to evaluate their importance on the resulting constituent state variable
computed concentrations. For example, if all the fluxes associated with dissolved oxygen in the
model are output, then the user can determine the most important fluxes affecting DO and adjust
the kinetic rate coefficients accordingly during calibration. This should greatly reduce the time
required for water quality calibration and provide a greater understanding of kinetic behavior in the
model and the prototype. Only the kinetic fluxes are computed in the current release. Advective
and diffusive fluxes will be included in a later release.
Example
CST FLUX
TISSIN
TISSOUT
PO4AR
PO4AG
PO4AP
PO4ER
PO4EG
PO4EP
PO4POM
PO4DOM
PO4OM
PO4SED
PO4SOD
PO4SET
NH4NITR
NH4AR
NH4AG
NH4AP
NH4ER
NH4EG
NH4EP
NH4ANET
NH4POM
NH4DOM
NH4OM
NH4SED
NH4SOD
NO3DEN
NO3AG
NO3EG
NO3SED
DSIAG
DSIEG
DSIPBSI
DSISED
DSISOD
DSISET
PBSIAM
PBSINET
PBSIDK
FESET
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
CFWBC
CFWBC
CFWBC
CFWBC
CFWBC
Total inorganic suspended solids settling, source
Total inorganic suspended solids settling, sink
PO4 from algal respiration, source
PO4 from algal growth, sink
Net PO4 algal uptake, source/sink
PO4 from epiphyton respiration, source
PO4 from epiphyton growth, sink
Net PO4 epiphyton uptake, source/sink
PO4 from particulate organic matter, source
PO4 from dissolved organic matter, source
PO4 from organic matter, source
PO4 from sediment compartment, source
PO4 from 0-order sediment release, source
Sorbed PO4 from settling, source/sink
NH4 from nitrification, sink
NH4 from algal respiration, source
NH4 from algal growth, sink
Net NH4 from algal growth, sink
NH4 from epiphyton respiration, source
NH4 from epiphyton growth, sink
Net NH4 from epiphyton growth, sink
Net NH4 algal uptake, source/sink
NH4 from particulate organic matter, source
NH4 from dissolved organic matter, source
NH4 from organic matter decay
NH4 from sediment compartment, source
NH4 from 0-order sediment release, source
NO3 from denitrification, sink
NO3 from algal growth, sink
NO3 from epiphyton growth, sink
NO3 loss to sediment compartment, sink
Dissolved Si from algal growth, sink
Dissolved Si from epiphyton growth, sink
Dissolved Si from particulate biogenic Si, source
Dissolved Si from sediment compartment, source
Dissolved Si from 0-order sediment release, source
Dissolved Si from sorbed Si settling, source/sink
Particulate biogenic Si from algal mortality, source
Particulate biogenic Si from settling, source/sink
Particulate biogenic Si decay, sink
Fe from settling, source/sink
C-132
CONTROL FILE
FESED
LDOMDK
LRDOM
RDOMDK
LDOMAP
LDOMEP
LPOMDK
LRPOM
RPOMDK
LPOMAP
LPOMSET
RPOMSET
CBODDK
DOAP
DOAR
DOEP
DOER
DOPOM
DODOM
DOOM
DONITR
DOCBOD
DOREAR
DOSED
DOSOD
TICAG
TICEG
SEDDK
SEDAS
SEDLPOM
SEDSET
SODDK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fe from sediment release, source

Labile DOM decay, sink
Labile to refractory DOM decay, sink
Refractory DOM decay, sink
Labile DOM from algal mortality, source
Labile DOM from epiphyton mortality, source
Labile POM decay, sink
Labile to refractory POM decay, sink
Refractoy POM decay, sink
Labile POM from algal mortality, source
Labile POM from settling, source/sink
Refractory POM from settling, source/sink
CBOD decay, sink
DO from algal production, source
DO from algal respiration, sink
DO from epiphyton production, source
DO from epiphyton respiration, sink
DO from POM decay, sink
DO from DOM decay, sink
DO from OM decay, sink
DO from nitrification, sink
DO from CBOD decay, sink
DO from reaeration, source
DO from sediment compartment decay, sink
DO from 0-order sediment compartment, sink
Total inorganic carbon from algal growth, sink
Total inorganic carbon from epiphyton growth, sink
Sediment compartment decay, sink
Sediment compartment from algal settling, source
Sediment compartment from LPOM settling, source
Sediment compartment from net settling, source/sink
Sediment compartment from decay, sink

Active Constituents
C-133
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Constituent Initial Concentration (CST ICON)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
C2IWB
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Initializes entire grid to this concentration, or specifies a vertical
and/or longitudinal profile be used to initialize grid, g m-3
This card allows the user to specify an initial concentration for each constituent. The user has three
options. Initial concentrations can be specified as a single value, a single vertical profile which is
used to initialize every segment, or a vertical profile for each segment.
Initial condition
Isoconcentration
Single vertical profile
Vertical profile at each segment
[IC2]
>or =0.0
-1.0
-2.0
Example
CST ICON
TDS
TRACER
AGE
COL1
COL2
ISS1
ISS2
ISS3
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD1
CBOD2
CBOD3
CBOD1-P
CBOD2-P
CBOD3-P
CBOD1-N
CBOD2-N
CBOD3-N
ALG1
ALG2
ALG3
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
C2IWB
200.0
1000.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
5.0
3.5
4.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
5.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
1.0
1.0
1.0
8.0
3.5
80.0
0.1000
0.0005
0.0005
0.0005
0.0005
0.0080
0.0080
C2IWB
200.0
1000.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
5.0
3.5
4.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
5.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
1.0
1.0
1.0
8.0
3.5
50.0
0.10
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.080
0.080
C2IWB
200.0
1000.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
5.0
3.5
4.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
5.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
1.0
1.0
1.0
7.0
3.5
30.0
0.10
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.080
0.080
C2IWB
C2IWB
C2IWB
C2IWB
C2IWB
C2IWB
Total dissolved solids or salinity
Generic constituent 1 - conservative tracer
Generic constituent 2 - residence time
Generic constituent 3 - coliform group 1
Inorganic suspended solids group 1
Dissolved inorganic phosphorus mg/l as P
Ammonium mg/l as N
Nitrate-nitrite mg/l as N
Dissolved silica mg/l as Si
Particulate biogenic silica mg/l as Si
Iron mg/l
Labile dissolved organic matter mg/l
Refractory dissolved organic matter mg/l
Labile particulate organic matter mg/l
Refractory particulate organic matter mg/l
Carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand group 1
Carbonaceous BOD-P group 1
Carbonaceous BOD-N group 1
Algal group 1 mg/l dry weight biomass
Dissolved oxygen mg/l
Total inorganic carbon mg/l as C
Alkalinity mg/l as CaCO3
Zooplankton mg/l dry biomass
C-134
CONTROL FILE
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
0.0080
0.0080
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
0.080
0.080
0.080
0.080


Active Constituents
C-135
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Constituent Output (CST PRINT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CPRWBC Character
DEFAULT
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies which constituents are printed to output
files, ON or OFF
This card specifies which constituents are printed to all the output files for water quality such as
the snapshot file [SNPFN], time series file [TSRFN], profile plot file [PRFFN], spreadsheet plot
file, withdrawal output, and contour plot file [CPLFN]. The user does not have control over which
constituents will be sent to an individual file.
Example
CST PRINT CPRWBC
TDS
ON
TRACER
ON
AGE
ON
COL1
ON
COL2
ON
ISS1
ON
ISS2
ON
ISS3
ON
PO4
ON
NH4
ON
NO3
ON
DSI
ON
PSI
ON
FEe
ON
LDOM
ON
RDOM
ON
LPOM
ON
RPOM
ON
CBOD1
ON
CBOD2
ON
CBOD3
ON
CBOD1-P
ON
CBOD2-P
ON
CBOD3-P
ON
CBOD1-N
ON
CBOD2-N
ON
CBOD3-N
ON
ALG1
ON
ALG2
ON
ALG3
ON
DO
ON
TIC
ON
ALK
ON
ZOO1
ON
LDOM_P
ON
RDOM_P
ON
LPOM_P
ON
RPOM_P
ON
LDOM_N
ON
RDOM_N
ON
LPOM_N
ON
RPOM_N
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC CPRWBC CPRWBC CPRWBC CPRWBC CPRWBC

Generic constituent 1 - tracer
Generic constituent 2 - residence time
Inorganic dissolved phosphorus
Ammonium
Nitrate-nitrite
Dissolved silica
Iron
Labile dissolved organic matter
Refractory dissolved organic matter
Labile particulate organic matter
Refractory particulate organic matter
Carbonaceous BOD group 1
Algal group 1
Algal group 2
Algal group 3
Dissolved oxygen
Zooplankton
C-136
CONTROL FILE
CONSTITUENT CONTROL

Snapshot Print
Profile Plot
Time Series Plot
Spreadsheet Plot
Contour Plot
C-137
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Inflow Active Constituent Control (CIN CON)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CINBRC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies which constituents are included in inflow constituent file, ON or OFF
For some applications, inflow concentrations for a particular constituent may not be available. This
card allows the user to include in the inflow oncentration file [CINFN] only those constituents for
which there is a concentration. For those excluded, the model uses a zero concentration for the
inflow. As shown in the example, descriptions can be included after the input fields to aid in identifying a given constituent.
Example
CIN CON
TDS
TRACER
AGE
COL1
COL2
ISS1
ISS2
ISS3
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD1
CBOD2
CBOD3
CBOD1-P
CBOD2-P
CBOD3-P
CBOD1-N
CBOD2-N
CBOD3-N
ALG1
ALG2
ALG3
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC CINBRC CINBRC CINBRC CINBRC

Generic constituenT 2 - residence time
Ammonium
Nitrate-nitrite
Dissolved silica
Iron
Algal group 1
Algal group 2
Algal group 3
Dissolved oxygen
Zooplankton
Total P in refractory particulate org matter
Total N in refractory particulate org matter
C-138
CONTROL FILE
CONSTITUENT CONTROL

Branch Inflow Constituent File
Branch Inflow Constituent Filename
C-139
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Active Constituent Control (CTR CON)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CTRTRC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies which constituents are included in tributary inflow constituent file for each tributary, ON
or OFF
For some applications, tributary inflow concentrations for a particular constituent may not be available. This card allows the user to include in the tributary inflow concentration file [CTRFN] only
those constituents for which there is a concentration.
Example
CTR CON
TDS
TRACER
AGE
COL1
COL2
ISS1
ISS2
ISS3
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD1
CBOD2
CBOD3
CBOD1-P
CBOD2-P
CBOD3-P
CBOD1-N
CBOD2-N
CBOD3-N
ALG1
ALG2
ALG3
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CTRTRC
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC CTRTRC CTRTRC CTRTRC CTRTRC CTRTRC CTRTRC

Generic constituen 2 - residence time
Ammonium
Nitrate-nitrite
Dissolved silica
Iron
Algal group 1
Algal group 2
Algal group 3
Dissolved oxygen
Zooplankton
CTRTRC
C-140
CONTROL FILE
CONSTITUENT CONTROL

Tributary Inflow Concentration File
C-141
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Distributed Trib Active Constituent (CDT CON)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CDTBRC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies which constituents are included in distributed tributary inflow constituent file for each
branch, ON or OFF
For some applications, distributed tributary inflow concentrations for a particular constituent may
not be available. This card allows the user to include in the distributed tributary inflow concentration file [CDTFN] only those constituents for which there is a concentration.
Example
CDT CON
TDS
TRACER
AGE
COL1
COL2
ISS1
ISS2
ISS3
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD1
CBOD2
CBOD3
CBOD1-P
CBOD2-P
CBOD3-P
CBOD1-N
CBOD2-N
CBOD3-N
ALG1
ALG2
ALG3
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CDTBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CDTBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CDTBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CDTBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CDTBRC CDTBRC CDTBRC CDTBRC CDTBRC

Ammonium
Nitrate-nitrite
Dissolved silica
Iron
Algal group 1
Algal group 2
Algal group 3
Dissolved oxygen
Zooplankton
C-142
CONTROL FILE
CONSTITUENT CONTROL

Distributed Tributary Inflow Concentration File
C-143
CONSTITUENT CONTROL
CONTROL FILE
Precipitation Active Constituent Control (CPR CON)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CPRBRC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Specifies which constituents are included in the
precipitation inflow constituent file for each
branch, ON or OFF
For some applications, precipitation concentrations for a particular constituent may not be available. This card allows the user to include in the precipitation concentration file [CPRFN] only
those constituents for which there is a concentration.
Example
CPR CON
TDS
TRACER
AGE
COL1
COL2
ISS1
ISS2
ISS3
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD1
CBOD2
CBOD3
CBOD1-P
CBOD2-P
CBOD3-P
CBOD1-N
CBOD2-N
CBOD3-N
ALG1
ALG2
ALG3
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CPRBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CPRBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CPRBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CPRBRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CPRBRC CPRBRC CPRBRC CPRBRC CPRBRC

Ammonium
Nitrate-nitrite
Dissolved silica
Iron
Algal group 1
Algal group 2
Algal group 3
Dissolved oxygen
Zooplankton
C-144
CONTROL FILE
CONSTITUENT CONTROL

Calculations
Precipitation Concentration File
Precipitation Concentration Filename
C-145
KINETIC COEFFICIENTS
CONTROL FILE
Extinction Coefficient (EX COEF)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
EXH2O
Real
EXSS
Real
EXOM
Real
BETA
Real
6
7
EXC
EXIC
Character
Character
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
0.25 or 0.45 Extinction for pure water, m-1[The 0.25 value is
for water quality constituents ON and 0.45 value
is used when only temperature is being simulated.]
0.1
ISS : extinction due to inorganic suspended solids, m-1/(g/m3)
0.1
POM :extinction due to organic suspended solids, m-1/(g/m3)
0.45
Fraction of incident solar radiation absorbed at
the water surface
OFF
Read extinction coefficients, ON or OFF
OFF
Interpolate extinction coefficients, ON or OFF
This card specifies the short wave solar radiation extinction coefficients and amount of solar radiation, , absorbed in the surface layer. Extinction coefficients are used to calculate a net extinction
coefficient, , which is determined from the following equation:
H 2O ISS POM a macro zoo

where:
ISS ISS ISS
# ISS
ISS
ISS
= extinction parameter for inorganic suspended solids, m-1/( g m-3) - user supplied parameter
= inorganic suspended solids concentration for each size fraction (up to 9)
POM POM POM

POM
POM
= extinction parameter for particulate organic matter, m-1/ g m-3) - user supplied parameter
= particulate organic matter concentration = particulate labile + particulate refractory organic matter concentration
a a a
algae extinction, m-1
zoo zoo zoo
zooplankton extinction, m-1
macro macro macro
macrophyte extinction, m-1

a = extinction coefficient for each algal group, m-1/ g m-3) - user supplied parameter
a = algal concentration for each algal group, g m-3
zoo = extinction coefficient for each zooplankton group, m-1/ g m-3) - user supplied parameter
zoo = zooplankton concentration for each zooplankton group, g m-3
macro = extinction coefficient for each macrophyte group, m-1/ g m-3) - user supplied parameter
macro = macrophyte concentration for each macrophyte group, g m-3
H 2O = extinction coefficient for water (for a wavelength of between 0.5 and 0.6m, the absorption coefficient for pure water is about 0.1 m-1).
C-146
CONTROL FILE
H2O varies greatly depending upon the dissolved substances in the water. Table C-31 gives values
reported in the literature that can be used as rudimentary guidelines for selecting a value of H2O.
Table C-31. Extinction Coefficient Literature Values
Description
, m-1
Reference
Oligotrophic
Oligotrophic
Oligotrophic
Calcareous water
Eutrophic
Brown-stained
Brown-stained
Turbid, eutrophic
Turbid
Average
0.2
0.2
0.18
0.34
0.46-1.68
0.7
1.53
2.58
3.31
4.0
Wetzel, 1975
Wetzel, 1975
Spence, 1981
Spence, 1981
Wetzel, 1975
Verduin, 1982
Spence, 1981
Spence, 1981
Spence, 1981
Wetzel, 1975
Location
Lake Tahoe, CA
Crystal Lake, WI
Crater Lake, OR
Lake Borralie, Scotland
Wintergreen Lake, MI
Lake Paajarvi, Finland
Loch Unagan, Scotland
Loch Leven, Scotland
Neusiedlersee, Austria
Highly stained lakes
Megard et al. (1980) and Smith and Baker (1978) determined each gram per cubic meter of chlorophyll increased POM by 22 and 16 m-1, respectively. Averaging the two values and assuming a
carbon to algal biomass ratio of 0.45 and a carbon to chlorophyll ratio of 50, then each gram per
cubic meter of algal biomass should increase POM by about 0.17 m-1. However, the carbon to
chlorophyll ratios vary from 25 to 150. Values for ISS should be of the same order of magnitude
as POM.
If any constituents included in the above equation are not included in the simulation, then the value
for H2O should be increased to account for the constituent left out.
In some cases Secchi disk data are available. There are different expressions for converting Secchi
disk depth, zSecchi in m, to a light extinction coefficient in m-1, some of these include
=
=z
zSecchi
1.11
Secchi
0.73
(Chapra, 1997) where varies from 1.4 to 1.9 (typical value of 1.7)
(Williams et al., 1980) for lakes and reservoirs in the Ohio River basin the 1970s
1.36
zSecchi 0.86
(Armenglo et al., 2003) for Sau Reservoir, Spain between 1995 and 2001
log = 0.96 log(zSecchi ) + 0.30 (Caffrey et. al. 2006) for 32 Florida, USA lakes
where:
= net extinction coefficient, m-1

Caution should be used in transferring these results to reservoirs and lakes in other drainage basins.
The above equations converting Secchi disk depth to light extinction include the effects of ISS and
OSS and should be used only when inorganic and organic suspended solids are not included in the
simulation.
C-147
CONTROL FILE
The fraction of incident solar radiation absorbed at the water surface, , represents solar radiation
absorbed in the surface layer. A study of 29 lakes and reservoirs in the Ohio River basin (USA)
showed the following relationship between light extinction, in m-1, and (Williams et. al. 1980):
0.265 ln( ) 0.614

R2=0.69 Standard error (SE)=0.0992
Again caution should be used in using a relationship developed for a different waterbody than your
application. A typical value for [BETA] is 0.45, implying that 45% of the incident radiation is
absorbed in the upper layer of the water body, assumed to be the surface layer of the model. This
represents the long wave components of the solar spectrum which are readily absorbed.
Table C-32 shows values of BETA for a variety of systems. Note that in most cases these values
assume that the water depth is between 0.5 to 2 m for the surface layer. The concept of using BETA
in a shallow river system is not straightforward since the basic theory that we have a constant value
of light extinction below the surface layer is probably not correct. The light extinction coefficient
in a shallow system is constantly changing as a function of depth and light wavelength.
Table C-32. Values of BETA (TVA, 1972).
0.63
0.64
0.68
0.69
0.69
0.58
0.50
0.24
0.24
Location
Pure water
Clear ocaeanic water
Average oceanic water
Average coastal water
Turbid coastal water
Lake Mendota
Trout Lake
Big Ridge Lake, TVA
Fontana Lake, TVA
The model user can input a file of extinction coefficients as a function of time for each water body
if [EXC] is ON. Interpolation of this input file is performed when [EXIC] is ON. The extinction
coefficients can be derived from secchi disk or light photometer data. The input file is specified
under the Extinction Coefficient file name. When the extinction coefficient is read in, all other
calculations of light extinction are ignored.
Example
EX
WB
WB
WB
COEF
1
2
3
EXH2O
0.25
0.25
0.25
EXSS
0.01
0.01
0.01
EXOM
0.01
0.01
0.01
BETA
0.45
0.45
0.45
EXC
OFF
OFF
OFF
EXIC
OFF
OFF
OFF

Algal Extinction
Light Extinction File
Light Extinction Filename
C-148
CONTROL FILE
Algal Extinction (ALG EX)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EXA
Real
0.2
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
a :algal light extinction, m-1 /gm-3
This card specifies the effect of algae on short wave solar radiation extinction in the water column.
See the Extinction Coefficient card for a more complete description.
Example
ALG EX
EXA
0.2
EXA
0.2
EXA
0.2
EXA
EXA
EXA
EXA
EXA
EXA

Extinction Coefficient
C-149
CONTROL FILE
Zooplankton Extinction (ZOO EX)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EXZ
Real
0.2
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
ZOO :zooplankton light extinction, m-1 /gm-3
This card specifies the effect of algae on short wave solar radiation extinction in the water column.
See the Extinction Coefficient card for a more complete description.
Example
ZOO EX
EXZ
0.2
EXZ
0.2
EXZ
0.2
EXZ
EXZ
EXZ

C-150
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Extinction (MAC EX)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EXM
Real
0.01
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
macro :macrophyte light extinction, m-1 /gm-3
This card specifies the effect of macrophytes on short wave solar radiation extinction in the water
column. See the Extinction Coefficient card for a more complete description.
Berger (2000) compiled the following literature values of light extinction for macrophytes in the
following table.
Table 33. Literature values for light extinction due to macrophyte plant tissue concentration.
Species
Light extinction due to macrophyte concentration, m3m-1g-1

0.01
0.006
0.013 to 0.019
0.024
Myriophyllum spicatum L.
Myriophyllum spicatum L.
Vallisneria americana Michx.
Potamogeton pectinatus
Reference
Ikusima, 1970
Titus and Adams, 1979
Titus and Adams, 1979
Van der Bijl et al., 1989
Example
MACRO EX
EXM
0.0100
EXM
EXM
EXM
EXM
EXM

C-151
CONTROL FILE
Generic Constituent (GENERIC)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
CGQ10
CG0DK
Real
Real
4
5
CG1DK
CGS
Real
Real
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Arhennius temperature rate multiplier
0-order decay rate, with mass concentration
units: gm-3day-1
1st -order decay rate, day-1
Settling rate, m day-1
This card specifies the Arhennius temperature rate multiplier, 0-order decay rate, 1st-order decay
rate, and settling rate for a generic constituent. The ability to model any number of generic constituents whose kinetics can be described by these parameters has been a part of CE-QUAL-W2
since Version 3.1. These constituents can includes tracers, residence time or water age, coliform
bacteria, etc. For a tracer, all of the kinetic parameters should be set to zero. For residence time,
the 0-order decay rate should be set to -1.0. In this case the units of [CG0DK] are [day/day] rather
than [g/m3/day]. Since this is a decay rate, setting it to 1.0 specifies a growth rate of 1 day-1.
Unlike other state variables, the generic constituent uses an Arhennius temperature rate multiplier
(or Q10) formulation to modify the generic constituent decay rate (for both zero order and first order
rates) as a function of temperature: = 20 20, where =CGQ10 and k20 is the decay rate
(either CG0DK or CG1DK) at 20oC.
This decay as a function fo temperature is what is most likely to be encountered in the literature,
particularly for coliform bacteria. Care must be taken when using this formulation at low (< 6C)
temperatures. For coliform bacteria, the Q10 coefficient (CGQ10) is usually 1.04. A range of values
for coliform can be found in Zison et al. (1978).
Coliform decay rate is a function of sedimentation, solar radiation, nutrient availability, predation,
algae, bacterial toxins, and physicochemical factors. For studies in which bacterial contamination
is of important concern, efforts should be made to obtain in situ decay rate measurements. Methods
for obtaining decay rates can be found in Frost and Streeter (1924), Marais (1974), and Zison et al.
(1978). Table C-34 gives reported literature values for coliform decay rates.
Table C-34. In Situ Coliform Decay Rates
Location
Ohio River
Ohio River
Upper Illinois River
Missouri River
Tennessee River
Tennessee River
Sacramento River
Cumberland River
Leaf River, MS
Wastewater lagoon
Maturation ponds
Season/ Temperature
Summer, 20C
Winter, 5C
June-September
October-May
December-March
April-November
Winter
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
7.0-25.5C
19C
Rate, day-1
1.18
1.08
2.04
2.52, 0.89
0.57, 0.62
1.03, 0.70
0.48
1.03, 1.32
1.32
1.75
5.52
0.41
0.20-0.70
1.68
Reference
Frost and Streeter, 1924
Frost and Streeter, 1924
Hoskins, et al, 1927
Kittrell and Furfari, 1963
Mahloch, 1974
Klock, 1971
Marais, 1974
C-152
CONTROL FILE
Location
Oxidation ponds
Season/ Temperature
20 C
Rate, day-1
2.59
Reference
Marais, 1974
Example
GENERIC
CG 1
CG 2
CG 3
C-153
CGQ10
0.00
0.00
1.04
CG0DK
0.0
-1.0
0.0
CG1DK
0.0
0.0
0.2
CGS
0.0
0.0
1.0
CONTROL FILE
Suspended Solids (S SOLIDS)

FIELD
1
2-10
3
4
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SSS
SEDRC
TAUCR
Real
Real
Real
1.0
OFF
1.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Suspended solids settling rate, m day-1
Turns ON or OFF sediment resuspension
Critical shear stress for sediment resuspension,
dynes/cm2
This card specifies the suspended solids settling rates for each inorganic suspended solids state
variable specified in the Constituent Dimensions card. Currently, phosphorus partitioning as
specified on the Inorganic Phosphorus card is the same for all inorganic suspended solids. New
to V3.2 is the ability to resuspend inorganic suspended solids due to wind shear and the resulting
wind waves that cause sediment resuspension (Chapra, 1997). The computations are included by
turning [SEDRC] to ON. The critical shear stress is specified by [TAUCR]. Details of this computation for resuspension are found in Appendix A.
Example
S SOLIDS
SSS 1
SSS 2
SSS
1.5
0.5
SEDRC
ON
ON
TAUCR
1.500
1.000
C-154
CONTROL FILE
Algal Rates (ALGAL RATE)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
AG
AR
AE
AM
AS
AHSP
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
2.0
0.04
0.04
0.1
0.1
0.003
AHSN
Real
0.014
AHSSI
Real
0.0
10
ASAT
Real
100.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Maximum algal growth rate, day-1
Maximum algal respiration rate, day-1
Maximum algal excretion rate, day-1
Maximum algal mortality rate, day-1
Algal settling rate, m day-1
Algal half-saturation for phosphorus limited
growth, g m-3
Algal half-saturation for nitrogen limited growth,
g m-3
Algal half-saturation for silica limited growth, g
m-3
Light saturation intensity at maximum photosynthetic rate, W m-2
This card specifies rates for algal growth, mortality, excretion, respiration, and settling. Additionally, values that affect the maximum algal growth rate including light and nutrient limited growth
are also specified here.
[AG] is the maximum gross production rate that is not corrected for respiration, mortality, excretion, or sinking. Most literature values report net production rates that take into account respiration
so care must be taken when using reported literature values. The user must evaluate the experimental design to determine if reported values represent gross or net production rates. Also, [AG]
is temperature dependent. If the expected temperature in the photic zone is 25C, then the user
should select rates measured near this temperature. The default value of 2 day-1 has given excellent
results on previous studies.
Table C-35. Gross Production Rates of Phytoplankton.
Species
Asterionella formosa
Asterionella Formosa
Asterionella japonica
Biddulphia sp.
Coscinodiscus sp.
Cyclotella meneghiniana
Cyclotell nana
Detonula confervacea
Detonula confervacea
Ditylum brightwellii
Fragilaria sp.
C-155
[AG], day-1
0.81
0.69
1.38
1.66
1.71
0.28
0.69
1.38
2.2
1.9
1.19
1.3
1.7
1.5
0.55
0.34
3.4
0.62
1.4
2.1
0.85
Temperature, C
Diatoms
20
10
20
25
20
4
10
20
20
18.5
22
18
25
11
18
16
20
2
10
20
20
Reference
Holm and Armstrong, 1981
Hutchinson, 1957
Hutchinson, 1957
Hutchinson, 1957
Fogg, 1969
Talling 1955
Talling 1955
Talling 1955
Hoogenhout and Amesz, 1965
Fogg, 1969
Castenholz, 1964
Fogg, 1969
Smayda, 1969
Paasche, 1968
Rhee and Gotham, 1981b
CONTROL FILE
Fragilaria sp.
Melosira sp.
Navicula minima
Navicula pelliculosa
Nitszchia palea
Nitszchia turgidula
Phaedoactylum tricornutum
Phaedoactylum tricornutum
Rhizosolenia fragillissima
Skeletonema costatum
Synedra sp.
Thalassiosira nordenskioldii
Natural diatom community
1.7
0.7
1.4
2.0
2.1
2.5
1.66
2.7
1.2
1.26
2.30
1.52
1.23
1.2
0.77
3.1
Ankistrodesmus braunii
Chlorella pyrenoidosa
Chlorella ellipsoidea
Chlorella luteoviridis
Chlorella miniata
Chlorella seccharophilia
Chlorella variegata
Chlorella vulgaris
Chlorella vulgaris
Dunaliella tertiolecta
Dunaliella tertiolecta
Haematococcus pluvialis
Nanochloris atomus
Platymonas subcordiformia
Scenedesmus sp.
Scenedesmus costulatus
Scenedesmus obliquus
Scenedesmus quadricauda
Selenastrum capricornutum
Selenastrum westii
Stichococcus sp.
2.33
2.22
3.6
0.56
0.87
2.14
1.95
9.00
9.2
1.2
0.86
2.9
1.59
1.0
0.77
1.2
1.0
1.5
1.34
2.0
2.11
2.2
4.1
2.29
2.45
1.0
0.7
Botrydiopsis intercedens
Bumilleriopsis brevis
Cricosphaera carterae
Isochrysis galbana
Isochrysis galbana
Monochrysis lutheri
Monochrysis lutheri
Monodus subterraneus
Monodus subterraneus
Tribonema aequale
Tribonema minus
Vischera stellata
Euglena gracilis
1.5
2.9
0.82
0.55
0.8
1.5
0.39
0.93
0.39
0.7
1.0
0.7
2.2
Amphidinium carteri
Amphidinium carteri
Ceratium tropos
Gonyaulax polyedra
1.88
0.32
0.20
2.1
11
11
25
20
25
20
25
19
21
18
20
20
20
11
12
20
Greens
25
28
25
22.4
25
25
25.5
39
39
25
25
25
20
16
36
23
20
16
20
24.5
20
25
25
27
27
25
20
Golden-Brown
25
25
18
20
25
15
24
25
30
25
25
25
25
Dinoflagellate
18
32
20
21.5
Castenholz, 1964
Castenholz, 1964
Paasche, 1968
Fogg, 1969
Ignatiades and Smayda, 1970
Fogg, 1969
Jorgensen, 1968
Steemann-Nielsen and Jorgensen, 1968
Jitts, et al., 1964
Castenholz, 1964
Jitts, et al., 1964
Verduin, 1952
Shelef, 1968
Fogg, 1969
Sorokin and Meyers, 1953
Castenholz, 1969
Goldman and Grahan, 1981
Jitts, et al., 1964
Rhee and Gotham, 1981b
Goldman and Graham, 1981
Goldman, et al., 1972
Goldman, et al., 1972
Fogg, 1969
Fogg, 1969
Jitts, et al., 1964
Fogg, 1969
Fogg, 1969
Jitts, et al., 1964
Fogg, 1969
C-156
CONTROL FILE
Gymnodinium splendens
Peridinium sp.
Prorocentrium gracile
Prorocentrium micans
Prorocentrium micans
Agmenellum quadriplaticum
Anabaena cylindrical
Anabaena variabilis
Anacystis nidulans
Anacystis nidulans
Chloropseudomonas ethylicum
Cyanidium caldarium
Cylindrospermum sphaerica
Gloeotrichia echinulata
Microcystis aeruginosa
Microcystis luminmosis
Nostoc muscorum
Oscillatoria prinsips
Oscillatoria terebriformis
Oscillatoria rubescens
Rhodopseudomonas sphaeroides
Rhodospirrilum rubrum
Schizothrix calcicola
Synechococcus lividus
Synechococcus sp.
Tolypothrix tennuis
Leotocylindruc danicus
Anabaena variabilis
0.92
0.9
0.83
0.71
0.3
20
18
18
25
20
Cyanobacteria
8.0
39
0.96
25
3.9
34.5
2.9
25
11.0
40
3.3
30
2.4
40
0.17
25
0.2
26.5
0.25
20
1.6
23
1.5
40
2.9
32.5
0.5
40
3.36
40
5.04
30
10.8
34
4.85
25
3.4
30
4.98
40
8.0
37
4.0
38
0.67-2.0
10-20
0.07-2.0
10-35

Fogg, 1969
Castenholz, 1969
Holm and Armstrong, 1981
Castenholz, 1969
Castenholz, 1969
Castenholz, 1969
Zimmerman, 1969
Castenholz, 1969
Verity, 1981
Collins and Boylen, 1982a
Grover (1989) rated the competitiveness of 11 algal species in P limiting environment. Maximum
growth rates and P half saturation constants were measured and confidence intervals given.
Mixed species batch cultures were used to measure the kinetics. Algae density was determined
by counting cells and the coefficients were estimated by fitting data to the Monod model. Three
types of models were fitted: one with a common maximum growth rate and half saturation constant, one with a common half saturation constant but individual growth rates, and one with a individual growth rate and common half saturation constant.
Grover found it difficult to measure the half saturation constant because growth occured at low
concentrations of the nutrient even when it only existed as a contaminant. Half saturation constant was measured in units of micromoles/liter. Soluble reactive phosphorus was form of P
measured. Table 36 lists the maximum growth rates and Table 37 lists half-saturation constants
determined by Grover. The source of the algae was Square Lake, Minnesota (Washington
County). Temperature was maintained at 12 Celsius the photon supply rate was ~60 moles/ m2
/s on a 14 hours light/10 hours dark cycle. The samples were grown over a period of 7 days.
Table 36. Maximum growth rates (1/day) determined by Grover (1989).
Species
Group
Chlamydomonas sp.
Chlorella sp.
Cryptomonas sp.
Oocystis sp.
Green
Green
C-157
Maximum Growth Rate (1/day)

Estimate
95% Confidence Limit
Lower
Upper
0.79
0.61
0.96
0.81
0.62
1.05
0.49
0.39
0.58
0.52
0.43
0.61
CONTROL FILE
Species
Group
Sphaerocystis schroeteri
Nitzschia acicularis
Nitzschia linearis
Nitzschia palea
Synedra radians
Synedra rumpens
Diatom
Diatom
Diatom
Diatom
Diatom
Maximum Growth Rate (1/day)

Estimate
Lower
Upper
0.63
0.47
0.93
0.48
0.28
0.71
0.35
0.24
0.46
0.56
0.45
0.68
0.88
0.77
1.03
0.60
0.39
0.85
0.73
0.59
0.88
Table 37. Phosphorus half-saturation coefficients (mol/liter) determined by Grover (1989).

Species
P-half saturation coefficients (mol/liter)

Estimate
Lower
Upper
0.0071
0.00097
0.038
0.022
0.0047
0.23
0.014
0.0043
0.096
0.012
0.0037
0.067
0.035
0.0043
0.50
0.025
0.0011
0.34
0.0023
0
0.019
0.019
0.0051
0.22
0.047
0.016
0.22
0.00014
0
0.012
0.0069
0.0014
0.026
Group
Chlamydomonas sp.
Chlorella sp.
Cryptomonas sp.
Oocystis sp.
Sphaerocystis schroeteri
Nitzschia acicularis
Nitzschia linearis
Nitzschia palea
Synedra radians
Synedra rumpens
Riebesell et. al. (1993) determined maximum growth rates (Table 38) and carbon half-saturation
coefficients (Table 36) for 3 species of marine diatoms grown under optimal nutrient and light
conditions. The carbon source of common marine diatoms is dissolved CO2 although some microalgae can use bicarbonate. Temperatures were maintained at 17 degrees Celsius for D.
brightwelli and T. punctigera and 5 degrees C for R. cf. alata. Light intensity was 120 E/m
2
/second.
Table 38. Maximum growth rates of 3 marine diatoms (Riebesell et. al., 1993)
Species
Group
Thalassiosira punctigera
Rhizoselina cf. alata
Marine diatom
Marine diatom
Marine diatom
Temperature
(Celsius)
17
17
5
Light Intensity
(E/m 2/second)
120
120
120
Maximum Growth
Rate (1/day)
1.46
1.30
0.93
Table 39. Carbon half saturation constants of 3 marine diatoms (Riebesell et. al., 1993).
Species
Group
Temperature
(Celsius)
Light Intensity
(E/m 2/second)
Thalassiosira punctigera
Rhizoselina cf. alata
Marine diatom
Marine diatom
Marine diatom
17
17
5
120
120
120
Carbon half-saturation constant

(M)
1.4
1.2
2.1
The common diatom Skeletonema costatum was studied by Samuel et. al. (1983). There is an
abundance of literature out there regarding this diatom and are these references are listed in the
article. In the East River Skeletonema costatum blooms during late winter early spring but does
not do well in the summer months, perhaps because of pollution. The East River is saturated with
NH3-N, PO4-P, and Silicon year round.
C-158
CONTROL FILE
Source of water used in measuring growth rates was the East River. Salinity in laboratory was
varied to simulate conditions found in East River. Temperature was 20 C and the photo period
14 hours light/10 hours dark at 2500 W/m2. Maximum growth rates measured were 1.2 to 1.8
day-1.
Table 40. Maximum growth rate of Skeletonema costatum (Samuel et. al., 1983).
Species
Group
diatom
Temperature
(Celsius)
20
Light Intensity
(W/m 2)
2500
Maximum growth rate

(day-1)
1.2-1.8
Goldman et. al. (1974) determined the maximum growth rate and inorganic carbon half saturation
coefficient for the freshwater algae Selenastrum capricornutum and Scenedesmus quadricauda.
They are green algae of the order Chlorococcales.
Algae were grown in continuously stirred reactors at a constant inflow and outflow and constant
nutrient concentration. Algae growth was limited by inorganic carbon. The steady state concentration and carbon concentration were fitted to the Monod equation to determine maximum growth
rate and half-saturation concentration.
Cultures were grown at a constant temperature of 27 1 Celsius. Light was provided with cool
white fluorescent tubes at an intensity of 4306 431lumens/meter2. Concentrations were determined by counting algae cells.
The algae dry weight carbon fraction was 44.7% for Scenedesmus quadricauda and 48.9% for
Selenastrum capricornutum.
Table 41. Maximum growth rates of the green algae Selenastrum capricornutum and
Scenedesmus quadricauda (Goldman et. al., 1974).
Species
Group
Green algae
Green algae
Temperature
(Celsius)
27
27
Light Intensity
(lumens/ meter2)
4306 431
4306 431
Maximum growth rate

(day-1)
2.45
2.29
Table 42. Carbon half-saturation coefficients of the green algae Selenastrum capricornutum and Scenedesmus quadricauda (Goldman et. al., 1974).
Species
Group
Green algae
Green algae
Temperature
(Celsius)
27
27
Light Intensity
(lumens/ meter2)
4306 431
4306 431
Carbon Half-saturation coefficient (mg/l)

0.4-1.49
0.1-0.7
Chalup and Laws (1990) calculated the nutrient saturated growth rate of the marine phytoplankter
Pavlova lutheri at different light intensities. Algae were grown in batch cultures at a temperature
between 21.9-22.1 Celsius. Predicted growth rates of 0.625 and 1.14 1/day for light intensities
of 5.44 and 16.3 moles quanta/m2-day, respectively. The nutrient saturated growth rate prediction
were calculated the following regression based on data:
1.95I
s
0.03
I 10.8
C-159
CONTROL FILE
where s and I have the dimensions day-1and moles quanta m-2 d-1. Table 36 shows the predicted
growth rates.
Table 43. Nutrient saturated maximum growth rates of the marine algae Pavlova lutheri
(Chalup and Laws, 1990).
Species
Group
Temperature
(Celsius)
Pavlova lutheri
Pavlova lutheri
marine
marine
22
22
Light Intensity
(moles
quanta/m2-day)
5.44
16.3
Growth rate
(day-1)
0.625
1.14
The maximum growth rate (Table 44) and silicon half-saturation constant (Table 45) of two clones
of the marine diatom Thalassiosira Pseudonana were calculated by Guillard et. al. (1973). One
clone was from Saragossa Sea and the other was an estuarine clone from the Forge River, Moriches
Bay, Long Island, New York. Batch cultures were grown at 20 Celisius and at 6500 lux. Growth
was followed by counting cells.
Table 44. Maximum growth rate of two clones of the marine diatom Thallassiosira Pseudonana (Guillard et. al., 1973).
Species
Group
Source
Temperature
(Celsius)
Growth rate
(doublings/day)
3.64
Confidence
Interval, 95%
20
Light Intensity
(lux)
6500
Thalassiosira
Pseudonana
Thalassiosira
Pseudonana
Marine diatom
Marine diatom
Moriches Bay, Long

Island, NY
Saragossa Sea
20
6500
2.13
2.0-2.3
2.9-4.4
Table 45. Silicon half-saturation constant of two clones of the marine diatom Thallassiosira
Pseudonana (Guillard et. al., 1973).
Species
Group
Source
Temperature
(Celsius)
Light Intensity
(lux)
Confidence
Interval, 95%
6500
Half-Saturation
Constant
(M)
0.98
Thalassiosira
Pseudonana
Thalassiosira
Pseudonana
Marine diatom
Marine diatom
Moriches Bay, Long

Island, NY
Saragossa Sea
20
20
6500
0.19
0.09-0.29
0.28-1.95
Diatoms are not the only alga which require silicon. Klaveness and Guillard (1975) determined
the maximum growth rate (Table 46) and silicon half-saturation coefficient (Table 47) for the
golden-brown (Chrysophyceae) algae Synura Petersenii.
Golden brown algae are an insignificant in the plankton of the sea but are abundant in freshwater
lakes and ponds where they can form blooms. Synura spp. are known as an odor producing species.
Batch cultures were used to measure growth rate and half-saturation constant. Steady-state conditions are attained by maintaining very low algae populations which did not initially affect nutrient
concentrations. Cultures were grown at 20 Celsius and light intensity was 9000 lux with 16 hour
days.
C-160
CONTROL FILE
The algae were obtained from a freshwater pond near Woods Hole, Massachusetts.
Table 46. Maximum growth rate of the golden-brown algae Synura Petersenii (Guillard and
Klaveness, 1975).
Species
Group
Source
Temperature
(Celsius)
Synura Petersenii
Golden-brown algae
(Chrysophyceae)
Fresh water pond,

Massachusetts
20
Light Intensity
(lux)
9000
Maximum growth
rate (divisions/day)
1.12
Table 47. Silicon half-saturation constant of the golden-brown algae Synura Petersenii
(Guillard and Klaveness, 1975).
Species
Group
Source
Temperature
(Celsius)
Synura Petersenii
Golden-brown algae
(Chrysophyceae)
Fresh water pond,

Massachusetts
20
Light Intensity
(lux)
9000
Silicon half-saturation constant

(M)
0.23
Paasche (1973) measured the maximum growth rates of the marine diatom species Skeletonema
costatum, Thalassiosira psuedonana, Thalassiosira decipiens, Ditylum brightwellii, and Licomophora sp. (Table 48). Cultures of Skeletonema costatum, Thalassiosira decipiens, and Licmophora were isolated from the Oslo Fjord.
Cultures were grown at 20 degrees C at a light intensity of about 25000 erg/cm2-sec. An 18 hour
day was used D. brightwellii whereas the other cultures were lit continuously.
Table 48. Maximum growth rates for five species of marine diatoms (Paasche, 1973).
Species
Group
Source
Temperature
(Celsius)
Skeletonema
costatum
Thalassiosira
psuedonana
Thalassiosira decipiens
Ditylum
brightwellii
Licomophora sp.
Marine Diatom
Oslo Fjord
Marine Diatom
Marine Diatom
Oslo Fjord
Marine Diatom
Marine Diatom
Oslo Fjord
Maximum growth
rate (doublings/day)
20
Light Intensity
(erg/cm2-second)
25000
20
25000
4.0
20
25000
1.4
20
25000
3.2
20
25000
1.3
2.4
Table 49 shows the maximum growth rate was determined for the marine diatom Skeletonema
Costatum costatum (Sakshaug and Andresen, 1989). The culture temperature was 15 Celsius.
Skeletonema Costatum is a prominent species in most coastal waters and fjords. At the maximum
growth rate of 1.4 day-1 the light intensity was 4.33 PAR, moles/m2-hour
(PAR=photosynthetically available radiation). The culture was lit continuously at this growth
rate.
C-161
CONTROL FILE
Table 49. The maximum growth rate of the marine diatom Skeletonema costatum
(Sakshaug and Andresen, 1989).
Species
Group
Skeletonema
costatum
Marine Diatom
Temperature
(Celsius)
15
Light Intensity
(PAR, moles/m2-hour)
4.33
Maximum growth rate (day-1)

1.4
Maximum growth rate and dark respiration rate of the three marine diatom species Skeletonema
costatum, Olisthodiscus luteus and Gonyaulax tamarensis measured by Langdon (1987) (Table
50-Table 51). Algae were grown using the batch culture method at 15 Celsius with a 14 hour
day. Langdon developed a interspecies growth-irradiance model consisting of three variables:
cell carbon at maximum growth rate, carbon-chlorophyll a ratio, and dark respiration rate at zero
growth rate. Cell growth was measured by counting cells.
Table 50. Maximum growth rate of the three marine diatom species Skeletonema costatum,
Olisthodiscus luteus and Gonyaulax tamarensis measured by Langdon (1987).
Species
Group
Temperature
(Celsius)
Maximum growth rate (divisions/day)
Skeletonema
costatum
Olisthodiscus luteus
Gonyaulax
tamaresis
Marine Diatom
15
2.41
Standard error of Maximum growth rate (divisions/day)

0.02
Marine Diatom
15
0.87
0.03
Marine Diatom
15
0.56
0.02
Table 51. Dark respiration rate of the three marine diatiom species Skeletonema costatum,
Olisthodiscus luteus and Gonyaulax tamarensis measured by Langdon (1987).
Species
Group
Marine Diatom
Temperature
(Celsius)
15
Dark respiration at zero

growth rate (divisions/day)
0.04
Standard error (divisions/day)

0.03
Skeletonema
costatum
Olisthodiscus luteus
Gonyaulax
tamaresis
Marine Diatom
15
0.06
0.06
Marine Diatom
15
0.17
0.17
Falkowski et. al. (1985) calculated the steady-state growth rates of three species of marine phytoplankton but did not determine maximum growth rates. They did determine that the Isochrysis
galbana becomes light saturated at 200 moles quanta/meter2-second. Phytoplankton were
grown at 18 Celsius.
Excretion rates of less than 5% of gross photosynthesis were observed in Isochrysis galbana,
Thalassiosira weisflogii, and Prorecntrum micans.
Table 52. Light saturation of Isochrysis galbana (Falkowski et. al., 1985).
Species
Group
Isochrysis galbana
Marine Chrysophyte
Temperature
(Celsius)
18
Light saturation
(moles quanta/meter2-second)
200
C-162
CONTROL FILE
Laws and Bannister (1981) measured the maximum growth rate of the marine diatom Thalassiosira fluviatilis using the carbon 14 labeling method. A continuous culture system was used to
grow the phytoplankton. Temperature was maintained at 20 Celsius with a 12 hour light/12 hour
dark cycle. Maximum growth was measured to be 1.22 day-1().
Table 53. Maximum growth rate of Thalassiosira fluviatilis (Laws and Bannister, 1981).
Species
Group
Temperature
(Celsius)
Maximum Growth Rate

(day-1)
Thalassiosira fluviatilis
Marine Diatom
20
1.22
Reay et al. (1999) measured maximum growth rates and optimal growth temperatures while studying the temperature effect of ammonia and nitrate uptake in algae and bacteria. The maximum
growth rate and optimum growth temperatures for the algae are list in Table 54. Also studied was
dependence of ammonia and nitrate half-saturation coefficient on temperature.
Algae cultures were grown in chemostat and batch cultures and were illuminated using fluorescent tubes emitting 200 mol of quanta/m2-s.
Table 54. Maximum growth rates and optimum growth temperatures for phytoplankton
studied by Reay et al. (1999).
Species
Group
Source
Chaetoceros sp.
Marine Diatom
Chaetoceros
curvisetum
Dinialiella tertiolecta
Marine Diatom
Seawater Sample, Southern

Ocean
Seawater Sample, North Sea
Seawater Sample, Oslo Fjord,
Norway
Flagellate alga
Optimum Growth Temperature

(Celsius)
6
Maximum growth rate

(day-1)
23
0.48
24
2.50
0.67
Clark and Flynn (2000) determined maximum growth rates and inorganic carbon half-saturation
coefficients of marine phytoplankton while studying the kinetics of inorganic carbon and the influence of nitrogen source. Batch cultures were grown in a 16 Celsius room under a photon intensity of 200 mol m-2 s1 with a 12 hour light/ 12 hour dark cycle using cool-white fluorescent
tubes. Half-saturation concentrations were estimated by fitting a growth curve to a rectangular
hyperbolic (Michaelis-Menten type) function.
Table 55. Maximum growth rates and carbon half-saturation constants of marine phytoplankton studied by Clark and Flynn (2000).
Species
Group
Phaedactylum tricorntum
Thalassiosira pseudonana
Thalassiosira
weissflogii
C-163
Bacillariophyceae
Nitrogen
Source
NO2
Carbon half-saturation constant (M)

30
Maximum growth rate

(day-1)
0.80
Bacillariophyceae
NO3
273
1.33
Bacillariophyceae
NH4
NO3
233
258
1.75
1.55
NH4
135
1.52
Species
Group
Stichoccocus Bacillaris
Chlorophyta
Alexandrium fundyense
Scrippsiella trochoidea
Emiliana huxleyi
Dinophyta
CONTROL FILE
Nitrogen
Source
NO3
Carbon half-saturation constant (M)

720
Maximum growth rate

(day-1)
0.77
NH4
568
0.83
NO3
468
0.36
Dinophyta
NO3
280
0.40
Prymnesiophyceae
NO3
150
1.19
NH4
114
1.14
Isochrysis galbana
Prymnesiophyceae
NO2
81
0.48
Heterosigma
ccarterae
Raphidophyceae
NO3
673
1.21
NH4
663
1.62
Litchman (2000) compared the effect of constant light and fluctuating light on algae growth.
Growth rate was shown to be species-specific and a diatoms Nitzschia sp. growth rate increased
under fluctuating light at low average intensities. Maximum growth rates, metabolic loss rate
(respiration) and light saturation intensity were measured for 4 freshwater species incubated in
batch cultures at 20 Celsius (Table 56). The growth rates of the blue-greens Anabaena and
Phormidium decreased at higher light intensities, whereas the growth rates of Nitzschia and the
green alga Sphaerocystis were not inhibited at higher light intensities.
Table 56. Maximum growth rate, saturation intensity and respiration rate for 4 freshwater
algae species (Litchman, 2000).
Species
Group
Saturating Light
Intensity (moles
photons/m2-s)
Respiration rate
(day-1)
Maximum
growth rate (day1
)
Nitzschia sp.
Anabaena
Sphaerocystis
Phormidium
Diatom
Blue-green
green
Blue-green
35
25
19
17
0.24
0.1
0.6
0.001
1.31
1.19
1.44
1.4
Maximum algal mortality rate [AM] is also temperature dependent. A general rule of thumb is the
maximum algal mortality rate [AM] should be less than 10% of the maximum algal growth rate
[AG]. Values ranging from 0.03 to 0.3 have been used in previous modeling studies, with the
default value of 0.1 day-1 providing excellent results on a large number of systems.
[AE] is the maximum algal excretion (or photorespiration) rate that goes directly to the labile DOM
compartment. The default value is 0.04 day-1. [AR] is the maximum dark algal respiration rate.
Respiration rates are often expressed as millilitres of oxygen consumed per milligram of organism
dry weight per hour. To convert to model units (mg O2 mg-1 organism dry weight day-1), multiply
dark respiration rates by 0.74 mg dry weight/1 ml O2. Literature values are reported in Table C-57
and Table C-58. The default value is 0.04 day-1
C-164
CONTROL FILE
Table C-57. Maximum Algal Excretion Rate Literature Values

Species
Actinastrum hantzschii
Ankistrodesmus falcatus
Asterococcus superbus
Eudorina elegans
Micractinium pusillum
Excretion Rate, day-1

0.044
0.031
0.036
0.032
0.023
0.014
Reference
Nalewajko, 1966
Nalewajko, 1966
Nalewajko, 1966
Nalewajko, 1966
Nalewajko, 1966
Nalewajko, 1966
Table C-58. Algal Dark Respiration Rate Literature Values

Species
Anabaena variabilis
Coscinodiscus excentricus
Dunaliella teriolecta
Mesodinium rubrum
Monochrysis lutheri
Thalassiosira allenii
Respiration Rate, day-1

0.10-0.92
0.01-0.03
0.07-0.11
0.12-0.16
0.05
0.15-0.32
0.05-0.59
Reference
Collins and Boylen, 1978
Myers and Graham, 1961
Riley and von Aux, 1949
Laws and Wong, 1978
Smith, 1979
Laws and Wong, 1978
Laws and Wong, 1978
Literature value for algal settling velocities [AS] are given in Table C-59, but care must be taken
in their use. Laboratory and in sutu methods for determining settling velocities each have their
drawbacks when attempting to measure net settling velocities. The settling velocity is very dependent upon the type of algae present, so a single default value is not recommended. Previous
studies have used a settling velocity of 0.2 m day-1 for diatoms, 0.1 m day-1 for greens, and 0.0-0.05
m day-1 for cyanobacteria. Also, for cyanobacteria or other floating phytoplankton, one can specify
a negative settling velocity.
Table C-59. Algal settling Velocity Literature Values
Species
Bacteriastrum hyalinum
Chaetoceros didymus
Chaetoceros lauderi
Chaetoceros spp.
Chaetoceros spp.
Coscinodiscus wailesii
Coscinodiscus sp.
Cyclotella meneghiniana
Cyclotella nana
Fragilaria crotonensis
Leptocylindrum danicus
Melosira agassizii
Nitzschia closterium
Nitzschia seriata
Phaeodactylum tricornutu
Rhizosolenia hebetata
Rhizosolenia setigera
Rhizosolenia stolterfothii
Rhizosoleni sp.
Stephanopyxis turris
Thalassionema nitzsiodes
Thalassiosira fluviatilis
Thalassiosira nana
C-165
Settling velocity, m day-1

Diatoms
0.26-0.76
0.39-1.27
0.85
0.46-1.54
0.85
4.00
7.00-30.2
1.95-6.83
0.08-0.24
0.16-0.76
0.60-3.09
0.27
0.08-0.42
0.67-1.87
0.52
0.35-0.50
0.02-0.06
0.22
0.10-6.30
1.00-1.9
0.00-0.72
0.30-1.35
1.10
0.35-0.78
0.60-1.10
0.10-0.28
Reference
Smayda, 1974
Smayda & Boleyn, 1966
Eppley Holmes, & Strickland, 1967b
Margalef, 1961
Allen, 1932
Titman & Kilham, 1976
Burns & Rosa, 1980
Margalef, 1961
Titman & Kilham, 1976
Margalef, 1961
Riley, 1943
Eppley, Holmes, & Strickland, 1967b
Margalef, 1961
Smayda (unpublished)
Species
Thalassiosira rotula
Gonyaulax polyedra
Coccolithus huxleyi
Cricosphaera elongata
Cycloccolithus fragilus
Cryptomonas reosa
CONTROL FILE
Settling velocity, m day-1
0.39-2.10
Dinoflagellates
2.80-6.10
Coccolithophorids
0.28, 1.2
1.7
0.25
10.3-13.2
Microflagellates
0.31
Reference
Bramlette, 1961
Bernard, 1963
Burns & Rosa, 1980
[AHSP] is the algal half-saturation constant for phosphorus and is defined as the phosphorus concentration at which the uptake rate is one-half the maximum rate. This represents the upper concentration at which algal growth is directly proportional to phosphorus concentrations
Table C-60. Phosphorus Half-Saturation Constant Literature Values
Species
Half-Saturation Constant, mg l-1
Reference
Biddulphia sinensis
Cerataulina bergonii
Chaetoceros curvistus
Chaetoceros socialis
Cyclotella nana
Cyclotella nana
Dinobryon cylindrium
Dinobryon sociale
Euglena gracilis
Microcystis aeruginsa
Nitzschia actinastreoides
Pediastrum duplex
Pithophora oedogonia
Scenedesmus sp.
Thalosssiosira fluviatilis
0.002
0.014
0.016
0.003
0.074-0.105
0.001
0.380-0.475
0.055
0.001
0.076
0.047
1.520
0.006
0.095
0.105
0.980
0.002
0.002-0.050
0.163
Holm & Armstrong, 1981

Thomas & Dodson, 1968
Quasim, et al., 1973
Finenko & Krupatkina, 1974
Jeanjean, 1969
Fuhs, et al., 1972
Fogg, 1973
Lehman (unpublished)
Dlum, 1966
Holm & Armstrong, 1981
Von Muller, 1972
Spencer & Lembi, 1981
Fogg, 1973
Rhee, 1973
Fogg, 1973
[AHSN] is the algal half-saturation constant for nitrogen and is defined as the nitrogen concentration (ammonium + nitrate/nitrite) at which the uptake rate is one-half the maximum rate. This represents the upper concentration at which algal growth is proportional to nitrogen. Table C-61 gives
literature values for the nitrogen half-saturation constant. To simulate algal nitrogen fixation, set
AHSN equal to 0.0.
Table C-61. Nitrogen Half-Saturation Constant Literature Values
Species
Biddulphia aurita
Chaetoceros gracilis
Coscinodiscus lineatus
Cyclotella nana
Half saturation constant N source

Diatoms
0.056-0.197
NO3
0.012
NO3
0.012
NH4
0.012
NO3
0.012
NH4
0.025-0.117
0.111
NO3
Reference
Underhill, 1977
Eppley, Rogers, & McCarthy, 1969
Carpenter & Guillard, 1971
MacIsaac & Dugdale, 1969
C-166
CONTROL FILE
Species
Half saturation constant N source

0.027
0.031
0.037
NO3
0.020
NO3
Dunaliella teriolecta
0.013
NO3
0.013
NH4
0.087
NO3
Fragilaria pinnata
0.037-0.100
NO3
Leptocylindrous danicus
0.078
NO3
0.013
NH4
Navicula pelliculosa
0.923
NO3
Phaeodactylum tricornutum
0.161
NO3
Rhizosolenia robusta
0.186
NO3
0.135
NH4
Rhizosolenia stolterfothii
0.105
NO3
0.009
NH4
0.027
NO3
0.014
NH4
Bluegreens
Anabaena cylindrica
4.34
NO3
2.48
NO3
Oscillatoria agardhii
Bellochia sp.
Monochrysis lutheri
Coccolithus huxleyi
Chlorella pyrendoidosa
Pithophora cedogonia
Gonyaulax polyedra
Gymnodinium splendens
Gymnodinium wailesii
Isochrysis galbana
0.074-0.093
NO3
0.062
NH4
0.22
NO3
Microflagellates
0.001-0.16
NO3
0.026
NO3
0.052
NH4
0.037
NO3
0.007
NH4
Coccolithophorids
0.006
NO3
0.002
NH4
Greens
0.006-0.14
1.15
NO3
1.236
NO3
Dinoflagellates
0.589
NO3
0.099
NH4
0.235
NO3
0.099
NH4
0.223
NO3
0.088
NH4
Chrysophytes
0.006
NO3
Reference
Caperon & Meyer, 1972
Wallen & Cartier, 1975
Ketchum, 1939
Hattori, 1962
Hattori, 1962
Eppley & Thomas, 1969
Eppley & Thomas, 1969
van Lierre, 1977
Pickett, 1975
Knudsen, 1965
Spencer & Lembi, 1981
[ASAT] is the saturating light intensity at the maximum photosynthetic rate. Since phytoplankton
adapt to low light regimes, saturation coefficients may be lower than those measured in the laboratory. Table C-62 gives literature values for [ASAT]. EPA (1985) gives as a guideline that
[ASAT] for total phytoplankton range between 200-350 Langleys/day (about 100-170 W/m2).
Table C-62. Literature values for saturating light intensity
Species
Cryptomonas ovata
C-167
Saturation, W m-2
12-36
Reference
Cloern, 1977
Oscillatoria agardhii
Oscillatoria rubescens
Scenedesmus protuberans
Mixed diatoms
Mixed phytoplankton
Shade-adapted phytoplankton
CONTROL FILE
10
36-61
24
86
36
18-29
van Lierre, et al., 1978

Konopka, 1983
van Lierre, et al., 1978
Belay, 1981
Belay, 1981
Belay, 1981
Example
ALGAL RATE
Alg 1
Alg 2
Alg 3
AG
1.5
2.5
0.5
AR
0.04
0.04
0.04
AE
0.04
0.04
0.04
AM
0.15
0.10
0.05
AS
0.20
0.10
0.02
AHSP
0.003
0.003
0.003
AHSN
0.014
0.014
0.010
AHSSI
0.003
0.000
0.000
ASAT
75.0
75.0
75.0

Algal Extinction
Algal Temperature Rate Coefficients
Algal Stoichiometry
C-168
CONTROL FILE
Algal Temperature Rate Coefficients (ALG TEMP)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
AT1
AT2
Real
Real
5.0
25.0
AT3
Real
35.0
5
6
7
8
9
AT4
AK1
AK2
AK3
AK4
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
40.0
0.1
0.99
0.99
0.1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for algal growth, C
Lower temperature for maximum algal growth,
C
Upper temperature for maximum algal growth,
C
Upper temperature for algal growth, C
Fraction of algal growth rate at AT1
Fraction of maximum algal growth rate at AT2
Fraction of maximum algal growth rate at AT3
Fraction of algal growth rate at AT4
This card specifies the lower, maximum lower, upper, and maximum upper temperatures used in
defining the curve that determines effects of temperature on algal rates. Also specified is the fraction of maximum algal rates that occurs at the specified temperature. The default values are ones
for a single algal assemblage used in Version 2. When including multiple algal groups, the temperature rate coefficients are one of the most important parameters determining algal succession.
Diatoms would have much lower temperatures for AT1-AT4 and cyanobacteria would have higher
values.
How temperature affects algae growth is shown below for the default values of AT1 through AT4
and AK1 through AK4.
Growth rate correction35, 0.99

Fraction of maximum growth rate
25, 0.99
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
5, 0.1
0.2
40, 0.1
0.1
0
0
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
Figure 39. Growth rate as a function of temperature.
C-169
CONTROL FILE
Example
ALGAL TEMP
Alg 1
Alg 2
Alg 3
AT1
5.0
10.0
10.0
AT2
18.0
30.0
35.0
AT3
20.0
35.0
40.0
AT4
24.0
40.0
50.0
AK1
0.1
0.1
0.1
AK2
0.99
0.99
0.99
AK3
0.99
0.99
0.99
AK4
0.01
0.01
0.01

Algal Rates
Algal Extinction
Algal Stoichiometry
C-170
CONTROL FILE
Algal Stoichiometry (ALG STOICH)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
AP
Real
0.005
AN
Real
0.08
AC
Real
0.45
ASI
Real
0.18
ACHLA
Real
0.05
APOM
Real
0.8
ANEQN
Integer
ANPR
Real
0.001
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Stoichiometric equivalent between algal biomass
and phosphorus
and nitrogen
and carbon
and silica
Ratio between algal biomass and chlorophyll a
in terms of mg algae/g chl a
Fraction of algal biomass that is converted to
particulate organic matter when algae die
Equation number for algal ammonium preference (either 1 or 2)
Algal half saturation constant for ammonium
preference
This card specifies the stoichiometric equivalances used for determining the amount of nutrients in
algal biomass. Numerous researchers have noted that these ratios are not constant over time and
vary by algal species. In addition, the algal to chlorophyll a ratio [ACHLA] is known to be different
for different algal species and is known to vary over time for a given algal species.
Table C-63 shows a summary of algal stoichiometry based on C, N, P, and Si percentages of dryweight biomass from Reynolds (1984) for freshwater algae. EPA (1985) shows dry weight biomass
percentages of C, N, and P ranging from 19-74 (typical 40-50), 0.6-16 (typical 8), and 0.08 to 3
(typically close to 1), respectively, depending on algae type.
EPA(1985) reports percentages of chlorophyll a compared to dry weight algae biomass ranging
from 0.25 to 3 for blue-green algae and from 2 to 10 for total phytoplankton. These correspond to
a range in algae to chlorophyll a ratios (mg dry weight organic matter/g chlorophyll a) [ACHLA]
of from between 0.01 to 0.4. EPA(1985) also reports carbon:chlorophyll a ratios of from 10 to 100.
Using a ratio of C:organic matter (OM) of about 1:2, this is approximately a range of 20-200 mg
OM/mg chlorophyll a, or 0.02 to 0.2 mg OM/ g chlorophyll a. Currently, the model does not
include variable stoichiometry or biomass to chlorophyll a.
[APOM] is the fraction of algal biomass lost by mortality going into the detritus compartment with
the remainder going to labile DOM. Otsuki and Hayna (1972) have reported a value of 0.8 for
Scenedesmus sp. and this is the default value.
Certain algal groups are known to preferentially uptake ammonium over nitrate. If the equation
number [ANEQN] for algal nitrogen uptake is set to 1, then the algal nitrogen preference factor for
ammonium is computed using:
PNH 4
C-171
CNH 4
CNO 3 CNH 4
CONTROL FILE
and the preference for nitrate is:

PNO 3
CNO 3
.
C
NO 3 CNH 4
If the equation number [ANEQN] is set to 2, then the phytoplankton nitrogen preference for ammonium is computed using the following equation (Thomann and Fitzpatrick, 1982):
PNH 4 CNH 4
PNH4 =
KmN =
CNH4=
CNOx =
KmN
CNOx
K mN
CNH 4
CNH 4 K mN CNOx
CNH 4 CNOx KmN CNOx
ammonium preference factor

N half-saturation coefficient, mg l-1
ammonium nitrogen concentration. mg l-1
nitrate-nitrite nitrogen concentration. mg l-1
The nitrite-nitrate nitrogen preference factor is then calculated from:

PNOx 1 PNH 4
Table C-63. Freshwater algae minimum and optimum elemental contents in percentages of dry-weight (Reynolds, 1984).
Content
Minimum
Anabaena flos-aquae
Various cyanobacteria
Stephanodiscus hantzschii
Asterionella Formosa (percentages are
ash-free dry weight)
Scenedesmus sp.
C
49.7(1)
46.5(1)
3.8(3)
4.5(4)
Si
0.40(2)
0.34(3)
32(4)
20(4)
3.4(5)
0.03(6)
54.6(1)
0.59(7)
0.10(8)
Optimum
Cyanobacteria
46-49(1)
8-11(9)
0.7-1.1(1,9)
Chrysophytes
3.3-5(9)
2.1(9)
Chlorophytes
49-56(1)
6.6-1.9(9)
1.2-2.9(1,9)
In General(10)
51-56
8.0-10.4
0.8-1.45
References: (1) Anon (1968); (2) Healey (1973); (3) Gerloff & Skoog (1954); (4) Lund (1965);
(5) Lund (1950); (6) Mackereth (1953); (7) Nalewajko & Lean (1978); (8) Rhee (1973); (9)
Strickland (1965); (10) Reynolds (1984).
C-172
CONTROL FILE
Example
ALG
Alg
Alg
Alg
STOICH ALGP
1
0.005
2
0.005
3
0.005
ALGN
0.08
0.08
0.08
ALGC
0.45
0.45
0.45
ALGSI
0.18
0.00
0.00
ACHLA
0.05
0.04
0.1000
APOM
0.8
0.8
0.8
ANEQN
2
2
2
ANPR
0.001
0.001
0.001

Algal Rates
Algal Extinction
Algal Temperature Rate Coefficients
C-173
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Control (EPIPHYTE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EPIWBC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Waterbody epiphyte/periphyton computations,
ON or OFF
This card allows the user to turn ON/OFF epiphyton/periphyton computations and their effects on
water quality for a given waterbody. This flexibility allows the user to decrease model complexity
and computation time for waterbodies where epiphyton/periphyton impacts are not considered important.
Example
EPIPHYTE
Epi 1
EPIWBC
ON
EPIWBC
ON
EPIWBC
ON
EPIWBC
ON
EPIWBC
EPIWBC
EPIWBC
EPIWBC

Epiphyte Print
Epiphyte Initial Density
Epiphyte Rate
Epiphyte Half-Saturation
Epiphyte Temperature Rate Coefficients
Epiphyte Stoichiometry
C-174
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Print (EPI PRINT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EPRWBC
Character
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
epiphyte areal density output, ON or OFF
This card allows the user to turn ON/OFF epiphyton/periphyton biomass output in terms of areal
density to the various output files for each waterbody.
Example
EPI PRINT EPRWBC
Epi 1
ON
EPRWBC
ON
EPRWBC
ON
EPRWBC
ON
EPRWBC
EPRWBC
EPRWBC
EPRWBC

Epiphyte Control
Epiphyte Rate
C-175
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Initial Density (EPI INI)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
EPIWBCI
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Initial areal density for each epiphyton//periphyton group, g m-2
This card specifies the initial epiphyton/periphyton areal density for each waterbody.
Example
EPI INIT EPIWBCI EPIWBCI EPIWBCI EPIWBCI EPIWBCI EPIWBCI EPIWBCI EPIWBCI
Epi 1
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0

Epiphyte Control
Epiphyte Print
Epiphyte Rate
C-176
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Rate (EPI RATE)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EG
Real
2.0
ER
Real
0.04
EE
Real
0.04
EM
Real
0.1
6
7
EB
EHSP
Real
Real
0.001
0.003
EHSN
Real
0.014
EHSSI
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
maximum epiphyton/periphyton growth rate,
day-1
maximum epiphyton/periphyton respiration rate,
day-1
maximum epiphyton/periphyton excretion rate,
day-1
maximum epiphyton/periphyton mortality rate,
day-1
epiphyton/periphyton burial rate, m day-1
epiphyton half-saturation for phosphorus limited
growth, g m-3
epiphyton half-saturation for nitrogen limited
growth, g m-3
epiphyton half-saturation for silica limited
growth, g m-3
This card specifies rates for epiphyton/periphyton growth, mortality, excretion, respiration, and
burial. Additionally, values that affect the maximum epiphyton/periphyton growth rate including
nutrient limited growth are also specified here. See the Algal Rate card for more detailed information, as the kinetic formulations are similar. Epiphyton/periphyton mortality becomes part of
the LDOM and LPOM organic pool based on the variable EPOM (see EPI STOICH). The burial
rate causes epiphyton/periphyton to be lost from the system and added to the first order sediment
compartment.
Example
EPI RATE
Epi 1
EG
2.0
ER
0.04
EE
0.04
EM
0.1
EB
0.001
EHSP
0.002
EHSN
0.002
EHSSI
0.0

Epiphyte Control
Epiphyte Print
C-177
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Half-Saturation (EPI HALF)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ESAT
Real
75.0
3
4
EHS
ENEQN
Real
Integer
35.0
2
ENPR
Real
0.001
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
light saturation intensity at maximum photosynthetic rate, W m-2
biomass limitation factor, g m-2
ammonia preference factor equation for epiphyton/periphyton (1 or 2)
nitrogen half-saturation preference constant,
mg/l - only used if ENEQN=2
This card specifies the light saturation intensity at maximum photosynthetic rate [ESAT], the halfsaturation coefficient for epiphyton biomass limitation [EHS], and the nitrogen preference during
epiphyton/periphyton growth [ENPR]. The ratio of nitrate-nitrite to ammonium taken up during
epiphyton/periphyton growth increases as [ENPR] increases.
Field data during 2001 in the Spokane River have shown that biomass (dry weight) for epiphyton/periphyton can vary significantly from 13 to over 500 g/m2, with median values of about 40
g/m2 (Annear, et al., 2005). Field data of periphyton biomass needs though to be examined to ensure
that it is representative of active epiphyton, which CE-QUAL-W2 computes. For example in this
model study, a value of EHS of 35 g/m2 was used.
Certain epiphyton groups are known to preferentially uptake ammonium over nitrate. If the equation number [ANEQN] for algal nitrogen uptake is set to 1, then the epiphyton/periphyton nitrogen
preference factor for ammonium is computed using:
PNH 4
CNH 4
C
NO 3 CNH 4
PNO 3
CNO 3
.
C
NO 3 CNH 4
and the preference for nitrate is:
If the equation number [ANEQN] is set to 2, then the epiphyton/periphyton preference for ammonium is computed using the following equation (Thomann and Fitzpatrick, 1982):
PNH 4 CNH 4
PNH4 =
KmN =
CNH4=
CNOx =
KmN
CNOx
K mN
CNH 4
CNH 4 K mN CNOx
CNH 4 CNOx KmN CNOx
ammonium preference factor

N half-saturation coefficient, mg l-1
ammonium nitrogen concentration. mg l-1
nitrate-nitrite nitrogen concentration. mg l-1
The nitrite-nitrate preference factor is then calculated from:
C-178
CONTROL FILE
PNOx 1 PNH 4
Example
EPI HALF
Epi 1
ESAT
150.00
EHS
35.0
ENEQN
2
ENPR
0.001

Epiphyte Control
Epiphyte Print
Epiphyte Rate
C-179
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Temperature Rate Coefficients (EPI

TEMP)
FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ET1
ET2
Real
Real
5.0
25.0
ET3
Real
35.0
ET4
Real
40.0
EK1
Real
0.1
EK2
Real
0.99
EK3
Real
0.99
EK4
Real
0.1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for epiphyton growth, C
Lower temperature for maximum epiphyton/periphyton growth, C
Upper temperature for maximum epiphyton/periphyton growth, C
Upper temperature for epiphyton/periphyton
growth, C
Fraction of epiphyton/periphyton growth rate at
ET1
Fraction of maximum epiphyton/periphyton
growth rate at ET2
Fraction of maximum epiphyton/periphyton
growth rate at ET3
Fraction of epiphyton/periphyton growth rate at
ET4
defining the curve that determines effects of temperature on epiphyton/periphyton rates. Also specified is the fraction of maximum epiphyton/periphyton rates that occurs at the specified temperature. Since the epiphyton compartment was first introduced in V3.1, the default values have no
basis other than these are the same default values used for algae in V2, so there is little experience
in the use of these values.
How temperature affects epiphyton/periphyton growth is shown below for the default values of
ET1 through ET4 and EK1 through EK4.
C-180
CONTROL FILE

25, 0.99
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
5, 0.1
0.2
40, 0.1
0.1
0
0
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
Example
EPI
Epi
Epi
Epi
TEMP
1
2
3
ET1
5.0
10.0
10.0
ET2
18.0
30.0
35.0
ET3
20.0
35.0
40.0
ET4
24.0
40.0
50.0
EK1
0.1
0.1
0.1
EK2
0.99
0.99
0.99
EK3
0.99
0.99
0.99
EK4
0.01
0.01
0.01

Epiphyte Control
Epiphyte Print
Epiphyte Rate
C-181
CONTROL FILE
Epiphyte/Periphyton Stoichiometry (EPI STOICH)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
EP
Real
0.005
EN
Real
0.08
EC
Real
0.45
ESI
Real
0.18
ECHLA
Real
0.05
EPOM
Real
0.8
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Stoichiometric equivalent between epiphyton/periphyton biomass and phosphorus
Stoichiometric equivalent between epiphyton/periphyton biomass and nitrogen
Stoichiometric equivalent between epiphyton/periphyton biomass and carbon
Stoichiometric equivalent between epiphyton/periphyton biomass and silica
Ratio between epiphyton/periphyton biomass
and chlorophyll a [Not used at present], mg biomass/g chlorophyll a
Fraction of epiphyton/periphyton biomass that is
converted to particulate organic matter when epiphyton/periphyton die
epiphyton/periphyton biomass. These ratios are not constant over time and vary by epiphyton/periphyton species. The ratio of epiphyton biomass to chlorophyll a is currently not used in the model.
This ratio will be used in the future to provide output in chlorophyll a rather than dry weight biomass. In addition, the epiphyton/periphyton to chlorophyll a ratio [ECHLA] is known to be different for different epiphyton/periphyton species and is known to vary over time for a given epiphyton/periphyton species. Currently, the model does not include variable stoichiometry or biomass
to chlorophyll a ratios. This is an area that will be improved upon in the future. [EPOM] is the
fraction of epiphyton/periphyton biomass lost by mortality going into the detritus compartment
(labile POM) with the remainder going to labile DOM.
Example
EPI
Epi
Epi
Epi
STOICH
EP
1
0.005
2
0.005
3
0.005
EN
0.08
0.08
0.08
EC
0.45
0.45
0.45
ESI
0.18
0.00
0.00
ECHLA
0.05
0.05
0.05
EPOM
0.8
0.8
0.8

Epiphyte Control
Epiphyte Print
Epiphyte Rate
C-182
CONTROL FILE
Zooplankton Rate (ZOOP RATE)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ZG
Real
1.50
3
4
ZR
ZM
Real
Real
0.10
0.01
ZEFF
Real
0.50
PREFP
Real
0.50
ZOOMIN
Real
0.01
ZS2P
Real
0.3
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
maximum zooplankton growth or ingestion rate,
day-1
maximum zooplankton respiration rate, day-1
maximum zooplankton mortality (non-predatory)
rate, day-1
Zooplankton assimilation efficiency or the proportion of food assimilated to food consumed (dimensionless), from 0 to 1.
Preference factor of zooplankton for detritus or
LPOM (dimensionless), from 0 to 1.
Threshold food concentration at which zooplankton feeding begins, g m-3
Zooplankton half-saturation constant for food (inclues LPOM, algae, and zooplankton) ingestion, g
m-3
This card specifies rates for zooplankton growth, mortality and respiration. Additionally, the zooplankton assimilation efficiency and the preference factor of zooplankton for detritus are specified
along with the threshold food concentration at which zooplankton feeding begins and the zooplankton half-saturation constant for food ingestion.
Example
ZOOP RATE
Zoo1
ZG
1.50
ZR
0.10
ZM
0.010
ZEFFIC
0.50
PREFP
0.50
ZOOMIN
0.0100
ZS2P
0.30
C-183
CONTROL FILE
Zooplankton Algal Preference (ZOOP ALGP)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PREFA
Real
0.5
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Preference factor of zooplankton for algae (dimensionless) from 0 to 1.
This card specifies the feeding preference of zooplankton for each algal species. For example, many
zooplankton will avoid certain algae species as a food source, in that case the PREFA would be
zero.
Note that the sum of the preference factors can be greater than 1 since the model normalizes them
internally in the code.
Example
ZOOP ALGP
Zoo1
PREFA
1.00
PREFA
0.50
PREFA
0.50
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
C-184
CONTROL FILE
Zooplankton Zooplankton Preference (ZOOP ZOOP)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PREFZ
Real
0.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Preference factor of zooplankton for zooplankton
(dimensionless) from 0 to 1.
This card specifies the feeding preference of zooplankton for each zooplankton species. The card
below shows that for the one zooplankton group, it does not feed on itself. Note that the sum of the
preference factors can be greater than 1 since the model normalizes them internally in the code.
Example
ZOOP ZOOP
Zoo1
PREFZ
0.00
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
C-185
CONTROL FILE
Zooplankton Temperature Rate Coefficients (ZOOP

TEMP)
FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ZT1
ZT2
Real
Real
5.0
25.0
ZT3
Real
35.0
5
6
7
ZT4
ZK1
ZK2
Real
Real
Real
40.0
0.1
0.99
ZK3
Real
0.99
ZK4
Real
0.1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for zooplankton growth, C
Lower temperature for maximum zooplankton
growth, C
Upper temperature for maximum zooplankton
growth, C
Upper temperature for zooplankton growth, C
Fraction of zooplankton growth rate at ZT1
Fraction of maximum zooplankton growth rate at
ZT2
Fraction of maximum zooplankton growth rate at
ZT3
Fraction of zooplankton growth rate at ZT4
defining the curve that determines effects of temperature on zooplankton rates. Also specified is
the fraction of maximum zooplankton rates that occurs at the specified temperature.
How temperature affects zooplankton growth is shown below for the default values of ZT1 through
ZT4 and ZK1 through ZK4.
Growth rate correction

35, 0.99
25, 0.99
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
5, 0.1
40, 0.1
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
C-186
CONTROL FILE
Example
ZOOP TEMP
Zoo1
ZT1
0.0
ZT2
15.0
ZT3
20.0
ZT4
36.0
ZK1
0.1
ZK2
0.9
ZK3
0.98
ZK4
0.100
C-187
CONTROL FILE
Zooplankton Stoichiometry (ZOOP STOICH)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ZP
Real
0.005
ZN
Real
0.08
ZC
Real
0.45
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Stoichiometric equivalent between zooplankton
biomass and phosphorus
biomass and nitrogen
biomass and carbon
zooplankton biomass. These ratios are not constant over time and vary by zooplankton species.
Example
ZOOP STOI
ZP
ZN
ZC
0.01500 0.08000 0.45000
C-188
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Control (MACROPHYT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
MACWBC Character
DEFAULT
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Waterbody macrophyte computations, ON or
OFF
This card allows the user to turn ON/OFF macrophyte computations and their effects on water
quality for a given waterbody. This flexibility allows the user to decrease model complexity and
computation time for waterbodies where macrophyte impacts are not considered important.
Example
MACROPHYT MACWBC
Mac1
ON
MACWBC
OFF
MACWBC
OFF
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
C-189
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Print (MAC PRINT)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
MPRWBC Character
DEFAULT
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
macrophyte concentration output, ON or OFF
This card allows the user to turn ON/OFF macrophyte biomass output to the various output files
for each waterbody.
Example
MAC PRINT MPRWBC
Mac1
ON
MPRWBC
OFF
MPRWBC
OFF
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
C-190
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Initial Concentration (MAC INI)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
MACWBCI Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Initial macrophyte concentration for each macrophyte group,
gm-3
This card specifies the initial macrophyte concentration for each waterbody. Without an intitial
concentration or seed, the macrophyte groups will not grow. The model currently does not have
self-seeding of macrophytes.
Example
MAC INI
Mac1
MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI

0.10000
0.1
0.5
C-191
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Rate (MAC RATE)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
MG
MR
MM
MSAT
Real
Real
Real
Real
0.3
0.05
0.05
30.0
MHSP
Real
0.0
MHSN
Real
0.0
MHSC
Real
0.0
MPOM
Real
0.9
10
LRPMAC
Real
0.2
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
maximum macrophyte growth rate, day-1
maximum macrophyte respiration rate, day-1
maximum macrophyte mortality rate, day-1
light saturation intensity at maximum photosynthetic rate, W m-2
macrophyte half-saturation for phosphorus limited growth, g m-3
macrophyte half-saturation for nitrogen limited
growth, g m-3
macrophyte half-saturation for carbon limited
growth, g m-3
Fraction of macrophyte biomass that is converted to particulate organic matter when macrophytes die
Fraction of POM which originates as dead macrophytes becoming labile POM
This card specifies rates for macrophyte growth, mortality and respiration. Additionally, values
that affect the maximum macrophyte growth rate including nutrient limited growth, light saturation,
fraction of dead biomass converted to POM, and the fraction of POM originating from dead biomass becoming refractory POM are also specified here.
Light limitation was modeled with a hyperbolic equation which as the same form as the Michaelis-Menten function:
f(I )
I
I Ih
where
I h : half-saturation coefficient for solar radiation (W/m2)
The following table shows macrophyte coefficient values used in an application of CE-QUAL-R1
to Eau Galle Reservoir, Wisconsin (Collins and Wlosinski, 1989).
Table 64. Coefficients used in CE-QUAL-R1 to simulate macrophytes (from Collins and
Wlosinski, 1989).
Description
Carbon fraction of dry weight [MC] see Macrophyte
Stoichiometry
Maximum gross production rate [MG]
Maximum dark respiration rate [MR]
Value
0.46
Reference
Soeder et al. (1969)
0.42 day-1
0.05 day-1
Van et al. (1976)

McGahee and Davis
(1971)
C-192
CONTROL FILE
Description
Fraction of dead tissue to dissolved organic matter
Value
0.2
Fraction of dead tissue to detritus [MPOM]
0.4
Fraction of dead tissue to sediments

Critical low temperature for metabolic processes [MT1] See Macrophyte Temperature Rate Coefficients
Low optimum temperature for metabolic processes [MT2]
- See Macrophyte Temperature Rate Coefficients
High optimum temperature for metabolic processes [MT3]
- See Macrophyte Temperature Rate Coefficients
Critical high temperature [MT4] - See Macrophyte Temperature Rate Coefficients
Volumetric density factor
0.4
7 C
Reference
Wetzel and Manny
(1972)
Godshalk and Wetzel
(1978)
Carpenter (1976)
Van et al. (1976)
21 C
Barko et al. (1980)
24 C
Barko et al. (1980)
34 C
Barko et al. (1980)
40 g m-3
Filbin and Barko

(1985)
Example
MAC RATE
Mac 1
MG
0.30
MR
0.05
MM
0.05
MSAT
30.0
MHSP
0.0
MHSN
0.0
MHSC
0.0
MPOM
0.9
LRPMAC
0.2
C-193
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Sediments (MAC SED)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PSED
Real
1.0
NSED
Real
1.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Fraction of phosphorus uptake by macrophytes
obtained from sediments
Fraction of nitrogen uptake by macrophytes obtained from sediments
This card specifies the fraction of phosphorus and nitrogen uptake obtained from the sediments.
The remaining fraction of uptake will be obtained from the water column. Depending on the macrophyte species, nitrogen and phosphorus may be obtained from the sediments or the water column.
If they are obtained from the sediments, the sediments are assumed to be an infinite pool that cannot
limit growth.
Example
MAC SED
MAC 1
PSED
0.5
NSED
0.5
C-194
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Distribution (MAC DIST)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
MBMP
Real
40.0
MMAX
Real
500.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Threshold macrophyte concentration for which
growth is moved to the above layer, g m-3
Maximum macrophyte concentration, g m-3
This card specifies the concentration at which macrophyte growth will be moved to the above layer
and the maximum macrophyte concentration. Plants grow upwards from the sediment through
model layers. Growth upward is accomplished by moving the growth of a layer to the layer above
if the concentration in the layer is greater than a threshold concentration and the concentration in
the upper layer is less than the same threshold concentration.
Example
MAC DIST
Mac 1
MBMP
40.0
MMAX
500.0
C-195
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Drag (MAC DRAG)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CDDRAG
DWV
DWSA
Real
Real
Real
2.0
7.0e+04
8.0
ANORM
Real
0.3
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Macrophyte drag coefficient
Macrophyte dry weight to wet volume ratio, g m-3
Macrophyte dry weight to surface area ratio, g
m-2
Fraction of macrophyte surface area normal to
direction of flow
This card specifies the coefficients which simulate the frictional effects and porosity of macrophytes. The macrophyte drag coefficient, dry weight to wet volume ratio, dry weight to surface
area ratio, and the fraction of macrophyte surface area facing the direction of flow are specified.
Measured values for the ratio of dry weight to wet volume are shown in Table 65, and literature
values for the ration of dry weight to surface area are listed in Table 66.
Table 65. Values for the ratio between dry weight to wet volume ratio.
Species
Dry wt. to wet

volume g m-3
7.3e+04
5.4e+04
Elodea Canadensis
Ceratophyllum demersum
Reference
Berger (2000)
Berger (2000)
Table 66. Literature values for the ration of dry weight to surface area.
Species
Elodea canadensis
Myriophyllum spicatum
Nitellopsis obtuse
Potamogeton lucens
Potamogeton pectinatus
Potamogeton perfoliatus
MAC DRAG
Mac 1
CDDRAG
DWV
3.0 7.0E+04
Ratio of dry weight

to wet surface area
(g m-2)
7.97
8.30
17.86
15.75
20.00
13.12
DWSA
8.0
Reference
Sher-Kaul et al. (1995)

ANORM
0.3
C-196
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Temperature Rate Coefficients (MAC TEMP)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
MT1
MT2
Real
Real
5.0
25.0
MT3
Real
35.0
5
6
7
MT4
MK1
MK2
Real
Real
Real
40.0
0.1
0.99
MK3
Real
0.99
MK4
Real
0.1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for macrophyte growth, C
Lower temperature for maximum macrophyte
growth, C
Upper temperature for maximum macrophyte
growth, C
Upper temperature for macrophyte growth, C
Fraction of macrophyte growth rate at MT1
Fraction of maximum macrophyte growth rate at
MT2
Fraction of maximum macrophyte growth rate at
MT3
Fraction of macrophyte growth rate at MT4
defining the curve that determines effects of temperature on macrophyte rates. Also specified is
the fraction of maximum macrophyte rates that occurs at the specified temperature.
How temperature affects macrophyte growth is shown below for the default values of MT1 through
MT4 and MK1 through MK4.

25, 0.99
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
5, 0.1
0.2
40, 0.1
0.1
0
0
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
C-197
CONTROL FILE
Example
MAC TEMP
Mac 1
MT1
7.0
MT2
15.0
MT3
24.0
MT4
34.0
MK1
0.1
MK2
0.99
MK3
0.99
MK4
0.01
C-198
CONTROL FILE
Macrophyte Stoichiometry (MAC STOICH)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
MP
Real
0.005
MN
Real
0.08
MC
Real
0.45
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Stoichiometric equivalent between macrophyte
biomass and phosphorus
biomass and nitrogen
biomass and carbon
macrophyte biomass.
Example
MAC STOICH
MP
Mac 1
0.005
MN
0.08
MC
0.45
C-199
CONTROL FILE
Dissolved Organic Matter (DOM)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
LDOMDK Real
RDOMDK Real
LRDDK
Real
DEFAULT
0.1
0.001
0.01
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Labile DOM decay rate, day-1
Refractory DOM decay rate, day-1
Labile to refractory DOM decay rate, day-1
This card specifies decay rates associated with dissolved organic matter. Dissolved organic matter
in the model is divided into labile and refractory partitions. The labile partition has a higher decay
rate and generally consists of autochthonous inputs such as early products of algal decay. The
refractory decay rate, [RDOMDK], is generally two orders of magnitude smaller than the labile
decay rate [LDOMDK]. If BOD decay rates are available, then they should be used as a starting
point for [LDOMDK].
Table C-67. Labile DOM Decay Rate Literature Values.
Decay Rate, day-1
0.20
0.64
0.24
0.32-0.50
0.11
0.11-0.63
0.31-0.45
0.01-0.43
Compound
Acetate
Amino acids
Glucose
Glucose
Glucose
Glutamate
Glycine
Glycolate
Reference
Wright, 1975
Williams et al., 1976
Williams et al., 1976
Toerien and Cavari, 1982
Wright, 1975
Carney and Colwell, 1976
Vaccaro, 1969
Wright, 1975
Example
DOM
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
LDOMDK
0.12
0.12
0.12
RDOMDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
LRDDK
0.001
0.001
0.001

Particulate Organic Matter
Organic Matter Stoichiometry
Organic Matter Temperature Rate Multipliers
C-200
CONTROL FILE
Particulate Organic Matter (POM)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
LPOMDK
RPOMDK
LRPDK
POMS
Real
Real
Real
Real
0.08
0.001
0.01
0.1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Labile POM decay rate, day-1
Refractory POM decay rate, day-1
Labile to refractory POM decay rate, day-1
POM settling rate, m day-1
Detritus in the model consists of autochthonous and allocthonous particulate organic matter (POM).
The model uses a single decay rate [LPOMDK], but in reality, detritus is a heterogeneous mixture
in varyious stages of decay. Allochthonous inputs are usually dominated by the refractory component while autochthonous inputs are initially labile becoming refractory over time. Literature values are given in the following tables.
Table C-68. Detritus Decay Rate Literature Values
Detritus Source
Cladophera glomerata
Gloeotrichia echinulata
Isoetes lancustris
Potamogeton crispus
Potamogeton perfoliatus
Beech litter
Green algae
Mixed algae
Mixed algae
Leaf packs
Detritus Decay Rate, day-1

0.007
0.001-0.007
0.003-0.015
0.002-0.004
0.002-0.007
0.001-0.004
0.016-0.076
0.007-0.111
0.007-0.060
0.005-0.017
Reference
Piecznska, 1972
Piecznska, 1972
Hanlon, 1982
Rogers & Breen, 1982
Hanlon, 1982
Hanlon, 1982
Otsuki & Hayna, 1972
Jewell & McCarty, 1971
Fitzgerald, 1964
Sedell, Triska, and Triska, 1975
Detrital settling velocities [POMS] vary over a large range (0.001 to > 20 m day-1) depending upon
the detritus. Again, the model allows for only a single value. Literature values are given in Table
C-69.
Table C-69. Detritus Settling Velocity Literature Values
Detritus Source
Ceratium balticum
Chaetoceros borealis
Chaetoceros didymus
Phaeodactylum tricornutum
Rhizosolenia herbetata
Stephanopyxis tunis
Tabellaria flocculosa
Thalassiosira psuedonana
Settling Velocity, m day-1

9.0
9.0
0.85
1.70
2.0
0.02-0.04
0.22
2.1
0.46-1.5
0.85
Reference
Apstein, 1910
Apstein, 1910
Eppley, Holmes, & Strickland, 1967
Eppley, Holmes, & Strickland, 1967
Apstein, 1910
Riley, 1943
Smayda, 1971
Hecky & Kilham, 1974
Example
POM
WB 1
WB 2
WB 3
C-201
LPOMDK
0.08
0.08
0.08
RPOMDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
LRPDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
POMS
0.5
0.5
0.5
CONTROL FILE

Dissolved Organic Matter
C-202
CONTROL FILE
Organic Matter Stoichiometry (OM STOICH)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
ORGP
Real
0.005
ORGN
Real
0.08
ORGC
Real
0.45
ORGSI
Real
0.18
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Stoichiometric equivalent between organic matter and phosphorus
Stoichiometric equivalent between organic matter and nitrogen
Stoichiometric equivalent between organic matter and carbon
Stoichiometric equivalent between organic matter and silica
This card specifies the stoichiometric relationship between organic matter and inorganic nutrients.
The user has the ability to change the relationship between waterbodies, although this option is not
recommended. The values should not be changed from the defaults unless the user has the data to
support the changes. If the variables: LDOM-P, RDOM-P, LPOM-P, and RPOM-P, are not active,
the model does not track the dynamic stoichiometry of the organic P pool and uses the ORGP for
the stoichiometric ratio between P and organic matter. If these variables are active, ORGP represents the initial P stoichiometry of organic matter set by the initial concentration of LDOM, RDOM,
LPOM, and RPOM. Similarly, if the variables: LDOM-N, RDOM-N, LPOM-N, and RPOM-N, are
not active, the model does not track the dynamic stoichiometry of the organic N pool and uses the
ORGN for the stoichiometric ratio between N and organic matter. If these variables are active,
ORGN represents the initial N stoichiometry of organic matter set by the initial concentration of
LDOM, RDOM, LPOM, and RPOM.
Example
OM
Wb
Wb
Wb
STOICH
1
2
3
ORGP
0.005
0.005
0.005
ORGN
0.08
0.08
0.08
ORGC
0.45
0.45
0.45
ORGSI
0.18
0.18
0.18

C-203
CONTROL FILE
Organic Matter Temperature Rate Multipliers (OM RATE)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
OMT1
OMT2
OMK1
OMK2
Real
Real
Real
Real
4.0
25.0
0.1
0.99
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for organic matter decay, C
Upper temperature for organic matter decay, C
Fraction of organic matter decay rate at OMT1
Fraction of organic matter decay rate at OMT2
This card specifies the lower and maximum temperatures used in defining the curve that determines
effects of temperature on organic matter decay. Recommended values are given in the example.
The decay rate correction as a function of temperature is shown below for OMT1=5, OMK1=0.1,
OMT2=25 and OMK2=0.99.
Decay rate correction

Fraction of maximum decay rate
25, 0.99
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
5, 0.1
0.2
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Temperature, oC
Figure 43. Organic matter decay as a fucntion of temperature.

Example
OM
Wb
Wb
Wb
RATE
1
2
3
OMT1
4.0
4.0
4.0
OMT2
25.0
25.0
25.0
OMK1
0.1
0.1
0.1
OMK2
0.99
0.99
0.99

C-204
CONTROL FILE
Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand (CBOD)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
KBOD
TBOD
RBOD
CBODS
Real
Real
Real
Real
0.1
1.02
1.85
0.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
5-day decay rate @ 20C, day-1
Temperature coefficient
Ratio of CBOD5 to ultimate CBOD
CBOD settling rate, m day-1
The model allows the user to include any number of CBOD groups (see Constituent Dimensions
card). This allows the user to specify multiple point source loadings of CBOD with different rates
associated with them and track them in the model over space and time.
[KBOD] is the first-order reaction rate for CBOD decay. [TBOD] is used to adjust the decay rate
for temperature effects according to the following equation:
KBOD KBOD20 * TBOD T 20

where:
T = temperature, C
KBOD20 = decay rate at 20 C
[RBOD] is used to convert 5-day CBOD values to ultimate CBOD. This formulation is included
for applications that involve determining the effects of waste effluents on dissolved oxygen in
which loadings are typically expressed in terms of CBOD. Note that if data are already in BODultimate form, [RBOD]=1.0.
Settling rates for CBOD groups can be applied with [CBODS]. This allows for specification of
particulate CBOD groups.
Example
CBOD
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
KBOD
0.25
0.25
0.25
TBOD
1.0147
1.0147
1.0147
RBOD
1.85
1.85
1.85
CBODS
0.0
0.0
0.0

CBOD Stoichiometry
C-205
CONTROL FILE
CBOD Stoichiometry (CBOD STOICH)

FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CBODP
CBODN
CBODC
Real
Real
Real
0.004
0.06
0.32
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
P stoichiometry for CBOD decay
N stoichiometry for CBOD decay
C stoichiometry for CBOD decay
The stoichiometric coefficients define the stochiometry of BOD in terms of N, P, and C. Each
coefficient expresses the fraction of N, P or C in terms of BOD. These are not the same as the
organic matter stochiometric coefficients defined in terms of N, P, or C in terms of organic matter.
A typical conversion from organic matter to oxygen is about 1.4 (see Oxygen Stoichiometry 1).
Note that if CBOD-P and CBOD-N are OFF in the CST ACTIVE card, CBODN and CBODP will
represent the fixed stoichometry of the CBOD group. If CBOD-P and CBOD-N are ON, then
CBODN and CBODP are not used. The C stocihiometry for each CBOD group though is always
fixed and is CBODC.
Example
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
STOIC
1
2
3
CBODP
0.004
0.004
0.004
CBODN
0.06
0.06
0.06
CBODC
0.32
0.32
0.32

Carbenaceous Biochemichal Oxygen Demand
C-206
CONTROL FILE
Inorganic Phosphorus (PHOSPHOR)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
PO4R
Real
0.001
PARTP
Real
0.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Sediment release rate of phosphorus, fraction of
SOD
Phosphorus partitioning coefficient for suspended solids
[PO4R] is the sediment release rate of phosphorous under anaerobic conditions specified as a fraction of the sediment oxygen demand. Hence, the PO4 release rate under anaerobic conditions is
[PO4R]*[SOD] in units of g/m2/day modified by the temperature multiplier for SOD. Hence the
rate chosen is dependent on the SOD rate. Often, P release rates are very site-specific. Sen et al.
(2004) determined an average anaerobic P release rate of 0.57 mg/m2/day for Beaver Lake, Arkansas. Auer et al. (1993) found rates in a hypereutrophic lake from 9-21 mg/m2/day (mean 13
mg/m2/day). Kim et al. (2004) found rates in the summer between 20-24oC up to 16 mg/m2/day.
Spears et al. (2007) showed that for a large shallow lake recovering from high nutrient that the
maximum P release was 12 mg/m2/day. James et al. (1995) found that P release rates for Lake
Pepin, an impoundment on the upper Mississippi River, were between 3.8 and 15 mg/m2/day.
[PARTP] is the phosphorous partitioning coefficient for sorption onto suspended solids. In the
current model formulations, it is not recommended to allow phosphorus to sorb onto inorganic
suspended solids unless clear evidence for this mechanism is known, so [PARTP] should be set
to zero. Note that concentrations of PO4 in the model are in units of PO4 as P. Note that the model
does not have a mechanism for desorption of P from the inorganic susupended solids to the water
column.
Example
PHOSPHOR
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
C-207
PO4R
0.015
0.015
0.015
PARTP
0.0
0.0
0.0
CONTROL FILE
Ammonium (AMMONIUM)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
NH4REL
Real
0.001
NH4DK
Real
0.12
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Sediment release rate of ammonium, fraction of
SOD
Ammonium decay rate, day-1
[NH4REL] is the sediment release rate of ammonium anaerobic conditions specified as a fraction
of the sediment oxygen demand. Hence, when there is anoxia, the rate of ammonia release is approximately the (SOD rate)*(NH4REL) in units of g NH4-N/m2/day or if divided by the layer height
in m in units of g NH4-N/m3/day. These rates are modified by the temperature multiplier for SOD.
Beutel (2006) showed that release rates of ammonia-N can vary from less than 5 to more than 15
mg NH4-N/m2/day between oligotrophic to hypereutrophic lakes, respectively.
[NH4DK] is the rate at which ammonium is oxidized to nitrate-nitrite. Since the model considers
nitrate-nitrite as one compartment, the rate specified should be the rate for conversion of ammonium to nitrate. Literature values are given in the following table.
Note that concentrations of ammonia in the model are in terms of NH4 as N.
Table C-70. Ammonium Decay Rate Literature Values
Site
Grand River, IL
Grasmerer Lake, UK
Truckee River, NV
Mohawk River, NY
Ohio River
Big Blue River, NB
Flint River, MI
Ammonium decay rate, day-1

0.80
0.001-0.013
0.09-1.30
0.23-0.40
0.25
0.17-0.25
0.76-0.95
Reference
Bansal, 1976
Hall, 1982
Bansal, 1976
Bansal, 1976
Bansal, 1976
Bansal, 1976
Bansal, 1976
McCutcheon (1987) measured the difference in BOD between samples with and without a nitrification inhibitor in order to estimate nitrification rates. The measured rates are shown in Table 71.
The measured streams were relatively deep with low velocities and lacked well-developed periphyton communities.
Table 71. Nitrification rates measured by McCutcheon (1987).
Reaction
Nitrification
Nitrification
Source
Chattahoochee River,
Georgia
West Fork Trinity River,
Texas
Nitrification rate (d-1)

0.26
0.50
Example
AMMONIUM
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
NH4R
0.001
0.001
0.001
NH4DK
0.12
0.12
0.12
C-208
CONTROL FILE

Ammonium Temperature Rate Multipliers
C-209
CONTROL FILE
Ammonium Temperature Rate Multipliers (NH4 RATE)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
NH4T1
NH4T2
Real
Real
5.0
25.0
4
5
NH4K1
NH4K2
Real
Real
0.1
0.99
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for ammonia decay, C
Lower temperature for maximum ammonia decay, C
Fraction of nitrification rate at NH4T1
Fraction of nitrification rate at NH4T2
This card specifies the lower and maximum lower temperatures used in defining the curve that
determines the effect of temperature on ammonia nitrification. See Appendix B for more details
on the mathematical formulation for the temperature coefficients. Recommended values are given
in the example.
The ammonia decay rate correction as a function of temperature is shown below for NH4T1=5,
NH4K1=0.1, NH4T2=25 and NH4K2=0.99.
Nitrification rate correction

Fraction of maximum nitrification
rate
25, 0.99
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
5, 0.1
0
0
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
Figure 44. Ammonia decay as a function of temperature.
Example
NH4 RATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
NH4T1
5.0
5.0
5.0
NH4T2
25.0
25.0
25.0
NH4K1
0.1
0.1
0.1
NH4K2
0.99
0.99
0.99

Ammonium
C-210
CONTROL FILE
Nitrate (NITRATE)
FIELD
1
2
3
4
NAME
VALUE
NO3DK
Real
NO3S
Real
FNO3SED Real
DEFAULT
0.03
0.001
0.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Nitrate decay rate, day-1
Denitrification rate from sediments, m day-1
Fraction of NO3-N diffused into the sediments
that becomes part of organic N in the sediments
(The rest is denitrified.)
This card specifies the denitrification rates in the water column and from the water column to the
sediments. Values used in previous modeling studies for the nitrate decay rate [NO3DK] have
ranged from 0.05-0.15 day-1. [NO3S] is analogous to a settling velocity and represents how fast
nitrate is diffused into the sediments where it undergoes denitrification.
Of the NO3-N that is diffused into the sediments, a fraction of that, fNO3-SED, is incorporated into
organic matter in the sediments. The rest, 1- fNO3-SED, is denitrified into N2. Wetzel shows that in
one study 37% of the NO3N of lake sediments was incorporated into bacterial organic matter. If
1st order sediments are not active, then all of the NO3-N diffused into the sediments is assumed to
be denitrified. Be careful in using this term in conjunction with [NO3S] since the stoichiometry of
sediments (C:N:P ratios) can be changed by allowing this to occur.
Note that concentrations of nitrate in the model are in terms of NO3 as N.
Example
NITRATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
NO3DK
0.05
0.05
0.05
NO3S FNO3SED
0.001
0.00
0.001
0.37
0.001
0.37

Nitrate Temperature Rate Multipliers
C-211
CONTROL FILE
Nitrate Temperature Rate Multipliers (NO3 RATE)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
NO3T1
NO3T2
Real
Real
5.0
25.0
4
5
NO3K1
NO3K2
Real
Real
0.1
0.99
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for nitrate decay, C
Lower temperature for maximum nitrate decay,
C
Fraction of denitrification rate at NO3T1
Fraction of denitrification rate at NO3T2
This card specifies the lower and maximum lower temperatures used in defining the curve that
determines the effect of temperature on denitrification. See Appendix B for more details on the
mathematical formulation for the temperature coefficients. Recommended values are given in the
example.
The denitrification rate correction as a function of temperature is shown below for NO3T1=5,
NO3K1=0.1, NO3T2=25 and NO3K2=0.99.
Denitrification rate correction

Fraction of maximum denitrification
rate
25, 0.99
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
5, 0.1
0
0
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
Figure 45. Denitrification as a function of temperature.
Example
NO3 RATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
NO3T1
5.0
5.0
5.0
NO3T2
25.0
25.0
25.0
NO3K1
0.1
0.1
0.1
NO3K2
0.99
0.99
0.99

Nitrate
C-212
CONTROL FILE
Silica (SILICA)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
DSIR
Real
0.1
3
4
5
PSIS
PSIDK
PARTSI
Real
Real
Real
1.0
0.3
0.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Dissolved silica sediment release rate, fraction
of SOD
Particulate biogenic settling rate, m sec-1
Particulate biogenic silica decay rate, day-1
Dissolved silica partitioning coefficient
This card specifies the relevant kinetic coefficient for silica kinetics. [DSIR] is the sediment release
rate of dissolved silica from the zero-order sediment compartment. [PSIS] is the particulate biogenic settling rate and [PSIDK] is the particulate biogenic decay rate. Particulate biogenic silica
represents the skeletal remains of diatoms. Dissolved silica is allowed to partition onto suspended
solids and [PARTSI] is the value of the partitioning coefficient.
Example
SILICA
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
DSIR
0.1
0.1
0.1
PSIS
0.0
0.0
0.0
PSIDK
0.3
0.3
0.3
PARTSI
0.2
0.2
0.2

Algal Stoichiometry
Zero-Order Sediment Oxygen Demand
C-213
CONTROL FILE
Iron (IRON)
FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
FEREL
Real
0.5
FESETL
Real
2.0
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Iron sediment release rate, fraction of sediment
oxygen demand
Iron settling velocity, m day-1
[FER] specifies the iron release rate from the sediments as a fraction of the sediment oxygen demand. Values between 0.3 and 0.5 have been used in previous modeling studies, but this is a
function of the 0-order SOD calibration values that should change from system to system.
[FES] is the particulate iron settling rate in the water column under oxic conditions. Values between 0.5 and 2.0 have been used in previous modeling studies.
This state variable can be thought of representing total metals. In an oxidizing environment reduced
iron is oxidized as
2+ 3+
The model uses [PARTP] to partition or sorb [PO4-P] onto the oxidized form. The model at present
does not take up oxygen during the oxidation process.
Example
IRON
FER
0.5
FES
2.0

C-214
CONTROL FILE
Sediment Carbon Dioxide Release (SED CO2)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
CO2REL
Real
1.2
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Sediment carbon dioxide release rate, fraction of
sediment oxygen demand
This card specifies the carbon dioxide release rate from the sediments as a fraction of the 0-order
sediment oxygen demand.
Values as high as 1.4 have been used in earlier modeling studies. If one considers the CO2 release
as a fraction of O2 uptake from
C6 H 12 O6 6O2 6CO2 6 H 2 O ,
the stoichiometric ratio of O2 to CO2 is 32 g O2/44 g CO2 or 0.8 g O2/g CO2 for a CO2REL of 1/0.8
or 1.25.
Example
SED CO2
CO2REL
1.0

C-215
CONTROL FILE
Oxygen Stoichiometry 1 (STOICH 1)

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
O2NH4
O2OM
Real
Real
4.57
1.4
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Oxygen stoichiometry for nitrification
Oxygen stoichiometry for organic matter decay
This card specifies the stoichiometric equivalents of oxygen for nitrification, organic matter decay.
The default values should not be changed unless the user has data to support the change.
Nitrification
NH 4
3
O2 NO2 2 H
2
3.43 g O2 required for 1 g N oxidized
NO2
1
O NO3
2 2
1.14 g O2 required for 1 g N oxidized for a total of 4.57 g O2/g N. Gaudy and Gaudy (1980) recommend that the O2 demand approaches 4.2 g O2/g N because of cellular needs for N.
Organic matter
Assuming the organic matter represents average algal and bacterial composition (C5H7NO2)
(Golterman, 1975; Wang et al., 1978), the stoichiometric requirements are 1.4 g O2/g organic
matter from the following equation:
5CO2 2 H 2O NH 3 C5 H 7 NO2 5O2

Example
STOICH 1
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
O2NH4
4.57
4.57
4.57
O2OM
1.4
1.4
1.4

Oxygen Stoichiometry 2
C-216
CONTROL FILE

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
O2AR
O2AG
Real
Real
1.1
1.4
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Oxygen stoichiometry for algal respiration
Oxygen stoichiometry for algal primary production
This card specifies the stoichiometric equivalents of oxygen for algal respiration and algal primary
production.
The biological oxygen requirement for respiration is based on converting carbohydrate to carbon
dioxide and water, such as
6CO2 6 H 2O C5 H12O6 6O2

or 1.1 g O2/g organic matter. EPA (1985) reports model applications where [O2AR] varied from
0.95 to 2.3 mg O2/mg dry weight algae biomass.
[O2AG] rates reported in modeling studies have varied from 1.24 to 1.8 mg O2/mg dry weight algae
biomass (EPA, 1985).
Example
STOICH 2
Alg 1
Alg 2
Alg 3
O2AR
1.1
1.1
1.1
O2AG
1.4
1.4
1.4

C-217
CONTROL FILE

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
O2ER
Real
1.1
O2EG
Real
1.4
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Oxygen stoichiometry for epiphyton/periphyton
respiration
Oxygen stoichiometry for epiphyton/periphyton
primary production
This card specifies the stoichiometric equivalents of oxygen for epihpyton/periphyton respiration
and epiphyton/periphyton primary production. The default values should not be changed unless
the user has data to support the change.
Example
STOICH 3
Ep 1
Ep 2
Ep 3
O2ER
1.1
1.1
1.1
O2EG
1.4
1.4
1.4

C-218
CONTROL FILE

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
O2ZR
Real
1.1
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Oxygen stoichiometry for zooplankton respiration
This card specifies the stoichiometric equivalents of oxygen for zooplankton respiration. The default values should not be changed unless the user has data to support the change.
Example
STOICH 4
O2ZR
ZOO1
1.10000

C-219
CONTROL FILE

FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
O2MR
O2MG
Real
Real
1.1
1.4
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Oxygen stoichiometry for macrophyte respiration
Oxygen stoichiometry for macrophyte primary
production
This card specifies the stoichiometric equivalents of oxygen for macrophyte respiration and macrophyte primary production. The default values should not be changed unless the user has data to
support the change.
Example
STOICH 5
MAC1
O2MR
1.1
O2MG
1.4

C-220
CONTROL FILE
Oxygen Limit (O2 LIMIT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
KDO
Real
0.7
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
KDO, Dissolved oxygen half-saturation constant
or concentration at which aerobic processes are
at 50% of their maximum, g m-3
This card specifies the half-saturation constant or dissolved oxygen concentration at which oxic
processes are at 50% of their normal oxic rates. Hence, sediment oxygen demand, nitrification, and
other processes only occur when there is available oxygen. The change from aerobic to anaerobic
processes occurs gradually by means of a Monod type formulation.
A Monod formulation is used though to move gradually from oxic to anoxic conditions. This reduction of oxic reactions as dissolved oxygen levels approach zero is based on specification of a
dissolved oxygen half-saturation constant in the following equation:
Rate Re duction
DO
where DO is the concentration of dissolved oxygen and KDO is
K DO DO
a half-saturation dissolved oxygen concentration when oxic reactions are half of their maximum
without limitation of oxygen conditions. Earlier versions of CE-QUAL-W2 used an ON-OFF oxygen limit for aerobic-anaerobic processes. Thomann and Mueller (1987) have used a value of
KDO=0.7 mg/l.
Rate reduction (0 to 1)
Variation of rate reduction with KDO

1
0.8
KDO=0.1 mg/l
KDO=0.5 mg/l
KDO=1 mg/l
KDO=2 mg/l
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
Dissolved oxygen concentration, mg/l
Example
O2 LIMIT
C-221
KDO
0.7
CONTROL FILE
Sediment Compartment (SEDIMENT)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SEDC
Character
OFF
PRNSC
Character
OFF
4
5
6
7
8
SEDCI
SEDK
SEDS
FSOD
FSED
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
0.0
0.1
0.1
1.0
1.0
9
10
SEDBR
Real
DYNSEDK Character
0.01
OFF
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Turns ON/OFF the first-order sediment compartment
Turns ON/OFF printing sediment organic matter
concentrations to the snapshot file
Initial sediment concentration, g m-2
Sediment decay rate, day-1
Sediment settling or focusing rate, m day-1
Fraction of the zero-order SOD rate used
Fraction of initial first-order sediment concentration
Sediment burial rate, day-1
Turns ON/OFF dynamic calculation of the 1st order sediment model decay rate
This card controls the behavior of the 0- and 1st-order sediment compartment. [SEDC] turns
ON/OFF the 1st-order sediment compartment. The 1st-order sediment compartment is not a true
sediment diagenesis compartment as it does not keep track of organic nutrient delivery to the sediments, their decay, and subsequent release back into the water column during hypoxic/anoxic conditions. However, it does keep track of organic matter delivery to the sediments via particulate
organic matter and dead algal cells, and the subsequent water column oxygen demand that is exerted. The inclusion of the 1st-order sediment compartment makes the model more predictive in
that any increase of organic matter delivery to the sediments will have an affect on the SOD.
[PRNSC] controls whether or not sediment organic matter concentrations that accumulate in the
first-order SOD algorithm are output to the snapshot file. [SEDCI] specifies the initial concentration(s) for the 1st-order sediment compartment and its behavior is exactly the same as for setting
the initial concentrations of any of the water column state variables, except that it is in units of mass
per surface area or g/m2. Just as the algae are modeled as a dry weight of organic matter, the sediment concentration is also a dry weight of organic matter per bottom surface area.
The initial concentrations of Sediment-P, Sediment-N, and Sediment-C are based on the initial
sediment concentration multiplied by the appropriate initial stocihiometric coefficient, [ORGP],
[ORGN], and [ORGC], respectively. These nutrient ratios then are dynamically computed as organic matter accumulates and decays in the sediments. [SEDDK] specifies the sediment decay rate
and should be somewhat less than the labile POM decay rate. [SEDS] is the velocity at which
sediments that accumulate on each layer are settling or moving toward the bottom of the channel.
In many systems turbulence tends to stir up and re-settle the sediments at lower and lower levels in
the channel cross-section. In an earlier version (V3.2), the settling velocity of POM [POMS] was
used to focus sediments toward the bottom. [FSOD] multiplies the values specified for the zeroorder sediment compartment and can be used to rapidly adjust the SOD values during calibration.
[FSED] is multiplied by the initial sediment concentration given either through the LPR, VPR or
w2_con.npt files. [SEDBR] is the sediment burial rate. This allows sediments to effectively be
bound and unavailable for further decay.
C-222
CONTROL FILE
[DYNSEDK] allows the user to compute dynamically the sediment decay rate in the first order
sediment model based on the organics that are deposited into the 1st order sediment compartment.
If [DYNSEDK] is OFF, then the value of the maximum decay rate is [SEDDK]. It is then adjusted
according to temperature. If [DYNSEDK] is turned ON, then the maximum sediment decay rate is
computed based on the weighted mass average of the decay rates of material which has settled and
the amount that is already residing in the sediments every time step for which kinetics are computed
or updated.
End view of model

segment
Model layer
Focusing
rate
for sediment
movement
Figure 46. Illustration of sediment focusing rate.
Example
SEDIMENT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SEDC
ON
ON
ON
PRNSC
ON
ON
ON
SEDCI
0.0
0.0
0.0
SEDK
0.1
0.1
0.1
SEDS
0.0
0.0
0.5
FSOD
1.0
1.0
1.0
FSED
1.0
1.0
1.0
SEDBR DYNSEDK
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF

SOD Temperature Rate Multipliers
C-223
CONTROL FILE
SOD Temperature Rate Multipliers (SOD RATE)

FIELD
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
SODT1
Real
4.0
SODT2
Real
25.0
SODK1
Real
0.1
SODK2
Real
0.99
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Lower temperature for zero-order SOD or firstorder sediment decay, C
Upper temperature for zero-order SOD or firstorder sediment decay, C
Fraction of SOD or sediment decay rate at lower
temperature
Fraction of SOD or sediment decay rate at upper
temperature
This card specifies the temperature rate multipliers that adjust the 0-order SOD or 1st-order decay
rate. The model is very sensitive to these values and they are an important calibration parameter
for accurately reproducing the timing of water column oxygen decreases early during stratified
periods. The SOD rate correction as a function of temperature is shown below for SODT1=5,
SODK1=0.1, SODT2=25 and SODK2=0.99.
SOD rate correction

Fraction of maximum SOD rate
25, 0.99
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
5, 0.1
10
20
30
Temperature,
40
50
oC
Figure 47. SOD rate as a function of temperature.

Example
SOD RATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
SODT1
4.0
4.0
4.0
SODT2
30.0
30.0
30.0
SODK1
0.1
0.1
0.1
SODK2
0.99
0.99
0.99

Sediment Compartment
C-224
CONTROL FILE
Zero-Order Sediment Oxygen Demand (S DEMAND)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SOD
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Zero-order sediment oxygen demand for each segment, g O2
m-2 day-1
This card specifies the 0-order sediment oxygen demand for each segment (including boundary
segments) in the computational grid. If there are more values than can be specified on one line,
then they are continued on the next line without another S DEMAND card being specified.
Sediment oxygen demand is known to vary spatially in reservoirs due to differences in sedimentation patterns and algal production (Cole & Hannan, 1989). In the model, the user can specify a
separate value of sediment oxygen demand [SOD] for each model segment. Sediment oxygen
demand typically ranges from 0.1 to 1.0 gO2 m-2 day-1, but can be higher (Newbold and Liggett,
1974). Additional information can be found in Gunnison, Chen, and Brannon (1983) and Chen,
Brannon, and Gunnison (1984). Additional values are given in the following table.
Table C-72. Sediment Oxygen Demand Literature Values
Site
Cayuga Lake, NY
Lake Sammamish, WA
Lake Lyndon B. Johnson, TX
Saginaw River, MI
SOD, g O2 m-2 day-1

0.3-1.0
1.0
1.7-5.8
0.1-5.3
Reference
Newbold & Liggett, 1974
Bella, 1970
Schnoor & Fruh, 1979
Chiaro & Burke, 1980
Example
S DEMAND
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
SOD
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

Sediment Compartment
SOD Temperature Rate Multipliers
C-225
CONTROL FILE
Reaeration (REAERAT)
FIELD
1
2
3
NAME
VALUE
DEFAULT
REARC
EQN#
Character
Integer
LAKE
6 (if LAKE)
4
5
6
7
COEF1
COEF2
COEF3
COEF4
Real
Real
Real
Real
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Type of waterbody, RIVER, LAKE, or ESTUARY
Equation number used for determining reaeration
User defined parameter
This card allows the user to specify the appropriate reaeration formulation for the specific type of
waterbody being simulated. [REARC] is used to specify the type of waterbody. [EQN#] is then
used to specify the reaeration equation appropriate for the type of waterbody. The following table
lists the equations for the RIVER waterbody type.
Table C-73. River Reaeration Equations
#
Equation
Either Eq 1, 2 or 4
DO2 U
K
Ka L
H
H3/ 2
1/ 2
K
11.6U
K a L 1.67
H
H
K a 0.88US for10 Q 300cfs

3
K a 1.8US for1 Q 10cfs

K L 21.6U 0.67
Ka
H
H 1.85
Ka
K L 25u
1 F 0.5
H
H
Ka
K L 7.62U
1.33
H
H
Comments
Ka is determined based
on applicability criteria of
each of these 3 formulations
DO2 = water molecular diffusion coefficient at
20oC, 8.1 E-5 ft2
hr-1 or 2.09E-5
cm2 s-1
DO2= 1.91E-3(1.037)T-20,
ft2 day-1
U = velocity, ft/day
H = depth, ft
Applicability
Reference
Covar (1976)
Depths between 130 ft and velocities

between 0.5-1.6
fps
OConnor and
Dobbins (1958)
U = velocity, ft s-1
H = depth, ft
Ka = reaeration rate,
day-1
Depths between 211 ft and velocities

between 1.8-5 fps
Churchill,
Elmore and
Buckingham
(1962)
S = slope, ft mile-1
day-1
Suggested for use

when Q<10 cfs
Tsivoglou and
Wallace (1972)
H = depth, ft
Depths between
0.4-2.4 ft and velocities between
0.1-1.8 fps
Owens et al.
(1964)
(HSg)0.5
S = energy grade
line slope
F = Froude number,
U/(gH)0.5
Thackston and
Krenkel (1966)
H = depth, ft
Langbien and
Durum (1967)
C-226
CONTROL FILE
#
Equation
K a 517( US )
0.524
K a 596( US )
0.528
Q
Q
0.242
3 1
for Q 0.556 m s
0.136
for Q 0.556 m 3 s 1
Ka 88 ( US )0.313 D 0.353
0.66
for Q 0.556 m3 s 1
Ka 142 ( US ) D W
0.333
0.243
3 1
for Q 0.556 m s
K a C1U C 2 H C 3 S C 4
and if no channel slope:
K a C1U C2 H C3
1
0
K L 5.0u *
1 9 F 0.25
H
H
Ka
Comments
= velocity, m s-1
= slope, m m-1
= flow, m3 s-1
= reaeration rate,
day-1
U = velocity, m s-1
S = slope, m m-1
W = stream top
width, m
D = average depth,
m
day-1
U = velocity, m s-1
H = depth, m
S = slope [m/m or
ft/ft,
day-1
C1 = user defined
C2 = user defined
C3 = user defined
C4 = user defined
(HSg)0.5
S = slope of energy
grade line
F = Froude number,
U/(gH)0.5
Ka, day-1
U
S
Q
Ka
Applicability
Reference
For pool and riffle

streams
Melching and
Flores (1999)
For channel-control
streams
Melching and
Flores (1999)
Thackston and
Dawson (2001)
Table C-74 lists the reaeration equations available for lakes, reservoirs, and estuaries in which it is
assumed that wind is the dominant forcing function for reaeration.
Table C-74. Lake Reaeration Equations
#
Equation
Ka
Ka
K L 0.0986W 1.64
H
H
Ka
C-227
=0.2, =1.0 for W < 3.5 m s-1

=0.057, =2.0 for W > 3.5 m s-1
K L W
H
H
K L 0.0986W
H
H
1.64
at T=20oC or
600
Sc
0.5
Do 2
K
(200 60W 0.5 )106
Ka L
H
H
Ka
Reference
Broecker et al
(1978)
Gelda et al (1996)
W = daily average wind speed, m s-1
K L 0.728W 0.5 0.317W 0.0372W 2
H
H
Ka
4
Comments
W = wind speed at 10 m, m s-1
H = depth, m
KL = reaeration velocity, m day-1
K
0.864W
Ka L
H
H
K L 0.5 0.05W 2
H
H

KL = reaeration velocity, m day-1
Banks and Herrera (1977)

Sc = Schmidt number,
(/D)=13750[0.10656
exp(-0.0627T)+0.00495]
T = temperature, oC
Wanninkhof et al.
(1991)
DO2 = molecular diffusivity of oxygen,

m2 s-1, 2.1E-9 m2 s-1 at 20oC
KL = reaeration velocity, m s-1
Chen, Kanwisher
(1963)
Cole and Buchak
(1995)
#
CONTROL FILE
Equation
Comments
K
0.362 W
Ka L
W 5.5m / s
H
H
K
0.0277W 2
Ka L
W 5.5m / s
H
H
Ka
Reference
Banks (1975)
K L 0.64 0.128W 2
H
H
Recommended form for WQRSS reservoir model
K L 0.156W 0.63
W 4.1 m s 1
H
H
K
0.0269W 1.9
Ka L
W 4.1 m s 1
H
H
Smith (1978)
Ka
9
K L 0.0276W 2
H
H
K
0.0432W 2
Ka L
H
H
Downing and
Truesdale (1955)
Ka
10
11
12
Liss (1973)
Ka
Kanwisher (1963)
K L 0.319W
H
H
Yu et al (1977)
K L 0.398
W 1.6 m s 1
H
H
K
0.155W 2
Ka L
W 1.6 m s 1
H
H
Ka
13
14
Ka
K L C1 C2W
H
H
Weiler (1974)
W
Ka
C1
C2
C3
C3
=
=
=
=
=
wind speed, m s-1 at 10 m

reaeration rate, day-1
user defined
user defined
user defined
For estuary systems, Thomann and Mueller (1987) and Chapra (1997) suggest using any of the
wind formulations in Table C-74 or Equation 1 in Table C-73 (O'Connor-Dobbins formula) using
the mean tidal velocity over a tidal cycle. Table C-75 shows an additional formulation from
Thomann and Fitzpatrick (1982) for estuaries, as well as the approach of Covar (1976) for rivers.
Since many texts suggest using the mean tidal velocity, caution should be used in using these equations since they are based on the instantaneous velocity.
Table C-75. Estuarine Reaeration Equations
#
0
Equation
Either Eq 1, 2 or 4 from Table C-73
K
0.728W 0.5 0.317W 0.0372W 2
Ka L
H
H
U
3.93 1.5
H
Comments
Ka is determined based on applicability
criteria of each of these 3 formulations
U = mean tidal velocity, m s-1
H = depth, m
Kl = reaeration velocity, m s-1
Reference
Covar (1976)
Thomann and Fitzpatrick
(1982)
This formula combines the effect of wind

from Banks and Herrera (1977) and estuary tidal flow
C-228
CONTROL FILE
#
Equation
K a C1U C2 H C3
0.5 C4W 2
H
U
H
W
Ka
C1
C2
C3
C4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Comments
velocity, m s-1
depth, m
wind speed at 10 m
reaeration rate, day-1
user defined
user defined
user defined
user defined
Reference
In an estuary situation, a computation can be performed to evaluate whether wind shear or boundary
shear controls the turbulence intensity at the surface. This algorithm will be added to the code in a
future release version. For further information, see Appendix B.
Example
REAERAT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
C-229
REARC
RIVER
LAKE
ESTUARY
EQN#
7
5
1
COEF1
COEF2
COEF3
COEF4
CONTROL FILE
Restart Input Filename (RSI FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
RSIFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Restart input data filename
This card specifies the filename used as input for restarts.

Example
RSI FILE..............................RSIFN.....................................
rsi.npt
C-230
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Filename (QWD FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
QWDFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Withdrawal filename
This card specifies the filename for withdrawal outflows. See a description of the withdrawal file
for more information on data setup.
Example
QWD FILE..............................QWDFN.....................................
qwd.npt
C-231
CONTROL FILE
Gate Outflow Filename (QGT FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
QGTFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Gated outflow filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch outflows. See a description of the gate outflow file
for more information on data setup.
Example
QGT FILE..............................QGTFN.....................................
qgt.npt
C-232
CONTROL FILE
Wind Sheltering Filename (WSC FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
WSCFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Wind sheltering Coefficient sheltering filename
This card specifies the filename containing the wind sheltering coefficients as a function of segment
number and Julian date. One file contains all the wind sheltering coefficients for all waterbodies.
See a description of the wind-sheltering file for more information on data setup.
Example
WSC FILE...............................WSCFN....................................
wsc.npt
C-233
CONTROL FILE
Dynamic Shading Filename (SHD FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SHDFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Dynamic shading filename
This card specifies the filename containing the wind sheltering coefficients as a function of segment
number and Julian date. One file contains all the dynamic shading coefficients for all waterbodies.
See a description of the dynamic shading file for more information on data setup.
Example
SHD FILE...............................SHDFN....................................
shd.npt
C-234
CONTROL FILE
Bathymetry Filename (BTH FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
BTHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Bathymetry filename
This card specifies the filename(s) containing the waterbody bathymetry. See a description of the
bathymetry file for more information on the data setup.
Example
BTH FILE...............................BTHFN....................................
Wb 1
bth_wb1.npt
Wb 2
bth_wb2.npt
Wb 3
bth_wb3.npt
C-235
CONTROL FILE
Meteorology Filename (MET FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
METFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Meteorologic input data filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for time-varying meteorologic data. More information on data
setup can be found in the description of the meteorology input file.
Example
MET FILE...............................METFN....................................
Wb 1
met_wb1.npt
Wb 2
met_wb2.npt
Wb 3
met_wb3.npt
C-236
CONTROL FILE
Light Extinction Filename (EXT FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
EXTFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Light extinction input data filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for time-varying light extinction data in Julian day versus light
extinction coefficient in m-1. More information on data setup can be found in the description of the
light extinction file.
Example
EXT FILE...............................EXTFN....................................
Wb 1
ext_wb1.npt - not used
Wb 2
Wb 3
C-237
CONTROL FILE
Vertical Profile Filename (VPR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
VPRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Temperature and constituent vertical profile filename used for
specifying initial conditions for the grid
This card specifies the filename(s) used to specify vertically varying initial temperatures and concentrations for the grid. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the
vertical profile file.
Example
VPR FILE...............................VPRFN....................................
Wb 1
vpr_wb1.npt
Wb 2
vpr_wb2.npt
Wb 3
vpr_wb3.npt
C-238
CONTROL FILE
Longitudinal Profile Filename (LPR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
LPRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Temperature and constituent longitudinal profile filename used
for specifying initial conditions for the grid
This card specifies the filename(s) used to specify vertically and longitudinally varying initial temperatures and concentrations for the grid. More information on data setup can be found at the
description of the longitudinal profile file.
Example
LPR FILE...............................LPRFN....................................
Wb 1
lpr_wb1.npt
Wb 2
lpr_wb2.npt
Wb 3
lpr_wb3.npt
C-239
CONTROL FILE
Branch Inflow Filename (QIN FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
QINFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Inflow filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch inflows. More information on data setup can be
found at the description of the branch inflow file.
Example
QIN FILE..............................QINFN.....................................
Br 1
qin_br1.npt
Br 2
qin_br2.npt
Br 3
qin_br3.npt
Br 4
qin_br4.npt
C-240
CONTROL FILE
Branch Inflow Temperature Filename (TIN FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TINFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Inflow temperature filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch inflow temperatures. More information on data setup
can be found at the description of the branch inflow temperature file.
Example
TIN FILE..............................TINFN.....................................
Br 1
tin_br1.npt
Br 2
tin_br2.npt
Br 3
tin_br3.npt
Br 4
tin_br4.npt
C-241
CONTROL FILE
Branch Inflow Constituent Filename (CIN FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CINFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Inflow constituent filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch inflow concentrations. More information on data
setup can be found at the description of the branch inflow concentration file.
Example
CIN FILE..............................CINFN.....................................
Br 1
cin_br1.npt
Br 2
cin_br2.npt
Br 3
cin_br3.npt
Br 4
cin_br4.npt
C-242
CONTROL FILE
Branch Outflow Filename (QOT FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
QOTFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Outflow filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch outflows. More information on data setup can be
found at the description of the branch outflow file.
Example
QOT FILE..............................QOTFN.....................................
Br 1
qot_br1.npt
Br 2
qot_br2.npt
Br 3
qot_br3.npt
Br 4
qot_br4.npt
C-243
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Inflow Filename (QTR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
QTRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Tributary inflow filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for tributary inflows. There must be a separate file for each
tributary. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the tributary inflow
file.
Example
QTR FILE..............................QTRFN.....................................
Tr 1
qtr_tr1.npt
C-244
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Inflow Temperature Filename (TTR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TTRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Tributary temperature filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for tributary inflow temperatures. There must be a separate file
for each tributary. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the tributary
inflow temperature file.
Example
TTR FILE..............................TTRFN.....................................
Tr 1
ttr_tr1.npt
C-245
CONTROL FILE
Tributary Inflow Concentration Filename (CTR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CTRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Tributary inflow concentration filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for tributary inflow concentrations. There must be a separate
file for each tributary. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the tributary inflow concentration file.
Example
CTR FILE..............................CTRFN.....................................
Tr 1
ctr_tr1.npt
C-246
CONTROL FILE
Distributed Tributary Inflow Filename (QDT FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
QDTFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Distributed tributary inflow filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for distributed tributary inflow. There must be a separate file
for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the distributed
tributary inflow file.
Example
QDT FILE..............................QDTFN.....................................
Br 1
qdt_tr1.npt
Br 2
qdt_tr2.npt
Br 3
qdt_tr3.npt
Br 4
qdt_tr4.npt
C-247
CONTROL FILE
Distributed Tributary Inflow Temperature Filename (TDT

FILE)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TDTFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Distributed tributary temperature filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for distributed tributary inflow temperatures. There must be a
separate file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of
the distributed tributary inflow temperature file.
Example
TDT FILE..............................TDTFN.....................................
Br 1
tdt_tr1.npt
Br 2
tdt_tr2.npt
Br 3
tdt_tr3.npt
Br 4
tdt_tr4.npt
C-248
CONTROL FILE

(CDT FILE)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CDTFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Distributed tributary inflow concentration filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for distributed tributary inflow concentrations. There must be a
separate file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of
the distributed tributary inflow concentration file.
Example
CDT FILE..............................CDTFN.....................................
Br 1
cdt_tr1.npt
Br 2
cdt_tr2.npt
Br 3
cdt_tr3.npt
Br 4
cdt_tr4.npt
C-249
CONTROL FILE
Precipitation Filename (PRE FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
PREFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Precipitation filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for each branch precipitation. There must be a separate file for
each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the precipitation
file. The not used tag at the end of the filename is useful when looking at the echoing of input
filenames in the preprocessor output and can alert the user to an input option that is or is not
being used. If precipitation is turned ON for a branch, then the not used tag should be
removed.
Example
PRE FILE..............................PREFN.....................................
Br 1
pre_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
C-250
CONTROL FILE
Precipitation Temperature Filename (TPR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TPRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Precipitation temperature filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch precipitation temperatures. There must be a separate
file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the precipitation temperature file. The not used tag at the end of the filename is useful when looking
at the echoing of input filenames in the preprocessor output and can alert the user to an input
option that is or is not being used. If precipitation is turned ON for a branch, then the not used
tag should be removed.
Example
TPR FILE..............................TPRFN.....................................
Br 1
tpr_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
C-251
CONTROL FILE
Precipitation Concentration Filename (CPR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CPRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Precipitation concentration filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch precipitation constituent concentrations. There must
be a separate file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description
of the precipitation concentration file. The not used tag at the end of the filename is useful
when looking at the echoing of input filenames in the preprocessor output and can alert the user
to an input option that is or is not being used. If precipitation is turned ON for a branch, then the
not used tag should be removed.
Example
CPR FILE..............................CPRFN.....................................
Br 1
cpr_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
C-252
CONTROL FILE
External Upstream Head Filename (EUH FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
EUHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
External upstream head filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch external upstream heads. There must be a separate
file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the upstream head file. The not used tag at the end of the filename is useful when looking at the
echoing of input filenames in the preprocessor output and can alert the user to an input option
that is or is not being used. If there is an external head for a branch, then the not used tag
shown below should be removed.
Example
EUH FILE..............................EUHFN.....................................
Br 1
euh_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
C-253
CONTROL FILE
External Upstream Head Temperature Filename (TUH

FILE)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TUHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
External upstream head temperature filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch external upstream head vertical temperatures. There
must be a separate file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the upstream head temperature file. The not used tag at the end of the filename
is useful when looking at the echoing of input filenames in the preprocessor output and can alert
the user to an input option that is or is not being used. If there is an external head for a branch, then
the not used tag shown below should be removed.
Example
TUH FILE..............................TUHFN.....................................
Br 1
tuh_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
C-254
CONTROL FILE
External Upstream Head Concentration Filename (CUH

FILE)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CUHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
External upstream head concentration filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch external upstream head constituent concentrations.
There must be a separate file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the
description of the upstream head concentration file. The not used tag at the end of the
filename is useful when looking at the echoing of input filenames in the preprocessor output and
can alert the user to an input option that is or is not being used. If there is an external head for a
branch, then the not used tag shown below should be removed.
Example
CUH FILE..............................CUHFN.....................................
Br 1
cuh_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
C-255
CONTROL FILE
External Downstream Head Filename (EDH FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
EDHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
External downstream head filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch external downstream heads. There must be a separate
file for each branch. More information on data setup can be found at the description of the downstream head file. The not used tag at the end of the filename is useful when looking at the
echoing of input filenames in the preprocessor output and can alert the user to an input option
that is or is not being used. If there is an external head for a branch, then the not used tag
shown below should be removed.
Example
EDH FILE..............................EDHFN.....................................
Br 1
edh_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
edh_br4.npt
C-256
CONTROL FILE
External Downstream Head Temperature Filename (TDH

FILE)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TDHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
External downstream head temperature filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch external downstream head vertical temperatures.
description of the downstream head temperature file. The not used tag at the end of the
Example
TDH FILE..............................TDHFN.....................................
Br 1
tdh_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
tdh_br4.npt
C-257
CONTROL FILE
External Downstream Head Concentration Filename

(CDH FILE)
FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CDHFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
External downstream had concentration filename
This card specifies the filename(s) for branch external downstream head constituent concentrations.
description of the downstream head concentration file. The not used tag at the end of the
Example
CDH FILE..............................CDHFN.....................................
Br 1
cdh_br1.npt - not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
cdh_br4.npt
C-258
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT FILENAMES
Snapshot Filename (SNP FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SNPFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Snapshot filename
This card specifies the snapshot filename(s).

Example
SNP FILE..............................SNPFN.....................................
Wb 1
snp_wb1.opt
Wb 2
snp_wb2.opt
Wb 3
snp_wb3.opt
C-259
OUTPUT FILENAMES
CONTROL FILE
Profile Plot Filename (PRF FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
PRFFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Profile plot filename
This card specifies the vertical profile plot filename(s).

Example
PRF FILE..............................PRFFN.....................................
Wb 1
prf_wb1.opt
Wb 2
prf_wb2.opt
Wb 3
prf_wb3.opt
C-260
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT FILENAMES
W2 Linkage Output Filename (VPL FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
VPLFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Vector plot filename
Before version 3.71, this card specified the velocity vector plot filename(s). This card now specifies
the W2 lnkage file used in the w2-Post post-processor. Only the first file name for the first waterbody is used in the model. The post-processor is looking for a file with a file type: w2l.
Example
VPL FILE..............................VPLFN.....................................
Wb 1
w2_post_output.w2l
Wb 2
vpl_wb2.opt
Wb 3
vpl_wb3.opt
C-261
OUTPUT FILENAMES
CONTROL FILE
Contour Plot Filename (CPL FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
CPLFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Contour plot filename
This card specifies the contour plot filename(s).

Example
CPL FILE..............................CPLFN.....................................
Wb 1
cpl_wb1.opt
Wb 2
cpl_wb2.opt
Wb 3
cpl_wb3.opt
C-262
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT FILENAMES
Spreadsheet Profile Plot Filename (SPR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
SPRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Spreadsheet plot filename
This card specifies the spreadsheet profile output filename(s). Output from this file is suitable for
import into a spreadsheet or graphics package that uses a spreadsheet format for data management.
Example
SPR FILE..............................SPRFN.....................................
Wb 1
spr_wb1.opt
Wb 2
spr_wb2.opt
Wb 3
spr_wb3.opt
C-263
OUTPUT FILENAMES
CONTROL FILE
Flux Filename (FLX FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
FLXFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Flux filename
This card specifies the kinetic fluxes filename(s). Output from this file is suitable for import into
a spreadsheet or graphics package that uses a spreadsheet format for data management.
Example
FLX FILE..............................FLXFN.....................................
Wb 1
flx_wb1.opt
Wb 2
flx_wb2.opt
Wb 3
flx_wb3.opt
C-264
CONTROL FILE
OUTPUT FILENAMES
Time Series Plot Filename (TSR FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
TSRFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Time series plot filename
This card specifies the time series plot filename(s).

Example
TSR FILE..............................TSRFN.....................................
tsr.opt
C-265
OUTPUT FILENAMES
CONTROL FILE
Withdrawal Output Filename (WDO FILE)

FIELD
1
2-10
NAME
VALUE
WDOFN
Character
DESCRIPTION
(Ignored by code)
Withdrawal output filename
This card specifies the withdrawal output filename(s).

Example
WDO FILE..............................WDOFN.....................................
wdo.opt
C-266
CONTROL FILE
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
Sample Control Input File

Spokane River/Long Lake Model Version 3.7
TITLE C
Card 1
Card 2
Card 3
Card 4
Card 5
Card 6
Card 7
Card 8
Card 9
Card 10
................................TITLE..................................
Version 3.5 Spokane River/Long Lake application
WB 1 - Sloping branches between State line and Upriver Pool
WB 2 - Pool of Upriver DAm
Wb 3 - Pool of Upper Falls Dam
WB 4 - 2 sloping branches above 9-mile dam pool
WB 5 - Nine Mile dam pool
WB 6 - Long Lake
Scott Wells, PSU
Rob Annear, PSU; Chris Berger, PSU
Tom Cole, WES
GRID
NWB
6
NBR
12
IMX
189
KMX
47
NPROC
2
CLOSEC
OFF
IN/OUTFLOW
NTR
7
NST
7
NIW
0
NWD
0
NGT
0
NSP
6
NPI
0
CONSTITU
NGC
3
NSS
1
NAL
3
NEP
1
NBOD
1
NMC
0
NZP
1
MISCELL
TIME CON
NPU
0
NDAY SELECTC HABTATC ENVIRPC AERATEC INITUWL

100
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
TMSTRT
1.0402
TMEND
303.89
YEAR
2000
DLT CON
NDLT
6
DLT DATE
DLTD
1.00
DLTD
1.2
DLTD
172.0
DLTD
225.0
DLTD
231.0
DLTD
251.0
DLTD
DLTD
DLTD
DLT MAX
DLTMAX
5.0
DLTMAX
65.0
DLTMAX
10.0
DLTMAX
10.0
DLTMAX
5.0
DLTMAX
10.0
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLTMAX
DLT FRN
DLTF
0.90
DLTF
0.90
DLTF
0.90
DLTF
0.90
DLTF
0.90
DLTF
0.90
DLTF
DLTF
DLTF
DLT LIMIT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
VISC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CELC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
BRANCH G
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
US
2
13
27
39
51
67
76
89
97
131
138
154
DS
10
24
36
48
64
73
86
94
128
135
151
188
UHS
0
10
24
36
0
-64
73
-86
94
0
135
-151
DHS
13
27
39
0
0
76
0
97
0
138
0
0
UQB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DQB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SLOPE
0.00181
0.00152
0.00328
0.00142
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00256
0.00208
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
SLOPEC
0.00181
0.00100
0.00200
0.00142
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00150
0.00100
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
C-267
DLTMIN DLTINTR
0.1
ON
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
CONTROL FILE
LOCATION
WB 1
WB 2
WB 3
WB 4
WB 5
WB 6
LAT
47.8
47.8
47.8
47.8
47.8
47.8
LONG
117.8
117.8
117.8
117.8
117.8
117.8
EBOT
578.72
571.00
560.00
485.51
481.00
422.10
BS
1
5
6
8
10
12
BE
4
5
7
9
11
12
JBDN
4
5
7
9
11
12
INIT CND
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
T2I
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
ICEI
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
WTYPEC
FRESH
FRESH
FRESH
FRESH
FRESH
FRESH
GRIDC
RECT
RECT
RECT
RECT
RECT
RECT
CALCULAT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
VBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
EBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
MBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PQC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EVC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DEAD SEA
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
WINDC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
QINC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
QOUTC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
HEATC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INTERPOL
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
QINIC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DTRIC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HDIC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
HEAT EXCH
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SLHTC
TERM
TERM
TERM
TERM
TERM
TERM
SROC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RHEVAP
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
METIC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
FETCHC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AFW
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
BFW
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
CFW
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
ICE COVER
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
ICEC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SLICEC
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
ALBEDO
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
HWICE
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
BICE
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
GICE
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
ICEMIN
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
ICET2
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
WINDH
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
C-268
CONTROL FILE
TRANSPORT SLTRC
Wb 1
ULTIMATE
Wb 2
ULTIMATE
Wb 3
ULTIMATE
Wb 4
ULTIMATE
Wb 5
ULTIMATE
Wb 6
ULTIMATE
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

THETA
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
HYD COEF
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
AX
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
DX
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
CBHE
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
TSED
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
FI
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
EDDY VISC
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
AZC
W2N
W2
W2
W2N
W2
W2
AZSLC
IMP
IMP
IMP
IMP
IMP
IMP
AZMAX
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
FBC
3
3
3
3
3
3
E
9.535
9.535
9.535
9.535
9.535
9.535
ARODI STRCKLR BOUNDFR

0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
0.430
24.0
10.00
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
STRIC
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
KTSTR
N STRUC
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
BRr 12
FRICC
MANN
MANN
MANN
MANN
MANN
MANN
Z0
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
TKECAL
IMP
IMP
IMP
IMP
IMP
IMP
NSTR DYNELEV
0
OFF
0
OFF
0
OFF
0
OFF
2
OFF
0
OFF
2
ON
0
OFF
0
OFF
0
OFF
2
OFF
1
OFF
STR INT
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
STRIC
STRIC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
STR TOP
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
KTSTR
KTSTR
2
2
C-269
TSEDF
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

STR BOT
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
KBSTR
KBSTR
41
41
38
38
39
46
39
STR SINK
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
SINKC
SINKC
POINT
LINE
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
STR ELEV
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
ESTR
ESTR
579.5
577.1
565.15
567.25
485.0
456.9
489.0
STR WIDTH
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
WSTR
WSTR
PIPES
Pi 1
IUPI
24
PIPE UP
Pi 1
PIPE DOWN
Pi 1
CONTROL FILE
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
KBSTR
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
SINKC
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
ESTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
WSTR
IDPI
28
EUPI
28.0
EDPI
27.0
WPI
0.5
DLXPI
230.0
FPI
0.065
FMINPI
0.1
PUPIC
DISTR
ETUPI
EBUPI
KTUPI
2
KBUPI
23
PDPIC
DISTR
ETDPI
EBDPI
KTDPI
2
KBDPI
23
70.0
LATPIC DYNPIPE
DOWN
ON
C-270
CONTROL FILE
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
SPILLWAY
Spill 1
Spill 2
Spill 3
Spill 4
Spill 5
Spill 6
IUSP
64
86
151
188
48
128
IDSP
67
89
154
0
51
131
A2SP
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
30.00
30.00
B2SP
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
LATSPC
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
SPILL UP
Spill1
Spill2
Spill3
Spill4
Spill5
Spill6
PUSPC
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
ETUSP
EBUSP
KTUSP
2
2
2
2
2
2
KBUSP
41
38
39
46
45
46
SPILL DOWN
Spill1
Spill2
Spill3
Spill4
Spill5
Spill6
PDSPC
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
DISTR
ETDSP
EBDSP
KTDSP
2
2
2
2
2
2
KBDSP
36
45
6
46
43
39
SPILL GAS
Spill1
Spill2
Spill3
Spill4
Spill5
Spill6
GASSP
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EQSP
ASP
BSP
CSP
GATES
Gt 1
IUGT
27
IDGT
33
EGT
44.0
A1GT
10.00
B1GT
1.0
G1GT
1.0
A2GT
10.0
B2GT
2.5
GATE WEIR
Gt 1
GA1
10.0
GB1
1.5
GA2
10.0
GB2
1.5
DYNGTC
B
GTIC
ON
GATE UP
Gt 1
PUGTC
DISTR
ETUGT
EBUGT
KTUGT
3
KBUGT
23
GATE DOWN
Gt 1
PDGTC
DISTR
ETDGT
EBDGT
KTDGT
3
KBDGT
23
GATE GAS
Gt 1
GASGT
ON
EQGT
1
AGASG
10.0
BGASG
120.00
PUMPS 1
Pu 1
IUPU
30
IDPU
33
EPU
2.4
STRTPU
1.0
ENDPU
900.0
EONPU
3.0
EOFFPU
2.4
QPU
3.0
PUMPS 2
Pu 1
PPUC
DISTR
ETPU
EBPU
KTPU
4
KBPU
23
WEIR SEG
IWR
27
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
IWR
WEIR TOP
KTWR
9
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
KTWR
WEIR BOT
KBWR
23
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
KBWR
WD INT
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WDIC
WD SEG
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
IWD
C-271
ESP
A1SP
592.14 10000.0
580.14 7000.0
497.00 10000.0
469.00 20000.0
579.80
80.00
486.50
60.00
B1SP
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
G2GT
0.0
LATGTC
DOWN
CGASG
1.0
LATPUC DYNPUMP
DOWN
OFF
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
CONTROL FILE
WD ELEV
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
EWD
WD TOP
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
ETWD
WD BOT
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
EBWD
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
DISTR
PTRC
PTRC
TRIB INT
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
OFF
TRIC
TRIC
TRIB SEG
ITR
15
ITR
43
ITR
56
ITR
98
ITR
114
ITR
147
ITR
155
ITR
ITR
TRIB TOP
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
ETRT
TRIB BOT
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
ETRB
DST TRIB
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
DTRC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
HPRWBC
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
SNPD
TRIB PLACE
HYD PRINT HPRWBC

NVIOL
ON
U
ON
W
ON
T
ON
RHO
OFF
AZ
OFF
SHEAR
OFF
ST
OFF
SB
OFF
ADMX
OFF
DM
OFF
HDG
OFF
ADMZ
OFF
HPG
OFF
GRAV
OFF
SNP PRINT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SNPC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NSNP
2
2
2
2
2
2
NISNP
16
8
3
6
5
6
SNP DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
SNPD
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
SNPD
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
SNPD
C-272
CONTROL FILE
Wb 5
Wb 6
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
1.0
1.0
1.6
1.6
SNP FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SNPF
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
SNPF
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNPF
SNP SEG
Wb 1
ISNP
2
42
51
84
89
131
154
ISNP
10
43
53
85
90
138
155
ISNP
13
44
55
86
92
139
156
ISNP
24
45
57
ISNP
27
46
59
ISNP
36
47
61
ISNP
39
48
63
ISNP
40
ISN
41
122
148
175
123
151
187
124
SCR PRINT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SCRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
NSCR
1
1
1
1
1
1
SCR DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SCRD
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCRD
SCR FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SCRF
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
SCRF
PRF PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
PRFC
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
NPRF
0
12
0
0
12
12
NIPRF
0
4
0
0
6
7
PRF DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
PRFD
158.5
257.5
179.5
270.5
200.5
271.5
228.5
229.5
242.5
244.5
245.5
249.5
158.5
257.0
158.67
257.67
179.5
270.0
179.67
270.67
200.5
271.0
200.67
271.67
228.5
229.5
242.5
244.5
245.5
249.5
228.67
229.67
242.67
244.67
245.67
249.67
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
PRFF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
2
3
4
5
6
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
PRF FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
64
188
Wb 3
C-273
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

Wb 4
Wb 5
CONTROL FILE
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
PRF SEG
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
IPRF
57
60
62
64
135
157
139
161
141
168
143
174
147
180
150
183
187
SPR PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SPRC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NSPR
0
0
0
0
0
0
NISPR
0
0
0
0
0
0
SPR DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPRD
SPR FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPRF
SPR SEG
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
ISPR
VPL PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
VPLC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NVPL
1
1
1
1
1
1
VPL DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
VPLD
63.5
63.5
63.5
63.5
63.5
63.5
VPLD
VPLD
VPLD
VPLD
VPLD
VPLD
VPLD
VPLD
VPL FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
VPLF
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
VPLF
VPLF
VPLF
VPLF
VPLF
VPLF
VPLF
VPLF
Wb 6
C-274
CONTROL FILE
Wb 6
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
1.0
CPL PLOT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
CPLC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPL DATE
Wb 1
CPLD
9.67
215.5
270.6
9.67
215.5
270.6
9.67
215.5
270.6
9.67
215.5
270.6
9.67
215.5
270.6
9.67
215.5
270.6
CPLD
37.67
219.75
271.4
37.67
219.75
271.4
37.67
219.75
271.4
37.67
219.75
271.4
37.67
219.75
271.4
37.67
219.75
271.4
CPLD
72.75
228.4
271.6
72.75
228.4
271.6
72.75
228.4
271.6
72.75
228.4
271.6
72.75
228.4
271.6
72.75
228.4
271.6
CPLD
100.6
228.6
284.4
100.6
228.6
284.4
100.6
228.6
284.4
100.6
228.6
284.4
100.6
228.6
284.4
100.6
228.6
284.4
CPLD
128.67
229.4
319.35
128.67
229.4
319.35
128.67
229.4
319.35
128.67
229.4
319.35
128.67
229.4
319.35
128.67
229.4
319.35
CPLD
163.75
229.6
347.35
163.75
229.6
347.35
163.75
229.6
347.35
163.75
229.6
347.35
163.75
229.6
347.35
163.75
229.6
347.35
CPLD
187.6
251.5
CPLD
191.6
254.75
CPLD
208.4
270.4
187.6
251.5
191.6
254.75
208.4
270.4
187.6
251.5
191.6
254.75
208.4
270.4
187.6
251.5
191.6
254.75
208.4
270.4
187.6
251.5
191.6
254.75
208.4
270.4
187.6
251.5
191.6
254.75
208.4
270.4
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
CPLF
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
FLUXES
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
FLXC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NFLX
0
0
0
0
0
0
FLX DATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLXD
FLX FREQ
Wb 1
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
FLXF
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
CPL FREQ
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
C-275
NCPL TECPLOT
24
OFF
24
OFF
24
OFF
24
OFF
24
OFF
24
OFF
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
CONTROL FILE
2
3
4
5
6
TSR PLOT
TSRC
ON
NTSR
1
NIKTSR
30
TSR DATE
TSRD
1.0
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSRD
TSR FREQ
TSRF
0.1
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSRF
TSR SEG
ITSR
2
86
150
188
ITSR
13
89
151
128
ITSR
17
94
154
131
ITSR
24
97
155
ITSR
36
106
161
ITSR
48
114
168
ITSR
64
119
174
ITSR
67
135
180
ITSR
73
141
181
TSR ELEV
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
ETSR
0.1
0.1
0.1
WITH OUT
WDOC
ON
NWDO
1
NIWDO
7
WITH DATE
WDOD
1.0
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WITH FREQ
WDOF
0.1
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WITH SEG
IWDO
64
IWDO
86
IWDO
151
IWDO
188
IWDO
13
IWDO
24
IWDO
97
IWDO
IWDO
RESTART
RSOC
OFF
NRSO
0
RSIC
OFF
RSO DATE
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSOD
RSO FREQ
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
RSOF
CST COMP
CCC
ON
LIMC
ON
CUF
10
C-276
CONTROL FILE
CST ACTIVE
TDS
AGE
TRACER
COLIFORM
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
ISS
PO4
NH4
NOX
DSI
PSI
TFE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBOD-P 1
CBOD-P 2
CBOD-P 3
CBOD-P 4
CBOD-P 5
CBOD-N 1
CBOD-N 2
CBOD-N 3
CBOD-N 4
CBOD-N 5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CST DERIV
DOC
POC
TOC
DON
PON
TON
TKN
TN
DOP
POP
TOP
TP
APR
CHLA
ATOT
%DO
TSS
TISS
CBODU
pH
C-277
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
CAC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CDWBC
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
!10
!11
!12
!13
!14
!15
!16
!17
!18
!19
!20
!21
!22
!23
!24
!25
!26
!27
!28
!29
!30
!31
!32
!33
!34
!35
!36
zooplankton group 1
CDWBC
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CDWBC
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CDWBC
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CDWBC
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CDWBC
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CDWBC
CDWBC
CDWBC
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
!10
!11
!12
!13
!14
!15
!16
!17
!18
!19
!20
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

CO2
HCO3
CO3
CST FLUX
TISSIN
TISSOUT
PO4AR
PO4AG
PO4AP
PO4ER
PO4EG
PO4EP
PO4POM
PO4DOM
PO4OM
PO4SED
PO4SOD
PO4SET
NH4NITR
NH4AR
NH4AG
NH4AP
NH4ER
NH4EG
NH4EP
NH4POM
NH4DOM
NH4OM
NH4SED
NH4SOD
NO3DEN
NO3AG
NO3EG
NO3SED
DSIAG
DSIEG
DSIPIS
DSISED
DSISOD
DSISET
PSIAM
PSINET
PSIDK
FESET
FESED
LDOMDK
LRDOM
RDOMDK
LDOMAP
LDOMEP
LPOMDK
LRPOM
RPOMDK
LPOMAP
LPOMEP
LPOMSET
RPOMSET
CBODDK
DOAP
DOAR
DOEP
DOER
DOPOM
DODOM
DOOM
DONITR
DOCBOD
CONTROL FILE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CFWBC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!21
!22
!23
CFWBC
CFWBC
CFWBC
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
!10
!11
!12
!13
!14
!15
!16
!17
!18
!19
!20
!21
!22
!23
!24
!25
!26
!27
!28
!29
!30
!31
!32
!33
!34
!35
!36
!37
!38
!39
!40
!41
!42
!43
!44
!45
!46
!47
!48
!49
!50
!51
!52
!53
!54
!55
!56
!57
!58
!59
!60
!61
!62
!63
C-278
CONTROL FILE
DOREAR
DOSED
DOSOD
TICAG
TICEG
SEDDK
SEDAS
SEDLPOM
SEDSET
SODDK
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C2IWB
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.03
0.01
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
12.0
5.0
19.8
0.1000
0.0005
0.0005
0.0005
0.0005
0.0080
0.0080
0.0080
0.0080
C2IWB
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.03
0.01
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
12.0
5.0
19.8
0.10
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.080
0.080
0.080
0.080
C2IWB
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.03
0.01
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
12.0
5.0
19.8
0.10
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.080
0.080
0.080
0.080
C2IWB
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.03
0.01
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
12.0
5.0
19.8
0.10
0.0005
0.0005
0.0005
0.0005
0.0080
0.0005
0.0080
0.0080
C2IWB
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.03
0.01
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
12.0
5.0
19.8
0.10
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.080
0.080
0.080
0.080
C2IWB
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.03
0.01
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
12.0
5.0
19.8
0.10
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.080
0.080
0.080
0.080
C2IWB
CST PRINT CPRWBC

TDS
ON
AGE
ON
TRACER
ON
COLIFORM
ON
CONDUCT
ON
CHLORIDE
ON
ISS
ON
PO4
ON
NH4
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRWBC
CST ICON
TDS
AGE
TRACER
COL1
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
ISS
PO4
NH4
NOX
DSI
PSI
TFE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBODP1
CBODP2
CBODP3
CBODP4
CBODP5
CBODN1
CBODN2
CBODN3
CBODN4
CBODN5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
C-279
!64
!65
!66
!67
!68
!69
!70
!71
!72
!73
C2IWB
C2IWB
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
!10
!11
!12
!13
!14
!15
!16
!17
!18
!19
!20
!21
!22
!23
!24
!25
!26
!27
!28
!29
!30
!31
!32
!33
!34
!35
!36
!37
!38
!39
!40
!41
!42
!43
!44
!45
CPRWBC
CPRWBC
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

NOX
DSI
PSI
TFE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBODP1
CBODP2
CBODP3
CBODP4
CBODP5
CBODN1
CBODN2
CBODN3
CBODN4
CBODN5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CIN CON
TDS
AGE
TRACER
COLIFORM
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
ISS
PO4
NH4
NOX
DSI
PSI
TFE
LDOM
RDOM
CONTROL FILE
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CINBRC
ON
CINBRC
ON
CINBRC
ON
CINBRC
ON
CINBRC
ON
CINBRC
ON
!1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!9
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!10
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!11
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!12
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!13
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!14
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!15
!10
!11
!12
!13
!14
!15
!16
!17
!18
!19
!20
!21
!22
!18
!19
!20
!21
!22
!35
!36
!37
!38
!39
!40
!41
!42
!43
!44
!45
C-280
CONTROL FILE
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBODP1
CBODP2
CBODP3
CBODP4
CBODP5
CBODN1
CBODN2
CBODN3
CBODN4
CBODN5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CTR CON
TDS
AGE
TRACER
COLIFORM
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
C-281
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!16
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!17
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!18
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!19
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!20
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!21
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!22
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!23
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!24
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!25
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!26
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!27
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!28
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!29
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!30
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!31
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!32
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!33
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!34
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!35
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!36
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!37
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!38
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!39
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!40
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!41
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!42
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!43
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!44
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!45
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CTRTRC
CTRTRC
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

ISS
PO4
NH4
NOx
DSi
PSi
TFe
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBODP1
CBODP2
CBODP3
CBODP4
CBODP5
CBODN1
CBODN2
CBODN3
CBODN4
CBODN5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CDT CON
TDS
AGE
TRACER
COLIFORM
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
ISS
PO4
NH4
NOX
DSI
PSI
TFE
LDOM
CONTROL FILE
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CDTBRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CDTBRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CDTBRC
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CDTBRC
ON
CDTBRC
ON
CDTBRC
ON
CDTBRC
ON
CDTBRC
ON
CDTBRC
ON
!1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!9
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!10
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!11
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!12
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!13
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!14
!7
!8
!9
!10
!11
!12
!13
!14
!15
!16
!17
!18
!19
!20
!21
!22
!23
!24
!25
!26
!27
!28
!29
!30
!31
!32
!33
!34
!35
!36
!37
!38
!39
!40
!41
!42
!43
!44
!45
C-282
CONTROL FILE
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBODP1
CBODP2
CBODP3
CBODP4
CBODP5
CBODN1
CBODN2
CBODN3
CBODN4
CBODN5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
CPR CON
TDS
AGE
C-283
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CPRBRC
ON
ON
OFF
CPRBRC
ON
ON
OFF
CPRBRC
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!16
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!17
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!18
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!19
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!20
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!21
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!22
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!23
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!24
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!25
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!26
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!27
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!28
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!29
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!30
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!31
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!32
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!33
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!34
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!35
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!36
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!37
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!38
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!39
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!40
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!41
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!42
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!43
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!44
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!45
CPRBRC
ON
CPRBRC
ON
CPRBRC
ON
CPRBRC
ON
CPRBRC
ON
CPRBRC
ON
!1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!2
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
TRACER
COLIFORM
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
ISS1
PO4
NH4
NOx
DSI
PSI
TFE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
CBOD 1
CBOD 2
CBOD 3
CBOD 4
CBOD 5
CBODP1
CBODP2
CBODP3
CBODP4
CBODP5
CBODN1
CBODN2
CBODN3
CBODN4
CBODN5
ALGAE
DO
TIC
ALK
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
CONTROL FILE
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!9
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!10
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!11
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!12
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
!13
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!14
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!16
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!17
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!18
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!19
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!20
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!21
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!22
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!23
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!24
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!25
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!26
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!27
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!28
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!29
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!30
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!31
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!32
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!33
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!34
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!35
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!36
C-284
CONTROL FILE
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
EXH2O
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
EXSS
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
ALG EX
EXA
0.10
ZOO EX
ZOO1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!37
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!38
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!39
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!40
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!41
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!42
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!43
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!44
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
!45
EXOM
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
BETA
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
EXC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EXIC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EXA
0.2
EXA
0.2
EXA
0.2
EXA
0.2
EXA
0.2
EXZ
0.2
EXZ
0.2
EXZ
0.2
EXZ
EXZ
EXZ
MACRO EX
EXM
0.0100
EXM
EXM
EXM
EXM
EXM
GENERIC
AGE
TRACER
COLIFORM
CONDUCT
CHLORIDE
CGQ10
0.00
0.00
1.04
0.00
0.00
CG0DK
-1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CG1DK
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.0
0.0
CGS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
S SOLIDS
SSS 1
SSS
1.5
SEDRC
OFF
TAUCR
0.0
ALGAL RATE
Alg 1
AG
2.0
AR
0.12
AE
0.02
AM
0.05
AS
0.04
AHSP
0.005
AHSN
0.005
AHSSI
0.0
ASAT
50.0
ALGAL TEMP
Alg 1
AT1
5.0
AT2
12.0
AT3
20.0
AT4
30.0
AK1
0.1
AK2
0.99
AK3
0.99
AK4
0.1
ALG STOICH ALGP

Alg 1
0.005
ALGN
0.08
ALGC
0.45
ALGSI
0.00
ACHLA
0.0500
APOM
0.8
ANEQN
2
ANPR
0.001
EPIPHYTE
Epi 1
EPIC
ON
EPIC
ON
EPIC
ON
EPIC
ON
EPIC
ON
EPIC
ON
EPIC
EPIC
EPIC
EPI PRINT
Epi 1
EPRC
ON
EPRC
ON
EPRC
ON
EPRC
ON
EPRC
ON
EPRC
ON
EPRC
EPRC
EPRC
EPI INIT
Epi 1
EPICI
20.0
EPICI
-1.0
EPICI
-1.0
EPICI
20.0
EPICI
-1.0
EPICI
-1.0
EPICI
EPICI
EPICI
EPI RATE
Epi 1
EG
1.7
ER
0.05
EE
0.02
EM
0.05
EB
0.05
EHSP
0.002
EHSN
0.004
EHSSI
0.0
LDOM_P
RDOM_P
LPOM_P
RPOM_P
LDOM_N
RDOM_N
LPOM_N
RPOM_N
EX
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
COEF
1
2
3
4
5
6
C-285
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
CONTROL FILE
EPI HALF
Epi 1
ESAT
150.00
EHS
40.0
ENEQN
2
ENPR
0.001
EPI TEMP
Epi 1
ET1
2.0
ET2
5.0
ET3
20.0
ET4
30.0
EK1
0.1
EK2
0.99
EPI STOICH
EP
Epi 1
0.005
EN
0.08
EC
0.45
ESI
0.0
ECHLA
65.0
EPOM
0.8
ZOOP RATE
Zoo1
ZG
1.50
ZR
0.10
ZM
0.010
ZEFF
0.50
PREFP
0.50
ZOOMIN
0.0100
ZS2P
0.30
ZOOP ALGP
Zoo1
PREFA
1.00
PREFA
0.50
PREFA
0.50
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
PREFA
ZOOP ZOOP
Zoo1
PREFZ
0.00
PREFZ
0.00
PREFZ
0.00
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
PREFZ
ZOOP TEMP
ZT1
0.0
ZT2
15.0
ZT3
20.0
ZT4
36.0
ZK1
0.1
ZK2
0.9
ZK3
0.98
ZK4
0.100
EK3
0.99
EK4
0.1
ZOOP STOI
ZP
ZN
ZC
0.01500 0.08000 0.45000
MACROPHYT MACWBC
Mac1
ON
MACWBC
OFF
MACWBC
OFF
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MACWBC
MAC PRINT MPRWBC

Mac1
ON
MPRWBC
OFF
MPRWBC
OFF
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MPRWBC
MAC INI
Mac1
MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI MACWBCI

0.00000
0.1
0.5
MAC RATE
Mac 1
MG
0.30
MR
0.05
MAC SED
MAC 1
PSED
0.5
NSED
0.5
MAC DIST
Mac 1
MBMP
40.0
MMAX
500.0
MAC DRAG
Mac 1
MAC TEMP
Mac 1
CDDRAG
DWV
3.0 7.0E+04
MM
0.05
MSAT
30.0
DWSA
8.0
ANORM
0.3
MT4
34.0
MT1
7.0
MT2
15.0
MT3
24.0
MAC STOICH
MP
Mac 1
0.005
MN
0.08
MC
0.45
DOM
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
LDOMDK
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
RDOMDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
LRDDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
POM
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
LPOMDK
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
RPOMDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
LRPDK
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
MHSP
0.0
MHSN
0.0
MHSC
0.0
MPOM
0.9
MK1
0.1
MK2
0.99
MK3
0.99
MK4
0.01
LRPMAC
0.2
POMS
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
C-286
CONTROL FILE
OM
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
STOICH
1
2
3
4
5
6
OM
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
RATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
ORGP
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
ORGN
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
ORGC
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
ORGSI
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
OMT1
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
OMT2
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
OMK1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
OMK2
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
KBOD
0.0418
0.1302
0.0469
0.0880
0.050
TBOD
1.0147
1.0147
1.0147
1.0147
1.0147
RBOD
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
CBODS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CBODP
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
CBODN
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
CBODC
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
PHOSPHOR
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
PO4R
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
PARTP
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
AMMONIUM
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
NH4R
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
NH4DK
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
NH4 RATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
NH4T1
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
NH4T2
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
NITRATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
NO3DK
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
NO3 RATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
NO3T1
5.0
5.0
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
1
2
3
4
5
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
CBOD
STOIC
1
2
3
4
5
C-287
NH4K1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
NH4K2
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
NO3S FNO3SED
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
NO3T2
25.0
25.0
NO3K1
0.1
0.1
NO3K2
0.99
0.99
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

Wb
Wb
Wb
Wb
CONTROL FILE
3
4
5
6
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
SILICA
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
DSIR
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
PSIS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PSIDK
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
PARTSI
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
FEREL
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
FESETL
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
IRON
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SED CO2
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
CO2R
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
STOICH 1
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
O2NH4
4.570
4.570
4.570
4.570
4.570
4.570
O2OM
1.400
1.400
1.400
1.400
1.400
1.400
STOICH 2
Alg 1
O2AR
1.100
O2AG
1.400
STOICH 3
Epi 1
O2ER
1.100
O2EG
1.400
STOICH 4
O2ZR
ZOO1
1.10000
STOICH 5
MAC1
O2MR
1.1
O2MG
1.4
O2 LIMIT
O2LIM
0.1
SEDIMENT
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SEDC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PRNSC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEDCI
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
SEDK
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
SOD RATE
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
SODT1
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
SODT2
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
SODK1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
SODK2
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
SEDS
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
FSOD
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
FSED
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
SEDBR DYNSEDK
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF
0.001
OFF
C-288
CONTROL FILE
S DEMAND
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
REAERATION TYPE
Wb 1
RIVER
Wb 2
LAKE
Wb 3
LAKE
Wb 4
RIVER
Wb 5
LAKE
Wb 6
LAKE
EQN#
7
6
6
7
6
6
COEF1
COEF2
COEF3
COEF4
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
SOD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
RSI FILE...............................RSIFN....................................
rsi.npt
QWD FILE...............................QWDFN....................................
qwd.npt
QGT FILE...............................QGTFN....................................
qgt.npt
WSC FILE...............................WSCFN....................................
wsc.npt
SHD FILE...............................SHDFN....................................
shd.npt
BTH FILE...............................BTHFN....................................
Wb 1
bth_wb1.npt
Wb 2
bth_wb2.npt
Wb 3
bth_wb3.npt
Wb 4
bth_wb4.npt
Wb 5
bth_wb5.npt
Wb 6
bth_wb6.npt
MET FILE...............................METFN....................................
Wb 1
met_wb1.npt
Wb 2
met_wb2.npt
Wb 3
met_wb3.npt
Wb 4
met_wb4.npt
Wb 5
met_wb5.npt
Wb 6
met_wb6.npt
EXT FILE...............................EXTFN....................................
Wb 1
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
C-289
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

Wb 5
Wb 6
CONTROL FILE

VPR FILE...............................VPRFN....................................
Wb 1
vpr_wb1.npt
Wb 2
vpr_wb2.npt
Wb 3
vpr_wb3.npt
Wb 4
vpr_wb4.npt
Wb 5
vpr_wb5.npt
Wb 6
vpr_wb6.npt
LPR FILE...............................LPRFN....................................
Wb 1
lpr_wb1.npt - not used
Wb 2
Wb 3
Wb 4
Wb 5
Wb 6
QIN FILE...............................QINFN....................................
Br 1
qin_br1.npt
Br 2
qin_br2.npt not used
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
qin_br5.npt
Br 6
qin_br6.npt
Br 7
Br 8
qin_br8.npt
Br 9
Br 10
qin_br10.npt
Br 11
Br 12
qin_br12.npt
TIN FILE...............................TINFN....................................
Br 1
tin_br1.npt
Br 2
tin_br2.npt not used
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
tin_br5.npt
Br 6
tin_br6.npt
Br 7
Br 8
tin_br8.npt
Br 9
Br 10
tin_br10.npt
Br 11
Br 12
tin_br12.npt
CIN FILE...............................CINFN....................................
Br 1
cin_br1.npt
Br 2
cin_br2.npt not used
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
cin_br5.npt
Br 6
cin_br6.npt
Br 7
Br 8
cin_br8.npt
Br 9
Br 10
cin_br10.npt
Br 11
Br 12
cin_br12.npt
QOT FILE...............................QOTFN....................................
Br 1
qot_br1.npt not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
qot_br5.npt
Br 6
C-290
CONTROL FILE
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
7
8
9
10
11
12
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE
qot_br7.npt
qot_br11.npt
qot_br12.npt
QTR FILE...............................QTRFN....................................
Tr 1
qtr_tr1.npt
Tr 2
qtr_tr2.npt
Tr 3
qtr_tr3.npt
Tr 4
qtr_tr4.npt
Tr 5
qtr_tr5.npt
Tr 6
qtr_tr6.npt
Tr 7
qtr_tr7.npt
TTR FILE...............................TTRFN....................................
Tr 1
ttr_tr1.npt
Tr 2
ttr_tr2.npt
Tr 3
ttr_tr3.npt
Tr 4
ttr_tr4.npt
Tr 5
ttr_tr5.npt
Tr 6
ttr_tr6.npt
Tr 7
ttr_tr7.npt
CTR FILE...............................CTRFN....................................
Tr 1
ctr_tr1.npt
Tr 2
ctr_tr2.npt
Tr 3
ctr_tr3.npt
Tr 4
ctr_tr4.npt
Tr 5
ctr_tr5.npt
Tr 6
ctr_tr6.npt
Tr 7
ctr_tr7.npt
QDT FILE...............................QDTFN....................................
Br 1
qdt_br1.npt
Br 2
qdt_br2.npt
Br 3
qdt_br3.npt
Br 4
qdt_br4.npt
Br 5
qdt_br5.npt
Br 6
qdt_br6.npt
Br 7
qdt_br7.npt
Br 8
qdt_br8.npt
Br 9
qdt_br9.npt
Br 10
qdt_br10.npt
Br 11
qdt_br11.npt
Br 12
qdt_br12.npt
TDT FILE...............................TDTFN....................................
Br 1
tdt_br1.npt
Br 2
tdt_br2.npt
Br 3
tdt_br3.npt
Br 4
tdt_br4.npt
Br 5
tdt_br5.npt
Br 6
tdt_br6.npt
Br 7
tdt_br7.npt
Br 8
tdt_br8.npt
Br 9
tdt_br9.npt
Br 10
tdt_br10.npt
Br 11
tdt_br11.npt
Br 12
tdt_br12.npt
CDT FILE...............................CDTFN....................................
Br 1
cdt_br1.npt
Br 2
cdt_br2.npt
Br 3
cdt_br3.npt
Br 4
cdt_br4.npt
Br 5
cdt_br5.npt
C-291
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CONTROL FILE
cdt_br6.npt
cdt_br7.npt
cdt_br8.npt
cdt_br9.npt
cdt_br10.npt
cdt_br11.npt
cdt_br12.npt
PRE FILE...............................PREFN....................................
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
TPR FILE...............................TPRFN....................................
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
CPR FILE...............................CPRFN....................................
Br 1
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
EUH FILE...............................EUHFN....................................
Br 1
euh_br1.npt not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
TUH FILE...............................TUHFN....................................
Br 1
tuh_br1.npt not used
Br 2
C-292
CONTROL FILE
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
Br
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

CUH FILE...............................CUHFN....................................
Br 1
cuh_br1.npt not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
EDH FILE...............................EDHFN....................................
Br 1
edh_br1.npt not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
TDH FILE...............................TDHFN....................................
Br 1
tdh_br1.npt not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
CDH FILE...............................CDHFN....................................
Br 1
cdh_br1.npt not used
Br 2
Br 3
Br 4
Br 5
Br 6
Br 7
Br 8
Br 9
Br 10
Br 11
Br 12
SNP FILE...............................SNPFN....................................
C-293
SAMPLE CONTROL FILE

WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
1
2
3
4
5
6
CONTROL FILE
snp_wb1.opt
snp_wb2.opt
snp_wb3.opt
snp_wb4.opt
snp_wb5.opt
snp_wb6.opt
PRF FILE...............................PRFFN....................................
WB 1
prf_wb1.opt
WB 2
prf_wb2.opt
WB 3
prf_wb3.opt
WB 4
prf_wb4.opt
WB 5
prf_wb5.opt
WB 6
prf_wb6.opt
VPL FILE...............................VPLFN....................................
WB 1
vpl_wb1.opt
WB 2
vpl_wb2.opt
WB 3
vpl_wb3.opt
WB 4
vpl_wb4.opt
WB 5
vpl_wb5.opt
WB 6
vpl_wb6.opt
CPL FILE...............................CPLFN....................................
WB 1
cpl_wb1.opt
WB 2
cpl_wb2.opt
WB 3
cpl_wb3.opt
WB 4
cpl_wb4.opt
WB 5
cpl_wb5.opt
WB 6
cpl_wb6.opt
SPR FILE...............................SPRFN....................................
WB 1
spr_wb1.opt
WB 2
spr_wb2.opt
WB 3
spr_wb3.opt
WB 4
spr_wb4.opt
WB 5
spr_wb5.opt
WB 6
spr_wb6.opt
FLX FILE...............................KFLFN....................................
WB 1
kfl_wb1.opt
WB 2
kfl_wb2.opt
WB 3
kfl_wb3.opt
WB 4
kfl_wb4.opt
WB 5
kfl_wb5.opt
WB 6
kfl_wb6.opt
TSR FILE...............................TSRFN....................................
tsr.opt
WDO FILE...............................WDOFN....................................
wdo.opt
C-294
INPUT FILES
BATHYMETRY
Bathymetry File
The bathymetry file(s) contains information specifying the segment lengths, water surface elevations, segment orientations, bottom friction, and layer heights for each segment, and average widths
for each grid cell. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation are shown below.
1. It is recommended the user number the branches starting with the mainstem as
branch 1. The remaining branch numbers should be numbered consecutively starting with the most upstream branch followed by the remaining branches as one moves
downstream.
2. Each branch is surrounded by a segment of boundary cells (cells with zero widths)
on both the upstream and downstream ends. Note this requirement results in two
segments of zero widths between each branch.
3. Boundary cells must also be included at the top and bottom of each segment.
4. Cell widths start at layer 1 and continue to the maximum number of layers [KMX].
The number of layers specified in this file must match the value of [KMX] in the
control file.
5. Only cells that are potentially active have non-zero widths. The first layer, boundary
segment cells, and cells below the reservoir bottom elevation at a given segment
have zero widths.
6. A separate bathymetry file is required for each waterbody.
7. The segment angles are relative to N. Figure 48 shows an example of segment orientation.
Segment Orientation
North
i-1
W2 Segments
2
i
Segments oriented from East to West

Would have an angle of 2
i+1
Figure 48. Illustration of segment angle orientation.
C-295
BATHYMETRY
INPUT FILES
For the older bathymetry file format (the newer format is discussed below), the following
additional guidelines must be followed:
1. The first three lines are ignored and can be used to comment the input file.
2. Segment lengths, water surface elevations, segment orientations, layer heights, and
cell widths at each segment are preceded by two lines that are ignored. They can be
used to comment each individual segment's bathymetry.
3. Input format for each cell width is F8.0 with 10 cell widths per line.
4. If there are more cell widths than can fit on one line, then they are continued immediately on the next line.
The following bathymetry files illustrate an example for a three-waterbody system with four
branches involving a two-branch river system where the branches are connected in series with different bottom slopes, a reservoir, and an estuary. An alternate bathymetry input format is available
since Version 3.7. The next section describes this new format that can be more easily developed in
a spreadsheet using a comma delimeted file format.
Example 3 separate input files:
File bth_wb1.npt:
Waterbody 1 bathymetry
Segment lengths (DLX]
1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00
1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00
Water surface elevation [WSEL]
49.80
49.20
48.00
46.80
42.72
42.48
42.24
42.00
45.60
41.80
44.40
43.20
44.40
43.20
42.96
Segment orientation [PHI0]

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Bottom friction [FRICTC]

0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
Layer heights [H]

2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
Segment 1 - branch 1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Segment 2 - branch
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
250.0
200.0
1
300.0
300.0
050.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 3 - branch
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
250.0
200.0
1
300.0
300.0
050.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
C-296
INPUT FILES
250.0
200.0
BATHYMETRY
050.0
0.0
Segment 5 - branch
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
250.0
200.0
1
300.0
300.0
050.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 6 - branch
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
250.0
200.0
1
300.0
300.0
050.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2
300.0
300.0
050.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 10
0.0
300.0
300.0
- branch 2
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
200.0
075.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 11
0.0
300.0
300.0
- branch 2
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
200.0
075.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 12
0.0
300.0
300.0
- branch 2
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
200.0
100.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 13
0.0
300.0
300.0
- branch 2
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
200.0
150.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
Segment 14
0.0
300.0
300.0
- branch 2
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
250.0
200.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Segment 9 - branch
0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
200.0
File bth_wb2.npt:
Segment length [DLX]
1200.0 1200.0 1200.0
1200.0 1200.0 1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
Water surface elevation [ELWS]

42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
C-297
BATHYMETRY
INPUT FILES
Segment orientation [PHI0]

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Bottom friction [MANN]

0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
Layer height [H]

2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
Width [B] - segment 16

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
300.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
300.0
0.0
0.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
0.0
300.0
0.0

0.0
350.0
350.0
350.0
350.0
350.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
350.0
350.0
0.0
350.0
0.0
350.0
0.0
350.0
0.0
350.0
0.0
350.0
0.0
350.0
0.0

0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0

0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0

0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0

0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
0.0

0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0

0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
0.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
0.0

0.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
600.0
600.0
0.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0

0.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
600.0
600.0
0.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
600.0
C-298
INPUT FILES
BATHYMETRY

0.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
0.0
0.0
700.0
700.0
0.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0
700.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
File bth_wb3.npt:
Width [B] - segment length [DLX]
1200.0 1200.0 1200.0 1200.0
1200.0 1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
1200.0
Water surface elevation [ELWS]

8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
Width [B] - segment orientation [PHI0]

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Bottom friction [MANN]

0.035
0.040
0.045
0.040
0.040
0.040
0.035
0.030
0.030
0.035
0.035
0.035
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
Layer height [H]

2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
C-299
BATHYMETRY
800.0
800.0
INPUT FILES
800.0
0.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
0.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0
800.0

0.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
0.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0
850.0

0.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
0.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
900.0
Width [B]
0.0
1000.0
1000.0
- segment 41
1000.0 1000.0
1000.0 1000.0
1000.0 1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
0.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
Width [B]
0.0
1100.0
1100.0
- segment 42
1100.0 1100.0
1100.0 1100.0
1100.0 1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
0.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0
1100.0

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
C-300
INPUT FILES
Comma Delimeted Bathymetry File Format

Starting in Version 3.7, the model user can input the bathymetry as a comma delimeted file (csv
format). This allows the user to assemble the file in a spreadsheet, such as Excel.
The new bathymetry format is shown below in Figure 49 using an Excel spreadsheet. The model
reads the input format as a csv or a comma delimited file. The old format is still used, but if the
model user has the $ character in the first line and first character of the bth file, the code will assume it is in the new format.
1st line: Include the $ character as the first character in line 1, the rest of this line is ignored and
can be used for comments
$1981 Bluestone Reservoir Bathymetry
2nd line: Title:Seg, followed by a header for each model segment, this is ignored
SEG: I
965.9
764.7
764.7
3rd line: Title: DLX, followed by DLX in m for each segment

DLX
1046.4
1046.4
1046.4
965.9
4th line: Title: ELWS, followed by ELWS in m for each segment (initial water surface elevation)
ELWS
430.1
430.1
430.1
430.1
430.1
430.1
430.1
5th line: Title: PHIO, followed by PHIO for each segment (orientation angle in radians)
PHIO
3.142
3.142
3.142
3.142
3.142
3.142
3.142
6th line: Title: FRICT, followed by FRICT for each segment (Mannings or Chezy friction factor)
FRICT
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
7th line: Titles that are ignored by the model

LAYERH
BR1
8th line to end of file: 1st column is layer height in m, 2nd column are segment widths for segment
1, 3rd column are segment widths for segment 2, etc. Note that the segment widths for the first
segment and last segment are 0 and for the top layer K=1 and bottom layer are also 0. On the far
rights hand side there is a layer # specification
C-301
INPUT FILES
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
$1981 Bluestone Reservoir Bathymetry
SEG: I
1
2
3
DLX
1046.4
1046.4
1046.4
ELWS
430.1
430.1
430.1
PHIO
3.142
3.142
3.142
FRICT
70
70
70
LAYERH
BR1
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
335
335
0.5
0
231
231
0.5
0
228
228
0.5
0
224
224
0.5
0
220
220
0.5
0
215
215
0.5
0
202
202
0.5
0
192
192
0.5
0
173
173
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
335
231
228
224
220
215
0
0
335
231
228
224
220
215
0
0
335
231
228
224
220
215
0
0
335
231
228
224
220
215
0
0
364
254
243
231
219
206
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
965.9
430.1
3.142
70
5
965.9
430.1
3.142
70
6
764.7
430.1
3.142
70
7
764.7
430.1
3.142
70
8
1046.4
430.1
3.142
70
9
1046.4
430.1
3.142
70
10
1073.2
430.1
3.142
70
11
1073.2
430.1
3.142
70
12
1073.2
430.1
3.142
70
13
1126.9
430.1
3.142
70
14
1126.9
430.1
3.142
70
15
1180.5
430.1
3.142
70
16
1180.5
430.1
3.142
70
17
1180.5
430.1
3.142
70
18
912.2
430.1
3.142
70
19
912.2
430.1
3.142
70
20
912.2
430.1
3.142
70
21
804.9
430.1
3.142
70
22
804.9
430.1
3.142
70
23
804.9
430.1
3.142
70
24
804.9
430.1
3.142
70
25
804.9
430.1
3.142
70
26
858.5
430.1
3.142
70
27
858.5
430.1
3.142
70
28
858.5
430.1
3.142
70
29
1006.1
430.1
3.142
70
30
1006.1
430.1
3.142
70
31
457.3
430.1
3.142
70
32
457.3
430.1
3.142
70
33
724.4
430.1
4.7
70
0
335
231
228
224
220
215
202
192
173
130
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
335
231
228
224
220
215
202
192
173
130
125
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
364
254
243
231
219
206
188
161
142
130
125
120
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
364
254
243
231
219
206
188
161
142
130
125
120
110
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
362
255
248
241
233
225
208
199
189
178
166
153
139
135
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
362
255
248
241
233
225
208
199
189
178
166
153
139
135
130
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
327
312
298
285
272
259
247
234
222
208
195
181
167
151
134
114
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
327
312
298
285
272
259
247
234
222
208
195
181
167
151
134
114
40
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
327
312
298
285
272
259
247
234
222
208
195
181
167
151
134
114
100
40
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
423
406
388
370
351
332
324
291
269
247
223
199
173
145
116
100
90
80
40
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
423
406
388
370
351
332
324
291
269
247
223
199
173
145
116
110
100
90
80
75
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
438
426
413
400
387
373
359
345
330
315
298
282
265
246
227
209
184
160
134
104
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
438
426
413
400
387
373
359
345
330
315
298
282
265
246
227
209
184
160
134
104
100
90
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
438
426
413
400
387
373
359
345
330
315
298
282
265
246
227
209
184
160
134
104
90
80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
472
466
460
453
446
439
431
422
414
404
395
384
372
360
346
330
311
288
258
215
146
83
44
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
472
466
460
453
446
439
431
422
414
404
395
384
372
360
346
330
311
288
258
215
146
83
44
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
472
466
460
453
446
439
431
422
414
404
395
384
372
360
346
330
311
288
258
215
146
83
44
40
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
490
486
482
477
472
467
462
457
451
445
440
433
427
419
412
404
396
386
376
364
351
334
313
279
68
39
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
490
486
482
477
472
467
462
457
451
445
440
433
427
419
412
404
396
386
376
364
351
334
313
279
68
39
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
457
453
449
444
440
435
430
425
420
415
409
404
397
391
384
377
369
361
352
342
330
317
302
282
251
72
34
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
457
453
449
444
440
435
430
425
420
415
409
404
397
391
384
377
369
361
352
342
330
317
302
282
251
72
34
30
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
457
453
449
444
440
435
430
425
420
415
409
404
397
391
384
377
369
361
352
342
330
317
302
282
251
72
54
40
30
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
501
498
494
491
487
484
480
476
472
468
465
460
456
451
447
442
436
431
426
420
413
407
400
392
384
375
365
353
340
322
296
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
501
498
494
491
487
484
480
476
472
468
465
460
456
451
447
442
436
431
426
420
413
407
400
392
384
375
365
353
340
322
296
134
130
50
0
0
0
0
0
0
501
498
494
491
487
484
480
476
472
468
465
460
456
451
447
442
436
431
426
420
413
407
400
392
384
375
365
353
340
322
296
134
130
50
30
0
0
0
0
0
516
509
502
495
488
481
473
465
458
450
442
434
426
417
408
400
391
381
372
362
352
342
331
320
308
297
284
271
257
243
227
210
191
171
147
117
75
0
0
0
516
509
502
495
488
481
473
465
458
450
442
434
426
417
408
400
391
381
372
362
352
342
331
320
308
297
284
271
257
243
227
210
191
171
147
117
75
57
0
0
487
483
480
476
473
467
465
461
457
453
449
445
440
436
431
426
422
417
411
406
401
394
388
382
375
368
360
352
344
334
324
312
299
285
266
241
197
50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
34
724.4
430.1
4.7
70
35
724.4
430.1
4.7
70
36
804.9
430.1
4.7
70
37
804.9
430.1
4.7
70
38
804.9
430.1
4.7
70
0
242
234
226
219
211
202
185
176
167
157
147
136
125
113
101
87
74
58
41
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
242
234
226
219
211
202
185
176
167
157
147
136
125
113
101
87
74
58
41
30
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
320
318
316
314
312
309
305
303
301
298
296
294
291
290
287
285
283
281
278
276
132
66
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
320
318
316
314
312
309
305
303
301
298
296
294
291
290
287
285
283
281
278
276
132
66
18
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BR2
Figure 49. New bathymetry file format in csv format within Excel.
C-302
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
INPUT FILES
Fish Habitat Volumes and Volume-Weighted Averages of

Eutrophication State Variables
This section describes how the model allows for the computation of
Volume of fish habitat based on temperature and dissolved oxygen targets for various
fish species
Segment volume weighted averages of dissolved oxygen, NO3-N, NH4-N, PO4-P, Total
P, and chlorophyll a
Surface volume weighted averages of dissolved oxygen, NO3-N, NH4-N, PO4-P, Total P,
and chlorophyll a
The input file, w2_habitat.npt, is read by the CE-QUAL-W2 model when HABTATC is set to
ON in the control file, w2_con.npt. This file allows the model user to compute habitat volumes
for various fish species and to evaluate volume-weighted averages of eutrophication parameters
and examine first order sediment oxygen uptake as predicted by the model.
The file, w2_habitat, is set up as a text file in free format with commas delimiting fields with titles
between lines explaining the following lines. Each fish species is given a temperature target, both
a low and a high target, and a dissolved oxygen target not to go below. In case the model user is
not modeling dissolved oxygen, the oxygen limits are ignored. Note that the time of output of all
these variables and volumes are at the frequency of the time series frequency output (TSR files).
An example file is shown below:
FISH HABITAT AND WQ AVEREAGES INPUT FILE
#FISH CRITERIA, OUTPUTFILENAME
9,'habitat3.opt'
NAMES OF FISH, TEMP-low, TEMP-high, DO limits [DO limits are ignored if
no water quality constituents]
RainbowTrout,0.0,18.0,5.0
StripedBass,10.0,24.0,5.0
Walleye,12.0,24.0,5.0
WhiteBass,0.0,28.0,3.0
SmallmouthBass,0.0,29.0,4.0
SpottedBass,0.0,24.4,6.0
GizzardShad,10.0,26.7,6.0
LargemouthBass,10.0,30.0,5.0
ChannelCatfish,18.0,31.0,5.0
VOLUME WEIGHTED AVERAGES AT THE FOLLOWING # OF SEGMENTS: NSEG [These
lines are ignored if no WQ constituents],Out.opt'putFileName for VOl
Weighted Avgs
3,'volwgtavg.opt'
SEGMENT NUMBERS FOR VOL WEIGHTED AVERAGES
10,15,24
SURFACE WEIGHTED AVERAGES OVER THE FOLLOWING # OF SURFACE
LAYERS,OutputFileName for surface averages
4,'surfvolwtavg.opt'
OutputFileName for 1st order SED at all time and all segments
'sodsed.opt'
C-303
INPUT FILES
Fish habitat volumes

FISH HABITAT AND WQ AVEREAGES INPUT FILE
The first line is a title which is ignored by the model.

#FISH CRITERIA, OUTPUTFILENAME
9,'habitat3.opt'
The first line is a title which is ignored by the model. This variable tells the code to expect 9 fish
temperature and dissolved oxygen criteria and specifies the output filename which must be in
quotations. This output filename is only for the output of habitat volumes for the entire model
grid. Other files are written out showing habitat volumes for each model branch and waterbody.
Also, if TECPLOT is ON for CPL output, the habitat criteria can be animated see CPL output
file.
NAMES OF FISH, TEMP-low, TEMP-high, DO limits [DO limits are ignored if
no water quality constituents]
RainbowTrout,0.0,18.0,5.0
StripedBass,10.0,24.0,5.0
Walleye,12.0,24.0,5.0
WhiteBass,0.0,28.0,3.0
SmallmouthBass,0.0,29.0,4.0
SpottedBass,0.0,24.4,6.0
GizzardShad,10.0,26.7,6.0
LargemouthBass,10.0,30.0,5.0
ChannelCatfish,18.0,31.0,5.0
The first line (which is wrapped above) is ignored by the model. For each of the 9 species, a temperature in oC as a low and a high limit and a dissolved oxygen in mg/l target are used. These criteria can be selected for fish species in the reservoir or river system following the work of Cooke
and Welch (2008) in
C-304
INPUT FILES
Table 76 or Hondzo and Stefan (1996) in Table 77. Note that the habitat volume uses the following criteria for acceptable habitat:
Model temperature > TEMP-low and <= TEMP-high and dissolved oxygen >= DO limit.
C-305
INPUT FILES
Table 76. Fish temperature and dissolved oxygen criteria from Cooke and Welch (2008).
TEMPERATURE AND DO REQUIREMENTS, SELECTED FISH SPECIES
Dissolved Oxygen (DO, mg/L)
Mean of
Highest EC, DO
Effect
optimal DO
8.0
5.0
avoidance
Species
optimal DO1
rainbow trout
7.0 - 9.0
striped bass 2
6.0
6.0
5.0
ELS survival
walleye
>5.0
none
reported
(est. 7.0)
<5.0
adult abundance,
fry survival
white bass
>5.0
none
reported
(est. 7.0)
3.0
stress
(decreased
activity, increased
ventilation)
Temperature (T, degress C)

Lowest EC,
Lowest Lethal
Effect
high T
T
18
avoidance
25
Reference
optimal T1
USFWS HSI
USFWS HSI,
USFWS SP
(Optimal DO,
juvenile)
12-18
Mean of
optimal T
15
20-21
20.5
24
avoidance
28
USFWS HSI,
USFWS SP
(Lethal T, larval)
USFWS HSI
20-24
22
>24
avoidance
29
USFWS HSI
USFWS HSI
19-28
smallmouth bass
6.0
6.0
4.0
growth (20%)
USFWS HSI
21-27
spotted bass
6.0
6.0
<6.0
growth
USFWS HSI
23.5-24.4
gizzard shad
6.0
6.0
6.0
other
USFWS HSI
22-29
largemouth bass
8.0
8.0
5.0
distress
USFWS HSI
24-30
channel catfish
7.0
7.0
5.0
reduced feeding
USFWS HSI
26-29
EC - Effect Concentration (lowest of values of T> optimal and highest of values of DO <optimal)
1
based on field data (in preference to lab data)
2
except where indicated otherwise, data based on inland stocks (not coastal)
Reference
USFWS HSI - U.S. FWS Habitat Suitability Index (species specific)
23.5
>28
24
24
25.5
27
27.5
29
>24.4
26.7
30
21
Reference
USFWS HSI
27 (based on
closely related
white perch,
growth
Morone
USFWS SP
americana ),
dependent on
acclimation T.
growth
32.3
USFWS HSI
reduced abundance
34
USFWS HSI
repro, growth
36.5
USFWS HSI
embryo survival
35.0
Grant et al. 2003
growth
33.5
USFWS HSI
Grant et al. 2003 - Effects of Temperature on the Susceptibility of Largemouth Bass to Largemouth Bass Virus
USFWS SP - Species Profile (Striped Bass, 1983)
Table 77. General fish temperature criteria from Hondzo and Stefan (1996).
Fish type
Coldwater (examples include brook trout,

Chinook salmon, coho salmon, mountain
whitefish, rainbow trout)
Coolwater (examples include black crappie,
northern pike, walleye, white crappie, white
sucker, yellow perch)
Warmwater (examples include bluegill, carp,
cahnnel catfish, freshwater drum, gizzard
shad, green sunfish, laregemouth bass, rock
bass, smallmouth bass, white bass)
Lower temper- Upper temperature (oC) good ature (oC)

growth limit
good growth
limit
9.0
18.5
Upper temperature
(oC) lethal
limit
23.4
16.3
28.2
30.4
19.7
32.3
> 32.3
Then based on these limits an output file for the entire waterbody is written out. The file is wellsuited for importing into Excel or other graphics program.
A typical output file provides the following information:
Fish habitat analysis: CE-QUAL-W2 model results
Species, Temperature minimum, Temperature maximum, Dissolved oxygen minimum
RainbowTrout,
0.00,
18.00,
5.00
StripedBass,
10.00,
24.00,
5.00
Walleye,
12.00,
24.00,
5.00
WhiteBass,
0.00,
28.00,
3.00
SmallmouthBass,
0.00,
29.00,
4.00
C-306
INPUT FILES
SpottedBass,
GizzardShad,
LargemouthBass,
ChannelCatfish,
0.00,
10.00,
10.00,
18.00,
24.40,
26.70,
30.00,
31.00,
6.00
6.00
5.00
5.00
JDAY,%VOL-RainbowTrout,HAB-VOL(m3)-RainbowTrout,%VOL-StripedBass,HAB-VOL(m3)StripedBass,%VOL-Walleye,HAB-VOL(m3)-Walleye,%VOL-WhiteBass,HAB-VOL(m3)-WhiteBass,%VOLSmallmouthBass,HAB-VOL(m3)-SmallmouthBass,%VOL-SpottedBass,HAB-VOL(m3)-SpottedBass,%VOLGizzardShad,HAB-VOL(m3)-GizzardShad,%VOL-LargemouthBass,HAB-VOL(m3)-LargemouthBass,%VOLChannelCatfish,HAB-VOL(m3)-ChannelCatfish,
61.532, 100.00, 0.1170E+09,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
0.00, 0.0000E+00, 100.00,
0.1170E+09, 100.00, 0.1170E+09, 100.00, 0.1170E+09,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
0.00,
0.0000E+00,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
61.542, 100.00, 0.1170E+09,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
0.00, 0.0000E+00, 100.00,
0.1170E+09, 100.00, 0.1170E+09, 100.00, 0.1170E+09,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
0.00,
0.0000E+00,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
61.566, 100.00, 0.1170E+09,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
0.00, 0.0000E+00, 100.00,
0.1170E+09, 100.00, 0.1170E+09, 100.00, 0.1170E+09,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
0.00,
0.0000E+00,
0.00, 0.0000E+00,
The output code reprints the original criteria and then at the output of the TSR FREQ, outputs
JDAY (Julian day), % habitat volume for species 1, actual habitat volume in m3 for species 1, and
then this is repeated for each species.
An example of this is shown below for DeGray Reservoir for small mouth bass and gizzard shad
between March and September 1980 in Figure 50.
The model also writes out output for each branch and waterbody if this feature [HABITAC] is
ON. For each waterbody the model will write out fish_habitat_wbX.opt where X is the waterbody #. Also, for each branch the model will write out fish_habitat_brX.opt where X is the
branch #. These files allow the model user to explore fish habitat in smaller sections of the waterbody as required for the study. These files follow the ouput described above for the habitat volume % and habitat volume in that particular waterbody or branch.
C-307
INPUT FILES
Fish habitat in DeGray Reservoir 1980
Small mouth bass: Temperature < 29oC and DO > 4.0 mg/l
Gizzard Shad: Temperature < 26.7oC and DO > 6.0 mg/l
3/30/80
4/29/80
5/29/80
6/28/80
7/28/80
8/27/80
9/26/80
100
% of reservoir volume acceptable habitat
80
60
40
20
Small mouth bass

Gizzard Shad
0
80
120
160
200
240
280
Julian day since January 1, 1980
Figure 50. Small mouth bass habitat in DeGray reservoir for 1980.
Volume weighted segment and surface averages
VOLUME WEIGHTED AVERAGES AT THE FOLLOWING # OF SEGMENTS: NSEG [These lines are ignored if
no WQ constituents],Out.opt'putFileName for VOl Weighted Avgs
3,'volwgtavg.opt'
The title is ignored in the model. The number of segments that the model will output volume
weighted eutropication variables (dissolved oxygen, nutrients and chlorophyll a) and the file
name are the next fields. The file name must be in quotations.
SEGMENT NUMBERS FOR VOL WEIGHTED AVERAGES
10,15,24
The title is ignored in the model. The segment numbers are given separated by commas.
SURFACE WEIGHTED AVERAGES OVER THE FOLLOWING # OF SURFACE LAYERS,OutputFileName for surface averages
4,'surfvolwtavg.opt'
C-308
INPUT FILES
The title is ignored in the model. The number 4 gives the model the number of active surface layers to volume average. In many cases the model user wants just a surface or epilimnetic average
of the water quality variables. The code also takes all dissolved oxygen greater than saturation
and assigns it a value of 100% saturation for purposes of the average. Note that the model also for
the surface average outputs the layer average light extinction coefficient that can be compared
with field data. The file name of the surface averages is the next field and it must be in quotations.
Typical output file results are shown below for the volume weighted averages at the 3 segment
numbers specified.
Volume weighted WQ parameters at segments:
10
15
24
JDAY,
PO4- 10,
NH4- 10,
NO3- 10,
DO- 10,
TP- 10,
CHLA- 10,
PO4- 15,
NH4- 15,
NO3- 15,
DO- 15,
TP- 15,
CHLA- 15,
PO4- 24,
NH4- 24,
NO3- 24,
DO- 24,
TP- 24,
CHLA- 24,
64.542,
0.0010,
0.0022,
0.1400,
11.0935,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0022,
0.1400,
11.0284,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0022,
0.1400,
10.6507,
0.0000,
0.0000,
64.583,
0.0010,
0.0023,
0.1400,
11.0934,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0023,
0.1400,
11.0276,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0023,
0.1400,
10.6486,
0.0000,
0.0000,
64.625,
0.0010,
0.0025,
0.1400,
11.0932,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0025,
0.1400,
11.0269,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0025,
0.1400,
10.6462,
0.0000,
0.0000,
64.667,
0.0010,
0.0026,
0.1400,
11.0929,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0026,
0.1400,
11.0259,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0026,
0.1400,
10.6437,
0.0000,
0.0000,
64.708,
0.0010,
0.0028,
0.1400,
11.0927,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0028,
0.1400,
11.0249,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0028,
0.1400,
10.6410,
0.0000,
0.0000,
64.750,
0.0010,
0.0029,
0.1400,
11.0926,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0029,
0.1400,
11.0240,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.0010,
0.0029,
0.1400,
10.6380,
0.0000,
0.0000,
Typical output file results are shown below for the surface volume weighted averages at the 3
segment numbers specified.
Surface (upper
4 model layers) Volume weighted WQ parameters at segments:
10
15
24
JDAY,
PO4- 10,
NH4- 10,
NO3- 10,
DO- 10,
TP- 10,
CHLA10,Gamma(m-1)- 10,
PO4- 15,
NH4- 15,
NO3- 15,
DO- 15,
TP- 15,
CHLA- 15,Gamma(m-1)- 15,
PO4- 24,
NH4- 24,
NO3- 24,
DO- 24,
TP- 24,
CHLA- 24,Gamma(m-1)- 24,
64.542,
0.0010,
0.0022,
0.1400,
11.1004,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
0.0010,
0.0022,
0.1400,
11.0998,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
0.0010,
0.0022,
0.1400,
11.1001,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
64.583,
0.0010,
0.0023,
0.1400,
11.1007,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
0.0010,
0.0023,
0.1400,
11.0995,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
0.0010,
0.0023,
0.1400,
11.1001,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
64.625,
0.0010,
0.0025,
0.1400,
11.1012,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
0.0010,
0.0025,
0.1400,
11.0992,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
0.0010,
0.0025,
0.1400,
11.1000,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5100,
64.667,
0.0010,
0.0026,
0.1400,
11.1013,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5090,
0.0010,
0.0026,
0.1400,
11.0985,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5095,
0.0010,
0.0026,
0.1400,
11.0996,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5095,
64.708,
0.0010,
0.0028,
0.1400,
11.0998,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5090,
0.0010,
0.0028,
0.1400,
11.0977,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5095,
0.0010,
0.0028,
0.1400,
11.0991,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5095,
64.750,
0.0010,
0.0029,
0.1400,
11.1002,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5090,
0.0010,
0.0029,
0.1400,
11.0968,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5095,
0.0010,
0.0029,
0.1400,
11.0984,
0.0000,
0.0000,
0.5095,
C-309
INPUT FILES
Output of overall organic matter accumulation at the bottom of each layer and
summed for each segment
OutputFileName for SOD+SED at all time and all segments
'sodsed.opt'
This output file prints the first order sediment organic matter accumulation at each segment as a
function of time. It sums up all the sediment accumulated at all the vertical layers. The output is
in grams of organic matter. This allows the model user to evaluate how changes in organic loading to the sediments affect the rate of accumulation of sediments and where they accumulate.
The output file is shown below where all entries are comma delimited and are for each segment
and time of output. The values for each segment are grams of organic matter.
JDAY, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31,
64.542,
0.2676E+03,
0.3751E+03,
0.5351E+03,
0.7376E+03,
0.1120E+04,
0.1630E+04,
0.1577E+04,
0.1288E+04,
0.1490E+04,
0.2253E+04,
0.2452E+04,
0.3120E+04,
0.4287E+04,
0.3824E+04,
0.2663E+04,
0.4700E+04,
0.5847E+04,
0.6447E+04,
0.1021E+05,
0.9486E+04,
0.1095E+05,
0.1289E+05,
0.7819E+04,
0.5235E+04,
0.5760E+04,
0.6320E+04,
0.6432E+04,
0.4698E+04,
0.2557E+04,
0.1682E+04,
64.583,
0.5577E+03,
0.7482E+03,
0.1067E+04,
0.1471E+04,
0.2236E+04,
0.3258E+04,
0.3150E+04,
0.2572E+04,
0.2976E+04,
0.4500E+04,
0.4898E+04,
0.6234E+04,
0.8565E+04,
0.7638E+04,
0.5316E+04,
0.9387E+04,
0.1168E+05,
0.1288E+05,
0.2039E+05,
0.1895E+05,
0.2189E+05,
0.2575E+05,
0.1562E+05,
0.1046E+05,
0.1150E+05,
0.1263E+05,
0.1285E+05,
0.9388E+04,
0.5109E+04,
0.3361E+04,
64.625,
0.8683E+03,
0.1121E+04,
0.1597E+04,
0.2201E+04,
0.3348E+04,
0.4886E+04,
0.4726E+04,
0.3853E+04,
0.4467E+04,
0.6745E+04,
0.7342E+04,
0.9346E+04,
0.1284E+05,
0.1145E+05,
0.7963E+04,
0.1407E+05,
0.1752E+05,
0.1931E+05,
0.3056E+05,
0.2841E+05,
0.3282E+05,
0.3860E+05,
0.2341E+05,
0.1567E+05,
0.1724E+05,
0.1892E+05,
0.1926E+05,
0.1407E+05,
0.7659E+04,
0.5037E+04,
64.667,
0.1194E+04,
0.1499E+04,
0.2125E+04,
0.2927E+04,
0.4458E+04,
0.6513E+04,
0.6300E+04,
0.5131E+04,
0.5956E+04,
0.8987E+04,
0.9782E+04,
0.1246E+05,
0.1711E+05,
0.1525E+05,
0.1060E+05,
0.1875E+05,
0.2334E+05,
0.2573E+05,
0.4072E+05,
0.3785E+05,
0.4375E+05,
0.5143E+05,
0.3119E+05,
0.2087E+05,
0.2296E+05,
0.2520E+05,
0.2567E+05,
0.1875E+05,
0.1021E+05,
0.6711E+04,
C-310
INPUT FILES
Automatic Port Selection and Reservoir Volumes at

Specified Temperatures
The CE-QUAL-W2 model reads the file, w2_selective.npt, if the SELECTC control is ON in
the w2_con.npt file. This input file allows the model user to
1. Automatically choose a withdrawal port elevation based on meeting required temperature
targets
2. print temperature of individual outlets rather than combing them together, and
3. print the volume of the reservoir at specified temperature targets.
The input file is shown below and is named: w2_selective.npt. A discussion of each line from the
input file is included in the next sections.
Selective input control file
Temperature outlet control - frequency of output for temperature
OUT FREQ TFRQTMP
0.02083
Structure outlet control based on time and temperature and branch
DYNSTR1 CONTROL
NUM
FREQ
ON
2
0.50
DYNSTR2
1
2
WD/ST
ST
ST
JB
1
2
JS/NW
1
1
MONITOR LOC ISEG

1
32
2
43
ELEV
0
1
DYNSEL
OFF
OFF
YEARLY
ON
ON
TSTR
010.
180.
TEND
045.
300.
TEND
045.
TTARGET
12.
TEMP
15.0
20.0
NELEV
2
1
ELEV1
210.
95.0
ELEV2
190.
AUTO ELEVCONTROL
1
ON
2
OFF
SPLIT1
CNTR
ON
NUM
1
SPLIT2
1
ST/WD
ST
JB
1
THRESH1
TEMPN
2
YEARLY
ON
TSTR
010.
NOUTS JS1/NW1 JS2/NW2

2
2
3
ELCONT
OFF
THRESH2 TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT

1
10.0
10.0
2
12.5
12.5
Temperature of outlet releases

The model Version 3.6 and earlier outputs a temperature of all withdrawals at a segment. For example, if there are 4 separate outlets at different elevations defining a structure withdrawal, the
C-311
INPUT FILES
withdrawal output from W2 (specified in w2_con.npt) includes the mixed temperature of these
outlets blended together. These are usually specified in the withdrawal outlet cards in the control
file, w2_con.npt, starting with the card WITH OUT. This feature allows printing each branch
structure as a separate time series of outlet temperatures for each individual outlet, in addition to
the existing CE-QUAL-W2 combined temperature time series. The outlet files are names
str_brX.opt where X is the branch number. A similar file is written for withdrawals. The withdrawals are included in one file named: wd_out.opt. The format for the structure and withdrawal
output files is as follows:
Branch:
JDAY
22920.000
22921.000
22922.000
22923.000
1 # of structures:
T(C)
T(C)
T(C)
0.00
9.52
7.20
0.00
9.76
7.20
0.00
9.81
7.20
0.00
9.90
7.20
3 outlet temperatures
Q(m3/s)
Q(m3/s)
Q(m3/s)
0.00
69.27
17.91
0.00
68.36
17.57
0.00
67.46
17.23
0.00
66.55
16.90
ELEVCL
300.23
300.23
300.23
300.23
ELEVCL
280.42
280.42
280.42
280.42
ELEVCL
173.74
173.74
173.74
173.74
The first 2 lines are headers. The data then are JDAY, the outlet temperature of each outlet in C,
the flow rate of each outlet in cms, and the elevation of each outlet in m. A 0 for temperature
means that there was no outflow from that outlet. The frequency of the output of this file is determined from the input file called w2_selective.npt. In this file, the variable TFRQTMP is the
Julian day frequency of the output. For the example below (note that the value must be in columns
9-16 in F format), the 0.02083 Julian day is every 30 minutes.
Selective input control file
Temperature outlet control - frequency of output for temperature
OUT FREQ TFRQTMP
0.02083
Out Freq
TFRQTMP: Real F8.0. This is the Julian day frequency of the output for the temperature for each
structure outlet.
Automatic selection of outlet port to control temperature
The model code allows the user control over selective withdrawal structures and withdrawals. For
each structure or withdrawal, the user can dynamically adjust the elevation of the discharge according to time and temperature of the outlet water. Hence, the model user does not need to add any
more structures or withdrawals to the model to allow for a selective withdrawal tower. The model
user will specify a beginning upper elevation ESTR for a structure or EWD for a withdrawal (in
the w2_con.npt file) and supply the correct time series of flows (such as in a specified input file for
structure outflows or withdrawal outflows). The model will then dynamically lower or raise the
elevation of the outlet using as a starting point the starting elevation defined for the structure or
withdrawal in w2_con.npt before the rule starts. Information supplied to the model is found in the
file w2_selective.npt. The relevant lines or card images from this file are shown below (note that
fixed format is used; data are spaced every 8 columns; and there is no limit to the card length, i.e.,
the card images do not wrap around as in the other W2 files):
Dynstr1
DYNSTR1
CONTROL
NUM
FREQ
CONTROL: Character A8. This is set to

ON or
OFF (must be in all capitals) this
controls whether the algorithm is used. Turning it OFF uses the normal W2 code.
C-312
INPUT FILES
NUM: Integer I8. This is the number of selective withdrawal structures. In the next set of lines,
each line is for each selective withdrawal structure.
FREQ: Real F8.0. This is a real number that represents the Julian day frequency from the start time
of the simulation to check the temperature criteria for the dynamic temperature control structure or
the split temperature control. Hence, if one wanted to check the criteria every day and adjust the
gates only once per day, FREQ=1.0. If every 12 hours, FREQ=0.5.
Dynstr2
DYNSTR2
ST/WD
JB
JS/NW
YEARLY
TSTR
TEND
TEMP
NELEV
ELEV1
ELEV2
ST/WD: Character A8. For a structure enter

ST, for a withdrawal enter
WD. This
specifies whether the dynamic withdrawal algorithm applies to a W2 structure or withdrawal
which are treated differently in the W2 model
JB: Integer I8. This is the branch number of the structure. This column is ignored for a withdrawal.
JS/NW: Integer I8. Outlet number of each selective withdrawal structure (if ST/WD=ST) or withdrawal number (if ST/WD=WD).
YEARLY: Character A8. This is a control that is ON of OFF. If it is ON, then the Julian days that
follow TSTR and TEND are between 1 and 366 and are to be applied yearly during the simulation.
If it is OFF, then TSTR and TEND are applied only once between the time period specified.
TSTR and TEND are the beginning Julian day and the ending Julian day for starting and ending
selective withdrawal. The model will not lower the outlet until after TSTR. After TEND the outlet
level will revert back to what was specified in the w2_con.npt file for the outlet elevation. Note
that if YEARLY=ON, the Julian days must be between 1 and 366.
TEMP: Real F8.0. This is the temperature in C that is the criterion for lowering the structure elevation (or in practice turning off one and opening up a lower one). If the TEMP is below the
criterion and the temperature at the level of the outlet above the current outlet is also below the
criterion, then the selective withdrawal structure will raise itself to a higher elevation until it reaches
the top, or original elevation, as specified in the w2_con.npt file.
NELEV: Integer I8. This specifies model how many selective withdrawal elevations you will use
in addition to the one supplied in the w2_con.npt file. Currently, this is limited to 10 values.
ELEV1, ELEV2ELEV10: Real. These are the elevations in m of the selective withdrawal structures. Note that the model will use the value of the elevation in the control file as the initial elevation
for the time before (<TSTR) and after (>TEND) the rule. It will raise the elevation if the temperature criterion, TEMP, is above the actual temperature; or it will lower the elevation if the actual
temperature is above TEMP. There will be NELEV elevations specified. (The current limit on the
number of elevations is set to 10 in the code.) These elevations must be ordered from a high to a
low elevation.
Monitor
MONITOR LOC ISEG
ELEV
DYNSEL
ISEG: Integer I8. This can be <0 (use the summed flow weighted temperature of all structures and
withdrawals at a withdrawal output segment defined in the WITH OUT card in the w2_con.npt
file), =0 (use mixed outlet temperature of the particular structure or withdrawal defined in
DYNSTR2), or >0 (use a model segment somewhere in the model domain as the monitoring point,
such as a location downstream of a dam). If ISEG < 0, then the absolute value of ISEG must equal
to the withdrawal number segment corresponding to IWDO(ABS(ISEG)) corresponding to the
WITH OUT cards in the control file, w2_con.npt. At this segment all withdrawals will be combined
and evaluated for temperature. If ISEG < 0, then you must specify the withdrawal output as ON
C-313
INPUT FILES
(WDOC=ON) and set up the withdrawal output to correspond to the monitor location. For example,
if ISEG=-3, then all withdrawals, hydraulic structures, and structure outlets from withdrawal #3
will be summed together at a set frequency (as specified in the WDOF card). If IWDO(3)=24, then
the mixed temperature from all water withdrawals at segment 24 will be used to decide on whether
to lower the outlet elevation. For this case, the value of ELEV is ignored.
For example, if in w2_con.npt, the WITH OUT cards are defined as follows:
WITH OUT
WDOC
ON
NWDO
1
NIWDO
7
WITH DATE
WDOD
1.0
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WDOD
WITH FREQ
WDOF
0.1
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WDOF
WITH SEG
IWDO
64
IWDO
86
IWDO
151
IWDO
188
IWDO
13
IWDO
24
IWDO
97
IWDO
IWDO
and in w2_selective.npt,
MONITOR LOC ISEG
-5
ELEV
then the model will use the combined withdrawals from segment 13 (IWDO(ABS(ISEG))) as a
temperature monitoring location. Note that the WDOF is 0.1 days. Be careful that FREQ in card
DYNSTR1 is greater than WDOF since the code uses the value of the last mixed temperature however frequently it is updated as defiend by WDOF (not FREQ). Hence if WDOF was every 20 days
and FREQ was every 5 days, this would not be appropriate since WDOF > FREQ.
If ISEG=0, the model will use the mixed temperature of the specified structure or withdrawal as
the control temperature (as defined in DYNSTR2). IF ISEG > 0, the model uses this as the segment
number for the temperature monitor location. This can be any active segment in the model domain.
This would usually be used at a downstream location in a river below a dam structure.
ELEV: Real F8.0.This is the elevation of the temperature monitoring. Specifying a negative number results in the layer number being used for the vertical location. Hence, specifying -5 results
in specifying layer 5. Specifying 5.25 results in 5.25 m below the water surface. If ISEG=0 or
ISEG<0, the elevation card is ignored.
DYNSEL: Character A8. This is either ON or OFF. This controls whether a time series file of
temperature controls is read into the model. This allows the model user to use one selective withdrawal structure with a time varying temperature criterion. The file is named dynselX.npt, where
X is the structure number. This file is a time series that skips the first 3 lines, then includes a column
of Julian day (F8.0), temperature criterion in oC (F8.0). This time series is treated as a step function
input, i.e., there is no linear interpolation between successive values. An example input file is
shown below.
Dynamic selective input temperature input file
JDAY
TEMP
C-314
INPUT FILES
1.000
50.000
150.000
200.000
265.000
365.000
10.0
12.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
10.0
This card is repeated by the number of outlets (NUM in DYNSTR1 card).

Auto
AUTO ELEVCONTROL
ELEVCONTROL: Character A8. This is a switch that is either ON of OFF. This switch if ON
allows the elevation of the selective withdrawal structure to be reduced as the water level lowers.
For example, if the water surface elevation is at an elevation of 259.9 m and the elevation of the
withdrawal is at 260 m, the code then shifts the elevation of the outlet to the next lower elevation
so that the water surface is always above the level of the outlet. If turned OFF, then W2 always
takes water from the outlet at the surface if the elevation of the outlet is above the water surface
elevation. This card is repeated by the number of outlets (NUM in DYNSTR1 card).
Split1
SPLIT1
CNTR
NUM
This card specifies which of 2 outlets (current limitation is 2 outlets) to direct flow. The outlet
structure must have defined at least 2 outlets in the control file. This algorithm combines the specified flows from these outlets (from qot.npt file) and decides how to apportion those flows between
the 2 outlets.
CNTR: Character A8. Either OFF or ON. This specifies whether this algorithm is active (ON)
or not (OFF).
NUM: Integer I8. This specifies the number of outlet pairs to consider. These have to be from the
same branch, but can be any 2 already specified outlets in the w2-con.npt file.
Split2
SPLIT2
ST/WD
JB YEARLY
TSTR
TEND
TTARGET
NOUTS JS1/NW1 JS2/NW2 ELCONT
ST/WD: Character A8. For a structure enter

ST, for a withdrawal enter
WD. This
specifies whether the dynamic withdrawal algorithm applies to a W2 structure or withdrawal
which are treated differently in the W2 model
JB: Integer I8. This is the branch number of the structure. This column is ignored for a withdrawal.
YEARLY: Character A8. This is a control that is ON of OFF. If it is ON, then the Julian days that
follow TSTR and TEND are between 1 and 366 and are to be applied yearly during the simulation.
If it is OFF, then TSTR and TEND are applied only once between the time period specified.
TSTR: Real F8.0 and TEND: Real F8.0 are the beginning Julian day and the ending Julian day
for starting and ending the splitting algorithm or rule. The model will not split the flow between
outlets until after TSTR. After TEND the rule will end and there will be no more splitting. Note
that if YEARLY=ON, the Julian days must be between 1 and 366.
TTARGET: Real F8.0. This is the temperature (oC) target for deciding where to apportion the
flows. This is the temperature at the center line of the branch outlet, not the selective withdrawal
mixed outlet temperature.
NOUTS: Integer I8. This is the number of outlets to apportion flows current limit is 2. We may
later increase this to more than 2 at a later date.
C-315
INPUT FILES
JS1/NW1: integer I8. Structure number (if ST/WD=ST) or withdrawal number (if
ST/WD=WD) for upper outlet.
JS2/NW2: integer I8. Structure number (if ST/WD=ST) or withdrawal number (if
ST/WD=WD) for lower outlet.
ELCONT: Character A8: Either
ON or
OFF. If this is ON, the top outlet elevation
centerline will follow the water surface elevation if the centerline elevation of the outlet is below
the existing water surface elevation. If OFF, the top outlet elevation is turned OFF when the water
surface elevation is lowered below the centerline of the outlet level and all flow goes to the second
outlet.
The decision rules for apportioning the flows between 2 outlets are shown in Table 78.
Table 78. Rules for selective withdrawal when there are 2 outlets where flow is being split.
Rule #
1
2
3
Rule
If TJS1> Ttarget and TJS2> Ttarget, take all flow from lower outlet (JS2)
If TJS1<Ttarget and TJS2< Ttarget, take all flow from upper outlet (JS1)
If TJS1>Ttarget and TJS2< Ttarget, take apportion flow based on flow balance equation:
QJS 1
QJS 2
(Qsum (Tt arg et TJS 2 ))
(TJS 1 TJS 2 )
Qsum QJS 1
and
where Qsum is the total flow from outlets at JS1 and JS2.
4
If water elevation is below outlet elevation for upper outlet (JS1), take all flow from
lower outlet (JS2).
Figure 51 illustrates the use of this new code feature.
C-316
INPUT FILES
End of selective withdrawal, revert back to original elevation of 210 m
21
20
TSRT:10 TEND:45
TEMP control 15C
Initial outlet elevation: 210 m
ELEV1=200 m ELEV2=190 m
19
Outlet temperture, oC
18
Elevation change from 200 m to 190 m
17
Elevation change from 210 m to 200 m
16
15
14
13
12
0
10
20
30
40
50
Julian day
Figure 51. Outlet temperature as a function of time illustrating selective withdrawal meeting
temperature target of 15oC between Julian day 1 and 45.
C-317
INPUT FILES
Volume of Reservoir at a Temperature Threshold
This feature is included in the file w2_selective.npt in the last few lines of the input file. The lines
that control this feature are shown below:
THRESH1
TEMPN
2
THRESH2 TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT

1
10.0
10.0
2
12.5
12.5
THRESH1
THRESH1
TEMPN
2
TEMPN: Integer I8. This is the number of temperature criteria for each water body
THRESH2
THRESH2 TEMPCRIT TEMPCRIT
11.11
11.11
15.55
15.55
! 52 deg. F
! 60 deg. F
TEMPCRIT: Real F8.0. This gives the temperature threshold for each waterbody for which to
output the volume of the reservoir. In the example the first line corresponds to a temperature criterion of 11.11 degrees C for water bodies 1 and 2, and the second line represents
a second criterion of 15.55 degrees C for water bodies 1 and 2.
The output files are called Volume_wbX.opt, where X is the water body number. This file shows
a time series of time (Julian day), total volume, and the volumes below the temperature thresholds.
The number of values of TEMPCRIT are based on the number of waterbodies in the model domain.
(The current limit on the number of waterbodies is set to 10 in the code for TEMPCRIT.)
For example, the file Volume_wb1.opt contains the following output for time, total volume (m3),
volume (m3) under 11.11oC, and volume (m3) under 15.55oC:
jday
Volume
Volcrit
Volcrit
22919.05 0.1650E+10 0.1565E+10 0.1650E+10
22919.09 0.1650E+10 0.1563E+10 0.1650E+10
22919.13 0.1650E+10 0.1561E+10 0.1650E+10
22919.17 0.1650E+10 0.1560E+10 0.1650E+10
22919.21 0.1650E+10 0.1557E+10 0.1650E+10
Environmental Performance Criteria

This section describes the environmental performance criteria which allow a model user to assess
model predictions of state variables and how those can be affected by management changes to the
waterbody system. The CE-QUAL-W2 model reads the file, w2_envirpf.npt, if the ENVIRPC
control is ON in the w2_con.npt file. This input file allows the model user to
C-318
INPUT FILES
1. Compute fraction of the reservoir volume and time associated with velocity and temperature levels
2. Compute fraction of the reservoir volume and time associated with CE-QUAL-W2 state
variables for water quality
3. Compute fraction of the reservoir volume and time associated with CE-QUAL-W2 derived variables for water quality
These are very useful in assessing changes in water quality variables between model alternatives.
The input file for these enhancements is shown below and is named: w2_envirpf.npt which is
shown below. A discussion of each line from the input file is included in the next sections.
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA CE-QUAL-W2 MODEL
EPR COMP INTVLS
20
TEMP/VEL VELOCTY
OFF
VINCR
0.050
VTOP
0.50
CST
TDS
WaterAge
Gen2
GEN3
ISS1
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
ALG1
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM-P
RDOM-P
LPOM-P
RPOM-P
LDOM-N
RDOM-N
LPOM-N
RPOM-N
ACTIVE INTSCLE TOPLMIT

OFF
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
CST DERI
DOC
POC
TOC
DON
PON
TON
TKN
TN
DOP
POP
TOP
TP

OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
C-319
TEMP
ON
TINCR
1.0
TTOP
30.0
! 26
INPUT FILES
APR
CHLA
ATOT
%DO
TSS
TISS
CBOD
pH
CO2
HCO3
CO3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
! 14
Description of each line of input file

The file is a formatted text file so the file format and spacing is important.
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA CE-QUAL-W2 MODEL
EPR COMP INTVLS
20
The first 2 lines are ignored and are titles. The INTVLS: Integer I8 are the number of intervals or
bins on the histogram to use for the output file. There is a blank line after this line.
TEMP/VEL VELOCTY
OFF
VINCR
0.050
VTOP
0.50
TEMP
ON
TINCR
1.0
TTOP
30.0
The title line is ignored but they help set the correct spacing for the variables on the following
line. VELOCITY: Character A8 is ON or OFF and allows a histogram of velocities. VINCR:
Real F8.0 is the velocity increment in m/s and VTOP: Real F8.0is the maximum velocity in the
histogram. TEMP: Character A8 is ON/OFF and allows a histogram of temperatures. TINCR:
Real F8.0 is the increment of the histogram bins and TTOP: Real F8.0 is the maximum temperature in oC for the histogram ouotput.
CST
TDS
WaterAge
Gen2
GEN3
ISS1
PO4
NH4
NO3
DSI
PSI
FE
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
ALG1
DO
TIC
ALK
ZOO1
LDOM-P
RDOM-P
LPOM-P
RPOM-P
LDOM-N
RDOM-N
LPOM-N

OFF
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
ON
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
! 26
C-320
INPUT FILES
RPOM-N
OFF
1.00
20.00
The next line is a title line ignored by the code but the variable spacing format is shown. In the
following lines, the same number of active constituents are required in this section as are in the
w2_con.npt file under active constituents. The model user can decide which variables to output.
The names of each state variable is ignored by the code. ACTIVE: Character A8 is either
OFF/ON and indicates whether to turn this output ON or OFF. INTSCLE: Real F8.0 is the interval scale for the output state variable it is the bin interval in the units of the state variable.
TOPLMIT: Real F8.0 is the upper limit of the histogram output.
CST DERI
DOC
POC
TOC
DON
PON
TON
TKN
TN
DOP
POP
TOP
TP
APR
CHLA
ATOT
%DO
TSS
TISS
CBOD
pH
CO2
HCO3
CO3

OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
OFF
1.00
20.00
! 14
The next line is a title line ignored by the code but the variable spacing format is shown. In the
following lines, the same number of active derived constituents are required in this section as are
in the w2_con.npt file under derived constituents (these though are not variable as are the active
constituents). The model user can decide which variables to output. The names of each state variable is ignored by the code. ACTIVE: Character A8 is either OFF/ON and indicates whether to
turn this output ON or OFF. INTSCLE: Real F8.0 is the interval scale for the output state variable it is the bin interval in the units of the state variable. TOPLMIT: real F8.0 is the upper
limit of the histogram output.
An example of this type of analysis is shown comparing alternatives in watershed loading for
Lake Tenkiller in OK. Figure 52 shows the results for Total P for one sampling station for different modeling scenarios.
Typical output file format is shown below and is set up for graphing in Excel. The first series of
output lines are a histogram of the fraction of volume and time that the water quality variable was
in the specified interval. At the end of the column there is a sum of the fractions, which should
sum to 1.0 and the last line is the temporal and volume weighted average over the entire model
domain and simulation time period.
"
Gen1interval" "Fraction of volume"
Gen3interval" "Fraction of volume" "
DOinterval" "Fraction of volume"
C-321
"
Gen2interval" "Fraction of volume"
ISS1interval" "Fraction of volume" "
"
INPUT FILES
20.00
0.1047E-02
19.00
0.1258E-03
18.00
0.1211E-03
17.00
0.1132E-03
16.00
0.1605E-03
15.00
0.1772E-03
14.00
0.2543E-03
13.00
0.2965E-03
12.00
0.3453E-03
11.00
0.3718E-03
10.00
0.4882E-03
9.00
0.5676E-03
8.00
0.8105E-03
7.00
0.9553E-03
6.00
0.9875E-03
5.00
0.1650E-02
4.00
0.2712E-02
3.00
0.4287E-02
2.00
0.2022E-01
1.00
0.9643E+00
0.1000E+01
20.00
0.0000E+00
19.00
0.0000E+00
18.00
0.0000E+00
17.00
0.0000E+00
16.00
0.0000E+00
15.00
0.0000E+00
14.00
0.0000E+00
13.00
0.0000E+00
12.00
0.0000E+00
11.00
0.0000E+00
10.00
0.0000E+00
9.00
0.0000E+00
8.00
0.0000E+00
7.00
0.0000E+00
6.00
0.0000E+00
5.00
0.0000E+00
4.00
0.0000E+00
3.00
0.0000E+00
2.00
0.0000E+00
1.00
20.00
0.0000E+00
19.00
0.0000E+00
18.00
0.0000E+00
17.00
0.0000E+00
16.00
0.0000E+00
15.00
0.0000E+00
14.00
0.0000E+00
13.00
0.8583E-04
12.00
0.2429E-02
11.00
0.6621E-01
10.00
0.7014E+00
9.00
0.2159E+00
8.00
0.1384E-01
7.00
0.6332E-04
6.00
0.0000E+00
5.00
0.0000E+00
4.00
0.0000E+00
3.00
0.0000E+00
2.00
0.0000E+00
1.00
0.0000E+00
0.1455E+00
20.00
0.3238E-02
20.00
0.4349E-01
19.00
0.1123E-03
19.00
0.4316E-01
18.00
0.9497E-04
18.00
0.4206E-01
17.00
0.1036E-03
17.00
0.4335E-01
16.00
0.1092E-03
16.00
0.4352E-01
15.00
0.1164E-03
15.00
0.4367E-01
14.00
0.1325E-03
14.00
0.4311E-01
13.00
0.1798E-03
13.00
0.4296E-01
12.00
0.1926E-03
12.00
0.4301E-01
11.00
0.1555E-03
11.00
0.4291E-01
10.00
0.2083E-03
10.00
0.4266E-01
9.00
0.3722E-02
9.00
0.4296E-01
8.00
0.5889E-02
8.00
0.4222E-01
7.00
0.6986E-02
7.00
0.4215E-01
6.00
0.7670E-02
6.00
0.4208E-01
5.00
0.9771E-02
5.00
0.4211E-01
4.00
0.1175E-01
4.00
0.4194E-01
3.00
0.1495E-01
3.00
0.4228E-01
2.00
0.2231E-01
2.00
0.8487E-01
1.00
0.9123E+00
1.00
0.1000E+01 0
0.1000E+01 0
0.1000E+01 0
0.1000E+01 0
0.1000E+01
0.1000E+03 0
0.1177E+02 0
0.9146E+00 0
0.1158E+01 0
0.1031E+02
C-322
INPUT FILES
0.2
Ba se
Scenario A, Lake Eucha Dam selective outflow
Scenario B2, Aerate Segments 47-50
Time Averaged Volume Fraction
0.16
0.12
0.08
0.04
0
0
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 52. Environmental performance for 3 different scenario runs comparing dissolved
oxygen in a eutrophic system Eucha Reservoir in OK.
Hypolimnetic Aeration
This section describes the hypolimnetic aeration algorithm which allow a model user to add oxygen and additional mixing to a section of a waterbody that is controlled by an oxygen probe. The
CE-QUAL-W2 model reads the file, w2_aerate.npt, if the AERATEC control is ON in the
w2_con.npt file. This input file allows the model user to
1. Add oxygen mass to specified model segments and layers
2. Control the oxygen mass added by using oxygen probes located anywhere in the model
domain
3. Affect the mixing associated with the oxygen input in a qualitative method
This algorithm does not model the dynamics of a bubble diffuser. It merely allows the user to experiment with delivering oxygen at given rates to parts of the reservoir domain. This is an excellent tool for planning since it does allow the model user to determine the amount of oxygen required to be delivered to meet a certain water quality target.
C-323
INPUT FILES
The input file for these enhancements is shown below and is named: w2_aerate.npt. A discussion
of each line from the input file is included in the next sections.
CONTROL FILE FOR Hypolimnetic aeration
NAER
OUTPUTFILE
# of aerators
1
aeration.opt
kg O2/d
SEG#
KTOP#
KBOT# MASSRT
TIMON TIMOFF
31
25
30
1000.
1.0
125.0
DZFACT
5.
O2OFF
12.5
O2ON
11.0
iprb
31
kprb
30
An explanation of each term in the input file is shown in the table below:
Parameter
AERATION
NAER
Values (typical)
ON/OFF
Integer from 1 to the maximum number of aerators
OUTPUTFILE
SEG#
KTOP#
Output file name

Integer segment #
Top layer #
KBOT#
Bottom layer #
MASSRT
Rate of mass injection of air in

kg O2/day
Julian day
Julian day
Factor to multiply the vertical
mixing coefficient: 1-100
TIMON
TIMOFF
DZFACT
O2OFF
Dissolved oxygen concentration in mg/l
O2ON
Dissolved oxygen concentration in mg/l
iprb
Integer segment #
kprb
Integer layer #
Description
Turn on or off aeration/mixing
There is no limit to the number of aerators. These
can also be thought of as 1 aerator turned
ON/OFF at different time, so each aerator would
be a different cycle of the aerator
Location of aerator
Location of aerator 1 aerator can span more
than 1 vertical layer
Location of aerator - 1 aerator can span more than
1 vertical layer
Rate of mass injection of O2
Start date for aerator
End date for aerator
A factor of 1 means to use the model predicted
vertical mixing coefficient. A value of 100,
means to increase the mixing value by 100X. If
DZFACT=1, this assumes the aerator does not
mix the water column. If DZFACT>1, then DZ is
increased as a result of additional vertical mixing
induced by the aerator. One should use this as a
sensitivity analysis to see if an increase in vertical
mixing will affect the efficiency of the aerator or
whether it is desired or not.
Assuming we have a DO probe located at iprb
and kprb, this tells the model when to turn off the
aerator based on DO measurements at a user defined location
Assuming we have a DO probe located at iprb
and kprb, this tells the model when to turn on the
aerator based on DO measurements at a user defined location
Location of DO probe for turning ON/OFF the
aerator
Location of DO probe for turning ON/OFF the
aerator
C-324
INPUT FILES
An example of the use of a hypolimnetic aerator was inserted into for DeGray Lake during 1980 at
segment 31 over K layers 25 to 30 (see Figure 53). A dissolved oxygen probe was set at segment
31 and layer 30. This probe controlled the aeration input when the dissolved oxygen was below
11 mg/l it was turned ON and when it was at or above 12.5 mg/l it was turned OFF. Figure 54
shows the results of the cumulative dissolved oxygen input in kg and the dissolved oxygen concentration at the probe location.
Location of
aerators layers 25-30
Figure 53. Side view of DeGray Lake grid used for hypolimnetic aeration.
C-325
INPUT FILES
2/29/80
3/30/80
4/29/80
5/29/80
6/28/80
7/28/80
8/27/80
9/26/80
300000
14
Dissolved oxygen at probe, mg/l
Dissolved oxygen mass added, kg
12
200000
10
100000
8
Cumulative DO mass added, kg
Dissolved oxygen probe
6
80
SEG#
31
120
KTOP#
25
KBOT#
30
160
200
Julian day since January 1, 1980
MASSRT
1000.
TIMON
1.0
TIMOFF
125.0
DZFACT
5.
O2OFF
12.5
240
O2ON
11.0
iprb
31
280
kprb
30
Figure 54. Dissolved oxygen at probe location and cumulative oxygen added in kg over period of aeration (Julian day 1-125). Target dissolved oxygen at probe location was between
11 and 12.5 mg/l.
C-326
INPUT FILES
Meteorology File
The meteorologic input file contains the following data:
Variable Description
Name Format
Julian date
[JDAY]
F8.0
Air temperature, C
[TAIR]
F8.0
Dewpoint temperature, C
[TDEW]
F8.0
Wind speed, m sec-1
[WIND]
F8.0
Wind direction, rad
[PHI]
F8.0
Cloud cover (0 to 10)
[CLOUD]
F8.0
Incident short wave solar radiation, W m-2
[SRO]
F8.0
The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. Data is read in according to an F8.0 format which allows the user to override the
decimal point location according to the location specified in the input file. The field
widths must be the same as specified above.
2. The first two lines are ignored and can be used to comment the file.
3. The third line contains the variable names which are right justified according to the
input field. This line is also ignored although the preprocessor checks to ensure the
fields are aligned correctly.
4. Data can be input at any frequency and may vary during the simulation. The user
need only specify the Julian date corresponding to the data.
5. Short wave solar radiation is required if the user has set [SROC] to ON in the HEAT
EXCH card in the control file. Otherwise, this field is not required. This represents,
not global radiation, but only the penetrating short-wave solar radiation component.
6. Cloud cover is provided in tenths between 0 (no clouds) and 10 (fully cloudy).
Example
Sample meteorologic input file
JDAY
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
TAIR
7.8
3.3
3.3
2.2
6.4
7.5
1.9
1.7
TDEW
-0.9
1.3
1.3
-3.5
-2.4
2.4
-4.9
-6.6
WIND
2.19
4.75
4.75
3.33
1.86
4.00
4.83
4.00
PHI
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
CLOUD
8.0
6.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
10.0
2.0
0.0
SRO
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
There is a new option starting with Version 3.71 to use a free-format file rather than the fixed format shown above. When the first character in the first line contains the $ symbol, the model will
treat the file as being in free format. As in the fixed format file, the first 3 lines are ignored and
the data fields are in the same order the fixed format file except that the user is no longer limited
to 8 characters for each field. An example of a comma delimeted file is shown below and the
spreadsheet that was used to develop it.
Example
C-327
INPUT FILES
$Spokane International Airport met data 1/1/2001

Solar is from Odessa
JDAY,TAIR,TDEW,WIND,PHI,CLOUD,Solar,
1,-2.2,-3.3,2.57,2.62,10,0,
1.039,-2.2,-3.3,2.57,2.62,10,0,
1.081,-2.2,-3.9,3.09,1.75,10,0,
1.122,-2.2,-3.3,0,0,10,0,
1.164,-2.2,-3.3,2.06,0.87,10,0,
1.206,-2.2,-3.3,3.09,0.35,10,0,
1.247,-2.2,-2.8,3.09,0.35,10,0,
1.289,-2.2,-2.8,3.09,1.05,10,0,
1.331,-2.2,-2.8,3.09,1.05,10,0,
1.372,-1.7,-2.2,2.57,0.87,10,13.01,
1.414,-1.7,-1.7,0,0,10,64.47,
1.456,-1.1,-1.7,2.57,6.28,10,113.6,
1.497,-1.1,-1.1,2.57,0.7,10,152.29,
1.539,-0.6,-1.1,0,0,10,144.5,
1.581,-0.6,-1.1,0,0,10,100.71,
1.622,-1.1,-1.1,3.09,3.32,10,54.13,
1.664,-0.6,-1.1,0,0,10,20.68,
1.706,-1.1,-1.1,2.06,5.24,10,0,
In Excel this file looks like the following and can be written out as a csv file type.
$Spokane International
Airport met
data,
1/1/2001 to
12/31/2001
Solar
is
from
Odessa
JDAY
TAIR
TDEW
WIND
PHI
CLOUD Solar
1
-2.2
-3.3
2.57
2.62
10
0
1.039
-2.2
-3.3
2.57
2.62
10
0
1.081
-2.2
-3.9
3.09
1.75
10
0
1.122
-2.2
-3.3
0
0
10
0
1.164
-2.2
-3.3
2.06
0.87
10
0
1.206
-2.2
-3.3
3.09
0.35
10
0
1.247
-2.2
-2.8
3.09
0.35
10
0
1.289
-2.2
-2.8
3.09
1.05
10
0
1.331
-2.2
-2.8
3.09
1.05
10
0
1.372
-1.7
-2.2
2.57
0.87
10
13.01
1.414
-1.7
-1.7
0
0
10
64.47
1.456
-1.1
-1.7
2.57
6.28
10
113.6
1.497
-1.1
-1.1
2.57
0.7
10
152.29
1.539
-0.6
-1.1
0
0
10
144.5
1.581
-0.6
-1.1
0
0
10
100.71
1.622
-1.1
-1.1
3.09
3.32
10
54.13
1.664
-0.6
-1.1
0
0
10
20.68
1.706
-1.1
-1.1
2.06
5.24
10
0
1.747
-1.1
-1.1
2.06
0.35
10
0
1.789
-1.1
-1.1
2.57
0.87
10
0
1.831
-0.6
-1.1
2.57
0.87
10
0
1.872
-0.6
-1.1
2.57
0.87
10
0
1.914
-0.6
-1.1
3.6
1.4
10
0
1.956
-0.6
-1.1
3.6
0.87
10
0
1.997
-1.1
-1.1
4.63
1.05
10
0
2.039
-1.1
-1.1
4.63
1.22
10
0
2.081
-1.1
-1.1
4.63
1.22
10
0
2.122
-1.1
-1.1
4.12
0.7
10
0
2.164
-1.1
-1.1
3.6
1.05
10
0
2.206
-1.1
-1.1
2.57
0.7
10
0
2.247
-1.1
-1.7
3.09
5.59
10
0
2.289
-2.2
-2.8
0
0
7.5
0
Appendix C2.331
Input/Output
Data
Description
-3.3
-3.9
1.54
4.01
10
0
2.372
-2.2
-2.2
0
0
10
20.68
2.414
-1.1
-1.7
2.06
2.44
10
56.8
2.456
-1.7
-2.8
4.63
3.14
7.5
80.03
2.497
-1.1
-2.8
2.57
4.01
10
133.93
C-328
INPUT FILES
GATE
Dynamic Elevation for Structure Outflows

Whenver DYNELEV is set to ON in the control file, w2_con.npt, the model looks for the file,
dynselevX.npt, where X is the model branch #. This file contains the variable outlet elevation of
one or more structures for that branch.
First line:
Ignored as header/title
Second line:
Integer, IJS, # of structures (outlets) for this branch that have variable ESTR. The
following line is repeated IJS times (any text after IJS is ignored)
Third line:
Integer, NJS, Structure (Oulet) #, repeated IJS times showing the order of the structures to be read. (any text after NJS is ignored)
Fourth line
Ignored as header/title
Fifth line
JDAY, ESTR(NJS1),ESTR(NJS2),ESTR(NJS3),.... This is the Julian day and the

centerline elevation of each structure in m. These are not interpolated in the model
but are treated as step function changes in centerline elevation. There will be IJS
columns of ESTR information provided.
An example input file is shown below.

$Dynamic structure withdrawal file for JB=1
2,# of outlets to for this branch that have a variable ESTR
17, Outlet number for this branch that has a variable ESTR, Repeat on different line.
18, Outlet number for this branch that has a variable ESTR
Jday since 2001,Elevation_m_17,Elev_m_18
Repeat columns for each JS
731.0,101.7129968,125.2
781.0,101.7129968,125.2
831.0,121.9214826,125.2
921.0,121.9214826,127.5
931.0,115.8254084,127.5
951.0,109.7293343,128.5
971.0,103.6332602,128.5
991.0,101.7129968,129.0
1096.0,101.7129968,129.0
The $ as the first character of the first line means that the JDAY and elevation values are in free
format. Otherwise it is in 10f8.0:/(9f8.0) format.
C-329
GATE
INPUT FILES
Dynamic Pump Input File

Whenver DYNPUMP is set to ON in the control file, w2_con.npt, the model looks for the file,
dynpumpX.npt, where X is the pump #. This file is a time series that skips the first 3 lines, then
includes a column of Julian day (F8.0), elevation of the centerline of the pump withdrawal in m
(F8.0), elevation for turning the pump ON in m (F8.0), elevation for turning OFF the pump in m
(F8.0), and the pump flow rate in m3/s (F8.0). This file is treated as a step function input, i.e., there
is no linear interpolation between successive values. An example input file is shown below.
Dynamic pump input file
JDAY
1.000
60.000
90.000
160.000
365.000
EPU
456.
456.
456.
457.5
458.
EONPU
460.0
462.0
463.0
464.0
460.0
EOFFPU
459.0
460.0
461.0
462.0
462.0
QPU
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
C-330
INPUT FILES
GATE
Dynamic Pipe Input File

Whenver DYNPIPE is set to ON in the control file, w2_con.npt, the model looks for the file, dynpipe.npt. This file is a time series that skips the first 3 lines, then includes a column of Julian day
(F8.0), then every 8 columns it reads a number that is multiplied by the theoretical flow in the pipe.
This allows for turning a pipe ON or OFF in case the number is 1 or 0, respectively. Or if the flow
is throttled by closing a gate valve, the fraction of flow through the pipe can be given. This file is
treated as a step function input, i.e., there is no linear interpolation between successive values. An
example input file is shown below.
Chester Morse Lake Dynamic Pipe File.
Jday
Pipe1
Pipe2
1.00
1.000
75.00
0.030
265.00
0.050
269.00
0.159
290.00
0.300
306.00
1.000
311.00
1.000
349.00
0.000
362.00
1.000
606.00
0.000
630.00
0.043
635.00
0.057
636.00
0.071
645.00
0.143
654.00
0.171
655.00
0.143
657.00
0.129
663.00
0.143
665.00
0.157
682.00
1.000
683.00
1.000
964.00
1.000
985.00
0.000
992.00
0.057
998.00
0.086
1002.00
0.286
1012.00
0.357
1063.00
1.000
1375.00
0.000
1382.00
0.129
1384.00
0.157
1390.00
0.143
C-331
Pipe 1 = low level outlet, Pipe2 = Bypass valve
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GATE
INPUT FILES
Gate File
This file contains the dynamic gate height for each gate based on the rating curve supplied in the
gates section in the control file. One file is required for all the gates specified in the control file
and contains the following data for n gates:
Julian day
Gate#1 opening, m
Gate#2 opening, m
Gate#3 opening, m
Gate#4 opening, m
Gate#5 opening, m
Name Format
[JDAY]
F8.0
[GATEH]
F8.0
[GATEH]
F8.0
[GATEH]
F8.0
[GATEH]
F8.0
[GATEH]
F8.0
Gate#n opening, m
[GATEH]
.
F8.0

1. Data is read in according to an F8.0 format which allows the user to override the
decimal point location according to the location specified in the input file. The field
widths must be the same as specified above.
4. Data can be input at any frequency and may vary during the simulation. The user
need only specify the Julian date corresponding to the data.
5. After the Julian day field, there are n columns of F8.0 format corresponding to each
gate
6. The gate height is always treated as a step function rather than interpolated between
dates.
Example
Tainter gate opening, m
JDAY
1.00
200.30
204.65
209.50
368.00
GATEH
1.2
0
1.25
2.50
0
In some cases, gate openings can be used to open or close a valve or gate dynamically. In the
following example, the dynamic opening is either closed (0) or fully open (1). In either case, the
model uses the rating curve for the gate as specified in the control file.
Example
QGATE
simulating Willamette Falls 1999
C-332
INPUT FILES
Jday
1.00
200.30
204.65
209.50
368.00
GATE
Gate 1
1
0
1
0
0
Also, if the gate is specified as a dynamic weir ([DYNGC] is set to ZGT), then the bottom elevation is included in this file rather than the gate opening. For example, if flashboards are raised, the
weir equations will be used but with the dynamic weir crest elevation. The example below shows
a dynamic flashboard height.
Example
QGATE
Dynamic flashboards 1999
Jday Gate 1
1.00
23.5
200.30
25.5
204.65
25.5
209.50
23.5
368.00
23.5
This file has also been used to predict the flow through needle valves where a rating curve based
on the number of turns of the gate valve was developed. In this case, the dynamic height was
interpreted as turns of a valve and is dependent on the supplied rating curve.
Also, if the gate is specified as a flow rate ([DYNGC] is set to FLOW), then the flow rate is
included in this file rather than the gate opening. The example below shows a dynamic flow rate.
Example
QGATE
Flow rate for pumped storage between 2 reservoirs
Jday GATE 1 GATE 2
1.00
23.5
0.0
1.50
0.0
23.5
2.00
12.5
0.0
2.50
0.0
12.5
3.00
20.0
0.0
The model user can also use the dynamic weir algorithm to achieve a target water levelthat
changes over the year. When DYNGTC=ZGT, the elevation of the dynamic weir can be the target
water level in the reservoir. The rating curve equations defining the gate describe the reponse of
that weir/spillway. Under normal conditions, this would be a withdrawal at the vertical location of
the dynamic weir elevation. In many cases it is desired that the target water level be achieved, but
the flow is taken from a different target elevation. In that case the 2nd line in the gate file is not
ignored. To turn this on, the modle user must insert the following in the 2nd line:
Char 1-8: Title in all caps: EGT2ELEV
Char 9-16: Centerline elevation where the outflow will be removed in F8.0 format
This is repeated for the # of gates in F8.0 format. If you want to use the elevation specified in the
dynamic weir elevations, just set the elevation above to 0.0. Note the example below for 2 gates
both specified as dynamic weirs.
QGATE
C-333
GATE
EGT2ELEV
Jday
1.00
3.00
INPUT FILES
110.0
GATE 1
123.5
140.0
00.0
GATE 2
122.5
123.0
GATE1 would compute flow based on the dynamic weir elevation, but it would take the centerline of the withdrawal at 110.0 m. GATE2 would compute the flow based on the dynamic weir
elevation, and it would take the centerline of the withdrawal at elevation of the dynamic weir.
C-334
INPUT FILES
LIGHT EXTINCTION
Light Extinction File

The light extinction input file contains the following data for each waterbody:
Julian date
Light extinction, m-1
Name Format
[JDAY]
F8.0
[EXH2O]
F8.0
These data are usually obtained by Secchi disk measurements. Due to inaccuracies in these measurements, a more appropriate method is the measurement of light extinction directly using a photometer. If dynamic light extinction is read in, all other internal calculations of light extinction are
ignored. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. Input format for each field is F8.0 that allows the user to specify the decimal point
location.
3. The third line contains the variable name which is right justified according to the
4. The first field is the Julian date [JDAY], which can be entered at any frequency. The
frequency between updates may vary during the simulation.
5. The second field contains values for observed light extinction, m-1.
Example
Observed light extinction
JDAY
1.00
110.0
140.0
157.0
158.0
165.0
200.0
220.0
240.0
250.0
260.0
275.0
280.0
320.0
340.0
365.00
410.00
479.00
525.00
540.00
575.00
650.00
C-335
EXH20
0.20
0.25
0.34
0.41
0.44
0.45
0.38
0.25
0.20
0.24
0.20
0.24
0.27
0.35
0.40
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.30
0.41
0.30
0.25
WIND SHELTERING
INPUT FILES
Wind Sheltering Coefficient File

The wind sheltering input file contains the following data:
Julian date
Wind-sheltering coefficient
Name
[JDAY]
[WSC]
Format
F8.0
F8.0
This file contains the wind-sheltering as a function of segment and time. This is a representation of
having segment-by-segment wind velocity data, which is preferable if the data exist based on only
one meteorological station. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
location.
3. The third line contains the variable name which is right justified according to the
4. The first field is the Julian date, which can be entered at any frequency. The frequency between updates may vary during the simulation.
5. The next fields are the wind-sheltering coefficients for all model segments including
the boundary segments at the given Julian date.
6. The Julian date [JDAY] and wind-sheltering coefficient [WSC] are repeated as required to provide for dynamic wind sheltering.
7. Only one file is provided for all the model segments regardless of the number of
waterbodies.
Example
Alum Creek wind sheltering coefficients
JDAY
1.0
1.1
365.0
WSC
0.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.4
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
WSC
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
The model reads in a free format version of this file if the first character on the first line is $. An
example of this file type is shown below. The first 3 lines are ignored. Then each row starts with
the Julian day followed by the WSC coefficient for each model segment including boundary/inactive segments.
C-336
INPUT FILES
WIND SHELTERING
Example free format file type

$wsc file,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,Seg #s,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
JDAY,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20
1.0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
365.0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
In Excel part of the file looks like this. There is no wrapping of lines of data as in the fixed format
file. In this case the wind sheltering coefficient is 1.0. This file can then be written out as a csv
file type.
$wsc file
Seg #s
JDAY
1
365
C-337
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
4
1
1
5
1
1
6
1
1
7
1
1
8
1
1
9
1
1
10
1
1
11
1
1
12
1
1
13
1
1
14
1
1
15
1
1
16
1
1
17
1
1
18
1
1
19
1
1
20
1
1
SHADE
INPUT FILES
Shade Input File

The shade input file contains the following data (if in fixed format):
Segment Number
Dynamic shading or static shading
Vegetative elevation left bank, m
Vegetative elevation right bank, m
Distance to vegetation left bank, m
Distance to vegetation right bank, m
Shade reduction factor #1, left bank
Shade reduction factor #2, left bank
Shade reduction factor #1, right bank
Shade reduction factor #2, right bank
Topographic angle #1 at 0o, radians
Starting date for SRF#1, Julian day
Starting date for SRF#2, Julian day
Name Format
[SEG]
I8
[DYNSH]
F8.0
[VEL]
F8.0
[VER]
F8.0
[DL]
F8.0
[DR]
F8.0
[SRFL1]
F8.0
[SRFL2]
F8.0
[SRFR1]
F8.0
[SRFR2]
F8.0
[TOPO1]
F8.0
[TOPO2]
F8.0
[TOPO3]
F8.0
[TOPO4]
F8.0
[TOPO5]
F8.0
[TOPO6]
F8.0
[TOPO7]
F8.0
[TOPO8]
F8.0
[TOPO9]
F8.0
[TOPO10] F8.0
[TOPO11] F8.0
[TOPO12] F8.0
[TOPO13] F8.0
[TOPO14] F8.0
[TOPO15] F8.0
[TOPO16] F8.0
[TOPO17] F8.0
[TOPO18] F8.0
[JDSRF1]
F8.0
[JDSRF2]
F8.0
The file can also be written out as a comma delimeted input file rather than fixed format. When the
first character in line 1 is a $ character, the file format is in free format in the order listed above.
This file contains the shade information for computing the vegetative and topographic shading dynamically for a model segment. If the dynamic shading value[DYNSH] is set from 0 to 1, then
static shading is used and the shade factor takes on the specified value. This means that a dynamic
shading value [DYNSH] of 0.8 allows 80% of the incoming short-wave solar to reach the water
surface of that segment or 20% fully shaded. This would apply for all times. If dynamic shading
[DYNSH] is set to a negative value, then the remaining columns are read for dynamic shading
information and the shade percentage is computed dynamically.
C-338
INPUT FILES
SHADE
The shade file consists of four types of vegetative information for each bank of the river, topographic information, and the time for leaf growth and leaf fall if the trees are deciduous. More
detailed information on the shading model and data preparation is given in Appendix A and Annear,
et. al. (2001).
Table C-79 provides a description of the input variables controlling dynamic shading.
Table C-79. Description of Dynamic Shading Input Variables
Heading
Description
SEG
Segment number in the model include all segment numbers and leave blank those that are inactive.
DYNSH
If between 0 and 1, this is a non-dynamic constant shade reduction similar to that used in Version 3.0
and the columns to the right are ignored. If this number is negative, this means that the rest of the
columns to the right will be read and dynamic shading will be implemented.
VEL
Tree top elevation on the left bank (m). The elevation of the left bank plus the height of the tree/vegetation are used to provide the tree top elevation. This is the absolute elevation that the entire model is
referenced to. In most cases this is m, NGVD, or m MSL. This is not the elevation above the top of
the bank.
VER
Tree top elevation on the right bank (m).
CDL
Distance from the centerline of the river segment to the shade controlling line of vegetation on the left
bank (m).
CDR
Distance from the centerline of the river segment to the shade controlling line of vegetation on the
right bank (m).
SRFL1
Shade reduction factor, left bank. This applies from SRFJD1 to SRFJD2 (and over multiple years for
the same time period of the simulation goes over 360 days). It is based on the extent of vegetation
along the length of the segment and the density of the vegetation (0 to 1).
SRFL2
Shade reduction factor, left bank bank (0 to 1). This applies from SRFJD2 to SRFJD1 (and over multiple years for the same time period of the simulation goes over 360 days). It is based on the extent of
vegetation along the length of the segment and the density of the vegetation (0 to 1).
SRFR1
Shade reduction factor, right bank. This applies from SRFJD1 to SRFJD2 (and over multiple years for
the same time period of the simulation goes over 360 days). It is based on the extent of vegetation
along the length of the segment and the density of the vegetation (0 to 1).
SRFR2
Shade reduction factor, right bank (0 to 1). ). This applies from SRFJD2 to SRFJD1 (and over multiple years for the same time period if the simulation goes over 360 days). It is based on the extent of
vegetation along the length of the segment and the density of the vegetation (0 to 1).
TOPO1 to
TOPO18
Topographic inclination angle (radians) for every 20o around a segment starting with TOPO1 at 0o
North and moving clockwise. The topographic angles are most easily computed using Digital Elevation Maps (DEMs) and using GIS or other programs to automatically compute controlling topographic
angles from the DEM.
JDSRF1
Shading reduction factor Julian day for which SRF #1 starts to apply. This is typically thought ofas
leaf-out conditions for deciduous trees.
JDSRF2
Shading reduction factor Julian day for which SRF #2 starts to apply. This is typically thought of as
when deciduous trees loose their leaves.
The following discussion provides an overview of data development for the dynamic shading file.
C-339
SHADE
INPUT FILES
Vegetation Elevation
The algorithm uses elevations for the grid development so the vegetations elevation is used instead
of height. If shading is due to brush along side a river, the top elevation of the brush would be used
in the model. The tree top elevation consists of the vegetation height and the bank surface elevation
where the vegetation is standing as shown in Figure C-1. The vegetation height can be obtained
from field surveys or from a GIS vegetation coverage. The surface elevation of the banks can be
obtained from field surveys or from the U.S. Geological Survey digital elevation model (DEM).
The frequency of tree top elevation measurements along a river bank depends on the variability of
the controlling vegetation. The more comprehensive the elevation information, the more accurately
the model will simulate shade. Tree top elevations should be collected for both river banks.
Centerline Distance
The centerline distance is the distance between the river centerline and the controlling vegetation
on each bank. As shown in Figure C-1, the information will vary for each bank depending on the
location of the river centerline and the offset of the vegetation from the wetted edge. The frequency
of the distances should match the tree top elevation data and reflect the variability of the vegetation.
Less frequent data may be acceptable if there is not much variability in the controlling vegetation
and the stream width does not change much.
Figure C-1. Tree top elevation and vegetation offset from a river.
Shade reduction factor
C-340
INPUT FILES
SHADE
The shade reduction factor is based on the density and extent of the vegetation along the length of
each model segment. If shade producing vegetation exists along only half the length of a segment
and was 100% opaque, a shade reduction factor of 0.50 would be used. If shade was due to vegetation along only half of the segment with 80% density, then a shade reduction factor of 0.40 would
be used. The shade reduction factors, [SRFR1] and [SRFR2], are expressed as a fraction from 0.0
to 1.0.
The extent of the vegetation along the segment length will depend on the grid discretization and
the amount of vegetation. Vegetation density can be obtained from field surveys or from GIS
vegetation information. The shade reduction factor is designed to attenuate the shade since some
short-wave solar radiation penetrates the vegetation. The shade reduction factor should be developed for both banks and can be used as a calibration parameter if field data is uncertain or incomplete.
Topographic Shading
In addition to the vegetation near a river, the local topography can influence the amount of solar
radiation reaching the water surface. Figure C-2 illustrates the influence of topographic shading
on the water surface of a river.
The local topography around a river can be developed using survey information of the river channel
or from a digital elevation map (DEM). To characterize the influence of the topography, inclination
angles can be obtained every 20 degrees around each model segment center point as shown in
Figure C-3. For each 20-degree increment around a model segment, an array of elevation points
and their distances from the center point are obtained from the DEM. The elevations and distances
are then used to calculate the highest inclination angle relative to the center point. The distance
away from each segment center point that should be analyzed to obtain the controlling inclination
angle will vary depending on the terrain surrounding the river. Wide open channels will require
larger distances away from the channel to be analyzed than if the river channel is in a deep, narrow
canyon. Inclination angles are then generated that control topographic shading for each of the 20degree increments around a segments center point. The inclination angles are converted to radians
and specified in the dynamic shading input file [SHDFN]. The first column of the topographic
inclination angles represents the inclination angle at 0o north with subsequent inclination angles
obtained by moving clockwise to the east.
The shade algorithm can be used in both the northern and southern hemispheres, so inclination
angles are provided for 360 degrees around each segment. If there is no topographic shading in a
specific direction due to the latitude or the surrounding terrain, zero can be used as the inclination
angle. The model uses all 18 topographic inclination angles. Based on the position of the sun, the
algorithm will interpolate between the two nearest inclination angles to obtain the most appropriate
inclination angle. The inclination angles are then used in the shading algorithm to determine if
vegetative or topographic shading dominates at a specific time during the day.
C-341
SHADE
INPUT FILES
ST
SW
T
A0
B/2
CL
Figure C-2. The influence of topographic shading along a river.
Figure C-3. Topographic slices at three segments along a river.
C-342
INPUT
FILES
SHADE
Example
W2 Shading Input File, Vegetation and Topography, calibrated veg characteristics and corrected topography
SEGMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
DYNSH TTElELB TTElERB ClDISLB
ClDIRB
SRFLB1
SRFLB2
SRFRB1
SRFRB2
TOPO1
TOPO2
TOPO3
TOPO4
TOPO5
TOPO6
TOPO7
TOPO8
TOPO9
TOPO10
TOPO11
TOPO12
TOPO13
TOPO14
TOPO15
TOPO16
TOPO17
TOPO18
SRFJD1
SRFJD2
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
233.37
233.37
233.37
224.39
224.39
224.39
33.22
33.22
33.22
12.50
12.50
12.50
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.57
0.57
0.57
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.486
0.501
0.599
0.490
0.505
0.583
0.414
0.476
0.566
0.295
0.383
0.458
0.191
0.201
0.478
0.149
0.121
0.469
0.134
0.122
0.409
0.296
0.231
0.296
0.353
0.257
0.246
0.359
0.221
0.221
0.329
0.136
0.180
0.250
0.083
0.077
0.120
0.101
0.137
0.123
0.166
0.289
0.242
0.258
0.350
0.298
0.318
0.433
0.310
0.361
0.530
0.414
0.427
0.588
80.00
80.00
80.00
288.00
288.00
288.00
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
231.01
227.30
225.48
230.66
240.49
245.29
34.00
35.22
35.81
13.27
14.49
15.09
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.54
0.55
0.55
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.59
0.53
0.58
0.468
0.468
0.462
0.427
0.418
0.392
0.371
0.332
0.304
0.286
0.251
0.218
0.183
0.127
0.196
0.345
0.185
0.229
0.454
0.230
0.272
0.504
0.255
0.224
0.487
0.247
0.162
0.400
0.197
0.120
0.268
0.102
0.062
0.159
0.134
0.271
0.163
0.253
0.396
0.312
0.427
0.567
0.399
0.522
0.645
0.416
0.536
0.701
0.445
0.534
0.667
0.466
0.500
0.561
80.00
80.00
80.00
288.00
288.00
288.00
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
225.00
224.44
225.46
237.01
227.11
222.71
28.08
18.84
16.11
15.14
15.21
16.02
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.51
0.50
0.59
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.58
0.59
0.58
0.393
0.271
0.243
0.310
0.229
0.190
0.236
0.182
0.215
0.216
0.247
0.346
0.228
0.329
0.394
0.228
0.370
0.425
0.250
0.344
0.428
0.222
0.294
0.405
0.169
0.238
0.372
0.119
0.189
0.287
0.283
0.111
0.162
0.558
0.177
0.068
0.736
0.290
0.210
0.809
0.358
0.288
0.770
0.397
0.297
0.699
0.431
0.308
0.668
0.391
0.324
0.564
0.357
0.302
80.00
80.00
80.00
288.00
288.00
288.00
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
227.96
230.47
232.80
223.53
224.35
225.12
19.56
23.00
26.21
17.52
19.02
20.42
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.52
0.55
0.68
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.56
0.54
0.63
0.194
0.184
0.188
0.173
0.162
0.174
0.171
0.103
0.173
0.260
0.187
0.149
0.346
0.280
0.223
0.437
0.392
0.254
0.493
0.365
0.228
0.529
0.271
0.328
0.443
0.299
0.367
0.279
0.311
0.237
0.217
0.246
0.152
0.089
0.128
0.101
0.042
0.051
0.061
0.124
0.155
0.211
0.210
0.197
0.244
0.300
0.300
0.310
0.287
0.281
0.326
0.314
0.285
0.309
80.00
80.00
80.00
288.00
288.00
288.00
An example of a free format comma delimeted file is shown below. The first character in line 1 must be a $.
$W2 Shading InputFile Vegetation and Topography calibrated veg characteristics and corrected topography,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Segment, DynSh,TTleLB,TTEeRB,ClDisLB,ClDiRB,SRFLB1,SRFLB2,SRFRB1,SRFRB2,TOPO1,TOPO2,TOPO3,TOPO4,TOPO5,TOPO6,TOPO7,TOPO8,TOPO9,TOPO10,TOPO11,
TOPO12,TOPO13,TOPO14,TOPO15,TOPO16,TOPO17,TOPO18,SRFJD1,SRFJD2,
1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
2,-1,575,580,70,70,0,0.57,0,0.5,0.486,0.49,0.414,0.295,0.191,0.149,0.134,0.296,0.353,0.359,0.329,0.25,0.12,0.123,0.242,0.298,0.31,0.414,80,288,
3,1,568,566,70,70,0,0.57,0,0.5,0.501,0.505,0.476,0.383,0.201,0.121,0.122,0.231,0.257,0.221,0.136,0.083,0.101,0.166,0.258,0.318,0.361,0.427,80,288,
4,-1,562,565,70,70,0,0.57,0,0.5,0.599,0.583,0.566,0.458,0.478,0.469,0.409,0.296,0.246,0.221,0.18,0.077,0.137,0.289,0.35,0.433,0.53,0.588,80,288,
5,-1,568,565,70,70,0,0.57,0,0.5,0.599,0.583,0.566,0.458,0.478,0.469,0.409,0.296,0.246,0.221,0.18,0.077,0.137,0.289,0.35,0.433,0.53,0.588,80,288,
6,-1,544,546,70,70,0,0.57,0,0.5,0.599,0.583,0.566,0.458,0.478,0.469,0.409,0.296,0.246,0.221,0.18,0.077,0.137,0.289,0.35,0.433,0.53,0.588,80,288,
7,1,548,567,70,70,0,0.54,0,0.59,0.468,0.427,0.371,0.286,0.183,0.345,0.454,0.504,0.487,0.4,0.268,0.159,0.163,0.312,0.399,0.416,0.445,0.466,80,288,
8,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
C-343
INPUT FILES
INFLOW TEMPERATURE
Branch Inflow File

This file contains the inflow for a branch with an upstream flow boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch with an upstream flow boundary condition. This allows the user to update inflows for one branch independent of another
branch.
location.
5. The first field is the Julian date that can be entered at any frequency. The frequency
between updates may vary during the simulation.
6. The second field is the inflow rate, m3 sec-1.
7. Note that the inflow file CANNOT handle negative inflows like the distributed inflow file or tributary inflows.
Note the following example takes advantage of the algorithm's capability to use data at varying
frequencies.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample inflow file
JDAY
182.0000
182.5416
182.6250
182.6666
182.7916
182.8333
182.9166
185.5416
185.6250
185.6666
185.7916
185.8333
185.9166
186.5416
QIN
0.0
283.0
566.0
1699.0
566.0
283.0
0.0
283.0
566.0
1699.0
566.0
283.0
0.0
283.0
the data fields are in the same order as the fixed format file except that the user is no longer limited to 8 characters for each field. An example of a comma delimeted file is shown below.
$Flow data for 2012,,
,,
JDAY,q(m3/s),
1,9.12611182703854,
2,12.1179791828734,
3,4.2113553278442,
4,9.94341024175013E-03,
5,9.1933302008558E-03,
6,.011356298978275,
7,1.06203328212151E-02,
C-344
INPUT FILES
BRANCH INFLOW TEMPERATURE
Branch Inflow Temperature File

This file contains the inflow temperatures for a branch with an upstream flow boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch with an upstream flow boundary condition. This allows the user to update temperatures for one branch independent of
another branch.
location.
6. The second field is the inflow temperature, C.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample inflow temperature file
JDAY
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.00
12.00
13.00
14.00
15.00
16.00
TIN
6.80
6.70
7.00
6.30
6.40
6.10
6.60
5.70
5.20
5.40
7.10
6.60
5.50
5.60
7.30
9.50
the data fields are in the same order as the fixed format file except that the user is no longer limited to 8 characters for each field. An example of a comma delimeted file is shown below.
$Temp data for 2012,,
,,
JDAY
,Temp,
1,15.04924,
1.125,13.61301,
1.25,16.16824,
1.375,20.82835,
1.5,23.3214,
1.625,22.30952,
1.75,20.3509,
C-345
BRANCH INFLOW CONCENTRATION
INPUT FILES
Branch Inflow Constituent Concentration File

This file contains the inflow concentrations for a branch with an upstream flow boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. If constituents are being modeled, a separate file is required for each branch with an
upstream flow boundary condition. This allows the user to update constituent concentrations for one branch independent of another branch.
2. Input format for all fields is F8.0 that allows the user to specify the decimal point
location. The number of fields is determined by (6) below and they are always located on one line.
4. The next line contains the abbreviations for the constituent names that are right justified according to the input field. This line is also ignored although the preprocessor
checks to ensure the fields are aligned correctly.
6. The remaining fields contain the concentration for each constituent specified on the
Inflow Active Constituent Control card. Only those constituents specified as active on the Inflow Active Constituent Control card are included in the constituent
inflow concentration file.
There is also a free format option for this file. Whenever the first character on the first line is a $
character, the model assumes the input is in free format rather than fixed format. Besides allowing the use of Excel and easy exporting to a csv file type, this also allows one to not be constrained by the 8 column width of the concentration value. An example is shown below.
C-346
INPUT FILES
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 constituent inflow concentration sample input file
JDAY
1.040
1.100
1.200
1.300
1.400
1.500
1.600
1.700
1.800
1.900
2.000
PO4
0.030
0.030
0.029
0.048
0.043
0.043
0.047
0.046
0.045
0.044
0.034
NH4
0.010
0.011
0.012
0.017
0.018
0.013
0.006
0.001
0.002
0.005
0.022
NOx
0.300
0.307
0.323
0.458
0.441
0.498
0.542
0.565
0.577
0.579
0.480
LDOM
0.1000
0.1040
0.1100
0.1250
0.1360
0.1430
0.1530
0.1690
0.1730
0.1790
0.1230
RDOM
0.1000
0.0991
0.0968
0.0944
0.0936
0.0874
0.0852
0.0820
0.0790
0.0724
0.0146
LPOM
0.1000
0.0989
0.0963
0.0935
0.0924
0.0861
0.0837
0.0804
0.0773
0.0705
0.0142
RPOM
0.1000
0.0989
0.0963
0.0936
0.0925
0.0862
0.0838
0.0805
0.0773
0.0706
0.0141
CBOD1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
0.003
CBOD2
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.020
0.026
0.033
CBOD3
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.008
0.032
0.041
0.055
0.058
CBOD4
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.229
0.167
0.192
0.241
0.248
0.249
0.249
0.250
CBOD5
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.003
0.010
0.011
0.015
0.017
0.016
0.078
0.715
ALG1
0.100
0.098
0.095
0.091
0.090
0.084
0.083
0.081
0.077
0.071
0.042
DO
12.000
12.000
11.800
11.900
11.900
11.900
12.000
12.000
11.900
11.800
11.800
Example Free Format
[Note the file below is wrapped for viewing convenience since it has 62 state variables]
$Concentration file for segment 8,6,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
JDAY,TDS,Conduct,ISS1,PO4,NH4,NOx,LDOM,RDOM,LPOM,RPOM,1CBOD,2CBOD,3CBOD,4CBOD,5CBOD,6CBOD,7CBOD,8CBOD,9CBOD,10CBO
D,1CBODP,2CBODP,3CBODP,4CBODP,5CBODP,6CBODP,7CBODP,8CBODP,9CBODP,10CBODP,1CBODN,2CBODN,3CBODN,4CBODN,5CBODN,6CBOD
N,7CBODN,8CBODN,9CBODN,10CBODN,ALG1,ALG2,ALG3,DO,TIC,ALK,LDOM_P,RDOM_P,LPOM_P,RPOM_P,LDOM_N,RDOM_N,LPOM_N,RPOM_N
1,0,0,0,3.00E-02,1.00E02,0.3,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.1,0.1,0.1,12,5,19.8,5.00E04,5.00E-04,5.00E-04,5.00E-04,8.00E-03,8.00E-03,8.00E-03,8.00E-03
1.01,0.118,0.208,.123-105,3.00E-02,1.02E-02,0.301,0.1,9.99E-02,0.102,9.99E-02,.330-233,.336-139,.389104,0,0,0,0,.449-319,.185-274,0,.679-235,.783-142,.912-107,0,0,0,0,.380-321,.539-277,0,.322-234,.369-140,.119105,0,0,0,0,.389-320,.539-277,0,9.98E-02,9.99E-02,9.99E-02,12,5.02,19.9,5.02E-04,5.00E-04,4.99E-04,4.99E04,8.04E-03,7.99E-03,7.99E-03,7.99E-03
1.02,0.235,0.413,3.18E-75,3.00E-02,1.03E-02,0.302,0.101,0.1,0.104,9.99E-02,.965-198,.279-107,1.01E73,0,0,0,0,.169-278,.332-233,0,.199-199,.650-110,2.37E-76,0,0,0,0,.143-280,.966-236,0,.943-199,.306-108,3.08E75,0,0,0,0,.146-279,.966-236,0,9.98E-02,9.98E-02,0.1,12,5.04,19.9,5.05E-04,5.00E-04,4.99E-04,5.00E-04,8.09E03,8.00E-03,7.99E-03,7.99E-03
In Excel part of the input file looks like this:
C-347

Concentr ation fi
le for s
JDAY
Conduct ISS1
PO4
NH4
NOx
LDOM
RDOM
LPOM
RPOM
1CBOD 2CBOD 3CBOD 4CBOD
0
0 3.00E-02 1.00E-02
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0
0
0
0.208 .123-105 3.00E-02 1.02E-02
0.301
0.1 9.99E-02
0.102 9.99E-02 .330-233 .336-139 .389-104
0.413 3.18E-75 3.00E-02 1.03E-02
0.302
0.101
0.1
0.104 9.99E-02 .965-198 .279-107 1.01E-73
0.547 4.09E-64 3.00E-02 1.04E-02
0.303
0.101
0.1
0.106 9.99E-02 .412-185 2.38E-97 1.32E-62
0.674 5.12E-59 3.00E-02 1.05E-02
0.303
0.101 9.98E-02
0.106 9.97E-02 .203-176 2.82E-90 1.64E-57
0.851 5.59E-55 2.99E-02 1.06E-02
0.303
0.102 9.96E-02
0.108 9.95E-02 .379-170 4.02E-85 1.79E-53
1.09 5.58E-52 2.99E-02 1.08E-02
0.304
0.102 9.95E-02
0.112 9.94E-02 .407-164 2.29E-80 1.82E-50
1.42 2.28E-49 2.99E-02 1.11E-02
0.305
0.103 9.94E-02
0.115 9.92E-02 .353-156 6.05E-76 7.03E-48
2.15 3.82E-47 2.99E-02 1.14E-02
0.308
0.104 9.91E-02
0.119 9.89E-02 .342-143 3.52E-71 1.43E-45
3.41 8.16E-44 2.98E-02 1.21E-02
0.313
0.105 9.87E-02
0.123 9.85E-02 .841-129 1.37E-67 7.75E-42
6.06 9.85E-41 2.96E-02 1.31E-02
0.323
0.105 9.78E-02
0.126 9.75E-02 .381-117 7.12E-65 3.59E-39
9.16 1.00E-33 2.94E-02 1.42E-02
0.335
0.105 9.68E-02
0.13 9.65E-02 .656-104 4.67E-62 3.68E-32
12.3 7.49E-23 2.92E-02 1.53E-02
0.348
0.105 9.58E-02
0.133 9.55E-02 4.59E-94 5.22E-59 7.09E-23
TDS
1
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.1
1.11
1.12
0
0.118
0.235
0.311
0.383
0.484
0.619
0.812
1.24
1.98
3.54
5.38
7.25
egment 8
INPUT FILES
5CBOD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6CBOD 7CBOD 8CBOD

0
0
0
0
0
0
0 .449-319
0
0
0 .169-278
0
0
0 .921-260
0
0
0 .151-245
0
0
0 .289-235
0
0
0 .541-227
0
0 .855-320 .329-217
0
0 .295-309 .516-204
0 .101-316 .624-299 .766-190
0 .280-303 .151-285 .897-174
0 .145-288 .782-271 .502-162
0 .135-277 .729-260 .685-150
C-348
INPUT FILES
BRANCH OUTFLOW
Branch Outflow File

This file contains the outflow for a branch with a downstream flow boundary condition. The
following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch with a downstream flow boundary condition. This allows the user to update outflows for one branch independent of another
branch.
location. There are a maximum of 10 fields to a line. If there are more outflows
than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line with blanks
inserted in the Julian date field.
4. The next line contains the variable names which are right justified according to the
6. The remaining fields are the outflow rate, m3 sec-1.
7. A separate column of outflow values must be specified for each outlet structure.
character, the model assumes the input is in free format rather than fixed format. Besides allowing the use of Excel and easy exporting to a csv file type, this also allows one to not be constrained by the 8 column width of the concentration value nor be constrained by warpping lines
when there are more than 9 outlets in a branch. An example is shown below.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample outflow file
JDAY
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
QOUT
8.13
6.77
18.60
0.60
7.50
2.87
QOUT
8.13
6.77
18.60
0.60
7.50
2.87
QOUT
8.13
6.77
18.60
0.60
7.50
2.87
QOUT
QOUT
QOUT
QOUT
QOUT
QOUT
Free format example
[Note the file below is wrapped for viewing convenience since it has 17 outelts for 1 branch]
$Penstock flows and spill,,,,% of lower leakage,,20,%,,,,,,,,,,,
,P1-O,P1-A,P1-U,P1-M,P1-L,P2-O,P2-A,P2-U,P2-M,P2-L,P3-O,P3-A,P3-U,P3-M,P3-L,,,
Julian
day,Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m
3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),Q(m3/s),QSPILL,QPP,
730.5,0.962772798,0,0,0,0,3.4093483788,0,0,0,13.6373935152,5.2839236502,0,0,0,2
1.1356946008,0,2.69009789124642,
C-349
BRANCH OUTFLOW
INPUT FILES
731.5,0.962772798,0,0,0,0,5.0007551802,0,20.0030207208,0,0,3.766140651,0,0,0,15
.064562604,0,2.63346425143071,
732.5,0.962772798,0,0,0,0,3.5735860914,0,14.2943443656,0,0,5.040398766,0,0,0,20
.161595064,0,2.69009789124642,
733.5,0.962772798,0,0,0,0,0.1925545596,0,0.7702182384,0,0,8.834856264,0,0,0,35.
339425056,0,2.71841471115428,
734.5,0.962772798,0,0,0,0,4.1172695538,0,16.4690782152,0,0,6.0484785192,0,0,0,2
4.1939140768,0,2.54851379170714,
735.5,0.962772798,0,0,0,0,10.0977876402,0,40.3911505608,0,0,1.189307574,0,0,0,0
,0,2.57683061161499,
In Excel this looks like the following:

$Penstock flows and spill
% of lower leakage
25.00 %
P1-O
P1-A
P1-U
P1-M
P1-L
P2-O
P2-A
P2-U
P2-M
P2-L
P3-O
P3-A
P3-U
P3-M
P3-L
Julian day Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) Q(m3/s) QSPILL
QPP
730.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4.26
0.00
0.00
0.00
12.79
6.60
0.00
0.00
0.00
19.81
0.00
731.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
6.25
0.00
18.75
0.00
0.00
4.71
0.00
0.00
0.00
14.12
0.00
732.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4.47
0.00
13.40
0.00
0.00
6.30
0.00
0.00
0.00
18.90
0.00
733.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.24
0.00
0.72
0.00
0.00
11.04
0.00
0.00
0.00
33.13
0.00
734.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.15
0.00
15.44
0.00
0.00
7.56
0.00
0.00
0.00
22.68
0.00
735.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
12.62
0.00
37.87
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
736.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
11.31
0.00
33.94
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
737.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
10.70
0.00
32.11
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
738.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
11.47
0.00
34.40
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
739.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
12.97
0.00
38.91
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
740.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
13.95
0.00
41.86
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
741.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
15.26
0.00
45.77
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
742.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
19.28
0.00
57.85
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
743.50
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
20.01
0.00
60.02
0.00
0.00
1.19
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C-350
2.69
2.63
2.69
2.72
2.55
2.58
2.46
2.41
2.46
2.41
2.41
2.46
2.61
3.06
INPUT FILES
WITHDRAWAL
Withdrawal File
This contains the outflow for each withdrawal specified on the Inflow/Outflow Dimensions card.
1. The order in which withdrawal outflows appear in the file must correspond with the
order specified on the Withdrawal Segment and the Withdrawal Elevation cards.
2. Input format for each field is F8.0 with 10 fields to a line. The F8.0 input field
allows the user to specify the decimal point location.
6. The remaining fields are the withdrawal outflow rate, m3 sec-1
7. Outflows from a single withdrawal structure spanning more than one layer in the
computational grid can be divided up into several outflows and the total outflow
apportioned among them.
8. If there are more withdrawals than can be specified on one line, then they are continued on the next line with blanks inserted under the JDAY field.
character, the model assumes the input is in free format rather than fixed format. Besides allowing the use of Excel and easy exporting to a csv file type, this also allows one to not be constrained by the 8 column width of the concentration value nor be constrained by warpping lines
when there are more than 9 outlets in a branch. See the branch outflow file as an example.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample withdrawal outflow file
JDAY
182.0000
182.2500
183.0000
183.2500
C-351
QWD
51.
51.
0.
0.
51.
51.
0.
0.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
QWD
51.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
51.
51.
51.
51.
51.
51.
51.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
TRIBUTARY INFLOW
INPUT FILES

This file contains the inflows for a tributary specified on the Tributary Segment card. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each tributary. This allows the user to update inflows
for one tributary independent of another tributary.
location.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample tributary inflow file
JDAY
1.0
5.0
12.0
23.0
35.0
74.5
74.7
75.0
75.5
80.0
80.5
90.0
112.0
QTR
22.8
44.5
31.2
80.4
50.6
103.0
185.6
212.3
178.6
123.4
78.3
46.5
35.9
the data fields are in the same order as the fixed format file except that the user is no longer limited to 8 characters for each field. An example of a comma delimeted file is shown in the Branch
Inflow file description.
C-352
TRIBUTARY INFLOW TEMPERATURE
INPUT FILES
Tributary Inflow Temperature File

This file contains the inflow temperatures for a tributary specified on the Tributary Segment card.
1. A separate file is required for each tributary. This allows the user to update inflow
temperatures for one tributary independent of another tributary.
location.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample tributary inflow temperature file
JDAY
1.0
5.0
12.0
23.0
35.0
74.5
74.7
75.0
75.5
80.0
80.5
90.0
TTR
10.3
9.5
10.1
8.6
11.2
13.9
13.1
12.8
12.5
12.6
12.7
15.4
Temperature Inflow file description.
C-353
INPUT FILES
TRIBUTARY INFLOW CONCENTRATION
Tributary Inflow Concentration File

This file contains the inflow constituent concentrations for each tributary specified on the Tributary
Segment card. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. If constituents are being modeled, a separate file is required for each tributary. This
allows the user to update constituent inflow concentrations for one tributary independent of another tributary.
4. The next line contains the abbreviations for the constituent names which are right
justified according to the input field. This line is also ignored although the preprocessor checks to ensure the fields are aligned correctly.
Tributary Active Constituent Control card. Only those constituents specified as
active on the Tributary Active Constituent Control card may be included in the
tributary inflow concentration file.
character, the model assumes the input is in free format rather than fixed format. Besides allowing the use of Excel and easy exporting to a csv file type, this also allows one to not be constrained by the 8 column width of the concentration value. An example is shown in the Inflow
concentration file section above.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample tributary constituent inflow concentration file
JDAY CLFORM SSOLID
LDOM
RDOM
1.
17.
62. 7.333 17.111
8.
13.
0.0 8.000 18.667
15.
11.
17. 9.333 21.778
22.
14.
34. 10.000 23.333
29.
17.
38. 4.467 10.422
36.
101.
24. 3.867 9.022
43.
10.
11. 4.133 9.644
ALGAE
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
LPOM
0.9
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.2
0.2
PO4
0.02
0.01
0.00
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.02
NH4
0.10
0.03
0.01
0.00
0.11
0.00
0.07
NO3
0.42
0.37
0.17
0.20
0.26
0.23
0.20
O2
13.9
14.0
10.0
10.4
11.6
12.2
12.2
Fe
0.4
0.2
0.3
1.6
0.4
0.3
0.1
C-354
DISTRIBUTED TRIBUTARY INFLOW
INPUT FILES
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow File

This file contains the inflows for a distributed tributary specified on the Distributed Tributary card.
1. A separate file is required for each distributed tributary. This approach allows the
user to update inflows for one distributed tributary independent of another distributed tributary.
location.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample distributed tributary inflow file
JDAY
1.0
5.0
12.0
23.0
35.0
74.5
74.7
75.0
75.5
80.0
80.5
90.0
QDTR
22.8
44.5
31.2
80.4
50.6
103.0
185.6
212.3
178.6
123.4
78.3
46.5
Inflow file description.
C-355
INPUT FILES
TEMPERATURE
DISTRIBUTED TRIBUTARY
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow Temperature File

This file contains the inflow temperatures for a distributed tributary specified on the Distributed
Tributary card. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each distributed tributary. This allows the user to
update inflow temperatures for one distributed tributary independent of another distributed tributary.
location.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample tributary inflow temperature file
JDAY
1.0
5.0
12.0
23.0
35.0
74.5
74.7
75.0
75.5
80.0
80.5
TDTR
10.3
9.5
10.1
8.6
11.2
13.9
13.1
12.8
12.5
12.6
12.7
Temperature Inflow file description.
C-356
DISTRIBUTED TRIBUTARY CONCENTRATION
INPUT FILES
Branch Distributed Tributary Inflow Concentration File

This file contains the inflow concentrations for a distributed tributary specified on the Distributed
Tributary card. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. If constituents are being modeled, a separate file is required for each branch. This
allows the user to update constituent inflow concentrations for one branch independent of another branch.
4. The next line contains the abbreviations for the constituent names which are right
Distributed Tributary Active Constituent Control card. Only those constituents
specified as active on the Distributed Tributary Active Constituent Control card
may be included in the distributed tributary inflow concentration file.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample distributed tributary constituent inflow concentration file
JDAY CLFORM
1.
17.
8.
13.
15.
11.
22.
14.
29.
17.
C-357
ISS
LDOM
RDOM
62. 7.333 17.111
0.0 8.000 18.667
17. 9.333 21.778
34. 10.000 23.333
38. 4.467 10.422
ALGAE DETRIT
0.0
0.9
0.0
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
PO4
0.02
0.01
0.00
0.05
0.01
NH4
0.10
0.03
0.01
0.00
0.11
NO3
0.42
0.37
0.17
0.20
0.26
O2
13.9
14.0
10.0
10.4
11.6
Fe
0.4
0.2
0.3
1.6
0.4
INPUT FILES
PRECIPITATION
Branch Precipitation File

This file contains the precipitation values for a branch and is needed only if the precipitation option
[PRC] is turned on. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch. This allows the user to update precipitation for one branch independent of another branch if needed.
location.
6. The second field is the precipitation rate, m sec-1.
Note the following example takes advantage of the algorithm's capability to use data at varying
frequencies.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample precipitation file where Pre is in m/s
JDAY
182.0000
182.5416
182.6250
182.6666
188.475
189.500
PRE
0.000
1.E-6
2.E-6
0.000
2.E-6
0.000
C-358
PRECIPITATION TEMPERATURE
INPUT FILES
Branch Precipitation Temperature File

This file contains the precipitation temperatures for a branch and is needed only if the precipitation
option [PRC] is turned on. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch. This allows the user to update temperatures for one branch independent of another branch.
location.
6. The second field is the precipitation temperature, C.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample precipitation temperature file
JDAY
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.00
12.00
C-359
TPR
6.80
6.70
7.00
6.30
6.40
6.10
6.60
5.70
5.20
5.40
7.10
6.60
INPUT FILES
UPSTREAM HEAD
Branch Precipitation Concentration File

This file contains the precipitation concentrations for a branch and is needed only if the precipitation option [PRC] is turned on. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. If constituents are being modeled, a separate file is required for each branch. This
allows the user to update constituent concentrations for one branch independent of
another branch.
4. The next line contains the abbreviations for the constituent names that are right justified according to the input field. This line is also ignored although the preprocessor
checks to ensure the fields are aligned correctly.
Precipitation Active Constituent Control card. Only those constituents specified
as active on the Precipitation Active Constituent Control card may be included
in the constituent inflow concentration file. In the following example, only DO has
been included.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 constituent precipitation concentration sample input file
JDAY
180.000
190.000
195.000
220.000
DO
8.7
8.2
8.0
7.8
C-360
UPSTREAM HEAD ELEVATION
INPUT FILES

This file contains the elevations for a branch with an external upstream head boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch with an external upstream head boundary
condition. This allows the user to update elevations for one branch independent of
another branch.
location.
6. The next field is the external head elevation (m above datum specified on the
LOCATION card).
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample external head elevation file
JDAY
180.000
180.050
180.100
180.150
180.200
C-361
ELUH
431.12
431.15
431.20
431.25
431.30
INPUT FILES
UPSTREAM HEAD TEMPERATURE

This file contains the upstream temperature profiles for a branch with an external upstream head
boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
location.
6. The next fields are the upstream boundary temperatures, C
7. Temperature values must be specified for each cell starting from layer two and extending to the bottom active layer at the upstream segment. If the values do not all
fit on one line, then they are continued on the next line with the first field (corresponding to the Julian date field) left blank. The reason why the temperatures must
start at layer two is the water surface may vary over many layers during the simulation and it is impossible to know beforehand exactly what time layers will be added
or subtracted. When preparing the boundary temperature profiles, it is best to assign
boundary temperatures starting from the bottom layer. Once the surface layer has
been reached, then use this value to assign values up to layer two. In the following
example, the surface layer [KT] starts out at layer six and the bottom is at layer 22.
The first four values correspond to layers two through five and must be defined even
if they are never used.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample external upstream boundary temperature file
JDAY
180.500
187.500
TUH
19.3
18.4
12.8
20.3
19.4
12.8
TUH
19.3
18.0
12.8
20.3
19.0
12.8
TUH
19.3
17.0
12.8
20.3
18.0
12.8
TUH
19.3
15.0
TUH
19.3
14.0
TUH
19.0
13.5
TUH
18.8
13.2
TUH
18.7
13.0
TUH
18.6
12.8
20.3
15.5
20.3
14.0
20.0
13.5
19.8
13.2
19.7
13.0
19.6
12.8
C-362
UPSTREAM HEAD CONCENTRATION
INPUT FILES
Branch External Upstream Head Constituent Concentration File

This file contains the upstream constituent concentration profiles for a branch with an external
upstream head boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. If constituents are being modeled, then a separate file is required for each branch.
This allows the user to update temperatures for one branch independent of another
branch.
location.
6. The next fields are the upstream boundary constituent concentrations.
7. Constituents must appear in the same order as they are turned on in the Active Constituent card. A boundary concentration is required for each active constituent
(except water age). If the consitituent name is defined as AGE in the CST
ACTIVE control file, concentrations for this constituent in the boundary condition
will be assumed to be zero and will not be read by the model in the head boundary
condition constituent files.
8. Concentration values must be specified for each cell starting from layer two and
extending to the bottom active layer at the upstream segment. If the values do not
all fit on one line, then they are continued on the next line with the first field (corresponding to the Julian date field) left blank. The reason why the concentrations must
or subtracted. When preparing the boundary concentration profiles, it is best to assign concentrations starting from the bottom layer. Once the surface layer has been
reached, then use this value to assign values up to layer two. In the following example, the surface layer [KT] starts out at layer six and the bottom is at layer 22.
if they are never used. Salinity and dissolved oxygen are the only values specified
as active.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample external upstream boundary constituent concentration file
JDAY
180.000
180.000
190.000
190.000
C-363
CUH
23.5
27.0
30.6
9.0
8.6
5.5
23.5
27.0
30.6
9.0
CUH
23.5
28.0
30.6
9.0
8.4
5.5
23.5
28.0
30.6
9.0
CUH
23.5
29.0
30.6
9.0
8.0
5.5
23.5
29.0
30.6
9.0
CUH
23.5
29.5
30.6
9.0
7.5
5.5
23.5
29.5
30.6
9.0
CUH
23.5
30.0
CUH
23.9
30.2
CUH
24.5
30.4
CUH
25.0
30.6
CUH
26.0 !TDS
30.6
9.0
7.0
9.0
6.0
9.0
5.5
8.8
5.5
8.7 !DO
5.5
23.5
30.0
23.9
30.2
24.5
30.4
25.0
30.6
26.0 !TDS
30.6
9.0
9.0
9.0
8.8
8.7 !DO
INPUT FILES
8.6
5.0
UPSTREAM HEAD CONCENTRATION

8.4
5.0
8.0
5.0
7.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
C-364
DOWNSTREAM HEAD ELEVATION
INPUT FILES

This file contains the elevations for a branch with an external downstream head boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. A separate file is required for each branch with an external downstream head boundary condition. This allows the user to update elevations for one branch independent
of another branch.
location.
6. The next field is the external head elevation (m above datum specified on the Initial
Condition card.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample external downstream head elevation file
JDAY
180.000
180.050
180.100
180.150
180.200
C-365
ELUH
431.12
431.15
431.20
431.25
431.30
INPUT FILES
DOWNSTREAM HEAD TEMPERATURE

This file contains the downstream temperature profiles for a branch with an external downstream
head boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
location.
6. The next fields are the downstream boundary temperatures, C
7. Temperature values must be specified for each cell starting from layer two and extending to the bottom active layer at the downstream segment. If the values do not
all fit on one line, then they are continued on the next line with the first field (corresponding to the Julian date field) left blank. The reason why the temperatures must
or subtracted. When preparing the boundary temperature profiles, it is best to assign
boundary temperatures starting from the bottom layer. Once the surface layer has
been reached, then use this value to assign values up to layer two. In the following
example, the surface layer [KT] starts out at layer six and the bottom is at layer 22.
if they are never used.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample external downstream boundary temperature file
JDAY
180.500
187.500
TUH
19.3
18.4
12.8
20.3
19.4
12.8
TUH
19.3
18.0
12.8
20.3
19.0
12.8
TUH
19.3
17.0
12.8
20.3
18.0
12.8
TUH
19.3
15.0
TUH
19.3
14.0
TUH
19.0
13.5
TUH
18.8
13.2
TUH
18.7
13.0
TUH
18.6
12.8
20.3
15.5
20.3
14.0
20.0
13.5
19.8
13.2
19.7
13.0
19.6
12.8
C-366
DOWNSTREAM HEAD CONCENTRATION
INPUT FILES

This file contains the downstream constituent concentration profiles for a branch with an external
downstream head boundary condition. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
location.
6. The next fields are the downstream boundary constituent concentrations.
7. Constituents must appear in the same order as they are turned on in the Active Constituent card. A boundary concentration profile is required for each active constituent (except water age). If the consitituent name is defined as AGE in the CST
ACTIVE control file, concentrations for this constituent in the boundary condition
will be assumed to be zero and will not be read by the model in the head boundary
condition constituent files.
8. Concentration values must be specified for each cell starting from layer two and
extending to the bottom active layer at the downstream segment. If the values do
not all fit on one line, then they are continued on the next line with the first field
(corresponding to the Julian date field) left blank. The reason why the concentrations must start at layer two is the water surface may vary over many layers during
the simulation and it is impossible to know beforehand exactly what time layers will
be added or subtracted. When preparing the boundary concentration profiles, it is
best to assign concentrations starting from the bottom layer. Once the surface layer
has been reached, then use this value to assign values up to layer two. In the following example, the surface layer [KT] starts out at layer six and the bottom is at layer
22. The first four values correspond to layers two through five and must be defined
even if they are never used. Salinity and dissolved oxygen are the only values specified as active.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample external downstream boundary constituent concentration file
JDAY
180.000
Salinity
180.000
Temp
190.000
Salinity
190.000
Temp
C-367
CUH
23.5
27.0
30.6
9.0
8.6
5.5
23.5
27.0
30.6
9.0
8.6
5.0
CUH
23.5
28.0
30.6
9.0
8.4
5.5
23.5
28.0
30.6
9.0
8.4
5.0
CUH
23.5
29.0
30.6
9.0
8.0
5.5
23.5
29.0
30.6
9.0
8.0
5.0
CUH
23.5
29.5
30.6
9.0
7.5
5.5
23.5
29.5
30.6
9.0
7.0
5.0
CUH
23.5
30.0
CUH
23.9
30.2
CUH
24.5
30.4
CUH
25.0
30.6
CUH
26.0
30.6
9.0
7.0
9.0
6.0
9.0
5.5
8.8
5.5
8.7
5.5
23.5
30.0
23.9
30.2
24.5
30.4
25.0
30.6
26.0
30.6
9.0
6.0
9.0
5.0
9.0
5.0
8.8
5.0
8.7
5.0
INPUT FILES
VERTICAL PROFILE

This file contains a single vertical profile used to specify initial conditions for temperatures and/or
constituent concentrations. The vertically varying profile is then used to initialize all segments in
the computational grid. This file is most commonly used for vertically stratified waterbodies with
no longitudinal gradients. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. An initial vertical profile is specified by inputting -1.0 for the initial temperature on
the Initial Conditions card or a constituent's initial concentration on the Initial Concentration card. If temperature is included, then it must be the first profile in the
file. Constituent profiles must be input in the same order as they are specified on
the Initial Concentration card.
location.
4. The third line contains in the first field a constituent identifier name to aid in creating
and editing the file. The remaining fields contain the variable name which is right
5. The first field is left blank or can be used for comments since it is ignored on input.
The remaining fields are used for specifying the temperature or concentration at a
given layer. If there are more values than can be specified on one line, then they are
continued on the next line leaving the first field blank or using it for comments.
6. Values for the vertical profile start at the water surface layer [KT] and stop at the
bottom layer. Boundary segments are not included in the file.
The following sample input file contains vertically varying initial temperature and dissolved oxygen profiles that correspond to the sample input bathymetry. The surface layer [KT] is located at
layer five.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample vertical profile initial conditions file
TEMP VPR
T1
15.2
6.2
6.0
T1
15.0
6.0
6.0
T1
14.7
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
6.0
T1
14.2
6.0
T1
11.7
6.0
T1
8.5
6.0
T1
6.7
6.0
DO VPR
C1
12.0
6.2
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.7
6.0
C1
8.5
6.0
C1
6.7
6.0
character, the model assumes the input is in free format rather than fixed format. Besides allowing the use of Excel and easy exporting to a csv file type, this also allows one not to be constrained by the 8 column width nor by wrapping temperature or concentration values . An example is shown below:
C-368
VERTICAL PROFILE
INPUT FILES
Free format example

$VPR file for Spokane River,,,KMX=47,Start at K=2 to 46,,,,,,
Layer#,KT,,,,,,,,,
Variable,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46
TEMP,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.10,17.00
ALG1,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.10,0.11
DO,12.10,12.10,12.00,12.00,12.00,12.00,12.00,12.00,12.00,12.00
In Excel this looks like this where the first 3 lines are ignored by the code.
$VPR file for Spokane River
KMX=47 Start at K=2 to 46
Layer#
KT
Variable
37
38
39
40
41
TEMP
17.10
17.10
17.10
17.10
17.10
ALG1
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
DO
12.10
12.10
12.00
12.00
12.00
C-369
42
17.10
0.10
12.00
43
17.10
0.10
12.00
44
17.10
0.10
12.00
45
17.10
0.10
12.00
46
17.10
0.10
12.00
INPUT FILES
LONGITUDINAL PROFILE

This file contains vertical profiles for each segment used to initialize temperature and/or constituent
concentrations for each computational grid cell. It is useful when temperature or a constituent is
both vertically and longitudinally stratified where a single value or profile is not representative of
the initial conditions. The following is a list of guidelines for file preparation:
1. An initial longitudinal profile input is specified by inputting -2.0 for the initial temperature on the Initial Conditions card or a constituent's initial concentration on the
Initial Concentration card. If temperature is included, then it must be the first series
of profiles in the file. Constituent profiles must be input in the same order as they
are specified on the Initial Concentration card.
location.
4. The third line contains in the first field a constituent identifier name to aid in creating
and editing the file. The remaining fields contain the variable name which is right
5. The first field is left blank or can be used for comments since it is ignored on input.
The remaining fields are used for specifying the temperature or concentration at a
given layer. If there are more values than can be specified on one line, then they are
continued on the next line leaving the first field blank or using it for comments.
6. Values for the vertical profile at each segment start at the water surface layer [KT]
and stop at the bottom layer. Boundary segments are not included in the file.
The following sample input file includes vertically and longitudinally varying initial conditions for
temperature and dissolved oxygen that corresponds to the sample input bathymetry. The surface
layer [KT] is located at layer five.
Example
CE-QUAL-W2 sample longitudinal profile file
Segment 2
Temperature
Segment 3
Temperature
Segment 4
Temperature
Segment 5
Temperature
Segment 6
Temperature
Segment 7
Temperature
T1
15.0
6.2
T1
14.8
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
14.1
T1
11.5
T1
8.2
T1
6.5
T1
15.0
6.2
T1
14.8
6.0
T1
14.5
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
14.1
T1
11.5
T1
8.2
T1
6.5
T1
15.0
6.2
T1
14.8
T1
14.5
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
14.1
T1
11.5
T1
8.2
T1
6.5
T1
15.0
T1
14.8
T1
14.5
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
14.1
T1
11.5
T1
8.2
T1
6.5
T1
15.1
6.2
T1
14.9
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.4
T1
14.2
T1
14.2
T1
11.7
T1
8.5
T1
6.7
T1
15.1
T1
14.9
T1
14.6
T1
14.4
T1
14.2
T1
14.2
T1
11.7
T1
8.5
T1
6.7
C-370
Segment 8
Temperature
Segment 9
Temperature
Segment 12
Temperature
Segment 13
Temperature
Segment 14
Temperature
Segment 15
Temperature
Segment 18
Temperature
Segment 19
Temperature
Segment 2
DO
Segment 3
DO
Segment 4
DO
Segment 5
DO
Segment 6
DO
Segment 7
DO
Segment 8
DO
Segment 9
DO
INPUT FILES
6.2
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
T1
15.2
6.2
T1
15.0
6.0
T1
14.7
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
6.0
T1
14.2
6.0
T1
11.7
6.0
T1
8.5
6.0
T1
6.7
6.0
T1
15.2
6.2
6.0
T1
15.0
6.0
6.0
T1
14.7
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
6.0
T1
14.2
6.0
T1
11.7
6.0
T1
8.5
6.0
T1
6.7
6.0
T1
15.5
T1
15.3
T1
14.8
T1
14.5
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
10.6
T1
7.2
T1
T1
15.4
6.2
T1
15.2
6.0
T1
14.8
T1
14.5
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
10.6
T1
7.2
T1
6.8
T1
15.4
6.2
T1
15.2
6.0
T1
14.8
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
T1
14.2
T1
10.6
T1
7.2
T1
6.5
T1
15.5
6.2
T1
15.3
6.0
T1
14.8
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
6.0
T1
14.2
T1
10.6
T1
7.2
T1
6.4
T1
15.5
6.2
T1
15.3
6.0
T1
14.8
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
6.0
T1
14.2
6.0
T1
10.6
6.0
T1
7.2
6.0
T1
6.4
T1
15.5
6.2
6.0
T1
15.3
6.0
T1
14.8
6.0
T1
14.5
6.0
T1
14.3
6.0
T1
14.2
6.0
T1
10.6
6.0
T1
7.2
6.0
T1
6.4
6.0
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.5
C1
8.2
C1
6.5
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
C1
12.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.5
C1
8.2
C1
6.5
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
C1
12.0
C1
12.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.5
C1
8.2
C1
6.5
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
C1
12.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.5
C1
8.3
C1
6.5
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.6
C1
8.4
C1
6.7
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.6
C1
8.5
C1
6.7
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.6
6.0
C1
8.5
6.0
C1
6.7
6.0
C1
12.0
6.2
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.7
6.0
C1
8.5
6.0
C1
6.7
6.0
Segment 12
C-371
INPUT FILES
DO
Segment 13
DO
Segment 14
DO
Segment 15
DO
Segment 18
DO
Segment 19
DO
C1
12.0
C1
15.3
C1
14.8
C1
14.5
C1
14.3
C1
14.2
C1
11.7
C1
8.5
C1
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
C1
12.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.7
C1
8.5
C1
6.8
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.9
C1
11.7
C1
8.5
C1
6.5
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
C1
11.7
C1
8.5
C1
6.4
C1
12.0
6.2
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.7
6.0
C1
8.5
6.0
C1
6.4
C1
12.0
6.2
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
12.0
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.9
6.0
C1
11.7
6.0
C1
8.5
6.0
C1
6.4
6.0
character, the model assumes the input is in free format rather than fixed format. Besides allowing the use of Excel and easy exporting to a csv file type, this also allows one not to be constrained by the 8 column width nor by wrapping temperature or concentration values . An example is shown below:
Free Format example
[The free format example is in a similar structure as the fixed format shown above where layers
are columns and rows are model segments.]
$LPR file,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,
PO4,KT:37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,
Segment:2,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
3,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
4,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
5,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
6,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
7,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
10,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
11,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
12,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
13,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
14,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
15,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
16,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
17,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
18,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
19,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
20,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
21,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
22,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
23,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
24,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
C-372
INPUT FILES
25,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
26,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
27,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
28,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
29,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
30,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
31,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
32,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
33,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
34,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
35,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
36,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
37,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
38,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
39,0.04,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
40,0.04,0.035,0.035,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
41,0.05,0.04,0.03,0.02,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,0.03,
LDOM,KT:37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,
Segment:2,0.015,0.015,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
3,0.02,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
4,0.02,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
5,0.015,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
6,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
7,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
10,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
11,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
12,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
13,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
14,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
15,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
16,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
17,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
18,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
19,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
20,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
21,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
22,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
23,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
24,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
25,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
26,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
27,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
28,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
29,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
30,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
31,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
32,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
33,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
34,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
35,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
36,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
37,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
38,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
39,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
40,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
41,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,0.01,
Note that the Excel format is shown below. This file can then be exported as a csv file.
C-373
INPUT FILES
$LPR file
PO4
KT:37
Segment:2
0.03
3
0.03
4
0.03
5
0.03
6
0.03
7
0.03
10
0.03
11
0.03
12
0.03
13
0.03
14
0.03
15
0.03
16
0.03
17
0.03
18
0.03
19
0.03
20
0.03
21
0.03
22
0.03
23
0.03
24
0.03
25
0.03
26
0.03
27
0.03
28
0.03
29
0.03
30
0.03
31
0.03
32
0.03
33
0.03
34
0.03
35
0.03
36
0.03
37
0.03
38
0.03
39
0.04
40
0.04
41
0.05
LDOM
KT:37
Segment:2
0.015
3
0.02
4
0.02
5
0.015
6
0.01
7
0.01
10
0.01
11
0.01
12
0.01
13
0.01
14
0.01
15
0.01
16
0.01
17
0.01
18
0.01
19
0.01
20
0.01
21
0.01
22
0.01
23
0.01
24
0.01
25
0.01
26
0.01
27
0.01
28
0.01
29
0.01
30
0.01
31
0.01
32
0.01
33
0.01
34
0.01
35
0.01
36
0.01
37
0.01
38
0.01
39
0.01
40
0.01
41
0.01
38
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.035
0.04
38
0.015
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
39
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.035
0.03
39
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
40
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.02
40
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
41
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
41
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
42
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
42
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
43
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
43
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
44
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
44
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
45
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
45
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
46
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
46
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
C-374
GRAPH
INPUT FILES
Graph Input File

The file graph.npt is required for all model simulations of W2 on a PC using the downloadable
executable. This file controls output formats for the model output variables.
The first section of the file contains a line for each active constituent defined in the control file.
The concentration multiplier [CMULT] is a conversion factor and multiplies the output by the value
specified. This is most useful when converting from g m-3 to mg m-3 for nutrient values. The concentration minimum [CMIN] and maximum [CMAX] are no longer used in Version 3.7 and later.
For earlier versions they define the limits of the Array Viewer animation scaling. If [CMAX] is set
to a negative number, the plots are scaled dynamically. The constituent plot control [CPLTC] turns
on the Array Viewer animation for each variable. Note that severe performance degradation can
occur depending upon output frequency and number of output windows open.
The second section contains hydraulic variables. The hydrodynamic format [HFMT] specifies the
output variable format for the snapshot output file. The hydrodynamic minimum [HMIN] and maximum [HMAX] are no longer used. In earlier versions of the code they specify the plotting limits
when viewing the output using Array Viewer. The hydrodynamic plot control [HPLTC] specifies
whether the animation is turned ON or OFF during the simulation. The HYD PR card in the
w2_con.npt control file defines which terms are printed and describes the output variables.
The third section contains derived constituent variables. The derived constituent multiplier
[CDMULT] can be used to convert the output to units other than g m-3. The derived constituent
minimum [CDMIN] and maximum [CDMAX] concentration are no longer used. In earlier versions
of the code they specify the plotting limits when viewing the output using Array Viewer. A negative
value for [CDMAX] results in automatic scaling of the plot output. The derived constituent plot
control [CDPLTC] specifies whether the animation is turned ON or OFF during the simulation.
Example
Hydrodynamic, constituent, and derived constituent names, formats, multipliers, and array
viewer controls
....................HNAME...................
Timestep violations [NVIOL]
Horizontal velocity [U], m/s
Vertical velocity [W], m/s
Temperature [T1], <o/>C
Density [RHO], kg/m^3
Vertical eddy viscosity [AZ], m^2/s
Velocity shear stress [SHEAR], 1/s^2
Internal shear [ST], m^3/s^2
Bottom shear [SB], m^3/s^2
Longitudinal momentum [ADMX], m^3/s^2
Longitudinal momentum [DM], m^3/s^2
Horizontal density gradient [HDG], m^3/s^2
Vertical momentum [ADMZ], m^3/s^2
Horizontal pressure gradient [HPG], m^3/s^2
Gravity term channel slope [GRAV], m^3/s^2
FMTH
(I10)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
HMULT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
HMIN
-1.0
-.1000
-.1E-6
-2.0
997.0
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
-1E-08
0.0
HMAX
1.0
0.25
-0.01
-30.0
1005.0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
10.0
0.0
HPLTC
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
....................CNAME....................
TDS, g/m^3
Tracer, g/m^3
Age, days
Coliform, g/m^3
FMTC
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
CMULT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
CMIN
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
CMAX
200.0
200.0
-20.0
200.0
CPLTC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
#
1
2
3
4
C-375
INPUT FILES
GRAPH
Conductivity, g/m^3
Chloride, g/m^3
ISS, g/m^3
Phosphate, mg/m^3
Ammonium, mg/m^3
Nitrate-Nitrite, g/m^3
Dissolved silica, g/m^3
Particulate silica, g/m^3
Total iron, g/m^3
Labile DOM, g/m^3
Refractory DOM, g/m^3
Labile POM, g/m^3
Refractory POM, g/m^3
1CBOD, g/m^3
1CBODP, g/m^3
1CBODN, g/m^3
Algae1, g/m^3
Algae2, g/m^3
Algae3, g/m^3
Algae4, g/m^3
Dissolved oxygen, g/m^3
Inorganic carbon, g/m^3
Alkalinity, g/m^3
zooplankton1, mg/m^3
LDOM P, mg/m^3
RDOM P, mg/m^3
LPOM P, mg/m^3
RPOM P, mg/m^3
LDOM N, mg/m^3
RDOM N, mg/m^3
LPOM N, mg/m^3
RPOM N, mg/m^3
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1000.0
1000.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
-1.0
-1.0
-20.000
-1.0
-0.1000
-0.1000
-1.0
-0.2000
-0.1000
-0.1000
-0.1000
-0.1000
-0.1000
-0.1
-0.1
-0.1
-0.0100
-0.0100
-0.0100
-0.0100
-0.0100
-0.0100
-0.0100
-0.0100
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-300.0
6.0
15.0
-500.0
-300.0
5.0
10.0
15.0
2.0
-3.0
-4.0
-3.0
-4.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
-1.0
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
....................CDNAME...................
Dissolved organic carbon, g/m^3
Particulate organic carbon, g/m^3
Total organic carbon, g/m^3
Dissolved organic nitrogen, g/m^3
Particulate organic nitrogen, g/m^3
Total organic nitrogen, g/m^3
Total Kheldahl Nitrogen, g/m^3
Total nitrogen, g/m^3
Dissolved organic phosphorus, mg/m^3
Particulate organic phosphorus, mg/m^3
Total organic phosphorus, mg/m^3
Total phosphorus, mg/m^3
Algal production, g/m^2/day
Chlorophyll a, mg/m^3
Total algae, g/m^3
Oxygen % Gas Saturation
Total suspended Solids, g/m^3
Total Inorganic Suspended Solids,g/m^3
Carbonaceous Ultimate BOD, g/m^3
pH
CO2
HCO3
CO3
FMTCD
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
(g10.3)
CDMULT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
CDMIN
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-5.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
5.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
-1.0
CDMAX
25.0
50.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
50.0
15.0
15.0
25.0
-1.0
5.0
20.0
5.0
145.0
60.0
50.0
5.0
20.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
CDPLTC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
C-376
SNAPSHOT
OUTPUT FILES
Output FilesSnapshot
The snapshot file was designed for output to a hard copy printer and contains useful information
that can be utilized during model application. The file can also be pulled into a text editor such as
Notepad that comes with Windows of any other text editor and quickly viewed and searched for
specific information. A free text editor that is much more powerful than Notepad and that is
available on many different platforms is Notepad ++.
Title Cards
The first lines of output contain the information specified in the Title Card for identifying the run
plus the date and time that the run occurred. This information will appear everytime output is
updatedto the file based on the update dates [SNPD] and frequency [SNPF] specified in the control
file. Following the title cards is information related to the progress of the run including the output
date and timestep information.
EXAMPLE
CE-QUAL-W2 V3.1
Burnsville Reservoir - March 15 through December 11, 1992
Density placed inflow, point sink outflows
Default hydraulic coefficients
Default light absorption/extinction coefficients
Default kinetic coefficients
Temperature and water quality simulation
Run 8
Testing sensitivity to wind
Wind sheltering set to 0.75
Jim Stiles and Vince Marchese, USACE Huntington District
Model run at 16:58:03 on 07/22/02
Time Parameters
Gregorian date
[GDAY]
Julian date
[JDAY]
Elapsed time
[ELTMJD]
Timestep
[DLT]
at location [KLOC,ILOC]
Minimum timestep [MINDLT]
at Julian day
[JDMIN]
at location [KMIN,IMIN]
Average timestep
[DLTAV]
Number of iterations [NIT]
Number of violations [NV]
=
=
75
=
0
=
356
= (26,47)
=
378
=
75
= (27,19)
=
600
=
72
=
5
March 15, 1992

days 12.00 hours
days 12.00 hours
sec
sec
days
7.31 hours
sec
Time Parameters
The time parameter information includes the date at which the information was output, the elapsed
time of the simulation, and useful information about the timestep and its behavior. This includes
the current timestep and where the computational cell is located that was used to determine the
current timestep based on numerical stability criterion. The current minimum timestep that has
occurred, the date at which it occurred, and the location is also given. The average timestep for the
simulation up to this time, the total number of iterations, and the number of timestep violations that
C-377
OUTPUT FILES
SNAPSHOT
required restoring variables and recomputing the water surface elevations and velocities is also
output.
The timestep information can be very useful in providing information that can be analyzed to see
where violations are occurring and possibly altering inputs or the bathymetry to increase the average timestep without impacting the results. For example, the location of the minimum timestep
can be checked to see if the width can be increased without impacting results. The number of
violations provides information as to whether or not the fraction of the computed timestep used
needs to be decreased. If the number of violations exceeds 5% of the number of iterations, the
fraction of the timestep [DLTF] should be decreased 5-10%.
Meteorological Parameters
The next information includes meteorlogical parameters used at the current timestep. This can be
useful when trying to better understand temperature simulations such as why is the model overpredicting epilimnetic temperatures on August 14?. If the equilibrium temperature is > 45 C and
there is no wind, then the model is behaving exactly as the user is telling it to behave. Running
sensitivity analyses on meteorological forcing data during this time period can show that the model
will reproduce observed data if the forcing data are more accurate.
EXAMPLE
Meteorological Parameters
Input
Air temperature
[TAIR] =
0.55 C
Dewpoint temperature [TDEW] =
-8.59 C
Wind direction
[PHI] =
4.65 rad
Cloud cover
[CLOUD] =
4.53
Calculated
Equilibrium temperature [ET] =
0.00 C
Surface heat exchange [CSHE] = 0.00E+00 m/sec
Short wave radiation
[SRO] = 0.14E-03 C m/sec
Inflow/Outflow Parameters
Inflows, inflow placement, and inflow temperatures are then output to provide information as to
what the model is seeing at all inflow boundaries during the current timestep. This information can
be very useful in determining if the model is seeing what the user thinks he has input into the model
and should always be checked once at the beginning of the simulation and whenever inflow boundary files are changed during the course of the simulation.
All outflows are also printed out including individual structure outflows, the layer-by-layer outflow
computed from the selective withdrawal algorithm, and the total outflow. Again, this is useful to
ensure that the model is seeing what the user thinks the model is seeing.
EXAMPLE
Inflows
Upstream inflows
Branch 1
Layer
[KQIN] = 23-23
Inflow
[QIN] =
7.13 m^3/sec
Temperature [TIN] =
3.59 C
Branch 2
C-378
SNAPSHOT
Layer
Inflow
Temperature
Branch 3
Layer
Inflow
Temperature
Branch 4
Layer
Inflow
Temperature
Branch 5
Layer
Inflow
Temperature
Branch 6
Layer
Inflow
Temperature
OUTPUT FILES
[KQIN] = 29-29
[QIN] =
0.87 m^3/sec
[TIN] =
5.10 C
[KQIN] = 35-35
[QIN] =
0.18 m^3/sec
[TIN] =
5.10 C
[KQIN] = 28-28
[QIN] =
0.12 m^3/sec
[TIN] =
5.10 C
[KQIN] = 28-28
[QIN] =
0.06 m^3/sec
[TIN] =
5.10 C
[KQIN] = 24-24
[QIN] =
0.04 m^3/sec
[TIN] =
5.10 C
Tributaries
Segment
[ITR]
Layer
[KTWB]
Inflow
[QTR]
Temperature [TTR]
=
24
= 23-38
=
0.09
=
5.10
Outflows
Structure outflows [QSTR]
Branch 1 =
12.56
0.00
0.00
Total outflow [QOUT] =

12.56 m^3/s
Outlets
Layer
[KOUT] =
23
31
32
33
34
35
36
Outflow (m^3/sec) [QOUT] =
1.77
0.79
0.70
0.61
0.51
0.16
0.16
24
37
1.26
0.14
25
38
1.18
0.07
26
27
28
29
30
1.15
1.14
1.12
0.96
0.86
The final information regarding boundary forcing functions is output next and includes inflow constituent concentrations for all boundary inflows. A great deal of grief can be saved by checking to
ensure that the concentrations are correct as it is very easy to get the inflow concentrations out of
order.
EXAMPLE
Constituent Inflow Concentrations
Branch 1 [CIN]
Dissolved solids
=
43.004
Suspended solids1 =
2.000
Phosphate
=
0.020
Ammonium
=
0.100
Nitrate nitrite
=
0.200
Labile DOM
=
0.382
Refractory_DOM
=
0.892
Labile POM
=
0.425
Algae
=
0.000
Dissolved oxygen
=
12.000
Tributary 1 [CTR]
Dissolved solids
= 161.196
Suspended solids1 =
2.000
Phosphate
=
0.020
Ammonium
=
0.100
Nitrate nitrite
=
0.200
Labile DOM
=
0.405
Refractory_DOM
=
0.945
C-379
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
g/m^3
OUTPUT FILES
SNAPSHOT
Labile POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
=
=
=
0.450 g/m^3
0.000 g/m^3
11.980 g/m^3
Balances
If volume, thermal, and/or constituent mass balances are turned on, then the balances are output
next. They are computed for separately for each branch and summed for each waterbody. Information includes the spatially and temporally integrated change in volume since the start of the
simulaiton, the total volume error between the two, and the percent error based on the total volume
change. Using the change in volume rather than the total volume is important for preventing
roundoff error from masking the results of the balance. The volume balance is computed as:
S
spatially integrated
volume
Qin Qout
temporally integrated
volume
where:
S = change in volume, m3
Qin = sum of all inflows, m3
Qout = sum of all outflows, m3
Energy and mass balances are computed similarly. Errors should be on the order of 10 -8 to 10-13
percent, which means that the model is essentially conserving water to machine accuracy. Any
model that cannot show this adherence to the fundamental principle of mass balance involved in
hydrodynamic and water quality modeling should immediately be suspect. This computation is
routinely used to debug and find errors in the code.
EXAMPLE
Water Balance
Waterbody 1
Spatial change
Temporal change
Volume error
Percent error
Branch 1
Spatial change
Temporal change
Volume error
Percent error
Branch 2
Spatial change
Temporal change
Volume error
Percent error
[VOLSR]
[VOLTR]
= -0.20089851E+06 m^3
= -0.20089851E+06 m^3
= 0.10186341E-08 m^3
= -0.50703913E-12 %
[VOLSBR] = -0.13863158E+06
[VOLTBR] = -0.13863158E+06
= 0.10768417E-08
= -0.77676510E-12
m^3
m^3
m^3
%
[VOLSBR] = -0.28973777E+05
[VOLTBR] = -0.28973777E+05
= -0.76397555E-10
= 0.26367827E-12
m^3
m^3
m^3
%
Energy Balance
Waterbody 1
Spatially integrated energy
[ESR]
Temporally integrated energy [ETR]
Energy error
Percent error
Branch 1
Spatially integrated energy [ESBR]
= 0.29332063E+12 kJ
= 0.29332063E+12 kJ
= -0.28701192E+01 kJ
= -0.97849211E-09 %
=
0.20810993E+12 kJ
C-380
SNAPSHOT
OUTPUT FILES
Temporally integrated energy [ETBR] = 0.20812486E+12 kJ

Energy error
= 0.79701322E+01 kJ
Percent error
= 0.38294956E-08 %
Branch 2
Spatially integrated energy [ESBR] = 0.46706347E+11 kJ
Temporally integrated energy [ETBR] = 0.46709696E+11 kJ
Energy error
= -0.72348511E+01 kJ
Percent error
= -0.15488971E-07 %
Mass Balance
Branch 1
Dissolved solids
Spatially integrated mass
Temporally integrated mass
Mass error
Percent error
Residence time
Mass error
Percent error
Suspended solids1
Mass error
Percent error
Phosphate
Mass error
Percent error
Ammonium
Mass error
Percent error
Nitrate nitrite
Mass error
Percent error
Labile DOM
Mass error
Percent error
Refractory_DOM
Mass error
Percent error
Labile POM
Mass error
Percent error
Algae
Mass error
Percent error
Dissolved oxygen
Mass error
Percent error
Branch 2
C-381
[CMBRS] = 0.42683593E+09 g
[CMBRT] = 0.42683593E+09 g
= -0.15495062E-01 g
= -0.36302150E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.46090907E+07
[CMBRT] = 0.46090907E+07
= -0.14215708E-04
= -0.30842760E-09 %
[CMBRS] = 0.10093689E+08 g
[CMBRT] = 0.10093689E+08 g
= -0.31241588E-03 g
= -0.30951605E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.17123908E+06 g
[CMBRT] = 0.17123908E+06 g
= -0.72119292E-05 g
= -0.42116142E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.48859061E+06 g
[CMBRT] = 0.48859061E+06 g
= -0.20249572E-04 g
= -0.41444865E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.18775938E+07 g
[CMBRT] = 0.18775938E+07 g
= -0.75169839E-04 g
= -0.40035198E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.61793186E+07 g
[CMBRT] = 0.61793186E+07 g
= -0.24503283E-03 g
= -0.39653698E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.14555086E+08 g
[CMBRT] = 0.14555086E+08 g
= -0.57210773E-03 g
= -0.39306379E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.65861106E+07 g
[CMBRT] = 0.65861106E+07 g
= -0.26675593E-03 g
= -0.40502802E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.57925594E+07 g
[CMBRT] = 0.57925594E+07 g
= -0.22346061E-03 g
= -0.38577180E-08 %
[CMBRS] = 0.10224093E+09 g
[CMBRT] = 0.10224093E+09 g
= -0.40865839E-02 g
= -0.39970136E-08 %
OUTPUT FILES
Dissolved solids
Mass error
Percent error
Residence time
Mass error
Percent error
Suspended solids1
Mass error
Percent error
Phosphate
Mass error
Percent error
Ammonium
Mass error
Percent error
Nitrate nitrite
Mass error
Percent error
Labile DOM
Mass error
Percent error
Refractory_DOM
Mass error
Percent error
Labile POM
Mass error
Percent error
Algae
Mass error
Percent error
Dissolved oxygen
Mass error
Percent error
SNAPSHOT
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.10016615E+09
0.10016615E+09
0.12986526E-01
0.12964984E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.10294782E+07
0.10294782E+07
0.98625082E-04
0.95801035E-08 %
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.21809107E+07
0.21809107E+07
0.29512448E-03
0.13532167E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.38423775E+05
0.38423775E+05
0.63260450E-05
0.16463882E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.10661579E+06
0.10661579E+06
0.16890146E-04
0.15842068E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.41545882E+06
0.41545882E+06
0.67292654E-04
0.16197190E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.13767130E+07
0.13767130E+07
0.22568717E-03
0.16393189E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.32433662E+07
0.32433662E+07
0.52960077E-03
0.16328738E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.14806668E+07
0.14806668E+07
0.24347263E-03
0.16443445E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.13063015E+07
0.13063015E+07
0.21586171E-03
0.16524647E-07
g
g
g
%
[CMBRS] =
[CMBRT] =
=
=
0.22578360E+08
0.22578360E+08
0.36302954E-02
0.16078649E-07
g
g
g
%
Geometry
The water surface layer number, elevation at the downstream segment, and the current upstream
segment number for each branch are then output. Note that in the example, the current upstream
segment is located at segment 8.
EXAMPLE
Geometry
C-382
SNAPSHOT
OUTPUT FILES
Surface layer [KT] = 23

Elevation
[ELKT] =
238.575 m
Current upstream segment [CUS]
Branch 1 =8
Branch 2 =30
Branch 3 =41
Branch 4 =46
Branch 5 =51
Branch 6 =55
Water Surface
The water surface elevation and the water surface deviation from the top of the water surface layer
number is output next. The water surface deviation uses the oceanographic convention in which
the deviation downwards from the top of the surface layer is positive. The output includes information only for the segments specified on the Snapshot Segments card.
EXAMPLE
Water Surface, m
8
238.574
9
238.573
10
238.574
11
238.573
12
238.574
13
238.574
14
238.574
15
238.574
14
-0.2138
15
-0.2137
Water Surface Deviation (positive downwards), m

8
-0.2136
9
-0.2135
10
-0.2135
11
-0.2135
12
-0.2136
13
-0.2139
Temperature/Water Quality
The last information available from the snapshot file is information related to hydrodynamics and
water quality. The user has complete control of how much information is output including which
hydrodynamic and water quality variables are included in the output. The file can rapidly become
quite large, so only variables of interest should be output. This information is useful for quickly
looking at the results of a run to gain a feel for how the variables of concern are behaving over
time. Title cards are printed on each new page for ease in identifying the simulation.
C-383
OUTPUT FILES
SNAPSHOT
EXAMPLE
Run 8
Model run at 08:25:31 on 07/23/02
March 15, 1992
Layer
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Depth
0.41
1.13
1.74
2.35
2.96
3.57
4.18
4.79
5.40
6.01
6.62
7.23
7.84
8.45
Julian day =
8
3.74
3.81
3.83
3.81
9
3.77
3.77
3.76
3.76
3.76
3.76
75 days 12.00 hours

10
4.19
4.19
4.19
4.19
4.19
4.19
4.19
4.19
4.63
5.06
5.31
11
5.02
4.96
5.03
5.07
5.08
5.08
5.11
5.21
5.21
5.32
5.34
Temperature [T1], deg C

12
5.53
5.32
5.27
5.26
5.27
5.26
5.23
5.22
5.22
5.24
5.26
5.32
13
5.62
5.43
5.31
5.22
5.14
5.14
5.14
5.14
5.14
5.14
5.14
5.22
14
5.49
5.26
5.17
5.11
5.05
5.01
5.01
5.19
5.23
5.24
5.26
5.30
5.33
15
5.51
5.34
5.30
5.25
5.27
5.29
5.32
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.32
16
5.50
5.29
5.23
5.19
5.17
5.20
5.36
5.35
5.33
5.31
5.30
5.30
5.30
5.30
17
5.55
5.34
5.28
5.24
5.24
5.26
5.31
5.34
5.33
5.31
5.31
5.30
5.29
5.29
18
5.58
5.35
5.29
5.30
5.33
5.31
5.33
5.33
5.32
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.31
C-384
TIME SERIES
OUTPUT FILES
Time Series
A time series history can be output for any number of cells in the computational grid with output
for each cell written to a separate output file. Output is suitable for import into a spreadsheet
program for analysis and plotting. The model takes the name of the time series file specified on
the TIME SERIES PLOT FILENAME card and appends an _x to the filename where x is 1, 2, 3,
etc., depending upon whether the cell is the first, second, third, etc. one specified on the TIME
SERIES SEGMENT card. Title cards are included at the beginning of the output as an aid in identifying the particular model run. Information includes the Julian date, current time step (s), water
surface elevation for the cells segment location (m), temperature (oC), velocity (m/s) at the layer
and segment specified, total flow rate through the entire segment (m3/s, vertically integrated flow
through the segment), net short wave solar radiation incident on the water surface (W/m2, reflection
is not included), light extinction coefficient in m-1, depth from water surface to channel bottom (m),
surface width (m), shade (shade factor multiplied by SRON, if SHADE =1, no shade, if shade =0,
no short wave solar reaches the water surface) and active constituent concentrations, derived constituent concentrations, and instantaneous kinetic flux rates in kg/day.
C-385
OUTPUT FILES
TIME SERIES
Example
Version 3.5 Whatcom L. Model
WB 1 : Basin III
WB 2 : Basin I & II
Jing Liu & Bob Cusinamo, Department of Ecology

Chris Berger and Scott Wells, Portland State University
Model run at 11:36:39 on 06/17/07
JDAY
DLT
ELWS
45.607
600.00
95.11
02
45.647
294.54
95.09
02
45.694
409.28
95.12
02
45.742
326.10
95.09
02
45.790
537.04
95.10
02
45.837
360.06
95.11
02
45.884
357.22
95.10
02
45.931
431.23
95.13
02
45.974
490.50
95.08
02
46.025
459.69
95.10
02
46.074
600.00
95.09
02
46.118
479.46
95.12
02
46.160
361.83
95.09
02
46.208
376.46
95.07
02
46.254
411.93
95.10
02
46.301
110.15
95.12
02
46.348
174.34
95.10
02
46.398
495.28
95.10
02
46.447
600.00
95.12
02
T2
5.04
U
0.01
Q
0.00
SRON
435.43
ET
0.00
DEPTH
21.11
WIDTH
605.66
5.15
0.01
0.00
303.69
0.00
21.09
605.66
1.00 0.254E-03 0.156E-06 0.301E-02 0.303E-
5.16
0.01
0.00
135.47
0.00
21.12
605.66
1.00 0.446E-03 0.949E-06 0.301E-02 0.305E-
5.08
0.01
0.00
19.69
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.00 0.444E-03 0.691E-05 0.301E-02 0.306E-
5.04
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.10
605.66
0.00 0.502E -03 0.836E-05 0.302E-02 0.309E-
5.01
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.11
605.66
0.00 0.482E-03 0.177E-04 0.303E-02 0.311E-
4.99
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.10
605.66
0.00 0.556E-03 0.297E-04 0.304E-02 0.313E-
4.96
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.13
605.66
0.00 0.728E-03 0.466E-04 0.305E-02 0.315E-
4.93
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.08
605.66
0.00 0.980E-03 0.785E-04 0.306E-02 0.317E-
4.91
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.10
605.66
0.00 0.115E-02 0.943E-04 0.307E-02 0.320E-
4.88
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.00 0.126E-02 0.994E-04 0.308E-02 0.322E-
4.86
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.12
605.66
0.00 0.151E-02 0.127E-03 0.309E-02 0.324E-
4.83
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.00 0.180E-02 0.162E-03 0.310E-02 0.326E-
4.80
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.07
605.66
0.00 0.200E-02 0.180E-03 0.311E-02 0.328E-
4.78
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.10
605.66
0.00 0.249E-02 0.241E-03 0.312E-02 0.330E-
4.75
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.12
605.66
0.00 0.283E-02 0.279E-03 0.313E-02 0.333E-
4.73
0.01
0.00
28.13
0.00
21.10
605.66
0.10 0.303E-02 0.296E-03 0.314E-02 0.335E-
4.71
0.01
0.00
140.03
0.00
21.10
605.66
1.00 0.320E-02 0.308E-03 0.314E-02 0.337E-
4.75
0.01
0.00
349.79
0.00
21.12
605.66
1.00 0.346E-02 0.302E-03 0.315E-02 0.340E-
SHADE
Gen1
1.00 0.520E-04
ISS1
PO4
NH4
0.00 0.300E-02 0.301E-
C-386
TIME SERIES
OUTPUT FILES
46.487
204.07
95.09
4.87
0.01
0.00
507.84
0.00
21.09
605.66
1.00 0.414E-02 0.357E-03 0.314E-02 0.341E-
46.537
582.22
95.09
5.13
0.01
0.00
554.02
0.00
21.09
605.66
1.00 0.452E-02 0.331E-03 0.315E-02 0.345E-
46.583
297.55
95.08
5.36
0.01
0.00
470.29
0.00
21.08
605.66
1.00 0.483E -02 0.311E-03 0.316E-02 0.348E-
46.629
333.11
95.08
5.48
0.01
0.00
422.76
0.00
21.08
605.66
1.00 0.507E-02 0.312E-03 0.316E-02 0.350E-
46.678
311.76
95.09
5.53
0.01
0.00
242.76
0.00
21.09
605.66
1.00 0.534E-02 0.329E-03 0.318E-02 0.352E-
46.723
196.05
95.09
5.54
0.01
0.00
68.75
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.10 0.570E-02 0.319E-03 0.318E-02 0.356E-
46.768
124.77
95.09
5.49
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.00 0.605E-02 0.300E-03 0.319E-02 0.359E-
46.814
122.39
95.09
5.39
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.00 0.640E -02 0.284E-03 0.321E-02 0.363E-
46.862
93.39
95.09
5.28
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.09
605.66
0.00 0.669E-02 0.277E-03 0.322E-02 0.367E-
46.908
55.82
95.08
5.20
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.08
605.66
0.00 0.647E-02 0.334E-03 0.323E-02 0.367E-
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
C-387
OUTPUT FILES
PREPROCESSOR
Preprocessor
The preprocessor produces several output files including a file that echoes all control file inputs
along with additional information (pre.opt), a warning file that attempts to alert the user to potential
problems with inputs (pre.wrn), and an error file that points out serious problems in the input data
that will probably prevent the model from running or running correctly. It is important to run the
preprocessor periodically to ensure that changes made to various inputs during the course of the
project have not introduced problems in the simulation.
Command-line working directory specification
In the windows version of the preprocessor, the user can now supply a command line argument that
sets the working directory of the code. Hence, one does not need to copy the preprocessor into
every directory. In a batch file, for example, one can execute the following command:
preW2_ivf.exe "C:\scott\w2workshop\2009 workshop\waterqual\problem3"
The preprocessor now uses the supplied directory (in double quotes) as the working directory for
all the files. The command line argument has one blank space between the end of the executable
and the first quote. The working directory is now displayed at the top of the window for the preprocessor.
Output (pre.opt)
As in nearly all output, the title cards are echoed at the beginning of the output followed by a
complete echoing of all control file input. A description of the input, the FORTRAN variable name
used in the control file, and the value of the variable are then output. The sequence of output tries
to closely follow the sequence of input in the control file, but in some cases is different as certain
types of output are more logically grouped together.
The first information includes variables affecting the time of simulation and the timestep for the
simulation. Next is information that is used to set initial conditions and variables that are used to
control certain calculations in the model.
EXAMPLE
Run 8
Time Control
Starting time (Julian day) [TMSTRT] =
Ending time (Julian day)
[TMEND] =
Year
[YEAR] =
# Timestep intervals
[NDLT] =
75.00
320.00
1992
1
C-388
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
Minimum timestep (sec)

[DLTMIN] =
1.0
Timestep day (Julian day)
[DLTD] =
1.0
Maximum timestep (sec)
[DLTMAX] = 1800.0
Fraction of timestep
[DLTF] =
0.85
Timestep limitation
Waterbody 1
Vertical eddy viscosity
[VISC] = ON
Internal gravity wave
[CELC] = ON
Initial Conditions
Waterbody 1
Temperature
[T2I] = Downstream vertical profile
Water type
[WTYPEC] = FRESH water
Ice thickness
[ICEI] = 0.000 m
Calculations
Waterbody 1
Evaporation
[EVC] = OFF
Precipitation
[PRC] = OFF
Volume balance [VBC] = ON
Energy balance [EBC] = ON
Mass balance
[MBC] = ON
Place inflows
[PQC] = ON
Wind
[WINDC] = ON
Inflow
[QINC] = ON
Outflow
[QOUTC] = ON
Heat exchange [HEATC] = ON
Heat exchange [SLHTC] = TERM
Waterbody 1
read radiation
[SROC]
wind function coefficient a
[AFW]
wind function coefficient b
[BFW]
wind function coefficient c
[CFW]
wind height
[WINDH]
Ryan-Harleman evaporation
[RHEVC]
=
=
=
=
=
=
OFF
9.20
0.46
2.00
10.00
OFF
The next output includes controls for all input interpolation. These are located at various places in
the control file, but are grouped together in the output. These are then followed by meteorological
parameters that affect wind and surface heat exchange.
EXAMPLE
Input Interpolations
Branch 1
Inflow
Distributed tributary
Head boundary
Branch 2
Inflow
Head boundary
Branch 3
Inflow
Head boundary
Branch 4
Inflow
Head boundary
Branch 5
Inflow
Head boundary
Branch 6
Inflow
C-389
[QINIC] = ON
[DTRIC] = OFF
[HDIC] = OFF
[QINIC] = ON
[DTRIC] = OFF
[HDIC] = OFF
[QINIC] = ON
[DTRIC] = OFF
[HDIC] = OFF
[QINIC] = ON
[DTRIC] = OFF
[HDIC] = OFF
[QINIC] = ON
[DTRIC] = OFF
[HDIC] = OFF
[QINIC] = ON
[DTRIC] = OFF
OUTPUT FILES
Head boundary
Waterbody 1
Meteorology
Tributary 1
Branch 1
Structure 1
Structure 2
Structure 3
PREPROCESSOR
[HDIC] = OFF
[METIC] =
[TRIC] =
ON
ON
[STRIC] =
[STRIC] =
[STRIC] =
ON
ON
ON
Meteorlogical Parameters
Waterbody 1
Latitude
Longitude
Axis orientation
Segment #
2
3
[PHI0] (rads) 1.22 5.22
Segment #
21
22
[PHI0] (rads) 4.82 0.24
Segment #
40
41
[PHI0] (rads) 6.13 0.35
[LAT] =
[LONG] =
38.80
80.60
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4.62 0.65 5.67 3.84 5.08 6.27 0.19 5.58 5.32 0.44 0.35 4.54
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
6.16 0.04 0.00 0.00 5.24 5.18 4.14 5.01 4.35 4.00 3.30 5.15
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
0.33 0.00 0.00 0.35 6.20 5.64 0.00 0.00 3.51 3.77 3.40 0.00
Variables affecting the transport solution and hydraulics are output next along with variables affecting ice cover.
EXAMPLE
Transport Solution
Waterbody 1
Transport [SLTRC] = QUICKEST
Theta
[THETA] =
0.55
Hydraulic coefficients
Waterbody 1
Longitudinal eddy viscosity
[AX] =
Longitudinal eddy diffusivity
[DX] =
Sediment temperature
[TSED] =
Coefficient of bottom heat exchange [CBHE] =
Ice cover
Waterbody 1
Ice calculations
[ICEC] =
Solution
[SLICEC] =
Albedo
[ALBEDO] =
Ice-water heat exchange
[HWI] =
Light absorption
[BETAI] =
Light decay
[GAMMAI] =
1.00
1.00
11.80
0.3
m^2/sec
m^2/sec
C
W/m^2/oC
OFF
DETAIL
0.25
10.00
0.60
0.07
Output controls excluding constituents are output next. As in the control file, all constituent related
variables are grouped together.
EXAMPLE
Output Control
Waterbody 1
Timestep violations [NVIOL]
Horizontal velocity [U], m/s
Vertical velocity [W], m/ s
Density [RHO], kg/m^3
Vertical eddy viscosity [AZ], m^2/s
Velocity shear stress [SHEAR], 1/s^2
Internal shear [ST], m^3/s^2
Bottom shear [SB], m^3/s^2
Longitudinal momentum [ADMX], m^3/s^2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C-390
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
Longitudinal momentum [DM], m^3/s^2

= OFF
Horizontal density gradient [HDG], m^3/s^2= OFF
Vertical momentum [ADMZ], m^3/s^2
= OFF
Horizontal pressure gradient [HPG], m^3/s^2= OFF
Gravity term channel slope [GRAV], m^3/s^2= OFF
Waterbody 1
Snapshot
[SNPC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NSNP] =
7
Date (Julian day)
[SNPD] = 75.50 139.50
Frequency (days)
[SNPF] = 100.00 100.00
Screen
[SCRC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NSCR] =
1
Date (Julian day)
[SCRD] = 75.50
Frequency (days)
[SCRF] =
1.00
Fluxes
[FLXC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NFLX] =
1
Date (Julian day)
[FLXD] = 77.70
Frequency (days)
[FLXF] = 100.00
Vector plot
[VPLC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NVPL] =
1
Date (Julian day)
[VPLD] = 75.70
Frequency (days)
[VPLF] = 100.00
Profile plot
[PRFC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NPRF] =
7
Number of stations
[NIPRF] =
1
Segment location
[IPRF] =
24
Date (Julian day)
[PRFD] = 75.70 139.50
Frequency (days)
[PRFF] = 100.00 100.00
Spreadsheet plot [SPRC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NSPR] =
7
Number of stations
[NISPR] =
1
Segment location
[ISPR] =
24
Date (Julian day)
[SPRD] = 75.70 139.50
Frequency (days)
[SPRF] = 100.00 100.00
Contour plot
[CPLC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NCPL] =
1
Date (Julian day)
[CPLD] = 75.70
Frequency (days)
[CPLF] = 15.00
Time series
[TSRC] = ON
Number of time intervals [NTSR] =
1
Date (Julian day)
[TSRD] = 75.70
Frequency (days)
[TSRF] =
1.00
Restart out
[RSOC] = OFF
Restart in
[RSIC] = OFF
153.50 167.50 195.50 223.60 252.60

100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00
153.50 167.50 195.50 223.60 252.60

100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00
153.50 167.50 195.50 223.60 252.60

100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00
Inflow/outflow information is output next.

EXAMPLE
Inflow/Outflow
Selective Withdrawal
Branch
# of structures [NSTR]
1
3
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
Branch 1
Structure
Type
Width (m)
Elevation (m)
1
POINT
0.0
237.7
2
POINT
0.0
234.7
3
LINE
6.1
231.9
Number of withdrawals [NWD] = 0
Number of tributaries [NTR] = 1
segment number
[ITR] =
24
C-391
Bottom Layer
38
38
38
OUTPUT FILES
Inflow placement [PTRC] =
Top elevation
[ETTR] =
Bottom elevation [EBTR] =
Distributed tributaries [DTRC]
Branch 1 = OFF
Branch 2 = OFF
Branch 3 = OFF
Branch 4 = OFF
Branch 5 = OFF
Branch 6 = OFF
PREPROCESSOR
DISTR
2.00
38.00
Input and output filenames are then output.

EXAMPLE
Input Filenames
Control
= w2_con.npt
Restart
= rsi.npt - not used
Withdrawal = qwd.npt - not used
Waterbody 1
Bathymetry
= bth.npt
Meteorology
= met.npt
Vertical profile
= vpr.npt
Longitudinal profile = lpr.npt - not
Branch 1
Inflow
Inflow temperature
Inflow concentrations
Outflow
Distributed tributary inflows
Distributed tributary temperatures
Distributed tributary concentrations
Precipitation
Precipitation temperatures
Precipitation concentrations
Upstream head
Upstream head temperatures
Upstream head concentrations
Downstream head
Downstream head temperatures
Downstream head concentrations
Tributary 1
Inflow
= qtr_tr1.npt
Inflow temperature
= ttr_tr1.npt
Inflow concentration = ctr_tr1.npt
used
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
qin_br1.npt
tin_br1.npt
cin_br1.npt
qot_br1.npt
qin_br1.npt
tdt_br1.npt
cdt_br1.npt
pre_br1.npt
tpr_br1.npt
cpr_br1.npt
euh_br1.npt
tuh_br1.npt
cuh_br1.npt
edh_br1.npt
tdh_br1.npt
cdh_br1.npt
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
Output Filenames
Error
= pre.err
Warning
= pre.wrn
Time series = tsr.opt
Withdrawal = wdo.opt
Waterbody 1
Snapshot
= snp.opt
Fluxes
= flx.opt
Profile
= prf.opt
Vector plot = vpl.opt
Contour plot = cpl.opt
The next section includes all variables affecting water quality simulations including input/output
controls, initial concentrations, active constituents, derived variables, kinetic fluxes, and kinetic
rates constants.
C-392
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
EXAMPLE
Constituents [CCC] = ON
Algal limiting nutrient [LIMC] = OFF
Kinetics update frequency [CUF] =
2
Waterbody 1
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
Sediments
Computation
[CAC]
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Branch 1
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
Inflow
[CINBRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Distributed trib
[CDTBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Precipitation
[CPRBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Branch 2
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Inflow
[CINBRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Distributed trib
[CDTBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Precipitation
[CPRBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C-393
Initial Conc
[C2IWB,g/m^3]
-1.000
0.000
-1.000
0.020
0.050
0.200
0.000
0.000
10.000
0.675
1.575
0.750
0.000
0.650
-1.000
11.910
40.000
0.000
Fluxes
[CFWBC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Printout
[CPRWBC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OUTPUT FILES
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
PREPROCESSOR
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Branch 3
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
Inflow
[CINBRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Distributed trib
[CDTBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Precipitation
[CPRBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Branch 4
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
Inflow
[CINBRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Distributed trib
[CDTBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Precipitation
[CPRBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Branch 5
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Inflow
[CINBRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Distributed trib
[CDTBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Precipitation
[CPRBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C-394
PREPROCESSOR
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
Branch 6
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
OUTPUT FILES
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Inflow
[CINBRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Distributed trib
[CDTBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Precipitation
[CPRBRC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Derived Variables
Constituent
Computation
[CDNAME]
[CDWBC]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Total algae, g/m^3
OFF
Oxygen gas saturation, %
OFF
Total suspended solids, g/m^3
OFF
Total inorganic suspended solids,g/m^3
OFF
Total Kheldahl nitrogen, g/m^3
OFF
Carbonaceous ultimate BOD, g/m^3
OFF
pH
OFF
Carbon dioxide, g/m^3
OFF
Bicarbonate, g/m^3
OFF
Carbonate, g/m^3
OFF
Tributary 1
State Variables
Constituent
[CNAME]
Dissolved solids
Residence time
Suspended solids1
Phosphate
Ammonium
Nitrate nitrite
Dissolved silica
Particulate silica
Total Iron
Labile DOM
Refractory_DOM
C-395
Inflow
[CINTRC]
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OUTPUT FILES
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algae
Dissolved oxygen
Inorganic carbon
Alkalinity
Waterbody 1
Constituent Rates
Constituent
Residence time
Suspended solids
Labile DOM
Refractory DOM
Labile POM
Refractory POM
Algal group 1
Phosphorous
Ammonium
Nitrate-Nitrite
Silica
Sediment
Iron
Oxygen
PREPROCESSOR
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Rate/Coefficient
Temperature mult
[CGQ10] = 0.000
0-Order Decay
[CG0DK] =-1.000/day
1-Order Decay
[CG1DK] = 0.000/day
Settling
[CGS] = 0.000 m/day
Settling
[SSS] = 1.000 m/day
Decay
[LDOMDK] = 0.120 /day
to refractory
[LRDDK] = 0.001 /day
Decay
[RDOMDK] = 0.001 /day
Decay
[LPOMDK] = 0.060 /day
to refractory
[LRPDK] = 0.001 /day
Settling
[POMS] = 0.350 m/day
Decay
[RPOMDK] = 0.010 /day
Growth
[AG] = 1.100 /day
Mortality
[AM] = 0.010 /day
Excretion
[AE] = 0.010 /day
Respiration
[AR] = 0.020 /day
Settling
[AS] = 0.140 m/day
Org-P
[ALGP] = 0.011
Org-N
[ALGN] = 0.080
Org-C
[ALGC] = 0.450
Org-Si
[ALGSI] = 0.000
Chl a/algae ratio
[ACHLA] =65.000 ug/mg
Fraction algae to POM [APOM] = 0.80
Release
Decay
Release
Decay
Decay
Release
Settling
Decay
Settling
Release
Sediment demand
[PO4R]
[NH4DK]
[NH4R]
[NO3DK]
[PSIDK]
[DSIR]
[PSIS]
[SEDDK]
[FES]
[FER]
[SOD]
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0.015
0.120
0.080
0.102
0.100
0.300
0.100
0.080
2.000
0.500
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
[FSOD] =
1.0
[FSED] =
1.0
g/m^2/day
/day
g/m^2/day
/day
/day
g/m^2/day
m/day
/day
m/day
g/m^2/day
1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
SOD fraction
Sediment fraction
Upper Temperature Bounds
Constituent
Rate
Upper
Max Upper
Ammonium
Decay
[NH4T1] = 5.0 [NH4T2] = 25.0
Nitrate
Decay
[NO3T1] = 5.0 [NO3T2] = 25.0
Organic
Decay
[OMT1] = 4.0 [OMT2] = 20.0
Sediment
Decay
[SEDT1] = 4.0 [SEDT2] = 20.0
Algal group 1 Growth
[AT1] = 10.0
[AT2] = 30.0
Lower Temperature Bounds
Constituent
Rate
Lower
Max Lower
Algal group 1 Growth
[AT3] = 35.0
[AT4] = 40.0
Stoichiometric Equivalence
Oxygen
Ammonium
[O2NH4] = 4.57
Organic matter [O2OM] = 1.40
Respiration
[O2AR] = 1.40
Algal growth
[O2AG] = 1.40
Organic Matter
C-396
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
Carbon
[BIOC] = 0.450
Phosphorous [BIOP] = 0.011
Nitrogen
[BION] = 0.080
Silica
[BIOSI] = 0.180
Half Saturation
Algal group 1
Phosphorous [AHSP] = 0.009 g/m^3
Nitrogen
[AHSN] = 0.014 g/m^3
Silica
[AHSSI] = 0.000 g/m^3
Light
Attenuation
Surface layer
[BETA] = 0.45
Water
[EXH2O] = 0.55 /m
Inorganic solids
[EXSS] = 0.01 /m
Organic solids
[EXOM] = 0.01 /m
Algal group 1
[EXA] = 0.20 /m
Saturation Intensity
Algal group 1 [ASAT] = 150.0 W/m^2
Diffusion
Oxygen
[DMO2] = 2.040E-09 m^2/g
Carbon dioxide [DMCO2] = 1.630E-09 m^2/g
Partitioning Coefficients
Phosphorous [PARTP] = 1.200 m^3/g
Silica
[PARTSI] = 0.200 m^3/g
Miscellaneous Constants
Aerobic half saturation coeff[KDO] = 0.20 g/m^3
CO2 sediment release
[CO2R] = 0.10 g/m^2/day
The next section contains summary statistics regarding inflows, temperatures, and inflow constituent concentrations. This is useful for screening time-varying input files if the user has not already
plotted up and screened them.
EXAMPLE
Water Balance Summary
Waterbody 1
total inflows
total outflows
average maximum
average maximum
6.22
124.38
6.25
38.19
Branch 1
Inflows
total
average maximum
5.29
124.38
upstream
average maximum
5.22
124.38
Outflows
outlets
average maximum
6.25
38.19
tributaries
average maximum
0.07
1.60
distributed tributaries
average maximum
0.00
0.00
precipitation
average maximum
0.00
0.00
withdrawals
average maximum
0.00
0.00
Branch Inflow Temperature Min/Max

Branch(JB)
Maximum Temp(C)
Minimum Temp(C)
1
0.200E+02
0.187E+01
Tributary Inflow Temperature Min/Max
Tributary(JT)
Maximum Temp(C)
Minimum Temp(C)
1
0.178E+02
0.320E+01
C-397
OUTPUT FILES
Inflow Constituent Statistics
Branch 1
Constituent name
Average
Dissolved solids
49.576
Suspended solids1
4.467
Phosphate
0.020
Ammonium
0.100
Nitrate nitrite
0.200
Labile DOM
0.382
Refractory_DOM
0.892
Labile POM
0.425
Algae
0.000
Dissolved oxygen
9.851
PREPROCESSOR
Maximum
99.000
156.000
0.020
0.100
0.200
0.382
0.892
0.425
0.000
14.000
Minimum
10.000
2.000
0.020
0.100
0.200
0.382
0.892
0.425
0.000
0.000
Geometric information follows including all information in the control and bathymetry file along
with a computed area-volume-elevation table that also includes average width and depth. Theoretical hydraulic residence at each elevation is also included if the waterbody is a reservoir. The
location of the surface layer is indicated by a [KT] next to the layer number. The computational
grid showing cell widths is then output, at the top of which is the segment number and the distance
to the end of the branch in m.
EXAMPLE
Geometry
Overall Grid
Total
segments [IMX] = 58
layers
[KMX] = 39
branches [NBR] = 6
Waterbody 1
Segments
= 1-58
Branches
= 1-6
Bottom elevation [ELBOT] =
228.60 m
Surface layer
[KT] =
23
Vertical spacing
[H]
Layer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
15
16
17
18
19
Height (m)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Layer
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
34
35
36
37
38
Height (m)
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Layer
39
Height (m)
0.6
Branch 1
Upstream segment
[US] = 2
Downstream
Upstream head segment [UHS] = 0
Downstream
Branch 2
Upstream segment
[US] = 27
Downstream
Downstream
Branch 3
Upstream segment
[US] = 39
Downstream
Downstream
Branch 4
Upstream segment
[US] = 45
Downstream
Downstream
Branch 5
Upstream segment
[US] = 50
Downstream
Downstream
Branch 6
Upstream segment
[US] = 55
Downstream
Downstream
10
11
12
13
14
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
segment
[DS] = 24
head segment [DHS] = 0
segment
[DS] = 36
segment
[DS] = 42
segment
[DS] = 47
segment
[DS] = 52
segment
[DS] = 57
C-398
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
Initial Branch Volume [VOLB] = 9495622.2 m^3

Branch 1 Volume-Area-Elevation Table
Layer
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 KT
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Elevation
(m)
Area
(1.0E6 m^2)
251.17
250.56
249.95
249.34
248.73
248.12
247.51
246.90
246.29
245.68
245.07
244.46
243.85
243.24
242.63
242.02
241.41
240.80
240.19
239.58
238.97
238.36
237.75
237.14
236.53
235.92
235.31
234.70
234.09
233.48
232.87
232.26
231.65
231.04
230.43
229.82
229.21
5.171
5.002
4.923
4.828
4.706
4.624
4.522
4.350
4.191
4.059
3.835
3.661
3.570
3.476
3.363
3.083
2.972
2.878
2.777
2.626
2.485
2.413
2.282
1.927
1.716
1.290
1.150
0.995
0.839
0.595
0.410
0.306
0.225
0.145
0.106
0.074
0.024
Volume
Active Cells
(1.0E6 m^3)
58.316
55.162
52.111
49.108
46.163
43.292
40.471
37.713
35.059
32.503
30.027
27.688
25.454
23.277
21.156
19.104
17.224
15.411
13.655
11.962
10.360
8.844
7.372
5.980
4.804
3.757
2.970
2.269
1.662
1.150
0.787
0.536
0.350
0.213
0.125
0.060
0.015
630
607
584
563
542
521
500
479
458
437
417
397
378
359
341
323
305
287
269
251
233
216
199
182
165
148
132
116
101
86
71
56
41
28
17
8
3
Average depth
(m)
11.3
11.0
10.6
10.2
9.8
9.4
9.0
8.7
8.4
8.0
7.8
7.6
7.1
6.7
6.3
6.2
5.8
5.4
4.9
4.6
4.2
3.7
3.2
3.1
2.8
2.9
2.6
2.3
2.0
1.9
1.9
1.8
1.6
1.5
1.2
0.8
0.6
Average width
(m)
262.48
253.90
249.88
245.09
238.89
234.74
229.52
220.84
212.73
206.02
194.70
185.86
181.21
176.45
170.73
156.48
150.88
146.07
140.96
133.29
126.14
122.50
115.85
97.83
87.12
65.48
58.38
50.52
42.61
30.19
20.84
15.51
11.41
7.34
5.39
3.76
1.23
Initial Branch Volume [VOLB] = 2111233.1 m^3

Branch 2 Volume-Area-Elevation Table
Layer
Elevation
(m)
Area
(1.0E6 m^2)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
251.17
250.56
249.95
249.34
248.73
248.12
247.51
246.90
246.29
245.68
245.07
244.46
243.85
243.24
242.63
1.253
1.224
1.202
1.179
1.155
1.133
1.104
1.082
1.046
1.014
0.987
0.957
0.926
0.834
0.778
C-399
Volume
Active Cells
(1.0E6 m^3)
13.852
13.088
12.341
11.608
10.889
10.185
9.493
8.819
8.159
7.521
6.902
6.300
5.716
5.151
4.643
270
260
250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
Average depth
(m)
11.1
10.7
10.3
9.8
9.4
9.0
8.6
8.2
7.8
7.4
7.0
6.6
6.2
6.2
6.0
Average width
(m)
166.71
162.83
159.89
156.87
153.75
150.82
146.96
143.99
139.25
134.98
131.38
127.41
123.22
110.92
103.53
OUTPUT FILES
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 KT
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
242.02
241.41
240.80
240.19
239.58
238.97
238.36
237.75
237.14
236.53
235.92
235.31
234.70
234.09
233.48
232.87
232.26
231.65
231.04
230.43
229.82
229.21
PREPROCESSOR
0.701
0.656
0.595
0.566
0.548
0.534
0.517
0.488
0.471
0.447
0.370
0.339
0.216
0.153
0.094
0.074
0.035
0.024
0.005
0.000
0.000
0.000
4.168
3.740
3.340
2.977
2.632
2.298
1.972
1.656
1.359
1.071
0.798
0.573
0.366
0.234
0.141
0.084
0.039
0.018
0.003
0.000
0.000
0.000
120
110
100
92
84
76
68
60
53
46
39
32
25
18
14
10
7
4
1
0
0
0
5.9
5.7
5.6
5.3
4.8
4.3
3.8
3.4
2.9
2.4
2.2
1.7
1.7
1.5
1.5
1.1
1.1
0.7
0.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
93.34
87.24
79.21
75.36
72.89
71.10
68.81
64.89
62.69
59.53
49.26
45.10
28.68
20.31
12.52
9.82
4.61
3.18
0.69
0.00
0.00
0.00
C-400
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
Waterbody 1 Bathymetry [B], m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 KT
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
C-401
2
19162
0.
23.
10.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
3
18000
0.
23.
14.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
4
16925
0.
59.
58.
56.
55.
52.
50.
33.
28.
26.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
5
15787
0.
169.
168.
166.
163.
148.
140.
133.
128.
93.
73.
36.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
6
14762
0.
169.
168.
166.
163.
148.
143.
140.
133.
131.
128.
93.
73.
36.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
7
13925
0.
169.
168.
166.
163.
148.
143.
140.
133.
131.
128.
123.
120.
119.
119.
116.
111.
101.
93.
73.
36.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
8
13100
0.
137.
134.
130.
126.
123.
122.
119.
116.
114.
111.
108.
98.
96.
94.
93.
91.
90.
88.
84.
40.
32.
30.
27.
16.
6.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
9
12337
0.
136.
131.
130.
126.
123.
120.
116.
113.
110.
105.
102.
98.
96.
94.
93.
81.
78.
73.
69.
67.
62.
52.
49.
43.
24.
23.
18.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
10
11400
0.
216.
213.
212.
204.
201.
198.
195.
192.
187.
183.
180.
175.
172.
171.
168.
98.
85.
75.
64.
53.
46.
43.
41.
37.
34.
30.
26.
20.
17.
15.
13.
10.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
11
10400
0.
216.
213.
212.
204.
201.
198.
195.
192.
187.
183.
180.
175.
172.
171.
168.
98.
85.
75.
64.
53.
46.
43.
41.
37.
34.
30.
26.
20.
17.
15.
13.
10.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
12
9410
0.
442.
402.
401.
393.
387.
381.
378.
332.
320.
314.
277.
259.
256.
250.
219.
189.
186.
180.
177.
174.
155.
152.
131.
125.
122.
37.
27.
18.
15.
12.
11.
9.
6.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
OUTPUT FILES
PREPROCESSOR
Finally, initial conditions for the water surface deviation, temperature, and constituent concentrations are output. The user should check these to ensure that the initial concentrations are correct,
particularly when using the vertical and/or longitudinal profile files to set initial conditions. Inactive
segments are output to ensure the user realizes that the initial water surface has caused upstream
segments to be subtracted. The example illustrates this.
C-402
PREPROCESSOR
OUTPUT FILES
EXAMPLE
Water Surface [Z],
2
-0.2700
3
-0.2700
4
-0.2700
5
-0.2700
6
-0.2700
7
-0.2700
8
-0.2700
9
-0.2700
10
-0.2700
11
-0.2700
12
-0.2700
13
-0.2700
8
5.500
5.500
5.500
5.400
9
5.500
5.500
5.500
5.400
5.400
5.500
10
5.500
5.500
5.500
5.400
5.400
5.500
5.400
5.300
5.300
5.400
5.300
11
5.500
5.500
5.500
5.400
5.400
5.500
5.400
5.300
5.300
5.400
5.300
12
5.500
5.500
5.500
5.400
5.400
5.500
5.400
5.300
5.300
5.400
5.300
5.200
13
5.500
5.500
5.500
5.400
5.400
5.500
5.400
5.300
5.300
5.400
5.300
5.200

2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C-403
OUTPUT FILES
PREPROCESSOR ERRORS
Warning Messages (pre.wrn)

The preprocessor does an extensive check of inputs in order to determine if inputs make sense.
For many cases, it is easy to determine if the input is valid or not. For these cases, information is
written to the error output file (pre.err) if the information is invalid. For instance, an algal growth
rate that is less than the respiration rate. However, because the model is so flexible, certain inputs
are not necessarily errors, but should be flagged so that the user can check to ensure that what they
have input is indeed what they mean to be doing. Additionally, when kinetic rates differ from valid
ranges or a specific value that should not normally be changed, a warning message is also generated.
For example, the preprocessor warns the user that certain active constituents are given a zero initial
concentration, are not included in branch inflows, or a number of other things that are okay to do,
but need to be checked to see if this is what the user really wants to do. This is entirely analogous
to a FORTRAN compiler that will issue warning and error messages. Warning messages are meant
to alert the user to potential problems. Error messages are meant to alert the user that they cannot
continue until the problem is fixed.
All warning messages include a concise statement in English showing what the problem is. Also
included is the FORTRAN variable name as it appears in the input file header along with its value
where appropriate. This is illustrated in the following example.
EXAMPLE
Epiphyton excretion rate [EE=0.000] < 0.001 for epiphyton group 1
Oxygen to algal respiration stoichiometry [O2AR=1.400] /= 1.1 for waterbody 1
Phosphorus/organic matter stoichiometry [ORGP=0.011] /= 0.005 for waterbody 1
Water surface elevation is below bottom elevation at segment 1
In the above example, the user is warned that the epiphyton excretion rate is less than the recommended minimum value. Likewise, the stoichiometric relationships are flagged as these should not
be changed from their default values unless the user has data that indicates a different stoichiometry. The remaining warning messages inform the user that part of the system is dry based on the
given initial water surface elevation.
A very important point the user should not assume that because there are no warnings generated
that there are no problems with inputs. It is not possible to check all possible combinations of
inputs, so there may be problems that were not flagged.
C-404
PREPROCESSOR WARNINGS
OUTPUT FILES
Error Messages (pre.err)

Input errors that will prevent the model from running correctly or running at all are extensively
screened and, when found, are included in the preprocessor error output file. All error messages
include a concise statement in English what the problem is along with the FORTRAN variable
name as it appears in the input file header and its input value where appropriate. This is illustrated
in the following example.
EXAMPLE
Starting time [TMSTRT=75.000] < ending time [TMEND=-320.000]
Timestep fraction [DLTF(1)=-0.850] <= 0.0
Internal gravity wave limitation control
[CELC= on] /= " ON" or "OFF" for waterbody 1
Heat exchange solution control [SLHTC= term] /= "
TERM" or "
ET" for waterbody 1
Vertical advection time weighting [THETA=-0.550] < 0.0 for waterbody 1
Selective withdrawal elevation [ESTR=137.700] < the bottom active cell elevation
C-405
OUTPUT FILES
SPREADSHEET
Spreadsheet Profile Plot

The spreadsheet profile output was designed to be easily imported into a spreadsheet program for
plotting vertical profiles of temperature, constituents, and derived constituents. Output consists of
the variable name, Julian date, depth below water surface, elevation, and temperature and/or concentrations for the output segment. Additional segments each contain a depth, elevation, and temperature/concentration colum and are continued to the right. Whenever a depth or vertical layer is
part of the channel bottom, a value of -99 is placed in the cell. Note that versions 3.5 and earlier
had a negative depth for ease of plotting, but most graphics packages allow for reversing the axis
and this was eliminated starting in V3.6.
EXAMPLE
Constituent
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Dissolved solids, g/m^3
Suspended solids1, g/m^3
Julian_day
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
75.703
Depth Elevation Seg_24

0.403
238.152
6.04
1.110
237.444
5.86
1.720
236.834
5.65
2.330
236.224
5.50
2.940
235.614
5.41
3.550
235.004
5.34
4.160
234.394
5.30
4.770
233.784
5.28
5.380
233.174
5.31
5.990
232.564
5.34
6.600
231.954
5.33
7.210
231.344
5.32
7.820
230.734
5.31
8.430
230.124
5.31
9.040
229.514
5.31
9.650
228.904
5.31
0.403
238.152 0.42E+02
1.110
237.444 0.42E+02
1.720
236.834 0.42E+02
2.330
236.224 0.42E+02
2.940
235.614 0.42E+02
3.550
235.004 0.42E+02
4.160
234.394 0.42E+02
4.770
233.784 0.42E+02
5.380
233.174 0.47E+02
5.990
232.564 0.56E+02
6.600
231.954 0.61E+02
7.210
231.344 0.62E+02
7.820
230.734 0.62E+02
8.430
230.124 0.62E+02
9.040
229.514 0.62E+02
9.650
228.904 0.62E+02
0.403
238.152 0.60E+00
1.110
237.444 0.76E+00
1.720
236.834 0.83E+00
2.330
236.224 0.86E+00
2.940
235.614 0.87E+00
3.550
235.004 0.88E+00
4.160
234.394 0.88E+00
4.770
233.784 0.86E+00
5.380
233.174 0.90E+00
5.990
232.564 0.14E+01
6.600
231.954 0.22E+01
7.210
231.344 0.28E+01
7.820
230.734 0.29E+01
8.430
230.124 0.30E+01
9.040
229.514 0.30E+01
9.650
228.904 0.30E+01
C-406
PROFILE PLOT
OUTPUT FILES
Profile Plot
The profile plot output file was originally developed to provide data for a plotting package from
Computer Associates called DISSPLA. This was a popular set of FORTRAN callable subroutines
developed back in the 1970s for visualizing scientific computing. The vertical temperature plots
with statistics presented in Chapter 3 were produced using a DISSPLA compatible software package developed for the PC. If the user should decide to develop their own plotting program, then
the following describes the information located in the profile plot output file.
As in most other output files, the card titles are included for identifying the run prior to plotting and
also for including information about the run on the plot.
Run 8
Model run at 13:18:39 on 07/23/02
The next line reports:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
maximum number of layers [KMX]

number of segments for which information is output [NIPRF]
total number of output dates [NDSP]
total number of constituents regardless of whether they are included in the simulations [NCT]
total number of derived constituents regardless of whether they are included in the
output [NDC]
pointer to the profile date currently in effect [PRFDP]
waterbody surface layer [KTWB]
logical variable that is T if constituents are simulated, otherwise F
39
17
23
12
23 T
The next line reports the segment(s) output [IPRF]:

18
24
The next three lines report which constituents are active:

ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF
Constituent and derived constituent names are included in the next 21 lines:
Temperature, C
Residence time, days
Phosphate, mg/m^3
C-407

Ammonium, mg/m^3
OUTPUT FILES
PROFILE PLOT
Nitrate nitrite, g/m^3

Dissolved silica, g/m^3
Particulate silica, g/m^3 Total Iron, g/m^3
Labile DOM, g/m^3
Refractory_DOM, g/m^3
Labile POM, g/m^3
Refractory POM, g/m^3
Algae, g/m^3
Dissolved oxygen, g/m^3
Inorganic carbon, g/m^3
Alkalinity, g/m^3
Total algae, g/m^3
Oxygen gas saturation, %
Total suspended solids, g/m^3
Total inorganic suspended solids,g/m^3
Total Kheldahl nitrogen, g/m^3
Carbonaceous ultimate BOD, g/m^3
pH
Carbon dioxide, g/m^3
Bicarbonate, g/m^3
Carbonate, g/m^3
The constituent and derived constituent numbers follow on the next line. Temperature is always
considered constituent 1 and derived constituents continue increasing from the last constituent
number.
1
11
12
13
15
16
The bottom active layer for each output segment is given on the next line.
36
38
Layer heights for layers 1 through the maximum [KMX] are output next.
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
Initial temperatures/constituent concentrations for each segment specified in the profile segment
card are then output. Initial temperatures/constituent concentrations are always output in case the
user wants to include these in their plot to show how much change has occurred over time. The
first line contains the constituent abbreviation and the number of values corresponding to the number of active layers output. The next line(s) contain the temperatures/concentrations for a given
segment.
TEMP
14
5.50
5.50
5.30
5.40
TEMP
16
5.50
5.50
5.30
5.40
TDS
14
0.400E+02 0.400E+02
0.700E+02 0.650E+02
TDS
16
0.400E+02 0.400E+02
0.700E+02 0.650E+02
ISS
14
0.100E+01 0.100E+01
0.100E+01 0.200E+01
ISS
16
0.100E+01 0.100E+01
0.100E+01 0.200E+01
5.50
5.30
5.40
5.20
5.40
5.20
5.50
5.20
5.40
5.30
5.50
5.30
5.40
5.20
5.40
5.20
5.50
5.20
5.40
5.20
5.30
5.20
0.400E+02 0.400E+02 0.450E+02 0.500E+02 0.550E+02 0.680E+02

0.600E+02 0.550E+02 0.500E+02 0.450E+02
0.400E+02 0.400E+02 0.450E+02 0.500E+02 0.550E+02 0.680E+02
0.600E+02 0.550E+02 0.500E+02 0.450E+02 0.400E+02 0.340E+02
0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01
0.200E+01 0.500E+01 0.500E+01 0.500E+01
0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01 0.100E+01
0.200E+01 0.500E+01 0.500E+01 0.500E+01 0.150E+02 0.300E+02
C-408
PROFILE PLOT
PO4
14
0.200E-01 0.200E-01
0.200E-01 0.200E-01
PO4
16
0.200E-01 0.200E-01
0.200E-01 0.200E-01
NH4
14
0.500E-01 0.500E-01
0.500E-01 0.500E-01
NH4
16
0.500E-01 0.500E-01
0.500E-01 0.500E-01
NO3
14
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
NO3
16
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
LDOM
14
0.675E+00 0.675E+00
0.675E+00 0.675E+00
LDOM
16
0.675E+00 0.675E+00
0.675E+00 0.675E+00
RDOM
14
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
RDOM
16
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
LPOM
14
0.750E+00 0.750E+00
0.750E+00 0.750E+00
LPOM
16
0.750E+00 0.750E+00
0.750E+00 0.750E+00
ALG1
14
0.650E+00 0.650E+00
0.650E+00 0.650E+00
ALG1
16
0.650E+00 0.650E+00
0.650E+00 0.650E+00
DO
14
0.108E+02 0.107E+02
0.109E+02 0.110E+02
DO
16
0.108E+02 0.107E+02
0.109E+02 0.110E+02
OUTPUT FILES
0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01

0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01
0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01
0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01 0.200E-01
0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01
0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01
0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01
0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01 0.500E-01
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00
0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00
0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00
0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00 0.675E+00
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00
0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00
0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00
0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00 0.750E+00
0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00
0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00
0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00
0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00 0.650E+00
0.107E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02
0.110E+02 0.110E+02 0.110E+02 0.110E+02
0.107E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02
0.110E+02 0.110E+02 0.110E+02 0.110E+02 0.110E+02 0.110E+02
The next output grouping consists of temperature/constituent concentrations output over time for
the dates and frequencies specified in the control file. The first line includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Julian date [JDAY]

Gregorian date [GDAY]
water surface layer number [KTWB]
deviation of the water surface [Z] from the top of the surface layer [KT]
how many dates information has been written to the file
The next line contains the abbreviated constituent name and the number of active layers at the
segment. This is also the number of values that have to be read in the following cards.
75.702 Mar 15, 1992
TEMP
14
C-409
23 -0.1950
OUTPUT FILES
5.81
5.64
5.32
5.32
TEMP
16
6.07
5.89
5.32
5.34
ISS
14
0.674E+00 0.850E+00
0.208E+01 0.225E+01
ISS
16
0.611E+00 0.771E+00
0.877E+00 0.130E+01
PO4
14
0.157E-01 0.171E-01
0.195E-01 0.196E-01
PO4
16
0.155E-01 0.166E-01
0.189E-01 0.181E-01
NH4
14
0.507E-01 0.507E-01
0.507E-01 0.506E-01
NH4
16
0.508E-01 0.508E-01
0.509E-01 0.510E-01
NO3
14
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
NO3
16
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00
LDOM
14
0.665E+00 0.666E+00
0.666E+00 0.666E+00
LDOM
16
0.664E+00 0.665E+00
0.665E+00 0.664E+00
RDOM
14
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.158E+01 0.158E+01
RDOM
16
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01
LPOM
14
0.641E+00 0.697E+00
0.743E+00 0.744E+00
LPOM
16
0.624E+00 0.683E+00
0.728E+00 0.736E+00
ALG1
14
0.615E+00 0.636E+00
0.650E+00 0.651E+00
ALG1
16
0.607E+00 0.630E+00
0.643E+00 0.645E+00
DO
14
0.110E+02 0.109E+02
0.109E+02 0.109E+02
DO
16
0.110E+02 0.109E+02
0.108E+02 0.109E+02
PROFILE PLOT
5.48
5.32
5.41
5.32
5.37
5.32
5.35
5.32
5.34
5.33
5.67
5.32
5.52
5.32
5.41
5.31
5.34
5.31
5.30
5.31
5.29
5.31
0.991E+00 0.116E+01 0.136E+01 0.148E+01 0.166E+01 0.191E+01

0.239E+01 0.250E+01 0.255E+01 0.255E+01
0.841E+00 0.873E+00 0.888E+00 0.893E+00 0.891E+00 0.870E+00
0.217E+01 0.279E+01 0.296E+01 0.307E+01 0.307E+01 0.307E+01
0.182E-01 0.186E-01 0.188E-01 0.189E-01 0.191E-01 0.193E-01
0.197E-01 0.198E-01 0.198E-01 0.198E-01
0.177E-01 0.182E-01 0.185E-01 0.187E-01 0.189E-01 0.191E-01
0.185E-01 0.193E-01 0.196E-01 0.199E-01 0.199E-01 0.199E-01
0.507E-01 0.507E-01 0.507E-01 0.507E-01 0.507E-01 0.507E-01
0.506E-01 0.505E-01 0.503E-01 0.503E-01
0.508E-01 0.508E-01 0.508E-01 0.508E-01 0.509E-01 0.509E-01
0.510E-01 0.510E-01 0.510E-01 0.510E-01 0.510E-01 0.510E-01
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00 0.200E+00
0.666E+00 0.666E+00 0.666E+00 0.666E+00 0.666E+00 0.666E+00
0.667E+00 0.667E+00 0.668E+00 0.668E+00
0.665E+00 0.665E+00 0.665E+00 0.665E+00 0.665E+00 0.665E+00
0.664E+00 0.664E+00 0.664E+00 0.664E+00 0.664E+00 0.664E+00
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.158E+01 0.158E+01 0.158E+01
0.158E+01 0.158E+01 0.158E+01 0.158E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01 0.157E+01
0.717E+00 0.727E+00 0.732E+00 0.734E+00 0.739E+00 0.742E+00
0.745E+00 0.746E+00 0.747E+00 0.747E+00
0.703E+00 0.711E+00 0.715E+00 0.718E+00 0.719E+00 0.721E+00
0.742E+00 0.743E+00 0.743E+00 0.743E+00 0.743E+00 0.743E+00
0.643E+00 0.646E+00 0.647E+00 0.648E+00 0.649E+00 0.650E+00
0.652E+00 0.653E+00 0.655E+00 0.655E+00
0.637E+00 0.639E+00 0.640E+00 0.641E+00 0.641E+00 0.641E+00
0.646E+00 0.646E+00 0.646E+00 0.646E+00 0.646E+00 0.646E+00
0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02
0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02
0.109E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02 0.108E+02
0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02 0.109E+02
C-410
CONTOUR PLOT
OUTPUT FILES
Vector Plot
The vector plot output writes a binary file that is used by the W2_POST post-processor developed
by DSI, Inc.
Contour Plot
As in the profile and vector plot output, this output was originally included for developing
DISSPLA contour plots of model output using FORTRAN callable subroutines. The information
is sufficient to develop contour plots of temperatures and constituents. Output consists initially of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
title cards
number of branches [NBR]
grid dimensions [KMX] and [IMX]
branch upstream and downstream segments [US] and [DS]
segment length [DLX]
layer heights [H]
number of active constituents
active constituent names
Each title card takes up a separate line in the output and each of the remaing item number is output
on a single line. The user should refer to the code for the actual format of the output. The preceeding information is time invariant and is used to set up the plotting grid. During simulations, the
following information is output:
1.
3.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Julian date [JDAY] and Gregorian date [GDAY]

water surface layer [KTWB]
tributary inflows [QTR]
tributary inflow temperatures [TTR]
tributary inflow concentrations for each active constituent [CTR]
current upstream segment [CUS]
branch inflow [QIN] and the sum of the branch inflow [QSUM]
interfacial area (width times height) [BHRKT1] for all active segments in the surface
layer [KT]
9. interfacial area [BHR] for all remaining active computational cells
10. horizontal velocities [U]
11. flows [QC]
12. water surface deviations [Z]
13. temperatures
14. constituent concentrations
Currently, the user must develop their own plotting program to use this feature, which will normally
require getting under the hood of the model to customize model output.
When the TECPLOT option is ON, the output consists of elevation (m), longitudinal distance
C-411
OUTPUT FILES
CONTOUR PLOT
(m), U, W, T, RHO, Fish Habitat# (see below), and all active constituents for the entire grid at the
time interval specified in CPL FREQ. For those users of TECPLOT, TECPLOT can read the file
directly and the user can create contour animations of any of the variables including superimposed
vector plots.
The Fish Habitat # is the fish criterion that is satisfied at that grid point (K,I). For example, consider
defining fish criteria in the order of more restrictive to least restrictive. Consider 3 fish criteria
defined as follows (See Fish Habitat input file):
OptimalFishX,12.0,18.0,5.0
SuboptimalFishX,10.0,22.0,5.0
NonOptimalFishX(Lethal),0.0,35.0,4.0
where the first 2 numbers are the lower and higher temperature criteria and the last number is the
minimum dissolved oxygen level.
The first fish is given a #1, second fish #2, and 3rd fish group #3. In the Tecplot output for each grid
point, the fish habitat criteria 1, 2, 3, or 100 (if outside the last range) is written to the Tecplot
output file. You can then produce a dynamic movie of habitat areas that are optimal (1), suboptimal
(2), not optimal perhaps lethal (3 to 100). An example is shown below for 5 criteria ranked from
most favorable to least favorable.
C-412
CONTOUR PLOT
OUTPUT FILES
The steps to making a useful contour animation in TECPLOT are as follows:

1. Import data (cpl.opt) file into Tecplot using the Tecplot Data Loader
2. Turn ON contours
3. Reset axes so that they are Independent (Tecplot default is dependent)
4. Turn on Value Blanking since any state variables outside the domain are set to -99. Set
value blanking for temperature to any value less than 0.0.
5. Reset the contour intervals since Tecplot automatically uses the -99 as its minimum data
value.
6. One can now go to the animation and view the zones (the model output frequency or time
of output) to view the movie on screen or sent to an AVI or RM file.
7. Adding vectors is also easy. Turn on vectors and choose U and W as the vector variables.
You will have to adjust the arrowhead size and length of the vector until the arrows appear
correctly.
C-413
OUTPUT FILES
KINETIC FLUXES
Kinetic Fluxes
The ability to compute kinetic fluxes was introduced first in Version 3.2. Two types of output are
available. The first is similar to snapshot output and is specified by setting the kinetic flux control
variable [KFLC] to ASCII. The segments that are output are currently controlled by the snapshot
segments in the control file that are specified for output. The user must then develop a method for
plotting up the output in whatever format they decide upon.
The other option for output is a binary format specified as BINARY for the kinetic flux control
variable [KFLC]. The only information currently output using this option is the entire kinetic
source/sink flux array.
In addition another output file named internally in the model as KFLUX_JW#.OPT where # is
the waterbody number is output for each waterbody. This sums up all the kinetic fluxes for all
active cells at the frequency specified for the kinetic flux file (FLX FREQ). Output format is JDAY,
ELTM (elapsed time over which fluxes are summed in days), each active kinetic flux term in
kg/day. Example output is shown below.
Example file output (fluxes are in units of kg/day):
JDAY, ELTM,
PO4AR,
PO4AG,
1.002,
0.002, 0.1262E+04,
1.500,
0.498, 0.1212E+04,
2.000,
0.500, 0.1299E+04,
2.500,
0.500, 0.1267E+04,
3.000,
0.500, 0.1355E+04,
PO4AP,
PO4ER,
PO4EG,
0.0000E+00, 0.1262E+04,
0.1137E+04, 0.7486E+02,
0.1720E+04, -0.4210E+03,
0.1291E+04, -0.2459E+02,
0.1966E+04, -0.6102E+03,
PO4EP,
0.0000E+00,
0.1264E+04,
0.1349E+04,
0.1308E+04,
0.1387E+04,
0.0000E+00,
0.4886E+03,
0.7735E+03,
0.5881E+03,
0.9324E+03,
0.0000E+00,
0.7750E+03,
0.5759E+03,
0.7200E+03,
0.4550E+03,
Hence, the fluxes at JDAY=3.0 above represent the sum of all fluxes between JD 2.5 and JD 3.0
over the ELTM of 0.5 days.
Below is an example of the kinetic flux output in ASCII with a format similar to that of the SNP
file.
Note also that the TSR file includes flux output on an instantaneous basis at a given cell location.
C-414
KINETIC FLUXES
OUTPUT FILES

Run 8
Model run at 15:09:49 on 12/04/01
March 15, 1992
2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C-415
Julian Date = 75 days 16.86 hours

3
DO algal production
7
8
0.232E-02
0.296E-02
0.195E-02
0.509E-03
9
0.164E-01
0.237E-01
0.297E-01
0.220E-01
0.259E-01
0.201E-01
- source, kg/day
10
0.558
0.375
0.316
0.267
0.218
0.159
0.944E-01
0.569E-01
0.746E-01
0.652E-01
0.431E-01
11
1.34
0.980
0.898
0.821
0.702
0.489
0.270
0.160
0.965E-01
0.583E-01
0.318E-01
12
7.22
4.52
4.21
3.82
1.01
0.567
0.258
0.144
0.770E-01
0.449E-01
0.254E-01
0.113E-01
13
8.22
4.99
4.38
3.85
1.00
0.543
0.247
0.138
0.744E-01
0.434E-01
0.246E-01
0.139E-01
OUTPUT FILES
WITHDRAWAL OUTFLOW
Withdrawal Outflow
Withdrawal outflow files contain information for plotting any release or withdrawal temperatures
and/or constituent concentrations as a time series. The files can also be used to externally link
upstream waterbodies to downstream waterbodies so that waterbasins can be broken up into multiple waterbodies. This is an important feature when runtimes for the entire waterbasin become
excessive. With this option, calibration can start at the most upstream waterbody and proceed sequentially downstream.
Output consists of up to four separate files for each segment [IWDO] specified in the control file.
The files include an outflow, outflow temperature, constituent concentrations, and derived constituent concentrations. These files are for all the withdrawals specified at that segment lumped together if there are multiple withdrawals. The constituent concentration outflow file is only generated if constituent computations [CCC] are turned on. The derived constituent concentration outflow file is generated only if constituent computations [CCC] are turned on and one or more derived
constituents [CDWBC] are turned on.
In addition, for the flow and temperature files, individual flows and outlet temperatures are provided to the right of the weighted average (temperature) or summed flow.
Also, whenever withdrawal output is ON (see in w2_con.npt file), a series of individual files are
also output for each structure at the withdrawal segment. For example, if there are 2 spillways
(weirs), 1 gate and 1 pump, all these withdrawal types are automatically output individually as
separate files. They would be output with a fixed internally specified file name based on the hydraulic element and the segment number where it is located, such as: qwo_sp1_seg23.opt,
qwo_sp2_seg23.opt, qwo_gt1_seg23.opt, and qwo_pmp1_seg23.opt. For further information, see
the withdrawal output card description in w2_con.npt.
EXAMPLE
Flow file for segment 16
To the right of the sum of flows are individual flows starting with QWD then QSTR
JDAY
QWD
1.002
14.84
0.40
0.00
7.22
7.22
1.200
14.88
0.40
0.00
7.24
7.24
1.400
14.92
0.40
0.00
7.26
7.26
1.600
14.96
0.40
0.00
7.28
7.28
Temperature file for segment 16
To the right of the sum of temperatures are
then QSTR
JDAY
T
1.002
5.00
5.00
0.00
1.200
4.98
4.98
0.00
1.400
4.96
4.96
0.00
1.600
5.00
4.96
0.00
individual temperatures starting with QWD

5.00
4.98
4.96
4.99
5.00
4.98
4.96
5.02
LDOM
.665
.663
.662
.660
RDOM
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
Concentration file for segment 24

JDAY
75.706
75.804
75.902
76.000
AGE
PO4
NH4
.696.201E-01.509E-01
.793.202E-01.510E-01
.890.202E-01.511E-01
.987.202E-01.512E-01
NO3
.200
.200
.200
.200
LPOM
.708
.699
.693
.687
ALG1
.638
.634
.632
.630
DO
46.6
46.0
45.6
45.2
C-416
WITHDRAWAL OUTFLOW
76.102
76.201
76.300
76.402
76.500
76.604
76.703
76.806
76.902
77.000
77.102
77.201
77.300
77.400
77.500
77.606
77.702
77.804
77.902
78.000
1.09.202E-01.513E-01
1.18.202E-01.514E-01
1.29.203E-01.515E-01
1.39.203E-01.516E-01
1.48.203E-01.517E-01
1.59.203E-01.518E-01
1.69.203E-01.519E-01
1.79.204E-01.520E-01
1.89.204E-01.521E-01
1.99.204E-01.522E-01
2.08.204E-01.523E-01
2.18.204E-01.524E-01
2.28.205E-01.525E-01
2.38.205E-01.525E-01
2.48.205E-01.526E-01
2.59.205E-01.527E-01
2.68.205E-01.528E-01
2.78.206E-01.529E-01
2.88.206E-01.530E-01
2.98.206E-01.531E-01
OUTPUT FILES
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.201
.202
.202
.202
.659
.657
.656
.655
.653
.652
.651
.649
.648
.647
.645
.644
.642
.641
.639
.638
.637
.635
.634
.632
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
1.57
.681
.676
.671
.665
.661
.658
.655
.652
.649
.644
.637
.630
.623
.616
.610
.604
.599
.595
.592
.590
.628
.626
.624
.623
.622
.622
.621
.621
.619
.618
.616
.613
.610
.608
.607
.605
.604
.602
.601
.600
44.8
44.5
44.1
43.8
43.5
43.2
43.0
42.8
42.5
42.1
41.7
41.3
40.9
40.5
40.1
39.7
39.3
39.0
38.8
38.6
Flow Balance Output File

When a Volume_Balance is turned ON, the model outputs a summary of the flow balance for each
waterbody based on the output interval for CPL output. If CPL output is turned OFF or VolumeBalance is OFF, then no file will be written. The file name is flowbal.opt.This file is useful in
looking at waterbody overall flows. The output file consists of the following information: Julian
day, water body #, inflow volume to waterbody from Qin files in m3, inflow volume from precipitation in m3, outflow volume from outlet structures in m3, output volume from withdrawals in m3,
output volume from evaporation in m3, input volume from distributed tributaries in m3, and input
volume from tributaries in m3. The volumes between Julian days are cumulative, not instantaneous,
and are negative for an outflow and positive for an inflow.
JDAY,WB,VOLIN(m3),volpr(m3),volout(m3),volwd,volev,voldt,voltrb
1.000,
2, 0.19865109E+02,
0.00000000E+00, -0.59570259E+04,
0.33811097E+01,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
1.500,
2, 0.24879558E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.22578373E+07,
0.20572546E+04,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
2.000,
2, 0.39475582E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.28715176E+07,
0.33273747E+04,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
2.499,
2, 0.52130494E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.31609006E+07,
0.37733181E+04,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
3.000,
2, 0.64398975E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.33504191E+07,
0.55960240E+04,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
3.499,
2, 0.75950533E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.34985829E+07,
0.81305637E+04,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
3.999,
2, 0.86359619E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.36242731E+07,
0.10630815E+05,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
4.499,
2, 0.96960288E+06,
0.00000000E+00, -0.37364633E+07,
0.13662457E+05,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
5.000,
2, 0.10590140E+07,
0.00000000E+00, -0.38389353E+07,
0.17216834E+05,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
5.500,
2, 0.11696562E+07,
0.00000000E+00, -0.39345726E+07,
0.20477682E+05,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
C-417
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
0.00000000E+00,
OUTPUT FILES
WITHDRAWAL OUTFLOW
Water Level Output File

A convenient file for plotting water level variations as a function of time and space is written out
if the TIME_SERIES is ON. The water level at every model segment is written rather than those
specified in the TIME_SERIES output. The output file name is wl.opt. The file consists of Julian
day followed by the water surface elevation at each model segment in m.
JDAY,SEG
2,SEG
3,SEG
4,SEG
5,SEG
6,SEG
7,SEG
8,SEG
9,SEG 10,SEG 11,SEG
12,SEG 13,SEG 14,SEG 15,SEG 16,SEG 17,SEG 18,SEG 19,SEG 20,SEG 21,SEG 22,SEG
56,SEG
57,SEG
58,SEG
59,SEG
60,SEG
61,SEG
62,SEG
63,SEG
64,SEG
65,SEG
1.001,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.703,1484.701,1484.700,14
84.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.699,1484.698,1484.696,1484.691,1484.691,1
480.000,1480.044,1480.022,1480.019,1480.019,1480.000,1480.043,1480.036,1480.034,1480.034,
1480.000,1480.009,1480.006,1480.005,1480.005,1480.000,1480.008,1480.005,1480.004,1480.004
,1473.700,1473.701,1473.700,1473.700,1473.700,1470.900,1470.900,1470.900,1470.900,1470.90
0,1470.900,1466.500,1466.500,1466.500,1466.500,1466.500,1464.500,1464.500,1464.500,1464.5
00,1464.500,1464.000,1464.000,1464.000,1464.000,
1.150,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.700,1484.320,1484.319,1484.319,14
84.319,1484.700,1484.317,1484.317,1484.317,1484.317,1484.317,1484.317,1484.317,1484.317,1
480.000,1480.658,1480.658,1480.658,1480.658,1480.000,1480.644,1480.644,1480.644,1480.644,
1480.000,1480.614,1480.614,1480.614,1480.614,1480.000,1480.591,1480.591,1480.591,1480.591
,1473.700,1474.226,1474.226,1474.226,1474.226,1470.900,1470.900,1470.900,1470.900,1470.90
0,1470.900,1466.500,1466.500,1466.500,1466.500,1466.500,1464.500,1464.500,1464.500,1464.5
00,1464.500,1464.000,1464.000,1464.000,1464.000,
C-418
RUN-TIME WARNINGS
OUTPUT FILES
Run-time Warnings
The model generates the following run-time warnings that can be useful when setting up the model.
These are output to the file: w2.wrn.
1. Water surface is above the top of layer 2 in segment 'x' at day 'y
This message is output to inform the user that the water surface elevation has gone above the top
of the computational grid. This may be okay or it might indicate that additional layers need to be
added to the grid so that the surface layer does not become inappropriately thick. This is a common
message when first calibrating the water surface in a reservoir if either the inflows are overestimated or the outflows are underestimated. An application of the model to Lake Roosevelt did not
include water pumped to another reservoir and the water surface ended up 70 m above the top of
the grid.
2. Computational warning at Julian day = x,' at segment y timestep = 'z
water surface deviation [Z] = x' m layer thickness = y m
This message indicates that the water surface elevation solution is starting to go unstable and is
generally a result of velocities approaching supercritical values. What is happening is that from
one timestep to the next, the water surface elevation has gone from residing in layer [KT] to layer
[KT]+1, which causes a negative surface layer thickness (Figure C-4). The surface layer thickness,
HKT1, is the layer thickness, H, minus the water surface deviation, z, from the top layer [KT]. As
can be seen, this is negative when the solution begins to go unstable.
HKT1 = H-z
layer KT
z
HKT1 = H-z > 0
layer KT+1
Figure C-4. Diagram illustrating unstable water surface elevation solution.
C-419
OUTPUT FILES
RUN-TIME WARNINGS
Normally, when the water surface elevation approaches the bottom of layer [KT], the model would
subtract a layer thus allowing the water surface level to decline smoothly over time. However, if
the water surface elevation jumps below the bottom of layer [KT] in one timestep, the layer subtraction algorithm does not have a chance to adjust the water surface layer before solving for the
velocities.
The model attempts to recover from the instability by decreasing the timestep by 90% and recomputing the water surface elevation. If the current timestep is greater than the minimum timestep
[DLTMIN], then the following warning message is then generated.
3. Unstable water surface elevation on day 'x,
negative surface layer thickness using minimum timestep at iteration 'y
If the current timestep is less than or equal to the minimum timestep [DLTMIN], then an error message is output and the run is stopped. However, all is not lost. Based on the Julian date in the
warning messages, the user can reduce the maximum timestep [DLTMAX] and/or the fraction of the
timestep [DLTF] just prior to the instability and then increase back to the original value(s) sometime
later in the simulation. Oftentimes, this allows the model to get through the time period that was
generating the instability. This may need to be done for several time periods during the simulation
in order to get the model to run to completion, especially for river applications.
If the instability is occurring during high inflow periods, the user also has the option of spreading
inflows out over a greater time period in order to reduce the maximum velocities. Care must be
taken to ensure that the total inflows remain the same, especially if inflow interpolation [QINIC] is
turned on. Likewise, velocities can also be reduced through adjustments to the bathymetry such as
making cells wider. If inflows are placed according to density [PQINC] and/or [PQTRC], velocities
can also be reduced by using the distribute evenly from top to bottom option. Still another option
is to increase the minimum number of layers [NLMIN] for a segment to remain active. This has a
similar action as distributing the inflow evenly from top to bottom in that it provides more layers
for the inflow to be distributed over thus reducing velocities.
Problems in model setup can also generate these warning messages. For instance, if an external
head boundary condition is inadvertently set way off from the starting water surface elevation (or
vice versa), then large velocities can be generated that result in a water surface instability. Extremely small widths (<1 m) can also cause the same problems.
4. Low water in segment 'x' water surface deviation =y at day 'z
This warning message is to alert the user that water is drying up in a segment with only one active
layer. This may mean that more friction is required to hold back water in downstream segments or
the segment in question, or that segments upstream may need to have less friction.
5. Computational warning at Julian day = x
spatial change ='x' m^3 temporal change =y' m^3 volume error =z' m^3
This message is to let the user now that the volume error is more than 1000 m3. This should not
normally happen unless the user has incorrectly modified the code or the water surface elevation
solution has become unstable. The message is more informational and does not require the user to
do anything as the volume error is arbitrarily set to 1000 m3.
C-420
RUN-TIME ERRORS
OUTPUT FILES
Run-time Errors
The model generates the following run-time error messages and outputs them to the file: w2.err
1. Unstable water surface elevation on day x negative surface layer thickness using minimum
timestep at iteration 'y
As discussed in the RUN-TIME WARNINGS section, this error message is generated by an unstable
water surface elevation solution. Refer to that section on methods for eliminating the instability.
Additional information is output to the error message file and includes the segment number, the
water surface elevation at that segment, the bottom elevation of that segment, and the elevation
difference for all segments in the offending branch.
2. Fatal error - Insufficient segments in branch 'x' Julian day = 'y' water surface layer = 'z
Currently in the model, if the number of segments in a branch becomes less than two due to drying
out and subsequent subtraction of upstream segments from the active computational grid, then the
model issues this error message and terminates. The reason why is that there must be at least two
active segments in a branch for many of the computations to proceed. This error is most common
in reservoir simulations. Future plans include bypassing this limitation so that the model runs using
only active branches. However, this will involve major coding changes and will take some time to
implement.
If this occurs during water surface calibration due to insufficient inflows or excessive outflows,
then adjust the flows so that either more water comes in or less water flows out. The user will have
to decide the appropriate inflow/outflow to adjust. If this problem occurs with a correct water
balance, then one option is to remove the branch from the computational grid and include the branch
inflows as a tributary. The missing branch volume should then be evenly distributed throughout
the active computational grid cells to ensure that the project volume is conserved.
Another workaround is to add additional depth to the bottom of the branch so that water levels can
drop without segments being subtracted. Similarly, the number of active layers required to prevent
segment subtraction [NLMIN] can be set to one if it is not already set to that value, which may
prevent the branch from going dry.
When the model goes unstable and stops running the code generates 2 files: w2.err and w2errordump.opt. The first file was described above. The w2errordump.opt file contains output of several
important variables that allow an expert model user to discern what may have led the code to crash.
Examples are shown below for each file.
An example of the w2.err file is shown below:
Unstable water surface elevation on day 3.389
negative surface layer thickness using minimum timestep at iteration 1631
Segment, Surface layer thickness, m, Flow m3/s, U(KT,I) m/s, ELWS, m
36
0.00
0.00
-8051.41
422.10
An example of the output in w2errordump.opt is shown below. The variable name is followed by
a dump of the model output at the time of the crash. For multiple values they are varied by segment
and are for the kt layer.
C-421
OUTPUT FILES
RUN-TIME ERRORS
JDAY
3.38935526453256
SZ 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
1.00943247708294
1.00943247708294
1.00943247708294
Z 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
1.01215452147964
1.01215452147964
1.01215452147964
H2KT
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
5.675229170643004E-004
5.675229170643004E-004 H1KT
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
1.01000000000000
-2.154521479644123E-003
-2.154521479644123E-003 -2.154521479644123E-003 BHR1
5.05000000000000
5.05000000000000
46.0260576852866
78.1235000000000
65.5490000000000
53.6826956562267
69.5385000000000
67.1650000000000
37.9792386278896
27.5225000000000
36.7640000000000
26.9647404921700
25.0985000000000
46.1065000000000
50.9040000000000
49.2375000000000
56.8630000000000
37.1680000000000
25.3510000000000
46.8640000000000
45.6520000000000
40.4000000000000
60.8020000000000
45.2985000000000
19.1900000000000
24.7955000000000
31.3100000000000
45.9045000000000
47.9750000000000
39.1880000000000
33.9360000000000
36.1580000000000
49.4955132033218
50.5000000000000
44.7914903445754
-0.211143105005124
-0.211143105005124
BHR2
5.05000000000000
5.05000000000000
46.0260576852866
78.1235000000000
65.5490000000000
53.6826956562267
69.5385000000000
67.1650000000000
37.9792386278896
27.5225000000000
36.7640000000000
26.9647404921700
25.0985000000000
46.1065000000000
50.9040000000000
49.2375000000000
56.8630000000000
37.1680000000000
25.3510000000000
46.8640000000000
45.6520000000000
40.4000000000000
60.8020000000000
45.2985000000000
19.1900000000000
24.7955000000000
31.3100000000000
C-422
RUN-TIME ERRORS
OUTPUT FILES
45.9045000000000
47.9750000000000
39.1880000000000
33.9360000000000
36.1580000000000
49.4955132033218
50.5000000000000
71.9625000000000
5.561724587230144E-002
5.561724587230144E-002 WSE
467.990000000000
466.886672274644
465.508861813954
463.142218988795
462.717484437475
460.874372102596
460.634236096516
460.371364969985
460.068702844745
458.020571929609
457.218546276270
454.283697957390
452.505813361420
451.726590878796
451.071241962207
449.248691559332
448.973189826952
448.692533969678
447.772769879228
445.716201153582
444.737791733543
443.385301484047
442.633230509811
441.597240756372
438.649776656227
438.064751594268
437.842398638077
437.601546123985
437.408084817067
437.109978174508
432.945369861279
431.304964966546
430.189159286964
430.004661006036
429.538713430788
422.097845478520
422.097845478520
Q
199.870839284651
159.853482130329
201.097702709673
3.63203157451750
202.849924370198
40.6262133709642
22.8719739285942
13.6415141847033
200.869789008237
117.370773624568
201.187139217859
196.137212867973
115.271049322332
72.8310680593209
193.646643882918
17.6952323473734
76.0409850594163
195.206714834297
0.220790991083445
-14.9565895642295
195.256813963361
12.2761382160619
49.9769281688138
195.259327046144
195.269916681707
228.619258675024
247.633507195433
265.661990409655
248.283721754631
195.295269800603
195.307964131117
195.314766823114
304.273872288055
389.448805518010
195.316161843892
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 QC
199.870839284651
207.101525544364
201.097702709673
229.064434216007
202.849924370198
213.520758167623
204.240852793191
186.023144681747
200.869789008237
206.874428686342
201.187139217859
196.137212867973
222.797440063189
237.265602797882
193.646643882918
226.239635981242
248.910445970792
195.206714834297
-193.652764841298
-147.572749891113
195.256813963361
372.235931999459
425.400742083725
195.259327046144
195.269916681707
229.497878420244
248.231883645532
265.125764483258
246.197816999610
195.295269800603
195.307964131117
195.314766823114
424.907969176856
658.443829898457
195.316161843892
0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 QERR 0.000000000000000E+000 -29.5570936487410
-609.487541293265
-6206.78532155762
-11148.3900613255
-425.573860940305
-792.974316212615
-1263.65466591928
-5017.14407660376
-76.2571910346849
-1559.28692857534
-6899.13157123207
-93.2813498037848
-225.775262014047
-1028.72205003378
-1178.53441842387
-227.337219232892
-693.280846914078
87808.6351626135
-886.673795235050
-1222.97168370543
-2932.19078710300
-751.194256371244
-1580.29543849260
-231.642284069471
-0.384315717893658
-0.241637917613005
0.201845181378809
0.840129485847966
29.8051401645968
-621.090464013086
-65.1482195001153
-39.6465513064484
-69.0707021228771
-286.769711286822
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 T1 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
4.11106447354674
322.297661880519
322.297661880519
T2
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
C-423
OUTPUT FILES
RUN-TIME ERRORS
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000

0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000
4.11106447354674
322.297661880519
322.297661880519
SUKT 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
30566.0586628695
0.000000000000000E+000 UKT 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000 0.000000000000000E+000
4.36056403440362
-8051.41138735619
0.000000000000000E+000 QIN
195.316161843892
QTR
15.5510000000000
QWD
Command-line working directory specification for w2

windows executable
In the windows version of the w2 model, the user can supply a command line argument that sets
the working directory of the code. Hence, one does not need to copy the model executable into
every directory. In a batch file, for example, one can execute the following command:
W2_ivf.exe "C:\scott\w2workshop\2009 workshop\waterqual\problem3"
The w2 code now uses the supplied directory (in double quotes) as the working directory for all the
files. The command line argument has one blank space between the end of the executable and the
first quote. The working directory is displayed in the text box of the window.
C-424

Manual de Usuario CE-QUAL-W2

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual de Usuario CE-QUAL-W2

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CE-QUAL-W2: A Two-Dimensional,

Laterally Averaged, Hydrodynamic

Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Prepared for U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

Model Release Package

Typical Input Files

control file for each application

A subset of the following input files comes with each application:

Compiler Options and Questions

Terminology used in the CE-QUAL-W2 model

Waterbodies: a collection of model branches that have similar turbulence

2 Capabilities and Limitations

Chapter 2 Capabilities and Limita-

A detailed discussion of these data follows.

Chapter 3 Model Application

longitudinal spacing (segment length)

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Chapter 3 Model Application

DHS=-1 externa l hea d

Waterbody 1: Reservoir including Branches 1 and 2

Waterbody 2: Estuary below reservoir including Branches 3 and 4

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

total organic carbon

dissolved and/or particulate organic carbon

soluble reactive phosphorous

total dissolved phosphorus

total Kjeldahl nitrogen

total suspended solids 3

Chapter 3 Model Application

total dissolved solids 1

phytoplankton biomass and type

dissolved and/or particulate organic carbon

Soluble reactive phosphorus

total dissolved phosphorus

nitrate + nitrite nitrogen

total Kjeldahl nitrogen

secchi depth/light transmission

total inorganic carbon

total suspended solids 3

enough samples to correlate to conductivity - important for density effects

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Total dissolved solids (or salinity)

Dissolved inorganic phosphorus

Total inorganic carbon

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Fall algal bloom

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Chapter 3 Model Application

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Chapter 3 Model Application

Water Surface Elevation, m

Chapter 3 Model Applica-

Longitudinal eddy viscosity

Longitudinal eddy diffusivity

Chezy coefficient or Mannings N

Wind sheltering coefficient

Solar radiation absorbed in surface layer

Extinction coefficient for pure water

Extinction coefficient for inorganic solids

Extinction coefficient for organic solids

Chapter 3 Model Application

Figure 4. 1989 Pineflat Reservoir computed versus observed temperatures.